A QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
THE NATURAL
HISTORY MUSEUM
-1 MAY 1995
PURCHASED
GENERAL LIBRARY
Yorkshire Mayflies — Leslie Magee
Otters ( Lutra lutra L.) as Scavengers: an Experiment
— Ray Hew son
Aculeate Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Blaxton
Common in Watsonian Yorkshire with the Introduction of a
New National Quality Scoring System — Michael E. Archer
Some Records of Feather Mites (Acari: Astigmata) in Yorkshire
— Barry Nattress
A Sub-fossil Record of Pomatis elegans (Muller), a Mollusc
Previously Unrecorded in the East Riding of Yorkshire
— R. Middleton and B. R. Kirk
Vertigo geyeri (Lindholm 1925), a Snail New to Yorkshire
— David J. Lindley
Road Verge Halophytes in S. E. Yorkshire — Peter J. Cook
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union
Editor M. R. D. Seaward, MSc. PhD. DSc. FLS. The University, Bradford BD7 1DP
Notice to Contributors to “The Naturalist’
Manuscripts (two copies if possible), typed double-spaced on one side of the paper only
with margins at top and left-hand at least 2.5cm wide, should be submitted. Latin names of
genera and species, but nothing else, should be underlined. S.I. Units should be used
wherever possible. Authors must ensure that their references are accurately cited, and that
the titles of the journals are correctly abbreviated. Volumes of The Naturalist for the years
1886 to 1975 have been retrospectively numbered 11 to 100 to accord with numbering
before and after this period (see YNU Bulletin no. 3, pp. 21-22 1985); please cite these
volume numbers in all references. Table and text-figures should be prepared on separate
sheets of paper. Drawings and graphs, drawn about twice the linear size they are to appear,
should be in jet-black Indian ink, and legends should not be written on the figures.
Publishable manuscripts not conforming to the above requirements will be returned
for alteration.
Photographic Plates
Readers of The Naturalist will have noticed that the number of photographic illustrations
has increased in recent years. Good clear photographs, suitably captioned, to accompany
articles or as independent features are always welcome.
To encourage this development, a long-standing member of the YNU, who wishes to
remain anonymous, has most generously offered to make a donation, the income from
which would finance the publication of a plate or equivalent illustration in future issues
whenever possible. The editor, on behalf of the YNU, wishes to record this deep
appreciation of this imaginative gesture.
©Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union — 1995
Single Copies may be made of single articles in this journal provided that due acknow-
ledgement is made and the copies are for non-profit making educational or private use.
Copying of more than one article or multiple copying of a single article is forbidden unless
special permission has been obtained from the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union. Permission is
granted for the use of brief quotations in published work provided that acknowledgement
of the source is clearly stated, but the use of substantial sections of text and any illustrative
matter requires the express permission of the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union.
All matters other than subscriptions should be addressed to:
Mr John A. Newbould, Tapton House 30 Moorlands, Wickersley
Rotherham S66 OAT
Items which should be sent to the above include: All membership applications, changes
of address, resignations and problems concerning non-receipt of any of the YNU’s
publications. Please quote the membership number printed underneath your address on all
correspondence.
Subscriptions (unless covered by Banker’s Order) should continue to be sent to:
Mr Derek Allen, c/o Doncaster Museum, Chequer Road
Doncaster DN 1 2AE
The Naturalist is issued free to individual members of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
and to Affiliated Societies.
Institutions and Subscribers £20.00
Registered Charity No. 224018
A QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
THE NATURAL
j HISTORY MUSEUM
-1 MAY 1935
PURCHASED
I GENERAL LIBRARY
Editor M. R. D. Seaward, MSc. PhD. DSc, fls
The University, Bradford BD7 1DP
Volume 120
1995
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union
YORKSHIRE MAYFLIES
3
LESLIE MAGEE
Presidential Address to the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union, Doncaster, 3 December 1994
I begin this address with a quotation by the Rev. A. E. Eaton in his 1883-88 monograph on
the Ephemeridae : "On many accounts these insects are very eligible subjects for scientific
research: but so long as they are ill known, and their exact identification is a matter
difficult ol accomplishment, their employment in any branch of zoological learning is
surrounded with disadvantages too patent to need identification.” This quotation is highly
significant in relation to the content of the remainder of my address.
The name Ephemeroptera comes from the Greek Ephemeros, lasting for a day; pteron ,
wing. The Germans call the insects Eintagsfliegen, the one day fly; the French, Ephemere.
The common name ‘mayfly’ is today applied generally to all British species,
notwithstanding an unsuccessful attempt in recent years to rename them dayflies.
Originally, anglers applied the name ‘mayfly’ to the two best known and the largest
species, viz. Ephemera danica and E. vulgata. The name ’mayfly’ was given to the larger
species of stoneflies and to the larvae known as stonefly ‘creepers’ and this name still
applies in some parts of northern England. The habits of the stoneflies and the descriptions
of the insects in angling literature are numerous and do not give rise to confusion today.
The main hatch of these two species is during June, when they are greedily devoured by
birds and fishes. The reason for the insects not being called ‘juneflies’ rather than mayflies
is that during the period when the Julian calendar was in use the peak period of the hatch
was towards the end of May.
History
About 2,400 years ago the Greek philosopher Aristotle wrote briefly about an animal
which emerged from a river near the Black Sea. It had four wings, four feet and had a life
span of only one day. It was called Ephemeron , i.e. one day living. About 200ad Claudius
Aelianus repeated the same story with a description of catching trout or grayling in a river
in Macedonia with an artificial fly made of wool and feathers. Occasional mention is made
in the translations of the classics of the animal Ephemeron, but it is not until the 15th
century that there appeared descriptions of insects which we may confidently judge to be
mayflies. Julius Caesar Scaliger (1484-1558) described an aquatic insect with a split tail
(two or three ends) which was almost certainly a mayfly. In 1496 Wynkyn de Worde, a
pupil of Caxton, printed at Westminster The Treatise of Fishing with an Angle. The author
is unknown but it has been attributed to Dame Juliana Berners, an Abbess of St. Albans. It
is famous for the description of twelve artificial flies, copied from natural insects, and the
months of the year when they were to be used. The Maure (Mulberry-coloured) Fly and the
Tandy with a body of tan coloured wool and wings of the lightest feather of the mallard can
be nothing but two copies of the Mayfly in different states (imago or sub-imago). These
patterns, known as the Drakes, were plagiarised by generations of writers of angling books
until the end of the 18th century.
The Entomologists
In 1634, a Dutchman. Outgert Cluyt (Augenius Clutius) published a book which described
and illustrated (although not very well) an insect which hatched in vast numbers on the
Rhine. After this date there was no doubt whatever what animal was intended by
Ephemeron. Forty years later Jan Swammerdam published his marvellous description of
the life history of the mayfly Palingenia longicauda under the title of ‘Ephemera Vita'.
This insect, which is now extinct on the Rhine, hatched in millions (‘as thick as snow
flakes in winter’).
In 1903. Professor L. C. Miall. a former President of the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union,
wrote The Natural History of Aquatic Insects and devoted a whole chapter to the Mayflies.
Natural is i 120 ( 1995)
4 Yorkshire Mayflies
This included a translation ot Swammerdam's work which described in detail the anatomy
ot the insects and their life cycle. In the same chapter Miall quoted the writings of Reaumur
on the mayfly, taken from the 12th memoire of his sixth volume of The History of Insects.
By the end of the 18th century, 16 of the now known total of 48 recognised British
species had been given scientific names by entomologists, but there was another group of
people working on the natural history of aquatic insects. These were the angler-naturalists,
almost entirely amateurs among whom, perhaps, the best known to naturalists is Charles
Cotton, because his work is included in the later editions of The Compleat Angler written
b) his friend Izaak Walton. This work, said to have been written in less than a week, was
Part 2 of The Compleat Angler published in 1676 and was entitled ‘How to angle for Trout
and Grayling in a Clear Stream . The work lists artificial flies for every month of the year
and gives a description of the mayfly's short existence as a winged insect. Cotton was
educated at Cambridge and lived the life of a country gentleman (albeit impoverished) at
Beresford Hall, situated closed to the banks of the R. Dove in Derbyshire.
During the exuberant days after Waterloo the country came to life and there was a spate
ot books on all aspects of natural history, partly inspired by the writings of Gilbert White
ot Selbome and his contemporaries, several ot whom were members of the Royal Society
and who were to become members of the Linnean Society, founded' in 1788.
Simultaneously there appeared books on angling, shooting and hunting; the earlier works
were mostly mere copies or blatant plagiarisms passed off as original works but now, with
the opportunity to travel freely, came new authors. Most of the books were poorly
illustrated, making identification of aquatic insects difficult.
Suddenly out of the blue in 1836 came a book that made easier identification of the
common insects seen on or around water. It was the The Fly-Fisher's Entomology by
Alfred Ronalds. The hand-coloured copperplate engravings have never been surpassed,
making it possible tor some species to be identified with certainty from the plates alone;
moreover the scientific classifications were accurate for the period, following those of
Linnaeus (although the orders and genera have in most cases been superceded).
Ronalds' observations were made on the little R. Blithe in Staffordshire where he built
an observatory at the water’s edge, with windows so obscured that the feeding trout were
undisturbed.
There were others in Yorkshire observing and recording in detail the insects which were
the food of the trout and grayling, all keen naturalists in their own way; among these were
William Pilling of Pool Mill, List of Flies for ye River Wharfe , 1794; John Swarbrick
Farmer of Austby, List of Wharf edale Flies , 1807; T. C. Holland, The British Angler’s
Manual, 1839; Michael Theakston, A List of Natural Flies taken by Trout. Grayline and
Smelt in the streams of Ripon , 1853.
Hofland was a wealthy landscape artist who often stayed at the shooting lodge at Bolton
Abbey as a guest of the Duke of Devonshire but who also travelled widely throughout the
British Isles. Theakston was bom at Ripon in 1786 and died there in 1866. His book is
remarkable for the excellent engravings of terrestrial and aquatic insects which were drawn
from life over a long period of time. The observations were made mainly on the Yore and
the little R. Skell which flowed past his house in Waterskellgate.
The publication of Ronalds’ work did not solve the problem of identification because the
use of local and vernacular names continued until well into the 20th century moreover
they were applied to different insects in different parts of the country and the commoner
the insect the more names there were. Some, like that of the Greendrake, E. danica go
back to the Treatise and there are others, such as the Primrose Dun. Heptagenia sulphu'rea
ot whose identification there can be no doubt; we can obtain some idea of their distribution
and abundance in the past from studies of the angling literature (Magee 1994).
The Yorkshire Entomologists
The results of the work of the Yorkshire entomologists were somewhat meagre and
scattered and there was no published list of Yorkshire records. Eaton’s monograph
Yorkshire Mayflies 5
(1833-88) referred to earlier had a few records from the North of England but none from
Yorkshire. The Ephemeroptera were apparently totally neglected by the naturalists in
Victorian times and no list appears in the Victoria County History for Yorkshire published
in 1907. The first published list of Yorkshire mayflies was that of Prof. E. Percival and H.
Whitehead in the The Entomologist' s Monthly Magazine in 1927. The list appeared in the
same year as the death of Geo. T. Porritt.
George T. Porritt ( 1848-1927) had dominated the Entomology Section of the YNU over
a long period of time. He made his first contribution to The Entomologist in 1865 when
still a youth of 17. By 1870 he was becoming a recognised authority on Yorkshire
Lepidoptera and in 1872 became a Fellow of the Linnean Society. Having seen the demise
of The Naturalist ( 1 865-67) and the Yorkshire Naturalists Recorder ( 1 872- 1 873), he made
another bid for success in August 1 875 with the launching of The Naturalist under the joint
editorship of Charles P. Hobkirk and G. T. Porritt. Porritt’s name was to appear on the title
page as an assistant editor for another 51 years. He was President of the Union in 1900.
Porritt was a dedicated collector of insects and welcomed specimens from other
collectors. In 1897 he made a request in The Naturalist for specimens of the Neuroptera
and the Orthoptera but specifically excluded the Ephemeridae (sic) (Mayflies), “which I
do not propose to touch for the present”. In 1920 Porritt wrote in his annual report in The
Naturalist “Still no mayflies”. Porritt’s discouragement of the collecting of mayflies must
have played some part in the apparent lack of interest of the entomologists in the order. As
a result the two decades after his death was the period of the greatest interest and activity in
the Yorkshire mayflies.
The Porritt Collection of Insects
The Porritt Collection of Macro-Lepidoptera consists of 23,000 specimens housed in 71
cabinet drawers. His collection of Neuroptera (Mayflies, Dragonflies and Caddis flies) and
Orthoptera (Earwigs, Grasshoppers, Crickets and Cockroaches) comprised 16,000
specimens housed in 65 cabinet drawers. The Lepidoptera collection was purchased by
subscription and is now kept at the Tolson Memorial Museum in Huddersfield, together
with the Neuroptera and Orthoptera collection which was his personal bequest: it does not
however contain any mayflies.
In 1925 the YNU set up a River Investigation Committee with monthly collecting from
the Wharfe at Grassington and Harewood; collecting at Beckermonds, Ilkley and Ulleskelf
was to be twice yearly. The first secretary of the Committee was C. A. Cheetham. In 1926,
the names of J. R. Dibb and W. C. Hincks appear in the excursion reports in The
Naturalist , and in 1929 came the first Fresh Water Biology Report, edited by J. M. Brown.
This was followed by the First Ephemeroptera Report in 1932 and the names of several
entomologists working on the order were acknowledged. In 1945 J. R. Dibb’s paper
Yorkshire Mayflies or Ephemeroptera was published as part of the Transactions of the
YNU. This list of 37 species recorded in Yorkshire covered all the vice-counties, although
it is far from comprehensive in terms of distribution. It also included a bibliography and
remains the basis for all later work. In 1945 H. Whitehead published additional records for
18 species and in 1946 J. R. Dibb published a short Addenda and Corrigenda to his 1945
paper.
Between 1927 and 1947 was the period of the greatest activity and research in this field
by members of the Union. The report produced jointly by Percival and Whitehead on the
ecology of rivers belong to this period. In the following decades interest in fresh water
biology declined and there were few active workers interested in the mayflies. During the
50 years which have elapsed, records of mayflies published in The Naturalist are sparse
and the information of the YNU entomological record cards for the Ephemeroptera is
indeed meagre. However, since the relaunching of the Fresh Water Biological Section of
the YNU in 1989, many new records from all the vice-counties have been added and the
distribution and life cycles of the less common upland species, e.g. Amelitus inopinatus and
Siphlonurus lacustris. are becoming better known.
6
Yorkshire Mayflies
My own interest in the mayflies goes back more than 60 years. I had an interest in
fishing from an early age and was aware of the importance of the mayflies from The
Compleat Angler. In 1928, I visited Bolton Abbey for the first time with a school party and
persuaded an angler to show me the contents of his fly-wallet. I clearly remember the fine
imitations of the Greendrake. After many years living in the north-east and other parts of
the county I came to live quite close to the river at Pool-in-Wharfedale. Eric Thompson,
who is still active in the Union and who had been a pupil of Whitehead, reminded me that
much of the investigation work which had formed the basis of Percival and Whitehead’s
report had been done on the Wharfe at Pool and Harewood. He suggested that I might wish
to re-investigate the river fauna after an interval of 40 years because very little had been
done in the meantime; moreover the Executive of the YNC had already approved the re-
activation of the defunct Fresh Water Biological Section and the time might be opportune
to attempt to do so. A further 23 years were to pass before the Section was reformed. Eric
Thompson possessed several of Whitehead’s published papers and kindly gave them to me.
There have been very few entomologists in the YNU studying the Yorkshire mayflies
during that period.
However, the predecessor of the Yorkshire Water Authority (YWA), the Ouse River
Board, had partly financed the work of Percival and Whitehead and more extensive work
had been done since 1956 by them and later by their successors the YWA. In 1967 the
YWA began monitoring the invertebrates at 60 sites throughout the area of the county which
they controlled, and by 1976 had carried out surveys at more than 1,000 sites. The sampling
of invertebrates was encouraged by the Department of the Environment due to the growing
awareness of the need for a biological classification of rivers as well as a chemical one.
The Water Quality of Rivers
The demand for pure water for potable and industrial use had increased rapidly after 1945
and the supplies of the impounded water from the upland reservoirs became inadequate, as
was shown dramatically in 1959 when supplies in the Washburn Valley reservoirs failed
and they virtually dried up. Additional supplies were sought and although some new
reservoirs were built it was clear that new supplies would have to come (at least in the short
term) from boreholes and river abstraction. The consequences of this have had profound
effects on the flora and fauna and have created problems which are still far from being
resolved. Rivers are more prone to pollution than reservoirs since pollution can be spread
downstream. Chemical analysis is one method of assessing pollution but it was already
well known that invertebrate sampling on a regular basis could be used to assess water
quality and to determine short and long term changes in quality. The development of
systems of classification of river quality by invertebrate sampling was encouraged by the
authorities and a number of systems came into use. All are based on the presence or
relative abundance of families of aquatic invertebrates, which are affected by differing
degrees of organic pollution. The presence of these groups can be linked to a standard test
of a water sample, the Biochemical (Biological) Oxygen Demand (BOD).
Among the systems which have evolved are: Trent Biotic Index (Woodiwiss);
Biotic Score (Chandler 1970); Biological Monitoring Working Part Score (BMWP).
The latter is the one most widely used at the present time. The method is not complicated
and in most cases it is not necessary to determine the invertebrates collected down to
species.
A score on a scale of 10 down to 1 is allotted to groups of invertebrates collected in a
sample; mayflies, caddis flies and stoneflies mostly score 10; in the lowest groups are:
some molluscs = 3, Chironmids = 2, all Oligochaeta = 1. The total score is added to
produce an average score per taxa which can be directly related to a classification scale. A
computer programme RIVPACS is also under development but at the present time it is not
in general use.
Since mayflies at some time of the year may account for as much as 20% of the biomass,
they are an important integer in any invertebrate classification system.
7
Yorkshire Mayflies
In the case ot the Ephemeroptera the surveys are carried out entirely upon the nymphs
and although il they are well developed most can be identified fairly easily down to
species, there are problems in doing so in some families, e.g. Baetidae, particularly when
they are very small. It is for this reason that one of the most abundant species on the
Whartc, The Pale Watery, Baetis fuscatus is not separated in the YWA lists. It is necessary
to explain that the eggs hatch as larvae and are termed nymphs as they develop: they
resemble fairly closely the adult and after a series of moults (instars) emerge to become the
winged sub-imago (the angler’s Dun). The final metamorphosis is the imago (the angler’s
Spinner). However, the distribution records of the YWA collated between 1971 and 1976
are probably the largest group of records of Yorkshire mayflies available at the present
time and voucher specimens identified by various authorities have been retained. Work has
slowed down during the past decade although some of the work is not done by the National
Rivers Authority (NRA). The other large group of records is that of the author who has
identified and recorded adult insects as well as nymphs. The collection of nymphs
throughout the year is simple; it can be done at specific locations and at different seasons.
The observation of adults is more dif ficult for the following reasons:
1 . Some species have a two year life cycle.
2. Some species are univoltine while others are bivoltine and this may vary in different
years.
3. The emergence of the whole population of some species may occur in a very short
period of time, so that records depend on the presence of the observer.
4. The period of emergence of the adults may take place over several weeks or even
months and the numbers hatching may at times be quite small, e.g. Baetis spp.
5. Some species emerge at dusk or at dawn and the metamorphosis from sub-imago to
imago is quite rapid, e.g. Caenis spp.
6. The adults are often difficult to locate in their shelter in high trees or even on
bridges and buildings.
7. The populations of certain species are small and the duns emerge individually, e.g.
Heptagenia sulphurea.
8. The less common species, which in Yorkshire are mainly confined to the uplands,
appear to emerge over a very short period of time in good weather when the wind
speed is low.
It is clear that a naturalist studying the Ephemeroptera and living close to a large river
system has considerable advantages over the casual observer. The method of sampling
invertebrates is by disturbing the bed by a set number of standard 'kicks' and collecting the
invertebrates in a net; after sorting, this produces a reasonably reliable indication of the
biological quality of a river; it is less so for lakes, reservoirs and deep tidal stretches where
there are physical limitations in sampling. In rivers, the statistical variations can be
complex; surveying may be hindered by the topography and the season of sampling
(although it is mainly confined to Spring. Summer and Autumn). The aquatic and marginal
vegetation was not taken into account in the earlier surveys and the biological effects of
augmentation, abstraction and inter-river transfers has only begun to be investigated in
recent years.
The Distribution of Ephemeroptera in Yorkshire
The maps showing the water quality of Yorkshire rivers equate closely to the distribution
maps of the riverine species of the Ephemeroptera in the county. Apart from some genera
of the Caenidae and the Baetidae. the abundance of mayflies, stoneflies and most caddis-
flies declines as the water quality deteriorates from Class 1 to Class 2. The higher levels of
the rivers and their tributaries are swift flowing and mainly stony-bottomed and the
invertebrate and vertebrate fauna are highly specialised. Mayflies also have a distinct
preference for streams which have a pH value >7 although this may be directly related to
the algae and microflora on which they feed. None of the British species are predators.
The most ubiquitous species are the Baetidae : one species, Baetis rhodani. called by
8
Yorkshire Mayflies
anglers the Large Dark Olive, is found in every Yorkshire river system and is widespread
throughout the British Isles. It may be seen on the wing in small numbers during every .
month of the year and occurs in such varied habitats as the calcareous rills which drain into '
Malham Tam to the deep slow-flowing waters of the Ouse. The stated periods during
which the Ephemeroptera may be seen on the wing can be misleading; for instance, the '
peak hatch of B. rhodani in Yorkshire is during May and it appears to be univoltine in most i
years, being bivoltine in years when there is a prolonged drought and high water i
temperature.
Pond and Lake Species
Many of the upland reservoirs in Yorkshire have been created in steep-side narrow valleys
and do not have large populations of mayflies; there are few natural lakes in Yorkshire but
small ponds and disused gravel pits with macrophytes are likely habitats provided that they
are not polluted. There are no British species which are only found in lakes and ponds, but
certain species which are adapted to slow flowing rivers may be found in Stillwater and
reservoirs, particularly those which are formed by damming streams. The large mayfly
Ephemera danica is widely distributed throughout Yorkshire on calcareous rivers but as
the nymphs are silt burrowers they tend to be absent from fast flowing, stony-bottomed
rivers unless the habitat has been modified. Occasionally this occurs naturally when a
stream becomes blocked and silt accumulates, but more often when a dam has been built
across the river, allowing deep silt to build up along the banks. This is typical of the R.
Nidd which has a large greendrake population upstream of the weirs. If the weirs are
destroyed, the insects usually disappear from that reach of the river, as is known to have
happened at Arthington on the R. Wharfe. On the little R. Dove in Douthwaite Dale in
North Yorkshire there is a large population of E. danica in deep silt washed down from the
moors but this stream is calcareous and has a high pH value.
A close relative, E. vulgata, the anglers’ Dark Mackerel, occurs in huge numbers in
Swinsty Reservoir, in some adjacent reservoirs and in the Leeds/Liverpool Canal from
Gargrave to the centre of Leeds. In the eastern side of the county it was once recorded from
the Sea Cut at Scalby where its current status is not known. Its distribution is very local in
England, occurring mainly in slow flowing rivers and meres in the west, but is spreading to
man-made lakes and disused gravel pits in the Midlands and the south.
E. vulgata was first recorded on the Leeds/Liverpool Canal at Gargrave in 1927 and in
1931 at Winterbum Reservoir which is a supply reservoir for the Canal. It is remarkable
that its spread via the Canal was unnoticed by the entomologists, although swarms were
pointed out to me at Esholt by a Bradford naturalist in 1952 under the name of E. danica.
The sub-imagos frequently rest on barges during cool weather and travel many kilometres
in this way. My investigations of its occurrence in Cheshire and Lancashire when I lived
there would indicate that the canal is the obvious route by which the species came into
Yorkshire.
Two species of the Baetidae, Cloeon simile and Cloeon dipterum , the Pond and the Lake
Oliver, have been recorded from Malham Tam. On the record cards at Malham and in the
YNU Malham Reports only Cloeon simile is recorded, but during the two-day YNU
excursion to Malham in May 1993, only nymphs and adults of Cloeon dipterum were
found. Extensive surveys of the Tam were made from a boat during the excursion and a
light trap was operated. Further surveys have not produced any specimens of C. simile; C.
simile nymphs are usually found at a depth of c. 2 metres and have a preference as a habitat
for the Water Milfoil Myriophyllum spicatum , which does occur in the Tam. It is
interesting too that C. dipterum is the only European mayfly which is ovi-viviparous; the
female rests 10 to 12 days before returning to the water to oviposition, when the eggs hatch
immediately on contact with the water. I have only once located resting, fertilised females.
25 Years of Studying The Yorkshire Mayflies
The author’s approach was first to attempt to determine what changes, if any, in the
Yorkshire Mayflies 9
distribution and abundance of mayflies had taken place in the intervening years since
Percival and Whitehead published their 1930 report. Fortunately, the exact dates of the
surveys are given in the reports, making comparisons fairly reliable. The list of mayfly
species recorded at Pool was unchanged but pollution from industry, agriculture and
sewage was on a scale much greater than that noted at Pool Bridge between 1928/1930.
The comparison ol the abundance of the populations was more difficult but it was possible
to make biological classification comparisons for some stations. In 1968 the river declined
to class 2 downstream of Pool Bridge and mayflies declined in numbers towards the tidal
reaches. Feeding Dippers are a good indicator of the presence of mayflies; they are not
often seen downstream of Arthington Viaduct. In subsequent years, in spite of the
improvements in sewage treatment, the quality did not improve dramatically and the
industrial pollution was a source of concern. The maps showing the water quality of
Yorkshire rivers between 1968 and 1994 equate closely to the distribution of mayflies.
The Macrophytes
The most noticeable change over the next 15 years was in the reduction in the river
vegetation of the Wharfe. Limited information on the distribution of the macrophytes of
Yorkshire rivers over the past 120 years may be obtained from the Transactions of the
YNU and the Floras of F. A. Lees, W. G. Baker and J. F. Robinson. A more recent survey
of the Wharfe was that of R. W. Butcher in 1933; this indicated for example, that the Water
crowfoot Ranunculus fluitans was dominant in the swift portions and frequent in the slower
portions. This plant does not occur on the Wharfe today and may be extinct in Yorkshire.
The Water Crowfoot R. penicillatus subsp. pseudofluitans , which had been a feature of
the river, had decreased since the 1930s and had become virtually extinct upstream of Pool.
The presence of macrophytes plays an important role in the abundance of invertebrates in
any river system, resulting in some authors giving a pollution tolerance relating to groups
of British macrophytes. Replanting of R. penicillatus subsp. pseudofluitans has been taking
place systematically in the Wharfe from Grassington down to Harewood Bridge since 1990
and the plant is becoming re-established in well oxygenated parts of the river.
The reappearance in huge numbers of a caddis fly Brachycentrus suhnuhilus on the mid-
Wharfe is believed to be in part due to the increase of some macrophytes in recent years.
Although the increase in macrophytes in some rivers is due to eutrophication, the presence
of the mayflies in some numbers (except Baetis rhodani ) does usually indicate good
quality.
Current Research on the Ephemetoptera
The Fresh Water Biological Association published its first key to the Ephemeroptera by
D. E. Kimmins in 1942, followed by a separate key to the larvae in 1961. Since the first
publication there has been a growing interest in the order in Europe and in America, which
has resulted in a large number of published references. There have also been several
International Ephemeroptera Conferences. There are few aspects of the life cycle which
have not now been studied. We now know that of the 48 British species. 30 occur mainly
in running water and 18 in both running and standing waters.
In spite of the intensive work on individual species both in the field and in the
laboratory, there are some aspects of the life cycles or behaviour which have not been
resolved and the author has kept observations on a number of species which are common or
locally common and over whose habits there is a question mark.
Oviposition
The method of oviposition varies: some Yorkshire species enter the water to deposit their
eggs on stones, e.g. Baetis rhodani. Although this is well documented I have not found it
easy to observe on large rivers, and the females do dip the abdomen while flying upstream.
It has been suggested that the purpose is to moisten the eggs. (There is a parallel with a
British caddis fly Brachycentrus suhnuhilus which dips but ovipositions under water.)
10
Yorkshire Mayflies
Baetis fuscatus hatches in huge numbers on the Wharfe and the Ure with a peak between
the end of May and mid-June. It is estimated that 90% of the nymphs emerge during this
period. The triggering factor appears to be a combination of light intensity, high barometric
pressure, low water flow and light wind speed.
During the period of emergence, birds, fish and bats feed intensively upon both the
nymphs and the winged adults. After swarming and mating the females fly upstream and
oviposition by dipping in the surface film, usually in water 0.5 to 1 metre deep, but avoid
‘broken water’. Although I have never seen winged adults of this species entering the
water, other observers claim to have done so. It is possible that experiments with artificial
streams may give rise to variations in behaviour.
Ephemera vulgata
In Yorkshire and elsewhere the eggs are deposited on warm days when there is very little '
wind. The usual time is during the afternoon but when the weather has been windy during
the preceding days, followed by a calm day, very large numbers of females will leave the
surrounding trees from as early as 7 a.m. and ovipositioning may continue throughout the
day until evening. On such days swarms of males may be seen flying close to a marker;
dam walls, buildings and dead trees are typical sites and are always close to the area where
ovipositioning will take place. The same sites have been noted for over a period of 20
years.
The areas selected for ovipositioning are the same areas where the nymphs have passed
the previous two years in their burrows. These areas follow the course of streams which
were submerged when the reservoirs were built and through which currents of water How
from the connecting feeders. At normal water levels it is not possible to capture nymphs
but in drought years it is possible to examine the sites and to count the number of burrows
per square metre.
Downstream Drift and Migration
There is a downstream drift and some upstream movement of nymphs in rivers and
streams. Some of this voluntary but very large numbers of invertebrates are washed out
during periods of heavy flooding, particularly on the spate rivers; macrophytes are tom out
and may be deposited to regenerate successfully downstream; in some severe floods more
than 50% of the beds of aquatic mosses such as those found on the extended base of
Harewood Bridge may be completely washed away and even be deposited in adjoining
fields. The larvae and the over-wintering eggs of one of the most abundant species of
mayfly Ephemerella ignita (the anglers’ Blue-winged Olive) occur in millions in some of
the beds of aquatic mosses, particularly Eurhynchium rusciforme. Those species whose
eggs overwinter or whose larvae do not develop during the winter would therefore appear
to be most vulnerable to loss of habitat. The adult mayflies whose nymphs are burrowers
(Ephemera) do not travel very far from the point of emergence. The adults of the Baetidae
and Ephemerellidae certainly do fly long distances (up to 1 km has been observed). In
Yorkshire, this movement is mainly upstream, but downstream movement ‘in huge
numbers’ in search of ‘broken water’ (indicating submerged vegetation) was described by
the well known Test river keeper, A. J. Lunn. At Castley on the Wharfe and elsewhere, E.
ignita has been known to leave the river and follow nearby roads for more than 1 km and
oviposition on the damp road surface and upon parked motor vehicles. This behaviour has
been noted towards dusk after rain, when the river is running high; no doubt the road
surface with pools is mistaken for ‘broken water’ as observed by L. Magee over the
period 1970-1990. Published references do suggest that upstream migration is minimal; the
author’s observation is that this is true for the species which are least vulnerable
to disturbance, e.g. species with burrowing nymphs and those with stone-clinging nymphs.
Colonisation
Mayflies do colonise lakes but little has been published. They are known to have been
11
Yorkshire Mayflies
introduced successfully by anglers into man-made lakes such as fish ponds and gravel pits,
and have also colonised lakes and ponds close to rivers and canals ( Cleon dipterum can be
found even in water butts). In 1991 Ephemera vulgata was seen emerging in a moorland
pond which had been formed in 1989 by damming a small stream. This pond was 8 km
from the nearest known colony and the owner was adamant that no insects or animals had
been deliberately introduced. Eaton (1883-88) quotes examples of swarms seen at a height
of 500 feet above the Rhine but most descriptions of mating flights in literature indicate a
height of between 2 and 10m. Swarms of Baetis rhodani have been observed at a height of
15m, above tall trees adjacent to several Yorkshire rivers.
Conclusions
There have been few additions to the list of Yorkshire mayflies published by J. R. Dibb in
the Transactions of the YNU in 1945 and it seems unlikely that many more will be added.
Additional species found in Yorkshire in recent years are Heptagenia fuscogrisea and
Caenis luctuosa (moesta). There are however a number of species for which there are few
Yorkshire records but which may prove to be more widespread since they occur in
neighbouring vice-counties.
A Check List of Yorkshire Mayflies
Anglers' Name
Summer Mayfly
1 . Siphlonurus armatus
2. Siphlonurus lacustris
3. Ameletus inopinatus
4. Baetis rhodani
5. Baetis atrebatinus
6. Baetis fuscatus
7. Baetis scambus
8. Baetis vernus
9. Baetis mutieus
10. Centroptilum luteolum
1 1. Centroptilum pennulatum
12. Cloeon dipterum
13. Cloeon simile
14. Procloeum bifidum
15. Rhithrogena semicolorata
16. Heptagenia sulphurea
Summer Mayfly
Dark Olive
Dark Dun
Pale Watery
Small Olive
Medium Olive
Iron Blue
Little Sky Blue
Blue-w inged Pale Watery
Pond or Lake Olive
Pond or Lake Olive
Little Pale Blue
Yellow Upright
Primrose Dun
Status
Local, VC64. No recent
records.
Local. VC62, VC63,
VC64. VC65 (Upland
species).
Local. VC62, VC64,
VC65.
Widespread in Yorkshire
in rivers.
Rare. R. Swale.
Abundant on some rivers
in all vice-counties.
Widespread in rivers in all
vice-counties.
In all vice-counties but
less common than B
scambus.
Widespread in rivers in all
vice-counties.
In all vice-counties but
not on all main river
systems.
Local. VC62, VC63,
VC64. VC65.
In unpolluted ponds and
lakes with aquatic
veaetation.
Local. VC64. VC65.
VC62. VC62, VC63.
VC64. VC65.
Widespread in stony
bottomed streams.
Local, main rivers in
VC64. VC65.
12
1 7 . Heptagenia fuscogrisea
18. Heptagenia lateralis
19. Ecdyonurus torrentis
20. Ecdyonurus venosus
2 1 . Ecdyonurus dispar
22. Ecdyonurus insignis
23. Leptophlebia marginata
24. Leptophlebia vespertina
25. Habbrophlebia fusca
26. Paraleptophlebia
submarginata
27. Paraleptophlebia cincta
28. Ephemera vulgata
29. Ephemera danica
30. Ephemerella ignita
3 1 . Ephemerella notata
32. Brachycercus harrisella
33. Caenis macrura
34. Caenis luctuosa
35. Caenis horaria
36. Caenis rivulorum
Yorkshire Mayflies
Brown May Dun
Dark Dun
Brook Dun
March brown
August Dun
Large Green Dun
Sepia Dun
Claret Dun
Ditch Dun
Turkey Brown
Purple Dun
Dark Mackerel
Greendrake
Blue-Winged Olive
Yellow Evening Dun
Anglers’ Curse
Anglers’ Curse
Anglers’ Curse
Anglers’ Curse
Only in R. Derwent,
Driffield Beck and R.
Hull.
In lakes and rivers, local,
VC62, VC64, VC65.
In all vice-counties.
Prefers stony bottomed
streams.
Widespread in unpolluted
stony bottomed streams.
In all vice-counties.
Prefers stony bottomed
streams.
Local, R. Ribble, R.
Wenning and R. Swale.
Local, VC63, VC64 lakes
and streams.
Local, lakes and slow
streams.
Slow streams with
vegetation, VC61, VC62,
VC64, VC65.
Small stony streams,
VC62, VC64, VC65.
Small stony rivers, VC62,
VC64, VC65.
Morehall Reservoir
VC63, Leeds/Liverpool
Canal VC63 and VC64;
reservoirs in VC64.
All vice-counties; lakes
and rivers, chiefly slow-
flowing.
In fast flowing rivers in
all vice-counties.
Similar habitat to last
species but much more
local, VC64, VC65.
Local on Ouse tributaries:
Wharfe, Swale, Ure, Nidd
and Pocklington Canal.
Maybe under-recorded.
Very local. Aire, Wharfe
and Ure.
Local. VC62, VC63,
VC64.
Local. VC63, VC64.
Stony streams. Local,
VC64. VC65.
Note.
Very large areas of Yorkshire are underworked and some old records are dubious. The
checklist is therefore merely a guide to the verified Yorkshire species. Distribution maps
for all species are in preparation.
Book Reviews
13
Acknowledgements
The author wishes to acknowledge the encouragement of E. Thompson who suggested the
studies and for the gift of reports; A. Henderson for tracing obscure references: D. T.
Richardson for microscopic examination of some species; members of the YNU for
submitting records and biologists of the former Yorkshire Water Authority for details of
unpublished invertebrate surveys.
References
Aelianus, Claudius (1784) De natura animalium. Libri xvii. Schneider, Leipzig.
Aristotles, De partibus animalium 682 a 27.
Berners, J. (1496) The Treatyse of Fysshinge wyth an Angle. Wynkyn de Worde,
Westminster, London.
Bratton, J. H. (1990) A review of the scarcer Ephemeroptera and Plecoptera of Great
Britain. Research and Survey in Nature Conservancy No 29. Nature Conservancy
Council, Peterborough.
Butcher, R. W. (1933) Studies on the ecology of rivers. I On the distribution of
macrophytic vegetation in the rivers of Britain. J. Ecol. 21: 58-91.
Cluyt, Outgert (1634) Opuscula duo singularia. II. De Hemerobia sive Ephemera Insecto
Majali verme. Amsterdam.
Dibb, J. R. (1945) Yorkshire Mayflies or Ephemeroptera. Trans. Yorks. Nat. Un. 36(2): 1-
20.
Eaton, A. E. (1883-88) A revisional monograph of recent Ephemeridae or Mayflies. Trans
Linn. Soc., Zool.. series 2, 3(1): 1 -352.
Hellawell, J. M. (1990) The Biological Surveillance of Rivers. Water Research Centre,
Stevenage.
Hofland, T. C. (1839) The British Anglers' Manual. Whitehead, London.
Magee, L. (1994) Fly Fishing. The North Country Tradition. Smith Settle, Otley.
Miall, L. C. (1903) The Natural History of Aquatic Insects. Macmillan, London.
Mol, A. W. M. (1984) The Earliest Epoch in the Study of Mayflies ( Ephemeroptera ).
Proceedings of the Fourth International Conference, Ephemeroptera. 3-9, CSAV. 1984.
Percival, E. and Whitehead, H. (1930) Biological survey of the River Wharfe. II. Report on
the invertebrate fauna. J. Ecol. 18: 286-302.
Ronalds, A. (1836) The Flyfisher’s Entomology. 10th edition. Longmans. London.
Scaliger, J. C. (1557) Exotericarum exercitationum. Paris.
Swammerdam, J. (1675) Ephemeri vitae. Haft of Oever-aas, Amsterdam.
Theakston, M. (1853) A List of Natural Flies that are taken by Trout. Grayling and Smelt
in the Streams of Ripon. W. Harrison, Ripon.
Walton, Izaak (1653) The Compleat Angler. (2nd edition 1655). Marriott, London.
BOOK REVIEWS
The Badger Man: memoirs of a biologist by Ernest Neal. Pp. x + 274. with 22 black and
white photographs and 6 cartoons. 1994. Providence Press, Ely, Cambridgeshire. £13.95
paperback.
Ernest Neal is well known as the leading authority on the biology of our native badger. His
reputation has been established through many years of study, publication of books and
scientific papers, service on committees and advisory bodies and appearances on radio and
television. This is the public image but only when reading his autobiography does one
appreciate the much greater diversity of his contributions in what has been a rewarding life.
The son of a Baptist minister, Ernest (bom in 1911) was the youngest of four children.
While the family lived modestly. Ernest nevertheless experienced a diverse and rewarding
childhood, being introduced to natural history through his father's interest in butterflies.
Completion of a degree course at London University, while posing few academic
14
Book Reviews
difficulties, did throw up a number of financial problems which were only resolved by
taking up junior teaching positions, undertaking odd jobs and attending evening classes at
Chelsea Polytechnic. Throughout his memoir comes through a burning enthusiasm for
natural history, not only of butterflies but equally of all plants and animals whether
terrestrial or marine. His badger interests were, in fact, not initiated until he was established
in his first teaching post at Rendcombe College.
Ernest Neal’s prime professional commitment was to school teaching, first at
Rendcombe and then at Taunton, where he served as Head of Science, Housemaster and
Deputy Head. His dedication, wisdom and sincere interest in his boys constantly emerges.
Even with these considerable responsibilities his commitment to natural history could not
be submerged. More than that, he has undertaken fundamental research on the biology of
the badger, particularly its reproduction, social behaviour and status which has been the
foundation for much further study. How stimulating it must have been for his students to
have had such a teacher. Photography and the media were among his other interests and it
is through his anecdotes and vignettes of various episodes that the events of the past, many
in the early days of natural history broadcasting, come to life.
That Ernest Neal has lived a full and rewarding life bursts forth from this book. Teacher,
author, scientist, administrator, photographer and broadcaster are among his many roles,
while his geographical experience extends from Britain to much of Africa and Europe. His
family connections, which feature prominently, have been deep and strong, initially
through his parents and siblings and subsequently and for over fifty years through his wife
Betty and their children. Equally strong is his religious commitment. He writes well,
conveying his own enthusiasm, but is never assertive as to his own successes and
contributions. The book is more than a good read, it is an example of considerable
achievement (from time to time against a background of serious ill health) for which we are
all the richer.
MJD
Flora Europaea. Volume 1: Psilotaceae to Platanaceae. Edited by T. G. Tutin et al. 2nd
edition. Pp. xlvi + 581, including 5 maps. Cambridge University Press. 1993. £100.00.
The first volume of this prestigious work, hailed on its first publication 30 years ago as a
model of its kind for international use, has now been thoroughly revised and considerably
extended to include a larger number of taxa, each of which is described with admirable
clarity and conciseness. The original highly satisfactory format and style have been
retained. It will be noted that its subtitle has necessarily been changed to accommodate the
interesting discovery in south-west Spain of a ‘tropical and subtropical' psilophyte,
Psilotum nudum.
All the useful features of the first edition are included, but the use of contrastingly
coloured pages for easy cross-referencing of the Explanatory Notes and the Glossary of
Technical Terms has been dropped, which is a pity: presumably the publishers felt that this
was an unjustifiable luxury in an already unavoidably expensive volume.
Flora Europaea is sponsored by the Linnean Society of London and the preparation of
this new edition of Volume 1 has been supervised by an editorial committee based in
Britain and Ireland which has coordinated a mass of data from international sources, much
of it via an impressive body of experts; the appendices, for example, provide biographical
and bibliographical information on more than 1300 botanists and their publications.
Both editors and publishers are to be heartily congratulated on realising this monumental
project, which will be enthusiastically welcomed throughout the botanical world. Sadly,
however, it seems that at present some doubt hangs over the production of a revision of the
remaining four volumes of this indispensable work.
MRDS
15
OTTERS ( LUTRA LUTRA L.) AS SCAVENGERS: AN EXPERIMENT
RAY HEWSON
Department of Zoology, University of Aberdeen, Tillydrone Avenue. Aberdeen AB9 2TN
Introduction
Salmon Salmo salar, spawning in the upper reaches of the River Dee and its tributaries in
north-east Scotland in November and December, provide a potentially large supply of food
for otters, either as prey or carrion. Otters readily take salmon in the shallow water at the
spawning redds (Carss et al. 1990), in addition to which many salmon carcases are
available to scavengers from fish that die after spawning. Only 3-6% of salmon that have
spawned return to spawn a second time (Mills 1986). Thus salmon carrion provides an
abundant seasonal food supply along the Dee, amounting to as much as 36 kg. km ' along
the river bank (Hewson 1995). This paper describes scavenging by otters based on an
experiment in which radio-tagged salmon carcases were provided to determine the extent
to which otters scavenge when live fish are readily available.
Study Areas
The study areas comprised 900 m of the Burn of Cattie from its junction with the river Dee,
and 400m of the Beltie Bum, which joins the Dee 4.0 km downstream and 6.5 km
downstream of the confluence of Dee and Cattie (Figure 1). Both are used by spawning
salmon which travel several km further upstream to spawning redds.
FIGURE 1
Study areas on River Dee: A Dinnet. B Blackhall. Streams used by spawning salmon;
( 1 ) Tarland, (2) Cattie. (3) Beltie, (4) Sheeoch.
The Cattie is 4-5m wide, and 0.3 -1 ,0m deep, with riffles and pools, the bottom sandy or
gravel-covered. Alder Alnus glutinosa and birch Betula spp. line the banks and fallen
branches obstruct the flow of the stream and cause salmon carcases to lodge in them.
The 400m of the Beltie bum is 3-4m wide, slow-moving and silt-bottomed. It is
therefore unsuitable for spawning salmon which pass through to spawn in the upper
reaches. The banks were steep and man-made during former drainage operations, and were
Naturalist 120 (1995)
16
Oners (Lutra lutra L.) as Scavengers: an Experiment
partially lined with willows Salix spp. Otters were common and fed largely upon brown
trout Salmo trutta outside the spawning season of salmon when there was little other
aquatic prey (Kruuk et al. 1993).
Other scavengers, which occurred on both study areas and might have benefited from
salmon carcases landed by otters included mink Mustela vison, fox Vulpes vulpes and
various scavenging birds, heron Ardea cinerea , carrion crow Con ns corone, and moorhen
Gallinula chloropus. Great black-backed gulls Laras marinas , which regularly scavenge
salmon carcases along the Dee, did not forage along the tributary bums.
Methods
Twenty-three female salmon carcases, intact except for the stomach and part of the snout,
were fitted with radio transmitters (Hewson 1995). Between 24 November 1992 and 10
March 1993, 14 of these were placed, two at a time, in shallow backwaters in the Cattie
and two in the Dee nearby. They were replaced when scavenged or washed away by spates.
Seven carcases were placed singly, and replaced when gone, on a small sandy spit at the
water’s edge on the Beltie which regularly showed tracks of otters, and where otters had
scavenged carcases in an earlier study (Hewson 1995). The spit was too small to
accommodate two salmon and the adjacent stream narrow and shallow.
Radio-tracking was carried at intervals of 1-3 days on the Cattie and 1-12 days on the
Beltie.
The remains of salmon killed or scavenged by otters were generally found within 2m of
the water with a trail through the vegetation from the water's edge and in some cases otter
tracks in sand or mud. There was no attempt to conceal the carcase and otters did not seek
secluded places to feed. Otters fed between the head and dorsal or belly fins of salmon
carcases, sometimes biting through the spine or removing the carcase except for the head.
Freshly killed fish showed blood and scattered scales.
Of the other scavengers of salmon carcases, crow and great black-backed gulls were
seen feeding at some of the experimental carcases. Crows have difficulty in breaking into
salmon carcases and generally do so at the anus or by making small pits l-2cm in diameter
and 1cm deep in rotting carcases. They remove the eyes from fresh carcases of various
species often without further scavenging (Houston 1978, Hewson 1984, 1995). Great
black-backed gulls tore large pieces from salmon carcases but left no diagnostic signs.
Mink fed where an otter had already broken into a salmon carcase, sometimes extending
the area by feeding to a depth of c. 1cm below the skin, and also at the head between eye
socket and snout.
Results
Scavenging by otters
Of the 16 radio-tagged carcases put into the Cattie and Dee six were washed away by
spates (see below). Otters hauled out the remaining 10 and scavenged nine of them (Table
1). The tenth was scavenged by birds.
TABLE I
Scavenging of salmon carcases placed in water (Cattie bum)
or at water’s edge (Beltie bum)
Number of carcases
Put in
Removed
by spates
Hauled
out
Otter
scavenged
Fate
unknown
or other
scavenger
Cattie/Dee
16
6
10
9
1
Beltie
7
0
7
4
2
17
Oilers (Lutra lutra L.) as Scavengers: an Experiment
All the carcases were found within 2m of the water or in the stream or river. Within a
three-week period three carcases had been taken 20-30m upstream where they were
scavenged on boulders and at the water's edge. One of the two carcases in the Dee was
scavenged at the water's edge, the other on a groyne 2m upstream of where it had been put
in. Both were fully scavenged.
All seven carcases put out at the Beltie were moved by otters, which left tracks in the
sand; they scavenged at least four of them (Table 1). They did not take carcases from the
water to the nearest place on the bank as at Cattie presumably because the banks of the
Beltie burn were steep and one bank was alongside a public road. Instead, salmon carcases
were either taken to the mouth of a culvert beneath the road, 1 10m upstream from the spit
where they had been placed, or to the far bank 95m downstream. Radios from two of the
remaining three carcases were traced to the middle of an arable field 800m from the Beltie
and a conifer plantation 1.0 km away respectively. They may have been taken there by
foxes after otters had recovered them from the shallow water and silt which had covered
them since they were put out. Foxes are known to remove salmon carcases from the bank
before feeding on them (Cuthbcrt 1973, Hewson 1994).
Carcases moved by spates (Table 2) were washed into deeper water or lodged beneath
driftwood. They were not scavenged by otters. Four of the six were moved out of the study
area. One of these was found, thought to be scavenged by great black-backed gulls, 6 km
downstream of the study area.
TABLE 2
Salmon carcases placed in Cattie bum and removed by spates
Date
put in
Date
of spate
Observations
13 Dec.
19 Dec.
Found 5 Feb.,
not scavenged
13 Dec.
19 Dec.
not found in
study area
19 Dec.
26 Dec.
lodged beneath
driftwood
27 Dec.
5 Jan.
6 km downstream
bird scavenged
27 Dec.
15 Jan.
in R. Dee. 1 1 Feb.
10 Jan.
15 Jan.
not found
TABLE 3
Salmon carcases moved by otters from Bum of Cattie
Time
Initial
Amount
(days)
weight (kg)
scavenged by
otters (kg)*
2
2.04
1.36
fully scavenged
1
2.81
0.57
10
2.67
2.10
fully scavenged
8
2.16
1.16
3
1.96
>1.50
fully scavenged
12
3.07
1.53
2
2.07
1.59
fully scavenged
* when found. Some carcases were further scavenged by otters later .
18
Oners (Lutra lutra L.) as Scavengers: an Experiment
Otters fed substantially upon salmon carcases placed in the Cattie. some of which were
hauled out and scavenged within three days (Table 3). Carss et al (1990) found that otters
killing spawning salmon on the Burn of Sheeoch. another tributary of the Dee, took an
average 975g as a single meal. These were larger fish than those used in the present study
and feeding occurred chiefly behind the pectoral fins. On the smaller carcases used in this
study scavenging occurred in the same area but extended further towards the tail; in fully
scavenged carcases only the skull, vertebrae, tail and skin, weighing together about 0.6 kg,
remained.
Amounts scavenged by otters at Cattie (mean 1.40kg, range 0.57-2.10) were larger than
at Sheeoch but fell within the same range, 0.29-2. 08kg. At Sheeoch otters obtained most of
their daily food requirements by catching one salmon from those readily available on the
spawning redds. There was no spawning redd within the Cattie and Beltie study areas and
with food less readily available otters ate more from each carcase and returned to some of
them for further scavenging. If fully scavenged carcases at Beltie (Table 4) were assumed
to weigh 0.6kg the average amount eaten by otters there, 1.35kg, was similar to Cattie.
TABLE 4
Salmon carcases moved by otters at Beltie
Time
(days)
Initial
weight (kg)
Amount
scavenged
by otters (kg)*
7
2.53
fully scavenged later
10-18
1.08
scavenged by fox later
3
2.44
fully scavenged later
2
1.84
0.97
1
2.70
0.64
1
1.73
scavenged by fox later
12-17
2.12
not found
* when found: some carcases were scavenged by otters later.
Live prey of otters along the Cattie
Between 29 Nov. 92 and 5 Feb. 93 the remains of nine salmon were found along the Cattie.
One, a small female on a gravel spit, was scavenged by a heron which was flushed from the
carcase. The remaining eight had been put on the bank by otters (Table 5). Seven had been
killed (fresh blood). The eighth was a salmon seen dead in the water two days earlier. From
these salmon a full meal (c. 1.4kg) or more had been taken; only the head remained of two
fish. A similar amount (1.3kg) was scavenged subsequently, principally by otters.
The remains of the heaviest fish killed by an otter, from which a meal had been taken,
weighed 4.9kg, indicating a live weight of around 6 kg, near the upper limit for salmon
brought ashore by otters. (The average weight of a female otter is 7kg (Chanin ( 1991 )).
Other scavengers of salmon carcases
Otters help other scavenging mammals and birds by removing salmon to the bank and
leaving them partly eaten. Six of the seven salmon killed (and one scavenged) by otters
along the Cattie provided food for other scavengers (Table 5). Crows were involved in all
cases, removing eyes or making small pits in flesh. A great black-backed gull scavenged a
carcase on which mink and crows had already fed, but mink scavenged only one carcase
and great black-backed gulls two.
The experimental carcases hauled out by otters on Cattie also provided food for other
scavengers. Mink scavenged three, taking between 7 1 g and 284g per day, when more than
one mink may have been involved. Crows removed eyes from four carcases and, during a
period of snow-lie, fed upon one which had lain on'the stream bank for 83 days. Tracks
and droppings indicated that crows had fed along with mink at three carcases.
19
Oilers (Lutra lutra L.) as Scavengers: an Experiment
Scavenging of salmon carcases at the Beltie by foxes has already been discussed. On the
Sheeoch, Cuthbert (1973) found substantial scavenging of dead salmon by badgers Metes
metes and foxes, both of which removed carcases from the stream bank.
The amounts taken by scavengers other than otters were usually small and there was no
evidence of competition for salmon carrion between otters and other bird or mammal
scavengers (Hewson 1995, this study).
TABLE 5
Feeding on salmon killed (and one scavenged) by otters along Cattie
29 Nov. 92 to 5 Feb. 93
Date
Killed
or
scavenged
Weight (kg)
when
found
Subsequent
scavenger
Amount
eaten later
(kg)
29 Nov
scavenged
2.36
otter, crow
1.33
1 Dec
killed
4.90
mink, crow, gull
-
12 Dec
killed
3.80
crow
—
28 Dec
killed
2.58
otter, crow
1.28
9 Jan
killed
head only
crow
-
19 Jan
killed
1.28
otter, crow, gull?
0.89
19 Jan
killed
2.16
otter, crow
1.73
5 Feb
killed
head only
none
-
Gull refers to great black-backed gull.
Discussion
Salmon, as prey or carrion, are clearly important to otters during the spawning season
(Hewson 1995). On a 7.5 km stretch of the Dee (B on Fig. 1) the salmon carcases found
during December and early January could have provided the entire food supply of one or
two otters taking only a single meal from each carcase. However, the salmon carcases on a
9 km stretch 21 km upstream (A), with a more rapid flow and few tributaries used by
spawning salmon, would not have sustained an otter even if it had scavenged them fully
(Hewson 1995).
This study shows that otters readily take salmon carrion even when live fish are
available and easily taken after spawning. Otters returned to feed on salmon they had killed
and fed upon earlier, and then ate amounts equivalent to the average otter's meal as
described by Carss et at (1990). They also ate similar amounts of carrion from the carcases
provided experimentally.
A tentative estimate of the food of otters on the Cattie during the study indicates that
salmon carrion may have been their major food. Captive otters when hungry took dead fish
in preference to live ones and slow-moving fish more readily than faster ones (Erlinge
1968). Wild otters presumably find salmon which have spawned (kelts), slow-moving in
the backwaters which they frequent, an easy prey. Similarly, dead salmon lying in shallow
water provide an easy source of food. Outside their spawning season large salmon are not a
usual food of otters (Kruuk et at. 1993) although present in the Dee as fresh-run fish from
February onwards, presumably because these are more difficult to catch than smaller prey.
In Ireland, O'Sullivan et at (1992) record sporadic otter scavenging of brown trout
Salmo trutta L., sheep, cooked shrimps, Crangon vulgaris L. and domestic geese and
fowls. Food remains on islands frequented by otters at Loch Park in north-east Scotland
included brown hare Lepus europeaus, mallard Anas platyrhynchos , moorhen, woodpigeon
Columba palumbus and pheasant Phasianus colchicus , all of which were probably
scavenged rather than killed (Hewson 1973).
Scavenging of salmon carcases during the spawning season provides a substantial part of
the otter's diet. At other times otters scavenge sporadically.
20
Book Review
Acknowledgements
I am grateful to Anneke Stolte for help in the field, to Dr H. Kruuk for helpful discussions,
to J. Morris, (I.T.E. Banchory) for technical assistance, and to landowners on whose i
ground I worked. The Vincent Wildlife Trust made a grant towards the cost of the work,
and the Freshwater Fisheries Laboratory, Pitlochry, provided the salmon carcases. G.
Woodroffe made helpful comments on earlier drafts.
References
Carss, D. N„ Kruuk, H. and Conroy, J. W. H. (1990) Predation on adult Atlantic salmon, <
Salmo salar L. by otters, Lutra Ultra (L), within the River Dee system, Aberdeenshire, i
Scotland. J. Fish Biol. 37: 935-944.
Chanin, P. (1991) Otter. In: The Handbook of British Mammals, ed. G. B. Corbet & S.
Harris) pp. 424-431. Oxford, Blackwell.
Cuthbert, J. H. (1973) Some observations on scavenging of salmon Salmo salar carrion.
Western Naturalist 2: 12-1 A.
Erlinge, S. ( 1968) Food studies on captive otters Lutra lutra L. Oikos 19: 259-270.
Hewson, R. (1973) Food and feeding habits of Otters Lutra lutra at Loch Park, north-east
Scotland .J.Zool. 170: 159-162.
Hewson, R. (1984) Scavenging and predation upon sheep and lambs in west Scotland.
./. appl. Ecol. 21: 843-868.
Hewson, R. (1985) Scavenging of salmon carcases by birds. Scottish Birds 13: 179-182.
Hewson, R. (1995) Use of salmonid carcases by vertebrate scavengers. J. Zool. 235: 53-65.
Houston, D. C. (1978) The motivation for hooded crow ( Corvus corone) attacks on young
lambs. Proc. Assoc. Appl. Biol. 88: 339-341 .
Kruuk. H., Carss, D. N., Conroy, J. W. H. and Durbin, L. (1993) Otter {Lutra lutra L.)
numbers and fish productivity in two rivers in North-east Scotland. Symp. zool. Soc.
Lond. 65: 171-191.
O'Sullivan, W. M., Sleeman. D. A. & Murphy, D. M. (1992) Otters Lutra lutra feeding on
carrion. Ir. Nat.. I 24: 140-143.
Mills, D. H. (1986) The biology of Scottish salmon. In: The Status of Atlantic Salmon in
Scotland (ed. D. Jenkins), pp. 10-19. ITE symposium No. 15, Huntingdon.
BOOK REVIEW
Flora of Radnorshire by R. (i. Woods. Pp. xiii + 292, together with 9 pages of colour
plates. National Museum of Wales, in association with the Bentham-Moxon Trust. 1993.
£28.00 hardback.
This work maintains the traditionally high standards of county Floras and is a testimony to
Ray Woods’ detailed researches in mid-Wales over the past twenty years. Radnorshire is
only one of several counties whose botany he has extensively explored, covering not only
its vascular plants, but also its cryptogams; his ecological and conservation interests are
also evident in this Flora.
Chapters are provided on the county's physical environment, plant communities
(including a conspectus of their phytosociological classification), biogeography, changing
flora, conservation and history of plant recording. The main body of the text provides
ecological notes and locality details (maps on a tetrad basis given for the more widespread
species) of flowering plants, ferns, mosses, liverworts and lichens; shorter sections deal
with algae and cyanobacteria, and rust and smut fungi.
The volume is well produced, the text being admirably supported by maps, tables, line
drawings and colour photographs of habitats. Thanks to the generosity of its several
sponsors, the Flora is extremely reasonably priced.
MRDS
21
ACULEATE WASPS AND BEES (HYMENOPTERA: ACULEATA)
OF BLAXTON COMMON IN WATSONIAN YORKSHIRE
WITH THE INTRODUCTION OF A NEW
NATIONAL QUALITY SCORING SYSTEM
MICHAEL E. ARCHER
Blaxton Common has been found to be an excellent locality for aculeate wasps and bees,
having 123 recorded species, six species of national importance and ten species of regional
signiticance. The Common, an area of about 150ha, is situated to the north-east of Blaxton,
near Doncaster (VC63, SE6901). The region has sandy acid soils worked by the sand and
gravel extraction industry. After sand extraction, dry open horizontal sand and small sandy
clif Hets are left. Vegetation has invaded the open spaces, leading to the development of
birch and oak woodland. Sheltered by the woodland the open areas become important
nesting and foraging resources for the aculeate wasps and bees. Continued growth of the
birch and oak will eventually shade out the open areas but at present many open areas are
present.
Between 1980 and 1993, 17 visits were made to a sample area, about 25ha, of Blaxton
Common along either side of the road from Finningly to Wroot. These visits were
distributed throughout the year as follows: April (2 visits). May (4). June (3). July (3).
August (3), September (2). During these three-hour visits all species of aculeate wasps and
bees seen were recorded (Archer sample) and usually collected with a hand net for
identification. In addition, I have had access to a small number of records from H. H.
Corbett (June 1918), E. W. Aubrook (June 1969) and P. Skidmore (April 1967), a larger
number of records from J. D. Coldwell (August 1991) and J. T. Bum (1972-78), to whom I
am most grateful. In the following account biological names are according to Kloet and
Hincks (1978).
Results
Species present at Blaxton Common
At the family level. Table 1 shows the taxonomic distribution. The 122 recorded species
represent about 46% of the aculeate wasps and bees recorded from Watsonian Yorkshire.
In addition, J. T. Burn recorded the dryinid wasp Anteon jurineanum during May 1980.
The Archer sample of solitary wasps and bees consists of 315 records derived from 91
species (Table 2). Fifty-eight species (63.7%) were recorded on one. two or three days
(unusual species) while the other 33 species (36.3%) were recorded on from four to 15
days (common species) (Table 3). Solitary bee species are more equally represented in the
common (21 species) and unusual (27) groups compared with the wasp species which are
represented more in the unusual (31) than the common (12) groups of species. Thus
solitary wasps species would seem to be more difficult to find than solitary bee species.
With 29 species (31.9%) only being found on one visit, the recording of further species is
very likely.
A further eighteen solitary species have been recorded as follows: Dipogon
subintermedius (=D. nitidus ), Anoplius nigerrimus , Ancistrocerus gazella, Tachysphex
unicolor , Trypoxylon attenuatum , Crabro peltarius , Crossocerus cetratus, C.
megacephalus , Ectemnius cavifrons, E. cephalotes , Stigmus solskyi, Pemphredon
inornatus, Diodontus luperus, Nysson dimidiatus , N. spinosus , N. trimaculatus,
Argogorytes mystaceus , Andrena cineraria. Seventeen of these 18 species not found in the
Archer sample are wasps species, indicating again the smaller probability of finding the
wasp compared with the bee species.
The following ant, social wasp, and bee species have been recorded: Formicidae:
Myrmica ruginodes , Formica fuse a. Lasius niger: Vespidae: Dolichovespula sylvestris,
Vespula rufa , Paravespula germanica , P. vulgaris: Apidae: Bombus lucorum , B terrestris.
Naturalist 120(1995)
22
Aculeate Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) ofBlaxton Common
B. lapidarius , B. pratorum, B. hortorum, B. pascuorum, Psithyrus bohemicus , P. vestalis ,
Apis mellifera.
Seasonal progression of solitary species
From the Archer sample the solitary wasp species were only recorded during the summer
months (Table 4). August was the most productive month for the number of species and
individuals, and June, the month when the solitary wasp species first emerged, the best
month for recording new species. The subterranean nesting species of the open sandy areas
were very evident including the spider-hunting Pompilus cinereus , the caterpillar-hunting
sand-wasp Ammophila sabulosa , the fly-hunting Crossocerus quadrimaculatus , the
grasshopper-hunting Tachysphex pompiliformis and Evagetes crassicornis which is a
cleptoparasite on other spider-hunting wasps.
TABLE 1
The number of species of aculeate wasps and bees recorded from Blaxton Common
No. species
Solitary wasps
Chrysididae
4
Mutillidae
1
Pompilidae
12
Eumenidae
3
Sphecidae
40
Total solitary wasps
60
Solitary bees
Colletidae
6
Andrenidae
17
Halictidae
15
Megachilidae
3
Anthophoridae
8
Total solitary bees
49
Total solitary wasps & bees
109
Social wasps & bees
Vespidae
4
Apidae
9
Total social wasps & bees
13
TABLE 2
The number of records and species of solitary wasps and bees recorded from
Blaxton Common in the Archer sample
Family
No. species
No. records
Chrysididae
4
1 1
Mutillidae
1
4
Pompilidae
10
36
Eumenidae
2
2
Sphecidae
26
65
Collectidae
6
8
Andrenidae
16
94
Halictidae
15
62
Megachilidae
3
6
Anthophoridae
8
27
23
Aculeate Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Blaxton Common
TABLE 3
The number of days on which each species of solitary wasp and bee was recorded at
Blaxton Common in the Archer sample
No.
records
No.
days
Species
No.
species
29
1
Chrysis angustula, Priocnemis schioedtei ,
Ancistrocerus parietinus, A. trifasciatus ,
Trypoxylon clavicerum, Crabro cribrarius*.
Crossocerus tarsatus, C. nigritus, Psen lutarius,
Psenulus pallipes , Pemphredon lethifer, Diodontus
minutus*, D. tristis*, Passaloecus gracilis,
P. singularis , Gorytes quadrifasciatus, G. tumidus,
Colletes daviesanus, C. succinctus*. Hylaeus
communis, II. confusus, H.brevicornis,
Andrena angustior, A. barbilabris* , Halictus
rubicundus, H. tumulorum. Lasioglossum fratellum,
L. punctatissimum. Megachile circumcincta.
29
34
2
Hedychridium ardens*, Arachnospila anceps,
A. nivalis, Anoplius concinnus, Episyron rufipes,
Trypoxylon figulus, Crossocerus palmipes,
C. wesmaeli, Psen dahlbomi, Pemphredon lugubris,
Andrena sounder sella, A. various, Lasioglossum
nitidiusculum. Megachile versicolor, Nomada
fabriciana. N. ruficornis, N. rufipes *.
17
36
3
Chrysis impressa, Priocnemis e.xaltata,
Arachnospila spissa, Ectemnius continuus,
Colletes fodiens, Andrena denticulata*. A. praecox ,
Lasiogalossum leucopum, Sphecodes gibbus.
Megachile willughbiella, Nomada flavoguttata,
Epeolus variegatus.
12
36
4
Mvrmosa atra. Anoplius viaticus*. Crossocerus
ovalis, Entomognathus brevis, Oxybelus uniglumis*.
Mellinus arvensis*. Lasioglossum leucozonium.
Sphecodes puncticeps. Nomada goodeniana.
9
35
5
Trichrysis cyanea, Andrena clarkella*. A.fulva,
A. tibialis, Lasioglossum rufitarse. L. villosulum,
Nomada leucophthalma* .
7
18
6
Lasioglossum calceatum, Sphecodes pellucidus*.
Nomada marshamella.
3
7
7
Tachysphex pompiliformis* .
1
48
8
Evagetes crassicornis. Crossocerus
quadrimaculatus, Ammophila sabulosa*. Andrena
chrvsosceles, A. scotica. A. subopaca.
6
36
9
Pompilus cinereus*. Andrena haemorrhoa,
A. nigroaenea. Sphecodes monilicornis.
4
10
10
Andrena bicolor.
1
1 1
11
Sphecodes fasciatus.
1
15
15
Andrena minutula.
1
*Local species in Watsonian Yorkshire.
From the Archer sample, the solitary bee species were recorded during the spring and
summer months, being more frequent during the spring months (Table 4). May (for the
24
Aculeate Wasps and Bees ( Hymenoptera : Aculeata) of Blaxton Common
spring species) and August (for the summer species) were the most productive months for
the number of species and individuals. The number of new species was most frequent
during the first month of emergence: April for the spring species and June for the summer
species. Typical spring species were the mining bees, Andrena , with their cleptoparasites,
Nomada , e.g. A. haemorrhoa with N. ruficornis and A. nigroaenea with N. goodeniana.
Typical summer species were the mining bees, e.g. Colletes fodiens with its cleptoparasite
Epeolus variegatus, Andrena denticulata with Nomada rufipes, Lasioglossum villosulum
with Sphecodes puneticeps and the aerial nesting Megachile willughbiella. Some bee
species were found in the spring and the summer having passed through two generations,
e.g. Andrena minutula with Nomada flavoguttata , A. bicolor with N. fabriciana and
Lasioglossum calceatum with Sphecodes monilicornis.
TABLE 4
The number of species, new species and individuals of solitary wasps and bees
recorded per month at Blaxton Common from the Archer sample
April
May
June
July
August
September
Wasps
No. species
0
0
19
20
32
7
No. new species
0
0
19
9
15
0
No. individuals
0
0
28
31
50
9
Bees
No. species
22
24
21
1 1
17
13
No. new species
22
6
8
4
6
2
No. individuals
32
56
32
24
31
22
Quality Assessment of Solitary Species
Six species are nationally scarce species (Falk, 1991 ). One species, Andrena tibialis, which
is a category A scarce species, reaches the northern boundary of its British distribution in
Watsonian Yorkshire. The other five species, which are category B scarce species, are
either at the northern boundary of their distribution ( Priocnemis schioedtei , Nysson
trimaculatus , Andrena various) or are more widespread in Britain ( Crossocerus palmipes ,
Nysson dimidiatus). No nationally rare species (Falk, 1991) have been found.
Ten species are rare in the context of Watsonian Yorkshire (Archer, 1993) (Episyron
rufipes, Tachysphex unicolor, Crossocerus palmipes, Psen lutarius, Diodontus luperus,
Nysson dimidiatus, N. trimaculatus, Hylaeus brevicornis, Andrena tibialis, Sphecodes
puneticeps).
There are 27 species of solitary wasps and bees, which although not rare in Watsonian
Yorkshire, have a local distribution, being more or less restricted to sandy habitats (Archer,
1994a). Eighteen of these local species are found at Blaxton Common and except for C.
peltarius are indicated in Table 3.
The 109 species of solitary wasps and bees can be considered to have a common,
frequent, occasional or rare status in Watsonian Yorkshire (Archer, 1993) (Table 5). By
giving each species a score depending on the above statuses, including a higher score for
the nationally scarce species, a quality score of 341 can be calculated (Table 6). Dividing
the quality score by the 109 species gives a species quality score of 3. 1 .
Ball (1992) proposed a status category scheme for invertebrates in a national context
(Table 7). Since such a status coding has not previously been applied solely to the aculeate
Hymenoptera of a particular locality the following proposals can be made. The nationally
rare and scarce statuses will remain the same as previously considered. The regionally
notable species are equated with the regionally rare species. Ball (1993, pers. comm.)
defined the term “local” as a species either restricted to a particular habitat type or to a
particular geographical area, or to widespread species which are intermediate in status
25
Aculeate Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Blaxton Common
between common and scarce species. At present there is no objective way of assigning a
common or local status to the species of the British aculeate Hymenoptera. From personal
experience 1 have therefore assigned common or local status based upon abundance and
distribution within England and Wales. Ireland was excluded as little information is
available on Irish distributions, as were the Channel Islands, since their fauna relates more
to France than to the British Isles, and Scotland, because its cooler climate has a profound
effect in reducing the diversity of aculeate Hymenoptera. Using the Ball national status
scheme a quality score of 209 and a species quality score of 1 .9 can be calculated (Table 7).
TABLE 5
The regional coding of the 109 species of solitary wasps and bees recorded from
Blaxton Common
Status
No. species
Common
42
Frequent
34
Occasional
23
Rare
10
TABLE 6
The regional quality score of the species of solitary wasps and bees recorded at
Blaxton Common
Status
Status Score
No. species
Quality Score
(A)
(B)
(A*B)
Common
1
41
41
Frequent
2
34
68
Occasional
4
22
88
Rare
8
6
48
Nationally Scarce
16
6
96
TABLE 7
The Ball national quality score
of the species of solitary wasps and bees recorded at
Blaxton Common
Status
Status Score
No. species
Quality Score
(A)
(B)
(A*B)
Common
1
65
65
Local
2
32
64
Regionally notable
4
6
24
Scarce B
8
5
40
Scarce A
16
1
16
Two objections can be raised against the Ball national status scheme. Firstly, since
regionally notable species are unknown for many parts of England, Ball's scheme cannot
be applied. Secondly logically a national scheme should give a species status based upon
that species' importance in a national and larger geographical setting but not in a smaller or
regional distribution.
To overcome the above objections I suggest the following scheme in which the statuses
of “Common" “Local" and “Regionally Notable" of Ball are replaced by: “Universal"
“Widespread" and “Restricted". These new' statuses are assigned from personal experience
of a species’ abundance and distribution within England and Wales. Universal species
would be common species found throughout England and Wales, which usually extend into
26 Aculeate Wasps and Bees ( Hymenoptera : Aculeata) of Blaxton Common
Scotland. Widespread species would be found in about three-quarters of England and
Wales, usually with a distribution in Wales, southern and midland England or in northern
and western England and Wales. Widespread species also may be found throughout
England and Wales but either with a local distribution or a less than common abundance.
Restricted species would mainly be found in about one-half of England and Wales, usually
confined to southern England and East Anglia. Using this new national status scheme, a
quality score of 205 (Table 8) and a species quality score of 1.9 can be calculated for
Blaxton Common.
Cleptoparasitic Load
The cleptoparasitc load (CL) is the percentage of aculeate species that are cleptoparasites
on other host aculeates (Table 9). At Blaxton Common the CL for the species of solitary
bees is higher than the CL for the species of solitary wasps.
Aerial Nester Frequency
The aerial nester frequency (AF) is the percentage of host aculeate species that have aerial
nest sites. Aerial nests are often in old beetle burrows in dead wood or the central cavities
of stems such as those of bramble. Subterranean nesters nest in the soil, usually in burrows
dug by themselves but sometimes in crevices or pre-formed burrows (Table 10). The AF
for the species of solitary wasps is higher than the AF for the species of solitary bees at
Blaxton Common.
TABLE 8
The Archer national quality score of the species of solitary wasps and bees
recorded at Blaxton Common
Status
Status Score
(A)
No. species
(B)
Quality Score
(A*B)
Universal
1
59
59
Widespread
2
43
86
Restricted
4
1
4
Scarce B
8
5
40
Scarce A
16
1
16
TABLE 9
The relative frequency of the cleptoparasitic species among the solitary wasps and bees
from Blaxton Common
No.
No.
Cleptoparasitic
hosts
cleptoparasites
Load
(H)
(C)
CL=100*C/(H+C)
Solitary Wasps
51
9
15.0
Solitary Bees
36
13
26.5
TABLE 10
The nesting habits of the host solitary wasp and bee species from Blaxton Common
No. aerial
No. subterranean
Aerial nester
nesters
nesters
frequency
(A)
(B)
AF=100*A/(A+S)
Solitary Wasps
22
29
43.1
Solitary Bees
5
31
13.9
Aculeate Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata ) of Bla.xton Common
27
W
oq
<
E-
CJ
<u
a.
c
o
-o
Q
C/3
cd
W)
c
UJ
c
CJ
u.
cj
x:
£
cj
C/3
cj
■a
c
03
CJ
u*
‘X C/3
XI
O -o
>< C
c
.2
d
o
C/3
S3
£
03
C/3
a.
C/3
03
s
27
2
c -2
o
C/3 C/3
JD
03
-a
c
03
c/3
C/3
<D
O
o
03
3
O'
CJ
.c
c
o
03
Q.
E
o
cj
sz c
— o
£ £
.9- E
z* O
go U
&|
£ 2
co E
^ c
^ <D
X3
c/3 b
05 £
CQ
c
o
E
E
o
U
a
u
O
Q.
E
o
Dh
T3 (U
U Q. C
.2 S °
>- ° E
<D X. C
d c E
c jy o
CJ<°
- c
« o
s I
s I
on (j
-a
o
9 «
> <u
E o
« u,
CJ
"O 4J
<u p. 5
,.gog
a) h j: fc
£ £ £ E
c .2 o
o - u
CJ <
-O
O W
O c/3
js 22
>— o
U-
00
2 OS
SC
o £
d ^
L_ sO
O OS
!/-> o
r~ —
— u">
o
o r-
(N
o _
Os
vO
O'
o
>/■> r-.
s 5
2 csl
2 ri
Tt —
<- (N
I I
£ <"
ro :
— (N
(N oc
<N <N
£ £
(N
I I
^ ©
in TJ‘
s ^
vO
*n
3s On
g 03
fN —
CN
_ CN
f^r <n
\Q
— cm
— <^i
<N fN
*
* r-
o c-i
x 5
m
O' vC
<N 00
sC _
"■t 0C
S 03
(N —
2
— (N
rn
— <N
s X)
<N 0^
s ^
^ &
m ^
c
r— s
*
ON
nC
o
ON
r^3
f— s
1
i
(N
rsi
ON
<N
CO
CJ
CJ
CJ
u.
O
CJ
C/3
CJ
E
E
CJ
x:
u.
o
CJ
C/3
>s
o
r
CJ
C/3
>s
<u
E
CD
JC
2
o
CJ
c^
"E
3
O*
CJ
C/3
"E
c
CJ
u.
C
CJ
CA
*E
3
O’
*E
c
o
CJ
u.
O
CJ
C/3
"E
3
O’
C/3
CJ
>s
C/3
>,
C/3
E
c^
.2
c^
O
• —
CJ
c
CJ
*5"
JO
03
*G
(U
Cl
C/3
"o3
C
"E
3
a
G
CJ
CL
GO
E
c
C/3
*E
3
O'
G
CJ
CL
CO
C/3
V.
CJ
x:
"E
3
a
G
CJ
CL
GO
<D
’5b
zc
CJ
u.
d
o
u.
<
z
0^
CQ
<
^ ON
c —
03 w
S fe
C x:
cj
es b
c o
C -o
“O o
<u
y
es .
-C
CJ
<u
CL
jD 03
2 C
C C
C —
— 03
cd c
c o
.2 ’5b
00 o
o ^
*
* *
species basi
28
Aculeate Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Blaxton Common
Discussion
Quality Assessment
The regional and national status schemes of Ball and Archer can be applied to other sandy
localities in Watsonian Yorkshire (Archer, 1984, 1985, 1988, 1989, 1992b), Lincolnshire
(Risby Warren, Archer, 1994b), Nottinghamshire (Sherwood Forest. Archer, in press) and
Leicestershire (Chamwood Forest, Archer, 1992a) (Table 11). The sandy habitats vary
greatly in size from the sand pit at Swincarr Plantation to the eroded Precambian mountain
range of Chamwood Forest. The number of species of aculeate wasps and bees varies from
35 species at Swincarr Plantation to 147 species at Chamwood Forest.
The quality and species quality scores of the Ball and Archer national status schemes for
each locality are of a very similar or even of the same value (Table 1 1). Blaxton Common
on its species quality score is ranked seventh on the Archer scheme and equal seventh with
Risby Warren on the Ball scheme out of the ten data sets. Both schemes would seem
suitable as a national status scheme but the Archer scheme is preferred for reasons given
earlier.
For the seven Yorkshire localities the regional and Archer national species qualities
scores show a significant linear positive relationship (correlation coefficient, r = 0.87,
p<0.02). Similarly the regional and Archer national quality scores show a highly significant
linear positive relationship (r = 0.98, p<0.001). At present these relationships cannot be
explored outside Watsonian Yorkshire as regional statuses for other parts of England are
not yet available. The regional species quality and quality scores are higher for each
locality than the Archer national scores (Table 1 1 ) because there are four, rather than three,
statuses before the national scarce species (Tables 6, 8).
FIGURE 1
The Lai number of species versus Ln area (ha) of the species of solitary wasps and bees
recorded from sandy habitats in Watsonian Yorkshire and elsewhere in England.
29
Aculeate Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Blaxton Common
For each locality the Archer national quality score shows a highly significant linear
positive relationship with the number of species (r = 0.95, p=0.001). This relationship is a
reflection ot a species-area relationship. Thus the larger the area of the locality the more
species are present, including an increased chance of nationally scarce and rare species
being found. A plot of Ln number of species versus Ln area in hectares gives a highly
significant relationship (r = 0.87, p=0.001) (Figure I). Removing the data for coniferized
Allerthorpe Common, which is a damaged habitat (Archer, 1989), increases the
significance ot the species-area relationship (r = 0.92, p<0.001 ) and gives the species-area
equation: LnS = 3.85 + 0.1 1 LnA, where S = number of species and A - area in hectares.
Cleptoparasitic Load & Aerial Nester Frequency
The wasp and bee cleptoparasitic loads are similar to values from other sandy localities
(Archer, 1992b, 1993).
Likewise, the wasp and bee aerial nester frequencies are similar to lowland heaths such
as pre-con iferised Allerthorpe and Strensall Commons (Archer, 1992b).
References
Archer, M. E. ( 1984) The solitary bees and wasps (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of a sand-pit at
Swincarr Plantation, near York. Naturalist 109: 23-25.
Archer, M. E. (1985) The wasps and bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Pompocali near
Leeds: the first 27 visits. Naturalist 110: 49-51.
Archer, M. E. (1988) The aculeate wasps and bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of my local
patch: Strensall Common, the first 70 visits. Naturalist 113: 25-30.
Archer, M. E. (1989) The wasps and bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Allerthorpe
Common before and after coniferization. Naturalist 114: 129-136.
Archer, M. E. (1990) The aculeate solitary wasps and bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of
Leicestershire. Trans. Leic. Lit. Phil. Soc. 84: 9-25.
Archer, M. E. (1992a) A comparison of the solitary wasps and bees (Hym. Aculeata) of
Chamwood Forest, Leicestershire and Lyford Moorland. Devon. Ent. man. Ma%. 128:
51-57.
Archer, M. E. (1992b) Aculeate wasps and bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Skipwith
Common and a comparison of Skipwith Common with Allerthorpe and Strensall
Commons. Naturalist 117: 19-25.
Archer, M. E. (1993) Recorder's fourth report on the Aculeate Hymenoptera in Watsonian
Yorkshire and the development of a quality scoring system. Naturalist 118: 13-15.
Archer, M. E. (1994a) Recorder’s fifth report on the Aculeate Hymenoptera in Watsonian
Yorkshire. Naturalist 119: 73-77.
Archer, M. E. (1994b) The Aculeate wasps and bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Risby
Warren in Watsonian Lincolnshire. Trans. Lines. Nat. Un. 23: 123-131.
Ball. S. (1992) The importance of the invertebrate fauna of Thome and Hatfield Moors: an
exercise in site evaluation. Thorne & Hatfield Moors Papers 3: 34-65.
Falk, S. (1991) A Review of the Scarce and Threatened Bees. Wasps and Ants of Great
Britain. Nature Conservancy Council, Peterborough.
Kloet. G. S. and Hincks, W. D. (1978) A Check List of British Insects 1 1(4): Hymenoptera.
Royal Entomogical Society. London.
30
BOOK REVIEWS
Aliens in the British Isles by R. Gwvnn Ellis. British Plant Life no. 2. National Museum
of Wales, Cardiff. 1993. £3.50.
This is another well illustrated booklet from the National Museum of Wales, which
provides an introduction to some 40 species of alien plants which have been deliberately
and/or accidentally introduced into the British Isles. The species cover a wide range from
bulbs and herbaceous plants to shrubs and trees; both old (Com Marigold) and new (New
Zealand Pigmyweed) arrivals to the country are featured. The effects of some of the more
invasive species, such as Rhododendron and Japanese Knotweed, are dealt with in the
introductory text. Each plant (given its English, Welsh and scientific names) is described
briefly and its British and world distributions provided by maps, the latter showing the
plant’s origin. It is to be hoped that further books in this series will be produced.
Recommended both for beginners and the more serious botanist.
DRG
Drought follows the Plow: cultivating marginal areas edited by M. H. Glantz. Pp. viii +
197 including 38 figures. Cambridge University Press. 1994. £25.00 hardback, £12.95
paperback.
Human interference is all too often detrimental to our environment. Changes in land use
ostensibly intended to improve human welfare, but often initiated through ignorance, are
particularly insidious. A century ago a belief that ploughing, cultivation and tree planting
could increase local rainfall, gave rise to the phrase ‘rain follows the plough’. In fact the
reverse is the case, especially in marginal lands where the risk of crop failure in any given
year is relatively high. Here climatic variability encourages exploitation in periods of
adequate rain, to be followed by disaster in dry periods. The result is environmental
degradation, destruction of ecosystems, or even complete desertification.
This little book presents background information on marginal lands and gives case
histories of their abuse from the Great Plains of N. America, N.E. Brazil, Australia, the
‘virgin lands’ of the former Soviet Union, and half a dozen areas of Africa. All are
depressingly similar. Vast areas are involved: between 1954 and 1958 an area three times
that of Britain was put into cultivation in the virgin lands scheme on the basis of experience
in the better-watered Ukraine and of wishful thinking. Furthermore* some areas were
already being used sensibly by pastoralists. Elsewhere, inappropriate and destructive
technology contributed to the damage of land that was simply unsuited to the kinds of
exploitation envisaged, and everywhere in developing countries rapid increases in human
populations exacerbate the problems. African National Parks, perhaps best exploited by
game animals, are also threatened. Their salvation may be to share the profits of tourism
with local populations. In the Great Plains of N. America reversion of some areas to
grassland populated by Bison may be the best solution.
Climatic variability in marginal lands is now well known but is regularly ignored by
‘developers’ and governments who could benefit more from the knowledge of ecologists
and naturalists than is often the case. Uessons are also to be learned from ‘backward’
societies which have often accommodated themselves to nature and its rhythm. Anyone
concerned with the careful management of our planet, not least policy makers, could read
this book with profit and should keep in mind that global warming may impose additional
stress on these fragile areas in the future.
GF
31
SOME RECORDS OF FEATHER MITES (ACARI: ASTIGMATA)
IN YORKSHIRE
BARRY NATTRESS
25 West Lea Drive, West Ardsley, Wakefield WF3 I DH
Introduction
Feather mites are members of the Acari, belonging to the group Astigmata. They have
neither stigmata or trachea. The gnathosoma is clearly visible from above. The idiosoma is
divided by the sejugal furrow into the anterior propodosoma and the posterior hysterosoma.
Both the propodosoma and the hysterosoma bear sclerotized shields. The coxa are fused to
the ventral surface of the idiosoma forming apodemata. The anus is ventral and. in the male,
is usually Hanked by the adanal discs. The legs generally comprise six free segments, and
include the ambulacrum - a bell-shaped sucker typically surrounding a very small claw.
The only recorded studies of feather mites in northern England were undertaken by the
Rev. John Edward Hull (1X63-1960), who completed his studies in Northumberland and
Durham (Hull 1934), and by Mr Harold (Harry) Britten (1870-1954), who worked only in
Lancashire and Cheshire. There are no records of feather mites in Yorkshire.
Materials and Methods
In order to collect the mites from bird feathers, the primaries, secondaries and retrices were
removed and examined individually under a stereo microscope. Mites were then
transferred, using a fine brush, into a drop of mountant on a slide and covered with a cover-
slip. The mountant used was polyvinyl lactophenol which had the benefit of clearing the
mites to allow a thorough examination. The remaining feathers were then examined in situ
using the stereo microscope and the resulting mites mounted as before. Once the mites had
cleared they were identified using a compound microscope with magnifications ranging
from lOOx to 400x (and very occasionally lOOOx).
Host Birds and Collection Localities
A. Bilton in Ainsty, SE4749, Swallow Hirundo rustica Linnaeus.
B. Bilton in Ainsty. SE4749, Magpie Pica pica (Linnaeus).
C. Bramham, Headley Hall Farm. SE4441. House Sparrow Passer domesticus (Linnaeus).
D Castleford, SE4325. Collared Dove Streptopelia decaocto Frivaldszky.
E. Chapel Allerton. Leeds. SE2937, Great Tit Parus major Linnaeus.
F. Drighlington, SE2228. House Sparrow Passer domesticus (Linnaeus).
G. Huddlestone Wood. Sherbum in Elmet, SE4633, Pheasant Phasianus colchicus
Linnaeus.
H. Malham, SD8966, Rook Con us frugilegus Linnaeus.
I Mickletown Ings, SE3927. Mute Swan Cygnus olor Gmelin.
J. Swinsty Reservoir, Washburn Valley. SE1952. Jay Garrulus glandarius (Linnaeus).
K. West Ardsley, SE2724. Blackbird Turdus merula Linnaeus.
L. Willow Garth. Knottingley, SE5124. Starling Sturnus vulgaris Linnaeus.
Species List - Acari
Family Analgesidae
Analgopsis mucronatus (Buchholz) E.
Analgopsis tridentulatus (Haller) L.
Megninia ginglymura (Megnin) G.
(Gaud. Atyeo & Barre 1985)
Diplaegidia columbae (Buchholz) D.
Family Alloptidae
Trouessartia rosterii (Berlese) L.
(Santana 1976)
Naturalist 120 1 1995)
32 Some Records of Feather Mites (Acari: Astigmata) in Yorkshire
Family Dermoglyphidae
Falculifer rostratus (Buchholz) D.
(Dubinin 1951)
Family Proctophyllodidae
Brephosceles anatina Dubinin I.
(Peterson 1971)
Proctophyllodes corvorum Vitzhum H.
(Atyeo & Braasch 1966)
Proctophyllodes glandarinus (Koch) J.
Proctophyllodes music us Vitzhum K.
Proctophyllodes picae (Koch) B.
Proctophyllodes stylifer (Buchholz) E.
Proctophyllodes troncatus Robin C; F.
Montesauria cylindrica (Robin) B.
(Park and Atyeo 1971)
Family Pterolichidae
Pteronyssoides obscurus (Berlese) A.
Pteronyssoides truncatus (Trouessart) L.
Gabucinia delibata (Robin) H.
Acknowledgements
I would like to thank Dr Anne Baker and Mr Colin Howes for checking for Yorkshire
records; Dr Sandy Baker for his continued help and encouragement; Mr Mike Smith for his
help in the laboratory in preparing specimens; Mr C. W. Pettitt of Manchester Museum for
access to the Britten collection of mites and the many friends who assisted by collecting the
avian specimens.
References
Avian Systematics
Howard, R. and Moore, A. (1980) A Complete Checklist of the Birds of the World. Oxford
University Press.
Acari
Atyeo, W. T. and Braasch, N. L. (1966) The feather mite genus Proctophyllodes. Bull.
Univ. Nebr. State Mus. 5. 1-354.
Dubinin, V. B. (1951) Feather mites ( Analgesidae ). Part 1 Introduction to their study. [In
Russian] Fauna USSR 6: 1-363.
Gaud, J., Atyeo, W. T. and Barre, N. (1985) Les acariens du genre Megninia (Analgidae)
parasites de Gallus gallus. Acarologia 26: 171-182.
Hull, J. E. (1934) Concerning British Analgidae (Feather Mites). Trans. Northern Nat. Un.
1: 200-206.
Krantz, G. W. (1970) A Manual of Acarology. Oregon State University, Corvallis Press.
Park, C. K. and Atyeo W. T. (1971) A generic revision of the Pterodectinae , a new sub-
family of feather mites (Sarcoptiformes: Analgoidea). Bull. Univ. Nebr. State Mus. 9:
39-88.
Peterson, P. C. (1971) A revision of the feather mite genus Brephosceles
(Proctophyllodidae: Alloptinae) Bull. Univ. Nebr. State Mus. 9: 89-172.
Radford, C. D. (1953) The mites (Acarina: Analgesidae) living on or in the feathers of
birds. Parasitology 42: 199-230.
Robin, C. H. & Megnin, P. (1877) Memoire sur les Sareoptides plumicoles. ./. Anal., Paris
13, 209-248, 391-429, 498-520 & 629-656.
Santana, F. J. (1976) A review of the genus Trouessartia. ./. Med. Entomol., Suppl. 1:
1-128.
33
A SUB-FOSSIL RECORD OF POMATIS ELEGANS (MULLER),
A MOLLUSC PREVIOUSLY UNRECORDED IN THE
EAST RIDING OF YORKSHIRE
R. MIDDLETON
School of Geography & Earth Resources, University of Hull, Hull HU6 7RX
AND B. R. KIRK
3 Kingsmead,Woodmansey HU 17 OTF
Pomatias elegans (Muller 1774) is a Mediterranean and west European snail with a
restricted, mainly southern, distribution in the British Isles (Kemey and Cameron 1979). In
December 1993 the authors discovered two shells of Pomatias elegans in Brantingham
Dale in the former East Riding of Yorkshire (Watsonian vice-county 61). Only a small
number of northern stations are known, the nearest to Brantingham being in the North
Riding at Forge Valley (Kerney 1968).
Brantingham Dale is a 2km long valley running approximately north-east to south-west,
on the south western scarp slope of the Yorkshire Wolds. The valley, although now largely
planted with woodland, still retains a good chalk grassland flora and is designated a Site of
Special Scientific Interest (SSSI). The shells were found low down on the valley side (SE
945308) in an area closely covered with a secondary woodland growth consisting mainly of
sycamore ( Acer pseudoplatanus) and ash (Fraxinus excelsior). Most of the ground surface
was unvegetated with a layer of leaf litter covering a chalk scree slope. Dog's mercury
( Mercurialis perennis) occurred in patches, particularly higher up the slope. The presence
of occasional cowslip (Primula veris) plants suggests that the canopy may have been more
open at some time in the past. A few tens of metres north of the site there is a band of herb-
rich chalk grassland extending from the floor to the rim of the valley.
The site held a relatively rich snail fauna: a list of all species recorded is contained in
Table 1 . The two original shells of P. elegans were found, in close proximity, in the leaf
litter. Further searches of the site have provided seven more shells. In an attempt to locate
live specimens the valley was visited on a mild, wet morning in May 1994, but although
many molluscs were active, no live specimens of P. elegans were seen.
P. elegans has not previously been recorded in the East Riding although Petch (1904)
considered the Wolds to be a suitable habitat; the Brantingham Dale area has been well
worked by conchologists since his time but no records of this species have been made. In
view of the potential importance of this find, the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union mollusc
recorder, Mr A. Norris, was sent one of the specimens. The identification of the specimen
was confirmed but Mr Norris, after consultation with the National Recorder. Dr Kemey,
believed the specimens to represent sub-fossil shells originating from a wash-out in the
chalk scree.
TABLE 1.
List of snails determined from shells found on the wooded scree slope Brantingham Dale.
Pomatias elegans (Muller)
Carychium tridentatum (Risso)
Cochlicopa lubricella (Porro)
Vertigo pygmaea (Drapamaud)
Papilla muscorum (Linne)
Vallonia costata (Muller)
VaUonia excentrica Sterki
Discus rotundatus (Muller)
Vitrea contracta (Westerlund)
*Oxychilus cellarius (Muller)
Cecilioides acicula (Muller)
*Cochlodina laminata (Montagu)
*Clausilia bidentata (Strom)
Helicella itala (Linne)
*Trichia striolata (Pfeiffer)
*Arianta arbustorum (Linne)
*Cepaea nemoralis (Linne)
* indicates species seen as live animals, others determined only from empty shells.
Naturalist 1 20 ( 1 995 )
34
A Sub-fossil of Pomatias elegans (Muller)
Although Brantingham Dale only appears to represent a former station of the species,
the record is still of considerable interest. Examination of the distribution map for the
species (Kemey 1972) reveals that the site fills a gap in the distribution of the species
between its northern limit in Forge Valley and former stations in Lincolnshire. It also raises
the possibility that the species may still be found on the Yorkshire Wolds.
The robust nature of the P. elegans shell and its burrowing habit mean that shells can
persist in the soil for many thousands of years. Indeed, specimens dating from the Bronze
Age have been found at Castlethorpe in the Ancholme valley, Lincolnshire, a little over
20km to the south of this site (Preece & Robinson 1984). It may be noteworthy that all of
the shells were found on the lower third of the valley side, indicating that a considerable
period of soil creep may have modified a more even distribution over the slope.
In Britain Pomatias elegans occurs in a variety of calcareous habitats but shows a
preference for limestone banks with a certain amount of scrubby cover and a rubbly
substrate in which to burrow (Kemey 1972, Cameron & Redfem 1976). As previously
noted, there is some botanical evidence to suggest that the site was once more open than at
present. The list of shells recovered from the site (Table 1) reveals many species typical of
dry open sites rather than of woodland. This is exemplified by the discovery of two worn
shells of Helicella itala, another species which is now in decline. It would be tempting to
suggest that it was changes in vegetation that made the area unsuitable for Pomatias
elegans. This may be true in a very local sense but the valley as a whole still has open
habitats which would be expected to be suitable. Pomatias elegans is known to have
declined in many parts of Britain (Kemey 1972) and is considered to be virtually extinct
over the whole of East Anglia and Lincolnshire (A. Norris pens. comm ). It is thought that
human disturbance and long term climatic changes, particularly a greater incidence of frost,
may be responsible (Kemey 1968).
Acknowledgements
The authors are indebted to Mr A. Norris of Leeds City Museum for his helpful comments
and confirmation of shell identifications.
References
Cameron. R. A. D. and Redfem, M. (1976) British Land Snails. Synopses of the British
Fauna no. 6. Academic Press, London.
Kemey, M. P. (1968) Britain’s fauna of land Mollusca and its relation to the Post-glacial
thermal optimum. Symp. zool. Soc. Loud. 22: 273 -291.
Kemey, M. P. (1972) The British distribution of Pomatias elegans (Muller). ./. Conch.
Lond. 27: -361 .
Kemey, M. P. and Cameron. R. A. D. (1979) A Field Guide to the Land Snails of Britain
and North-west Europe. Collins, London.
Petch, T. (1904) The published records of the land and freshwater Mollusca of the East
Riding, with additions. Trans. Hull Sci. Fid. Nat. Club 3: 121-172.
Preece, R. C. and Robinson, J. E. (1984) Late Devensian and Flandrian environmental
history of the Ancholme Valley, Lincolnshire: Molluscan and Ostracod evidence. ./.
Biogeog. 11: 319-352.
35
VERTIGO GEYERI (LINDHOLM 1925), A SNAIL NEW TO
YORKSHIRE
DAVID J. LINDLEY
29 Carr Manor Avenue, Leeds LSI 7 5BJ
On 21 May 1994, during the YNU excursion to the Law Dalby area, a single live specimen
ot Vertigo geyeri (Lindholm 1925) was found in the marshy area at Ellers Springs SSSI
(SE44/857849) by the author. Initially this was erroneously recorded as a juvenile specimen
of V. antivertigo (Drap.). Subsequently, a site list was received by the author form A. A.
Wardhaugh in which he recorded V. pygmaea (Drap.). The original specimen was then re-
examined and showed some marked differences to V. antivertigo. The specimen was then
forwarded to Dr M. P. Kcrney at The Natural History Museum. London who confirmed that
it was in fact V. geyeri, a new county record.
This record is only the third for this species from Britain, the others being Tam Moor,
Cumbria (Coles & Colville 1978) and Cors Erddreiniog. Anglesey (Colville 1994). It is
known from several sites in Central Ireland (Norris & Pickrell 1972). and is of local
occurrence in the remainder of Europe. This new record therefore extends its eastern range
within the British Isles.
Due to the interesting nature of the discovery the site was revisited on 19 September
1994. Weather condition on both dates were very wet. Ellers Springs is at an altitude of 60-
65 metres and consists of several springs emerging from the higher ground and flowing over
blocks of Jurassic limestone towards a shallow man-made pool. The areas between the
flowing water remain wet throughout the year and there are small tufaceous deposits
scattered throughout it. An unmettled track, which runs north to south, conveniently splits
the area in two, both sides of which have good sedge and rush growth, including Shoenus
nugricans L. and Cares lepidocarpa Tausch, interestingly recorded from all V. geyeri sites
in Britain. Other species of interest are Cares panicea L. and Cares dioica L.. which have
also been recorded from the Tam Moor site (Coles & Colville 1979). All four species were
growing on the western side of the track, where the original specimen was found.
This area was re-examined and a further three live specimens of V. geyeri were found in
clumps of sedge growing on tufaceous deposits. A very small quantity of litter was removed
by Dr B. Colville and when dried and sifted, this yielded a further 9 specimens. This area is
referred to as Site A in Table 1 .
The higher ground on the east of the track was also examined (site B in Table 1). This
area is of a more acid nature (D. R. Grant, pers. comm.) and did not produce any specimens
of V. geyeri although it did not show some similarities to site A. The third area examined
(site C in Table 1 ) was again on the eastern side and only slightly more elevated than site A.
This site was much wetter and had a smaller quantity of sedge and large quantities of moss.
Once again no specimens of V. geyeri were found. The last area to be examined (site D in
Table 1 ) on the immediate eastern side of the track showed the closest similarity to site A.
No specimens were found at the time but a small amount of litter later revealed a single
dead shell of V'. geyeri.
V. geyeri appears to be very limited in its distribution at this site, being restricted to an
area some 20 x 20 metres on the west side of the track. I do not believe that the single dead
shell found at site D was accidentally introduced by floods, as any debris would wash east
to west. V. geveri appears to be highly specific in its choice of microhabitat, being found
amongst sedge growing on tufaceous deposits in areas with no moss growth about the bases
of the plants. It also appears to be absent form the extremely wet areas in which other
vertiginidae are to be found. A further examination of similar sites in the area to establish its
presence or absence would be of great interest. Any specimens of Vertiginidae found in
such areas should be carefully examined.
A full list of associated mollusca found at sites A to D is given in Table 1.
I would like to thank Dr B. Colville and Mr A. Norris for their assistance and
Naturalist 1 20 ( 1 995 )
36
Road Verge Halophytes in S. E. Yorkshire
encouragement in the preparation of this note and Dr M. P. Kemey for verifying the original
specimen. I would also like to thank Dr. Clayton of English Nature for permission to revisit
the site.
TABLE 1
Associated Mollusca at Ellers Springs
A
B
C
D
Lymnaea truncatula
*
*
*
*
L. peregra
*
Carychium minimum
*
*
*
*
C. tridentatum
*
*
Oxyloma pfeifferi
*
*
*
*
Cochlicopa lubrica
*
*
Vertigo antivertigo
*
*
*
*
V. substriata
*
*
*
V. pygmaea
*
*
V. geyeri
*
*
Leiostyla anglica
*
*
Vallonia puichelia
*
Punctum phygmaeum
*
*
*
*
Arion intermedius
*
Vitrea crystaliina
*
*
Nesovitrea hammonis
*
*
*
*
Deroceras laeve
*
Euconulus alderi
*
*
*
*
Trichia hispida
*
A
B
C
D
= west side of track
= east side of track
Higher ground
Wetter area next to wall
Area immediately to east of track
References
Coles, B. and Colville, B. (1979) Catinelia arenaria (Bouchard Chantereaux ) and Vertigo
geyeri (Lindholm) from a base rich fen in North West England. J. Conch. 30: 99-100.
Colville, B. (1994) A second site for Vertigo geyeri (Lindholm) living in mainland Britain.
Conchologist' s Newsletter 130: 376-378.
Norris, A. and Pickrell, D. G. (1972) Notes on the occurrence of Vertigo geyeri (Lindholm)
in Ireland. J. Conch. 27: 411-417.
ROAD VERGE HALOPHYTES IN S.E. YORKSHIRE
PETER J. COOK
15 Park Avenue, Withernsea, Humberside HU 19 2JX
Summary
The de-icing of roads with rock salt has resulted in a large number of records for halophytic
plants from the major road and motorway network over the British Isles. During 1994
records for several maritime species were gathered from the verges of salt-treated minor
roads in the Holdemess area of S.E. Yorkshire. The presence of such populations alongside
relatively quiet minor roads has enabled preliminary observations to be made about their
distribution and hypotheses to be proposed regarding the mechanisms by which they are
dispersed. The ecological significance of the deliberate pollution of some the last remnants
of permanent grassland in an intensively farmed area of the region is noted.
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
Road Verge Halophytes in S. E. Yorkshire
37
Introduction
For several years I have been recording the presence and persistence of Danish
Scurveygrass (Cochlearia danica L.) along the verges and central reservations of trunk
roads and motorways in counties south of Yorkshire, but have not taken much notice of
what has been happening near home. Late in 1993 I noted Sea Aster (Aster tripolium L.)
growing by the A63 to the west of Hull, an event which stimulated me to look for other
maritime species along road verges in the Hull area.
When 1 first started my searches, in May 1994, I believed that halophytes were to be
found only on the verges and central reservations of salted trunk roads. I have now changed
this belief. So far I have noted Aster tripolium. Grass-leaved Orache (Atriplex littoralis L.),
Lesser Sea-spurrey ( Spergularia marina (L.) Griseb.) and Reflexed Saltmarsh-grass
( Puccinellia distans (Jacq.) Pari.) by the side of salted B" class and minor roads in
Holdemess. In addition, I have found C. danica on trunk roads to the west of Hull, probably
the first inland records for C. danica in V.C. 61. Another interesting find is the intermedia
subspecies of Plantago major , a subspecies with a predeliction for saline habitats.
The following list of records leads to a discussion about the possible methods of spread
within the Holdemess area and the ecological consequences of de-icing with rock salt.
Aster tripolium
The A63 populations of this species were sprayed by highway maintenance workers early in
1994 but I have since recorded it on the verge of the recently constructed Hedon bypass in
Holdemess [TA12], These first-year plants are vulnerable to roadside verge cutting and are
unlikely to flower and fruit in 1995. Coincidentally 1 found Foxtail Barley ( Hordeum
jubatum L.). This alien species from North America is usually introduced onto roadside
verges by the sowing of grass seed mixes and it persists where there is salt.
Atriplex littoralis
In two places [both TA22], plants were found in ‘grips’ (shallow drainage channels cut at a
right angle to the road edge) in which sand and grit had accumulated to form a 'micro dune’.
In two other places [both TA32] the plants were growing together with Spear-leaved Orache
(Atriplex prostrata Boucher ex DC.) on disturbed bare soil where cars are frequently parked
by the roadside.
Spergularia marina
This species was found in the same locations as the Atriplex littoralis and occupied areas of
the road verge which are persistently wet for most of the growing season, for example in
wheel ruts and gulleys in silt caused by running water. In general, records for this were
found while investigating other species and it is possible that it is more widespread than I
currently know.
S. marina was found growing ‘behind’ P. distans and in three places occurred in
considerable quantity in a small area suggesting that it had persisted there for at least one
fruiting season.
I have found S. marina forming continuous dense strips along the road verge south of
Carter Bar high on the Cheviots. Here it grows along the edge of gulleys where water has
coursed down the road verge, suggesting that running water is a principal method of spread
in this species. Holdemess is markedly short of inclines so I do not expect 5. marina to
become as widely distributed as P. distans.
Puccinellia distans
This species occurs in near-continuous strips along the verges of salted minor roads
throughout Holdemess, along the A63 and M62 and along some roads to the east side of the
Wolds (Driffield, Beeford, Bridlington etc.). It is so widespread along the salted minor
roads that I can hypothesize on its dispersal (see Discussion).
Cochlearia danica
Early in May I noted C. danica by the Ml 80 near Grimsby and then on the A 15 approach to
-■ Road Verge Halophytes in S. E. Yorkshire
the Humber Bridge in V.C. 54. As my journey progressed in V.C. 61 I found some near
Hessle, not far from the Humber Bridge [TA02], 1 believe that C. danica has entered V.C.
61 via the Humber Bridge rather than along the M62/A63. Later in the month I found it by
an exit slipway from a service station on the west-bound carriageway of the A63 near
Swanland/Ferriby [SE92] and then in considerable quantity along the eastbound
carriageway of the M62 near Howden/Saltmarshe Grange [SE72], In all of these places
plants were seen on the nearside verge at, and for a short distance after, the emergence of a
slip road onto the carriageway.
Plantago major suhsp. intermedia
This unusual plant occurs on Spurn [TA41] and on the splash and spray zone of the sea
defences and promenades at Withemsea [TA32], I have found it as a road verge species in
North Lincolnshire but only late in the 1994 season did I start to find it in Holdemess. In
both locations it occurred with subsp. major but occupied otherwise bare ground just off the
road surface itself and in accretions of silt in potholes at the road edge. The major
subspecies occurred on bare ground further away from the road edge, clearly demonstrating
the ecological differences between the two.
Discussion
Preliminary observations on the distribution of P. distans on minor roads reveal that it
occurs only in places where the verge abuts directly to the road (i.e. no footpaths) and then
only where the road surface is level with or higher than the verge. This is an important
factor for salt exposure and tor the resulting denudation of competitive species along the
margin of the road verge. It occurrs equally abundantly on either side of the road
irrespective of the compass-point orientation of the road, suggesting that prevailing wind
direction and carriage of caryopses by wind-blown water spray is unlikely to be a factor in
the side-relative distribution ot populations, as seen on motorways, but may be an important
factor in the spread of caryopses with the flow of traffic.
The caryopses are ripe and are already dehiscing by August, just as the flail mowers
emerge, this could be the main agency for spreading P. distans and perhaps also some of the
other road verge species, e.g. Atriplex prostrata , which occur extensively alone our road
verges, both treated and untreated.
P. distans ^produces a further crop of caryopses in autumn. I suspect that these are spread
by motor vehicles which could pick up caryopses in mud and slush on mudflaps and wheel
arches, especially on their nearside. Evidence for this is the presence of P. distans only on
the nearside verge of several unsalted roads for a distance of a few metres from their
junction with a salted road. In some respects this situation is analogous to the presence of a
seemingly greater abundance of C. danica and P. distans over a short distance on the
nearside verge at the bottom of slip roads onto motorways and at road intersections In both
cases this zone is where vehicles are accelerating and where the likelihood of lumps of mud
and slush to fall away from the vehicle is the greatest.
I believe that motor vehicles themselves are important carriers of seed and caryopses and
as the agents ot long-distance distribution to form new foci of growth from which spread bv
other agencies, such as flail mowing, wind and spray conditions and carriage by flowing
water, then proceeds. J 6
Although it is interesting to make these records, observations and hypotheses, I am aware
o the ecological damage that salt de-icing, a deliberate pollution, causes. The road verges
ot Holdemess are some of the last remnants of undisturbed neutral grassland in this
intensively tanned area. Although the salt-affected verge is only a strip of about half a metre
width, n is this zone which has a regularly-maintained mowing regime (correctly timed or
not) and therefore has the most potential for maintaining a diverse Bora. For economic
reasons salting is confined to the busier roads and it is still possible to find 'jewels' on
some of the back lanes. J
This study has caught the situation early with respect to S. marina and A. littoralis, i.e.
39
Botanical Reports for 1993: Flowering Plants and Ferns
focal populations have only just started to appear and I intend to establish a ‘baseline’
distribution of these species within selected mapping tetrads during 1995 to enable
subsequent spread to be monitored. Continued recording of the spread of what are effective
‘salt pollution indicators’ is essential in the preparation of justified opposition to salt de-
icing.
BOTANICAL REPORTS FOR 1993:
FLOWERING PLANTS AND FERNS
Compiled by L. MAGEE
The recorders thank all those who have sent in records. The names of contributors are
given in full the first time that they appear in each report, initials being used thereafter. The
names of species are in accordance with those used in Stace, Clive A. ( 1991 ) New Flora of
the British Isles and Kent, D. H. ( 1992) List of Vascular Plants of the British Isles.
*Denotes a first v.c. record
East Yorkshire (VC61) (F. E. Crackles)
This report contains additional 10 km x 10 km square records for species of significance
and hybrids not previously recorded for more than eleven squares, except where otherwise
stated.
Polystichum aculeatum (L.) Roth Roadside ditch, near Molescroft 54/04, 1992: Dews.
Clematis vitalba (L.) Embankment of disused railway, Middleton 44/94; J.D.
Rannuculus aquatilis L. Swine Moor 54/04, 1991; J.D.
R. circinatus Sibth. Pond by Market Weighton Canal, Newport 44/83: Freshwater
Biological Section field meeting, per D. Grant.
Fumaria densiflora DC. Arable, Etton Wold 44/94: J.D. conf. Dr. M. G. Daker, per E.
Chicken. The first v.c. 61 record for this species as a British native. Previous records:
Hull docks, 1902; C. Waterfall: Bridlington 54/16. 1945, E. W. Holder, Herb. LIV are
taken to be of casual status.
Myosoton aquaticum (L.) Moench Swine Moor, Beverley 54/04; J.D.
Salix triandra x S. viminalis = S. x mollissim Hoffm. ex Elwert Bank of River Derwent,
Wheldrake Ings 44/74; C. D. Preston.
S. viminalis x S. caprea = .S’, x sericans Tausch ex A. Kemer Bank of River Hull, near
Tickton 54/04, 1992; J.D.
Descurainia sophia (L.) Webb ex Prantl Farmland rubbish tip, near Leven 54/04, 1991;
J.D.
Barberea stricta Andrz. Drain Bank, near Long Riston 54/14; J.D.
*Rorippa sylvestris x R. amphibia = R. x anceps (Wahlenb.) Reichb. Marshy grassland,
Wheldrake Ings 44/74; C.D.P.
R. amphibia (L.) Besser Flooded excavation, near Eske 54/04; J.D.
Coronopus didymus (L.) Smith Hemingborough 44/63; M. Hunter and arable, Etton Wold
44/94; J.D.
Cakile maritima Scop. Below cliffs, Hornsea 54/24. 1991; J.D.
Oenthera glazioviana Micheli ex C. Martius Gravel pit. Brandesburton 54/14. 1992; J.D.
Geranium pyrenaicum Burman f. Roadside verge, near South Dalton 44/94. 1992; J.D.
Mvosotis ramosissima Rochel Gravel pit. near Brandsburton 54/14: J.D.
Mentha arvensis x M. aquatica = M . x verticillata (L.) Wheldrake Ings 44/74; C.D.P.
Callitriche hamulata Kuetz. ex Koch Wheldrake Ings 44/74; C.D.P.
Linaria repens (L.) Miller Embankment of disused railway, near Leconfield 54/04, 1991
and disused chalk quarry, Goodmanham 44/94: J.D.
Centaurea cyanus L. Roadside verge, near Barfhill 54/04. 1992, not re-found, 1993; J. D.
This now rare species was in plenty in a cornfield in the same area in 1957; F. E Crackles.
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
40
Botanical Reports for 1993 : Flowering Plants and Ferns
Lactuca serriola L. Beverley 54/04, 1992; J.D. and disused railway, Middleton 44/94; J.D.
L. virosa L. Disused railway, Enthorpe 44/94; J.D.
Aster tripolium L. Frequent by Clive Sullivan Way from just east of the Humber Bridge to
William Wright Dock in west Hull 54/02; P. Cook.
Conyza canadensis (L.) Cronq. Disused railway, Goodmanham 44/84 and Middleton
44/94; J.D.
Anthemis cotula L. Roadside verge, near Leven 54/04, 1992; J.D.
Bidens tripartita L. Marshy grassland, Wheldrake Ings 44/74; C.D.P.
*Elodea nuttallii (Planchon) H. St. John Barmston Drain, Beverley 54/04; J.D. and ditch,
Wheldrake Ings 44/74; C.D.P.
Potamogeton perfoliatus L. By bridge over the River Derwent, Wheldrake Ings 44/64;
C.D.P.
P. pusillus L. Fishing pond, Newport 44/83; FWBS field meeting, per D.G.
*P. trichoides Cham. & Schldl. Former course of the River Derwent, and ditch Wheldrake
Ings 44/74; C.D.P.
Carex divulsa Stokes subsp. leersii (Kneucker) W. Koch Disused railway, near Keyingham
54/22; P.C., det. C. Jermy.
Nardus stricta L. Swine Moor 54/04, 1990; J.D., confirming an old record.
Milium effusum L. Oldflat Wood, Harswell 44/84; M. Whittaker.
Cephalanthera damasonium (Miller) Druce One Plant, disused railway between Gardham
and Kipling Cotes 44/94; A. Marshall.
Dactylorhiza fuchsii x D. purpurella = D. x venusta (Stephenson & T. A. Stephenson) Soo
Waste ground, Withemsea 54/32; M. Cook.
North-East Yorkshire (VC62) (T. F. Medd)
Ceratophyllum demersum L. Ditch, Rye Mouth 44/87; YNU Fresh Water Biological
Section Excn.
Ranunculus penicillatus (Dumort.) Bab. ssp. pseudofluitans (Syme) S. Webster Costa Beck
44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
Chenopodium bonus-henricus L. Roadside, Marishes 44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
Stellaria neglecta Weihe between R. Rye and Derwent 44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
S. palustris Retz. Between R. Rye and Derwent 44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
Sagina nodosa (L.) Fenzl Spaunton Knowl 44/79; YNU Excn.
Silene noctiflora L. Caulkleys, Bank, Nunnington 44/67; T.F.M. Confirmation of old
record.
Hypericum elodes L. Spaunton Moor 44/79; YNU Excn.
Lysimachia nummularia L. Between R. Rye and Derwent 44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
Coronopus squamatus (Forssk&l) Asch. Bootham Stray, York 44/65; York & DFN Soc.
Rubus nemoralis P. J. Mueller Hutton Common 44/78 and Lastingham 44/79; YNU Excn.
det. D. Grant.
R. ulmifolius Schott Haybum Wyke 54/09; YNU Bry. Sec. Excn. det. D.G.
R. vestitus Weihe Hutton Common 44/78; YNU Excn. det. D.G.
R. mucronulatus Boreau Buttercrambe Wood, Bossall 44/76; D.G.
R. pallidus Weihe Hutton Common 44/78; YNU Excn. det. A. Newton.
R. dasyphyllus (Rogers) E. Marshall Buttercrambe Wood 44/76; D. G. Hutton Common
44/78; YNU Excn. det. D.G.
R. eboracensis W. C. R. Watson Hutton Common 44/78; YNU Excn. and Haybum Wyke
54/09; YNU Bry. Sec. excn. det. D.G.
R. warrenii Sudre Hutton Common 44/78; YNU Excn. det. D.G.
Primus padus L. Troutsdale 44/98; D.G.
Melilotus officinalis (L.) Lam. Banks of R. Dove, Keldholme 44/78; L. Magee
Euonymus europaeus L. Caulkleys Bank 44/67; T.F.M.
Euphorbia exigua L. Caulkleys Bank 44/67; T.F.M. Banks of R. Rye 44/87; YNU FWBS
Excn.
41
Botanical Reports for 1993: Flowering Plants and Ferns
Silaum silaas (L.) Schinz & Thell. Hutton Common 44/78; YNU Excn. Between R. Rye
and Derwent 44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
Myosotis secunda A. Murray Strensall Common 44/65; R. Freer.
Verbena officinalis L. Banks of R. Rye 44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
Lamium confertum Fries Ingleby Greenhow 45/50; V. Jones per J. Blackburn. First record
this century.
Clinopodium ascendens (Jordan) samp. Caulkleys Bank 44/67; T.F.M. Confirmation of a
pre-1930 record in Atlas.
Veronica catenata Pennell Stream, Bootham Stray, York 44/65; Y&DFNS.
Pinguicula vulgaris L. Spaunton Moor 44/79; YNU Excn.
Utricularia vulgaris L. Still at Strensall Common 44/65; flowered very well in 1993, R.
Freer.
Legousia hybrida (L.) Delarbre Set-aside land, Caulkleys Bank 44/67; Y&DFNS. Near
Kirkbymoorside 44/78; N. Sykes.
Sherardia arvensis L. Caulkleys Bank 44/67; T.F.M. Hutton Common 44/78; YNU Excn.
Valerianella dentata (L.) Pollich Caulkleys Bank 44/67; T.F.M. Not in atlas but
confirmation of 1973 record.
Potamogeton friesii Rupr. R. Rye (at junction with Costa Beck) 44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
Eleocharis quinqueflora (F. Hartmann) O. Schwarz Tranmire Plain 44/79; YNU Excn.
Carex disticha Hudson Aldwark Moor 44/46; Y&DFNS.
C. dioica L. Tranmire Plain 44/79; YNU Excn.
C. vesicaria L. Rye Mouth 44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
Melica uniflora Retz. Aldwark Wood 44/46; T.F.M.
Helictotrichon pubescens (Hudson) Pilger between R. Rye and Derwent 44/87; YNU
FWBS Excn.
Molinia caerulea (L.) Moench Aldwark Moor 44/46; Y&DFNS.
Typha angustifolia L. Marishes 44/87; YNU FWBS Excn.
'South West Yorkshire (VC63) (D. R. Grant)
Equisetum telmateia Ehrh. Old railway, Worborough 44/3303; Dr. L. Lloyd-Evans.
Ranunculus lingua L. Potteric YWT Reserve 44/5900; D. Bramley.
R. circinatus Sibth. Mickletown Flash 44/4027; YNU Freshwater Biological Section Excn.
Carpinus betulus L. Nr. Oughtibridge 43/3192; E. Thompson.
Salix repens L. Kirkthorpe 44/3520; C. Hartley.
Rorippa amphibia (L.) Besser Mickletown Flash 44/4027; D. R. Grant.
Primula vulgaris Hudson Cow Ark. Bowland 34/6943; L.L1-E.
Rubus tuberculatus Bab. Silcoates. Wakefield 44/3022; D.R.G.
R. warrenii Sudre Gomersal 44/2125; T. Schofield.
R. ulmifolius Schott. Storrs Hill, Ossett; D.R.G.
R. rufescens Fef & P. J. Mueller Worsborough Reservoir 44/3403; D.R.G.. det. A. Newton.
R. nemoralis P. J. Meuller Thorpe Marsh YWT Reserve 44/5809; T.S.
R. hylocharis W. R. C. Watson High Bradfield. 43/2692; D.R.G.
R echinatus Lindley Pildacre Hill. Ossett 44/2620: D.R.G., det. A. Newton.
R newbouldii Bab. Riverside, Dewsbury 44/2521: D.R.G.. det. A. Newton.
R sprengelii Weihe Beeley Wood. Oughtibridge 43/3192; T.S.
R. scissus W. R. C. Watson St. Ives, Bingley 44/0838: D.R.G.: Chellow Dene. Bradford:
44/1 134; T.S.; Thome Waste Reserve 44/7215; YNU Botanical Section Excursion.
R. plicatus Weihe & Nees Thome Waste Reserve 44/7215: D.R.G.
Smyrnium olusatrum L. South Elmsall 44/4712; E.T.
Pastinaca saliva L. Shaftholme, nr. Doncaster 44/5609; E.T.
Foeniculum vulgare Miller Nomianton 44/3823; D. Procter.
Mentha suaveolens Ehrh. Pildacre Hill. Ossett 44/2620: D.R.G.
Melampyrum pratense F. High Bradtield 43/2692; F.LI-E.
Inula conyzae (Griess.) Meikle Knottingley 44/4922: D.P.
42
Botanical Reports for 1993: Flowering Plants and Ferns
Lactuca serriola L. Pugney’s, Wakefield 44/3218; D.P.
Glyveria notata L. Chevall, Carr Head. Glusbum 34/9744; T.S.
Air a caryophyllea L. Railway banking, Methley 44/3728; T.S.
Vulpia myuros (L.) Gmelin Upton Colliery tip 44/4813; J. Lunn.
Dactylorchis purpurella (Stephenson & T. A. Stephenson) Soo Redbrook tip, near
Barnsley 44/3207; J.L.
Mid-West Yorkshire (VC64) (L. Magee)
A large number of interesting records were received from all over the vice-county and it
is only possible to list a selection here. The recorder thanks the contributors.
Asplenium adantium-nigrum L. Ashlar goits, Barden Moor 44/05; L. Magee.
Phyllitis scolopendrium (L.) Newman Sherbum-in-Elmet 44/4933; E. Thompson.
Ranunculus lingua L. Lowther Pond, Allerton Bywater 44/42; YNU Freshwater Biological
Section Excursion.
Clematis vitalba L. Barlow Common 44/6328; E.T.
Actaea spicata L. Penyghent Gill 34/8774; D. R. Grant.
Cerastium arvense L. Bank of River Ouse, York 44/5456; P. Abbott.
Hypericum humifusum L. Stubbings Moor 44/34; P.A.
Salix purpurea L. Hackfall Woods 44/2377; YNU Excn.
Barbarea intermedia Boreau Nr. Hellifield 34/8555; P.A.
Hottonia palustris L. Old Railway, east of Wetherby 44/44; P.A.
Crassula helmsii (Kirk) Cockayne Famham gravel pit 44/3559; S. J. Evison.
Rufus scissus W. R. C. Watson Adel Valley, Leeds 44/2839; D.R.G.
R. spregelii Weihe Bolton Abbey 44/0755; D..R.G. Brayton Barff, Selby 44/5830; D.R.G.
R. anisacanthos G. Braun Adel Valley, Leeds 44/2839; D.R.G., det. A. Newton.
R. eboracencis W. R. C. Watson Shipley 44/1638; D.R.G.
R. warrenii Sudre Neat Pateley Bridge 44/1644; D.R.G.
Securigera varia (L.) Lassen Temple Newsam 44/33; L.M.
Myriophyllum spucatum L. Fish Pond, Sherbum-in-Elmet 44/43; L.M.
Epilobium brunnescens (Cockayne) Raven & Engelhom Goits on Barden Moor 44/05;
L.M.
Geranium versicolor L. Malham village 34/96; L.M.
Oenanthe aquatica (L.) Poiret Red House Wood, Moor Mokton 44/5257; P.A., Nether
Poppleton 44/5455; P.A.
Lithospermum officinale L. Scotton Banks, Knaresborough 44/3357; D.R.G.
Myosotis stolonifera (D.C.) Gay ex Leresche & Levier Angram Reservoir 44/07; L.M.,
Scarhouse Reservoir 44/07; L.M.
Limosella aquatica L. Near Staveley 44/3663; D. J. Tennant.
Littorella uniflora (L.) Asch. Barden Reservoir 44/05; L.M.
Veronica anagallis-aquatica L. Strid Wood, Bolton Abbey 44/05; L.M.
Parentucellia discosa L. Caruel Nr. Micklefield 44/4332; P.A.
Cicerbita macrophylla (Willdr.) Wallr. All Alone, Bramhope 44/2342; L.M., King Lane,
Alwoodley 44/2841; L.M. Scotland Lane, Horsforth 44/2324; L.M.
Conyza canadensis (L.) Cronq. West Bank of River Ouse, York 44/55; L.M.
Senecio fluviatilis Wallr. Tam House, Malham 34/86; YNU Excn.
Potomogeton pectinatus L. Nr. Staveley 44/3663; D.J.T.
P. barchtoldii Fieber, Nr. Staveley 44/3663 D.J.T.
Zannichellia palustris L. Ditches nr. Gascoigne Wood sidings 44/53; YNU FWBS Excn.,
Lowther Pond, Allerton Bywater 44/42; YNU FWBS Excn.
Lemna trisulca L. Lowther Pond, Allerton Bywater 44/42; YNU FWBS Excn.
Carex paniculata L. Beaverdyke Reservoir 44/2 1 54; D.R.G.
Carex strigosa Hudson Hackfall Wood 44/2377: YNU Excn. In new sites and increasing:
Loftwood, Bilston-in-Ainsty 44/4748; P.A.
Carex nigra (L.) Reichard var. juncea Tam Fen, Malham 34/86; YNU Excn. conf. D.R.G.
43
Botanical Reports for 1993: Flowering Plants and Ferns
Calamagrostis stricta Koeler Tam Fen, Malham 34/86; D.R.G., confirmation of old record.
Dactylorchis fuchsii x D. praetermissa = D. x grandis (Druce) P. Hunt Roadside nr.
Gascoigne Wood sidings 44/53; YNU FWBS Excn., more than 100 flowering spikes.
Correction to 1986 Report
Ranunculus fluritans L. Collingham 44/42; L. Magee = R. penicillatus subsp.
pseudofluitans (Syme) S. Webster.
North-West Yorkshire (VC65) (T. F. Medd)
Equisetum pratense Ehrh. High Birk Hat, Baldersdale 35/91; M. Sykes.
Primula farinosa L. Deepdale 34/78; A. J. Stoddard.
Potentilla palustris (L.) Scop. Hutton Moor 44/37; Dr. E. Kay.
Limosella aquatica L. Nosterfield 44/27; H. E. Stace.
Campanula glomerata L. Leeming Bar; 44/29; E.K.
Festuca vivipara (L.) Smith Uldale; A.J.S.
Paris quadrifolia L. Dentdale 34/78; A.J.S.
Casuals and Adventives (E. Chicken)
Since the 1992 report, 100 records have been received from five recorders for 60 taxa.
More than half of these records are from J. Martin for plants found in the fields treated with
shoddy in theWakefield area. A number of our members were able to join the B.S.B.l.
recorders Field meeting in this area and saw many of the plants that have been listed in this
report from year to year. Particularly noteworthy this time are Hedysarum coronarium of
which it is thought there are only about four confirmed British records since 1930, and
Berkheya rigida. The following records are a selection of those received. The contributor is
assumed to be the detemiiner unless otherwise stated.
Brassica juncea (L.) Czern. (61) Birdseed alien in garden, Driffield 54/05; E. Chicken.
Fallopia baldschuanica (Regel) Holub (64) near Nessfield, llkley 44/04; D. R. Grant.
Tolmiea menziesii (Pursh) Torrey & A. Gray (63) Bankfield near Cottingley Bridge 44/13;
D.R.G.
Spiraea douglassii Hook. (63) Filled in mill dams. Holmfirth 44/10; Mrs J. Lucas.
Coronilla scorpioides (L.) Koch (63) Shoddy treated field, Kirkhamgate 44/32: J. Martin.
B.S.B.l. meeting per E.C.
Hedysarum coronarium L. (63) Arable, Brandy Carr Farm. Carr Gate 44/32. 1992; J.M.
det. E. J. Clement.
Lathyrus grandiflorus Smith (63) Bankside in urban Meltham 44/01; J.L.
Lupinus x regalis Bergmans (61) Driffield by-pass 54/058; E.C.
Acer platanoides L. (63) Bank of R. Holme. Holmfirth 44/40; J.L.
O xalis megalorhiza Jacq. (62) Greenhouse weed. Sutton-under- Whitestonecliffe 44/84; E.C.
Erodium cygnorum Nees 963) Arable. Woodhouse Lane Farm, E. Ardsley 44/22, 1989;
J.M. det. E.J.C.
Coriandrum sativum L. (63) Roadside. Meltham 44/10; J.L.
Brunnera macrophylla (Adams) I. M. Johnston (64) Comer of wood. Long Marston 44/95;
Mrs P. P. Abbott.
Sambucus racemosa L. (64) Woodland near Hellifield 34/85; P.P.A.
Berkheya rigida (Thunb.) Bolus & Wolley-Dod ex Adams & Salt (63) Arable,
Kirkhamgate 44/22; J.M. det. E.J.C.
Scolymus maculatus L. (63) Woodhouse Lane Farm. E. Ardsley 44/22; J.M. conf. E.J.C.
Aponogeton distachyos L.f. (63) By a wharf. Leeds 44/33; P.P.A.
Corrections to 1986 and 1993 Reports:
Eryngium bourgatii Gouan (64) 1986 as redetermined by Dr. A. C. Leslie as Eryngium
giganteum Bieb.
Solatium sisymbriifolia Lam. (63) 1990 Doncaster was det. J.M. conf. E.J.C.
44
BOOK REVIEW
Waterfowl Ecology and Management by Guy A. Baldassarre and Eric G. Bolden. Pp.
609, with many b/w photographs, line drawings and diagrams. John Wiley, New York,
1994. £58.00.
This large volume deals with the waterfowl of North America with an emphasis on the
preservation and management of habitats for breeding and hunting, but it is much more i
than that. For anyone interested in this group of birds beyond the identification level, it is a i
most fascinating and informative read. In fact, it covers the whole sphere of the group’s i
ecology, including chapters on Classification, Courtship, Reproductive and Feeding
Ecology, Major Wetland Habitats, Brood Rearing, Mortality and Harvest Management, this
last named chapter including some staggering statistics. For instance, an extensive study in (
the 1970s by the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service estimated that humans caused the deaths of j
196 million birds per year which represented only 1.9% of the total waterfowl population
in the Continental United States. Hunting accounted for 61%, collision with man-made j
objects (TV towers etc.) 32% and pollution 2%, with other, more obscure categories
accounting for 1%. Since the 1980s, the annual harvest has remained below 10 million due >
to restrictive practices (i.e. bag limits) and lower populations.
Death due to epizootics is often on a large scale; for example, in the 1970s a Health
Research Centre in Wisconsin recorded the deaths of 25,000 to 100,000 waterfowl and ;
mass deaths of 5,000 to 10,000 were commonplace. Disease may now kill millions of birds
each year and the problem has expanded in both geography and severity during the last 25
years. Without extensive monitoring, these mass deaths are often masked by rapid removal
by predators, as in Missouri in 1980-81 when of 4,165 carcasses located, having died from
non-hunting causes, only 934 were intact, the remainder having been partly eaten by j
scavengers. Of the intact carcasses, which were monitored daily, 44% disappeared after
day 1, 68% by day 2, 79% by day 3 and 82% by day 4. This answers the question asked of
me recently by a wildfowling friend when discussing the problems of lead shot: ‘Why
don't we see lots of dead ducks lying around?’
No less than 3,000 tons of lead shot were deposited into the wetlands of North America
each year during the 1960s. It is likely that shot which misses its intended quarry ultimately
causes the death of very many birds through ingestion and subsequent lead poisoning. It i
has been shown that those species feeding on hard grains such as maize grind up lead shot
in the gizzard much more quickly than those feeding on softer grains and vegetation and i
are thus adversely affected much more severely. Although an unpopular move with many
hunters, the phasing out of lead shot and the introduction of non-toxic alternatives will i
obviously benefit the waterfowl populations.
Each chapter ends with a list of the literature cited and for Major Wetland Habitats in
North America there are no fewer than ten pages of references. The final chapter puts the
case for and against hunting and argues convincingly that habitat management aimed in
part at providing large duck and goose populations for hunting has benefited many species.
Ironically, it is the rarer non-hunted species that are in danger of extinction or severe
reduction in their numbers, due in the main to reduction of habitat.
An excellent book, packed with information which is presented in a clear and very
readable manner. Anyone interested in the subject, whether at academic level or as
someone who simply enjoys watching, or even shooting and eating ducks and geese will
find much of interest within its 600 pages.
JRM
FOR SALE
Complete run of The Naturalist (1958-1990):
132 unbound copies as issued together with title-pages.
Offers to
Professor M. R. D. Seaward,
University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1DP
(Tel: 0274 384212)
‘The Naturalist’ is available in microform
UNIVERSITY MICROFILMS INTERNATIONAL
300 North Zeeb Road
Dept PR
Ann Arbor. Mi 48106
USA
White Swan House
Godstone
Surrey RH9 8LW
England
Binding
Why not have your copies of The Naturalist bound into volumes?
One year’s issues per volume, or alternatively two years in one
volume at less cost than binding as two separate volumes. We are
also experienced and expert in the re-binding and repairing of all
books.
Spink & Thackray
Broomfield Bindery
Back Broomfield Crescent
LEEDS LS6 3BP Telephone 0532 780353
The Irish Naturalists’ Journal
A quarterly journal of Irish natural history'
Edited by Dr Robin Govier
Annual subscription £12.50. IR £14.00
Further information from the Editor. INJ
Medical & Biological Centre, Lisburn Road.
Belfast BT9 7BL
Printed in Great Britain by Titus Wilson & Son. Kendal
ISSN 0028-0771
Latest publication of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
THE FRESHWATER CRUSTACEA OF YORKSHIRE
a faunistic & ecological survey
by
GEOFFREY FRYER
The crustacean fauna of Yorkshire reflects the great physiographic diversity of the
region. Adopting an ecological approach, this book considers the Yorkshire fauna in
relation to climate, topography, geology, soils and water chemistry, always keeping in
mind that it is dealing with living organisms whose habits, requirements and
physiological limitations determine exactly where they live.
Matters covered include the ecological background; faunal assemblages and their
regional attributes; an analysis of the factors that determine distribution patterns, many
of which are mapped; wide geographical aspects; and conservation. Large areas, such
as the Pennines, Howgill Fells, North Eastern uplands and the lowland plains are
surveyed. So too are localised regions including Whemside, the Malham area, lowland
heaths, and the largest lakes, as well as habitats such as upland tarns, seepages, cold
springs, small lowland ponds, inland saline waters. Notes are given on every species
recorded, including parasitic forms.
Price £16.00 (plus £2.00 per copy p.&p.) Special offer to member of the Yorkshire
Naturalists’ Union £13.50 (plus £2.00 p.&p.)
Please make cheques payable to Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
Available from: Professor M. R. D. Seaward, Department of Environmental
Science, University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1DP.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE
A Fungus Flora of Yorkshire. 1985. 296 pp. Hardback. £10.00 incl. p&p.
Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire. 1 989. 380 pp. Paperback. £ 1 7.5 0
incl. p&p. Unbound. £12.15 incl. p&p.
Mammals of Yorkshire. 1985. 256 pp. £7.50 incl. p&p.
Protection of Birds Committee Centenary Year, 1 891- J 991 . 73 pp. £6.00
incl. p&p.
Moths and Butterflies of Spurn ,1991. 1 24 pp. £6 incl. p&p.
Cheques should be made payable to Y.N.U.
From: Mrs J. Payne, 15 Broad Lane, Cawood, Selby, North Yorkshire, Y08 0SQ.
Telephone: 0757 268242
r / t
A QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
THE NATURAL
HISTORY MUSEUM
"1 "IQ 1995
PURCHASED
GENERAL LIBRARY
Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh. var. alpina Hook, in Britain
— D . J. Tennant
‘The Haw': an Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
— David J. Hambler
Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham — Patrick H. Armstrong
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union Excursions in 1993
— C. S. V. Yeates
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
i Editor M. R. D. Seaward, MSc. PhD. DSc. FLS. The University, Bradford BD7 1DP
Notice to Contributors to “The Naturalist’
Manuscripts (two copies if possible), typed double-spaced on one side of the paper only
with margins at top and left-hand at least 2.5cm wide, should be submitted. Latin names of
genera and species, but nothing else, should be underlined. S.I. Units should be used
wherever possible. Authors must ensure that their references are accurately cited, and that
the titles of the journals are correctly abbreviated. Volumes of The Naturalist for the years
1886 to 1975 have been retrospectively numbered 11 to 100 to accord with numbering
before and after this period (see YNU Bulletin no. 3, pp. 21-22 1985); please cite these
volume numbers in all references. Table and text-figures should be prepared on separate
sheets of paper. Drawings and graphs, drawn about twice the linear size they are to appear,
should be in jet-black Indian ink, and legends should not be written on the figures.
Publishable manuscripts not conforming to the above requirements will be returned
for alteration.
Photographic Plates
Readers of The Naturalist will have noticed that the number of photographic illustrations
has increased in recent years. Good clear photographs, suitably captioned, to accompany
articles or as independent features are always welcome.
To encourage this development, a long-standing member of the YNU, who wishes to
remain anonymous, has most generously offered to make a donation, the income from
which would finance the publication of a plate or equivalent illustration in future issues
whenever possible. The editor, on behalf of the YNU, wishes to record this deep
appreciation of this imaginative gesture.
©Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union — 1995
Single Copies may be made of single articles in this journal provided that due acknow-
ledgement is made and the copies are for non-profit making educational or private use.
Copying of more than one article or multiple copying of a single article is forbidden unless
special permission has been obtained from the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union. Permission is
granted for the use of brief quotations in published work provided that acknowledgement
of the source is clearly stated, but the use of substantial sections of text and any illustrative
matter requires the express permission of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
All matters other than subscriptions should be addressed to:
Mr John A. Newbould, Tapton House 30 Moorlands, Wickersley
Rotherham S66 OAT
Items which should be sent to the above include: All membership applications, changes
of address, resignations and problems concerning non-receipt of any of the YNU’s
publications. Please quote the membership number printed underneath your address on all
correspondence.
Subscriptions (unless covered by Banker’s Order) should continue to be sent to:
Mr Derek Allen, c/o Doncaster Museum, Chequer Road
Doncaster DN 1 2AE
The Naturalist is issued free to individual members of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
and to Affiliated Societies.
Institutions and Subscribers £20.00
Registered Charity No. 224018
THE NATURAL
HISTORY MUSEUM
45
CYSTOPTERIS FRAGILIS (L.) BERNH. VAR. ALPU JA 1995
IN BRITAIN
D. J. TENNANT
Mar head Grange, Arkendale, Knaresborough, North Yorkshire HffADHtk
PURCHASED
GENERAL LIBRARY
Abstract
Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bemh. var. alpina Hook, occurs in alpine regions of Continental
Europe but was reported in the last century in North-West Yorkshire, VC65. This has been
generally accepted as the only correct native British record. The general morphology and
spore characters of the Yorkshire specimens are discussed and a history of the British
records is given.
Introduction
There has been much confusion about the correct status and name for the taxon which is
described in this paper as Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bemh. var. alpina Hook. The noted
British authorities on ferns in the last century, Moore ( 1 860), Hooker (1861), Lowe ( 1 876),
Boswell-Syme (1886) and Babington (1904) in their taxonomic treatment of Cystopteris ,
all treated the epithet alpina as synonymous with another epithet, regia. In the above
publications of Hooker, Boswell-Syme and Babington, the name C. alpina Desv. was used,
whereas in Moore and Lowe C. regia Desv. was chosen. Under the rules of nomenclature
the older epithet regia should have been used, which is certainly the reason that it was
chosen by Moore. However, Moore (1860, p. 270) states that although the plant which he
describes is generally admitted to be Polypodium regium of Linnaeus, the specimens in the
Linnean Herbarium were unsatisfactory, whereas the taxon he describes was certainly the
Polypodium alpinum of Wulfen.
Stansfield (1929) points out that Newman in his British Ferns claims that -of the three
specimens labelled P regium in the Linnean Herbarium, the first appeared to be normal C.
fragilis, the second Asplenium fontanum and the third P. dentatum of Dickson (i.e. C.
fragilis var. dentata Hook.). Stansfield examined the Linnean specimens himself and agrees
with Newman that the first specimen referred to above seemed to be a rather finely divided
form of C. fragilis and did not appear to have any of the characters of the true alpina.
The Linnean sheet of specimens described as P. regium therefore appears to contain
more than one taxon, none of which was certainly the same as the specimens of Wulfen.
the latter according to Hooker (1861) being excellent. This is probably the reason that the
epithet alpina is generally used today. The name C. regia has been used in later British
publications, e.g. Hyde and Wade (1948) and Jermy and Harper (1971). but the epithet
regia as a distinct one from alpina has probably persisted in Britain only in horticulture,
where supposedly different taxa have been offered under these names, for example by
Kaye (1968, p. 53). Hooker (1861) in describing the taxon as C. alpina Desv. states that in
his opinion it was truly distinct (from C. fragilis), but Babington (1904) and most later
British authors have treated it as a variety of C. fragilis. In the latest edition of Flora
Europaea (Tutin et al ., 1993). however, it is treated as a true species, C. alpina (Lam.)
Desv., in which it includes C. regia auct. plur. pro parte, and is distinguished from C.
fragilis by its more deeply dissected pinnae and linear-oblong ultimate pinnae segments.
On the Continent, opinion had previously been divided concerning the status of C. regia
and C. fragilis var. alpina as distinct taxa. According to Kestner (1930), three taxa have
been described within the alpina complex, namely var. alpina (type), var. regia Milde and
var. or sub-var. deltoidea Milde, the last being a high altitude form confined to Dolomitic
limestone in the Tyrol. Kestner, however, suggests that var. regia is possibly only a
variable lower altitude form of C. alpina. which he considers a good species, and that var.
regia also appears to be somewhat intermediate between C. alpina and C. fragilis.
Stansfield (1929) suggested that there were two main types of C. alpina, (i) forma obtusa
which is bipinnate with only slightly notched pinnules, in which he included the C. regia of
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
46
Cystopteris fragilis var. alpina in Britain
Lowe (1876, Plate LXVII) and (ii) forma dissecta, more deeply divided, being tripinnate or
quadripinnatifid with deeply notched ultimate segments, treating this as the true alpina , in
which he included the plants from VC65. In this paper it has been assumed that the two
epithets are in fact synonymous. However, the var. regia and the var. obtusa as described
above by Kestner and Stansfield respectively may include hybrids as Vida (1974) stated
that pentaploid hybrids of tetraploid C. fragilis s. str. and hexaploid C. regia ( alpina ) are
frequent and intermediate in morphology between their parents. A summary of the history
of the taxonomy is given in Moore (1860, p. 269).
The Records of Cystopteris Fragilis Var. Alpina
C. fragilis var. alpina is widespread on calcareous formations in alpine regions of
Continental Europe, mainly between altitudes of 1 ,800 and 2,000m, but has been found at
2,800m, which is higher than any other species of fern has been recorded in Europe
(Kestner 1930).
Only two British records of C. fragilis var. alpina, neither recent, have been accepted as
correct. The first of these was from an old wall in Low Leyton, South Essex, VC 18, where
it existed in great plenty at the close of the 18th century according to Moore (1860), but
was then so well established that it must have existed there much earlier. It is inconceivable
that this fem with an alpine distribution outside of Britain could ever have been native in
this lowland locality, although the circumstances in which it came to be there, so long
before the era of enthusiasm for fem cultivation, remains a great mystery. The second
authentic record dates from the 26 June 1872 when Richard Potter, an employee of
Backhouse’s plant nursery gardens in York, collected a fem in the presence of James
Backhouse Jun. on Cronkley Fell in upper Teesdale, North-West Yorkshire, VC65, which
Backhouse named as C. alpina Desv. In 1873 further specimens were collected there by
one of Backhouse’s sons, William Edward Backhouse, again in 1876 by James Backhouse,
and finally by William Edward Backhouse in 1881. Only three plants were said to be
present and no records since the latter date have been traced. The above specimens are in
Edinburgh (E) and also in Kew (K).
The Botanical Exchange Club Report (1930, p. 287) states that G. C. Druce and F. A.
Lees searched the Teesdale site in 1903 and again in 1909 but failed to refind the fem.
Stansfield (1930) states that in his opinion there is no doubt that Backhouse’s Teesdale
plants are the true alpina and practically coincide with his C. alpina forma dissecta
(Stansfield 1929), whereas the Low Leyton specimens seen by him in herb. E differed,
although he considered that they could possibly be regarded as within the domain of the
aggregate alpina or regia , and he included them in his C. alpina forma obtusa (Stansfield
1929).
There are several other old reports of C. regia. Moore (1860, p. 104) claims that he was
sent authentic specimens by H. Shepherd of Liverpool which were said to have been
gathered in both Yorkshire and Derbyshire, but no more precise localities were given.
Moore also states that in his opinion a specimen collected on Saddleback in Cumberland,
VC70. by S. F. Gray well prior to 1860 might also have been authentic. Unfortunately the
specimens collected by Mr. Shepherd and Mr. Gray have not been traced. Moore (1860)
further states that the various reports of other British stations probably referred to small
much divided forms of C. fragilis. This applied to a plant collected in Llanberis,
Caernarvon, VC49. by W. Madeley of Kingswinford, which F. A. Lees thought was C.
alpina Desv. but wds later determined by J. Backhouse Jun. as a variety of C.fraglis var.
angusata (Sm.) Moore. This reference appeared in Lees notebooks (1876) housed in the
Keighley Museum. A herbarium specimen which I have seen in herb. E collected on Cader
Idris, Merioneth, VC48, in 1875 also resembles C. fragilis var. alpina, but is probably also
another form of C. fragilis.
Morphology and Spore Characters
Two main characters are currently used to distinguish C. fragilis var. alpina from other
47
Cystopteris fragilis var. alpina in Britain
lembers of the C. fragilis complex, the first is the fine dissection of the fronds and the
tape of the ultimate pinnule segments, the second is the position of the tips of the veins,
pore type has also been used by some authors to separate this taxon, and although the
pores of certain forms of the var. alpina seem to be distinctive, this distinction was
lisinterpreted by some authors in the last century, as shown below.
A tull description of C. fragilis var. alpina (from Teesdale) is given in Boswell-Syme
886) and silhouettes of some of the specimens collected by Backhouse are shown in
igure 1. The ultimate pinnule segments are well separated, being narrowly oblong to
near-cuneate, very obtuse with somewhat irregular shallow blunt teeth which have an
narginate or retuse sinus at the apex. Virtually all the ultimate veins terminate in the base
a small sinus at the apex of a tooth or in the notch between the teeth, and not at the
)ical points of the teeth as in most other forms of C. fragilis. This character is also found
C. dickieana R. Sim, but in this case the sinuses of the teeth are usually shallow and not
> marked, and in contrast the pinnule segments are very broad and rounded. Boswell-
/me (1886, p. 106) states that in C. eu-fragilis (var. genuina) the veins with scarcely an
> cception run into the projecting teeth. According to Stansfield (1929). Kestner suggested
at the character of the veins of the ultimate segments terminating in notches is the only
liable one for distinguishing C. alpina. However, I have noted that a few varieties of C.
agilis other than var. alpina can exhibit this character when they have not fully attained
!. eir ultimate mature frond form, even though fully fertile, and therefore this character
xds to be interpreted with caution. Boswell-Syme (1886) and Babington (1904) used the
taracter of the vein-endings, together with the spore characters (see below) in the
paration of C. fragilis var. alpina and C. dickieana from other forms of C. fragilis,
oswell-Syme even treating dickieana as a variety of C. alpina.
Boswell-Syme (1886, pp. 103-105) when referring to the Teesdale plants, states that the
•ores of var. alpina are tuberculate with sparse large blunt tubercles and that the spores of
e var. dickieana were precisely similar to those of var. alpina , having blunt, rounded,
ightly elevated tubercles and not spine-like ones as in C. eu-fragilis. Babington (1904.
527) groups C. dickieana with C. alpina Desv. describing their spores as warted,
intrasting with the prickly spores of two described varieties of C. fragilis, but adds
'errucose” to the description of the spores of C. dickieana, and admits that he has placed
dickieana and C. alpina under one species with much doubt. On examination of the
'ores of the Teesdale specimens I have found that they do match Boswell-Syme’s
ascription, but I cannot agree that they are a close match for those of C. dickieana. R. H.
ziberts has examined the spores of the Teesdale specimens in more detail and agrees with
is finding stating that the perispore is covered with short blunt protrusions, c. 2-3pm in
ngth (Figure 1), unlike that of C. dickieana which has no spine-like protrusions. In the
:esdale plants, the perispore also fits closely round the exine (exospore) with no loose
Ids, and does not have a rugose appearance, again unlike that of C. dickieana. The
itward appearance of the spores of the Teesdale specimens of C. fragilis var. alpina
erefore bears no resemblance to those of C. dickieana. Boswell-Syme (1886) was
erefore not correct in suggesting that the spores of the two taxa were precisely similar,
d his treatment of C. dickieana as a variety of C. alpina Desv. was accordingly
justified. Moore (1860. p. 270) had earlier stated that the spores (of C. regia Desv.) were
hinate but this was prior to the discovery of the Teesdale plants and therefore referred to
ants from Low Leyton, although he may have included others from Continental Europe,
awever, Boswell-Syme clearly recognised a difference between the short blunt tubercles
var. alpina from Teesdale and those of typical C. fragilis. which he described as
mmerous long slender sharp spine-like tubercles, whereas Moore (1860) simply described
>th types of tubercle as echinate. and. rather confusingly, some of the spores of C. fragilis
tich he illustrates (Plates Cl and CII). are similar to those of the Teesdale alpina. The
ores of C. fragilis var. alpina which I had collected in the Austrian Alps however had
imerous long spines and they were therefore closer to typical C. fragilis in this respect,
ansfield (1929). when referring to Continental plants, states that the spores of alpina are
48
Cystopteris fragilis var. alpina in Britain
FIGURE 1
Backhouse’s specimens of Cystopteris fragilis var. alpina from Upper Teesdale.
a. Silhouettes; b. Pinnule; c. Pinnule segments showing vein-endings; d. Spore.
49
Cystopteris fragilis var. alpina in Britain
like little hedgehogs and more distinctly echinate than those of C. fragilis and its variety
dentata. Jenny and Harper (1971), however, state that the spores of C. regia, originating
lrom Cimolais, Italy, had short blunt spines, but their illustration (p. 212) shows that they
were not quite so short as the tubercles of the Teesdale specimens of var. alpina. The
spores of the Teesdale plants therefore appear to be distinctive in having very short blunt
tubercles, but on the assumption that the illustrations (Plates Cl and CII) in Moore (1860)
are accurate, then they are not unique in this respect. Clearly, the numerous varieties of C.
fragilis need to be re-collected and their spore type compared to establish whether these
characters can be used meaningfully in their classification.
Spores of the Teesdale var. alpina have been measured by R. H. Roberts and compared
with other members of the C. fragilis complex. However, due to the great age of the
Teesdale specimens it is not certain whether additional shrinkage in their spores during
drying and ageing has occurred and therefore whether their size is strictly comparable with
the other measurements which were all made on recently collected material. Additionally,
only two separate gatherings of typical C. fragilis were included and this sample may
therefore have been inadequate. The spores were mounted in gum chloral for 24 hours and
the exine (exospore) measured using a magnification of c. x 900 with a calibrated eye-piece
micrometer (Table 1).
TABLE 1
Cystopteris Spore Dimensions
The C. fragilis var. dentata samples were taken from four widely separated gatherings in
the Central Scottish Highlands, the typical C. fragilis from two localities, and the
remainder from a single location. Spores not fully developed were not included in the
measurements.
Taxon
Locality
No. in
Sample
Exine Length (pm)
Range Mean
C. dickieana
Type locality
20
41-48
44
C. dickieana
Perthshire, VC88
60
39-47
43
C. fragilis (typical)
Scottish Highlands
40
40-55
48
C. fragilis var. dentata
Hook.
Scottish Highlands
80
38-49
43
C. fragilis var. alpina
Hook.
Seefeld, Austria
20
44-54
49
C. fragilis var. alpina
Hook.
Upper Teesdale,
VC65
18
37-46
41
Discussion and Conclusions
Further work on the spore type of the C. fragilis complex is certainly desirable. It would
have also been useful if the chromosome numbers of the taxa discussed had been available.
Jermy and Harper (1971) stated that C. regia from Cimolais, Italy, was hexaploid and
suggested that there may be a correlation between the chromosome number and the spore
characters, as well as the degree of dissection of the frond (Jermy pers. comm.). Jermy and
Harper (1971) further state that R. F. Blasdell had shown earlier that spore size in
Cystopteris increases with increasing chromosome number. The spores of the Teesdale
specimens of var. alpina were the smallest of all the samples measured, whereas in contrast
those of the Seefeld var. alpina were found to be the largest. It is reasonable to assume that
any additional shrinkage which may have occurred in the spores of the Teesdale specimens
has been marginal and that originally they were possibly no larger than those measured of
C. dickieana and therefore still significantly different in size from the spores of the
Austrian var. alpina. A differing chromosome number maybe one possible explanation for
this discrepancy.
50
Book Review
The only certain native British example of C. fragilis var. alpina appears to be long
extinct in its original Teesdale locality and no further sites have been discovered. J.
Backhouse Jun.. however, owned a plant nursery in York which specialised in ferns. A
herbarium note on one of his sheets of specimens in herb. E confirms that he had the
Teesdale fern in cultivation as early as 1872, and as he controlled the nursery until his
death in 1890 it is certain that he would have distributed it widely. There is therefore some
possibility that it still exists in cultivation in Britain today, and perhaps may be recognised
by its distinctive spores.
Acknowledgments
I would like to thank Mr R. H. Roberts for his detailed work on the spores and his helpful
comments on the text, Mr D. McKean, Royal Botanic Garden Edinburgh, for the loan of
herbarium material and for allowing me to publish the illustration, and Mr A. C. Jermy and
Miss A. M. Paul for other information provided.
References
Babington, C. C. (1904) Manual of British Botany. 9th ed. Gurney & Jackson, London.
Boswell-Syme, J. T. I., ed. (1886) English Botany 12 (Cryptogamia). 3rd ed. G.Bell,
London.
Hooker, W. J. ( 1861 ) The British Ferns. Lovell Reeve, London.
Hyde, H. A. and Wade, A. E. (1948) Welsh Ferns. 2nd ed. National Museum of Wales,
Cardiff.
Jermy, A. C. and Harper, L. (1971) Spore morphology of the Cystopteris fragilis complex.
British Fern Gazette 10: 21 1-213.
Kaye, R. (1968) Hardy Ferns. Laber & Laber, London.
Kestner, P. (1930) Cystopteris alpina Desv. British Fern Gazette 6 (2): 33-37.
Lowe, E. J. (1876) Our Native Ferns. Volume 2. G. Bell, London.
Moore, T. (1860) British Ferns. Volume 2. Bradbury & Evans, London.
Stansfield, L. W. (1929) Cystopteris alpina Desv. British Fern Gazette 6(1): 15-19.
Stansfield, L. W. (1930) Cystopteris alpina Desv. British Fern Gazette 6 (3): 71-72.
Tutin, T. G., et al., ed. (1993) Flora Europaea. 2nd edn.. Volume 1 . Cambridge.
Vida, G. (1974) Genome analysis of the European Cystopteris fragilis complex. Acta
Botanica Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae 20: 181-1 92.
BOOK REVIEW
Lichens on Trees: a guide to some of the commonest species by Alan Orange. Pp. 48.
illustrated throughout. National Museum of Wales, Cardiff. 1994. £3.50.
This handy booklet, number 3 in the National Museum of Wales’ British Plant Life series,
is both attractive to the eye and an authoritative introduction to those lichens commonly
found on trees throughout the British Isles in areas where the air remains unpolluted or at
least relatively so. Excellent half-page colour photographs (most of them taken hy Peter
Russell) for 39 species are complemented by informative supporting text plus the author’s
own superb line drawings highlighting certain features important in identification.
Introductory notes are provided on structure, reproduction, ecology, effects of pollution,
studying lichens and further reading, accompanied by four habitat photographs. A useful
and very well produced booklet which can be confidently recommended.
MRDS
51
‘THE HAW’: AN EIGHTEENTH CENTURY GREENFIELD SITE
NEAR SKIPTON
DAVID J. HAMBLER
Department of Environmental Science , University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1DP
Introduction
Extractive and construction industries on ‘greenfield sites’ are likely to both destroy and
create habitats for spontaneous colonisation by plants. This paper is an attempt to recognise
both processes through retrospective study of an area of about 3km2 where large scale
commercial quarrying, and railway construction, began during the nineteenth century.
‘The Haw’ (Old Norse ‘haugr’ meaning ‘hill’), just north-east of Skipton, was once an
elongated hill (Fig. I ), with an east/west ridge (NG SE0052 and SE0252). The integrity of
the ridge was evident on OS maps published before 1957. However, on recent maps a large
part of the hill is represented by a blank (Fig. 2b) indicating that its topography is in a state
of considerable flux, as a result of limestone quarrying, infilling, and the creation of spoil
heaps and embankments.
In view of this flux, it is of interest to assemble evidence of the landscape(s), vegetation
and floras of the past whilst remnants of the hill still remain (Fig. 3). A review of these
matters, in which the hill is set in its plant-geographical context, may be of value during
eventual rehabilitation of the land.
Throughout this account The Haw is used, as it has been in recent oral tradition, to
describe the hill between road and railway (Fig. 2). This usage does not correspond with
that on old Ordnance Survey maps where The Haw was associated only with a
triangulation point at about 251m OD. ‘Hawbank’ and ‘Hawbank Rock' are names
associated with steep slopes at the western end of the hill.
The bedrocks of ‘The Haw’ are hard, dark limestones and calcareous shales. The main
outcrop of Carboniferous limestone of the Craven area is to the west. Skipton and ‘The
Haw’ lie at the root of a narrow tongue (the Skipton Anticline), 3 kilometres wide, of
outcropping limestone with shale partings, which extends eastwards to just beyond the
River Wharfe. A low-lying outcrop just to the east of The Haw is the site of a quarry (at
Halton East), whilst a few kilometres further east Hambleton Hill is the site of yet another
quarry - once with a water-filled ‘dub’ - now disused and infilled. According to Smith
(1962) the original name (Hameldunle) recorded from the twelfth century suggests a
‘mutilated or scarred hill’; it illustrates the long history of limestone quarrying east of
Skipton. About 1km to the south is ‘Wheelan Rock', a small abandoned quarry. The
quarries are separated from each other, and from the calcareous Craven uplands, by
featureless drift slopes and drumlins bearing mainly neutral (sensu Tansley 1949) and
improved grassland.
The areas on the anticline available to calcicolous plants of grassland and rocky habitats
are thus rather small, and largely anthropogenic; their isolation must hinder the immigration
of such species from the Craven uplands, and has affected the likelihood of re- establishment
of any species lost through post-glacial afforestation or through human activity.
This account has been based largely upon secondary sources of information, including
maps, historical/antiquarian works, local floras, and oral tradition, together with the
writer’s own field observations.
Pre-History Glaciations and Wildwood
There is no doubt that The Haw would have been forested in post-glacial times, and that it
is south of the limit of the last (Devensian) glaciation (Penney 1974). It would thus have
been available for colonization by a calcicolous herbaceous flora, including arctic-alpine
species, during the Devensian period. Eventually, when the British Isles became suitable
for tree growth around 1 1.000 BC (Rackham 1986). The Haw may have lost such species.
It seems likely that the drift material of earlier glaciations would have supported wildwood.
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
52
‘The Haw’ : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
The Haw Park' (1757)
FIGURE 1
Past profiles through The Haw. ‘1757’ relates to names (as spelt) of land parcels shown on Fig. 4. the topm<
profile is on a line running through the two peaks at a bearing of E 19°N. W1 and El mark the walls boundi
he Haw Park’, and E2 and E3 mark other walls shown on Fig. 4; ‘The Haw’ is here applied to the highest p
id the datum is at 500 ft (152m). Vertical lines correspond to eastings of the 100km National Grid in square
and that only in the vicinity of a crag, of which ‘Lookabout’ (Fig. 1) may be a diminished
and quarried relic, might any part of The Haw have escaped afforestation. The likely local
dominants of the wildwood would have been Ash ( Fraxinus excelsior) and Hazel ( Corylus
avellana).
Clearance of the wildwood of Craven must have begun in Neolithic times, from about
4000 BC, and have been largely accomplished within about 2000 years. According to
Smith (1962), the ‘rarity of woodland terms in the place names of Craven’ suggests this,
but ‘the place-name evidence is indecisive as to the extent to which Craven was peopled in
pre-English times’. Stress-tolerant ruderal herbs and arctic-alpine species from clearings
and unforested crags, screes and limestone hilltops of the Craven uplands would more
easily recolonize small marginal limestone outcrops as the wildwood was destroyed. These
matters will be taken up in a subsequent paper.
Places on The Haw
References to the geography of the hill in antiquarian literature are imprecise, but the
‘greenfield site’ is conveniently recollected here by the use (in quotation marks) of
numbers and names for pieces of land, on and around The Haw, quoted by the eighteenth
century surveyor James Crow (Crow, unpublished 1757), on his Plan of the Manor of
Skipton; many of the field boundaries shown correspond exactly with those on 19th and
20th century O.S. maps. The drawing (Fig. 4) is based on pail of Crow’s Plan. Only
recently, with the completion of the Skipton bypass in 1982, has the road system around
The Haw come to diverge confusingly from that of the 18th century (cf. Figs. 2 & 4).
The Haw’ : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton 53
TABLE I
Abridged material, with original spellings, from ‘A Field Book . . (Crow 1757)
'The Letter put against each Tenants name in the Book refer to Like Letters ... in y Plan.
The Series of Numbers in the first Column refer also to Like Numbers in the Plan ... the
Quality of each piece is shown by the Letters A, M, P, & W denoting Arable, Meadow,
Pasture or Woodland . . .’. [Py = partly]
Land in Hand A
4 Nearer Storam M
5 Middle Storam P
6 Further Storam now in two parts P
10 Storam Close formerly called Park Close adjoining Storam M
1 1 Crofs Bank Clofes in two parts at farther End of Storams P
12 The Hawfield Meadow in which is a Lime Kiln P or M
William Howson K
74 New Close P or M
75 New Close Meadow P or M
Thomas Chamberlain L
296 The Haw Park the greatest part of it is woody pasture P
John Mitchel P
313 The House Bam Stable and Yard and Skibeden Field adjoining P
314 Crabtree Croft and Fagg Field lying together M
317 The East Field “ " P
318 The Haw Field and Haw Bank lying together Exclusive of Burlington
piece lying with it called Hedge Peigh Hill P
John Heelis and William Mitchel Q
319 The House Stable Yard Garden & two closes below the House M
320 The Close above the House & Kiln Field lying together P
321 North Hills in which is a Bam about 6A1R00P is woodland A Py woody
Edward Heelis R
326 The House Bam Stable Yard Garden, and the North side Close in which is
two Lime Kilns P
327 The North Hills alias Hollywell Closes formerly in four parts P
328 The Close before the Door in which is a Bam A & M
329 Anr Close before the Door adjoyning the Last P
330 Upper and Lower Merry Platts alias Sunny Sides P
William Walsh S
333 The House Bam. Stable Yard and the Close before the house P
54
The Haw' : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
'The Haw' : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton 55
FIGURE 2
‘The Haw’ and its environs reproduced with permission from 1:25,000 Ordnance Survey maps: (a, above) from sheets published in 1957;
(b, below) from sheets published in 1983-4. 1km NG squares (within 100km square SE) provide location and scale. The dark area above
line N53 represents the perimeter of the Dales National Park. © Crown copyright.
56
‘The Haw' : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
FIGURE 3
The cleft in The Haw in 1989. Looking south from NG intersection SE015535. The railway is
below the level of the held; Skipton Rock Quarry excavation is behind the spoil bank; the
vertical shale bed beyond (capped by remains of the southern slope of ‘The Haw Park’)
screens Skibeden Quarry.
Not all of Crow’s names are in local use today, but, in conjunction with his Field Book
(quoted in Table 1) they provide precise reference to fields and land use over two hundred
years ago. The only name still appearing on maps is ‘Haw Park’ (‘The Haw Park' of
Crow); this refers to the largest parcel of land on the hill, but the varied dimensions of the
name on O.S. maps, from the middle of the 19th century to the present, reflect successive
cartographers' perceptions rather than historical accuracy or modem local usage; thus on
the first ‘six-inch’ (1:10560) O.S. map of the 1854 the label far transcends Crow’s eastern
boundary - extending through his pieces ‘Q321’, and ‘R326’ into ‘E327 . . . Holywell
Closes’ and disregarding the intervening dry-stone walls; here also the apparent western
boundary had been moved, representing a new wall some 300m to the east. On later maps
the name diminishes - ultimately (Fig. 2) into a tiny unquarried area in what was the south-
east comer of the park in 1757; the name survives in situ today as that of a modem
dwelling - ‘Haw Park House’.
Early History: To Mid-Eighteenth Century
References to early colonisation of the Craven region, and to the growth of Skipton (first
referred to in the Domesday Book of 1086) a short distance to the west of The Haw, are
supplied by Williams (1987). He comments that ‘it is unlikely that the village could have
been founded before the seventh century AD’ when ‘the area was gradually infiltrated by
Anglo Saxon settlers . . Subsequently, by the time of Domesday, a Viking population
must have been superimposed on the English one. The name is ‘Scandinavianised Old
English’ meaning ‘sheep farm'. Sheep farming has evidently been established in the area
for at least 1,000 years, and Williams ( 1987) remarks that there was suitable pasture on the
lower hill slopes for the sheep of the early settlers. The valley of the Skibeden Beck, and
thus the southern slope of The Haw, was obviously so used, as the name ‘Skibeden’
suggests ‘sheep-valley’, or ‘sheep hill’.
57
The Haw' : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
[T|he Manor of Skipton, in which The Haw lies was said to have an area of twelve
carucates in 1284’ (Whitaker 1878), while at Embsay a Celtic monastery established before
the seventh century had encompassed, by 1086, six carucates; the derivation of ‘carucate’
from a word meaning 'plough' is suggestive of arable farming all around The Haw in the
eleventh century. Evidence of ridge and furrow ploughing can be found in modem pastures
around The Haw, and lynchets are present on the north-facing slope of ‘ R3 1 8 The Haw
Field and Hawbank’, indicating that this land (which was pasture in the 1750s) was arable
in the Middle Ages, or even earlier (see Rackham 1986).
In Skibeden there was farming activity apart from shepherding in the thirteenth century,
and there is reference to a wood - presumably on The Haw. A quotation by Dawson (1882)
from a valuation exercise of 1609 indicates that only two ‘tofts’ (homesteads with
overhanging tufts of trees) were present in the valley; these would have been largely self-
sufficient crofts still present in Crow’s time - probably on the sites of High Skibeden and
Low Skibeden (Fig. 2).
On the north side of The Haw there is an enclosed pasture referred to by Crow as ‘the
Burlington piece’ and as ‘Hedge Peigh Hill' (the Field Book) or ‘Hodge Teigh Hill’ (the
Plan). Hedge could here have its modem meaning, but its alternative, Hodge, may be a
diminutive of Roger. Pigh(t)el represents a croft or small enclosure in Middle English
(Smith 1962). It is therefore likely that some domestic cultivation was carried out here in
medieval times, and that ‘Hodge Peigh' (used hereafter) is an appropriate combination.
Enclosure of this plot evidently preceded the walling of The Haw Park as Crow's Plan
shows a more ephemeral boundary (a hedge or pale?), and The Haw Park wall diverted to
accommodate it. The dry-stone walling around the croft was made complete with a poorly
constructed western wall sometime after 1757. The present grazed, species-poor grassland
of the plot is probably not ‘ancient’.
The area above 150m appears (from aerial photographs) to have escaped the plough.
This elevated area was never likely to have been regarded as useful for non-woody crops,
and in medieval times it constituted all or part of a deer park. The first record of Haw Park
dates from 1257 (Williams 1987). It first belonged to the de Romille family who built the
original Skipton Castle around 1090. Such parks were for provision of venison rather than
for hunting (Rackham 1986), and ‘were one of the causes of loss of woodland’. Here,
however, relict wildwood rich in hazel might have remained.
The earliest boundary of the park may have been a pale such as described by Rackham
(1986). The antiquarians who have mentioned several small parks around Skipton have all
omitted this detail. None has defined their boundaries, or revealed when the parks fell into
disuse, although Whitaker (1878) suggested that the whole of a six-by-four miles ‘Forest of
Skipton’ was enclosed by a pale in Norman times. The term Forest, in this contest, does not
mean woodland (see Rackham 1986); it would suggest a large area ranged by Red Deer
(Cervus elephus).
Palisade boundaries, rather than walls, were suggested pictorially around two areas near
Skipton Castle on Saxton's (1577) Map of Yorkshire (Fig. 4 inset), and in evident
plagiarisations by Speed [Speede] (1610). One of these enclosures could have been that on
The Haw, The boundary of ‘The Haw Park’ was sharply delineated by Crow (1757); his
lines represent dry-stone walls, completed by 1612 (see below), and present as fragmented
relicts today. A few metres of the eastern wall (Fig. 2a) are now left between Haw Beck
and an overwhelming heap of quarry spoil, and short lengths are left along the A59 road.
Although a park keeper ‘at Hawe’ was employed in 1609 (see below), Rackham’s
(1986) conclusion that deer parks went out of use in the 16th and 17th centuries is probably
applicable. The enclosure of the common fields of Skipton with walls had taken place
before 1612 (Hey 1986) and the walls around The Haw Park are likely to have been built at
the same time, to replace a decaying pale. The remaining fragments are low: the walls were
not necessarily in the same place as the pale, and were probably only intended to confine
sheep.
There were uses for Haw Park apart from grazing: records of these provide the only
58
The Haw’ : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
■o
c
<D
<D
<D —
CL
cd
E
2g
&8.&
>- 1/5 u
1 l— «
■ — Id fll
«.E fc
w 00 (1>
c/3 -p >— >
3o g
e-o i
<U _g
c/3 E_
o H
o
H.
-2
l si
E °
■C c
g- £
i/3 an
a 2
id
i UJ
id
' c/3
<d
TD
8
Cfl
-> s
3" -O
cd
3
C/3
-- O
£ -O
c/i g-
3*0
r. in
c
o
X
cd
c/3
* 2
•> w T3
5 « (J
eg x: Jr
i_ •— <D
Q =§
cd
59
The Haw' : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
evidence of the pre-19th century flora. Firewood and nuts mast have been important crops
on the hill; in 1302-3 a castle warden’s accounts included ‘2s for nuts in the wood of
Scrybden’ (Cox 1907); and in 1327 certain tenants at Skibeden were paying ‘two-pence
yearly ... for being quit from gathering Nutts in the wood called the Hawe . . (Dawson
1882). A valuation of the Manor of Skipton dated 1609 (quoted by Dawson 1882) refers to
‘The Customes sendees, & other monies paid by the Tenn’ts of the tofts & grounds there
. . .’ [at Skybden]; these included '. . . for nutts at Hawe ijs” [two shillings], *. . . Nutt’g at
Hawe . . .’ is mentioned in yet another valuation dated 1612 (Whitaker 1878). Hazel had
presumably grown well on the Skibeden side of the hill for at least the previous three
centuries, and might well have been encouraged on the hillsides from Mesolithic times (see
Rackham 1986). It appears to have suffered a decline in local production by the 18th
century as no appropriate woodland is suggested by Crow's Field Book. Hazel (a
nationally threatened native species - see Rackham 1986) is now present only in small
quantity marginal to the A59 road, and has been recently planted on northern spoil slopes.
In 1311 ‘. . . wood sales ... in Haw were five shillings . . .’ (Williams 1987) and the
valuation of 1609 shows that tenants at Skybden brought ‘. . . pine wood, and maw hey
[mown hay] to the Castle . . .’. This is consonant with an earlier (see Carlisle & Brown
1968) introduction of Scots Pine (Pinus sylvestris) on The Haw. Symbols on Crow’s Plan
suggests that pine trees might still have been present in 1757.
The Clifford family took over Skipton Castle and its lands in 1309 (Dawson 1882); they
‘took every precaution to preserve . . . [the] . . . fallow deer within the several small parks’
(Cox 1907), and the household book of the Cliffords for 1609 records an expenditure of 15
shillings thus - ‘Kep’ship at Haw in p’t xvs’ (Whitaker 1878). According to Rackham
(1986) it was ‘common practice to graze cattle or sheep in parks, to let grazing to local
farmers and to sell hay’; wood was also gathered. ‘Haw Parke and Haw Bancke' were let
for £56 in 1652 (Dawson 1882): this ‘was just a fair sum ... for pasturing sheep'
(Dickinson 1987). Sheep may, by this time, have completely replaced fallow deer (Cervus
dama) on The Haw. and the run-down of the park first to a ‘woody pasture' (implied by
Crow’s (1757) Field Book), and later (through immigration of Hawthorn) to the ‘bushy
pasture’ recorded by Whitaker (1878). This is in accordance with Rackham's (1986)
observation that especially in the 16th and 17th centuries parks went out of use. Today, any
grazed fragments of the park outside the blank area of O.S. maps (Fig. 2) bear swards,
rather than tussocks. Records extracted form Crow's Field Book (Table 1) show that
almost the entire area between the two east/west becks was pasture in 1757.
Dwellings and Laiths on The Haw
Records of buildings (Table 1) illustrate 18th and 19th century pastoral activity on the
‘greenfield site’. A large roadside bam was recorded by Crow, on the southern slope, in
‘Q321 The North Hills' near the present layby (NG SE010530). It was not shown on the
‘six inch' O.S. map of 1854. but a ‘new’ storage building ‘Haw Lathe' was shown within a
new enclosure on the northern slope of The Haw Park. Later buildings reflect changes in
land-use. One. represented on the ‘six-inch' O.S. map of 1854. was within the entrance to
Skipton Rock Quarry. It is labelled variously on later maps as ‘Rock Cottage' or ‘Rock
House’; on the 1:10.000 O.S. map of 1985 an unlabelled rectangular outline (NG
intersection SE003526) represents its remains. It was inhabited (althought without services
or running water) until about the 1940s. and was a motor-cycle workshop in the 1960s. A
third dwelling was present for some time during the first half of the present century, on the
site of the present TILCON offices, east of a right-of-way crossing the present access road
to Skipton Rock Quarry.
On the northern slope (near NG intersection SE004530) is Manby Castle House, a
converted row of cottages built in the late 19th century, in ‘The Burlington piece' or
‘Hodge Peigh Hill’, and a few hundred metres to the north-east the late 19th century engine
house of the quarry has been converted to a dwelling. On the southern slope Haw Park
House stands on the site of ‘The Bungalow', an early 20th century dwelling shown
60 ‘The Haw' : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
within the western arc of an old quarry on, for example, the ‘six-inch’ O.S. map Revision
of 1938.
The southern slope of The Haw, rather than an entire valley, constitutes Skibeden; here,
apart from two dwellings south of the road. Crow indicated a house and outbuildings at the
northern roadside (Fig. 4) in ‘R326 North Side Close’. This site became that of quarry
offices (removed in 1991). It is labelled ‘Far Skibeden’ on recent maps, and remains of the
eastern wall of ‘R326’ approach the A59 road a little to the east. A modem house and
livery stables are now present further to the east in ‘R327 The North Hills Alias Holywell
Closes’.
Topography and Water
Reconstructions of the topography as it was before quarrying or railway construction are
shown here (Figs 1 & 5). Much of the original land surface of The Haw has been lost
through extensive quarrying and the eastern end now appears as two barren, and
diminishing, rocky humps (Fig. 3).
The highest point, at a little over 215m OD, was towards the eastern end of the ridge.
This was gone by 1960 when the skyline was breached, but ‘Lookabout’ (or ‘Look-about’),
a crag of exposed limestone near the western end, remains at about 230m. The name may
reflect Victorian romanticism.
A railway, constructed in the 1880s, abandoned in the 1960s, and partially restored in
the 1970s as the Yorkshire Dales Railway (Dickinson 1987; Smith & Binns 1986), runs
along the northern base of The Haw at a height of around 152m, and a road (the present
A59), the course of which predates Crow’s Plan, runs along the southern flank at somewhat
higher levels (above 183m at its highest point); although these anthropogenic boundaries
define the area to be studied in detail, the true topographical boundaries (see Figs. 1 & 2)
are two tributaries of the River Aire: - Haw Beck alongside, and mostly south of, the
railway, and Skibeden Beck running parallel to the A59 road but some hundreds of metres
from it across improved grassland to the south. Both of these streams flow to the west. Haw
Beck is fed mainly by tributaries from hillsides to the north.
The Haw slopes gently away eastwards and is bounded by a watercourse, the Berry
Ground Beck (which becomes the Holywell Beck), flowing south-east to the River Wharfe;
Berry is possibly a corruption of an Old English word: either ‘werig’ referring to
‘wretched’ marshy ground which still exists in the vicinity or ‘wella’ implying a well or
spring. At its eastern end Haw Beck flows through a small area of marsh just south of the
railway (Fig. 2b) fed by Water Lane Beck, and by run-off from The Haw.
Wetland adjacent to Haw Beck is of limited extent today, and some is anthropogenic; for
example, a small rectangular shallow pond created for quarrying purposes during the
present century is present at around 155m OD in the NW comer of ‘R321 The North Hills’
(Fig. 4). The watercourse has, in parts, been straightened and contained alongside the
railway (cf. Figs. 2a & 2b), and there was evidently much more marshy ground alongside a
more irregular watercourse in earlier times.
Drainage of The Haw when it was comparatively intact was by surface run-off and
through groundwater seepage. The seepage provided springs (Fig. 5) sometimes recorded
by map-makers, and at other times overlooked. These were on the northern flanks and at
the extremities of The Haw at around the 525ft (=152m) contour; below this level, ground
water, unless pumped out, floods the more recent quarry workings which descend to about
143m OD east of the E02 NG line. On the ‘six-inch’ O.S, map of 1854 a spring is recorded
at about 152m - the source of the only mapped (c. 100m long) tributary flowing from The
Haw into Haw Beck. It joined the latter in NG square SE01 1531, and is not marked on the
‘twenty-five inch’ O.S. map of 1889, surveyed after the railway was completed. It is
suggested here that below the 500ft contour the area around this inflow into Haw Beck
from the south, and those of Green Bottom Beck and Kempley Beck from the north, must
have been swampy, providing a habitat for marsh plants.
Holywell, at the eastern end of The Haw, would have originated as a spring. Such a
The Haw': An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
61
62
‘The Haw' : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
spring, at around 152m OD, was recorded by Crow (1757) at the western end of The Haw.
This had become a well by 1850, but was probably not the water supply for Rock Cottage,
as an additional well is indicated on the ‘six-inch’ O.S. map of 1894 adjacent to the
building - again at the same level, but within the oldest Hawbank quarry workings. Other
springs have been observed on The Haw: one providing drinkable water in the 1930s, is
recalled by Mr E. A. Higson (pers. comm.) at around 152m OD just north of the access
road to Skipton Rock Quarry; the road floods here occasionally.
Another spring is marked much higher on the northern slope west of Lookabout, at
around 200m, on the ‘twenty-five-inch' O.S. map of 1889 but on none of the other maps
consulted. There is seepage here today (near NG intersection 0153) and a tiny streamlet has
carved a discontinuous channel in the grassland; nearby, to the east, water with a pH of 8.2
gathers in several swamp areas on spoil (each <25m2) adjacent to a quarry track leading to
the ridge.
Spoil and Soil
The natural soils of The Haw comprise both drift material and autochthonous elements.
Where a long-undisturbed land surface remains, the soil is mostly ‘Brown Calcareous Soil’
sensu Curtis et al. (1976); it can be a metre or more in depth over fragmented iron-stained
limestone. Spot records of pH of the rooting zone of grassland soils on The Haw have
varied between 7.2 and 8.2, but pH values as low as 6.4 have been recorded from the
easternmost extremity of the hill (NG SE0 16543). The exposed limestone of the Lookabout
crag bears pockets of shallow humic soil, and downhill, particularly to the north, scree
fragments constitute a major part of the upper soil layer.
Unstratified soils derived from the overburden and spoil of quarrying comprise the
surface layers of waste heaps and embankments over much of The Haw, and pH values of
7.6 are typical. The properties of some quarry spoil are such that surface water tends to
persist in hollows wherever a nearly level surface is available. It is deficient in plant
nutrients (Hambler e/ al. 1990).
Where the bedrock has been exposed for twenty years or more, as in the old Hawbank
workings and in a very small, ancient shallow quarry a few hundred metres north west of
Holywell, thin, black humic soil is present.
The water of Hawbeck was of pH 7.98 on 15th November 1993 whilst that of the mud of
the adjacent pond was of pH 7.43. This pond, in the north west comer of ‘Q321 The North
Hills’ just south of NG intersection SE0 18534, was created in the 1960s, for quarry
purposes, at the foot of a spoil bank; the pond and an ‘untouched’ marshy area nearby,
between Haw Beck and the railway, have provided a continuity in the availability of
circumneutral marshy habitats alongside The Haw from ancient times.
Quarries and Kilns
Although no quarries are shown on the plan or indicated in Crow’s Field Book, much
small-scale quarrying had taken place locally before 1757; such quarrying, probably high
on The Haw, would have been needed to provide material for the 17th century dry-stone
walls, and lower down to feed lime-kilns adjacent to roads. The origin of ‘Lookabout’, as a
natural crag, or as a primitively quarried outcrop, is not obvious.
A faint pencil graffito comprising the word ‘Quarry’ within a rectangular outline
straddling the wall between ‘Hawbank’ and ‘The Haw Park’ may represent the first stages
of planning for a Haw Bank Rock Quarry, whilst the Plan hung in Skipton Castle. Within
two decades of Crow’s survey enough stone was being removed at the western end of
Hawbank to necessitate the use of a horse-operated tramway, and in 1773 the ‘Earl of
Thanet obtained Parliamentary powers for the making of a canal . . .’ (Dawson 1882) to
transport stone commercially from Skipton. Thus, around one hundred years after Crow’s
plan had suggested a relatively unblemished hill, the deep canyon of what had become
known as Skipton Rock Quarry appears on maps in roughly the position suggested by the
defacement of Crow’s plan. It was illustrated (fancifully) in a line drawing by Bailey
63
The Haw' : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
(1852) who commented: ‘In surveying this deep and awful chasm, you will perceive that
the appliances ot British industry and skill can not only level a mountain but actually sink
it • • •’! The lowest level was however, as at the entrance today, at about 520ft (158m) OD
(Dickinson 1987).
The Haw was traversed from north to south by four major boundaries in 1757. A century
later an extra barrier had been constructed across the hill, cutting off the Skipton Rock
Quarry from the eastern two-thirds of the hill; its southern end now remains as a band of
rubble extending up the hillside (near NG intersection SEO 16526) east of the grassed-over
embankment (see Fig. 2b) made, around 1982, during construction of the Skipton bypass.
Later, other barriers were constructed to separate quarried land from the public; the
'twenty-five-inch’ O.S. map of 1889 shows that the quarry had eaten right through
Hawbank, and passed through a ‘bottleneck’ at the north/south right-of-way (see Fig. 2a)
over The Haw. it had expanded to the north and south and was bounded to the east by a
new irregular wall, remains of which still retain a quarry track. This track, parallel in part
to the right of way, passes southwards over the ridge at NG intersection SEO 153, and ends
at the Skibeden Quarry (now being infilled).
Skipton Rock Quarry, by the first decade of this century, had devoured the western end
of the hill to the north of the skyline; it had by-passed both ‘Lookabout’ and ‘The Haw’
summit. The smaller Skibeden Quarry containing Skibeden Limekilns was marked
‘Disused’ on the ‘six-inch’ O.S. map of 1854.
Further east, a number of very small roadside quarries are shown on this map; several, at
Far Skibeden, were clustered around a group of buildings (in Crow’s ‘R326 The North Side
Close’). These became ‘Old Quarries’ on the ‘twenty-five-inch’ O.S. map of 1891, Far
Skibeden Quarry on maps published around 1970, and were 'Skibeden Quarry (disused)’,
around NG intersection SE020530 on the 1:10,000 O.S. map of 1985. By this time the
original Skibeden Quarry had long been reactivated, and physically linked with Skipton
Rock Quarry.
The disuse of the small quarries at the eastern end of The Haw continued at least until
after the Second World War. However, by 1968 aerial photographs show that those next to
the (A59) road were active and that some confluence had occurred, a confluence which
had been dramatised by the destruction of ‘The Haw’ summit, and by blasting in 1960 to
create a cleft (Fig. 3) between Skipton Rock and Skibeden Quarries. The Skibeden/Far
Skibeden quarry confluence now constitutes a landfill site separated from the A59 road by
deliberately revegetated spoil banks, and in one small roadside area, around grid line E020.
by semi-natural vegetation of conservation value.
One further small ‘Limestone Quarry’ was shown on the 1854 map; this was on the
southern slope, in the middle of Crow’s ‘R327 The North Hills . . at NG intersection
SE024533; it was not shown on later six-inch maps and, by the 1980s remained as a small
hollow with skeletal soil over exposed bedrock and calcicolous vegetation surrounded by
ancient neutral grassland.
In addition to the Skibeden Limekilns there were other kilns on and around The Haw.
There was a ‘Kiln Field’ south of The Haw Park in 1757, and. some 500m to the north-
east, Crow recorded ‘R326 The House Bam Stable yard Garden and the North side Close
in which is two lime kilns' the site of buildings at ’Far Skibeden' (Fig. 2). The records link
precisely (a) with Raistrick’s (1965) comment that the ‘. . . optimum period of the kiln was
probably 1750 to 1850 . . .’, and (b) with later botanical finds.
Summary
Land-use changes on The Haw have been inferred from archival records, and from maps.
Once an undivided landscape feature, it has been changed beyond recognition through
quarrying and railway works. The pace of alteration to the topography and drainage has
increased during the past two hundred years. It will be shown, in a subsequent paper, how
the vegetation and flora have been affected by these changes.
64
'The Haw' : An Eighteenth Century Greenfield Site near Skipton
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Thanks are due to Tilcon Ltd. who kindly allowed access to Skipton Rock Quarry and
made a grant towards expenses. Mrs S. Thomas, Archivist-in-Charge, Yorkshire
Archaeological Society, introduced me to the massive coloured Plan of the Manor of
Skipton dated 1757. Stewart Davidson used computer techniques to produce the maps and
drawings presented here. Parts of maps still under copyright have been reproduced with
permission from The Controller of Her Majesty’s Stationery Office.
References
The scales and dates of publication of Ordnance Survey maps are given in the text and
legends to Figures. Older maps referred to are 'Saxton's Map of Yorkshire' (1577), John
Speed’s [Johan Speede] ‘ Yorkshire ’ (1610) and Thomas Jeffereys’ 'The County of York'
(1776).
Bailey, B. (1852) llkley and the Pearls of Craven or Sketches of the Prettiest Spots in that
Interesting District. Harrison & Son. Bingley.
Carlisle, A. and Brown, A. H. F. (1968) Biological Flora of the British Isles. Pinus
sylvestris L. Journal of Ecology 56: 269-307.
Cox, J. C. (1907) Forestry. In The Victoria History of the Counties of England: A History
of Yorkshire. Volume I . Ed. W. Page, pp. 501-523. Published for The University of
London Institute of Historical Research. [Reprinted in 1974 by Dawsons, London.]
Crow, James. (1757 unpublished). A Plan of The Manor and Lordship of Skipton . . . and A
Field Book belonging to a Plan of the Manor and Lordship of Skipton on Craven with
the Demesne Lands and Estates in the Townships of Sterton, Thorley and Emsey in the
Parish of Skipton and County of York.
Curtis, L. F., Courtney, F. M. and Trudgill, S. (1976) Soils in the British Isles. Longman,
London.
Dawson, W. H. (1882) History of Skipton (W. R. Yorks ) Manorial Government. Simpkin,
Marshall, London.
Dickinson, J. M. (1987) On Either Side: The Yorkshire Dales Railway - A Lineside Guide.
Wyvem Publications, Skipton.
Hambler, D. J., Dixon, J. M. & Cotton D. E. (1990) The relative potentials of six grass
cultivars for rehabilitation and stabilization of a limestone quarry spoil-bank.
Environmental Conservation 17: 149-156.
Hey, D. (1986) A Regional History of England : Yorkshire from AD 1000. Longmans,
London.
Penney, L. F. (1974) Quaternary. In: The Geology and Mineral Resources of Yorkshire (eds
D. H. Rayner & J. E. Hemingway), pp. 245-264. Yorkshire Geological Society, Leeds.
Rackham, O. (1986) The History of the Countryside. Dent, London.
Raistrick, A. (1965) Old Yorkshire Dales. David & Charles, Newton Abbot.
Rotheray, L. (1900) Flora of Skipton & District. Craven Naturalists’ & Scientific
Association, Skipton,
Smith, A. H. (1962) The Place Names of the West Riding of Yorkshire: Part VII. (English
Place Name Society Volume XXXV.) Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Smith, F. W. and Binns, D. (1986) Railways in the Northern Dales I. The Skipton & llkley
Line. Skipton - llkley. The Yorkshire Dales Railway Today: Hawbank Quarry Tramway.
Wyvern Publications, Skipton.
Tansley, A. G. (1949) The British Islands and their Vegetation. Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge.
Whitaker, T. D. (1878) The History and Antiquities of the Deanery of Craven, in the
County of York. Joseph Dodgson, Leeds. | republished 1973.
Williams, W. ( 1987) Medieval Skipton. Craven District Council. Skipton.
65
THREE PARSON-NATURALISTS FROM DURHAM
PATRICK H. ARMSTRONG
Department of Geography, University of Western Australia, Nedlands.
The Parson-Naturalist Tradition
A signilicant figure in English science and the English Church for several centuries has
been the parson-naturalist. Since the time of William Turner (cl 508- 1568) clergy have
made a most formidable contribution to natural history in England (Raven 1947; Jones
1988). The best-known figures are perhaps John Ray (1627-1705), with whom, it has been
said, “the adventure of modem science begins” (Raven, 1942), and Gilbert White (1720-
1793), whose Natural history of Selhorne (1789) is one of the most celebrated books in the
English language (Mabey 1986; Foster 1988). However, the brightness of the reputations
of these individuals should not blind us to that great host of other luminaries who have, to a
considerable extent, made English natural history what it is today. They include botanists
and ornithologists, geologists and entomologists; clerical naturalists have included
specialists on spiders, molluscs, sponges, seaweeds and lichens. Some of them, such as
geologists Adam Sedgwick (1785-1873), William Buckland (1784-1856) and Thomas
Bonney (1833-1923) had permanent university appointments (Armstrong, in press). Others
originally held academic positions, but were required, as was the tradition in earlier
centuries, to renounce them on marriage: such was John Mitchell (17247-1795) who was
Woodwardian Professor of Geology at Cambridge for two years, but who later spent 26
years in the Yorkshire parish of Thornhill (Geikie 1918). Some, like John Stevens Henslow
(1796-1861), combined both an academic position and parochial ministry; he was
Professor of Botany at Cambridge as well as the much-loved Rector of Hitcham in Suffolk
(Russell-Gebbett 1977). Some, like Gilbert White, used their long association with a single
parish (and incumbencies of over 40 years were not uncommon in the eighteenth and
nineteenth centuries) to make a special study of a particular locality. Others specialised in a
particular biological group. There were men who formed and supported natural history
societies and field clubs, those who built up museums, and those who edited county floras,
often using their network of clerical colleagues to assist them. There are certainly Scots
(including Scots Presbyterian) examples of the genre, and not a few Irish, but the tradition
is distinctively an English one; Australian, New Zealand and other “colonial”
representatives in many cases have been English by birth, training or temporary residence.
Quite a number, including several parochial clergy, have achieved the high distinction of a
Fellowship of the Royal Society.
Many parson-naturalists have seen their work in natural history as an extension of their
work as a priest. John Ray (botanist, ornithologist, theologian) set out the notion that
“design implies a designer" in The wisdom of God in 1692. These ideas were recycled,
without full acknowledgement, by William Paley (1743-1805) in 1802 as the doctrine of
“natural theology”; it would be from the latter that many nineteenth century ordinands
came across these ideas. Indeed. Charles Darwin (1809-1882). who went up to Christ's
College, Cambridge in 1827 intending to enter the Church of England priesthood, in later
life recalled that his reading of Paley was virtually the only study from his Cambridge days
that was to be of much use to him in his scientific career (Barlow 1958).
There were others with rather different, or at least more specific, agendas. Some sought
to marry the geological record with the Mosaic record of Genesis (Gillispie 1959;
Livingstone 1987). Many, after the publication of On the origin of species in 1859
attempted to demonstrate the falsity of evolutionary ideas; yet others tried to find a way of
accommodating them.
Many parson-naturalists were the products of Oxford or Cambridge Universities. From
the 1840s onwards some were Durham graduates. This article identifies three such
individuals whose training in Durham in the 1840s and 1850s was rather similar, describes
and compares their careers, clerical and scientific, and offers a brief comment on their
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
66 Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham
respective theological and philosophical views. (For a biographical account of a Durham
parson-naturalist of a later generation, the Lincolnshire botanist E. A. Woodruffe-Peacock,
see Seaward 1971.)
Durham University in the 1840s and 1850s
The University of Durham was founded by Act of Chapter, with the consent of the Bishop
of Durham, William van Mildert, on 28 September 1831. The University was then
constituted by Act of Parliament 1831-1832. The first students came into residence in
1833. Durham University was thus extremely young and small in the 1840s, with just a few
dozen students. Originally founded with only one college (University), by the 1850s
Bishop Hatfield’s Hall and Bishop Cosin’s Hall had been established. The objective was to
cater for the large and expanding populations of the North of England, remote from Oxford
and Cambridge. The University was strongly clerical, with most of the academic staff in
Holy Orders in the Church of England: one of the aims was to produce a sturdy breed of
northern parson!
Originally appointed Professor of Greek and Classical Literature, Dr Henry Jenkyns
(17967-1878), formerly of Catherine Hall, Cambridge, later moved to the chair of Divinity
and Ecclesiastical History. He dominated the teaching of theology at Durham during the
period in question; a number of sets of notes taken by his students still exist, and from
these it can be seen that he keenly developed a modem approach (for his day) to biblical
criticism. He was held in high esteem by his students. From the first, however, Durham
paid due attention to scientific subjects, and a Professor of Mathematics and Reader in
Natural Philosophy were among the foundation appointments. From 1835-1873 the
Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy was the Rev Temple Chevalier, who,
interestingly, also held the position of Reader in Hebrew, as well as having parochial
responsibility for the parish of Esh, near Durham. Occasionally voluntary lectures on
scientific subjects were also given: on at least one occasion. Dr William Cook, Reader in
Medicine gave a series of lectures on William Paley’s natural theology. (Much of the
material in this section and the next is based on the Durham University Calendar [DUC],
held in the Local Collection, Palace Green Section, Durham University Library).
Three Ordinands in Durham
There might be some question as to whether William Brown Galloway (181 1-1903) should
truly be described as a naturalist as the amount of fieldwork he did seems to have been
limited, but his writing on what might be considered geological topics were so prolific and
so typical of a particular genre that he is included here. Bom in Glasgow, he received an
MA degree from that University before coming to Durham, and indeed for a while he may
have held a teaching position there in moral philosophy. He came into residence in Durham
in 1839 and seems to have been quite competent academically, taking the junior Hebrew
prize in 1840, and the senior prize in 1841. This may be significant as these Hebrew studies
would have brought him into contact with astronomer Temple Chevalier. He was granted a
Licentiate in Theology after passing his examinations, on 23 June 1841 (DUC: Durham
Alumni Records).
Of Octavius Pickard-Cambridge’s (1828-1917) sojourn in Durham we have a much
more detailed picture. In a statement attached to some volumes of notes of Prof Jenkyns’
Divinity lectures (now held in the manuscripts section of the Palace Green Section,
Durham University Library) he writes:
I was in residence in Univ. Coll, from January 1855 to July 1858 (almost
four academic years) - This gave me the opportunity of attending Dr J’s
course of Lectures, and some parts of it twice. When this last was so, the
notes of the second attendance are in pencil on the opposite sides of the
pages ... the “Notes” are, I believe strictly and fairly accurately a record
of what Dr Jenkyns said . . . whenever possible the Notes actually made in
the Lecture Room were copied out fully and carefully the same evening.
67
Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham
(Pickard-Cambridge Papers: Old University MS, L V 34)
Octavius felt he was not outstanding academically, and had to work conscientiously to
pass his examinations. But humour crept in. Once amidst some notes on Church History a
face is sketched - the lecturer perhaps? At the end of the final set of notes is scribbled:
"Farewell Jenks RIP". He was granted his Licentiate in Theology on 15 June 1857. and
having stayed on in Durham for a further year, had a BA conferred on him on 2 November
1858. Successive entries in Crocktord's show an MA for 1859, although there is no record
of this in the University Calendar.
Octavius Pickard-Cambridge was bom to the name Pickard, but his father added the
Cambridge name when he inherited property from the Cambridge branch of the family;
however, while he was at Durham he sometimes signed his name O. P. Cambridge. Like
William Galloway, he was slightly older than the normal undergraduate age. having
previously spent two years in London training unsuccessfully for the bar. Nevertheless he
seems to have had a fairly active social and sporting life.
He made great friends at Durham, and entered fully into the life of the
University; we find him acting as Steward at steeplechases, and President
of the University College Choral Society - he had a fine voice of wide
range and he gave the Boat Club a Challenge Cup. (Pickard-Cambridge,
1918, p. 7.)
He does not seem to have studied much science in Durham. There are no scientific
lecture notes amongst the ten books of notes he presented to the University in 1915. He
may have attended the occasional general lecture, but the conscientiousness that he devoted
to his theological studies and his participation in rowing, steeplechasing and singing would
suggest that little time was available for this. He seems to have been largely a self-taught
naturalist. He was evidently a keen collector of insects since his childhood, and the
occasional Durham record in his subsequent publications suggests that some collecting was
done during his years at university.
There is ample evidence that Octavius had a real affection for Durham. Apparently he
had a banner with "the cross and arms of University College. Durham" upon it, that used to
be carried in church processions when he was appointed to a Dorset parish in later life. His
son, when sending a copy of a "short memoir" about Octavius to the Durham University
Library wrote that he was “a very loyal Durham man", and this would be confirmed by his
(Octavius’) decision to donate his notes to the University in 1915. He does not seem to
have had a very strong association with Durham after his ordination, although he may have
visited on his honeymoon in the spring of 1866, as in the course of the "wedding tour" he
and his bride “visited nearly all the English cathedrals”. He would surely have been
unlikely, on such a trip to omit a cathedral as magnificent as that of Durham, and one that
he knew so well.
Concerning William Henry Purchas (1822-1903) we have less information. Although
several years older than Octavius Pickard-Cambridge, he was a close contemporary. He
probably came into residence at University College in the Michaelmas Term of 1856. and
left after the Easter term 1857; his Licentiate in Theology was conferred on 15 June 1857.
he must have known Octavius well, among such a small group of students, and may have
been in the group that "used to meet in the evening after each lecture and compare notes."
We can be reasonably sure that he too retained an affection for the University, for on the
publication of his book in 1889. he wrote to the University enclosing a copy: "as an old
student of your college who has by no means ceased to feel an interest in the welfare of the
University". (A letter from W. H. Purchas to the Rev Dr A. Plummer, dated December
1889, is bound into the copy of The Flora of Herefordshire in Durham University Library.)
Subsequent Clerical Careers
All three were ordained deacon within a few months of completing their courses at
University College, and were priested a year later, each being about 30 years of age on
ordination. They all took their first curacies in the North of England, subsequently moving
68
Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham
south. The Rev. W. B. Galloway was curate in Barnard Castle, Co. Durham, from 1841 to
1845; the Rev. W. H. Purchas was at Tickenhall, Derbyshire 1857-1859; the Rev. O.
Pickard-Cambridge served his first curacy at Scarisbrick, Lancashire, 1858-1859 (where he
had a hard time: the main land-owner was a Roman Catholic and would not allow a Church
of England clergyman to live on the estate).
There the similarities ended.
William Galloway was curate at Holy Trinity, Bromley, 1845-1847, and then at St
Pancras, 1847-1849. Thereafter he was Vicar of St Mark’s, Regent’s Park for nearly 40
years (1849-1888). He seems to have thrived on city life, and made numerous contacts in
London: he was chaplain at various times to Viscount Hawarden and Earl de Montalt. He
died on 20 March 1903. (Biographical information on W. B. Galloway is somewhat sparse;
sources used include University Calendars , Alumni Records and issues of the Durham
University Journal [DUJ].)
Octavius Pickard-Cambridge, however, for the most part shunned urban centres. After
his time in Lancashire he became curate in his father’s Dorset parish of Bloxworth (his
father was effectively both squire and parson - ’squarson’). During the period 1860-1868
Octavius spent a total of two years travelling abroad, both on the continent (Italy,
Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Corfu) and in the Near East (Egypt, Syria, and what was
then known as Palestine). In terms of scientific contacts made, and specimens (spiders and
insects) collected, these travels proved extremely useful. He later wrote of a period in
Egypt, January-April 1864:
[Suffering a good deal from climatic influences I was unable to work very
hard. But nevertheless he was able to collect: . . . several hundred species
of insects of all orders, besides 164 species of spiders ... as well as a few
Acaridea and Scorpionidea. (Pickard-Cambridge 1876.)
Following the death of his father, Octavius succeeded him as Rector of Bloxworth,
remaining in that position until his death 50 years later. This long association with a single
parish enabled him to gain an extraordinarily detailed knowledge of the Dorset heaths. A
point of comparison with William Galloway was his holding the position of chaplain to Sir
Frederick Johnstone, High Sheriff of Dorset in 1889 and 1890 (Pickard-Cambridge 1918:
Collons 1977).
Exactly what course William Purchas’ clerical career took immediately after his curacy
in Derbyshire is not clear. Later issues of Crockford’ s Clerical Directory show him in
curacies in Gloucestershire (Lydney, 1865-1867; Tredford St James, 1867-1870). not very
far from his birth-place at Ross-on-Wye, where, to judge from the records in the Flora he
later prepared, he regularly botanised (e.g. Festuca sylvatica , noted as being found at
Downton Gorge, on the right bank of the Teme, 1869). However, Crockford’ s is silent on
the period between 1859-1865. Cox's Clergy List for 1862 simply gives his address as
‘Calke, near Derby’, but says nothing more. It may have been that he was in non-clerical
employment for a few years - a private tutor perhaps. 1870 saw him instituted as Vicar of
Alstonfield, Ashbourne, Staffordshire in the Diocese of Lichfield, an incumbency he held
until his death, aged 81 on 16 December 1903. Apart from the local paper’s comment that
“he faithfully discharged his ministerial duties, living the life of a sincere Christian in
Harmony with his high calling”, we know relatively little about his ministry.
Scientific Work and Theological Views
Like many parson-naturalists, William Henry Purchas had a lifelong devotion to the field
botany of his native county - in his case Herefordshire. Although he “removed from the
county” as a relatively young man, he retained lifelong his affection for the county, its
countryside and its plants. He was pleased to have a clerical colleague (the Rev. Augustus
Ley, BA, Christ Church, Oxford, Vicar of Sellack with Kings Capel) who was resident in
Herefordshire and was able to assist him in his studies. William Purchas had previously
written one or two short pieces on the local flora for publications in the Ross-on-Wye area,
but the completion of the Flora of Herefordshire (Jakeman and Carver, Hereford, 1889)
69
Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham
was essentially his life’s work in natural history. It is a very thorough and scholarly work.
Previous literature had been carefully surveyed for records, and very detailed information
on the distribution ot plant taxa is given. William Purchas had a special knowledge of the
genera Rubus and Salix, both difficult taxa, and dealt with the many species and varieties in
a masterly manner. The dates of some of the records show that William Purchas had been
an enthusiastic tield botanist since his teenage years; thus Geranium pratense had been
found by him “about 1839”.
In the first chapter the county is divided into 14 “botanical districts”, with a brief
description of each. To add to the usefulness of this chapter to naturalists of all types,
William Purchas arranged for another clerical colleague, the Rev. W. E. Symonds, FGS,
Rector ot Pendock, to write notes on the geology of each district; these provide a
straightforward review of the stratigraphy and palaeontology of each area, with brief
comments on matters such as the way in which erosion had developed different landscapes
front different lithologies. The chapter is thus an entirely conventional summary in terms of
the state of geology in England some five decades after the publication of Charles Lyell's
Principles of Geology ; for example, there is an attempt at a correlation of the Old Red
Sandstone rocks of Herefordshire with the Devonian and Old Red Sandstone of other parts
of the British Isles. The association of particular fossils (e.g. the primitive fish Cepalapis
and Pteraspis) with particular strata is mentioned, as are the effects on the landscape of the
Woolhope Dome (a major upfold in the layered rocks of the region) of "the long ages of
denudation”.
Symonds had excavated some of the caves near Whitchurch over the period 1870-1872,
and describes finding the bones of several extinct mammals in them (including the
mammoth and bison). He goes on: “Prehistoric Man also must have sought them as a
refuge, as his chipped flints and fractured pebbles were found associated with the bones of
extinct mammalia”. He is clearly a disciple of Lyell, and quite possibly Darwin, for he
seems to accept the notion that humanity is extremely ancient, and also that the techniques
of geology and palaeontology are appropriate to the study of its antiquity (W. E. Symonds.
Notes on geology, in Purchas and Ley 1889).
It seems that in commissioning Mr Symonds to write the introductory geology section to
his Flora, William Purchas got something a little different from what he expected, for in
the front of the copy he presented to Durham University Library is a quite lengthy, hand-
written statement:
In reference to some of the following notes of the Geology of
Herefordshire and certain conclusions advanced therein which seem
incapable of reconciliation with the Mosaic account of the Creation I
should wish to say that while it may be quite true that these conclusions
may seem to be legitimate deductions now, or to be now demanded by the
facts at present known to Geologists, it is equally true that in a science
such as Geology w'hich is still youthful, new and important facts may any
day be brought to light which may demand considerable modification of
views now widely and very positively maintained, and that while we do
not at present see how the testimony of Genesis & that of the rocks are to
be harmonised, we may best [be] satisfied that a fuller understanding of
the matter will shew there to be substantial accord. I regret that this note
was not printed at the end of the Preface.
William Henry Purchas
This provides a striking insight to the way in which Purchas attempted to reconcile his
scientific work and his theological views. Although we know relatively little about his
theology, it was stated in a local newspaper at the time of his death that “he represented the
evangelical type of churchman" (DUJ, 16. 13), i.e. he identified with that party of the
church that placed great emphasis on value of the scripture, often insisting on the literal
truth of every part of the Bible. Many evangelicals, some of whom have been called
“scriptural geologists”, saw, as an important part of the scientist’s work, the reconciliation
70
Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham
or “harmonisation” of the biblical record and that of the rocks. Although botany was his
forte, not geology, Purchas was sufficient of a scientist to appreciate the logic of much of
what his colleague, W. E. Symonds said, yet he retained the deepest respect for biblical
truth. His views appear to have been not so very different from those of Galloway,
although he had a much firmer grasp of scientific matters, and he was less extreme.
Although he is nowhere explicit, in his concern for the detailed taxonomy of the plants,
in his understanding of the diversity and complexity of the plant world, and his obvious
appreciation of the beauty of nature, Purchas would appear to be something of a "natural
theologian”. He would seem to accept that each different species was independently
created by God. He would thus perhaps have argued that a justification of the careful study
of “the flowers of the field” was the insight it gave to the mind of the Creator.
Octavius Pickard-Cambridge, in his subsequent career as a naturalist, wrote extensively
on a wide variety of natural history topics. In 1852, before he went up to Durham he
contributed several short notes to the Zoologist on such varied topics as the “Skin of a large
snake”, the white willow-wren, and robber bees. A listing of all his published papers shows
five on Mammalia, four on Reptilia, about 36 on ornithology, some 53 on Lepidoptera and
about 15 in the field of “general entomology”. He also wrote nine articles on “antiquarian
and miscellaneous” subjects - the first before he had graduated from Durham - and a
couple on meteorology, as well as three biographical articles. By far his most significant
contribution was to arachnology. He wrote some 180 papers on spiders throughout his
career, the first in 1857, the last in 1914 (Pickard-Cambridge 1918). Perhaps his most
lasting work was the two-volume Spiders of Dorset , Part 1 of which was published in
1879, Part 2 in 1881. Despite the title, it did not restrict itself to the spiders of the single
West Country county, but dealt with the arachnids of other parts of Britain: those not found
in Dorset were included in an Appendix; this division was not universally welcomed and
was not repeated. He was sent specimens from all over the world, and he published
material on spiders from, amongst other remote locations, Kerguelen, the Seychelles,
Japan, St Helena, New Zealand, Siberia, South Africa, India, Paraguay and Newfoundland.
Interestingly, he was amongst the first to comment at length on the behaviour of spiders
and other invertebrates: in this as in much else he was ahead of his time. He was at one
stage lent a fine binocular microscope by the Royal Society, and he had a quite
extraordinary eye for detail, recording with exemplary exactitude the minutiae of the
morphology and taxonomy of tiny creatures. An example is his Monograph of British
Phaiangidea or harvest-men , published in 1890. According to his son “His
draughtsmanship was extremely accurate and at the same time artistic”. He named many
spiders that were new to science, always insisting on retaining a “type specimen" of a
species he named. It was largely for his work on spiders that he was elected to a Fellowship
of the Royal Society in the summer of 1887, signing the Roll on 24 November 1887.
Of Octavius Pickard-Cambridge’s theological and philosophical views and
churchmanship we know a good deal more than those of William Purchas. Whereas much
of his scientific work, from his twenties onwards, was extremely innovative and original, in
theological (and incidentally, political) matters he was deeply traditional. His son recorded:
“He was an old-fashioned High Churchman, and took a somewhat severe view of Dissent”,
although it was noted that “no Dissenter ever found him lacking in charity in times of
need”. He emphasised the sacraments, greatly increasing the frequency of Holy
Communion at his church in Bloxworth, and the Great Festivals. His son’s account
continues: “(Hjis conduct of Divine Service was most reverent and dignified, and his
reading of the Bible (a matter in which many clergy are sadly incompetent) was . . .
impressive”. His wife Rose, nee Wallace, whom he married in Oxford in April 1866, was
extremely devout, and also came from a noted High Church family.
Yet in some matters he had a striking independence of mind: on several matters of
ecclesiastical administration (to name two examples, the management of church property
and clergy pensions) he was quite outspoken at clergy gatherings. His views on
evolutionary matters were most progressive, and indeed early in his career caused a bit of
Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham 71
friction. On the origin of species appeared around the time of his curacy in Lancashire.
He was not wholly in sympathy with the attitude of most of the local
clergy towards the vexed questions of the day, and he used afterwards to
refer with amusement to their denunciation of the views of Darwin, then
just published. With these views he was (apart from certain details) in
entire sympathy, but his attempts to defend them at meetings of those who
denounced without reading them were not well received. (Pickard-
Cambridge 1918, p. 8.)
It is clear that Darwin’s approach was of considerable value to him in his very detailed
work on taxonomy, for example of the species of the spider genus Erigone. He was
convinced that “new species were still, in all probability, in the process of formation", and
that there existed “very long series of species or supposed species which are connected to
one another by grades of variation so minute that no line can be drawn between them”.
His son records:
It has been mentioned already that he was an early Darwinian, and a
number of rough notes and tentative essays, in which he tried to clear up
his mind on various topics, show his special interest in the theory of
evolution. More definite than these is his opinion on the problem of
secondary sexual characters, upon which he corresponded a good deal with
Darwin, Wallace, and others, - an opinion different from that of Darwin
and more like that of Wallace, who quotes it ( Darwinism , p. 296) in
support of his own view. My father wrote (in 1869): ‘I myself doubt that
particular application of the Darwinian theory which attributes male
peculiarities of form, structure, colour, and ornament to female appetency
or predilection. There is, it seems to me, undoubtedly something in the
male organization of a special and sexual nature, which of its own vital
force develops the remarkable male peculiarities so commonly seen, and of
no imaginable use to that sex. In as far as these peculiarities show a great
vital power, they point out to us the finest and strongest of the sex, and
show us which of them would most certainly appropriate to themselves the
best and greatest number of females, and leave behind the strongest and
greatest number of progeny'. (Pickard-Cambridge 1918, pp. 57-58.)
This is quite striking, for it anticipates Darwin's ideas on sexual selection, expressed in
The descent of man (especially Chapter 8), published in 1871. Indeed it was in 1874,
around the time that the second edition was being prepared, that Darwin corresponded with
Pickard-Cambridge on the subject of the small size of the male as compared to female
spiders, and the significance of other sexual differences. Pickard-Cambridge regarded
many of these as a special case of natural selection, rather than evidence for a separate
process of sexual selection.
[T]here would be no reason to resort to “sexual selection" to account for
male sexual peculiarities of structure whether of the nature of what we
usually term “ornamental'' or not. Of course what I have said presupposes
an unexplained and perhaps unaccountable element in the sexual nature of
the male, more powerful than that of the female.
(Letter: O. Pickard-Cambridge to C. R. Darwin, Bloxworth Rectory. 17
Feb 1874. Cambridge University Library Darwin Archives: DAR 161.
1/7.)
Pickard-Cambridge was much honoured that Darwin corresponded with him.
His son concludes the discussion of Octavius' evolutionary views with the remark:
It need hardly be added that my father saw no inconsistency between the
theory of evolution, on the lines laid down by Darwin and Wallace, and
the belief in the peculiar spiritual nature of man. (Pickard-Cambridge,
1918, p. 59.)
Theologically and philosophically William Brown Galloway seems to have been close
72 Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham
to W. H. Purchas. Vigorous evangelical that he was, he seems to have been something of a
fundamentalist, and as one person put it after his death: “His great aim in life was the
defence of Scripture” (Durham Alumni Records). This defence began in 1842, not many
months after his leaving Durham, and continued until close to the time of his death, and
constituted a stream of books and pamphlets aimed at demonstrating to literal truth of
Scripture. His early writings were predominantly theological in tone, for example: The
chain of ages traced in its prominent links, by holy scripture from the creation of Adam to
the close of the first century of the Christian Era. These clearly demonstrate a conservative,
literalist approach, and a concern for the Bible as a source of historical information. This
concern for time runs through much that Galloway wrote.
Later he attempted, with more and more vigour, to show how the biblical record could
be linked to the evidence of science in every respect. In particular he was at pains to
demonstrate “scientifically” that the Flood described in Genesis had occurred: he was a
“diluvialist”. He published Physical facts and the scriptural record in 1872, Science and
geology in relation to the universal deluge (1888) and Testimony of science to the deluge
(no date, about 1895). In chapter 1 of the last of these he takes William Buckland to task
for deserting the diluvian and catastrophist cause he had originally championed:
It was only from about the year 1838 that the Glacial Theory began to be
accepted by geologists in England, in opposition to the previous
philosophical views of the ever-illustrious Cuvier . . . Even Buckland. the
author of Reliquiae Diluvianae and of the Bridgewater Treatise on
Geology, professed himself a convert to the theoretical conclusions of
Agassiz in the year 1840. But his own sounder judgment is to be found in
his earlier works. (Galloway, n.d. p. 15.)
He goes on to castigate “some clergymen of more or less distinguished position” who
defer to “certain popular men of science putting forward as unquestionable their
magnificent though unproved speculations”.
His own speculations were fairly florid. A single example must suffice. The Cretaceous
chalk, with its nodules of flints that underlies much of East Anglia, parts of Lincolnshire,
and east Yorkshire, was, he felt, meteoritic in origin, having formed on dry land.
I am prepared to show many objects of the dry land in flint, which could
not have been formed under water . . . These consist of portions of
decayed tree roots in flint, with the bark in places where the wood had
fallen away . . . [Pjortions also of other and larger trees from the chalk
district of Yorkshire . . . hollow stalks of cabbage . . . also pods of beans
... all of flint . . . gourds or other vegetable fruits . . . roots of turnip and
specimens of fungus, all of flint.
. . . [Considering the vast extent of the chalk and flint formation, it is
manifest that had it all fallen upon the earth at one time, it might have
materially affected the earth’s balance. But, coming by degrees at
successive periods, the balance might adjust itself by the flow of waters of
the sea to the opposite side of the globe where the weight had to be
counterbalanced . . . [T]he gradual accumulation of a vast mass of
compensating waters on the opposite side of the world, might, by its
superincumbent weight, . . . break down the underlying strata there.
(Galloway, 1888, p. 3.)
These movements altered the equilibrium of the earth: “a change of axis would
demonstrably result . . . [and] such a change of axis would produce a universal deluge”.
(Galloway, 1888, p. 41.)
Although there was not much evidence of fieldwork, beyond perhaps occasional brief
descriptions of rocks or landscapes and some photographs of curiously-shaped Hints, all
this was backed-up by numerous quotations from scripture and other ancient writings.
William Galloway produced many books and pamphlets of similar character, some of
them going into several editions, and the last written when he was over ninety: he seems to
73
Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham
have been a determined and something of a stubborn man. Often his speculations were
supported by pages ot mathematics, quotations from Greek authors (in the original) and
careful selections trom contemporary geological and other scientific authors. The method
is somewhat reminiscent of some late twentieth century “creation science” writers (also
often rather extreme evangelicals): tiny snippets from worthy authorities are quoted quite
out of context. Nevertheless, despite the wry amusement with which such ideas are
received in scientific circles today, Galloway was typical of many scriptural geologists,
although few of them were quite as prolific as he.
Envoi
Alike in their education at University College, Durham, between 1839 and 1858 the three
clergymen described here exemplify between them many aspects of the parson-naturalist
tradition. Their lives virtually spanned the nineteenth century, the hey-day of the genre.
One was a botanist, one a zoologist, one (if one is broad-minded) was “something of a
geologist”, and thus they exemplify the range of natural history interests of the clergy. One,
like so many other clergy-botanists, edited his county flora; another devoted the greater
part of his life to study of the natural history of a single small area, and to a considerable
extent, to the working out of a single biological group. All were conservatives in their own
way: one a high churchman, two others on the evangelical wing of the church.
Where they differed was the manner in which they reacted to the challenges of
nineteenth century science in relation to their faith, for example in the extent to which they
took the new ideas of gradualism or uniformitarianism in geology, and the innovative
notion that much of Britain (and indeed the northern hemisphere land masses) had been
affected by glaciation, and of course the theory of evolution.
William Galloway rejected these ideas, as far as one can see, in their entirety. Scathing
of the glacial theory, he resolutely continued to believe that the earth was but a few
thousand years old, and that every incident in the earth’s history could be confirmed with
reference to the Bible. Although a prolific writer, he could not, in all honesty, be called a
scientist.
William Purchas was perhaps slightly less extreme. He distrusted geology rather less,
feeling that as more became known of the record of the rocks a greater degree of
reconciliation with the Old Testament might be possible. Plants were living things of great
interest and beauty, evidence perhaps of the ingenuity of the Creator, and worthy of study
for their own sake. He made no use of evolutionary ideas in interpreting their taxonomy;
and although there is no record of his views on Darwin’s theories, it can be assumed that he
would not have approved of them. He produced but one major work of natural history.
Octavius Pickard-Cambridge was by far and away the most distinguished scientist of the
three. Fellow of the Royal Society, and Honorary Member or Fellow of a host of other
scientific bodies he was also by far the most productive, writing several books, and
hundreds of scientific papers. He had a international reputation. Despite his respect for the
teaching of his Church and the Bible, he was much more open to modem ideas. Being of
the High Church party, rather than of the evangelical wing, he did not adopt a quite such a
literalist approach. He thought long and hard about Darwin’s evolutionary views, and
discussed them widely, finding in them an important key to the understanding of the
taxonomy of certain groups of his beloved spiders.
All three individuals discussed here illustrate aspects of the intellectual life of the
nineteenth century church. While it is interesting to note how often it was that parson-
naturalists were in the forefront of their field (like Octavius Pickard-Cambridge), it should
be noted that others were content with a purely local reputation (like William Purchas), and
it does not do to get too "whiggish: it is occasionally instructive to explore blind alleys and
culs-de-sac, and to examine the ideas and personalities of the odd. the misled, the now-
forgotten and obscure (like William Galloway).
There are a couple of other general points that may be made. Churchmen have
contributed much more than theology over a long period, but it was the nineteenth century
74
Three Parson-Naturalists from Durham
that was the hey-day of the parson-naturalist. This was the time when the structures of
disciplines were forming. University departments were founded, chairs were endowed,
societies were established, major theories were being propounded. Some clergymen-
scientists - Henslow, Sedgwick and Bonney among them - entered the academic hurly-
burly with gusto. Some, like Pickard-Cambridge, dallied at the edges, vigorously
supporting their local societies, only occasionally venturing (in Octavius’ case) further
afield. Others largely ignored (and were ignored by) the academic mainstream. Yet the sum
of the achievements of those working in a church, rather than a university framework, and
thus to some extent able to stand aside from an agenda imposed by professional science
was enormous.
Acknowledgements
Much of this research was done during the tenure of a Leonard Slater Fellowship at
University College, Durham, during the Michaelmas Term, 1993, and I am indebted to the
Master and the senior members of the College for their companionship and support. I also
thank the staffs of the Durham University libraries for their assistance. Godfrey Waller of
the Manuscripts Section of Cambridge University Library assisted with Darwin material.
Geof Martin of South Connecticut State University read through an early draft and made
several valuable suggestions.
References
Armstrong, P. H. (In press) Thomas Bonney (1833-1923). Geographers: biobibliographic
studies. Mansell, London.
Barlow, N. (ed.) ( 1958) The autobiography of Charles Darwin. Collins, London.
Collons, B. (1977) Victorian country parsons. Constable, London.
Foster, P. G. M. (1988) Gilbert White and his records: a scientific biography. Christopher
Helm, London.
Galloway, W. B. (1872) Physical facts and the scriptural record, or eighteen propositions
for geologists. Rivingtons, London.
Galloway, W. B. (c. 1880) The chain of ages traced in its prominent links, by holy
scripture from the creation of Adam to the close of the first century of the Christian Era.
Sampson, Low, London.
Galloway, W. B. (1888) The chalk and flint formation: its origin with a very ancient and a
scientific modern theory of the world. Sampson, Low, London.
Galloway, W. B. (c. 1895) Testimony of science to the deluge. Sampson, Low, London.
Galloway, W. B. (1900) The North Pole, the great ice age and the deluge. Sampson, Low,
London.
Gillispie, C. C. (1959) Genesis and geology: a study in the relations of scientific through,
natural theology, and social opinion in Great Britain, 1790-1850. Flarper & Row, New
York.
Geikie, A. (1918) Memoir of John Mitchell. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. [A
British Museum Microfilm of this work is available.]
Jones, D. (1988) William Turner: Tudor naturalist, physician and divine. Routledge,
London.
Livingstone, D. (1987) Darwin' s forgotten defenders. Scottish Academic Press, Edinburgh.
Mabey, R. (1986) Gilbert White: a biography of the author of The Natural History of
Selborne. Century, London.
Pickard-Cambridge, A. W. (1918) Memoir of the Reverend Octavius Pickard-Cambridge,
MA, FRS, by his son. Oxford, printed for private circulation.
Pickard-Cambridge, O. (1876) Catalogue of spiders made in Egypt, with descriptions of a
new species and characters of a new genus. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 36: 541-630.
Pickard-Cambridge, O. ( 1 879) Spiders of Dorset, Pt 1 . Dorset Nat. Hist. Fid Club.
Pickard-Cambridge, 0.(1881) Spiders of Dorset, Pt 2. Dorset Nat. Hist. Fid Club.
Pickard-Cambridge, O. (1890) Monograph of the British Phalangidea or harvestmen. Proc.
Dorset Nat. Hist. Soc. Antiq. Fid Club. 11: 162-215.
Book Reviews
75
Purchas, W. H. & Ley A. (1889) Flora of Herefordshire. Jakeman & Carver. Hereford.
Raven, C. E. (1942) John Ray: Naturalist. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
[Reissued with an introduction by S. M. Walters, 1986],
Raven, C. E. (1947) English naturalists from Neckam to Raw Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge.
Russell-Gebbett, J. (1977) Henslow oj Hitcham: botanist, educationalist and clergyman.
Terence Dalton, Lavenham.
Seaward, M. R. D. (1971) Biographical and bibliographical notes on the Rev. E. A.
Woodruffe-Peacock. Lines. Hist. Archaeol. 6: 1 13-124.
Symonds, W. E. (1889) Notes on geology, in E. H. Purchas & A. Ley, A flora of
Herefordshire. Jakeman & Carver, Hereford.
BOOK REVIEWS
Fly Fishing: The North Country Tradition by Leslie Magee. 1994. Pp. 218, with 15
colour plates, 16 black and white photographs and 3 maps. Smith Settle Press, Otley.
£22.00.
The North Country traditional method of fly fishing for brown trout involves the use of
sparsely dressed, soft-hackled artificial flies fished upstream. Such flies, tied with feathers
from readily available game birds such as partridge, snipe and grouse, have been used for
years on the rivers of the northern counties to the Scottish borders, in contrast to the
artificial flies dressed with poultry feathers that were more commonly used in other regions
ot Britain. The patterns with a characteristic combination of coloured silk and specific
feather, sometimes with a hint of head and thorax and a film of hare or mole fur, were tied
to represent recognisable insects on the water during fixed weeks or even days during the
spring and summer months. They were designed by skilled anglers with an intimate
knowledge of the insects on their own river and simulations capable of deceiving a trout. A
simple classification of the insects evolved but the given binomials such as Waterhen Bloa,
Dark Watchett and Spanish Needle had a North Country rather than Latin origin and were
more descriptive and evocative. These fly fishing innovators supplemented their meagre
income as fanners, millers, water bailiffs or cobblers by selling their special creations, the
fish they caught and by tutoring other anglers and visitors, but their patterns usually
remained closely guarded secrets, passed on within families by word of mouth or recorded
in manuscripts.
In the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, a few noted, literate anglers such as
Pritt, Walbran, Edmonds and Lee compiled books, published in very limited editions,
describing North Country fly fishing methods and providing details of the fly patterns they
had gleaned from their originators, although they very rarely acknowledged the sources of
their information.
Leslie Magee has assiduously traced the origins of North Country methods of fly fishing
and the necessary fly patterns from the innovators to the publicists, giving fascinating
biographies leavened with anecdotes which illuminate our understanding of those early
days of angling. He has consulted old manuscripts and notebooks, traced kin through
parish records and pieced together a jigsaw of snippets and facts to present a veritable mine
of information. He goes on to relate fly patterns to insect species and maps the distribution
of these species in northern rivers and man-made waters such as canals and reservoirs. This
scholarly work is well illustrated and has been beautifully produced. It has been eagerly
awaited by anglers all over the world as the sparsely-dressed, soft-hackled spiders,
originally designed say for the Wharfe or Ure. have proved successful in waters from
Scandinavia to the Antipodes.
TC
76
Book Reviews
The Common Ground of Wild and Cultivated Plants edited by A. Roy Perry and R.
Gwynn Ellis. Pp. x + 166, 14 colour photographs, 25 b/w photographs, 4 line drawings, 12
maps, 8 tables and a key. 1994. National Museum of Wales. £24.95 paperback.
This volume is the report of a conference of the Botanical Society of the British Isles held
at the National Museum of Wales, Cardiff, in July 1992 to coincide with the Garden
Festival at Ebbw Vale.
The cover, depicting a somewhat out-of-focus hybrid Mimulus apparently severely
afflicted with oral thrush, belies the content which is very much in focus with regard to the
common ground of wild and cultivated plants.
Eighteen of the twenty half-hour papers given at the conference are included and range
widely over the subject matter. The first writer philosophises on man’s relationship and
responsibilities to other biota and ecosystems. Others deal with plant introductions,
ergasiophygophytes (garden escapes to you and me!), alien forms of British plants, our
debt to Victorian fern collectors, teratogeny (aberrant forms), the spread of alien plants in
wild situations, conservation and propagation. Several writers deal with taxonomic
confusion and problems of particular genera.
Most of the writers put their case clearly and interestingly and the papers are variously
instructive, thought-provoking or entertaining. There are a few typographic errors. The
colour photographs illustrating two of the papers are excellent, the black and white ones
slightly less so. The price is rather on the high side for a slim paperback but the book is
enjoyable reading.
PPA
Wild Otters. Predation and Population by Hans Kruuk Pp. viii + 290, with 64
monochrome photographs and numerous line drawings, maps and diagrams. 1995. Oxford
University Press. £30
In this comprehensive review of the ecology of the otter the reader has the benefit of the
author’s four years of field observation from 1983 to 1987 at Lunna Ness on the east coast
of mainland Shetland; here, otters were common, exploiting the marine environment.
Pleasingly, there is a broader coverage with frequent reference to the fresh-water habitats
of the Rivers Don and Dee and their tributaries in north-east Scotland.
There are seven main chapters, each helpfully preceded by a synopsis. The topics
covered include spatial organisation, social behaviour, diet, fish as prey, otter Fishing,
thermo-insulation and populations.
Apart from the intrinsic value of the material this book contains, it is also an object
lesson on how a vast quantity of data can be obtained from the simple expedient of direct
observation on a secretive and elusive animal. This is invariably followed by the precise
presentation and summary of the data. For example, in the chapter on diet, the reader is told
the species of fish caught, their numbers, weight, size, variations in take with season and
location and food choices of adults with and without cubs. Throughout the book there is an
abundance of diagrams, graphs and histograms to amplify and reinforce the material in the
text.
The final chapter deals with man and conservation and highlights some of the main
threats (habitat change, pollution and persecution) not only to the European otter but to all
species world-wide. Making use of the information obtained earlier, the author carefully
argues the case for and outlines the conditions necessary for improving the present status of
the otter. As an animal near the end of the food chain, Hans Kruuk regards it as essential
that the otter’s future be secured in the context of a broad habitat management. It is
pleasing to see the inclusion of this chapter as the culmination to the intensive and
dedicated field work.
This book, written by one of our leading authorities on carnivore biology, provides a
clear, readable account of the natural history of one of our most interesting wild mammals.
In so doing it will deservedly appeal to a wide audience.
MJD
YORKSHIRE NATURALISTS’ UNION EXCURSIONS IN 1993
Edited by C. S. V. YEATES
Tolson Memorial Museum, Huddersfield HD5 8DJ
Skipwith Common (VC61) 17th July (J. Payne)
In this poor summer we were lucky to have a reasonable day. About 40 people attended the
excursion and dispersed over different areas of the common. Tea was taken in Kelfield
Village Hall. The President. Professor Geoffrey Fryer, took the chair at the meeting which
followed. Twenty-seven people were present, among them four past presidents, one of
whom. Dr Michael Thompson, was a former chairman of the Skipwith Common
Management Committee. It was a great thrill to see two lizards basking - in the brief sunny
spell - on the newly erected wheel-chair ramp. These constituted the first sighting for eight
years. Common Frog, Common Toad and Smooth Newt were all reported; otherwise
vertebrates were little in evidence.
At the end of the reports Mr K.G. Payne proposed a vote of thanks to the landowners,
the Forbes-Adam family, and to the Yorkshire Wildlife Trust. Full reports have been
passed on to the new Lowland Heaths Officer at the YWT Head office.
Ornithology (M. L. Denton)
It was pleasing to be able to record the presence of Willow Tit, Redpoll and
Yellowhammer. All three species have suffered national decline but were present in good
numbers. Family parties of both Green and Great Spotted Woodpeckers were seen and both
species may have bred on the reserve. As most bird species have ceased to sing by this time
of year it is hardly surprising that the only warblers encountered were Chiffchaff. Willow
Warbler and a single Whitethroat. A Green Sandpiper was heard as it flew over the reserve.
Thirty-eight species were located during the course of the day.
Lepidoptera (J. Payne)
Most of the recording was undertaken by Mr H. E. Beaumont and Gavin Boyd who have
submitted a list of 62 species. Gatekeeper and Ringlet were the most notable of the nine
butterflies seen. Among the 21 macro-moths seen. Lunar Hornet Moth and Six-belted
Clearwing - both members of the Sesioidae - were excellent new records for the Common.
The Pinion-streaked Snout, taken by Mr Boyd, verified its continued occurrence in its old
haunt. Common Footman, Pebble Hook-tip and Coxcomb Prominent were among those
seen as imagines, and The Miller was seen as a larva. Thirty-two ‘micros’ accounted for
the rest of the list.
Freshwater Crustacea (G. Fryer)
The acidic nature of Skipwith Common is not conducive to the development of a diverse
freshwater crustacean fauna. Previous visits have revealed only eight species - though some
of these are sometimes exceedingly abundant. As the south-west comer had not been
explored previously, attention was devoted to this area. Five of the species known to occur
at Skipwith were found, as was the harpacticoid copepod Bryocamptus pygmaeus which
was located in wet Sphagnum. This very common species has been found on other lowland
heaths in Yorkshire. Daphnia obtusa , the only acid-tolerant Daphnia , was plentiful in a
large pond and in interconnected pools representing the marshy remnants of another, as was
Scapholiberis mucronata (which was present in vast numbers in the pools). The only other
anomopod - found in several places - was the very common Chydorus sphaericus. The
cyclopoid copepods Acanthocyclops vernalis and A. languidus favour habitats provided on
lowland heaths. Both have been found on all six such heaths explored in Yorkshire.
Flowering plants and ferns (D. R. Grant)
The reserve is situated on glacial soils and there is a mixture of both sandy and clay areas
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
78
Yorkshire Naturalists' Union Excursions in 1993
together with overlying peat formations. On the Common there are both dry and wet areas
with a number of open peaty pools. On entering the woodland at the west end of the
reserve members were impressed by the spectacular flowering of the pink-petalled bramble
Rubus sprengelii. This is a low, creeping species confined to oak/birch woodlands on acid
soils; it is rare in this vice-county. Other species here on the edge of the wood were R.
lindleianus , R plicatus and the commonest British species R. dasyphyllus (although again
the latter is infrequent in VC61).
On the old runways there was much Sedum album and the introduced Acaena
anserinifolia , while along the edges were R polyanthemus, R. eboracensis and R.
pruinosus. Open areas held Centaurium erythraea and Aira praecox. Pilularia globulifera
was seen at its station, but not in quantity as in previous years. Here there was much J uncus
bulbosus together with J. acutiflorus and Carex disticha. The pool had a small stand of
Scirpus lacustris.
Members then moved on to the centre of the reserve. In one open space, where the
ground is damp, were Drosera rotundifolia, Anagallis tenella, Salix repens and Agrostis
canina. The nearby ride edge had Frangula almus, Rubus caesius and Calamagrostis
epigejos.
The party then returned to the meeting place by way of the main access road. In a ditch
alongside this were Scrophularia auriculata and Scutellaria galericulata. In damp grass
alongside the edges of the road were several orchids: there were few specimens of Listera
ovata and Epipactis helleborine , but a number of stands of Dactylorhiza fuchsii.
My thanks are due to Mr A. Newton for identifying some of the uncommon Rubus
species.
Bryology (T. L. Blocked)
Much of the day was spent on an examination of some of the bog pools, particularly in the
Sandy Lane area of the common. However, only a limited bryophyte flora was found to be
present, dominated by Sphagnum cuspidatum and, locally, by Drepanocladus fluitans. The
effects of drying out were evident, and many areas of damp heath had become overgrown.
There were small quantities of Leucobryum glaucum, Aulacomnium palustre and
Polytrichum longisetum on open ground, but almost no bog hepatics. Campylopus
introflexus was locally plentiful on dry peat, and there were some good patches of
Ptilidium ciliare in an old pine plantation.
The more mature areas of woodland proved to be richer than the heath. C ephalozia
connivens was found on rotten wood, and Sphagnum palustre and S.fimbriatum were fairly
plentiful in some of the wetter areas. Drier woodland near the Visitors’ Centre had some
very fine Plagiomnium affine on its floor, and Plagiothecium denticulatum on a tree bole.
A small quantity of the strict epiphyte Orthotrichum pulchellum on the old branch of a
sallow was one of the best finds of the day.
A number of species were noted only on the old runways. These included Tortula
ruralis and Brachythecium albicans.
In all 40 mosses and 7 hepatics were recorded.
Mycology (M. Sykes)
Several agarics, most of them common ones but including Russula velenovskyi , were
observed. Fomes fomentarius - a feature of the common - was common on Betula, and
Daldinia concentrica (most often associated with Fraxinus) was very common on dead and
dying wood of Betula by the path sides.
Plant galls (L. Lloyd-Evans)
A total of 18 galls was recorded. Very conspicuous beside the dykes were distorted leaves
of Polygonum amphibium, caused by the gall-midge Wachtliella persicariae ; the leaf
margin was inrolled, thickened and varied in colour from yellow through orange to pink
and purple. Another colourful find was a crimson pea-sized gall decorated with white
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union Excursions in 1993
79
raised lines and attached to the underside of an oak leaf. This was the work of the gall-
wasp Cynips longiventris, which is rather local in Britain.
The gall-midge Dasineura plicatrix attacks the mid-ribs of young bramble leaflets,
twisting them into pleated folds; cecidologists are usually content to record the host as
Rubus fruticosus agg., but luckily Donald Grant was available to identify the host as R
pyramidalis, a Skipwith speciality.
Hutton Common and Spaunton Moor (VC62) 14th August
Thirty-live members representing 22 affiliated societies assembled on Hutton Common on
a fine August morning and were introduced to two contrasting areas. The meeting was held
with the kind permission of the owners, Spaunton Estates.
Hutton Common is situated on the Jurassic limestone. The area contains several disused
quarries and we had limited access to the River Dove, which Hows through Dowth waite
Dale. Most members dispersed into this area during the morning. Several tracks were
obstructed by bracken which had thrived during the wet summer.
Lunch was taken at the meeting place, following which most members visited Spaunton
Moor, north of Hutton-le-Hole and Lastingham villages. This is predominantly acidic
moorland, with a number of becks flowing southwards of the Moor. One or two flushes
showed evidence of alkalinity. A viper was seen at Hole Beck and several colonies of
mining-bees were observed on bare ground. The tea and meeting were held in Fadmoor
village hall, with 31 members present to hear the reports.
Ornithology (J. M. Blackburn)
Birds seen during the day included Grey Heron, Green Woodpecker, Kingfisher and Marsh
Tit. Many House Martins were observed on the edge of the Moor.
Lepidoptera (J. Payne)
I have visited Hutton Common for 40 years and know that it is a rich area for butterflies
and moths. 1993 was proving to be a poor year, and so I was pleasantly surprised to find
that 13 species of butterfly and 6 macro-moths had been observed. Unfortunately, many
were single sightings, larvae being particularly scarce.
Species recorded were Small Skipper, Large, Small and Green-veined Whites. Common
Blue, Red Admiral. Small Tortoiseshell and the rarer Comma. Gatekeeper was the rarest
'brown', but Meadow Brown, Small Heath and Ringlet were also present.
The tiny Small Purple-barred taken by Mr G. Boyd was the best find of the day. As it is
said to feed only on Polygala and Pedicularis species it is a moth with a restricted
distribution. Other moths were Silver Y, Beautiful Golden Y, Smoky Wainscot, Shaded
Broad-bar and Yellow Shell.
Coleoptera (R. B. Angus)
Collecting Coleoptera so late in the season, despite the good weather on the day, did not
turn up a great deal of material. However, there were some exceptions. The rove beetle
Atheta gagatina was found in fungal material; this is a new vice-county record, although it
is a widespread insect. Other Aleocharines encountered were A. crassicornis, A.
castanoptera, A. nigripes and Autalia impressa.
Very large numbers of a Sphaeridium species were found in cow dung in the fields. This
proved to be S. lunatum. Until recently this genus was considered to have three species, but
recent work has shown there to be a fourth.
The find of the day was undoubtedly a rove beetle belonging to the genus Octhephilus ;
this still remains to be identified to species level. There are four species within the genus,
all of which are rare.
Freshwater Biology (L. Magee)
The morning was spent in Douthwaite Dale, on a short length of the River Dove where the
80
Yorkshire Naturalists' Union Excursions in 1993
water flows over stable limestone outcrop, although the bed is unstable in places.
Substantial amounts of silt are deposited in the river during spates, especially near the
banks. The high pH value (8.5) of the water and the silt provided ideal conditions for a
large population of the burrowing larvae of the large mayfly Ephemera danica. First year
nymphs were found mainly in the centre of the stream, and second year nymphs were close
to the banks. The aquatic moss Fontinallis antipyretica was common and it sheltered larvae
of the stonefly Amphinemoura sulcicoliis and of the mayfly Ecdyonurus torrentis. The
freshwater shrimp Gammarus pulex was plentiful in the deeper pools. The most common
caddis larvae were those of the non-casemaking Rhyacophila dorsalis.
Surprisingly, for a river noted for two hundred years as a trout stream, no trout or fry
were seen, although there was a large population of the bullhead Cotus gobio (including
some unusually large specimens).
During the afternoon a survey was made of part of Hutton Beck just north of the village.
By contrast with the Dove, this acid moorland stream had a pH of 4.9. The discovery of
several larvae of the mayfly Amelitus inopinatus was considered to be notable here. This
species has a very local distribution in upland streams in Yorkshire.
An unexpected find was a single well-grown larva of the golden-ringed dragonfly
Cordulegaster boltonii , which has been previously reported from North Yorkshire,
although there are no recent sightings. After confirmation of its identification, the larva was
later returned to the same stream.
Flowering plants and ferns (D. R. Grant)
In the morning members explored Hutton Common, which is situated on Jurassic limestone
and contains the remnants of several old quarries. The most noteworthy plant here is
Cirsium eriophorum , and there were many fine specimens in full flower on the top part of
the common. There was also a large quantity of Mentha suaveolens by the car parking area.
The open grassland held typical calcicoles, the most interesting being Helianthemum
nummularium, Scabiosa columbaria and Catapodium rigidum. Along the track sides were
many plants of Inula conyza , growing with Origanum vulgare, Rubus eboracensis, R.
caesius and R vestitus. In one old quarry there was a stand of Atropa belladonna , and
nearby on open grassy areas were Silaum silaus and GentianeUa amarella. The effect of
leaching was noticeable in a few places, with acid lovers such as Ulex europaeus,
Teucrium scorodonia and Rubus dasyphyllus in evidence. At the north-western comer of
the common there were a few plants of R. warrenii and R. nemoralis.
In the wooded part near the River Dove Rubus pallidus, Primula vulgaris. Carex
pendula and Melica uniflora were present.
In various sites around the village members reported Legousia hybrida as an arable
weed, and Hypericum humifusum was seen on a dry roadside bank.
The afternoon was spent examining the moorland streams and bogs to the north of
Hutton-le-Hole. In a known locality on Spaunton Moor, Hypericum elodes and Pinguicula
vulgaris were seen. Sagina nodosa was discovered on an area of track-side, and a stretch of
track leading on to the moor near Chamomile Farm had Aira praecox and A. caryophyllea ,
the former being very abundant, forming pure stands on bare ground between clumps of
Calluna.
Many of the bogs had Drosera rotundifolia, Juncus acutiflorus, Carex echinata and
much Myrica gale. From one area of marsh north of Hutton Narthecium ossifragum was
reported.
On Tranmire there were flushes which showed signs of some alkalinity. Here were
Anagallis tenella, Hydrocotyle vulgaris and Parnassia palustris. The very wet areas held
many sedges, including Carex hostiana, C. viridula and C. dioica. together with small
quantities of Scirpus setaceus and Eleocharis quinqueflora.
Bryology (J. M. Blackburn)
The morning was spent on Hutton Common. The quarry around the car parking area
81
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union Excursions in 1993
produced lour Bothnia species, including B. hornschuchiana. Grassy banks contained
I Hylocomium splendens, Rhytiadelphus triquetrus and Climacium dendroides. Interesting
tinds on the outcropping limestone on the ridge were Dicranum honjeanii. Ditrichum
flexicaule, Encalypta streptocarpa, Homalothecium lutescens, cushions of Tortella
tortuosa and, in shade, Neckera complanata and the liverwort Porella platyphylla.
Acid woodland in the northern part of the area produced several liverworts, including
Barhilophozia attenuata and Calypogeia muellerana. Also here, and in leached areas in the
south, were Dicranum scoparium and two Campylopus species. Several common epiphytes
were also found. Rocks in the River Dove had Fontinalis antipyretica, Dichodontium
pellucidum and Scapania undulata. The total number of species recorded in the morning
was 65, including 13 hepatics.
In the afternoon, a rushed visit to Spaunton Moor produced 42 species, only five of these
being hepatics. Marshy areas contained seven common species of Sphagnum,
Aulacomnium palustre and Philonotis fontana. The banks of Hole and Tranmire Becks had
Pogonatum aloides , and Racomitrium aciculare was growing on rocks in Tranmire Beck.
The drier moorland had several pads of Leucohryum glaucum, and there was evidence of
alkalinity in one flush which held Ctenidium molluscum.
Mycology (C. R. Stephenson)
This was not a very fruitful day for fungi, for although there had been several wet days
prior to the meeting, temperatures on the whole had been low. Humidity had also been low,
' strong winds not having helped the situation.
The first area visited was a Corallian Limestone escarpment with a number of old
quarries. Several fruit-bodies of Agaricus vaporarius were growing in a roadside verge.
This is a robust species with a large fleshy ring and a cap breaking up into large scales.
Whilst this is an edible species, it is wise to avoid specimens growing by roads, as fungi are
effective concentrators of heavy metals, including lead.
Several species of Leptonia were fruiting in short grass on the floor of one of the old
quarries. One which was shown me was L. incana , an unusual agaric inasmuch as it
possesses a green stem, a colour rare among the fungi.
The find of the day was Drosella fraccida, found by Mr Sykes. This is an uncommon
species, with free white gills producing a cream spore print.
I mistakenly accompanied a group of coleopterists. If you are not in the vanguard of
such a group all you find of any specimens which have passed their sell-by date is scattered
ruins, the remnants of the groups search for beetles.
From the escarpment we moved downhill towards the River Dove, passing through an
area of Betula and Pteridium. Several species were found which are typical of such areas;
these included Leccinum versipelle , Boletus badius, Amanita rubescens and Laccaria
laccata. On an old oak stump by the side of the river was a fine group of the ‘"maze-gill”
bracket fungus Daedalea quercina.
After lunch, a contrasting acid moorland area was visited. This was Fairy Call Beck on
Spaunton Moor. A small copse of Quercus and Larix alongside the beck was searched, but
very little was found. On a bank above the beck Suillus luteus and Lactarius rufus were
present, suggesting that a specimen of Pinus had once grown there. A small group of the
delightful Hygrocybe cantharellus was growing in a wet grassy area on the moor.
'Stocksmoor Common and Stoneycliffe Wood (VC63) 22nd May (R. B. Angus)
Coleoptera (R. B. Angus)
Despite the good weather on the day and a reasonable turnout of coleopterists, surprisingly
little of interest was found at either site; the exceptions were as follows.
On Stocksmoor Common, very close to the meeting place, a small pile of decaying grass
was found to contain the Aleocharine Atheta cadaverina in its sixth locality for the county.
All previous sightings have been in VC63. On the reserve itself a single specimen of the
weevil Dorytomus tortrix was found on Populus tremula.
82
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union Excursions in 1993
In Stoneycliffe Wood the soldier beetle Podabrus alpinus was found. A further visit two
days later turned up a specimen of the carabid Pterostichus oblogopunctatus and a single
Hylecoetus dermestoides.
Flowering plants and ferns (D. R. Grant)
Stoneycliffe Wood is a mixed woodland with some planted trees, including Acer
pseudoplatanus and Castanea sativa. Within the wood there are colonies of Lamiastrum
galeobdolon and Milium effusum. There is a stand of Calluna and V act inium myrtillus in
one open area; these two plants are rather rare on Coal Measures soils. In bogs near the
Coxley Valley beck is Cardamine amara and much Oenanthe crocata , and in one spot
there is a colony of the rare Scirpus sylvaticus. This wood has one of the Pennine brambles,
Rubus sprengelii, recorded here a century ago by F. A. Lees and mentioned by P. F. Lee in
his Flora of Dewsbury. Flere and there are a few colonies of Ceratocapnos (Corydalis)
claviculata. In the valley there, a marshy area to the west of the reserve has a stand of
Populus tremula.
On the south-facing valley side of the Coxley beck the hedgerows have Rubus
lindleianus , whilst in one rough grassy field is an area where Genista tinctoria and Ononis
repens grow.
Stocksmoor Common abuts Stoneycliffe Wood, and is situated on the highest ground of
the district. It is a typical Coal Measures common, again supporting an acidophilous flora.
Betula and Quercus petraea are abundant, with Salix species in the damper areas. Open
ground is dominated by Deschampsia flexuosa and Nardus stricta, with some stands of
Care x nigra.
In some places Pteridium forms dense stands. Brambles are represented by the common
Rubus dasyphyllus and R. polyanthemus. In a protected area on the reserve there is a colony
of Ophioglossum vulgatum , and this was showing its fertile fronds.
In the centre of the Common is a marshy area, and here can be found some of the more
significant species. There is a large stand of Stachys palustris growing with Juncus
acutiflorus, Senecio paludosus and Stellaria uliginosa. Dactylorhiza fuchsii and Pulicaria
dysenterica grow by the side of the footpath, with Veronica scutellata.
Mai.ham Tarn (VC64) 5th and 6th June (D. T. Richardson and L. Magee)
The meeting on both days were well attended, with 38 people being present on the first
day. Fourteen people participated in the residential meeting and they enjoyed three very
busy days. Subject areas covered included botany, entomology, terrestrial arthropods,
freshwater biology and microscopy. During the day participants followed their own
pursuits, either individually or collectively. One group, for example, spent their time
rowing round the Tam in the glorious sunshine.
After dinner there were mini-lectures as follows: electron microscope studies of lesser
water boatmen, diatoms and feather mites (D. T. Richardson and M. Smith); Mayflies (L.
Magee); Stoneflies (Dr L. Lloyd-Evans); Mollusca of Malham (A. Norris); Caddis
collection and identification (Miss M. Andrews); John Nowell and the Mosses of Malham
(T. L. Blocked) and Beetles (M. Denton and R. B. Angus). The remaining evenings were
spent in the laboratory, identifying specimens and exchanging views - an exercise which
went on into the small hours. The Field Studies Council was anxious to receive up-to-date
records, and members responded by providing very comprehensive lists for the time of
year.
Thanks are due to the staff of the Field Centre, not only for their hospitality and more
than adequate meals, but also for giving us the run of the Centre, estate, library, laboratory
and equipment.
Mammals (L. Magee)
Few mammals were reported during the weekend. A Roe Deer and two Brown Hares were
seen in the woodland. There were Rabbits aplenty near Tam House, where a Weasel was
Yorkshire Naturalists' Union Excursions in 1993
83
also seen. In addition, there were signs that Foxes were in the area.
Ornithology (M. L. Denton)
Breeding birds on the Tam included two pairs of Great Crested Grebe and several pairs of
Coot. Other species present were Little Grebe, Tufted Ducks and a pair of Teal, all of
which were probably breeding. Warblers present in Tam House Wood were Blackcap.
Garden Warbler, Willow Warbler and Chiffchaff. A male Pied Flycatcher which
frequented the grounds of the Field Centre had attracted a female by the Sunday morning.
A pair of Tawny Owls, which were calling at 0200 hours, keeping residents from their
slumbers, was found to have newly fledged young. Wader species, all of which were
probably breeding, included Oystercatcher, Common Sandpiper, Snipe, Lapwing and
Curlew. The 42 Curlews (in two flocks of 30 and 12 respectively) were very unusual for
the time of year and their presence in such large numbers was difficult to explain.
A pair of Peregrines at Malham Cove had two half-grown young. A wardening scheme
and public information service were in operation, this being an excellent way to protect the
birds, as well as keeping visitors informed about such events.
A total of 61 species was encountered during the weekend.
Plecoptera, Ephemeroptera and Diptera (K. G. Payne)
Only three species of stonefly were recorded during the weekend. These were
Protonemoura meyeri, Nemoura cinerea and Dinocras cephalotes (in Malham Beck).
On both days mayflies were very much in evidence. Swarms of spinners were present
near the Tam and duns were plentiful in the woods. All belonged to the one species, Cleon
dipterum. It is interesting that C. simile was the only Cleon species recorded during the
1954-58 survey. Nymphs of C. dipterum were captured from the bed of the tarn by the boat
party. The only other mayfly recorded was Baetis rhodani , encountered in the nymphal
stage in a feeder stream.
The writer spent most of his time trying to collect craneflies and adult caddisflies around
Tam House, parts of Tam Moss and Ha Mire. The results were disappointing, perhaps due
to poor weather which prevailed prior to the excursion.
Fifteen species of cranefly were taken over the weekend. As there are over 300 species
on the British list, with 93 of those known from the Malham area, the poor success rate is
clear. One species taken, Nephrotoma appendiculata was the only addition to the 1954-58
list.
Lepidoptera (J. Payne)
The two clear, sunny days were spent out of doors and six species of butterfly were
recorded. Only one male and one female Large White were seen, as were a few Small
White and many Green-veined Whites of both sexes. Only one Orange tip - a male - was
reported. Although Cardamine pratensis was seen, most of the Green-veined Whites were
close to a good growth of Cochlearia officinalis by the inflow between the fen and Tam
Moss. A single Red Admiral and one very worn Small Tortoiseshell were also seen. It is
interesting that The Insects of the Malham Tarn Area (1963) did not include Orange Tip.
and with week-long visits held over six years such an eminent group could scarcely have
missed observing the male of the species.
The writer was able to examine the catches in the Rothamstead light trap on three
consecutive mornings. This produced twelve species. The commonest was The Shears with
12 individuals, the second being The Broom with 3. All others were singles. On Tam Moss
the Common Heath was Hying in numbers. A large brown moth was thought to be The
Fox, but no specimen was netted. Old cocoons of the (presumed) Northern Eggar were
lying in tussocks in their hundreds. Although one or two were found containing old pupae,
none were alive; it is thought that these were leftovers from the 1992 emergence, or
possibly earlier. A total ot 16 species of moth was recorded.
84
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union Excursions in 1993
Trichoptera (M. Andrews)
Twelve species were collected as either larvae or adults, which is about what one would
expect in this sort of habitat (mainly the tarn area) at this time of year. Two species were
new to the Malham list: a larva of the uncommon Limnephilus politus - collected from the
tam by the boat party - was reared by the writer, and Rhaycoleptus alpestris , which has a
local distribution, was confirmed as this by Dr Hiley.
Coleoptera (R. B. Angus and M. L. Denton)
Among the rove beetles, Tachinus elongatus was found in some numbers on the edge of
the Tam in front of the Centre: this is an uncommon upland species. Eusphalerum minutum
was found in Tam Moss, in front of the Field Centre and at Tam Foot. Atheta arctica, an
upland species, provided the 9th Yorkshire record. A. tibialis was captured in front of the
Field Centre. This species was last recorded from Malham in 1957. Other uncommon
upland species included Lesteva monticola and Stenus umbratilis, the latter being found at
Tam Foot.
The water beetle Potamonectus assimilis was found to be common around the edge of
the Tam.
The large Chrysomelid Timarcha goettingensis was also found in front of the Centre; this
large beetle is able to eject red fluid from its mouth when alarmed - hence its popular name
of ‘bloody-nosed beetle.' Only two British species are capable of this reaction. Another
Chrysomelid, an uncommon upland species, was found while sweeping Mercurialis in Tam
House Wood on Sunday morning. Other members of the family met with were an
uncommon species, Aphthona euphorbiae , found at the edge of the wood, and Hydrothassa
hannoveriana at Tam Moss; this is one of two sites in Yorkshire where it is known to occur.
The Scolytid Leperisinus varius was found in front of the Centre. On the Saturday
afternoon two ground weevils, Barynotus moerens and Sciaphylus asperatus, were also
found on Mercurialis.
In all, 64 species were collected along the edge of the Tam, 37 from Tam Moss, 21
from Ha Mire and 50 from Tam Wood. Many additional records were made on the second
day. Full lists of the species have been lodged with the Field Centre.
Mollusca (A. Norris)
The molluscan fauna of Malham and the surrounding area is, without doubt, the best
known for the county. The total list of land and freshwater mollusca is now in excess of 90
species. The first published records appeared in The Land and Freshwater Mollusca of
Upper Airedale written by H. T. Soppitt and J. D. Carter and published in The Naturalist in
1888. Two years later W. Denison Roebuck’s The Conchology of Malham appeared in the
same journal. Since then many collectors have visited the area, with many other reports and
records being published. These include many altitude records for freshwater species,
Malham Tam being one of the few high altitude calcareous lakes in Britain.
The compilation of a report on the mollusca found over one weekend is, therefore, a
difficult task. The total number of species found represents about 47% of the known fauna
of the area. However, if the rare species - i.e. those only recorded once or twice of the past
century or so - and the very local species (those found only from the wider area) are
excluded then this percentage becomes more respectable. Several of the more interesting
species, some of them almost confined to the limestone crags and pastures, were refound,
but Deroceras (Agriolimax) agreste could not be found. Of those which were located,
perhaps the most noteworthy was Vitrea ( Subrimatus ) subrimata which was found under
the deep-set stones on Great Close Scar.
Freshwater Biology (D. T. Richardson, M. H. Smith and L. Magee)
The unexpected fine weather and the calm water allowed us to sample many parts of the
Tam. LM attempted to take Brown Trout and Perch by rod and line (without success). The
only fish taken alive was the Bullhead Cotus gobbio, but a dead Perch was found on the
Yorkshire Naturalists' Union Excursions in 1993
85
margins. Immature Brown Trout were netted in the feeder stream. There was no evidence
ot the crayfish Austropotamohius pallipes which was formerly abundant. Few aquatic
insects were hatching and Cleon dipterum, the Pond Olive, was the only mayfly seen on the
wing during the weekend.
Water fleas - probably Daphnia magna - were present in enormous numbers, as were
the crustaceans Gammarus pulex and G. lacustris.
Chara species were also abundant throughout the Tam, as was Myriophyllum spicatum.
The pondweed Potamogeton lucens , which reaches the surface later in the year, was not
observed.
Water samples from the Tam checked by DTR gave an alkalinity of 96 and a pH value
of 8.7 at 15°C.
Flowering plants and ferns (D. R. Grant)
The flora of the Malham area has been studied for three centuries and it would not be
possible to do justice to it in a single weekend. Indeed, three or more visits at different
times of the year would be essential. However, several parties of botanists were active
during the weekend, and most of the estate, including the high scars, was visited. Many of
the rarities likely to be seen in early summer were located. Hornungia petraea was seen on
one of the scars. It was good to see so many young plants of the rare sedge Carex
.appropinquata on Tam Fen. The grass Calamagrostis stricta and another rare sedge, C.
diandra , were not seen, but the former was re-found later in the year. An aquatic water-
crowfoot thought to be Ranunculus fluitans was not in flower and could not be positively
identified. A search of the Field Centre’s record cards showed that we were not the first to
be puzzled by the plant.
Other interesting plants included a tufted variety of Carex nigra, Andromeda polifolia
and Vaccinium vitis-idaea.
Special attention was paid to the ‘lawn’ area in front of Tam House. This had previously
been grazed by rabbits. More than 60 species were found, including Viola lutea. Alchemilla
glabra and Erinus alpinus. Comprehensive lists were provided by J. Lambert. C. Johnston,
J. Kendrew et al.
Bryology (T. L. Blocked)
The complex area of bog, fen and carr on the northern and western sides of the Tam has a
particularly fine flora. The raised bog. however, is no longer active and its flora is therefore
not especially rich. Sphagnum papillosum and S. rubellum are frequent, and S. cuspidatum.
S. tenellum and a single patch of S. magellanicum were also noted. Bog hepatics included
Cephaloziella hampeana, Odontoschisma sphagni , and both Mylia anomala and M. taylori.
Barbilophozia kunzeana, one of the most noteworthy species of the Tam area, was seen on
wet peat in a channel.
The area to the north-west of the Tam has excellent communities of fen bryophytes.
Species noted in the mires included Sphagnum teres, S. eontortum, S. warnstorfii,
Plagiomnium elatum, Rhizomnium pseudopunctatum, Climacium dendroides, Campylium
stellatum, Limprichtia cossoni, Calliergon giganteum and Chiloscyphus pallescens. In the
more acid parts were Polytrichum alpestre, Calliergon stramineum and Drepanocladus
exannulataus. In the adjacent carr there were extensive patches of Calliergon cordifolium ,
and on the trees and shrubs Ptilidium pulcherrimum and a little Dicranum tauricum.
The grounds of the Field Centre and the adjoining woodland and crags were examined.
On one area of rather dry peat Leucobryum glaucum and Polytrichum longisetum were
observed on several occasions. Weissia microstoma was found in the turf below the Centre,
and Rhytiadelphus loreus was on the woodland floor. Epiphytes on the trees included Ulota
crispa sensu lato in small quantity, and Dicranum fuscescens. The sheets of Nowellia
curvifolia, which covered some of the rotten logs, were particularly appropriate at this
locality. The genus is named after John Nowell of Todmorden. who first made known the
rich bryophyte flora of the Malham district.
86
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union Excursions in 1993
Shaded limestone produced Scapania aspera, Porella platyphylla, Lejeunea cavifolia,
Seligeria donniana, S. acutifolia, Oxystegus sinuosus, Zygodon viridissimus and
Taxiphyllum wissgrillii.
A full list of all the species noted has been supplied to the Field Centre and deposited in
the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union's archives.
Plant galls (L. Lloyd-Evans)
It was rather early in the season to do justice to the galls of this upland locality, but several
vivid orange rust fungi - all belonging to some of the smaller genera - were conspicuous.
Trachyspora intrusa was seen on Alchemilla glabra, Triphragmium ulmariae on
Filipendula ulmaria and Xenodochus carbonarius on Sanguisorba officinalis.
Two bushes of Prunus padus near the lane junction at Water Houses were so infected by
the fungus Taphrina padi that no normal berries could be seen. This is a very local gall in
Yorkshire, previously only recorded from Newton Dale and Goathland.
Another uncommon, northern gall caused by the sawfly Pontania dolichura was found
in the fen on Salix myrsinifolia. It is very distinctive, looking like a pair of little sausages
lying either side of the leaf midrib and parallel to it.
Mycology (C. S. V. Yeates)
A reasonable selection of fungi was recorded, most of them scarcely meriting particular
comment. The exception is the gall-causing Taphrina padi mentioned above. This is a very
local fungus in Yorkshire, previously only recorded from Newton Dale and Goathland.
Grisedale (VC65) (D. Millward)
Ornithology (M. J. A. Thompson)
Despite the poor weather, quite a few birds were seen, the majority being upland species.
In all, 36 species were recorded by members. Waders were represented by Curlew -
several of which were still calling - Snipe, a single Common Sandpiper by Grisedale Beck
and Oystercatcher. Two small flocks of Lapwings were seen moving in a north-easterly
direction, indicating that for this species at least the breeding season was over. As well as
Pied and Grey Wagtails, a pair of Yellow Wagtails was feeding in grassland overlooking
the Beck. A single Dipper was seen on the beck.
Small flocks of Redpolls, accompanying Linnets, moved up and down the dale. Summer
visitors included Swifts, several Swallows still feeding young in the bams. House Martins.
Wheatear, two male Whinchats, Whitethroat and Willow Warbler.
Out on the moorland areas, beside Red Grouse, there were singing Skylarks and a
solitary hunting Kestrel. A small flock of Grey partridge was disturbed. One member found
a Meadow Pipit’s nest containing three eggs.
Close to one of the forestry areas, a single Great Spotted Woodpecker was feeding on
open ground. Flocks of Woodpigeons up to 30 strong were also seen during the day.
Coleoptera (M. L. Denton)
The unsuitable weather thwarted any serious attempt at collecting beetles, and very few
species of note were found. The weevil Cionus scrophulariae (both larvae and adults) was
found on its food-plant Scrophularia nodosa. The find of the day was definitely the rare
rove beetle Lathrobium zetterstedti. There are very few authenticated records of this upland
species. Due to under-recording VC65 can usually be relied upon to provide several new
vice-county records. This meeting, unfortunately, was an exception.
Flowering plants and ferns (M. A. Atherden)
The delightful, remote valley of Grisedale offered a range of habitats typical of the Pennine
Dales Environmentally Sensitive Area. The flora was interesting not so much because for
its rarities as for the juxtaposition of species characteristic of sharply contrasting situations.
Calcicoles and calcifuges rubbed shoulders on the same hillside, whilst wetland species
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union Excursions in 1993
87
grew next to those requiring good drainage. The traditional farming practices fostered in
the E.S.A. have enabled the survival of many hay meadow and pasture species which are
now scarce on much ot our farmland. Land-use is of crucial importance in determining the
botanical composition, and contrasts were noticed between fields closely grazed by sheep
and those grazed by cattle or horses - the latter being a particular feature of this valley. An
area of former heather moorland was converted to Molinia grassland as a result of a single
winter of unusually heavy grazing by cattle. Most of this area has now been planted with
Picea sitchensis by the Economic Forestry Group.
The pastures on the valley sides supported a range of common grasses and forbs, often
with large clumps of J uncus effusus or J . acutiflorus. J. squarrosus was also very common,
whilst Caltha palustris and Cochlearia agg. spilled out from wetter areas onto open
hillside. In small patches of wet ground Primula farinosa was found, unfortunately not
flowering. A thin outcrop of limestone supported such species as Thymus polytrichus,
Arahis hirsuta, Pimpinella saxifraga, Scabiosa columbaris and Galium sterneri. Acidic
grassland or moorland areas were dominated by Molinia caerulea or Calluna vulgaris , with
Drosera rotundifolia, Vaccinium oxycoccus, Eriophorum angustifolium and Narthecium
ossifragum in boggy patches.
The hay-meadows had an unusually high proportion of Caltha palustris and Crepis
paludosa , together with species such as Equisetum fluviatile, Cardamine pratensis, Vicia
cracca, Filipendula palustris. Conopodium majus, and Carex nigra amongst the grasses.
The streamside habitats were mostly occupied by grassland species from the adjoining
fields, but species of particular note included Equisetum sylvaticum, Ranunculus
omiophyllus, Lychnis flos-cuculi, Chrysosplenium oppositifolium, Epilobium nerterioides,
four species of Myosotis, Veronica beccabunga, Pedicularis sylvatica, Valeriana
officinalis, Cirsium heterophyllum, Dactylorhiza maculata. Iris pseudacorus, Glyceria
fluitans and G. declinata. Many mature trees of Salix pentandra were also a feature of this
habitat.
Roadside verges held a rich flora, notable species being Chenopodium bonus-henricus,
Rhinanthus minor, Achillea ptarmica, Triglochin palustre, Platanthera chlorantha and
Dactylorhiza fuchsii. Asplenium trichomanes and A. ruta-muraria grew on the walls. A
bank by Garsdale Station and an abandoned spur of the railway also had a rich flora, which
included Cystopteris fragilis. Polypodium vulgare, Mimulus guttatus and Listera ovata.
These were accompanied by garden escapes such as Aquilegia vulgaris. Geranium
pratense “Johnson’s Blue” and Saxifraga cuneifolia.
Mycology (C. S. V. Yeates)
This was quite a rewarding day for the mycologist, with a number of new vice-county
records being made. However, at a time when the larger fungi were scarcely in evidence
the higher, acidic ground was disappointing. Tephrocybe palustris was very common in
Sphagnum areas and dungy grassland turned up Panaeolus sphinctrinus and Bolbitius
vitellinus. On the floor of a disused bam Peziza cerea - a species which can turn up on
damp plaster in houses - was growing. Even more rewarding were the areas around the
disused spur of the railway, where the tall vegetation ensured a profitable search for micro-
fungi. Among eight species found on dead stems of Urtica dioica, the ascomycetes
Leptosphaeria purpurea and Lophiostoma angustilabrum, and the hyphomycete
Camposporium pellucidum, being perhaps the most noteworthy. Centaurea nigra turned up
Leptosphaeria jaceae on its dead stems and Ramularia centaureae on dying patches of
leaves. Another Ramularia found was R gei on Geum rivale.
Rusts included Puccinia major on Crepis paludosa, P calcitrapae on Cirsium palustre
and Trachyspora intrusa on Alchemilla glabra.
Sheep dung was collected for incubation. Large numbers of the tiny agaric Coprinus
heptemerus fruited a week later. Of three species of the discomycete genus Ascobolus, A.
stictoideus was the most interesting.
In all, some 45 species were recorded during the course of the day.
88
OBITUARIES
DEREK BARNETT CUTTS ( 1 926- 1 994)
Derek was bom in Goldthorpe near Sheffield, and from an early age showed an interest in
natural history. As a boy he built up his own small museum, which was curated in the
family home. Sadly, this collection was destroyed in the war time blitz of the city on the
night of 12th December 1941. He attended Nether Edge Grammar School where the school
natural history society became inactive “for the duration”, but he was eager to enlist in the
Air Training Corps for duties which included fire watching and plane spotting, and spent
school holidays cycling to RAF stations in Lincolnshire and East Yorkshire. The school
had its allotment gardens, as part of the “Dig for Victory” campaign, and work in the plots
was a compulsory chore. He maintained that this gave him a lifelong aversion to vegetable
cultivation, but a love of gardening for pleasure and wildlife.
After leaving school, he joined a local architectural firm as a draughtsman. The senior
partner recognised his ability and advised him to start an architectural course: he completed
his first year at Sheffield University, and also gain valuable experience in assessing the
stability of bomb damaged foundries and forges, having to ascend the roofs and report back
on this condition.
In 1945 he was called up into the RAF and served in Palestine and Ceylon as an
ambulance driver. He was an active field naturalist throughout the terrorist campaign which
led to the founding of the state of Israel. Stand-by duties gave time for the wide reading
which underpinned his many cultural interests, and his little off duty time was spent in
natural history.
After demobilisation he continued his studies, qualifying as an architect in 1952, his first
post being with Doncaster Borough Council. He was then active within the Hunter
Archaeological Society and the Sorby Natural History Society, where he became a
qualified bird ringer under the tuition of Ray Hawley. At the local tennis club he met his
future wife Mollie, forming a renowned natural history and archaeological partnership.
They excavated barrows and a Roman fort at Brough on Noe and were regular visitors to
the newly formed Spurn Bird Observatory, forming the basis for their love of the East
Riding.
In 1962 he transferred to Kingston upon Hull, where he became the Deputy City
Architect. Soon after their arrival in Hull he and Mollie participated in the excavation of
the famous Bronze Age boat at North Ferriby in very trying conditions. He took a cine-film
of the operation, and later rediscovered in it his loft. It was turned into a video for a recent
Naturalist 1 20 ( 1 995 )
Obituaries
89
•uccesslul anniversary event. Derek was pleased with this film, which he quoted as an
example of the value of photographs as records, and lived to see its public showing in the
i ullage hall. However, their archaeological luck held out even longer. Buying a plot of land
i n South Cave, to build a bungalow, they discovered a Roman settlement which, of course
i tad to be thoroughly excavated and recorded, delaying their new home considerably!
Derek developed the garden from a field of barley into wildlife sanctuary, with a large
I >ond, and planted many trees and shrubs to compensate for the contemporary destruction
>f hedgerows. His career in Hull coincided with the rebuilding of the city after wartime
■ iestruction, and his austere, Scandinavian style and great attention to detail was in
- .ympathy with the city’s cultural roots, so that today, many an urban comer bears the
F stamp of his personality. Possibly the project which gave him most satisfaction was to
lesign the gallery for the Brantingham Roman mosaics within the East Riding Museum, a
lifficult technical task where he successfully surmounted many problems. He became a
i nember of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union in 1965, and soon became very active in local
i tatural history, joining the then Hull Scientific and Field Naturalists Club, the year he
noved from Sheffield, and being very active both in the field and on its committees. It was
argely due to Derek that the organisation became more open, and changed its title to the
dull Natural History Society. He contributed numerous notes for its journals, and the
^centenary year in 1980, steered most ably during his chairmanship, was a great success.
He was for many years an organiser for the British Trust for Ornithology, and put in
nuch field work on its various enquiries, especially the first Atlas of Breeding Birds,
inging hirundines on the Humber, and organising the counts on the north bank for the
Birds of Estuaries Enquiry.
Together with his friends Brian Pashby and Angela Gowland, he served on the Humber
Wildfowl Refuge Committee for 28 years continuously until his death, holding the office
of Chairman for 13 years. It is impossible to overstate the contribution which Derek made
o nature conservation by his many years long service upon the Humber Wildfowl Refuge
Committee. As an unpaid amateur he provided the continuity, the drive, the dedication and
he capacity for hard work which enabled the Refuge to slowly build upon the statutory
foundations laid down by Act of Parliament. Whether in selecting the seasonal warden,
designed the observation point and overseeing its construction, basing with landowners and
local authorities, or dealing with matters of shooting permits and misdemeanours. Derek
could be relied upon to treat everyone with courtesy, friendliness and unfailing good
humour. He truly had the happy knack of being able to meet and converse with people
from every walk of life and level of society, yet soon find a common bond of interest. His
■ knowledge of all Refuge matters was encyclopaedic, and he was punctilious in procedural
matters within the Committee. His relations with the wildfowling community were
excellent. During those years, the Refuge settled down to its role as a wintering ground of
international importance for birds, although the Pink-footed Goose, whose preservation
was the original purpose of the Refuge, declined due to changes in farming practices.
These events were described by Brian Pashby in his presidential address to the YNU.
Sadly, Brian died before he could deliver this work, and it fell to Derek to deliver the
completed text in the stead of his friend. Needless to say, he performed this difficult task
with his typical aplomb ( Naturalist 117: 81-98, 1992).
In the late 1980s it was discovered that he had a heart problem and he was forced to
retire. This gave him more time to maintain his garden and to continue his fortnightly bird
counts on the Humber. He started a rigorous programme of nightly moth trapping, making
several new contributions to the Yorkshire list, and confirming several old records whose
validity had been doubted.
The unravelling of the post-war consensus impacted upon his beloved Humber Wildfowl
Refuge where the wildfowlers formed their own organisation to collect shooting permits.
Derek pointed out from the outset the pitfalls in such changes, which would leave the
Refuge underfunded, but lost the arguments, mainly because of apathy on the naturalists'
side of the Committee. In 1994 came a further blow: English Nature were to drastically
90
Obituaries
reduce their funding of a seasonal warden. Derek announced that he would try to increase
his work on the estuary to maintain effective coverage and wardening, and was never heard
to complain about developments which troubled him greatly.
In August 1994, Derek suffered a massive heart attack in the process of draining his
garden pond. By a strange whim of providence, the two people who found him and tried to
render first aid were a naturalist and a wildfowler, so even in death he maintained contact
with the two different ways of enjoying nature. At his funeral, all the wildfowlers
organisations were represented, as well as naturalists, and it was indeed touching to see the
great esteem in which he was held by all his friends.
His death leaves a great void in the running of the Humber Wildfowl Refuge, at a critical
time in the affairs of that body.
Naturalists can be proud that a man of his considerable talents chose to devote his
precious time to the tedious long term work of nature conservation. A collection in his
memory raised £200 to buy a telescope for the temporary warden. He will long be missed
by all those whose lives he helped to enrich, and the YNU extends its heartfelt sympathy to
Mollie, and his son Nick.
R. A. Eades
CLIFFORD JOSEPH SMITH (1915-1995)
Clifford Smith, a stalwart of the YNU for many years, died on 2nd April after a fall. He
was in his eightieth year. Bom on 22nd October, 1915, Clifford attended the local Quaker
school in Saffron Walden, Essex, although he was not at that time a member of the Society
of Friends. He went up to Cambridge in 1934 to read Natural Sciences and on graduating
spent a further year in the University of London gaining a teaching diploma. His first post
as a schoolmaster was at Haberdashers Askes Hatcham School, London, where he taught
for four years. In 1942 he moved to a teaching appointment at Bootham School in York,
Obituaries 9 1
is maintaining his Quaker links. Clifford remained on the staff at Bootham School, at
s as the biologist and later as head of the biology department, until his retirement in
77. With his wife, Joan, Clifford joined the Society of Friends sometime during the
50s.
Clifford was one of the pioneers of the County Wildlife Trust movement and the present
irkshire Wildlife Trust (YWT), in all its complexity and activity, is a tribute to the vision
Clifford and a small band of concerned individuals back in 1946. The YWT (or
•rkshire Naturalists’ Trust as it was then) was only the second county trust to be formed
Britain and the impetus for its creation was the conservation of Askham Bog. ‘the finest
rmple of natural wooded fen in the north of England’, which became the Trust's first
ure reserve. Clifford was the first Honorary Secretary of the Trust, running operations
m his home, and relinquished the post only when increasing membership and business
ant that a paid executive officer had to be appointed. He held a number of other key
es within the Trust and was elected its third President. Clifford's interest in Askham Bog
s maintained throughout this period - he sampled it intensively for spiders and with
stair Fitter co-authored A Wood in Ascam - a study in wetland conservation ( 1979).
I In 1962 Clifford joined the YNU and in 1964 its Arachnida Committee (renamed the
ler Arthropod Committee in 1968), as spider recorder for the Union. This Committee
1 been established by the well known Yorkshire arachnologists W. Falconer and T.
inforth in December 1909; Clifford’s work therefore extended the virtually unbroken
dition of spider recording in Yorkshire over almost 90 years. In 1980 he was elected
sident of the YNU and, not surprisingly, his Presidential address was entitled Spiders in
■ rkshire ( Naturalist 106: 45-52 (1981)). His main theme was the changes in the
rkshire arachnofauna over time, and he drew heavily on the solid foundations Falconer
1 laid in the early part of the century.
i Clifford’s interest in spiders began early. While teaching at Bootham School he had little
oortunity to work on them although he encouraged boys who lived in, or were visiting,
eign parts to collect specimens. He joined the embryo British Arachnological Society
;n the Flatford Mill Spider Group) in 1960. soon after its formation, being one of just 24
mbers recorded in January 1961 (FMSG Bulletin No. 9). His First article for the FMSG
'letin appeared in issue No. 10 (April 1961 ) entitled ‘Two rare spiders from Askham
-g, Yorkshire’. Since that time he generated a gentle flow of communications for the
S Newsletter as well as articles and reports for the present BAS Bulletin. The Naturalist
I the YNU Bulletin.
British arachnologists will long remember Clifford for three principal reasons. Firstly for
An Atlas of Yorkshire Spiders, privately produced in 1982; this was, and still is. the
y county atlas of spider distributions to be published and represented a monumental
ount of work when one considers the size of the county and the fact that all the maps
•e generated by hand. Clifford was the first to admit that computers were totally beyond
i! Leading on from this, it was only natural that Clifford should have been involved in
establishment of the National Spider Recording Scheme (SRS) launched in April 1987.
acted as National Organiser until ill health forced his retirement in 1993. Last, but by
means least, one contribution Clifford made to arachnology will be remembered
sonally by very many people - the warmth, patience and encouragement he extended to
>e beginning the study of spiders as well as to more experienced workers.
Clifford was a true gentleman who offered help, advice, friendship and wisdom in his
l quiet and humorous way. He disliked the pompous and the garrulous and had his own
i but courteous techniques for dealing with both. His modesty was demonstrated to me
;n, after helping to organise a large house spider survey of Yorkshire and spending
:h time identifying and measuring the specimens generated, he suggested the resulting
er should be in my name alone ‘because he hadn't done much towards it’. That was a
le 1 made sure he lost. Perhaps the most enduring feature of Clifford’s personality was
concern for others over that for himself. Even when quite ill in the latter years of his
. , enquiries about his health were quickly and cheerfully brushed aside - he was much
92
Book Reviews
more interested in how other people were and what they were doing. Clifford’s death is a
very sad loss for nature conservation in Yorkshire, for the YNU and for the numerous
friends who held him in such esteem. On behalf of the Yorkshire Naturalist’ Union I
should like to express our sincere condolences to Clifford’s wife, Joan, and to his family.
Footnote: I would like to thank David Nellist, John Newbould, Doug Richardson and
Joan Smith for patiently supplying details of Clifford’s life.
Geoff Oxford
BOOK REVIEWS
Records of Dinosaur Footprints on the North East Yorkshire Coast, 1895-1993 by
C. R. Ivens and G. G. Watson. Pp. 20, including several small black and white and colour
plates, line drawings and one table. 1994. Roseberry Publications, Middlesbrough. £3.95.
This little book was written to commemorate one hundred years of records of dinosaur
footprints on the Yorkshire coast. The first find occurred in 1895 at Cayton Bay, followed
by further discoveries in 1907 at Saltwick Bay. Since then, amateur and professional
geologist have made discoveries with increasing frequency and of great variety. The finds
of 25 separate sets of footprints are described in this book, with details of the probable
species which made them, the rock strata in which they occurred and interpretative details
of the behaviour patterns indicated. The last of these are, perhaps, of greatest interest to the
general reader. Footprints can not only tell us the size, weight and method of locomotion of
the dinosaurs but can also give tantalising clues about social groupings, environmental
conditions and evolution of the species.
The book is clearly written and nicely presented but at only 20 pages long it is little more
than a checklist of finds. As such it is a valuable summary for geologists or
palaeontologists working in the area but provides only skeletal details of the wider context
of the finds. It certainly succeeded in whetting the appetite of this reviewer. Perhaps we can
look forward to a longer, more wide-ranging volume on this fascinating topic in the near
future?
MAA
Animals of Sandy Shores by P. J. Hayward. Pp. 104, with numerous line drawings & 4
colour plates. 1994. Richmond Publishing, Slough. £16.00 hardback, £8.95 paperback.
This excellent book is number 21 in the Naturalists’ Handbook series, which is aimed at a
mixed readership of advanced school/university students and amateur naturalists. Written
in a clear, concise style, with technical terms defined in the margins, it is easy to read and
extremely informative. Five introductory chapters cover the evolution and physical features
of coasts; the problems for invertebrates of living in sand; the distribution, zonation and
biological rhythms of the organisms, and their methods of reproduction, competitive
strategies and feeding relationships. They provide an admirable summary of a vast range of
research, appropriately referenced.
The sections which follow are concerned with identification of the animals themselves.
A useful quick-check key identifies the main groups, which are then described in the text.
This leads on to more detailed keys of all the groups, accompanied by black and white line
drawings of each species and colour plates of a smaller selection of organisms. The
illustrations are one of the great strengths of this book and are reproduced to a high
standard. The book closes with a chapter on fieldwork techniques, sampling strategies and
methods of analysis, followed by a list of useful addresses and a comprehensive list of
further reading.
The very high quality of presentation and large number of illustrations make this a very
useful and attractive book. Small and light enough to be easily carried in the field, it will be
an indispensable identification book for seashore naturalist as well as a valuable addition to
any natural history library.
MJD
‘The Naturalist’ is available in microform
UNIVERSITY MICROFILMS INTERNATIONAL
300 North Zeeb Road
Dept PR
Ann Arbor, Mi 48106
USA
White Swan House
Godstone
Surrey RH9 8LW
England
Binding
Why not have your copies of The Naturalist bound into volumes'?
One year’s issues per volume, or alternatively two years in one
volume at less cost than binding as two separate volumes. We are
also experienced and expert in the re-binding and repairing of all
books.
Spink & Thackray
Broomfield Bindery
Back Broomfield Crescent
LEEDS LS6 3BP Telephone 0532 780353
The Irish Naturalists’ Journal
A quarterly journal of Irish natural history
Edited by Dr Robin Govier
Annual subscription £12.50. IR £14.00
Further information from the Editor, INJ
Medical & Biological Centre, Lisburn Road,
Belfast BT9 7BL
Printed in Great Britain by Titus Wilson & Son. Kendal
ISSN 0028-0771
Latest publication of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
THE FRESHWATER CRUSTACEA OF YORKSHIRE
a faunistic & ecological survey
by
GEOFFREY FRYER
The crustacean fauna of Yorkshire reflects the great physiographic diversity of the
region. Adopting an ecological approach, this book considers the Yorkshire fauna in
relation to climate, topography, geology, soils and water chemistry, always keeping in
mind that it is dealing with living organisms whose habits, requirements and
physiological limitations determine exactly where they live.
Matters covered include the ecological background; faunal assemblages and their
regional attributes; an analysis of the factors that determine distribution patterns, many
of which are mapped; wide geographical aspects; and conservation. Large areas, such
as the Pennines, Howgill Fells, North Eastern uplands and the lowland plains are
surveyed. So too are localised regions including Whemside, the Malham area, lowland
heaths, and the largest lakes, as well as habitats such as upland tarns, seepages, cold
springs, small lowland ponds, inland saline waters. Notes are given on every species
recorded, including parasitic forms.
Price £16.00 (plus £2.00 per copy p.&p.) Special offer to member of the Yorkshire
Naturalists’ Union £13.50 (plus £2.00 p.&p.)
Please make cheques payable to Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
Available from: Professor M. R. D. Seaward, Department of Environmental
Science, University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1DP.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE
A Fungus Flora of YorksFiire. 1985. 296 pp. Hardback. £10.00 incl. p&p.
Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire. 1 989. 380 pp. Paperback. £ 1 7.50
incl. p&p. Unbound. £12.15 incl. p&p.
Mammals of Yorkshire. 1985. 256 pp. £7.50 incl. p&p.
Protection of Birds Committee Centenary Year, 1891-1991. 73 pp. £6.00
incl. p&p.
Moths and Butterflies of Spurn ,1991. 1 24 pp. £6 incl. p&p.
Cheques should be made payable to Y.N.U.
From: Mrs J. Payne, 15 Broad Lane, Cawood, Selby, North Yorkshire, Y08 0SQ.
Telephone: 0757 268242
A QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
THE NATURAL
j HfSTORY MUSEUM
01NCVT995.
PURCHASED
1 GENERAL LIBRARY
Factors Limiting the Distribution and Population Si/e of Tw ite
( Carduelis flavirostris) in the Pennies. — S. Reed
Relationship between Plant and Invertebrate Richness in Upland
Ponds in Mid Wales — David M. Wilkinson and F. M. Slater
Drosophila tectacea von Roser 1840 (Diptera: Drosophilidae),
First Record for Yorkshire and Northern Britain
— A. J. Davis and V. J. L. Fourcassie
Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of Some Lower Sw aledale
Woods — Roy Cross ley
Hedgerow Ecology and the Landscape Historian
— Richard Muir
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union
Editor M. R. D. Seaward, MSc. PhD. DSc. FLS. The University, Bradford BD7 1DP
Notice to Contributors to “The Naturalist’
Manuscripts (two copies if possible), typed double-spaced on one side of the paper only
with margins at top and left-hand at least 2.5cm wide, should be submitted. Latin names of
genera and species, but nothing else, should be underlined. S.I. Units should be used
wherever possible. Authors must ensure that their references are accurately cited, and that
the titles of the journals are correctly abbreviated. Volumes of The Naturalist for the years
1886 to 1975 have been retrospectively numbered 11 to 100 to accord with numbering
before and after this period (see YNU Bulletin no. 3, pp. 21-22 1985); please cite these
volume numbers in all references. Table and text-figures should be prepared on separate
sheets of paper. Drawings and graphs, drawn about twice the linear size they are to appear,
should be in jet-black Indian ink, and legends should not be written on the figures.
Publishable manuscripts not conforming to the above requirements will be returned
for alteration.
Photographic Plates
Readers of The Naturalist will have noticed that the number of photographic illustrations
has increased in recent years. Good clear photographs, suitably captioned, to accompany
articles or as independent features are always welcome.
To encourage this development, a long-standing member of the YNU, who wishes to
remain anonymous, has most generously offered to make a donation, the income from
which would finance the publication of a plate or equivalent illustration in future issues
whenever possible. The editor, on behalf of the YNU, wishes to record this deep
appreciation of this imaginative gesture.
©Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union — 1995
Single Copies may be made of single articles in this journal provided that due acknow-
ledgement is made and the copies are for non-profit making educational or private use.
Copying of more than one article or multiple copying of a single article is forbidden unless
special permission has been obtained from the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union. Permission is
granted for the use of brief quotations in published work provided that acknowledgement
of the source is clearly stated, but the use of substantial sections of text and any illustrative
matter requires the express permission of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
All matters other than subscriptions should be addressed to:
Mr John A. Newbould, Tapton House 30 Moorlands, Wickersley
Rotherham S66 OAT
Items which should be sent to the above include: All membership applications, changes
of address, resignations and problems concerning non-receipt of any of the YNU’s
publications. Please quote the membership number printed underneath your address on all
correspondence.
Subscriptions (unless covered by Banker’s Order) should continue to be sent to:
Mr Derek Allen, c/o Doncaster Museum. Chequer Road
Doncaster DN 1 2AE
The Naturalist is issued free to individual members of the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union
and to Affiliated Societies.
Institutions and Subscribers £20.00
Registered Charity No. 224018
93
FACTORS LIMITING THE DISTRIBUTION AND POPULATION
SIZE OF TWITE ( Carduelis flavirostris) IN THE PENNINES
S. REED
RSPB, Westleigh Mews, Wakefield Road, Denby Dale, West Yorkshire HD8 8QD
Abstract
Habitat use by a small sample of the internationally important twite population of the South
Pennines was investigated between 1989 and 1994. Their use of available upland habitats
varied with the stages of their breeding cycle, and the availability of seeds from a variety of
food plants.
Nesting colonies were always associated with rank moorland vegetation. Species-rich
hay meadows and other seed-bearing habitats such as unimproved pastures and disturbed
ground were used for feeding. These habitat elements, when found in close association, in
areas with a surface geology which supplies grit and water, may explain the range of the
twite in the Pennines and elsewhere.
Further, the presence of species-rich hay meadows may be the factor which determines
the local distribution and abundance of twite populations. Recent indications of a
population decline could be attributable to a decline in hay-making, and agricultural
improvement of hay meadows and pasture.
Introduction
The twite has a remarkably disjunct world distribution. As a breeding bird in Europe it is
virtually confined to Britain and western Norway; these populations are completely isolated
from the main range of the species in south-west and central Asia. Even within Britain, the
South Pennines population now appears to be separate from that in North West Scotland, as
a result of long-term population decline (Brown el al. 1995). The isolated South Pennine
population is, therefore, considered to be of international importance.
Observations on habitat use and the food plants of twite in Britain and Norway have
been published by several authors (Orford 1973; Nuttall 1972; Newton 1972; Marler &
Mundinger 1975; Spencer 1977). In Britain most of the work has been carried out in the
South Pennines, where birds nest in different types of unenclosed moorland vegetation and
occasionally in rock crevices, trees and stone walls, and feed on nearby pastures and
meadows, quarry bottoms and disturbed ground, canal sides, playing fields and burned
patches of grass moorland. In Norway, rocky crevices were found to be the favoured
nesting site, with feeding habitats similar to those in Britain.
Little detailed information is available on the factors which explain the range and local
distribution of twite within the uplands, and which may limit its population size.
Observations from this study, carried out in the breeding seasons of 1989, 1991, 1992,
1993 and 1994, give a new insight into what these factors may be.
Study Area
Observations were taken from a core study area of c. 50km2, with searches for post-
breeding flocks of twite extending to 20 km from the central area to the west of Halifax.
West Yorkshire. The core area contained three loose twite breeding colonies, varying in
size from year to year, but probably totalling between thirty and fifty pairs in a good
breeding season. Two of these colonies, (maps 1 and 2), were studied in detail.
The central study area is characterised by unenclosed moorlands dominated by Molinia
caerulea, Calluna vulgaris , Eriophorum vaginatum , and Pteridium aquilinium. The
moorlands are surrounded by pastures, many of them unimproved, which are grazed by
sheep, cattle and horses, and meadows which are harvested for silage and hay. The
underlying geology is dominated by millstone grit, with frequent rocky exposures. Small
reservoirs are present and rivers, streams and springs are common.
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
94 Factors Limiting the Distribution and Population Size of Twite in the Pennines
Methods
Observations of feeding flocks and breeding behaviour were recorded by walking and
driving through all upland habitats within the study area. Recording of feeding data in this
way began in earnest in 1992. A feeding observation was recorded as a single record
irrespective of the number of birds involved.
Standard routes through, and time periods spent in, each habitat were not adopted as it
was felt that within limited field time available this approach would inhibit locating birds in
all habitats within the study area. To ensure that as representative a sample of feeding and
nesting birds as possible was obtained, all available habitats were consistently searched
throughout the season, irrespective of the stage of the breeding cycle.
Nests were located by observing paired birds and by walking through suitable habitat to
flush incubating females. Over 350 hours were spent in the field during the course of the
study.
Results
Pre-Breeding Flocks
Twite were found to congregate in pre-breeding flocks within a radius of l-2km of the
main breeding colonies. At colony A (map 1) flocks of thirty to forty birds were present as
early as 16th March on the first visit of 1991 and were present on all first visits in
subsequent years, which were made in the first week of April. At colony B (map 2), pre-
breeding flocks did not appear until late April, or even early May.
Fig 1 - Habitat Use by Feeding Twite
Haymeadow
Pasture
Rocky Exposures [ ’ j Disturbed Ground
Moorland
53 Roadside
FIGURE 1
The number of feeding observations in each habitat are shown as part of the total number
of feeding observations for each month.
95
F actors Limiting the Distribution and Population Size of Twite in the Pennines
Observations of pre-breeding flocks were taken mainly from area of colony A (Map 1).
In April pre-breeding flocks were found feeding mainly on rocky exposures, including
reservoir shores and farmyards, but especially in a quarry within 500 metres of the main
colony; and on areas of burned Mo/m/a-dominated moorland, also within 1km of the
central area of the same colony (Figure 1 ). It was not possible to determine upon what the
birds were feeding on rocky exposures, but on burned Molinia they could be seen taking
Molinia seeds exposed by burning.
The behaviour of feeding flocks at this time was typified by short periods of feeding,
followed by periods of resting on dry-stone walls, fences, telephone cables, heather or
bracken. Pairs appeared to have already formed by the time of arrival on the breeding
grounds and, within flocks, pairs could easily be identified, with the male spending much
more time than the female watching for predators when feeding. Display flight was also
commonly observed during this period. Flocks were observed roosting on a rocky
exposure, on a boulder scree and in a bed of dead bracken fronds during this period.
In late April and through May, pre-breeding flocks and breeding pairs following flock
dispersal began to spend more time feeding in developing hay meadows and were also seen
feeding in pasture (Figure 1). Birds were observed taking mainly developing seeds from
closed and seeding Taraxacum spp. heads. Rocky exposures remained important as a
feeding habitat in May, as did moorland, with birds continuing to feed on burned Molinia.
Between the beginning of April and mid-May a total of 31 observations of feeding birds
were made, of between I and 35 birds, comprising 383 birds in total. The mean flock size
at this time was 12.36 (Table 1), with feeding flocks being noticeably larger in 1994 than in
1993 and 1992.
TABLE 1
Pre-Breeding Flock Sizes 1992 - 1994
Year
Number of
Flocks
Total
Number
of Birds
Mean
Flock
Size
Median
Std
Error
Quartiles
1992
10
87
8.70
7
2.65
2, 14
1993
7
49
7.0
5
2.39
4.8
1994
14
247
17.64
17
3.79
3. 35
1992-94
inclusive
31
383
12.36
8
2.13
3,20
Nesting
Nest building and egg laying commenced soon after pre-breeding flocks broke-up. around
mid-May, with the first completed clutches being found on 11th May 1993 and the last
completed clutch believed to be a first clutch, being found on 1 1th June 1994. Small parties
of male birds were occasionally seen feeding together, or fighting, presumably while the
females were incubating. Much less time was spent looking for second clutches and none
were found.
Twenty-seven nests were found during the course of the study with an average clutch
size of 5.17. It appeared that one egg a day was laid and incubation appeared to be
undertaken solely by the female. All nests were located on unenclosed moorland with a
peat substrate, at an altitude of around 300 metres. Twenty-four of the nests were located
within the two loose colonies within the study area (Maps 1 and 2), with individual nests
being separated by a distance of between 10 and 500 metres. Two nests were relatively
isolated, and were separated from the main nesting areas by a distance of about 1 km. The
final nest was found in an outlying colony, which was visited only once.
Pori Ferguson 1995
96
Factors Limiting the Distribution and Population Size of Twite in the Pennines
Nest Site
Road/track
River/stream
W/Spr Well/spring
Map 1 . Twite Colony A.
h actors Limiting the Distribution and Population Size of Twite in the Pennines
97
Enclosed Farmland
Farm Houses
Key Feeding Area
Nest Site
Road/track
River/stream
vV/Spr Well/spring
i i
1 km
Map 2. Twite Colony B.
Maps 1 and 2 show the relationship of the major habitat elements in the vicinity of the
colonies, and of nest locations to main feeding meadows.
98 Factors Limiting the Distribution and Population Size of Twite in the Pennines
Most of the nests were located in bracken (Table 2), and either in long or newly burned
heather, with nests also found in Molinia and Eriophorum. Nests in heather were in areas
with the tallest available plants at around 50cm. Most nests were probably found in bracken
because the colony which was studied for the longest time was located in an area
dominated by it.
TABLE 2
Habitat Locations of Nest Found
The number of twite nests in each habitat found to be used by nesting twite
1989-1994
SUBSTRATE Bracken
Long
Burned
Molinia
Eriophorum
heather
heather
No of Nests ™
Found
3
2
1
1
A distinct change in the habitat used for feeding became apparent through the incubation
and nestling stages, and while young were dependant on adults in the immediate nest area
(Figure 1). There was a gradual reduction in the use of moorland and rocky exposures and
a marked increase in use of species-rich hay meadows. By July, records of birds feeding in
hay meadows had risen to 79.3% of the total and no birds were recorded on rocky
exposures or moorland. Most nest sites were within 1500m of meadows, with meadows
closest to the nest sites being used most frequently, and within 1000m of pasture land. At
one colony on heather moorland, the nest closest to the adjacent main feeding meadow was
about 200 metres away. Adults feeding young could easily be observed commuting
between hay meadows and the nest site. Feeding birds were always observed in the most
species-rich meadows and improved meadows were generally avoided. Maps 1 and 2
identify the main feeding meadows used by birds from the two colonies.
In the early part of the nesting period, when most pairs would be incubating, it was very
difficult to see what the birds were feeding on, particularly when in meadows. On
occasions when it was possible to observe birds feeding in hay meadows, birds were found
to be taking mainly Taraxacum seeds. Birds were also seen taking seeds of unidentified
grasses, Stellaria media , Senecio vulgaris and Ranunculus repens from meadows, pasture,
disturbed ground and roadsides. Birds were seen feeding occasionally on moorland in June,
taking Calluna vulgaris (presumably buds), Juncus squarrosus seeds and were observed
feeding newly fledged young on Eriophorum vaginatum seeds. From mid-June through
mid- to late July, Rumex spp. in hay meadows and also in pasture, along roadsides and in
disturbed areas, appeared to comprise the staple food source. There was an increase in the
number of sightings of birds feeding along roadsides in June, which appeared to be mainly
accounted for by birds taking grit.
Most observations were made of feeding individuals and pairs in hay meadows, and due
to the dense cover it was not possible to determine accurately the number of feeding birds
in any one meadow.
Observations of adults feeding young at one nest showed that the pair of adults arrived
at the nest together and took turns feeding the young and removing faecal sacs before
leaving together, usually stopping to drink in a nearby stream before returning to the
feeding grounds. Display flight was noted several times during the period when young
were being fed in the nest.
Post-breeding Flocks
Family parties of birds could be seen to be associating in flocks from mid- to late June
onwards. Flock size gradually built-up over the next three to four weeks, with a maximum
Factors Limiting the Distribution and Population Size of Twite in the Pennines 99
estimated Hock size ot 200 birds recorded in an uncut hay meadow feeding on Rume.x
ctispus , near one colony on 15th July 1992. The flocks were observed to break- up in the
evening during this time and family parties were seen to roost together as individual groups
scattered across the moor in long heather, possibly close to their nest sites.
Post-breeding flocks began to be recorded in pasture, especially that lightly grazed by
cattle or horses, much more frequently in late July and early August (Figure 1). The shift
from meadow to pasture appeared to take place before the major feeding meadows had
been cut, and pasture became the most frequently used habitat until the last birds had left
the breeding area in early October. Observations of feeding birds in these flocks during this
period indicated that they moved away from Rumex at the end of July and began to rely on
a wide range of weed seeds in pastures, disturbed ground, especially around farm buildings
and along roadsides.
Flocks became more difficult to detect from late July, and especially in the first two
weeks ol August. When flocks were picked up again, following moult, they were found
feeding mainly on Cirsium arvense but were also seen taking seeds from Stellaria media ,
Polygonum aviculare , Hypochoeris radtcata , Senecio jacobaea, Senecio vulgaris.
Taraxacum spp., Matricaria matricioides, Cirsium vulgare, Capsella bursa-pastoris,
Atriplex patula and Sonchus oleraceus.
Flocks were found to congregate in traditional post-moulting feeding areas. These areas
were either in pastures and other habitats adjoining the (now cut) hay meadows where they
had been feeding earlier, or in pastures, disturbed ground and along stretches of roadside,
some distance away from the breeding areas, where twite had not been seen earlier in the
season. On two occasions small flocks ol twite were observed feeding on burned patches of
heather moorland as part of mixed flocks of meadow pipits and linnets, presumably feeding
on heather seeds. There was some variation in the degree of importance of particular food
plants from year to year, with birds relying on thistles much more in 1992 than in any other
year.
Flock size began to diminish following moulting, through August and September, until
by the end of September most birds had left the hills. The decline in twite numbers
corresponded to a change to much wetter and windier weather patterns, which were found
to destroy thistle seed heads. Reports of small wintering flocks of twite within the study
area were, however, received annually. Between the beginning of July and early October a
total of 65 observations of feeding birds were made of between 1 and 200 birds,
comprising 1486 birds in total. The mean flock size over three years was 22.86 (Table 3).
As in the pre-breeding phase, mean flock size varied considerably from year to year, with
flocks in 1994 being noticeably smaller than 1992 and 1993.
TABLE 3
Post-Breeding Flock Sizes 1992 - 1994
Year
Number of
Flocks
Total
Number
of Birds
Mean
Flock
Size
Median
Std
Error
Quartiles
1992
27
693
25.74
8
8.11
5,29
1993
25
740
29.60
20
5.35
10, 50
1994
13
51
3.92
4
0.50
2. 50
1992-94
inclusive
65
1486
22.86
10
4.08
5, 26
100 Factors Limiting the Distribution and Population Size of Twite in the Pennines
Discussion
Results of observations made in this study show that twite nest in a variety of vegetation
types on unenclosed moorland and indicate that these nest sites are associated with the
close proximity of species-rich hay meadows, unimproved or semi-improved pasture, water
sources (streams or reservoirs), rocky out-crops, farm buildings, disturbed ground and
Mo/mza-dominated moorland. Pasture grazed by cattle or horses, as opposed to that grazed
by sheep, seems to be favoured, perhaps because of a more uneven sward which allows
more plants to set seed and because larger animals break-up the ground, encouraging weed
species such as Stellaria media.
Observations of feeding birds show that each habitat has particular significance at
different times of the breeding cycle, as seeds of the different food plants become
available.
Rocky out-crops and disturbed ground, road sides and burned Molinia moorland, which
are likely to harbour fallen or wind-blown seeds, are of particular significance in the pre-
breeding phase. Absence of pre-breeding flocks in March and early April at one breeding
colony at least, and survey at another revealing far fewer nesting pairs than would be
expected from the size of the pre-breeding flock, suggests that twite have traditional
gathering grounds in areas with abundant food and disperse from these areas to breed
elsewhere as other seed sources become available.
Species-rich hay meadows are of crucial importance during the incubation period, while
young are in the nest, and for some time after they are fledged. At this time the major food
sources are firstly Taraxacum spp and later Rumex spp. Following fledging, birds
congregate in hay meadows and feed mainly on Rumex spp. until dispersal when post-
breeding flocks feed on weeds in pastures, by road verges and on disturbed ground. The
size of post-breeding flocks, which varied considerably from year to year, appeared to
reflect weather conditions and consequent breeding success, with 1994, a particularly wet
and windy breeding season, being a noticeably poor year for breeding success. The annual
variation in timing of breeding activity also appeared to be weather-dependant.
The results of this study corroborate much of what has been found previously, but
highlight the previously unrecorded importance of the close proximity of species-rich hay
meadows to suitable nesting habitat in determining the distribution of twite and the within-
season variation in use of the upland habitats available.
Orford (1972) observed that twite nest mainly in vegetation on open moorland, and
occasionally in rock crevices and trees, but feed in pastures and meadows, and also on
reservoir dams and the grassy floors of abandoned quarries and burned Molina caerulea
grassland, with post-breeding flocks feeding on pastures. No detail is given, however, on
the plant species taken or the relative importance of the habitats described.
Nuttall (1972) and Spencer (1977) also discussed the importance of quarries, reservoirs,
shores and dams, disturbed ground, canal sides and playing fields. They also described
some of the important plant species taken by post-breeding flocks including Taraxacum
spp, Ranunculus repens, Stellaria media, Cirsium arvense, Senecio jacobea and Leontodon
autumnalis. They do not, however, recognise the importance of species-rich hay meadows
or of Rumex species as a food plant.
Similarly, Newton (1972) points to the weeds of pasture and of cultivated land as
providing much of the food of twite in summer and mentioned Taraxacum spp. and
Cirsium spp., amongst others, as being favoured. Again, the importance of species-rich hay
meadows is not referred to.
Brown et al. (1995) demonstrated that the distribution of twite nests is associated with
streams, grass moors and areas where the sward is high towards the edge of unenclosed
grass moorland, and that negative associations were found with areas of flush vegetation.
Marler and Mundinger (1975) refer to the importance of Taraxacum spp., followed by
Rumex spp., usually near villages, as food plants of twite in Norway. While cultivated
fields are referred to, they make no specific mention of these plants growing in hay
meadows. Brown et «/,( 1 995) suggested that the reliance upon enclosed pastures for food
101
Factors Limiting the Distribution and Population Size of Twite in the Pennines
may underline the strong association of twite with the moorland edge. Once again, these
authors do not recognise the importance of species-rich hay meadows.
The results of this study, in conjunction with the findings of Orford and Brown, indicate
that twite nest in a variety of rank vegetation types on unenclosed moorland. More work is
needed to establish the preferred vegetation type for nesting.
This study strongly suggests that rank vegetation is positively selected for by nesting
twite, but that they will nest in low grassy vegetation if ranker vegetation such as bracken
or heather is unavailable. This, combined with the fact that twite are known to nest in rocky
crevices in Norway and occasionally in Britain (as well as in trees), suggests that twite
distribution is not determined by the availability of nesting habitat. In the Pennines it is
suggested that the availability of species-rich hay meadows, within a landscape containing
relatively unimproved pastures, rocky out-crops, disturbed ground and a supply of grit and
water, in close association, may be the most important limiting factor determining the local
distribution and abundance of twite. Further, the combination of all these habitat elements
may explain the distributional range of twite in England. Observations taken during a short
excursion to the Isle of Tiree in May 1994, strongly support this suggestion, with pairs
nesting in heather found to be feeding almost exclusively in species-rich hay meadows.
It is possible that the relative low density of breeding twite (Orford 1973; Brown et al.
1995) in the central part of the Peak District is the result of a relatively low availability of
species-rich meadows and unimproved pasture, despite the presence of a geology
dominated by gritstone and an abundance of water. Likewise, twite are unlikely to be found
in high densities in limestone areas, such as in the Yorkshire Dales, as these areas have
relatively poor supplies of water and grit, despite the availability of suitable nesting and
feeding habitats.
Brown et al. (1995) also suggest a possible decline in the twite population since 1988
and a decline in brood size in the south Pennines, and refer to the loss of twite from
previously known breeding sites. The suggested population decline is corroborated by
visits made to moors which were once known to hold good populations of twite, as part of
this study and by personal communications with field workers in the central and northern
part of the Peak District and in the Forest of Rossendale, where a decline of breeding pairs
and post-breeding flocks has been noted since the mid-1970s. Brown suggests a numbers of
possible reasons, including the improvement of pasture and a decline in traditional
moorland management. The results of this study would suggest that rather than a change in
moorland management, it is the conversion of hay meadows to silage and continued
improvement of pastures which is likely to be responsible for any decline and for the loss
of twite from previously known breeding areas.
Conclusions
The results of this study indicate the habitat requirements which are most likely to explain
the distribution of twite in the Pennines are an underlying geology which can supply grit
and a ready supply of water, and an intimate upland landscape which can provide
successive crops of seeds from a variety of habitats, especially relatively unimproved
pastures. Within such a landscape, the local distribution and abundance of twite is likely to
be determined by the availability of species-rich hay meadows in close proximity to rank
moorland vegetation. Further study, particularly a quantitative study of habitat selection,
will be required to substantiate these conclusions. The findings do. however, provide a
clear focus for further studies of the details of the ecology of this species, which will enable
correct habitat management in the Pennines.
Acknowledgements
1 am indebted to a number of farmers for permission to carry out my study on their land. I
would also like to thank John Armitage for initiating my interest in twite; Andy Brown and
Lennox Campbell for providing guidance on writing-up my findings and all the above
named, along with Simon Bates. Henry McGhie. Ken Spencer. Bill Sutherland and Eric
Ward, for advice and comments.
102
Book Reviews
References
Brown, A. F., Crick, H and Stillman, R. A. (1995) The distribution, numbers and breeding
ecology of Twite in the South Pennines. Bird Study 42 (1):
Cramp, S. et al. (1994) The Birds of the Western Palearctic. Vol. VIII: 625-639.
Marler, P. and Mundinger, P. C. (1975) Vocalisations, social organisations and breeding
biology of the twite Acanthis flavirostris. Ibis 117: 1-17.
Newton, I. N. (1972) Finches. Collins, London.
Nuttall, J. (1972) The status and distribution of the Twite ( Carduelis flavirostris) In East
Lancashire, with some notes on breeding biologist. Naturalist 97: 140-141.
Orford, N. (1973) Breeding distribution of the twite in Central Britain. Bird Study 20: 51-
62 & 121-126.
Spencer, K. G. (1977) The status and distribution of birds in the Burnley area, Burnley.
BOOK REVIEWS
Bird Life of Woodland and Forest by Robert Fuller. Pp. 244, with many photographs,
line drawings and diagrams. Cambridge University Press, 1995. £24.95.
This publication, based on sound scientific fact, is presented in an attractive and well
designed format and provides a thorough appraisal of the woodland environment in Britain.
With only 10% of the entire land surface covered by trees, Britain is the least wooded
country in Europe. Nevertheless, 52 species of birds manage to breed regularly, with a
further 17 breeding in open scrub and young forestry and 18 which breed in the woodland
but feed in other open habitats, e.g. Grey Heron. There are chapters on Historical and
European Perspectives, How birds use woodland, their abundance and different types of
cover, such as scrub, broadleaf, coppice and conifer. Appendices include a list of all the
species using woodland, including their habitats, nest sites, food and feeding methods. In
an era of increasing devastation in the countryside, this will be an important reference work
for future planners and a baseline indication of how things were in the 1990s.
JRM
Travels and Nature Loves of Mary Baldwin edited by Annette Hall. Pp. 46, with
numerous line drawings. Privately printed, Preston, 1994, £3.00, paperback (30p postage);
available from Roslyn Horse, 30 Brownedge Lane, Bamber Bridge, Preston, Lancs. PR5
6TB.
This slim volume consists of the edited personal diaries of Mary Baldwin, a Lancashire
schoolteacher, written during quite different holidays. The first section concerns two visits
to Skomer Island and includes such vivid descriptions of the Island and its birds that the
reader enjoys the writer’s experiences. The second is of a visit to the Holy Land, when
Miss Baldwin again uses her descriptive flair to great effect, thus conveying what, to her,
was a most moving experience.
The book is illustrated with line drawings by Annette Hall and Martyn Hanks, and
together with Mary Baldwin’s accounts of her delightful experiences, will surely appeal to
those in the Preston and Barber Bridge areas, to whom she was known personally.
AM
103
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PLANT AND INVERTEBRATE
RICHNESS IN UPLAND PONDS IN MID WALES
DAVID M. WILKINSON
Biological and Earth Sciences, Liverpool John Moores University, Byrom Street,
Liverpool L3 3AF
AND F. M. SLATER
University of Wales College of Cardiff Field Centre, Newbridge-on-Wye, Powys LDI 6NB
Introduction
The ecology of small bodies of water in the British uplands has been relatively poorly
studied. The work described in this paper forms part of a more wide-ranging investigation
of upland ponds in Powys, mid Wales, designed to provide a basic description of their
ecology and conservation importance (Sanderson & Wilkinson. 1989; Slater, 1993; Slater.
Helmsley & Wilkinson, 1991). The aim of this paper is to detect a possible relationship
between invertebrate and plant species richness. Such a relationship is of particular interest
in evaluating sites of conservation importance where often only vegetation data are
available. A positive correlation between plant and invertebrate species richness would
result in sites chosen for conservation because of high plant richness also being rich
invertebrate sites. This is of particular interest for Britain where ‘Botanists have long
dominated conservation management’ (Hambler & Speight, 1995). Support for a positive
correlation between numbers of invertebrate and plant taxa was found in studies of ponds
in the Isle of Purbeck, Dorset (Friday, 1987) and Norfolk breckland (Palmer, 1981), but
such a relationship appears to be by no means universal. Lawton (1987), for example,
described a freshwater site on the River Derwent near York which had a high diversity of
plants but low invertebrate diversity.
The present study was carried out in the hills east of the River Wye in mid Wales. These
hills range in height from 300 to 500m and are mainly formed from Silurian Shales. The
general ecology of the area was described by Slater (1988) and Woods (1993). The ponds
were shallow and often ephemeral, many drying out during the course of a summer. The
water in the majority of the ponds had a circumneutral pH. a small number were on blanket
peat and had acidic waters whilst one was found in what was considered by Wilkinson
(1988) to be an old marl pit with water of pH 8.1. The phytosociology of these ponds has
been described by Slater et al. (1991) and a pitfall trapping study of the beetles around the
margins of four of the ponds was described by Sanderson and Wilkinson (1989). They
found a lack of a discrete boundary to the water beetle communities in these ponds, with
members of the Dytiscidae and Hydrophilidae being caught in pitfall traps around the pond
margin.
This paper compares plant species richness with a measure of general invertebrate taxa
richness and with water beetle species richness.
Methods
Water samples were collected in late June and early September 1987, chemical analysis
being carried out by the Welsh Water Authority. Field measurements of pH were only
available for the September sampling date. Full water chemistry results were given by
Slater et al. (1991).
As many of the ponds in the sample showed great seasonal variation in water level there
was no easy definition of aquatic plants, but for the purposes of this study all species of
higher plants and bryophytes which were thought likely to be covered by standing water at
some time of the year were considered to be ‘aquatic’.
Discrete habitats in each pond (submerged vegetation, emergent vegetation, mud.
shingle, inflow and outflow) were sampled for invertebrates by sweeping with a standard
pond net for one minute. Initial trials, carried out by taking replicate samples until no new
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
104 Relationship between Plant and Invertebrate Richness in Upland Ponds in mid Wales
taxa were caught, showed that single one minute sweeps caught at least 82% of catchable
taxa. Friday (1987), sweep-netting in ponds in Dorset, obtained a similar catch success of
95%. In both cases it is possible that some groups (e.g. small detritivores) were not
sampled by the sweep netting method used. Most groups, such as Hemiptera and
Coleoptera, were identified to family level while others, such as the Mollusca and
Trichoptrea were identified to species. These identifications were summed to give
invertebrate taxa richness. Although there are problems with the interpretation of data
when taxa richness is represented mainly by identifications to taxonomic levels higher than
species, such a list often provides all the available invertebrate data for a given site. It is
therefore of interest to know how such a list related to other measures of diversity.
Subsequently G. Foster has identified the Coleoptera to species level.
The invertebrates were sampled twice during 1987, at the end of June or beginning of
July and at the beginning of September. However, it was found that 20% of the ponds had
dried up by September so no water or invertebrate samples could be taken. In consequence
the September results (except for pH which was not measured in June) are not presented in
this paper, invertebrate data for June/July being used for comparison with the plant data.
Nevertheless for those ponds which did not dry out the same relationships obtain in
September as in June/July.
There are several possible statistics which could be used to examine the relationship
between invertebrate and plant diversity, the simplest being species richness: serious
problems are often claimed for his measurement since it is dependent on size of the sample
and the time spent searching (Usher, 1983). In the present case, since the ponds were
searched until no new species of plants were found and the invertebrate sampling methods
was shown to catch 82% of all taxa catchable with a sweep net, these objections to the use
of species richness are less valid. This highlights the importance of ponds for such studies,
being discrete sites which are relatively easy to sample. An alternative measure would be to
use one of the many different diversity indices. Both the Shannon and the Simpson indices
were calculated (Southwood, 1978; Usher, 1983) however, when calculated for the
invertebrate data these indices were greatly affected by the presence or absence of dense
clouds of Crustacea, such as Cladocera, which could outnumber all other invertebrates in a
sample by two orders of magnitude. In consequence, much of the variation in diversity
between sites was masked by the effects of crustacean swarms and it was therefore decided
to use only species richness data in the analysis.
Results
A summary of the chemical analysis along with the site characteristics and number of taxa
of plants and invertebrates is presented in Table 1. Full water chemistry results for these
ponds were given by Slater et al. (1991).
Invertebrate taxa richness was found to be correlated with plant species richness but
there was no correlation between plant richness and water beetle species richness (Table 2,
Fig. 1). Both plant species richness and invertebrate taxa richness showed positive
correlations with pH and conductivity. No such relationship was found for beetle species
richness with these measurements of water chemistry (Table 2).
Splitting the data set on the basis of drying out of pools by September suggests that
pools which dry out have a lower plant, beetle and general invertebrate richness than those
which retain water (Table 3). A similar relationship between pond permanence and
numbers of invertebrates has been identified by Banks and Beebee (1988).
Discussion
It has recently become common to write about the importance of conserving biodiversity
(e.g. Wilson, 1992). Biodiversity is composed of a number of factors including species
richness, rarity and habitat diversity. This paper is concerned with possible patterns in
species richness. However, this is just one facet of biodiversity; for example, in some cases
a site of very low richness may be of great conservation interest because of endemic or rare
species (Humbler & Speight, 1995).
Relationship between Plant and Invertebrate Richness in Upland Ponds in mid Wales 1 05
p
c
o
a*
dJ
X
c
o
cd
“O
dj
X
cj
"O
c
cd
Id
CJ
>>
X
a.
x
C/3
a;
>>
X
Cl
O
u-
o
cd
T5
C
cd
X)
dJ
t
>
c
<L>
X
E
Z
jy <u
<u J?
CQ ^
OJ
cd
i—
X
<u
t:
<U
>
C/3
— CJ
c t;
cd ^
X <u
a. a.
co
*
C/3
C/3 p- ' — '
S.i S
P P 3
ea
X
>U7
U c
p 1!
§ "
o
E<u
c
y 3
c/3 — ,
3.^
X Cl
u
ts O
dJ s
X > w
E II ||
0) - 1
Q
ri — p- rt —
>o o
f^OO'iOX — a’00'a’'OOOTfOO'(Nir, (Sir,
'Ccai/iX^frsO'
f'i03'0(N'/ico-,ffc — foc/ixt^rn — Tfin — mr' — cot, —
— * ' — — ON ON — ' O') (N ON — — — CO(N
— — (N
0NO'XV'ii/i(Nf^X—X — 'OO'a'ap'tXinriV, — r^| — O' 'O fN
XI XI (N j (N O <N vO CN O' r*"i O) O C l tN O) i/i r-. 0~i ■ — p- O'. <N 00 Tf oc
ifid-*m«’nNdinddd(N« — • o © o — da^-do- I
minocNON'n'Oi/ia' — ■ <n hmoxN'txNOO - o r-- r~~ i
cO vO 't cO Ti ^ f' cfi cO c/l cO ^ T, cO X ■cf rci i/l it, it, N
i/") r- p-r^irrmoci^iriTfiovO
cdi/i/i I xi 'O vD 1/5 vd Tf "O Tf vO vO
I I I
X ^ — "t — vC OC
a cd cd vd od \d it! i
— O'
vd i/i
<u
•x
I §
<
<D
CJ
p S
• r™ i
o
<u
0^
cj
c/5
SSxrJ^--ric5?5:rJnCricN?i^Pcc-r?. ^Ctr,
ro m d- d- d- d- m r/ d- d- ^ r^, n (N d- d- d- c^, d- d- d- ^ ir, ^
— r^avON — mr^xoNcoro^coro
0<nxhhsOsCt
rs'd,d,d,d,d,d’d’
ro in x r- — qn(n
rj oc cn J d-
— 1 0C C O 1/0 oc oc oc
[^iT/T(rtr^r^d‘d’d‘d'
O'OOcnxo —
it, c VO (N r, X d- (N
^hvCXsCX-^t
d,,rO'O^T,ininC
Tf U0 in l/o Tt Tf ITi IT',
h O' (N ^ h r, CO OX
rf in x i/o ^ 0s ^ oc
ooocooooooocooccocoococoooo
c/iooc/ioocoooorioriorioococ/icoc/ioooric/ic/iorioooric/ioooriooooon
00
4>
|
O CCi
C/3
CJ
o
_ O'
O >
o _>
D-T?
J*
CJ
cd
C/3 00
J*
E CJ CJ
cd
— <N
— <n m
c c
_ O
J J
— (N
CJ
cd
cd
C n ^ ^ ^^CJU.
i “ . , I I u«
C ^3 ^3
Sow
a/EcCi
X 3/
P C C C
o O > >
' ZZ 0 y r— 00 — > >
2 2 | § g «,2«2,2,E.^.P-2 § J: O1^
03<JU!Ja.a.a.a.SSS2Sh-U
o o
o o
a. a.
O 0)
>\ o
«-e
u c
oc x cc
$
•p
u
jC
"3
03
o o
a. a.
X X
goo
o ■— • —
c
c H H
jd . .
X c/5 Jo
c
!
c ^
E
-^X
X <
x
o
X
u
r.
aj
>
c
*o
o
Wj
I
T3
C/3
>%
cd
b
o
i—
CJ
? 8
dJ —
c>r: c
W' CJ
X <D
x£
X C
II
o £
w dj
| g-
g ^
3 a.
U 3
cd TO
CJ o
dj "3
S K
2 o
x
X <
* +
106 Relationship between Plant and Invertebrate Richness in Upland Ponds in mid Wales
TABLE 2
Matrix of Spearmans Rank Correlation coefficients between plant and invertebrate richness.
Plant
species
Invertebrate
taxa
Beetle
species
Invertebrate taxa
0.612**
_
Beetle species
-0.126
0.400*
-
PH
0.671**
0.464*
-.032
Conductivity
0.504**
0.417*
-0.117
* = P<0.05; ** = P<0.01
Note. Invertebrate taxa only counts the beetles at family level, this prevents the beetle
identifications having a disproportionate effect on invertebrate richness and so allows
beetle richness to be compared with general invertebrate richness.
TABLE 3
Effect of drying out of ponds in September. Mean (x±SD) taxa richness found in June.
Pond with water
Ponds dry in
in September
September
Plant species
14.6±9.2
10.8±8.4
Beetle species
3.5±3.5
0.7±0.5
Invertebrate taxa
9.2±4.6
6.3±2.9
Nature conservation often relies on the setting aside of reserves; this raises the question
of how such areas are chosen and often choices have to be based on inadequate data. In the
absence of full data so called ‘quick-and-dirty criteria’ for site selection are often used,
such as ranking sites for species richness of well studied groups, ‘higher’ plants or birds,
(good data for most invertebrate species usually absent) or using the presence of
endangered species. As Kareiva (1993) pointed out, these ‘processes could proceed
remarkably well if concentrations of biodiversity for different taxa coincided’. The
question is, do they?
If this relationship between species richness for different taxa occurs then it could be
used to identify sites at a number of scales. Prendergast et al. (1993) have investigated such
a relationship on the large scale, attempting to identify species-rich ‘hot spots’ for Britain
using a grid of 10km x 10km squares. They found that species-rich areas often did not
coincide for different taxa. The present study concentrates on the smaller scale, the
selection of individual sites. Ponds provide an ideal habitat for such a study, being discrete
units which are easy to sample.
As good plant species lists are usually more readily available than good invertebrate
species lists, one can ask if ranking the ponds according to their plant species richness
would result in also ranking the sites for invertebrate richness. The correlations shown in
Table 2 suggest that, in this case, ranking using plant data would produce a reasonable
ranking of general invertebrate richness but not of water beetle richness. Sites selected as
reserves on the basis of their plant lists would therefore not necessarily make good water
beetle reserves.
Both plant and general invertebrate richness correlates with water chemistry data, a
result found in other studies of aquatic systems (e.g. Friday, 1987; Ormerod, 1987;
Ormerod & Edwards, 1987). However, the water beetle results are again different, showing
Relationship between Plant and Invertebrate Richness in Upland Ponds in mid Wales 107
25
1
s
L±J
DC
LU
>
cc
LU
CD
20—1
J
1 5 —
1 o —
5 —
x MERE POOL (1)
MERE POOL (2)
“| I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 J 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 —
O 1 O 20 30 4-0
NUMBER OF PLANT SPECIES
FIGURE 1
Relationship between number of plant species and invertebrate taxa. Regression line;
NUMBER OF INVERTEBRATE TAXA = 0.353 (NUMBER OF PLANT SPECIES)
+ 3.69. The two Mere pools are about 800m apart, the fact that these two geographically
related ponds behave in a similar manner suggests that the correlation has real biological
significance and is not an artifact of the heterogenous level of taxonomic identification
of the invertebrates.
no correlation with water chemistry. It is unclear from this study what factors are
controlling water beetle species richness, except that seasonally dry ponds have a much
reduced beetle fauna.
There is a need for more studies to investigate whether there is a strong correlation
between species richness for different taxonomic groups and the relationship between
species richness and the occurrence of rare species. Britain provides an ideal area to
conduct such studies because of the wide range of highly competent amateur naturalists
able to provide species lists for their local sites. Clearly, in the case of the mid Wales
ponds, the relationship does not hold for water beetles. However, the extent to which one
could generalise from ponds to other habitats (e.g. woodland) must be open to question.
The breakdown of the relationship for Coleoptera. the most species rich Order known
(May, 1992), is rather worrying.
Summary
Data from a set of ponds in the uplands of mid Wales (UK) are used to test the relationship
between plant and invertebrate richness. This is of interest as a positive correlation between
the two would suggest sites chosen for nature conservation on the basis of their plant lists
are also good sites for invertebrates. A correlation between plant species richness and
general invertebrate richness was found, but none between plant and water beetle species
richness. While plant and general invertebrate richness was correlated with water chemistry
(e.g. pH, conductivity) no such correlation was found for water beetle species richness.
1 08 Relationship between Plant and Invertebrate Richness in Upland Ponds in mid Wales
Acknowledgements
The identification of the beetles to species level was kindly carried out by G. Foster. We
also thank Dick Small and a referee for comments on the manuscript and the Lysdinam
Charitable Trust for support.
References
Banks, B. and Beebee, T. J. C. (1988) Reproductive success of Natterjack Toads Bufo
calamita in two contrasting habitats. Journal of Animal Ecology 57: 475-492.
Friday, L. E. (1987) The diversity of macroinvertebrate and macrophyte communities in
ponds. Freshwater Biology 18: 87-104.
Hambler, C. and Speight, M. R. (1995) Biodiversity conservation in Britain; science
replacing tradition. British Wildlife 6: 137-147.
Kareiva, P. (1993) No short cuts in new maps. Nature 365: 292-293.
Lawton, J. H. (1987) Freshwater invertebrate survey of the lower Derwent Ings SSSI.
British Ecological Society Bulletin 18: 14-17.
May, R. M. (1992) How many species inhabit the earth. Scientific American 267(4): 18-24.
Ormerod, S. J. (1987) The influences of habitat and seasonal sampling regimes on the
ordination and classification of macroinvertebrate assemblages in the catchment of the
River Wye, Wales. Hydrobiologia 150: 143-151.
Ormerod, S. J. and Edwards, R. W. (1987) The ordination and classification of
macroinvertebrate assemblages in the catchment of the River Wye in relation to
environmental factors. Freshwater Biology 17: 533-546.
Palmer, M. (1981) Relationship between species richness of macrophytes and insects in
some water bodies in the Norfolk breckland. Entomologists Monthly Magazine 117: 25-
46.
Prendergast, J. R., Quinn, R. M., Lawton, J. H., Eversham, B. C. and Gibbons D. W.
(1993) Rare species, the coincidence of diversity hotspots and conservation strategies.
Nature 365: 335-337.
Sanderson, T. A. and Wilkinson D. M. (1989) Notes on coleoptera around the margins of
four upland ponds in mid Wales. Entomologists Gazette 40: 39-41.
Seddon, B. (1967) The lacustrine environment in relation to macrophytic vegetation. In
Cushing, E. J. and Wright, Jr. H. E. Quaternaiy Paleoecology. Yale University Press:
New Haven.
Slater, F. (1988) The Nature of Central Wales. Barracuda Books: Buckingham.
Slater, F. M. (1993). The natural history of the shallow Radnorhire pools. Radnorshire
Society Transactions 63: 12-26.
Slater, F. M., Helmsley, A. and Wilkinson. D. M. (1991) A new sub association of the
Pilularietum globulifera Tuxen 1955 in upland pools in the mid-Wye catchment of
central Wales. Vegetatio 96: 127-136.
Southwood, T. R. E. (1978) Ecological Methods. 2nd ed. Chapman & Hall: London.
Usher, M. B. (1983) Species diversity; a comment in a paper by W. B. Yapp. Field Studies
5: 825-832.
Wilkinson, D. M. (1988) A preliminary study of the development of Beilibedw Mire in
mid Wales. Quaternary Newsletter 55: 12-22.
Wilson, E. O. (1992) The Diversity of Life. Harvard University Press: Massachusetts.
Woods, R. G. (1993) Flora of Radnorshire. National Museum of Wales: Cardiff.
109
DROSOPHILA TESTACEA VON ROSER 1840 (DIPTERA:
DROSOPHILIDAE), FIRST RECORD FOR YORKSHIRE AND
NORTHERN BRITAIN
A. J. DAVIS and V. J. L. FOURCASSIE
Department of Pure and Applied Biology, University of Leeds LS2 9JT
Introduction
The ecology of Drosophila species is surprisingly little investigated compared to the
intense study lavished on their genetics and molecular biology. The distributions of species
are incompletely known, even in the comparatively well collected British Isles.
Distributional information is particularly lacking for northern Britain despite Basden's
( 1954) collections in Scotland and 20 years of work in England near Leeds, Yorkshire (see
Bingley & Shorrocks 1995, Davis & Jenkinson 1992 and references therein). We have
therefore continued, as part of a Europe-wide investigation of Drosophila ecology, to
collect in northern Britain and particularly in Yorkshire. We here report the discovery in
Yorkshire of a Drosophila species previously known only from south-eastern England (BR
Pitkin BM(NH) Drosophilidae database).
Methods
Collections were made by baiting at two locations within each of three deciduous woods
near Leeds, Yorkshire, England: Adel (Grid ref. SE273415, altitude 120m), Arthington
(Grid ref. SE275450, altitude 55m) and Wike (Grid ref. SE332432, altitude 120m). These
sites are described more fully elsewhere (Shorrocks 1975, Davis & Jenkinson 1992.
Shorrocks & Charlesworth 1982). The baits, whole single mushrooms -Agaricus bisporus
(mean fresh weight 1 1 ,26±2. 1 8g) or pieces of cucumber - Cucumis sativus (36±4.3g), were
exposed at monthly intervals between 1st March 1994 and 1st March 1995 with the
exception of June 1994 and January 1995. The baits were set out in 4 x 3 arrays of the
same type and one array of each type of bait was exposed at each location. The baits were
retrieved after they had accumulated 250 day-degrees, maintained in an indoor insectary at
approximately 20° and the emerging flies collected and identified. On 3rd August 1994
three D. testacea (Bachli 1990, Grimaldi et al. 1992), one female and two males, were
recovered among flies from baits set out on 5 July 1994 at Arthington. All three D testacea
emerged from the same mushroom. This bait also yielded a single staphy linid beetle. 1 14
psycodid and three muscid Diptera. These taxa and D. phalerata emerged from the other
mushroom baits exposed in Arthington at the same time.
Discussion
This is the first record of D. testacea from Yorkshire and indeed from northern Britain. The
species was previously known in the UK only from Kent and Suffolk in southern England
(BR Pitkin BM(NH) Drosophilidae database. Bachli & Rocha Pite 1982) lending weight to
Basden's (1956) opinion that D. testacea was a southern species. The species has. however,
been recorded in northern Europe, in Norway. Sweden (Gahne 1959) and Finland
(Hackman 1971) and is, in fact, widely distributed throughout Eurasia (Bachli & Rocha
Pite 1982. Grimaldi et al. 1992). (Records of its occurrence in the Nearctic are now
referred to a different species, D neotestacea (Grimaldi et a! 1992).) There seems little
evidence, therefore, for the belief that D testacea is not present in northern Britain so its
apparent absence may well result from its rarity relative to other Drosophila species. We
reared only three among the 32 individual Drosophila, all D phalerata, from mushrooms
exposed on the same date or among the more than 1000 individual Drosophila reared from
the 720 mushrooms exposed at all three sites during the entire 10 months of baiting.
Drosophila testacea was not found at all during earlier long term studies at Adel (Bingley
& Shorrocks 1995) and Wike (Shorrocks & Charlesworth 1982).
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
110
Drosophila testacea von Roser 1840 (Diptera: Drosophilidae)
Drosophila testacea is also rare elsewhere in Europe. In the Netherlands it occurs
sporadically (Hardy pers. comm.) and only 10 (misnamed as D. picta) were identified
amongst 1683 Drosophila puparia from 120 Phallus impudicus in south Holland (Driessen
et al. 1990). The species was also rare amongst flies from decaying herbage in Germany
(Offenberger & Klarenberg 1992). In Switzerland, however, it is occasionally not rare at
low altitudes but is always scarce higher in the mountains (Burla & Bachli 1991, Bachli
pers. comm.). Drosophila testacea may therefore be less abundant in northern Europe and
at high altitudes and might be considered a southern species for these reasons.
A contributory reason for the apparent rarity of D. testacea may be that the complete
range of its breeding substrates has not been sampled. The species, with its relatives, are
thought to be specialist fungal breeders (Bachli & Rocha Pite 1982, see also records listed
in Grimaldi et al. 1992). However, in Switzerland it is most abundant in the spring and the
summer which are not the main seasons for fungi (Bachli pers. comm.) It has also been
reared from decaying herbage (Offenberger & Klarenberg 1992) and collected around
carrion (Grimaldi et al. 1992). This suggests that the species might be encountered more
frequently if microbial decays of non-fungal substrates were collected.
The addition of D. testacea brings the recorded Drosophila fauna of Yorkshire to 21
species (D. andalusiaca, D. fene strat um, D. immigrans, D. simulans, D. testacea , and D.
virilis, in addition to the 15 listed in Shorrocks 1975). This is nearly two-thirds of the 34
species known from the UK (Shorrocks 1972, Newbury et al. 1984, Bennet et al. 1995) but
it is unlikely to represent the absolute total for Yorkshire. Our continued sampling will
undoubtedly reveal more species as well as elucidate their biology and ecology.
Acknowledgements
The work in this paper was funded under the EC Human capital and Mobility
programme contract CHRX CT92 004. The authors are very grateful to the Yorkshire
Wildlife Trust, the Harewood Estate and Mr and Mrs Sheepshanks for access to their land,
to I. C. W. Hardy and G. Bachli for unpublished material, and to C. Poyser for technical
help.
References
Bachli, G. (1990) Type specimens of Drosophilidae (Diptera) in the Naturkundemuseum
Stuttgart, with revisions of Drosophila testacea and D. limbata v. Roser. Stuttgarter
Beitrage fur Naturkunde, Serie A (Biologie). A: 433.
Bachli, G. and Rocha Pite, M. T. (1982) Annotated bibliography of Palearctic species of
Drosophilidae (Diptera). Beitrage der Entomologie 32: 303-392.
Basden, E. B. (1954) The distribution and biology of Drosophilidae (Diptera) in Scotland,
including a new species of Drosophilia. Transactions of the Royal Society’ of Edinburgh
62: 603-654.
Basden, E. B. (1956) Drosophilidae (Diptera) within the Arctic circle, I General survey.
Transactions of the Royal Entomological Society of London 108: 1-20.
Bennet, H. J., Jenkinson, L. S. and Davis, A. J. (1995) Drosophila mercatorum (Patterson
& Wheeler 1942) (Diptera: Drosophilidae): first record for the British Isles. Antenna 19
65-66.
Bingley, M. I. and Shorrocks, B. (1995) Fungal breeding Drosophila (Diptera,
Drosophilidae): an experimental survey using Agaricus bisporus. The Entomologist 114
40-49.
Burla, H. and Bachli, G. (1991) A search for pattern in the faunistical records of
drosophilid species in Switzerland. Z. zool. Syst. Evolut .-forschung. 29: 176-200.
Davis, A. J. and Jenkinson, L. S. (1992) Drosophila fenestrarum from Leeds, Yorkshire, a
new record for northern England, with notes on larval feeding sites. Naturalist 117: 27-
30.
Driessen, G., Hemerik, L. and van Alphen J. J. M. (1990) Drosophila species breeding in
stinkhorn (Phallus impudicus Pers.) and their larval parasitoids. Netherlands Journal of
Zoology 40: 409-427.
Ill
Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of some Lower Swaledale Woods
Gahne, B. (1959) Drosophila species found in Uppland, Sweden. Drosophila Information
Service 33: 133-134.
Grimaldi, D., James, A. C. and Jaenike, J. (1992) Systematics and modes of reproductive
isolation in the holarctic Drosophila testacea species group (Diptera: Drosophilidae).
Annals of the Entomological Society of America 85: 671-685.
Hackman, W. (1971) Studies on Drosophilidae by a Finnish team. Acta Entomologica
Fennica. 28: 30-32.
Newbury, S. F., Donegan, J. and Stewart, J. A. (1984) Drosophila virilis and its
cosmopolitan relatives in urban islands. Biological Journal of the Linnean Society 23
323-329.
Offenberger, M. and Klarenberg, A. J. (1992) Attractiveness and exploitation of decaying
herbage by Drosophila in temperate woodland: an experimental analysis. Oecologia 92:
183-187.
Shorrocks, B. (1972) Drosophila. Ginn, London.
Shorrocks, B. (1975) The distribution and abundance of woodland species of British
Drosophila (Diptera: Drosophilidae). Journal of Animal Ecology 44: 851-864.
Shorrocks, B. and Charlesworth, P. (1980) The reproductive biology and diapause of the
British fungal-breeding Drosophila. Ecological Entomology 5: 315-326.
Shorrocks, B. and Charlesworth, P. (1982) A field study of the association between the
stinkhom Phallus impudicus Pers. and the British fungal-breeding Drosophila.
Biological Journal of the Linnean Society 17: 307-318.
NOTES ON THE EMPIDOIDEA (DIPTERA) OF SOME LOWER
SWALEDALE WOODS
ROY CROSSLEY
I The Cloisters. Wilberfoss. York Y04 5RF
A series of ancient semi-natural woodlands extends for several miles upstream from
Richmond in Swaledale, (VC65, North-west York), and these now form part of the Lower
Swaledale Woods and Grasslands Site of Special Scientific Interest.
In 1992 and 1993 I undertook a survey of selected Diptera of the Hudswell Woods
.complex (NZ155006), which are owned by The National Trust, comprising Billy Bank
Wood, Round Howe Wood, Calfhall Wood, Hudswell Bank Wood, and also the outlying
Hag Wood (NZ 13601 1). Additionally, in 1993 I surveyed High Spring Wood (NZ1 17000)
and the contiguous Far Spring Wood, several miles further up the dale, which are owned by
the Ministry of Defence.
All of these woods are on the steep north-facing side of the valley. Much of the
Hudswell Woods complex borders the river, but Hag Wood only reaches the valley road
which is some distance from the river at that point. High Spring Wood, which is wood
pasture, is situated high up on the valley side and Far Spring Wood is on a steep scree-
slope, extending down to the road.
The entomofauna of the woods is relatively unknown; Hudswell Woods have been
surveyed in recent years by members of the National Trust Biological Survey Team: the
findings have not been published and insects were not intensively surveyed during the
visits. Some indication of the likely potential of the woods is indicated in the report
prepared by W. A. Ely following the field meeting of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union at
Downholme in the near vicinity of High Spring/Far Spring Woods on 25 July 1987 (The
Naturalist 113 (1988): 162).
This paper deals with flies of the superfamily Empidoidea. about which brief
introductory notes are given in an earlier paper (Crossley, 1993).
In this study a total of 170 species of Empidoidea were recorded, comprising
approximately 35% of the Yorkshire list. The numbers of species per family were as
follows: Hybotidae 50: Microphoridae 1; Empididae 81; Dolichopodidae 38. Forty species
'Naturalist 120 (1995)
112
Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of some Lower Swaledale Woods
were found in all three woodlands (Hudswell Woods, Hag Wood and High Spring/Far
Spring Woods), of which the largest number was Hybotidae with 38% of the total
list being common to all. Figures for other families are: Empididae 16%; Dolichopodidae
21%.
Of the total number of species recorded, three are Red Data Book species and nineteen
are Nationally Notable (Nb), as provisionally recommended in Falk, 1991. However, there
are likely to be amendments to these provisional ratings (mostly down-gradings), in due
course (Falk & Crossley, in press).
Thirty-nine species of Empidoidea were recorded for the first time in VC65 and the
more significant of these are indicated with an asterix in the following list.
Nomenclature follows Kloet & Hincks (1976) with some up-dating.
*Platypalpus fasciatus (Mg.) High Spring Wood 29.7.93. This is one of the larger
Platypalpus species, some specimens measuring up to 4.5mm; it is also very distinctively
marked on the abdomen with dust patches so it is not likely to have been overlooked in the
past by competent dipterists. There are records for single localities in each of the five
Yorkshire vice-counties, the earliest being Allerthorpe, 1931, and the remainder are all
post- 1980. It is probably a genuinely scarce fly in the county.
*P. macula (Zett.) Nb. Hag Wood 2.7.92. There is only one other Yorkshire record for
this distinctive species: Sleightholme Dale (VC62) 27.6.90, I. Perry.
P. mikii (Beck.) RDB3. Billy Bank Wood and Hag Wood 1992; High Spring Wood
23.6.93. Recorded from scattered sites throughout Yorkshire, this species appears to be
associated mainly with ancient broadleaf woodland (Crossley, 1993). It was reported from
White Scar Wood (near High Spring Wood), during the Y.N.U. visit to Downholme Park
in 1987 ( op.cit .)
P. subtilis (Coll.) RDB3. Billy Bank Wood and Calfhall Wood 27.7.92; Far Spring
Wood 4.6.93. The main concentration of Yorkshire records for this species is along the
River Wharfe from Otley to Collingham (VC64). Elsewhere in VC64 it is recorded from
Hell Wath, Ripon, 1989 (R.C.). There are two reported sites in south Yorkshire and then a
scattering of localities in VC65, and Duncombe Park, Helmsley (VC62). The majority of
records are associated with river-banks or river-shingle, with overhanging tree-foliage upon
which the adults presumably hunt for prey.
* Trichina bilobata Coll. Billy Bank Wood 2.6.92; Calfhall Wood 27.7.92. In both
woods specimens were found near the river-bank. The only other Yorkshire records for this
species are Potter Brompton (VC61) 21.6.86, and Grass Woods (VC64) 16.6.88, both R.C.
*Rhamphomyia (s.g. Pararhamphomyia) albipennis (Fall.) High Spring Wood. 19.5.93.
There are several scattered records from all vice counties except VC62, with no apparent
common habitat preference, and all of them post- 1977.
R. (s.g. P.) albitarsis Coll. Nb. Round Howe Wood 28.5.93. There is a previous record
for VC65, Rowton Beck 20.6.81, P. Skidmore, the species having first been noted in the
county, also by Mr. Skidmore, at Ashberry (VC62) 8.6.80. There is a further record from
Askham Bog (VC64) 14.5.88, R.C.
*R. (s.g. P.) atra Mg. Billy Bank Wood 28.5.93. The only other Yorkshire records are
from Towthorpe 26.5.90, W. A. Ely & R. C., and Burdale 23.5.92, A. Grayson, both
localities being on the chalk of VC61 .
R. (s.g. P.) micropyga Coll. Nb. High Spring/Far Spring Woods 19.5.93; Hag Wood
28.5.93. This spring species is recorded from about ten widely scattered localities in the
north and west of the county with no reports so far from VC61 and VC63.
*R. (s.g. Rhamphomyia s.s.) nitidula Zett. Nb. Round Howe Wood 28.5.93. For many
years the only county record for this northern species was Gormire (VC62) 19.5.1923,
C. A. Cheetham. In recent times there have been further records from a number of sites on
the North York Moors: Ashberry, Dalby Forest, Newton Dale, Swair Dale.
*R. (s.g. R. s.s.) sulcatella Coll. Round Howe Wood 8.5.93; High Spring Wood 19.5.93.
This early spring species was first recorded in the county in 1992, since when it has been
found in all vice-counties except 63 (Crossley, 1993).
113
Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of some Lower Swaledale Woods
R. (s.g. R.) tibialis Mg. Nb. High Spring/Far Spring Woods 19.5.93; Billy Bank
Wood/Round Howe Wood 28.5.93. Apart from in isolated record in the south of VC63
(Rockley Dyke Marsh, 18.5.80, W.A.E.), all known sites for this spring species are in the
Pennine areas of VC64 and VC65, together with a single locality at Bransdale on the North
York Moors (VC62) and Duncombe Park, Helmsley (VC62).
*R. (s.g. Amydroneura) gibba (Fall.) High Spring Wood 21.8.93. There is a cluster of
records in the south-east of the county, and then scattered records elsewhere: Delph,
Oldham (VC63) 4.8.85, R.C.; Timble Ings, Otley (VC64) 19.8.84, P.S.; Birk Crag Wood,
Harrogate (VC64) 20.8.91 , R.C.; Strensall Common (VC62) 1 1.8.93. R.C.
*Empis (s.g. Xanthempis) laetabilis Coll. RDB3. High Spring Wood/Far Spring Wood
19.5. & 14.6.93. Other Yorkshire records for this species are: Pot Riding Wood (VC63)
30.5.88, W.A.E.; Grass Woods (VC64) 16.6.88, R.C.; Colt Park Wood (VC64) -.5/6.89,
NCC malaise trap, det. R.C.
*E. (s.g. Empis s.s.) rufiventris Mg. Nb. Hag Wood 1 1.6.92. This is a distinctive species,
and although apparently very local in distribution it sometimes occurs in quantity; the dates
suggest a restricted flight period and it may be overlooked on that account. Records relate
chiefly to limestone woodland, as follows: Brockadale (near stream) (VC63) 2.6.56. K. G.
Payne, same locality 14.5.88, W. A. E.; South Milford (VC63) 1988, P. J. Chandler: Pot
Riding Wood (VC63) 24.5.92, A. Godfrey; Hetchell Wood (VC64) 1 1.6.88. R.C.& W.A.E.
There is an older record for Pickering 6.6.38, C.A.C., teste F. W. Edwards, and a recent
one for Duncombe Park, Helmsley, (both VC62) 17.5.94, R.C.
*HiIara albiventris von Roser Nb. Billy Bank Wood 2.7.92. A single male specimen
swept from overhanging tree-foliage by the river-side. Previously this species was known
in Yorkshire only from scattered sites along the banks of the River Wharfe between Otley
and Rougemont Wood, Weeton, from 1983 to 1987. A single specimen has also been
found by the River Rye at Duncombe Park, Helmsley (VC62) 25.8.94, R.C. It is associated
with fast-flowing rivers in other English localities.
*H. anglodanica Lundb. Billy Bank Wood and Calfhall Wood 2.7.92; Round Howe
Wood 7. 6. 93. This species was first reported in Yorkshire from Birkham Wood (VC64)
28.6.88 and 16.8.88. Since then it has been found at Sutton Wood and near Howden
(VC61); and at Haybum Wyke and Hutton Lowcross (VC62), all R.C.
*H. biseta Coll. Nb. River-side. Billy Bank Wood 27.7.-25.8.92. The only other
Yorkshire records for this late-summer species are from the banks of the River Wharfe at
Otley (VC64) between 1983 and 1985. the dates of capture ranging from 1.8. -6. 10., and the
River Rye, Duncombe Park, Helmsley (VC62) 25.7.94. all R.C.
*H. discoidalis Lundb. Nb. Billy Bank Wood 2.7.92; Calfhall Wood 27.7.92 (both
localities near the river-side with overhanging tree-foliage). All known Yorkshire records,
including these, are given in Crossley, 1993.
H. implicata Coll. Nb. River-side, Calfhall Wood 27.7.92. The only other Yorkshire
records are Sandsend (VC62) 27.7.85 (on the shore); Semerwater (VC65) 20. & 23.8.88. all
R.C.
H. morata Coll. Nb. River-side, Calfhall Wood 27.7.92. This species was recorded from
three localities in Teesdale (VC65) in June 1981: Cotherstone, I. F. G. McLean. Scargill
and Egglestone, P. J. C. In the same year it was recorded at Duncombe Park (VC62), P.S..
and it has been reported from Hell Wath. and Birk Crag Wood (VC64) in 1989 and 1991
respectively, R.C.
*Chelifera concinnicauda Coll. Nb. Hag Wood & Calfhall Wood 25.8.92. Reported so
far from seven widely-scattered localities (two records being pre-1930), in all vice-counties
except 61. known sites are on river-banks where there is overhanging tree-foliage on which
the adults presumably hunt for their prey; the Hag Wood locality is an exception.
* Hemerodromia oratorio (Fall.) Billy Bank Wood 2. & 27.7.92. There are only four
known Yorkshire localities for this species, including this one, which are detailed in
Crossley, 1993 .
Clinocera (s.g. Hydrodromia) wesmaelii (Macq.) Nb. High Spring Wood 28.6.93. Apart
1 14 Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of some Lower Swaledale Woods
from a single record from Dovedale Griff near Bridestones (VC62) 23.8.87, R.C., all
Yorkshire records for this species are from Pennine localities of vice-counties 63, 64 and
65. There is a small cluster of sites in Upper Wharfedale where the species occurs typically
on wet moss in the vicinity of waterfalls and swiftly flowing streams. The specimen at
High Spring Wood was found at a muddy cattle-poached area close to the spring in the
centre of the wood.
*Hypophyllus discipes (Ahr.) Nb. Billy Bank Wood 2.7.92. There are only a few
scattered localities known in Yorkshire for this species: Muston (VC61) (in a farmyard),
14.7.85, R.C.; Keld Head 31.8.84, G. King, and Harland Beck -.8.93, S. J. Falk (both
VC62); Crag Wood 29.6.25, C.A.C., and Ripon 17.6.39, possibly C.A.C. (both VC64).
*Campsicnemus marginatus Lw. Nb. River-side at Billy Bank Wood 27.7.92. This
species is typically found along the banks of fast-flowing rivers and there were several
records in the 1980’s from the River Wharfe between Otley and Collingham (VC64), R.C.
& l.P. There are also records from the River Rye at Rievaulx 23.7.85, P. Withers, and at
Duncombe Park 12.10.90, R.C., and the stream in Mulgrave Woods 15.9.90, R.C. (all
VC62). The only atypical site so far recorded is the flooded gravel pits at Hay-a-Park,
Knaresborough (VC64) 1991, R.C.
Further Nationally Notable species recorded, but not commented upon are: Platypalpus
cothurnatus Macq., P. tonsus (Coll.) and Sympycnus spiculatus Gerst.
Additional vice-county records are: Platypalpus leucocephalus (von Roser); P. optivus
(Coll.); Oedalea flavipes Zett.; O. zetterstedti Coll. Nb.; Rhamphomyia (s.g. Megacyttarus)
anomalipennis Mg.; R. (s.g. Amydroneura) hirsutipes Coll.; Empis (s.g. Xanthempis)
scutellata Curt.; E. (s.g. Coptophlebia) albinervis Mg.; Hilara cornicula Lw.; H.
galactoptera Strobl; H. lurida (Fall.); H. nigrina (Fall.); H. subpollinosa Coll.;
Dolichocephala engeli Vaillant in litt.; Medetera impigra Coll.; M. jacula (Fall.);
M. truncorum Mg.; Syntormon denticulatus (Zett.); Neurigona pallida (Fall.);
Teuchophorus calcaratusl Macq.); T. spinigerellus (Zett.).
Discussion
The results of this survey give some indication of the rich diversity of the empidoid fauna
of the combined woodland sites and adjoining river-banks, and in particular the
significantly high proportion of scarce species.
Applying the Species Quality Index (Crossley, in press) to the results places these woods
quite clearly within the upper ranking of such habitats in Yorkshire. Indeed Hag Wood
with an Index of 4.0 produced the highest S.Q.I. so far obtained in a continuing study
which now covers sixteen woods, the average Index for these being 2.50.
Acknowledgements
I am obliged to the following for kindly granting permission to collect specimens in the
various woodlands: Messrs Alister Clunas (National Trust), Ben Mercer and Richard
Wilson (English Nature), and Robert Shopland-Reed (Ministry of Defence).
References
Crossley, R. (1993) Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of the Lower Derwent Valley.
Naturalist 118: 55-60.
Crossley, R. The usefulness of Empidoidea in assessing site quality for conservation
purposes. Dipterists Digest (in press).
Falk, S. (1991) A Review of the Scarce and Threatened Flies of Great Britain (Part I).
Research and Survey in Nature Conservation No. 39. Nature Conservancy Council,
Peterborough.
Falk, S. J. and Crossley, R. A Review of the Scarce and Threatened Flies of Great Britain.
Part 2: Empidoidea. Research and Survey in Nature Conservation No. 39. Joint Nature
Conservation Committee, Peterborough (in press).
Kloet, G. S. and Hincks, W. D. (1976) A Check List of British Insects, 2nd edition
(revised). Part 5: Diptera and Siphonaptera. Handbk Idem. Br. Insects 11 (5): i-ix, 1-139.
1 15
HEDGEROW ECOLOGY AND THE LANDSCAPE HISTORIAN
RICHARD MUIR
University College of Ripon and York St John, York YQ3 7EX
The field of ecology offers many opportunities for co-operation between naturalists
and landscape historians, particularly in England where landscapes are largely man-made.
This is certainly true of hedgerows. If, as many wrongly believe, extensive hedgerow
networks have only existed in England since Anglo-Saxon times then our elaborate
hedgerow ecological systems can only be the products of a thousand or so years of
indigenous evolution. However, if the landscape archaeologist can demonstrate that such
networks have existed for over five thousand years then their ecology requires
reinterpretation. Misconceptions about hedgerows abound; this paper attempts to outline a
more reliable historical context for studies of their ecology.
When Hoskins (1955) wrote his celebrated Making of the English Landscape, it seemed
safe to assume that the founding fathers of our countryside were the Anglo-Saxon pioneers
who settled here from the fifth century onwards. Now, however, we realise that the
England of the Bronze Age and Iron Age was densely stippled with farmsteads, and that
the outlines of much of the English countryside were established during the Neolithic
period, almost seven thousand years ago.
Archaeological traces of hedgerows are not easily located and dated, but over recent
years a variety of evidence has emerged. The first historical description of hedgerows in
north-western Europe was provided by Julius Caesar in his account of events in the Roman
battle for Gaul in 57 BC. He told how the Nervii, who lived in the region that now forms
the Franco-Belgian borderlands, had “. . . succeeded in making hedges that were almost
like walls, by cutting into saplings, bending them over, and intertwining thorns and
brambles among the dense side branches that grew out”. Although Caesar was impressed
by the robust impenetrability of the hedges of the Nervii, hedging was well known to
ancient Romans, and treatises or comments on the craft were variously provided by Cato,
Columella, Palladius Rutilius, Pliny, Scrota and Varo.
The existence of hedges in Roman Britain is testified both by excavation and by
landscape evidence. About a decade ago, the Roman fort at Bar Hill on the Antonine Wall
in southern Scotland was excavated. The archaeologists found that, when constructing the
fort around AD 142, the builders were obliged to in-fill some existing ditches, using turves
and bundles of hawthorn ( Crataegus monogyna) brushwood cut from a managed hedgerow
nearby. Williamson (1987) was also able to show that since a Roman road, known as the
Pye Road, cut diagonally across a network of hedged fields in the vicinity of Yaxley in
Suffolk, the road had to be later than the fields it crossed. These fields, part of an extensive
network still largely intact when mapped in 1839, may have been produced by a systematic
reorganisation of the East Anglian countryside during the Iron Age. creating extensive
systems of hedged fields now recognised as spanning expanses of countryside between 10
and 35 km2 in area.
Some evidence of prehistoric hedgerows has come from Yorkshire. The West
Heslerton project is a programme concerned with the landscape archaeology of the
Yorkshire Wolds. Iron Age field ditches have been revealed, and Powlesland (1986) has
provided faunal evidence; remains of snails known to be associated with wood and
hedgerow environments have been found along just one side of a ditch, implying that on
this side of the field ditch there ran a hedgerow. On the North York Moors, evidence from
sites like Iron Howe suggests that hedgerows formed the field boundaries during the
Bronze Age, when these upland countrysides were more densely populated than in later
times. Lee (pers. comm.) has suggested that the linear patterns of stone litter observed here
may represent stones cleared from cultivated ground and tossed into the bottoms of
adjacent hedges.
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
1 16
Hedgerow Ecology and the Landscape Historian
Perhaps the most impressive information on prehistoric field patterns has come from
Dartmoor, where it was realised that the tumbledown walls or ‘reaves’ which criss-cross
the moor trace out a comprehensive division of the countryside dating from the Bronze
Age, around 1600 BC. Fleming (1985) believes that these earth and boulder banks could
have carried hedges, in the manner of hedgebanks seen today in North Wales.
Bronze Age England was far from being a natural wilderness. Marshes remained, but
woodland had been, or was being, removed from virtually all areas which had a reasonable
agriculural potential. In some places planned field systems, created by a single decision,
sharing a common orientation and covering thousands of hectares, stretched as far as the
eye could see. All such fields had to be bounded, and in most places, hedgerows will have
offered the most practical method.
The hedgerow mileage fluctuated over time. During the Roman occupation, the stimulus
of access to imperial markets and the imposition of peace caused farming to expand,
resulting in the establishment of new systems of hedged fields, like the rectilinear field
network on the Dengie Peninsula in Essex, with hedges now thoroughly invaded by elm
( Ulmus procera).
Disease, decay and the contraction of farming characterised the early centuries of the
Anglo-Saxon settlement in England, but after the 8th century the adoption of open field
farming must have resulted in the grubbing-up of countless hedgerows to create the
uninterrupted expanses of ploughland associated with this communal form of cultivation.
In the early Middle Ages, sustained population growth and the associated shortages of
farmland resulted in thousands of small, irregular fields, known as ‘assarts’, being cleared
from the retreating woodland. Then, in the late Middle Ages, the piecemeal enclosure and
‘privatisation’ of open field land by villagers created a multitude of new hedgerows.
Quite different from these products of what the landscape historians term ‘early
enclosure’ were the hedgerows created by Parliamentary Enclosure. This was England’s
first and most traumatic experience of privatisation and, in the parishes affected, it involved
the enclosure, partitioning and transfer into single ownership of the common ploughland,
meadow and pasture. In each case, it was required that the new allocation of straight-edged
and privately owned fields should be hedged (or, in the stone-rich areas, walled) within a
year of the enclosure award being made. According to Gonner (1966), one fifth of the area
of England was directly affected, while Parliamentary Enclosure resulted in the planting of
over a billion shrubs and the establishment of around 200,000 miles (321,870 km) of new
hedgerows. During the period 1750-1850 when the movement was at its height, hedges
must have been planted at an average rate of 2,000 miles (3,220 km) each year. Designed
by surveyors and superimposed upon the landscape from their maps, the angular geometry
of Enclosure hedgerows provides a distinctive tracery across many English countrysides. In
terms of the size of the areas affected by Parliamentary Enclosure, West Yorkshire and
East Yorkshire ranked second and fifth amongst the ‘counties’ of England and Wales.
These Parliamentary Enclosure hedgerows differed from those created in the earlier
centuries in ways that were ecological as well as historical. Whereas the older hedgerows
seem generally to have been planted with mixed saplings gathered from local woods - often
deliberately including useful timber and/or fruiting species, like oak ( Quercus robur ), hazel
( Corylus avellana) and crab apple ( Malus sylvestris), the new hedgerows were usually
monocultures of nursery-grown hawthorn. Harvey (1974) has described the early days of the
nurseryman in England, and we know that in 1766 a Berkshire nurseryman sold 4,000
hawthorn ‘quicksets’ for hedging to Lord Bruce of Tottenham for the sum of 5s (25p).
Just as the planting of 80 many miles of hedgerow in the 18th and 19th centuries must
have contributed profoundly to the bird and insect populations, so the modem wave of
destruction has been disastrous. During the postwar period, hedges have been removed at a
rate far faster than that at which they were planted during the heyday of Parliamentary
Enclosure. In a study on ‘Monitoring Landscape Change’, the Countryside Commission
(1986) and Hunting Technical Services estimated that during the period 1947-85 the
absolute length of hedgerows in England and Wales was reduced by about 190,000 miles
(around 300,000 km) or 22%.
117
Hedgerow Ecology and the Landscape Historian
Ecologists concerned with the study of hedgerow flora and fauna would be well advised
to consider the historical aspects of the hedge concerned. Historical factors are bound to
have influenced the tree and shrub composition of the hedge, its form (whether straight or
curving) and its management (concerning factors like the frequency of laying and whether
it was managed to provide a barrier to small lambs or powerful bullocks). Parliamentary
Enclosure hedgerows were normally planted as a hawthorn monoculture and now also
contain those other shrub species which can rapidly colonise a hedgerow: elder ( Sambucus
nigra); ash (, Fraxinus excelsior ); wild rose ( Rosa agg.) and bramble ( Rubus agg.), and
■sycamore (Acer pseudoplatanus). In contrast, shrubs like hazel, oak. field maple (Acer
campestre), crab apple and Prunus agg. will seldom if ever be found as colonists in a
young hedge.
The many historical aspects of hedgerow ecology are well-represented in Yorkshire.
Here, the enclosers of land have had their choices strongly influenced by environmental
factors. On the lower ground, where the bedrock is soft or masked by glacial till or
alluvium, hawthorn and other hedging shrubs flourish, while in the uplands, where the soils
are too thin and the climates too harsh for vigorous shrub growth, tough gritstone and
limestone for walling can easily be quarried or gathered from the screes or surface stone
litter. However, the Archaeological Survey of West Yorkshire (1981) notes that over the
Coal Measures and gritstone areas of the county, walls have succeeded earlier hedgerows:
“[Boundaries] in the Pennines are now mostly of stone, implying that a large-scale change
took place sometime after 1340 in the manor of Wakefield and 1363 in the manor of
Bradford, the dates after which the respective rolls have not been exhaustively searched.
The term invariably used to describe field boundaries in medieval West Yorkshire is the
Latin sepes , which can mean a hedge, fence or wall, but there is evidence to suggest that its
use in medieval West Yorkshire was restricted to a hedge ... It seems possible that the
major change from hedge to stone boundary in the Pennines took place during the
seventeenth and eighteenth centuries when the medieval fields were enclosed and greatly
extended to include extensive new areas for agricultural use”.
Place-names like 'Haya', Haye' and ‘Haigh', which derive from the Anglo-Saxon term
for a hedge, are quite numerous, while there are plentiful documentary references to the
management of hedges in medieval Yorkshire. More numerous than the Haya and Haye
names are those including ‘Royd' or 'Rode', which denote assarts cleared during the
Middle Ages (mainly before the arrival of the Black Death in 1348) to create new
farmland. The fields in such assarted Yorkshire land were generally hedged, and the
records of the Wakefield manor court for 1316 tell how one John son of Beatrice was fined
2s (lOp) for removing the hedge of an assart on the lord's land. The use of thorny species
for hedging is often mentioned in this period, and in 1338 the leaseholder of new arable
land at Birstall was given permission to take from woods nearby the branches, brambles
and thorns needed to enclose it with hedges. Sometimes hedge barriers defined unpopular
enclosures into private ownership of land that was previously held in common, and the
manor courts periodically sought to fine the destroyers of such hedges, as with the case
above, or as at Oxenhope in 1346. People were also fined at the manor courts for failing to
enclose their fields with hedges, and so allowing hungry livestock to wander and feed at
will. Thus it is clear that the manorial courts of Yorkshire required, or at least encouraged,
the hedging of land newly taken into private ownership or tenancy; they sometimes
allowed hedging plants and materials to be taken from the lord's woods nearby, and they
would fine the breakers of hedges quite substantial sums.
Hedgerows are features of the man-made landscape which more or less replicate open
woodland and woodland edge environments. Arnold (1983) has described how different
hedgerow types favour different forms of wildlife. Song thrushes and blackbirds choose
to nest at heights c. lm above ground level, and they select dense, bushy hedges at least
1.4m tall. Partridge, in contrast, nest in the verges of more open hedgerows which will not
impair their ability to scuttle to and from the nest. The importance of hedgerows to just this
one bird species was underlined by Blank (1961), who found that in North Norfolk only
118
Hedgerow Ecology and the Landscape Historian
2% of partridge nests discovered were not in hedgerows. It must be accepted that many of
the plant and animal species which hedgerows harbour are both common and tolerant of
stressful, open environments. At the same time, most older hedges are punctuated by trees
which have been allowed to grow tall as ‘standards’ and their presence adds an extra
ecological dimension to the hedgerow environment. Moreover, hedgerow shrubs serve as
hosts to a wide variety of insects which play an important role in food chains, while
hedgerows also perform useful roles as windbreaks, offering shelter and protection against
erosion of soil exposed in arable fields. Finally, their significance to the spiritual, emotional
and aesthetic dimensions of the English consciousness is profound, though impossible to
quantify.
Hedgerows of different kinds may well have existed in England for over six thousand
years, and during this time many hedge-dependent associations of plants and animals have
developed. Currently, the creative aspects of the human relationship with the environment
are darkly overshadowed by our destructive activities, so that it is particularly heartening to
find so many young people devoting their weekends to voluntary work in planting or laying
hedgerows. A better understanding of the antiquity and evolutionary characteristics of the
English hedgerow network may assist future projects in Nature conservation.
References
Arnold, G. W. (1983) The influence of ditch and hedgerow structure, length of hedgerows,
and area of woodland and garden on bird numbers on farmland. Journal of Applied
Ecology 20: 731-750.
Blank, T. H. (1961) Norfolk hedges and nesting cover. Annual Report of the Kynoch Game
Advisory Service: 20-25.
Boyd, W. E. (1984) Prehistoric hedges: Roman Iron Age hedges from Bar Hill, Scottish
Archaeological Review 1: 32-34.
Caesar, J. The Gallic Wars , II: 17 ( The Battle for Gaul , 1980 ed. translated by A. and P.
Wiseman, B.C.A./Chato & Windus, London, p. 50).
Countryside Comission (1986) Monitoring Landscape Change. Hunting Technical
Services, Borehamwood.
Fleming, A. (1985) Dartmoor reaves. Devon Archaeology 3: 1-6.
Gonner, E. C. K. (1966) Common Land and Enclosure, 2nd ed. Frank Cass, London.
Harvey, J. (1974) Early Nurserymen. Phillimore, London.
Hoskins, W. G. (1955) The Making of the English Landscape. Hodder & Stoughton,
London.
Powlesland, D. (1986) Excavations at Heslerton, North Yorkshire. 1978-82.
Archaeological Journal 143: 53-173.
Williamson, T. (1987) Early co-axial field systems on the East Anglian boulder clay.
Proceedings of the Prehistoric Society 53: 419-432.
West Yorkshire Metropolitan County Council (1981) West Yorkshire: an Archaeological
Survey to AD 1500, 3: 663.
West Yorkshire Metropolitan County Council, Wakefield,
119
BOTANICAL REPORT FOR 1994
FLOWERING PLANTS AND FERNS
Compiled by D. R. GRANT
The Recorders thank all those who have sent in records: their names are given in full the
first time they appear in the VC report, initials being used thereafter. Nomenclature is
according to Kent, D. H. (1992) List of Vascular Plants of the British Isles.
EAST YORKSHIRE (VC61) (F. E. Crackles)
An interesting discovery is that maritime species occur on salted roadsides in VC61,
notably that Puccinellia distans is widely distributed on both "A and minor roads and that
Cochlearia danica occurs on Clive Sullivan Way and on the M62.
An asterisk denotes a new vice-county record.
Polystichum setiferum (Forsskal) Moore ex Woynar Moat, Leconheld 54/04; J. Dews.
■Artiplex littoralis L. On verge of Weghill Rd., and B1362 near Burstwick 54/22, on
roadside near Hollym and near Dimlington 54/32; P. J. Cook, roadside near Escrick
44/64; K. G. Payne.
Cerastium dijfusum Pers. Coastal sand, Hornsea 54/24; P.J.C.
C. semidecandrum L. Disused Rly near Withemsea 54/32; P.J.C.
Spergula marina (L.) Griseb. Roadside between Roos and Burton Pidsea 54/23; W.
Dolling. By B1362 near Burstwick 54/22, near Hollym 54/32, verge near Preston 54/13;
P.J.C.
Cochlearia danica L. By Clive Sullivan Way near Hessle 54/02, near Ferriby 44/92 and in
an almost continuous ribbon on the eastbound carriageway of the M62 from just west ot
Howden to Saltmarshe Grange 44/72; P.J.C.
Saxifraga tridactylites L. Haverheld Pits 54/31; P.J.C.
Ruhus scissus W. C. R. Watson. Sutton Wood 44/74; D. R. Grant.
R. nemoralis P. J. Mueller. Newport 44/82, Allerthorpe Common 44/74; D.R.G.
R polyanthemus Lindeb. Allerthorpe Common 44/74; D.R.G.
R. ulmifolius Schott Kilnsea Beacon Lane 54/41, roadside north of Wheldrake 44/64;
D.R.G.
R. echinatoides (Rogers) Dallman. Sutton Wood 44/74; D.R.G.
R. hylocharis W. C. R. Watson. Allerthorpe Common 44/74; D.R.G.
Ruhus eboracensis W. C. R. Watson. Allerthorpe Common 44/74; D.R.G.
R. Warrenii Sudre King. Rudding Lane. Riccal 44/63: D.R.G.
Oenothera biennis L. Near Roos 54/23, in 1993; P.J.C.
Myosotis ramosissima Roche. Haverheld Pits 54/31, in 1993; W.D.
Lamiastrum galeobdolon (L.) Ehrend. & Polatschek Under trees by the R. Derwent, near
Stamford Bridge 44/75; A. J. Home. „ _
; Unaria vulgaris x L. repens = L. x sepium Allman. King George Dock. Hull 54/12; R.
*Valerianella carinata Lois. On an old wall, disused Rly Stn. Keyingham 54/22. in 1993;
W.D., conf. A. O. Chater. ...... ino,
Lactuca serriola L. Hollym Carrs 54/32, in 1993. P.J.C.. near Danthorpe 54/23 in 1993;
W D
Hieracium vagum Jordan. Allerthorpe Common 44/74, Flowering Plant Section held
meeting.
Aster tripolium L. Roadside verge. Hedon bypass 54/12; P.J.C.
Conyza canadensis (L.) Cronq. Pavement. Withemsea, arable. Hollym 54/32, Keyingham
Mill 54/22. in 1993; P.J.C.
Potamogeton berchtoldii Fieber. Ponds near Hollym. 54/32, and near Skirlaugh 54/13,
P.J.C
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
120
Botanical Report for 1994
Lemma gibba L. Market Weighton Canal, near Broomfleet 44/82; D.R.G.
Eriophorum latifolium Hoppe. Speeton 54/17, 1993; D. Leach.
Festuca rubra L. subsp. juncea (Hackel) K. Richter. Humber Bank, near Easington 54/31,
P.J.C.
Puccinellia distans (Jacq.) Pari. By the side of the M62 near Howden 44/72; D.R.G. and
here and there by the A63 and Clive Sullivan Way 44/92 and 54/02; P.J.C. Widely
distributed along verges both of “A” and minor roads in S. Holdemess, often occurring
continuously for some distance along the edge of the verge where salt has been used;
being recorded for roads in 10km. squares 54/12, 13, 22, 23, 31, 32 and 33; P.J.C. It has
been recorded for scattered localities along roads near Driffield 54/05; Beeford and
Atwick 54/15; P.J.C.
Glyceria fluitans x G. notata — G. pedicellata F. Towns. Spring ted marsh, near Skirlaugh
54/13; P.J.C., conf. F. E. Cracles.
Melica uniflora Retz. Nursery belt, Swine 54/13; F. Kenington, confirming an old record
(Robinson’s Flora, 1902).
Allium vineale L. Roadside verge, near Aldborough 54/23, 1993; W.D.
Ruscus aculeatus L. Near Roos 54/22, 1993; P.J.C.
NORTH-EAST YORKSHIRE (VC62) (T. F. Medd)
Asplenium trichomanes L. Car park, York 44/65; M. Hammond.
Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bemh. Same car park and also near Museum gardens, York 44/55;
M.H.
Ranunculus trichophyllus Chaix. Clifton Ings, York 44/55; M.H.
Humulus lupulus L. By river Foss, Strensall 44/66; YNU FWBS Excn.
Chenopodium polyspermum L. Clifton Moor, York 44/55; T.F.M.
Atriplex littoralis L. Haxby roundabout, York ring-road 44/65; P. Cook.
Polygonum arenastrum Boreau. Bootham Crescent, York 44/55; T.F.M.
Hypericum x desetangsii Lamotte. Layerthorpe, York 44/65; M.H.
Sisymbrium orientate L. Yarm 45/41; Dr S. Bungard.
Rubus scissus Watson. Strensall 44/66; YNU FWBS Excn. and Allerston Forest 44/98; D.G.
R. vestitus Weihe. Saltergate 44/89; YNU Bot.Sec.Excn. det. D.G.
R. sprengelii Weihe. Strensall (YWT Reserve) 44/66; YNU FWBS Excn. det. D.G.
R. echinatoides (Rogers) Dallman. Kingthorpe 44/88; D.G.
R. eboracensis Watson. Strensall (YWT Reserve) 44/66; YNU FWBS Excn. and Allerston
Forest 44/98 det. D.G.
R. warrenii Sudre. Strensall (YWT Reserve) 44/66; YNU FWBS Excn. det. D.G.
Potentilla x mixta Nolte ex Reichb. Clifton Backies 44/55; M.H.
Vicia sylvatica L. Moorsholme 45/71; S.B.
Pinguicula vulgaris L. Yearsley Moor 44/57; T.F.M.
Pulicaria dysenterica (L.) Bemh. Allerston Forest 44/98; D.G.
Bidens tripartita L. Bootham Stray, York 44/65; M.H.
Eupatorium cannabinum L. By river Foss, Strensall 44/66; YNU FWBS Excn.
Alisma lanceolatum With. Rawcliffe Ings, York 44/55; M.H.
Potamogeton polygonifolius Pourret. Strensall Common 44/66; YNU FWBS Excn.
P. pusillus L. Rawcliffe Ings, York 44/55; M.H.
P. pectinatus L. R. Foss, Strensall 44/66; YNU FWBS Excn.
Juncus subnodulosus Schrank. Saltergate Moor 44/89; YNU Bot.Sec. Excn.
Isolepis setacea (L.) R. Br. Yearsley Moor 44/57; T.F.M.
Carex echinata Murray. Overton 44/55; M.H.
C. vesicaria L. Pond Head, Brandsby 44/57; M.H.
SOUTH-WEST YORKSHIRE (VC63) (D. R. Grant)
Ophioglossum vulgatum L. Near Mytholmroyd 34/92; L. Lloyd-Evans. Todmorden 34/92;
G. Barker.
121
Botanical Report for 1994
°ilularia globulifera L. Near Dinnington 44/58; J. Nebould.
i Zeratophyllum demersum L. Old canal Hemingfield 44/40; T. Schofield.
R umex longifolius D.C. Marsden Gate, Stainland 44/10; F. Murgatroyd.
Zeratocapnos claviculata (L.) Liden Mount Pleasant, Rossington 43/69; E. Thompson.
Viola canina L. Potteric Carr Nature Reserve, Doncaster 44/60; D. Bramley.
°opulus tremula L. Haywood, near Doncaster 44/51; E.T.
T eesdalia nudicaulis (L.) R. Br. Austerfield 43/69; T. Higginbotham.
Gamolus valerandi L. Askem 44/51; I. Macdonald.
Rubus rufescens Lef & P. J. Mueller. Silkstone Common 44/20; D. R. Grant.
Rubus tuberculatus Bab. Fosterhouses, Fishlake 44/61; D.R.G.
Rubus warrenii Sudre. Hampole 44/51; D.R.G. , Middlestown, Wakefield 44/21; E.T.
Rubus scissus W. C. R. Watson. Hoyle Mill Country Park, Barnsley 44/30; T.S., Eastwood,
Todmorden 34/92; D.R.G., Langsett 44/10; D.R.G., Denholme Clough 44/03; T.S.
Rubus nemoralis P. J. Mueller. Gowdall 44/62; T.S., Sutton, Kly. 44/04 T.S.
Rubus sprengelii Weihe. Denholme Clough 44/03; T.S.
Rubus ulmifolius Schott .Whitley Head, Steeton 44/04; D.R.G., Rawcliffe 44/62; E.T.
Rubus newbouldii Bab. Ryecroft Glen, Sheffield 43/38; D.R.G., Mount Pleasant,
Rossington 43/69; D.R.G.
Rubus echinatoides (Rogers) Dallman. Fishlake 44/61; E.T., Gunthwaite 44/20; Shibden
Valley 44/02; T.S.
Rubus echinatus Lindley. Newmillerdam, Wakefield 44/31; D.R.G., Austerfield 43/69;
E.T.
Rosa mollis Smith. East Marton 34/95; D.R.G., Lothersdale 34/94; E.T.
Genista anglica L. Scout Dike Resr, Penistone 44/20; Y.N.U. Excn.
Foeniculum vulgare Miller. Hemingfield 44/40; E.T.
Callitriche hamulata Kuetz ex Koch. Scout Dike Resr, Penistone 44/20; Y.N.U. Excn.
Uttorella uniflora (L.) Asch. Scout Dike Resr, Penistone 44/20: Y.N.U. Excn. Ardsley
Resr, Wakefield 44/22; D.R.G.
Verbascum nigrum L. Mirfield 44/21; J. Greaves.
Veronica filiformis Smith. Austerfield 43/69; T.S.
Galium mollugo L. Gowdall 44/62; E.T.
Pulicaria dysenterica (L.) Bemh. Lothersdale 34/94; E.T.
1 uncus subnodulosus Schrank. Askem 44/51; I. MacD.
Carex paniculata L. Rivelin Resr, Sheffield 43/28; D.R.G.
Zarex laevigata Smith. Brockholes Spring, Penistone 44/20; L. L-E.
Festuca altissima All. Stannally Clough, Todmorden 34/93; F.M.
Mopercurus myosuroides Hudson. Near Fishlake 44/61; E.T.
Hordeum secalinum Schreber Near Fishlake 44/61; D.R.G.
Warthecium ossifragum (L.) Hudson. Brockholes Spring. Penistone 44/20; L. L-E.
Witella flexilis (L.) Agardh. Pond near Scout Dike Resr, Penistone 44/20; L. Magee.
Chara globularis Thuill. New scrape, Potteric Carr Nature Reserve, Doncaster 44/60;
Y.N.U. Excn.
'MID-WEST YORKSHIRE (VC64) (L. Magee)
A large number of reports were received from recording groups and from individuals.
Considerable road construction, involving diversions of roads and rivers, quarrying,
transport of ballast and heavy equipment, is in progress in the county. This has created new
habitats which have been quickly colonised by plants, some of these were species which
were previously very local and some are adventive. Investigation of these new sites has
proved to be rewarding; another source of new records is from ‘set aside' farm land. Some
important records have been received without national grid references; these will be
included in future reports when verified. The recorder thanks all who have sent records and
regrets that it is not possible to include more than selection in this report.
122
Botanical Report for 1994
Pilularia globulifera L. Lumley Moor Reservoir, near Grantley 44/2270: E. Thompson.
Asplenium trichomanes-ramosum L. Threshfield Moor 34/9662, 1992; H. LeFevre.
Blechnum spicant (L.) Roth. Threshfield Moor 34/9662, 1992; H.L.
Nuphar lutea (L.) Smith. Hollins Hall Pond, Harewood, introduced 44/34; L. Magee.
Helleborus foetidus L. Boston Spa 44/4345; D. Grant and T. Schofield; Grass Woods
34/96; Grassington Naturalists per R. Kydd.
Ranunculus hederaceus L. Lower Barden Reservoir, 44/05; L.M.
R. hederaceus L. Threshfield Moor 34/9662, 1992; H.L.
R. aquatilis L. Mucky Pond, Brearey Lane, Bramhope 44/24; L.M.
R. penicillatus (Dumort) Bab. subsp. penicillatus Inlet. Barden Reservoir 44/05; YNU
Excursion per L.M.
Chelidonium majus L. Warren Lane, Arthington. Hundreds of plants 44/24; L.M.
Atriplex littoralis L. Outer Ring Road, York 44/54; M. Hammond.
Minuartia hybrida (Villars) Schischkin. Fountains Abbey 44/26; Harrogate Naturalists’
Society.
Myosoton aquaticum (L.) Moench. Birkin 44/5226; P. P. Abbott.
Persicaria bistorta (L.) Samp. Woodside, Horsforth 44/23 abundant; L.M.
Samolus valerandi L. Staveley Reserve 44/3663, 1991; per J. J. Evison.
Cochlearia danica L. Outer Ring Road, York 44/54; M.H.
Rubus scissus W. C. R. Watson. Near Riddlesden 44/0544; D.G. and T.S.
R. warrenii Sudre. Grewelthorpe 44/2376; D.G. and T.S.
Euonymus europaeus L. Grass woods 34/96; R. Kydd.
Menyanthes trifoliata (L.) Little Ousebum 44/4460; P.P.A.
Smyrniun olusatrum L. Near Bishop Monkton 44/320617; M. Sanderson per J.J.E.
Scutellaria minor Hudson. Adel Bog 44/2839. Confirmation of old record; D.G. and T.S.
Scrophularia umbrosa Dumort. Haw Bank Quarry, Skipton 34/95; R.K.
Littorella uniflora (L.) Asch. Lumley Moor Reservoir, near Grantley 44/2270; D.G. and
T.S.
Senecio fluviatilis Wallr. Riverside, Bolton Abbey 44/0755; D.G. and T.S.
Baldellia ranunculoides (L.) Pari. Staveley Reserve, ‘adventive’ 44/3663; J.J.E.
Zannichellia palustris L. Staveley Reserve 44/3662; per J.J.E.
Cladium mariscus (L.) Pohl. Little Ousebum 44/4460; P.P.A.
J uncus subnodulosus Schrank. Staveley Reserve, 44/3663. 1991; J.J.E.
Carex paniculata L. Acomb Grange, York 44/55; M.H.
C. spicata Hudson. Nunnery Lane, York 44/55; M.H.
C. pendula Hudson. Near Riddlesden 44/0544; D.G. and T.S.; Meanwood Valley 44/2737;
D.G. and T.S.
C. strigosa Hudson. Airton 34/9058; Bilton-in-Ainsty 44/4648; P.P.A.
Apera spica-venti (L.) P. Beauv. Bum, Temple Hirst 44/6026; P.P.A.
Hordeum secalinum Schreber, Nether Poppleton 44/5454; P.P.A.
Epipactis atrorubens (Hoffm.) Besser. Pen-y-ghent 34/8272; P.P.A.
Ophrys apifera Hudson Haw Bank Quarry, Skipton, 34/95; R.K.
NORTH-WEST YORKSHIRE (VC65) (T. F. Medd)
Cochlearia danica L. Roadside, A 1 44/28; 44/29; 44/38; 45/20; S.B.
Rubus lindleianus Lees. Roomer Common, Masham 44/27; D.G.
R. nemoralis Mueller. Aysgarth Falls 44/08; YNU Bot. Sec. Excn. det. D.G.
R. ulmifolius Schott. Aysgarth Falls 44/08; YNU Bot. Sec. Excn. det. D.G.
R. vestitus Weihe. Aysgarth Falls 44/08; YNU Bot. Sec. Excn. det. D.G.
R. echinatoides (Rogers) Dallman. Roomer Common, Masham 44/27; D.G.
R eboracensis Watson. Aysgarth Falls 44/08; YNU Bot. Sec. Excn. det. D.G.
R. tuberculatus Bab. Aysgarth Falls 44/08; YNU Bot. Sec. Excn. det. D.G.
R. warrenii Sudre. Roomer Common, Masham 44/27; D.G. and Aysgarth 44/08; YNU Bot.
Botanical Report for 1994
123
Sec. Excn. det. D.G.
Verbascum thopstis x nigrum = V. .v semialbum Chaub. Banks of R. Ure, Leybum 44/08'
K M. I. Paterson per J. Lambert det. Dr I. K. Ferguson - New VC record
Veronica catenata Pennell. Melmerby 44/37; Dr A. D. Martin.
Juncus compresus Jacq. Dent station 34/78; Dr O. L. Gilbert.
CASUALS AND ADVENTIVES (E. Chicken)
Since the 1993 report, 61 records have been received from 10 individuals for 47 taxa.
In addition two records ol roses planted for landscaping purposes were received from
r L Lloyd-Fvans. These are not included in the figures given, but the information is
usetul and has been incorporated in the card index. As usual, the greatest number of taxa
came from Mr John Martin working the shoddy treated fields near Wakefield. There is a
renewed interest in alien species and this area was visited by a party from the Botanical
'^ociety ot the British Isles. The greatest number of records for one species was six for
lubus procerus reflecting a current interest in the Brambles.
The contributor is assumed to be the determiner unless otherwise stated.
Soleirolia soleirolii (Req.) Dandy (62) Beckside near Allerston 44/88; P. J. Cook.
'-aval era cretica L. (63) Brandy Carr Farm, Wakefield 44/32; J. Martin 1993.
Hibiscus trionum L. (61) Urban garden, Withemsea 54/32; P.J.C.
Malcolmia maritima (L.) R. Br. (64) By Carriage Works. York 44/55; Miss J. Lambert det
E. Chicken.
Jaultheria mucronata (L.f.) Hook. & Am. (63) Elland Park Woods 44/12' T Schofield ner
D. R. Grant.
rellima grandiflora (Pursh) Douglas ex Lindley (63) By woodland path. Meltham 44/1 L
Mrs J. Lucas.
' tubus cockburnianus Hemsley (63) Newmillerdam near Wakefield 44/31; D.R.G.
• tosa multiflora Thunb. ex Murray (63) Near Silkstone Church, near Barnsley 44/20' T S
per D.R.G.
losa x alba L. (61) Roadside hedge, Foxholes 54/70; E.C. det. Dr R. Melville 1975,
previously reported and thought to have been lost.
'•Salega officinalis L. (63) Wrenthorpe near Wakefield 44/32; D. Procter per D.R.G.
' oronilla scorpioides (L.) Koch (63) Brandy Carr Farm. Wakefield 44/32; J.M. 1993.
ecurigera varia (L.) Lassen (63) Derelict land at Longwood, Huddersfield 44/1 L
C. Yeates 1993 per Mrs J.L.
lelilotus sulcata Desf. (63) Brandy Carr Farm. Wakefield 44/32; J.M. 1993.
rifolium tomentosum L. (63) Woodhouse Lane Farm near Wakefield 44/22; J.M. 1993.
rodium stephanianum Willd. (63) Woodhouse Lane Farm near Wakefield 44/22- J.M
1993 det. E. J. Clement.
amiastrum galeobdolon ssp. argentatum (Smejkal) Stace (61) Plantation, Roos 54/22'
P.J.C. First found 1989.
ilybum marianum (L.) Gaertner (63) Rawcliffe 44/62; E. Thompson per D.R.G.
entaurea macrocephala Muss. Puschk. ex Willd. (61) Brandesburton 54/14; E.C.
A garden escape, but neither house nor garden now exist.
ragopogon porrifolius L. (61) Drain bank. Beverley 54/04; J. Dews det. E.C.
i lose II a aurantiaca ssp. carpathicola (Naeg. & Peter) Sojak (61 ) Wasteland at Withemsea
54/32; P.J.C. First found 1989.
halaris minor Retz. (61) Middleton-on-the- Wolds 44/94; J.D. conf. E.C.
ordeum jubatum L. (61) Hedon by-pass 54/12; P.J.C. per Dr F. E. Crackles.
BOOK REVIEW
Forest Resources in Europe 1950-1990 by Kullervo Kuusela. Pp. xiv + 154, including
31 tables and 18 black and white figures. European Forest Institute Research Report 1,
Cambridge University Press. 1994. £29.95.
This book presents the results of work at the European Forest Institute, established in 1993
to conduct research and gather statistics to inform European policies in forestry. It begins
with a survey of the forest resources of Europe, dividing the area into nine geographical
regions, such as ‘Atlantic’ and ‘Mediterranean West’. Detailed statistics for each country
appear in the next section, followed by a discussion of the ecological and economic basis
of forestry. The book ends with recommendations for future forestry policy.
An estimated 80% of Europe was originally covered with forests but two-thirds have
been destroyed over the years. Only in the twentieth century has there been a major
reversal of this trend, with the development of forestry industries in most European
countries. Despite some discrepancies in data collection and recording, it is clear that the
total growing stock of European forests increased by 43% (5 million hectares) between
1950 and 1990, and wood resources are now greater than at any time in the last three
hundred years. Forests presently cover 27% of Europe as a whole and the British Isles have
the dubious distinction of having the lowest percentage forested area of all European
regions. However, the only natural forests remaining are in parts of the boreal coniferous
zone and a few montane remnants. The remainder are mostly planted, being dominated by
coniferous species, except in southern Europe where much of it is scrub woodland.
Nearly all European forests are multi-functional today, with social and cultural functions,
such as recreation, gradually gaining in importance relative to the traditional commodity
function of providing timber and wood products. Forests are also important for protecting
watersheds from soil erosion, as refuges for wildlife and as carbon sinks to counteract
global warming.
Much of the book consists of tabulated statistics and graphs, which provide a valuable
database but do not make for scintillating reading. The most interesting sections are in
chapter 4, where the author discusses the problems of achieving sustainable development
of forest resources and the future outlook for forestry in Europe. Comparisons are made
between native woodlands and plantations of exotic conifers, the later being more
susceptible to disease and pest attacks, windthrow and fire damage. He questions the long-
term genetic and structural stability of these forests and makes a case for changes in
management policies, such as shortening rotations, increasing thinnings and a return to the
use of native species. Forests can make a valuable contribution to maintaining biodiversity
but good management is hampered by low living standards in southern Europe and poor
economic structures in the former planned economies of eastern Europe. The author argues
that an environmental ethic should be developed and policies devised for European forestry
as a whole.
The style and presentation are of high quality but the structure of the book produces
some repetition of material and the emphasis on factual data does not make for an easy
read. A somewhat dated approach is taken to zonal vegetation and ‘climatic climax’
communities, but despite this the book contains much useful information and some
challenging ideas. This is a book for the serious student or forest manager and will form a
valuable work of reference for several years to come.
MAA
The Naturalist’ is available in microform
UNIVERSITY MICROFILMS INTERNATIONAL
300 North Zeeb Road
Dept PR
Ann Arbor, Mi 48106
USA
White Swan House
Godstone
Surrey RH9 8LW
England
Binding
Why not have your copies of The Naturalist bound into volumes?
One year’s issues per volume, or alternatively two years in one
volume at less cost than binding as two separate volumes. We arc
also experienced and expert in the re-binding and repairing of all
books.
Spink & Thackray
Broomfield Bindery
Back Broomfield Crescent
LEEDS LS6 3BP Telephone: 0113 2780353
The Irish Naturalists’ Journal
A quarterly journal of Irish natural history
Edited by Dr Robin Govier
Annual subscription £12.50. IR £14.00
Further information from the Editor, INJ
Medical & Biological Centre, Lisburn Road.
Belfast BT9 7BL
Printed in Great Britain by Titus Wilson & Son, Kendal
ISSN 0028-0771
Latest publication of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
THE FRESHWATER CRUSTACEA OF YORKSHIRE
a faunistic & ecological survey
by
GEOFFREY FRYER
The crustacean fauna of Yorkshire reflects the great physiographic diversity of the
region. Adopting an ecological approach, this book considers the Yorkshire fauna in
relation to climate, topography, geology, soils and water chemistry, always keeping in
mind that it is dealing with living organisms whose habits, requirements and
physiological limitations determine exactly where they live.
Matters covered include the ecological background; faunal assemblages and their
regional attributes; an analysis of the factors that determine distribution patterns, many
of which are mapped; wide geographical aspects; and conservation. Large areas, such
as the Pennines, Howgill Fells, North Eastern uplands and the lowland plains are
surveyed. So too are localised regions including Whemside, the Malham area, lowland
heaths, and the largest lakes, as well as habitats such as upland tarns, seepages, cold
springs, small lowland ponds, inland saline waters. Notes are given on every species
recorded, including parasitic forms.
Price £16.00 (plus £2.00 per copy p.&p.) Special offer to member of the Yorkshire
Naturalists’ Union £13.50 (plus £2.00 p.&p.)
Please make cheques payable to Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
Available from: Professor M. R. D. Seaward, Department of Environmental
Science, University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1DP.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE
A Fungus Flora of Yorkshire. 1985. 296 pp. Hardback. £10.00 incl. p&p.
Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire. 1 989. 380 pp. Paperback. £ 1 7.50
incl. p&p. Unbound. £12.15 incl. p&p.
Mammals of Yorkshire. 1985. 256 pp. £7.50 incl. p&p.
Protection of Birds Committee Centenary Year, 1891-1991. 73 pp. £6.00
incl. p&p.
Moths and Butterflies of Spurn , 1991 . 124 pp. £6 incl. p&p.
Cheques should be made payable to Y.N.U.
From: Mrs J. Payne, 1 5 Broad Lane, Cawood, Selby, North Yorkshire, Y08 0SQ.
Telephone: 0757 268242
A QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
THE NATURAL
HISTORY MUSEUM
15 JAN 1996
PURCHASED
GENERAL LIBRARY
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North
Yorkshire — J. M. Allinson
Assassin-flies or Robber-flies (Diptera: Asilidae) of Yorkshire,
with notes on records from other areas of Northern England —
Peter Skidmore and Andrew Grayson
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees (Hymenoptera: Melittidae and
Megachilidae) of Watsonian Yorkshire — Michael E. Archer
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
iitor M. R. D. Seaward, MSc. PhD. DSc. FLS. The University, Bradford BD7 1DP
Notice to Contributors to ‘The Naturalist’
Manuscripts (two copies if possible), typed double-spaced on one side of the paper only
with margins at top and left-hand at least 2.5cm wide, should be submitted. Latin names of
genera and species, but nothing else, should be underlined. S.I. Units should be used
wherever possible. Authors must ensure that their references are accurately cited, and that
the titles of the journals are correctly abbreviated. Volumes of The Naturalist for the years
1886 to 1975 have been retrospectively numbered 11 to 100 to accord with numbering
before and after this period (see YNU Bulletin no. 3, pp. 21-22 1985); please cite these
volume numbers in all references. Table and text-figures should be prepared on separate
sheets of paper. Drawings and graphs, drawn about twice the linear size they are to appear,
should be in jet-black Indian ink, and legends should not be written on the figures.
Publishable manuscripts not conforming to the above requirements will be returned
for alteration.
Photographic Plates
Readers of The Naturalist will have noticed that the number of photographic illustrations
has increased in recent years. Good clear photographs, suitably captioned, to accompany
articles or as independent features are always welcome.
To encourage this development, a long-standing member of the YNU, who wishes to
remain anonymous, has most generously offered to make a donation, the income from
which would finance the publication of a plate or equivalent illustration in future issues
whenever possible. The editor, on behalf of the YNU, wishes to record this deep
appreciation of this imaginative gesture.
©Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union — 1995
Single Copies may be made of single articles in this journal provided that due acknow-
ledgement is made and the copies are for non-profit making educational or private use.
Copying of more than one article or multiple copying of a single article is forbidden unless
special permission has been obtained from the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union. Permission is
granted for the use of brief quotations in published work provided that acknowledgement
of the source is clearly stated, but the use of substantial sections of text and any illustrative
matter requires the express permission of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
All matters other than subscriptions should be addressed to:
Mr John A. Newbould, Tapton House 30 Moorlands, Wickersley
Rotherham S66 OAT
Items which should be sent to the above include: All membership applications, changes
of address, resignations and problems concerning non-receipt of any of the YNU’s
publications. Please quote the membership number printed underneath your address on all
correspondence.
Subscriptions (unless covered by Banker’s Order) should continue to be sent to:
Mr Derek Allen, c/o Doncaster Museum, Chequer Road
Doncaster DN1 2AE
The Naturalist is issued free to individual members of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
and to Affiliated Societies.
Institutions and Subscribers £20.00
Registered Charity No. 224018
125
STATUS OF SPECIES RICH NEUTRAL GRASSLAND
IN WESTERN NORTH YORKSHIRE
J. M. ALLINSON
6 Willow Wood Cottages, Langcliffe, Settle, N. Yorkshire BD24 9NT
, UMMARY
his paper brings together observations made by the author after carrying out a Phase 1
l ield by field) survey for the Nature Conservancy Council in 1989-91 of all the neutral
rassland in the western part of North Yorkshire, covered by the districts of Richmondshire
id Craven, but excluding the Yorkshire Dales National Park. Grassland data collected
ithin the YDNP by other NCC surveyors in 1985/86 are also used. The author also
r ‘.surveyed 40 YDNP fields of high and medium conservation value in 1991 and showed
1 lat a 36% decrease in the recorded area of species rich neutral grassland had taken place
between 1985 and 1991. This indicates that there were only 519 (±158) ha of grade 4
rassland (i.e. of high grade conservation value) in 1991 in the whole ol the V DNP. Some
f this loss is due to agricultural improvement and some is due to part ol the original
urvey having had an insufficiently fine mapping scale. The England Field Unit indicator
ppecies list usedto grade fields was shown to be a very useful tool tor comparing grassland
•abitats.The richest communities, i.e. those with 15 or more indicator species, were found
, ilmost entirely on slopes. The main NVC types in species rich grassland in the area under
, tudy are MG3, MG5. M26b, CG2 and CG8 with some M22 and M27. and the importance
' f M26b as a grassland vegetation type within the Dales is emphasised. Three of the
'5 species rich grassland sites in Craven have come under threat in the three years since
991. The importance of the Settle-Carlisle Line as a grassland habitat is demonstrated.
U table comparing habitat type cover inside and outside the YDNP within Craven is
^resented.
SNTRODUCTION AND AIMS
'iince 1949, neutral grasslands in the UK have been changed by seeding, drainage and
ertilizer and herbicide application, so that by 1984 95% lacked significant wildlife interest
!>nd only 3% were left undamaged by agricultural intensification (NCC, 1984). Damage is
ontinuing (Barr et al., 1993). Traditionally managed, unimproved (in agricultural terms)
grasslands are an important wildlife resource containing a wide diversity of plants and
nsects which have lived in Britain for thousands of years and many of which would have
mown in woodland clearings before humans came. Smith and Rushton (1994) describe
management of traditional meadows from which stock are removed in May and the grass
. ;ut for hay from mid July to August.
This paper assesses the status of neutral grassland in the districts ot Cra\en and
RUchmondshire, i.e. the western part of the county of North Yorkshire. It draws on the three
5hase 1 (field by field) surveys of the area carried out by English Nature (EN) and its
predecessor, the Nature Conservancy Council (NCC) (Table 1) and reports on a further
iurvey by the author to investigate changes in the conservation value ot a sample ot high
.made fields between 1985 and 1991. . n r L kr . , ,,
The area, which lies in the Pennines. (Figure 1) is English Nature s 'i orkshire Dales
irea of search. The NCC divided Britain into 114 areas of search. One third ot the
vegetation in the area surveyed is neutral grassland, grown to support cattle and sheep. The
rocks are mostly carboniferous sandstones (including millstone grit), shales and limestones
and there are areas of glacial and alluvial deposits.
Table 1 shows the three Phase 1 surveys which have been carried out in the area to
orovide EN with vegetation maps and target notes showing the conservation value ot each
field. In the two surveys outside the Park, carried out by the author, the remit was to pay
special attention to neutral grassland.
Naturalist 120 ( 1995)
126 Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
TABLE 1
Yorkshire Dales Phase 1 Botanical Surveys
Survey
Total
area
km2
Neutral
grassland
km2
Notes
YDNP 1985-1988
(Stewart & Drewitt,
1989; Drewitt, 1991)
1532
411
The YDNP contains part of the
Pennine Dales ESA including
Geranium sylvaticum meadows
at the top of Swaledale; other main
habitats are heather and cottongrass
moorland, acid, neutral and calcareous
grassland.
Richmondshire 1989
(Allinson, 1992)
490
c.174
Much of the former enclosed grassland
has been changed to arable; there is
heather moorland on the millstone grit
in the west and there is some
limestone.
Craven 1990-1991
(Allinson, 1992)
370
262
Much of the neutral grassland of the
Craven Lowlands on glacial till and
drumlins is improved, in the
agricultural sense. In South Craven
there is millstone grit and in the south
west part of North Craven. Bowland
shale.
The YDNP survey was the first to be carried out because it was known that the Park is an
important area for traditional hay meadows. The YDNP, the NCC and the Environmentally
Sensitive Area (ESA) system have encouraged care for some of these meadows. Outside
the Park there were thought to be fewer fields of conservation interest, so these surveys
were carried out afterwards. However, the very fact that there are fewer good fields outside
the Park means it is important to conserve those that remain.
A repeat survey of 40 fields in the YDNP which included 7.6% by area of the neutral
grassland of highest conservation value was carried out by the author in July 1991. This
enabled comparison of some of the best fields inside and outside the Park, thus ensuring
that the same standards were being applied in both places. It also provided an excellent
opportunity to determine whether the species richness of the fields had changed over the
period 1985 to 1991.
Neutral grassland is taken to mean all the grassland types included in the Mesotrophic
Grassland chapter of the National Vegetation Classification (NVC) (Rod well. 1992). This
chapter excludes acid grassland, calcicolous grassland and wetland. Other grassland
vegetation communities were also included if they contained a high number of the England
Field Unit’s Yorkshire Dales Hay meadow survey list of species characteristic of semi-
natural neutral grassland (NCC, 1982), and these communities were M26b (wet grassland),
borderline cases of calcicolous grassland and enclosed calcicolous grassland that was
ungrazed or managed as hay.
For the sample of YDNP fields the following questions were asked:
1 . Has there been a reduction in the area of grade 4 and grade 3b grassland in the 5-6
years since 1985-86? Can the result from the sample survey be used to obtain an
estimate for the amount of remaining high grade grassland in the YDNP?
2. What percentages of high grade sites are pastures or meadows?
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire 127
Yorkshire Dales National Park (YDNP)
Craven outside YDNP
Richmondshire outside YDNP
Letter codes refer to Ordnance Survey 1 00km squares
FIGURE 1
Location of area surveyed.
3. How important are slopes compared with flat areas in providing a habitat for species
diversity?
4. What range of "indicator species score” occurs?
5. What range of National Vegetation Classification (NVC) types occurs?
Questions 2. 3, 4 and 5 were asked in the Craven survey for the 25 most species rich
i elds and questions 4 and 5 in the Richmondshire survey for the 27 most species rich
elds. Question 4 was also applied to 18 sites along the Settle-Carlisle Railway in the
i 'DNP using data collected by the author with the Craven Conservation Group (1989).
i lETHODS
Neutral grassland grade
U scheme to classify neutral grasslands using a list of 47 indicator species (Table 2) was
sed by the England Field Unit when they surveyed Yorkshire Dales hay meadows in 1980
nd 1981 (NCC 1982). The list was originally compiled as a result of field experience in
)erbvshire, Cumbria and North Yorkshire. The species are those characteristic of semi-
atural neutral grassland in northern England, including traditionally managed hay
leadows, and in this text are referred to as indicator species.
Grade 1+2 - no indicator species (i.e. heavily improved or reseeded)
Grade 3a - 1-4 indicator species present
Grade 3b - 5-9 indicator species present
Grade 4 - 10 or more indicator species present.
128 Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
High conservation interest and traditionally managed sites tend to be grade 3b and grade 4.
Some sites with fewer than five indicators may also be of conservation interest if they
support uncommon plants. Some traditionally managed meadows have low scores, e.g.
grade 3a, because they are supported on acid soils.
TABLE 2
Indicator species - both characteristic and rare - used in the identification of
herb-rich meadows (from EFU Survey Report, NCC, 1982)
Species names given according to Stace (1992).
Strategy: (Grime et al., 1988) C = Competitor, R = Ruderal, S = Stress tolerator.
Species Characteristic of
Old Meadow Communities
(34 species)
Rare Species of
Old Meadows
(13 species)
Ajuga rep tans
Botrychium lunaria
Alchemilla spp.
Cirsium heterophyllum
Alopecurus geniculatus
Dactylorhiza fuchsii
Anemone nemorosa
S/SR
D. maculata
Briza media
S
D. purpurella
Caltha palustris
S/SCR
Gymnadenia conopsea
Carex caryophyllea
S
Listera ovata
C.flacca
S
Meum athamanticum
C. panicea
S/SC
Ophioglossum vulgatum
Conopodium majus
SR
Persicaria bistorta
Euphrasia spp.
SR
Platanthera bifolia
Filipendula ulmaria
C/CR
Primula farinosa
Galium verum
Geranium pra tense
G. sylvaticum
Geum rivale
S/SCR
Trollius europaeus
Helictotrichon pratense
S/SC
H. pubescens
S/SC
Hypochaeris radicata
Knautia arvensis
SCR
Lathyrus pratensis
SCR
Leontodon hispidus
s
Lotus corniculatus
S/SCR
Luzula campestris
Lychnis flos-cuculi
Plantago media
S/SCR
Primula veris
S
Prunella vulgaris
SCR
Sanguisorba minor
S. officinalis
Saxifraga granulata
S
Stachys officinalis
Stellaria graminea
S
Succisa pratensis
S
In the Craven area outside the YDNP, with three possible exceptions, no hay meadows
of high conservation interest (grade 4) were found. However, neutral grassland of high
129
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
> conservation interest was tound in sites such as pastures, neglected slopes, verges and
boggy ground. These areas were often less than 0.5 ha, the standard cut-off for most NCC
grassland survey work.
/ Location of fields for YDNP resurvey
The 40 fields were chosen by a restricted randomised method: two grade 4 and two grade
3b sites were selected from different parts of each YDNP Phase 1 5km x 5km map so that
he chance of the fields being managed by the same farmer was reduced; where possible
hose selected had a footpath running through them. The 5km x 5km squares, often with
ess than four suitable fields, were then surveyed in a random order, until 40 sites had been
recorded.
This resulted in 24 fields for grade 4 grassland, covering 57.2 ha (7.6% of YDNP grade 4
. grassland) and 16 fields for grade 3b grassland covering 35 ha (1.7% of the total grade 3b
$: grassland).
' sampling
The survey was carried out in the four weeks of July 1991. Each field was considered as a
' site which could be made up of one or several different communities. Each community was
t raversed and a species list made with DAFOR ratings, according to a five point abundance
rcale (Dominant, Abundant, Frequent, Occasional and Rare) estimated by eye. The results
were entered on target note cards and the area covered by each neutral grassland grade was
'.ecorded. For the more interesting communities, standard NCC grassland cards were
[.completed; this involved placing a 2m x 2m quadrat and recording the Domin values to
provide percentage cover for each species present. The communities were then allocated to
NNVC types with the aid of the computer program MATCH (Malloch. 1990) and the NVC
, .'hapters (Rodwell, 1991, 1992).
In cases where hay meadows were uncut, the field was viewed with binoculars from the
path and edges and the quadrat placed in a representative part near the edge of each
[.community. In cases where no footpath was available, access permission was sought from
t‘ he landowner.
I Pastures and Meadows
The 40 fields surveyed were recorded as being either pasture or meadow; this includes two
completely neglected, ungrazed fields which were counted as meadow. Graphs of the
i -esults were made to compare indicator species scores in pasture and meadow.
A separate, more extensive analysis was also made to find the ratio of pastures to
i neadows in high grade grassland throughout the YDNP using the Phase 1 maps, stored at
[ he English Nature office in Leybum. A sample of 15 maps, from the total of 61 5km maps
which contained more than 50% YDNP, was taken and all fields recorded as grade 3b or 4
were categorised as either pasture or meadow and counted.
\ rea covered bx different vegetation types in Craven inside and outside the YDNP
The Phase 1 maps have been analysed using a dot matrix grid to calculate the percentage
i :over of different vegetation types (Stewart & Drewitt, 1989; Allinson. 1992). The results
I or Craven inside and outside the YDNP are shown in Table 4. It is thus possible to
:ompare the area of species rich grassland with the area of other types of vegetation.
Results and Observations
i Current area of grade 4 and grade 3b grassland
I 'igure 2 shows that, for the 40 fields surveyed in 1991, about one third of the land recorded
is grade 4 or 3b in 1985-86 can no longer be classified as such. By 1991 much had changed
o grade 3a land and 3.6 ha was improved grassland with no indicators at all. Using the data
rom these 40 fields it is possible to make an estimate of how much of the grade 3b and 4
130
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
FIGURE 2
To show the fate in 1991 of 40 fields recorded as grade 4 or 3b
in 1985/1986 in the YDNP (hectares).
grassland recorded in 1985 in the YDNP remained in 1991. The standard error of the mean
change in area of the communities in these fields is used to calculate the 95% confidence
limits. Five additional small grade 4 sites were found and these are added to the results to
give a second estimate.
Cover of grade 4 grassland in 1985 = 754 ha
Estimated grade 4 cover in 1991 = 500 ±147 ha
As above but including new sites found = 519 ±158 ha
(66.3 ± 19.5%)
(69 ±21 %)
Grade 4 and 3b grassland cover in 1985 = 2688 ha
Estimated grade 4 and 3b cover in 1 99 1 = 1653 ±515 ha
As above but including new sites found = 1723.5 ± 515 ha
(61.5 ±19%)
(64 ± 19%)
The five additional grade 4 sites found had a combined area of 1 .5 ha and consisted of one
calcareous grassland with no target note, two road verges, one strip at the edge of a school
field and an area of 0.5 ha that had previously been described as 3b. New grade 3b
grassland had not been recorded during the project. Since extra grade 4 land had been
found amounting to 2.6% of the final grade 4 area, it was decided, as a rough estimate, to
make the extra grade 4 and 3b land equivalent to 2.6% of the final grade 4 and 3b area
(2688 ha), i.e. 70.5 ha. This figure of 70.5 is simply added to the figure of 1653 ha
calculated above. It is not possible to calculate different confidence limits.
Loss due to change in management
Two fields, originally recorded as grade 4 and 3b in 1985, occupying 5% of the area of the
40 fields, were considered to have lost species richness through management regimes,
especially application of fertilizer. Spraying with herbicide against weeds such as thistles
could also have been involved. In 1991, they were found to be lush, rank, improved
meadows with no hay meadow indicators at all except in a small wet area in one field and
in a lm2 slope in the second field where each had more than five. Three other fields
recorded in 1985 as grade 3b were found in 1991 to have lush growth and only 3 to 4 thinly
131
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
Grassland quality in pasture and meadow in 1991 in 40 fields recorded as
grade 4 or 3b in 1985/1986 in the YDNP.
dispersed indicators and hence were recorded as 3a. These may have been borderline cases
even in 1986. Thus out of the initial 93 ha. agricultural improvement is likely to be the
cause of the loss of at least 5% of the species rich grassland, and if all the above five fields
are included, as much as 12.7%.
A 0. 1 ha strip of grade 4 flush grassland between a stream and wall was lost to tree
planting and 1.5 ha of steep calcareous slope is now covered by bracken.
Meadow, pasture , slope and species diversity
An analysis was made of a sample of 15 of the 61 5km x 5km maps from the 1985/86 NCC
survey to find the relative abundance of meadows and pastures. When the grade 4 and 3b
fields were totalled for the first 14 maps, the ratio of meadow to pasture was 1:2 (grade 4:
24 meadows. 61 pastures; grade 3b: 60 meadows, 105 pastures). By chance, the 15th map
was SD99NW, Muker. and when the results for this map were added, it changed the score
to 1:1. The Muker square had more hay meadows in it than all the other squares put
together, with a ratio of meadow to pasture of 7.1 (grade 4: 30 meadows. 0 pastures; grade
3b: 62 meadows, 13 pastures).
It was observed that nineteen of the 179 grade 3b and grade 4 pastures (i.e. 10%) and
one of the meadows used in the above analysis can also be classified as calcicolous
grassland, but as they had high indicator species scores they are treated here as neutral
grassland.
hectares hectares
132
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
a) Meadow grassland qualify on slopes
and on level ground (ha)
in YDNP
Grade 4 Grade 3b Grade 3a Total
Legend
EH slope
□ level
■ >15 indicator species
per community
b) Pasture grassland quality on slopes
and on level ground (ha)
Grade 4 Grade 3b Grade 3a Total
c) Grassland quality on slopes and level ground
meadow and pasture combined
in YDNP
d) Slopes, level ground and species richness
in Craven (outside YDNP)
in the 24 best grade 4 sites
Pasture Meadow Total
Footnote:
The YDNP results cxe community results from the sample ol 40 originally grade 4 or 3b Helds plus
the 4 new smcfl grade 4 sites.
FIGURE 4
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
133
YDNP: This representative sample includes 8% of the total grade 4 neutral grassland area in the YDNP
Number of Indicator species
Number of indicator species
Craven outside YDNP: These are the 25 most species rich neutral grassland sites in Craven
Communities Sites
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Number of Indicator species
Number of Indicator species
Richmondshire outside YDNP: These are the 27 most species rich grassland sites in Richmondshire
Communities Sites
Number of Indicator species Number of Indicator species
Settle-Carlisle Railway sites.
These are the 1 8 sites surveyed by J. Allinson and
Craven Conservation group in SD 7 7, 86 and 87
in YDNP and include all sites surveyed including
species poor ones
Sites
10
9
8
7
s 6
5 5
o 4
s »
§ »
Z I
o
FIGURE 5
Range of Indicator Species Scores.
Number of indicator species
134 Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
To consider whether pastures or meadows yield the higher grade of grassland, see Figure
3: of the sample of 40 fields surveyed in 1991, 18 were meadow and 22 pasture. There was
slightly more grade 4 vegetation in meadow than pasture, whereas there was more lower
grade vegetation (3a and 3b) in pasture than meadow. Also the 5km x 5km map survey
above showed that the Muker square with the highest number of high grade fields had a
very high ratio of meadows to pastures. However, the total area of very high grade
vegetation (15 or more indicator species) was divided equally between meadow and
pasture, though found only in seven fields.
Figures 4a and 4b show that in the YDNP all the grassland communities with more than
15 indicator species were found on slopes in both meadow and pasture. Figure 4c shows
that whilst there was the same area of grade 4 vegetation on slopes as on the flat areas, 20.3
ha compared with 19.5 ha, vegetation with more than 15 indicators occurred almost
exclusively on slopes. The same pattern was found in Craven (Figure 4d). Thus, for the
sample of 40 species rich fields, flat meadows tend to have more indicator species than flat
pastures, but if there is a slope in the field it will tend to increase the diversity of species for
both meadow and pasture.
Indicator species score ranges
Figure 5 shows the distribution of indicator species scores for both communities and sites.
The graphs show that many of the highest scoring communities are in fact calcareous veg-
etation. Craven has very few calcareous sites, but its neutral grassland sites score highly.
It can be seen from Figure 5 that although Craven and Richmondshire have fewer grade
4 sites than the YDNP, the distributions of indicator scores within the grade 4 sites are only
slightly different. If the calcareous and mire sites are excluded then the differences become
more obvious, the number of communities with 1 3 or more indicator species being 4 for
YDNP, 9 for Craven and 10 for Richmondshire. If calcareous grassland is included then
the numbers of communities with very high indicator species totals (17 or more) are 6 for
YDNP, 1 for Craven and 7 for Richmondshire.
In 1989, the Craven Conservation Group, including the author, carried out a survey of 18
sites along the Settle-Carlisle Railway within grid squares SD77, 86 and 87. The YDNP
survey did not have access to the line. The sites are up to 0.5 km long and the width of one
side of railway banking and were not divided into communities. The indicator species
scores for all the sites are included in Figure 5d, not just the grade 4 sites as in the case of
the other surveys. Many of the railway sites are calcareous grassland.
NVC classification
Figure 6 shows the NVC types which occur in the high grade grassland of YDNP,
Richmondshire and Craven. The computer program MATCH (Malloch, 1990) was used to
aid identification of communities in Craven and the YDNP, but not in the Richmondshire
survey. The code, title and a short description of these are given in the appendix.
Craven had a higher proportion of MG5 ( Centaurea nigra - Cynosurus cristatus
meadow and pasture) than the YDNP and Richmondshire, whereas these latter two areas
had a higher proportion of MG3 ( Anthoxanthum odoratum - Geranium sylvaticum meadow
and pasture) than Craven. Small communities of M26b ( Molinia caerulea - Crepis
paludosa mire, Festuca rubra subcommunity) turned up many times in all three survey
areas - species rich wet grassland characterised by Valeriana dioica, Succisa pratensis ,
Carex panicea but rarely containing Molinia caerulea or Crepis paludosa.
Mean community size
Figure 7 shows that the YDNP 1991 mean community size was much smaller that the
YDNP 1985 mean community size and that the 95% confidence limits only just overlap,
even though the same set of fields were measured in each case. The Richmondshire and
Craven communities are smaller.
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
135
YDNP grade 4
30 communities
from a sample ot 7.6% ot the area
all the YDNP grade 4 sites
RICHMONDSHIRE
outside YDNP
30 communities
CRAVEN
outside YDNP
28 communities
CG
MG3
MG5
M26b
M22
(4)
(3)
J’
I m
FIGURE 6
NVC types in grade 4 grassland in YDNP. Richmondshire and Craven:
their total area (ha) I 1 and the number of communities (in brackets) d
95%
confidence
limits
Craven Richmond- YDNP YDNP
sMre 1991 1956
FIGURE 7
Mean areas of grade 4 communities in Craven. Richmondshire,
YDNP ( 1 99 1 ) and YDNP ( 1 985).
Status and Protection of high grade sites
Tables 3 and 4 are presented to show the importance of high grade neutral grassland.
Table 3 shows the relative amount of high grade neutral grassland in the different survey
areas. Table 4 shows the percentage cover of all the main different vegetation types in
1 36 Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
Craven inside and outside the YDNP and demonstrates the very small quantity of medium
and high grade (3b and 4) neutral grassland that is left in these two areas. Inside the Park,
which is supposed to be a good area for grassland, only 1 .2% of neutral grassland is grade
3b and above; only 0.24% is grade 4 grassland. In Craven outside the Park only 0.24% is
3b and above, only 0.12% is grade 4 grassland.
Table 5 shows what protection or status is given to those grade 4 sites recorded in the
three areas. It should be remembered that the YDNP sites are only a sample of all the sites
in the YDNP, and that the majority of the railway line in use was not surveyed.
Three of the 25 species rich grassland sites in Craven have come under threat in the three
years since 1991, due to planning applications. It will be easier for planners in Craven to
protect important sites from development once the Local Plan for Craven District outside
the National Park (currently at consultation draft stage) has been adopted. The YDNP
already has its own plan. However, unless a held has SSSI status or a specific management
agreement, there is nothing to prevent the landowners from agriculturally improving the
fields, thereby destroying the nature conservation interest.
TABLE 3
A comparison of the total area (ha) of species rich grasslands in
a) Craven outside the YDNP; (b) Richmondshire outside YDNP;
(c) YDNP, determined from Allinson (1991)
Neutral, calcareous and
Neutral
acid grassland
grassland*
Total
number
YDNP
of
YDNP
1991
indicator
Grassland
Craven
Richmondshire
1985
153200 ha
species
Class
37000 ha
49000 ha
153200 ha
estimates
1-4
3a
947 (2.55%)
1200 (2.45%)
12994 (8.5%)
5-9
3b
46 (0.12%)
37 (0.08%)
1934 (1.26%)
1354 (0.9%)
10-14
4
22 (0.06%)
30 (0.06%)
754 (0.49%)
381 (0.25%)
>15
4
24 (0.06%)
30 (0.06%)
138 (0.09%)
*The 6477 ha of calcareous grassland present in YDNP not listed here may also have some
hay meadow indicator species.
Discussion
In the sample of 40 YDNP fields there was a 31% decrease in area of grade 4 grassland
since 1985/6 and a decrease of 36% for grade 3b and grade 4 combined. If this is
representative of all the high grade grassland in the YDNP, it represents a very significant
loss. The confidence limits for the estimate for the whole YDNP are wide because the raw
data for change in cover have a skew distribution, a large number of communities having
no change or a small change in area and a few having big changes. None the less, the drop
is significant and the pattern is reinforced by the fact that both the grade 4 and the grade 3b
show a similar drop. This drop is due to two factors: first a change in minimum mapping
area between the two surveys and second, changes in management which account for at
least one third of the loss, or over 12% of the original grade 3b and grade 4 area.
The cut-off size for the minimum mapping area in Phase 1 survey work is often set at 0.5
ha by NCC/EN as a compromise between recording very fine detail and achieving a cost
effective rate of survey work. This probably explains why the additional small grade 4 sites
were not recorded in 1985. In the 1991 YDNP survey a scale finer than 0.5 ha was used
which resulted in smaller mean community size (Figure 7). Some fields recorded, as for
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
137
TABLE 4
Area in Craven covered by different vegetation types outside and
inside the YDNP.
Craven
Craven
outside
inside
YDNP
YDNP
Total area km2
370
792
% cover
% cover
Grade 4 and 3b grassland
0.24*
1.1
Neutral grassland of no conservation interest
70.1
31.3
Fen
0.1
0.4
Basic flush
0.04
0.2
Rush pasture
4.4
20.1
Acid grassland
5.1
Eriophorum vaginatum bog
2.9
16.9
Acid flush
0.3
0.7
Heather
5.0
5.1
Scrub
0.2
0.3
Conifer
1.3
2.5
Mixed woodland
0.5
0.4
Bd lvd new plantation
0.6
1.0
Bd lvd older plantation/semi-natural woodland
1.0
Bracken
0.6
1.7
Buildings and roads
5.1
1.0
Railway
0.6
-
Quarry
0.3
0.4
Water
0.7
0.63
Limestone pavement
0
1.7
Calcareous grassland
0.08*
6.0
Unrecorded (no access)
-
9.3
*Outside the YDNP the 0.08% calcareous grassland is also included within
the grade 4 and grade 3b grassland.
TABLE 5
Protection given to grade 4 sites in 1993.
YDNP
Craven
Richmondshire
S/C Line
SSSI
3
2
5
ESA
>4
Countryside Stewardship
1
YWT management agreement
1
Road verge
2
2
1
Railway land - disused line
5
1
Railway land - active line
13
School nature reserve
1
None of the above ‘protection-
9
15
19
0
Total number of grade 4 sites
19
25
27
13
1 38 Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
example all grade 4 in 1985, were in 1991 recorded as a small area of grade 4 grassland,
less than 0.5 ha, and a large area of low grade grassland. This happened in 7 out of the 8
Arkengarthdale sites, all of which were recorded by the same 1985/6 surveyor. In their
report Stewart and Drewitt (1989) state "there has been a general increase in the detail of
mapping since the first field season in 1985”. It is unfortunate that this difference in
technique occurred because it is now not possible to attribute an exact area of high grade
grassland loss to management practice, but it should be noted that the original survey was
not carried out with the intention of a specific resurvey. Furthermore, whatever the cut-off
scale used, a choice does have to be made.
There were however obvious losses of species diversity due to changes in management,
especially increased application of fertilizer. A loss of five grade 4 and grade 3b
communities out of 40 in 5 years is a large rate of loss. Of interest are two other changes in
management which reflect current trends: a strip in one field was lost to tree planting and a
steep slope in a second to bracken encroachment.
The meadow to pasture ratio was considered in relation to the question “Are there more
likely to be plants of conservation interest in meadow or in pasture?” Tall plants such as
Geranium pratense and Geranium sylvaticum will only survive in fields which have tall
vegetation in summer. Traditionally managed meadows have been and are still being lost:
on the one hand, as productive meadows their yields are further increased by addition of
fertilizer and reseeding, and on the other, as the less productive and inaccessible ones cease
to be managed as meadow and are left as pasture. Indeed, some of the best pasture fields
found were ex-meadows. The anomalous result for the meadow to pasture ratio of 7:1 for
the Muker square compared with a mean of 1:2 in the other 14 recorded squares in the
YDNP shows that the ratio depends on which part of the Park is being sampled. In Craven
outside the Park there were very few species rich traditionally managed meadows at ail -
partly because in places the parent rock, especially the millstone grit and Bowland shale,
was more acid and hence the vegetation more limited, and partly because they had been
lost as described above. The special combination of climate, geology, topography and
history around Muker in Upper Swaledale has enabled these meadows to survive - the
shortish growing season, the limestone, the steep slopes and flat valley floor, the work in
the lead mines, the isolation, and over the last ten years or so the ESA system.
Slopes had greater species richness than flat areas. Various suggestions can be put
forward for this. Firstly the flat areas often have deposits of boulder clay or alluvial
material, giving a thicker top soil which allows the more vigorous plants to grow, which in
turn exclude the slow growing stress tolerant plants. Secondly the slope soils have a thin A
horizon, fewer nutrients are available and therefore the plants are smaller, leading to larger
gaps due to low vegetation cover and soil slippage, so there is space for a variety of plants
to become established. Thirdly, the slopes are often more calcareous than the flat areas and
finally the slopes do not get cut in summer, and manure and fertilizer would not be applied.
The range of indicator species scores is not dramatically different for the three survey
areas. Richmondshire and the YDNP have more communities with a very high number of
indicators (17 or more) than does Craven, possibly because they have more surface
limestone rock. Several MG3 and MG5 communities were found in limestone fields.
Flowever, Craven and Richmondshire have more sites with high scores than the YDNP
sample; one small field site can be made up of several different communities and hence
achieve a high score. Some of the railway sites have high scores, showing the importance
of the railway line for the conservation of grassland species.
The choice of species in the indicator species list is of interest (Table 2). Grime,
Hodgson and Hunt (1988) have studied grassland species near Sheffield and classified them
as competitors, stress tolerators or ruderals (opportunistic weeds) or a combination. Stress
tolerators tolerate soil of low fertility - if fertilizer is added plants with competitive
strategies will grow quickly and displace them. The indicator species list includes 22
species which they studied and 18 of these are either stress tolerators or a combination of
stress tolerator and another strategy. The exceptions are Filipendula ulmaria which is
Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire 1 39
recorded as a competitor/competitor ruderal and Hypochaeris radicata, Lathyrus pratensis
and Prunella vulgaris which have a central combination of all three strategies.
Table 6 shows how many constant species each of the five main NVC types have and
how many ol the constant species are actually England Field Unit indicator species. (See
the appendix for notes on the NVC communities.) MG3 and MG5 have fewer indicator
species as constant species than the non-mesotrophic grassland types (only 4 and 1 as
compared with 6, 6, and 7). The subcommunities of MG3 and MG5 do have slightly higher
values than their parent communities, but still not as high as CG2, CG8 and M26b.
However when the total list of species to be found in the NVC types is examined, MG3 and
MG5 score well (25 and 23) compared with CG2 (18) CG8 (20) and M26b (25). Whether
considering the number of constant species or the total species list. M26b scores highly for
indicator species. It is a vegetation type to be valued in the Dales.
During the period of five years between the two surveys a significant amount of high
grade neutral grassland was lost. Approximately 12% of this already scarce resource was
lost due to management. It is almost five years since the second survey was carried out.
The data from the second survey would form a good basis for a repeat survey to determine
whether loss of species diversity is continuing.
TABLE 6
Indicator species and NVC communities.
NVC
Type
Number of
constant
species
Number of
constant
species that are
indicator
species
Number of
indicator
species that
occur at least
occasionally
Number of
rare indicator
species
CG2
13
6
18
2
CG8
16
6
20
2
MG3
15
4
25
9
MG3a
15
5
25
2
MG3b
19
4
20
2
MG5
10
1
23
i
MG5a
13
1
23
1
MG5b
14
2
20
1
MG5c
17
4
14
1
M26b
19
7
25
2
Acknowledgements
The field work was carried out whilst working for English Nature. I would like to thank Dr
Peter Welsh and the English Nature staff at the Leybum Office for their support, the people
who carried out the original EFU and YDNP Phase 1 surveys, all the land owners who
allowed me access to survey their land, and the Department of Environmental Science at
Bradford University for facilities and advice, and more particularly Mr Stewart Davidson.
Dr Jean Dixon and Prof. Mark Seaward.
References
Allinson. J. M. (1992) Richmondshire (outside YDNP) Grassland and Phase I Survey
1989/ 1991 . English Nature Internal Report, Leybum.
Allinson, J. M. ( 1992) Craven (outside YDNP) Phase I Survey 1990-1991. English Nature
Internal Report. Leybum.
Allinson, J. M. and Shorrock. E. (1989) Settle Carlisle Railway Survey. Craven
Conservation Group Internal Report. Settle.
140 Status of Species Rich Neutral Grassland in Western North Yorkshire
Barr, C. J. et al. (1993) Countryside Surx'ey 1990: Main Report. Countryside 1990 series,
volume 2. Prepared for DOE by the Institute of Freshwater Ecology and the Institute of
Terrestrial Ecology. HMSO.
Clapham, A. R., Tutin, T. G. and Moore, D. M. (1987) Flora of the British Isles.
Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Drewitt, A. (1991) The Vegetation of the Yorkshire Dales National Park. YDNP Technical
Services, Grassington.
Grime, J. P., Hodgson, J. G. and Hunt, R. (1988) Comparative Plant Ecology. Oxford
University Press/Unwin Hyman, London.
Malloch, A. J. C. (1990) MATCH , a computer program to aid the assignment of vegetation
data to the communities and subcommunities of the National Vegetation Classification.
University of Lancaster, Lancaster.
NCC (1982) Yorkshire Grasslands: A Botanical Survey of Hay Meadows within the
Yorkshire Dales National Park. England Field Unit Project No. 10. Nature Conservancy
Council, Banbury.
NCC (1984) Nature Conservation in Great Britain: Summary of Objectives and Strategy.
Nature Conservancy Council, London.
Rodwell, J. S. (1991) British Plant Communities: Volume 2: Mires and Heaths. Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge.
Rodwell, J. S. ed. (1992) British Plant Communities: Volume 3: Grassland and Montane
Communities. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Smith, R. S. and Rushton, S. P. (1994) The effect of grazing management on the vegetation
of mesotrophic (meadow) grassland in Northern England. Journal of Applied Ecology
31: 13-24.
Stace, C. A. (1991) New Flora of the British Isles , Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge.
Stewart, A. and Drewitt, A. (1989) Botanical Survey of the Yorkshire Dales National Park
(N. Yorks.) 1985-1988. Internal Report of NCC/YDNP Leybum.
Appendix
The National Vegetation Classification was written to help people communicate with each
other about Britain’s vegetation using a standard national system. The text in the NVC
chapters link the many other different systems that have been used in the past with the
NVC system. Vegetation is a continuum and many field communities lie midway between
several NVC types, which can make their classification difficult, but it is worth the effort so
that everyone can use the same system. English Nature try to have good representation of
certain NVC types in their system of Sites of Special Scientific Interest.
The definition of species rich neutral grassland in this survey has come to have a wider
meaning than simply those communifies in Rodwell’s Mesotrophic grassland chapter. It
has come to include all vegetation types except woodland that have a high number of
indicator species.
A comparison of the main NVC types found in species rich grassland in the survey areas
is given below. In NVC terminology a constant species is one which occurred four or five
times out of five when 2m x 2m quadrats were placed in the original communities used to
define the NVC types. The species in the title are constant species but do not always occur in
the communities as found in the field. Nomenclature is according to Clapham et al. (1987).
MG3: Anthoxanthum odoratum - Geranium sylvaticum meadow and pasture (species
rich traditionally managed Dales Hay Meadow). Alchemilla glabra, Sanguisorba
officinalis, Cerastium fontanum and Conopodium majus are those species which are
constant species for this communty but are uncommon in the other communities listed
here. Many other species of Alchemilla also occur in MG3.
MG5: Centaurea nigra - Cynosurus cristatus meadow and pasture (species rich
traditionally managed Lowland Meadow). There is a wide range of species but no constant
that does not grow in abundance in at least one of the other communities.
Book Reviews
141
CG2: Festuca ovina - Avenula pratensis grassland.
CG8: Sesleria albicans — Scabiosa columbaria grassland.
Both these calcicolous grassland types have the following constant species: Pimpinella
saxifraga, Avenula pratensis , Sanguisorba minor, Koeleria macrantha, Linum catharticum,
Scabiosa columbaria and Thymus praecox. CG2 does not have Sesleria albicans and it has
much less Centaurea nigra than CG8.
M26b: Molinia caerulea — Crepis paluciosa mire, Festuca rubra subcommunity. This is
species rich wet grassland noticeable for constants: Valeriana dioica, Succisa pratensis,
Carex pa nice a, often with further constants: Geum rivale, Stachys betonica, Filipendula
ulmaria and Briza media. Molinia caerulea and Crepis paludosa were rare in the current
survey.
M22: Juncus subnodulosus - Cirsium palustre fen meadow. In North Yorkshire Juncus
subnodulosus is very uncommon and is approaching the NW edge of its distribution in
Britain.
M27: Filipendula ulmaria - Angelica sylvestris mire.
BOOK REVIEWS
The European Garden Flora. Volume IV. Dicotyledons (Part II), Dilleniaceae to
Leguminosae. Edited by S. M. Walters et al. Pp. xviii + 602. Sponsored by The Royal
Botanic Garden, Edinburgh, The Royal Horticultural Society, London and The Stanley
Smith Horticultural Trust, Cambridge. Cambridge University Press. 1995. £95.00.
It is not surprising that the latest volume of this prestigious work has taken six years to
appear since its predecessor as it covers some of the largest and most problematic plant
families, such as Cruciferae, Rosaceae and Saxifragaceae. The impeccably high standard set
by previous volumes (see Naturalist 111: 144, 1986 and 115: 20, 1990) is fully maintained,
not only in terms of style and content, but also usefulness; furthermore, this particular
volume, the most substantial to date (covering 32 families), contains a revised key to all the
families of the Dicotyledons.
A major feature of this work is its intelligibility, not only to professional botanists but to
all those seriously interested in horticultural plants. As well as succinct taxonomic
descriptions of families, of genera and of each plant based on the highest scientific
standards, the work is also of considerable practical importance in providing keys to specific
level; where difficult plant groups are involved, the text is complemented in many instances
with line drawings of diagnostic details. In addition, each plant entry includes one or more
references to other published descriptions and at specific level in almost all cases users are
directed to the best published illustration. Brief notes on soil preferences and other cultural
requirements are generally provided.
This is without question one of the key botanical works published this century and will
provide a major reference source for many decades to come. Although the price will
preclude many individuals from owning personal copies of this seminal work, they should
make every effort to encourage libraries and academic institutions throughout the country to
acquire a set. VAH
'Scarce Plants in Britain compiled and edited by A. Stewart, D. A. Pearman and
C. D. Preston. Pp. 515, with 404 maps. Joint Nature Conservation Committee,
Peterborough. 1994. £34.00 plus £3.00 postage & packing from: Natural History Book
Service Ltd., 2-3 Wills Road, Totnes. Devon TQ9 5XN.
The British flora is probably the best studied in all the world, and as a consequence of
the long and distinguished history of plant recording it is possible to monitor changes in
142
Book Reviews
it quantitatively.
The present work provides a detailed state-of-the-art interpretation of the present status of
325 species of ferns and flowering plants here defined as ‘scarce’. This catalogue
complements the British Red Data Book: I Vascular Plants by F. H. Perring and L. Farrell
(1977. 2nd ed. 1983) in recognising plants which some botanists would accomodate in a
"Pink’ Data Book. The species included occur in only 16 to 100 of the 10km x 10km grid
squares and in many cases are certainly declining due to general habitat destruction,
particularly of grassland, heathland and wetland, through farming and industrial practices,
and urban encroachment.
Such catalogues are only made possible by long-term fieldwork, carried out in this case
by many individuals, including more than 1,100 members of the Botanical Society of the
British isles, and by the careful collation of their data by the National Biological Records
Centre. The succinct yet informative texts which accompany the detailed species maps and
calculations have been prepared by 102 contributors, who, together with the editors and
publishers have produced a volume worthy of this country’s botanical endeavour. iviRDS
The Naturalist in Britain. A Social History by David Elliston Allen. Pp. xx + 270, with
numerous line drawings and b/w plates. Princeton University Press. 1994. £11.95
paperback.
A welcome return of an old favourite. This much acclaimed work by David Allen, first
published in 1976, has been out of print for many years and indeed was always difficult to
obtain in North America and other countries. Although concerned solely with British natural
history, which is unique in terms of its long and remarkable history, this original and
scholarly work will now be appreciated by many botanical historians worldwide.
This republication under a respected American imprint now has a different format in
terms of its typography, layout and illustrations (usually larger); as to new content, however,
the author provides only a 1-page preface. Such a definitive work, which covers the period
up to the early part of the 20th century, could hardly have been improved upon, but perhaps
the opportunity should have been taken to provide at least a list of additional sources of
published information in a subject area which has greatly increased in popularity over the
past two decades - in large measure the result of David Allen’s pioneering achievement.
MRDS
Beneath the Lakeland Fells: Cumbria’s Mining Heritage by The Cumbria Amenity
Trust Mining History Society. Pp. 192, including 132 b/w photographs, and 6 distribution
maps. Red Earth Publications 1992. £10.
Anyone who takes an interest in the Lake District landscape or the history of British mining
will find this book of more than passing interest. It consists of eight thematic chapters, each
one devoted to the production of a particular mineral. Each section has been written by
enthusiasts who have distilled their specialist knowlede to create fascinating, informative
accounts of the history and relicts of the Lake District’s mining activity. Chapters are
devoted to copper, wad (graphite), slate, iron, wolfram (tungsten), lead and zinc, coal and
barytes and there is a useful glossary and bibliography.
Each section is illustrated with a wealth of large photographs depicting present day relicts
or scenes from the past when active mineral working was taking place. Collectively, the
photographs and accompanying text provide an insight to the world of stopes, cross-cuts,
kibbles, buddies and other mining operations which once permeated the Lakeland fells and
supported many of the villages which present day tourists frequent. As the relicts from the
Lake District’s industrial past are progressively being swept away, this book is especially
welcome, by providing a clear record of the past with first class illustrations or items which
are inaccessible to the normal visitor but vital if we are to fully interpret the present
landscape.
143
ASSASSIN-FLIES OR ROBBER-FLIES (DIPTERA: ASILIDAE)
OF YORKSHIRE, WITH NOTES ON RECORDS FROM
OTHER AREAS OF NORTHERN ENGLAND
PETER SKIDMORE
169 Carr House Road, Doncaster DN4 5 DP
AND ANDREW GRAYSON
‘ Victoria Cottage’ , 39 Piercy End, Kirkbymoorside, York Y06 6DQ
There have been enormous advances worldwide in the study of Diptera since Skidmore
(1966) published his account of the Asilidae of northern England and our knowledge of
many families of flies in Yorkshire is such that the likelihood of discovering additional
species in the county is very remote: the Asilidae is one such family.
Being essentially insects of warmer climates, the asilid fauna of Britain is extremely
poor, there being a mere 27 British species compared with over 160 in France. Even in the
vicinity of Calais, several species are found which do not occur in Britain. Fourteen asilids
are known from Yorkshire, and the richest localities so far discovered in the county are
Hatfield Moor and Rossington Bridge with eight and nine recorded species respectively, a
total of eleven in all for the two sites.
The biology and ecology of almost all of our native species is fairly well known, thanks
to the superb study by Melin (1923) on the Swedish asilid fauna. These aspects are
discussed in Skidmore (1966), to which the reader is referred for further study. Suffice to
say here that apart from Laphriinae, comprising three British species of Laphria, all other
British asilids have terrestrial larvae which require sandy or very light soils. This fact
renders many areas completely inimical to these flies, which is strikingly demonstrated by
much richer faunas on sandy heaths compared with acidic peat bogs. Similarly, whilst
some species occur on the Carboniferous limestone of the Yorkshire and Derbyshire dales,
none will be found on the blanket bogs overlying the areas of Millstone Grit between.
Only one further British species is at all likely to be found in Yorkshire, namely Dioctria
oelandica (Linnaeus). This is known from all the adjoining counties except Lincolnshire. It
is an extremely conspicuous fly with deep metallic bluish or purplish wings and orange
legs. It is most commonly encountered in calcareous woodlands, where it often hunts from
hazel leaves on the edges of paths or clearings.
In the following review of species, the abbreviations etc. given in square brackets after
the species name indicate the additions needed to update the table in Skidmore (1966).
Asilus crabroniformis Linnaeus [add NR] There has been one further record of this
^species from northern England where it is now probably extinct. Mr K. G. Payne recalls
-seeing the species at Skipwith Common in the late 1940s. Drake (1991) notes that it has
not been seen recently in East Anglia, where it was formerly widespread, and that it now
appears to be declining south-eastwards. This very large fly is so spectacular that it could
be recognised in the field by any observant countrylover. The only other known Yorkshire
record is from Cloughton (anon, in Walsh & Rimington 1956). Excellent illustrations are
given in Colyer and Hammond (1951) and Chinery (1986).
Dysmachus trigonus (Meigen) [add NR and Cu] In Yorkshire, this species occurs on
the sandy areas east of Doncaster, in the East Riding and along the coast. It is not however
a common species in the county. (5 June to 17 July).
61 Allerthorpe, WJF: Hotham. 1.7.1971. RC: Kilnsea Warren. 17.7.1948. 16.6.1951,
21.6.1951. 15.7.1952. WDH & SS: Spurn. 19.6.1947, CAC.
62 Redcar, 11.6.1921, ?CAC; Sandbum Woods, 22.6.1929, WDH. (in coll.
Manchester Museum).
63 Bamby Dun (Station Wood), 2.6.1988, JTB; Hatfield Lings, 6.1974, 20.5.1988,
JTB; Lindholme Moraine, 7.1991, PS; Martin Beck Wood, 19.6.1920, CAC &
Naturalist 120 (1995)
144 Assassin-flies or Robber-flies (Diptera: Asilidae) of Yorkshire
WJF; Rossington Bridge. 6.1987, PS.
Epitriptus cingulatus (Fabricius) [add WR, Dm, W, Nd] Records suggest that this is a
very scarce fly in Yorkshire, but it is certainly overlooked. The only records to hand
include two of the richest known sites for asilids in the county. (1 to 24 August).
61 Allerthorpe, WJF; Dryham, North Cave (44/87-32-), 1 1.7.1953, KGP.
63 Rossington Bridge, 12.8.1987, PS, 24.8.1987, 1.8.1988, JTB; Pot Hill (Sandall
Beat Wood, Doncaster), 22.8.1987, JTB; /Houghton Common, 1994, JDC.
[E. cowini Hobby Add Wales, Ireland.]
[Eutolmus RU fib arbis (Meigen) has not been seen again in Lincolnshire, but it probably
occurs in the southern part. It has been taken in numbers in the Brecklands of East Anglia
in recent years (Drake, 1991).]
Machimus atricapillus (Fallen) [add WR, NR, Nd, Scotland] Although a typical species
of calcareous uplands, this is a rather eurytopic asilid which has been taken by Peter
Skidmore on sandy heath at Rossington Bridge, and in birch and oak forest at Tummel
Bridge (Perthshire). Although fairly common in Derbyshire, it has not yet been recorded
from the Yorkshire Dales. (2 July to 6 September).
61 Burdale (44/86-62-), 12.8.1990, AG; Dryham, 11.7.1953, KGP; Forden Bank
N.R., 7.8.1971, JHF; North Grimston, 16.8.1975, JHF; Pocklington, 1.8.1936,
CAC; 44/820557, 6.5.1957, DHS.
62 Ashberry Pasture (44/56-84-), 12.7.1992, 19.7.1992, AG; Cropton (44/75-89-),
15.9.1934, AS, det. AG; Elleron (44/78-90-), 17.7.1991, 29.7.1992, 14.8.1993,
AG; Scar Wood (44/854849), 17.7.1985, MO; Ellerbum Bank, Thornton Dale,
(44/85-85-), 1.8.1981, KGP, 23.8.1990, AG; Blaiskey Bank (44/62-88-),
14.7.1991, 28.7.1991, AG; Wombleton, 5.8.1940, ?CAC; Goathland (45/82-01-),
22.7.1979, WAE; Pickering (44/800850), 16.8.1986, GWK.
63 Anston Stones Wood, 8.1967, PS, 6.9.1975, 8.7.1979, WAE; Lindrick Common
(43/54-82-), 2.7.1986, 15.7.1986, 21.7.1986, 15.9.1986, SJH; Little Stones (43/52-
83-), 7.7.1982, SJH; Melton Wood, 8.1972, WGD; Roche Abbey (43/53-90-),
24.7.1986, 23.9.1986, SJH; Rossington Bridge, 8.1985, PS; Smeaton Leys,
31.7.1927, CAC.
64 Leeds district, WDH; Wood Hall, 14.7.1948, WDH, (in coll. Manchester Museum,
probably the Leeds district record).
[M. RUSTICUS (Meigen) may occur in southern Lincolnshire, as it has been taken in
Northamptonshire (Drake, 1991).]
Neoitamus cyanurus (Loew) [add Li, D, Cu, Ireland] A characteristic species of broad-
leaved woods, but sometimes occurring, perhaps as strays, in open country, or even in town
or suburban gardens. It has been reported indoors, and even on board a ship in the Humber
(Eades 1994), showing that it has considerable powers of dispersal. It has been found at 25
lowland Yorkshire ‘sites’ as far north as Hovingham, and is abundant on the heathland of
Skipwith and Strensall Commons. It may prove to be a frequent species throughout
lowland Yorkshire, and it is one of the few asilids recorded from Ireland. On 28.5.1994,
Peter Skidmore found a teneral female with pupal case still attached, on Mercurialis under
Corylus at Minigaff (Galloway). (30 May to 5 October). Yorkshire localities additional to
those given in Skidmore (1966) are as follows.
61 Allerthorpe, 2.7.1945, WDH, 30.6.1984, RC; Skipwith Common (44/66-37-),
4.7.1991. 27.7.1991, 12.8.1991, AG.
62 Malton Road, York, (44/62-54-), 11.6.1943, AS, det. AG; Strensall Common
(44/6—6—), 1942, RW, det. AG, 9.7.1991, 16.7.1991, 23.7.1991, AG; Sutton on
Forest (44/58-64-). 28.6.1942, AS, det. AG.
Assassin-flies or Robber-flies (Diptera: Asilidae) of Yorkshire 145
65 Doncaster Museum (in foyer), 11.7.1983, PS; Hatfield Moor and Lindholme
Moraine, (very common), 6-10.1991, PS; Hurst Wood, Rossington, 1.7.1973, PS;
Pot Riding Wood, Cadeby, 6.7.1968, PS; Rossington Bridge, 6-7. 1985, PS,
30.5.1988, JTB.
64 Acomb, York (44/57-50- ), 23.6.1943, AS, det. AG.
Philonicus albiceps (Meigen) [delete D; add ER, Nd, IM] There are three known
Yorkshire breeding sites tor this coastal sand dune species. It was first taken in the county
at Spurn by Dr R. H. Meade over a century ago, and was found to be still abundant on the
sand dunes by Andrew Grayson on 15.7.1992 and 22.7.1992. Mr S. Foster recently
reported that it still occurs on the small area of sand dunes at Bridlington. Mr C. Bentley
reported that it was common at Coatham Sands, Redcar (45/571265), during 1991. (3 July
to September).
[Pamponerus germanicus (Linnaeus) (add W)]
[Laphria marginata (Linnaeus) No recent records from localities further north than
Norfolk are given in Drake (1991), and even in the south the species appears to be scarcer
than formerly. |
, Leptogaster cylindrica (Degeer) [add ER, WR. NR. D, W, Wales] In Yorkshire, this
• species is very widespread, frequenting rank grassy areas in lowlands. A very good
illustration appears in Chinery (1986). (16 June to 1 August).
61 Derwent Ings, 1987-9, RC; Kilnsea Warren (several), 17.6.1947, WDH (in Nat.
1953, p. 161); Spurn, 22.7.1953, AB, & (54/41-15-), 15.7.1992, 22.7.1992, AG;
(54/01 -26-), 1945, DHS; (54/02-30-), 19.6.1957, DHS.
62 Ellerbum Bank, 16.6. 1973, JHF; Strensall Common (44/65-61-), 23.6.1992, AG.
63 Smeaton Leas, 31.7.1937, CAC; (44/63-1 5-), 6.1977, PS; High Ellers Carr.
29.6.1977, PS; Bentley Common (Don Banks), 7.7.1976, PS; Potteric Carr,
14.7.1978, 5.7.1980, SF; Armthorpe, JTB; Old Denaby Tip (in large numbers).
4.7.1984, PS; Wilthorpe Marsh (44/33-09-), 1.7.1986, JDC; Carlton Marsh (44/37-
09-), 19.6.1985, 13.7.1986, JDC; Thome Moor, 1946 (Skidmore et al.. 1985);
Rossington Bridge, 30.6.1986. 1.8.1988, JTB; Hatfield Moors, 6-7.1992, PS; Kirk
Sandal 1 Burgey Banks, 7.1992, CAH.
64 Acaster Ings (44/59-44-), 1.7.1950. KGP; Askham Bog (44/57-46-), 12.7.1944.
AS, det. AG; Bolton Percy. 7.1942, WGB; Queen Mary's Dubb. Ripon. 17.6.1934,
?CAC.
L. guttiventris (Degeer) [add Li. WR. NR] In Yorkshire, this species appears to favour
rather better drained areas than the previous one, more often occurring in hilly areas. The
national distribution also reflects this, as it extends to the north of Scotland. (17 June to 14
August).
61 Brantingham, 10.7.1971. RC.
62 Buttercrambe, 22.6.1935. WDH; Rievaulx (viewpoint) (44/56-85-), 17.6.1990,
KGP.
63 Maltby Common. 9.7.1971. PS. 25.6.1972, JHF; Brocodale. 28.7.1968, RC;
Howell Wood (44/43-09-), 14.8.1986. 4.7.1987. JDC; New Park Spring Wood
(44/41-07-), 27.7,1990. JDC; Potteric Carr. 5.7.1977, SF; Hatfield Lings,
20.6.1974, JTB.
64 Ripon area. 7.1937, CM.
Dioctria atricapilla Meigen [add D. SL] Virtually confined to lowland areas of Britain,
this unmistakable black asilid is widespread in the inland lowland areas of Yorkshire.
Although always localised, it often occurs in profusion amongst rank swards of
Arrhenatherum and other coarse grasses, on heathland. along hedgerows and waysides, and
146 Assassin-flies or Robber-flies (Dipteral Asilidaej of Yorkshire
by waterside. The northernmost known site in Britain is at Howe Bridge, on the River Rye
between Malton and Pickering, where it was found to be very abundant amongst tall
grasses on the river bank by Andrew Grayson on 4.7.1993. Records from the Doncaster
area are too numerous to enumerate here. This is the only British Dioctria with entirely
black legs including coxae, and is well portrayed in Chinery (1986), (1 June to 17 July).
61 Allerthorpe, 12.6.1926, WJF, 30.6.1984, RC, (44/75-47-, 44/76-47-, 44/75-48-),
1.7.1984, WAE; (54/057380), 7.7.1955, DHS; (54/01-39-), 1.6.1950, AS, det.
DHS; Derwent Ings, 1987-9, RC; North Duffield Carrs (44/697369), 5.6.1994,
AG; Wheldrake Ings, (44/70-43-), 13.6.1994, AG; Thornton (44/741455),
12.6.1994, AG.
62 Warthill (44/6—5—), 12.6.1948, KGP; Strensall Common (44/6—6—), 2.7.1950,
KGP, (44/64-60-, 44/64-6 1-), 2.6.1992, 9.6.1992, 30.6.1992, AG; Clifton Ings,
(44/58-53-), 17.6.1943, JHE, det. AG; Howe Bridge (44/809761), 4.7.1993, AG.
63 Some 41 sites and over 50 records from Wilthorpe Marsh, Deffer Wood,
Rainborough Park, Catcliffe Marsh and Anston Stones Wood, to the eastern Vice
County boundary from Goole Moor to Kings Wood (Bawtry); dates from 8 June to
17 July.
64 Cock Beck, Stutton, Tadcaster (44/54-42-), 25.6.1950, KGP; Copmanthorpe
(44/6—4—), 28.6.1950, KGP; Acaster Ings (44/59-44-), 1.7.1950, KGP; Acomb
Brick Ponds, York, (44/58-49-), 23.6.1943, JHE, det. AG; Hook Moor, Aberford,
WDH.
65 Boroughbridge, 1942 (ex. Gorham coll, teste CAC).
D. baumhaueri Meigen [add D] This species appears to favour birchwoods in lowland
sandy areas. Like D. atricapilla, it is principally a lowland species in Britain. (27 May to
14 August).
61 Allerthorpe Common, 19.6.1921, WJF, 21.6.1925, CAC, 2.7.1948, WDH, &
30.6.1984, RC; Bubwith, WJF; Barmby Moor, WJF; Dryham (44/87-32-),
1.7.1953, KGP; (44/940268,) 4.7.1965, DHS.
62 Strensall Common (44/64-61-), 9.7.1991, 16.7.1991, 14.8.1991, 27.5.1992, AG.
63 Cortonwood Colliery, 5.7.1988, JDC; Doncaster area - many records from Potteric
Carr, Hatfield Moors, Hatfield Lings, Bamby Dun, Acomb Farm, Armthorpe,
Sandall Beat N.R., Rossington Bridge, and Blaxton Common.
D cothurnata Meigen [add WR, NR] Skidmore (1960) suggested that this fly should
occur in northern England, and two Yorkshire records have now come to light. This is the
only British Dioctria with a silvery thoracic marking restricted to the upper margin of the
pleurae: all other British Dioctria have far more extensive and conspicuous inverted V or U
shaped silvery thoracic markings on the pleurae. N.B. The female can be very easily
mistaken for D. rufipes in the field; moreover, the key in Oldroyd (1969) will not work for
female D. cothurnata , because the legs are almost wholly orange, as in D. rufipes.
62 Thornton Bank, 27.7.1980, JHF.
64 Acaster Ings (river bank) (44/59-44-), 4.7.1953, KGP.
D. linearis (Fabricius) [add WR, D] This species is probably most often found in older
woodlands in calcareous areas, and in such situations it can sometimes occur in quantity.
The most northerly locality known for this species in Britain is at Temple Newsam. (5 June
to 19 August).
63 Pot Riding Wood, Cadeby, 6.7.1968, PS (in Nat. 1969, p. 16), many dates since to
6.7.1986, PS, 29.6-27.7.1988, 23.6-19.7.1989, WAE; Shirley Pool, 6.1971, PS.
7.1971, SF, 22.6.1975, WAE; Rushy Moor, 1.7.1979, SF; Edlington Wood,
19.8.1971, PS; Cusworth Park, 13.7.1974, PS; (44/63-1 5-), 7.1977, PS; Hatfield
Moor (eastern wooded edge, west of Lindholme Lake), 6.1992, PS; Old Spring
Wood (43/53-8 1-), 14.8.1977, JEA and PGS; Howell Wood (44/43-09-),
147
Assassin-flies or Robber-flies (Dipteral Asilidae) of Yorkshire
15.7.1986, JDC; Hugset Wood (44/306070), 5.8.1985, JDC; Kiveton Park, (43/5—
8—), WAE; Bretton Lakes (44/27-1 2-), 5.6.1993, JDC.
64 Avenue Wood, Temple Newsam, 7.1977, PS.
D. rufipes (Degeer) (add Wales] Generally regarded as our commonest asilid, this
is certainly the most frequently recorded, and the most eurytopic. Yorkshire records are
too numerous to enumerate here, as it has been recorded many times from all five
vice-counties, and ranges from Bawtry to Ecclesfield, Almondbury (Huddersfield),
Austwick, Richmond, Middleton in Teesdale (VC 65) and Spurn Point (VC 61). (21 May
to 17 July).
Leptarthrus brevirostr/S (Meigen) [add ER, WR, D] This is our only asilid which
favours upland areas and hence occurs widely in the more northern and western parts of
Britain; indeed it is the only asilid known from the Western Isles of Scotland. The
Yorkshire records also show this preference for more elevated areas. Like all asilids with
terrestrial larvae however, it avoids acidic or heavy soils. It is fairly common in the
Derbyshire Dales. (6 June to 21 August).
61 Kiplingcoates (44/41-93-), 3.7.1977, JHF, 18.7.1981. KGP; Admiral Plantation
area (44/82-58-), 21.6.1980, WAE; Cat Babbleton (dewpond) (54/002745),
22.6.1985, RC & GWK; Potter Brompton, (wood edge on chalk) (44/9 — 7 — ),
21.6.1986, RC; Burdale (44/86-62-), 29.6.1991. AG.
62 Beck Hole, Goathland. 17.6.1968, HMR; Fylinghall, 26.6.1929. WJF, (in Walsh &
Rimington, 1956); Ellerburn Bank (44/853847), 21.6.1986, GWK. 6.6.1990, AG;
(44/79-63-), 3.7.1958. DHS; Ashberry Pasture (44/56-84-), 21.6.1992. 27.6.1992.
AG.
63 Lindrick Common (43/54-82-), 16.6,1986, 3.7.1986, SJH.
64 Grassington 21.8.1920, RB (in Nat. 1921, p. 411); Hetchell Wood (44/3 — 4 — ),
1.7.1976, JHF (limestone grassland), 23.6.1986, RC.
Lasiopogon C1NCTUS (Fabricius) [add WR. NR. W. Wales] In stark contrast to the
previous species, this requires warm sandy heaths and sand dunes. Its most northerly
known localities in eastern Britain are in the Scarborough district and at Pilmoor. (7 May to
July).
61 Allerthorpe, many records from 7.5.1921 to 22.5.1929. WJF, 21.6.1925, CAC.
13.6.1994, AG; Skipwith, 24.6.1923. CAC; Seamer, 14.6.1943. anon.
62 Pilmoor, 16.5.1948, ?CAC; Strensall Common (44/65-62-), 10.6.1956. KGP
(44/64-6 1-). 14.6.1994, AG; Scarborough (in Nat. 1957, p. 23); Staxton sandpits,
(in Walsh & Rimington. 1956).
63 Hatfield Lings, 21.5.1975, 20.5.1988, JTB; Rossington Bridge, several dates in
5.1985, PS, 6.5.1988. JTB; Lindholme Moraine and Hatfield Moor N.R. (44/70-
06-), 7.1991. PS; Pot Hill (Sandall Beat Wood, Doncaster), 12.5.1988, JTB;
Bamby Dun (Station Wood), 2.6.1988. JTB. Lindrick Common (43/54-82-),
27.6.1986, DW.
Acknowledgments
Thanks are offered to all of the following who have submitted records; J. E. Addey,
C. Bentley, J. T. Bum. J .D. Coldwell. R. Crossley, W. G. Dye, W. A. Ely, J. H. Flint,
S. Foster, S. J. Hayhow, C. A. Howes. G. W. King. M. Oates. K. G. Payne. D. H. Smith.
P. G. Stenton and D. Whiteley. The names of other collectors and determiners whose
initials appear in the text are W. G. Bramley, A. Brindle. R. Butterfield. C. A. Cheetham.
J. H. Elliott, W. J. Fordham, W. D. Hincks, C. Morley. H. M. Russell. S. Shaw, A. Smith
and R. Wagstaffe.
148
Obituary
References
Chinery, M. (1986) Collins Guide to the Insects of Britain and Western Europe. Collins,
London.
Colyer, C. N. and Hammond, C. O. (1951) Flies of the British Isles. Wayside & Woodland.
Wame, London.
Drake, C. M. (1991) Provisional Atlas of the Larger Brachycera ( Diptera ) of Britain and
Ireland. Institute of Terrestrial Ecology, Monks Wood Experimental Station,
Huntingdon.
Eades, R. (1994) Assassin Fly, Neoitamus cyanurus, on board ship in Humber estuary.
Bull. Y.N.U. 22: 28.
Falk, S. J. (1991) A Review of the Scarce and Threatened Flies of Great Britain (Part 1 ).
Nature Conservancy Council, Peterborough.
Grayson, A. (1994) Flies in the Yorkshire Museum. Yorkshire Museum, York.
Melin, D. (1923) Contributions to the Biology, Metamorphosis and Distribution of the
Swedish Asilids. Zool. Bidrag. 8, Uppsala.
Oldroyd, H. (1969) Diptera Brachycera, section (a) Tabanoidea and Asiloidea. Handbk.
Ident. Br. Ins. 9(4): 1-132.
Seguy, E. (1927) Dipteres Brachyceres (Asilidae). Faune de France 17: 1-190.
Skidmore, P. (1966) Asilidae (Diptera) of Northern England. Entomologist's Record J . Var.
78: 230-235 & 257-266.
Walsh, G. B. & Rimington, W. (1956) The Natural History of the Scarborough District.
2 vols. Scarborough Field Naturalists’ Society, Scarborough.
OBITUARY
S. MAURICE JACKSON
(1914-1995)
S. Maurice Jackson, the YNU Recorder for Lepidoptera since 1962, died on the 6th June
1995. One of the finest Yorkshire lepidopterists this century, he was wholly dedicated to
his subject, of which his knowledge was outstanding. Bom in Selby, the youngest of four
children, he attended Drax Grammar School. During the Second World War he served in
the Royal Signals and landed in Normandy shortly after D-day. He received the Imperial
Service Medal in 1978.
Apart from travels throughout the country, preferably by rail, Maurice’s observations
and collecting were particularly concentrated on localities in the Vale of York. His
fieldwork included beating for larvae and these he speedily identified; he was also very
knowledgeable about larval foodplants. He was convinced that sites affected by the
Industrial Revolution had never subsequently recovered the species diversity revealed by
earlier records. He much welcomed having reports on or observations of any species, and
he could always give a very informed and up to date reply to any question on macro-
lepidoptera. Although it might at first have seemed nearly all his knowledge was concerned
with his chosen subject, he was quite well informed on curre'nt affairs. He had an interest,
together with some ability, in both classical and light music. Attendance at YNU field
meetings was infrequent but he loyally supported the indoor ones. His very fine and
comprehensive lepidoptera collection has now been presented to Doncaster Museum; to
view this will be a most rewarding experience.
P. G. Tannett
THE MELITTID AND MEGACHILID BEES
(HYMENOPTERA: MELITTIDAE AND MEGACHILIDAE)
OF WATSONIAN YORKSHIRE
149
MICHAEL E. ARCHER
17 Elmfield Terrace, Malton Road, York Y03 OEH
Currently there are thirteen species of megachilid and one species of melittid bees present
in Watsonian Yorkshire. The megachilid bees consist of the genera Chelostoma (Carpenter
bee, one species), Osmia (Mason bees, three species). Megachile (Leaf-cutting bees, five
species) and Coelioxys (Cuckoo bees, four species). This paper will provide a review of the
Yorkshire species from a verified data-base including a history of the records.
The melittid bee, Melitta leporina, is a black coloured bee with brown hairs covering the
head and thorax and narrow bands of brown hairs on the gastral terga. The apex of the
gaster bears black hairs. M. leporina looks like many of the Andrena bees but differs in that
the female lacks pollen-retaining hairs at the base of the hind legs and adjacent thoracic
region. Pollen-retaining hairs are present on the hind tibiae. Distinctive features are the
enlarged claw segment at the ends of the feet and the apical segment of the antennae is
truncate, appearing as if the tip of the segment had been cut off.
The megachilid bees are black or metallic coloured bees covered by black, brown or red
hair. A distinctive feature of the female is the presence of pollen-retaining hairs on the
ventral side of the gaster rather than on the hind legs. The cuckoo bees do not have pollen-
retaining hairs. The carpenter bee has a distinctive, narrow, elongated gaster. The female
cuckoo bee can be distinguished by its acutely-pointed gaster apex, while the male cuckoo
bee has a number of tooth-like projections at the end of the gaster. The Yorkshire mason
bee species all show a blue or bronze metallic colouration. A distinctive feature of the leaf-
cutter bee is the absence of a foot pad which normally lies between the two claws at the
end of each leg.
Some of the megachilid bees are found in gardens collecting pollen or nectar from the
flowers. The leaf-cutters cut out leaf segments from the roses while mason bees, such as O.
rufa, inspect the surfaces of sun-exposed walls for crevices in which to nest.
There are no up-to-date keys for the melittid and megachilid bees but Willimer (1985)
gives keys to the bee genera and Saunders (1896) gives keys to the species. Perkins (1925)
gives keys to the species of Megachile.
I Life Cycles
In Watsonian Yorkshire, all the melittid and megachilid bee species pass through one
generation a year, i.e. show univoltinism. Adults are mainly active from May until August,
with most records from June and July and a few records from April and September (Table
6). Chelostoma and Osmia species tend to be active from May until July and Megachile
later, from June until August.
Characteristics of the nesting sites are given in the species accounts. The vertical burrow
of Melitta leporina has several lateral projecting cells made from soil so that the cells tend
to be separated from each other. Each cell is lined with a waxy layer secreted by the
female.
The cells of the megachilid nest are in contact with each other and usually the cells occur
in rows separated from each other with a variety of collected materials. The cells of Osmia
species are separated by a green mastic material made by chewing plant material, except
for O. rufa, where the cells are separated by a paste made of soil and saliva. The cells of
Chelostoma florisomne also are separated by a paste made of soil and saliva. The cells of
Megachile species are made from circular and oval cut pieces of leaves, often cut from
roses. The species of Coelioxys are cleptoparasites, usually on Megachile species but also
on Anthophora species.
Naturalist 120 (1995)
150
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
The cells of melittid and megachilid bees are mass provisioned with pollen and nectar.
An egg is laid on the pollen-nectar ball, on which the hatched larva feeds in a closed cell.
The female of Coelioxys uses its pointed gaster to penetrate its host cell so that its egg is
laid on the cell wall or near the egg of its host. On hatching, the larva of Coelioxys destroys
the host’s egg or young larva, after which it eats the host’s pollen-nectar mass. Species of
Chelostoma and Megachile overwinter in the mature larval stage, while species of Osmia
overwinter in the cells as adults.
Williams (1972) and O’Toole (1989) give further biological information besides
showing how the aerial nesting species can be reared in trap-nests.
Historical Account
Work on the Yorkshire melittid and megachilid bees started with Smith (1852, 1855, 1891)
who discovered seven species: Chelostoma leporina, Osmia rufa (as O. bicornis),
Megachile centuncularis, M. circumcincta, Coelioxys quadridentata, C. rufescens and C.
vectis. C. vectis has never been found again and since this species is a cleptoparasite on
Megachile maritima, which has never been found in Yorkshire, the identity of C. vectis
must be considered a misidentification. Perkins in Fordham (1933) also regarded C. vectis
(as C. trigonus) a misidentification.
Roebuck (1878) reported the species of Smith and added six species: Anthidium
manicatum, Osmia caerulescens (as O. aenea), O. leaiana (as O. fulviventris), O.
aurulenta, Megachile willughbiella and Coelioxys elongata. The records of these six
species were based upon marks made in a copy of Smith (1855) by Smith himself, of
species found within a few miles of Woolley, Wakefield. There has been doubt as to
whether these records were based on specimens or on what might be found (Butterfield &
Fordham, 1930). As such these Smith manuscript records are not usually accepted unless
verified by further records. Since Roebuck (1878), two of the six species, A. manicatum
and O. aurulenta , have never been verified.
Roebuck (1907) provided additional records for M. willughbiella and C. elongata and
added C. mandibularis which appears to be another Smith manuscript record. C.
mandibularis has never been verified.
Butterfield & Fordham (1932) provided additional records for O. caerulescens and 0.
leaiana and added M. ligniseca and C. inermis.
This paper adds Melitta leporina and M. versicolor.
The Record Data Base
The 14 species are represented by 425 records from 131 localities in 123 1km squares or 63
10km squares (Table 1). A record is based upon a specimen where the data varies in one of
the following: name, sex, locality and day-date of capture or observation. The author has
seen the specimens of 314 (74%) of the records.
Watsonian Yorkshire may be considered to include, at least in part, 195 10km squares.
Map 1 shows the number of records, and Map 2 the number of species, found in each 10km
square. Records are known from 32% of the 10km squares. No records are known from
Craven, Cleveland and VC65 which includes a part of the Pennines and the northern part of
the Vale of York. Few records are known from the North York Moors, northern pan of the
Yorkshire Wolds and Holdemess, except for Spurn.
Using the number of records per species as a measure of abundance and the number of
lkm squares in which each species occurs as a measure of range for the megachilid
species, a plot of abundance versus range can be made (Fig. 1 ). The correlation coefficient
of 0.94 is a statistically highly significant relationship (p<0.(K)l) indicating that as the
range of a species increases so does its abundance. The regression equation can be
expressed as: Abundance = 1.53 Range + 5.12.
The top twelve localities with either ten or more records or five or more species are
given in Table 2. The sandy localities of Allerthorpc, Strensall and Skipwith Commons
with Spurn have proved to be important localities, as have the wooded clay sites of
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
151
TABLE 1
Records and distributional units of the Melittidae and Megachilidae found in Watsonian
Yorkshire to March 1995.
Species
No.
records
No.
localities
No.
1km
No.
10km
No.
VCs
Melitta leporina
6
6
6
4
2
Chelostoma florisomne
31
15
16
12
3
Osmia caerulescens
29
14
14
11
4
Osmia leaiana
20
18
18
15
4
Osmia rufa
89
61
59
38
4
Megachile centuncularis
40
30
29
24
4
Megachile circumcincta
42
20
20
17
4
Megachile ligniseca
11
5
5
5
3
Megachile versicolor
26
9
9
9
3
Megachile willughbiella
71
37
36
27
4
Coelioxys elongata
42
14
13
12
4
Coelioxys inermis
6
6
6
6
3
Coelioxys quadridentata
8
4
4
4
2
Coelioxys rufescens
4
4
4
4
2
Total
425
131
123
63
4
Duncombe Park and Lindrick Common. The suburban garden site at Heworth, York and
the park at Roundhay, Leeds, indicate that strongly man-controlled habitats can still be
important.
Table 3 shows the number of records known from the ninteenth century and each decade
of the twentieth century. Few records have survived from the nineteenth century (about 3%
FIGURE 1
The abundance versus range of megachilid bees.
152
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
TABLE 2
The localities in Watsonian Yorkshire with either ten or more records or five or more
species of Melittidae nad Megachilidae.
Locality
No. species
No. records
Allerthorpe Common
10
47
He worth, York
6
40
Spurn
6
24
Skipwith Common
5
20
Duncombe Park
4
18
Strensall Common
6
12
Woolley (F. Smith)
10
10
Hatfield Lings
5
9
Thome Moor
5
7
Scarborough
5
6
Whitby
5
6
of the dated records). Most records are from the 1970s and 1980s although there is an
earlier peak of records during the 1920s. The 1920 collectors were W. J. Fordham and J.
Wood working at Allerthorpe Common, R. Butterfield at various localities, D. W. Bevan at
Scarborough, A. E. Bradley at Roundhay Park, Leeds, and F. Rhodes at Bradford.
Table 4 shows the twelve most important collectors of records. Only F. Smith emerges
Map 1
Number of records from each 1 0km square.
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
153
- i
° O
OO OOO O o o O OO OOOO o O ° 00°
r^cocnvj-^.fsgco >ri/>ioc**coa>m»— cm co^
m
NY
7'S
\ t
NZ
tr
T
'6v
J
1
2s
i
1
\
s
i
4
2
2
1
6\
1
i
i
SD
s
1
1
**?
6
1
fl
TA
n
1
1
2
9
2
2
l
//■*
i
■2,
1
4
i
3/
11
1
\
3
4
5
■6
3
1
2
1
\
(
1
■1
-xrf.
;3-
-A-
\
>
1
10
4
1
5-
\
\1'
l6
T
, r~-
3
3
4
12
Jl
SE
\
3
3
2
.3'
\2_
4
.2
4'
SK
^ —
30
500 KM
90
&0
70
60
50
40
30
20
to
400 KM
90
80
70
Map 2
Number of species from each 10km square.
TABLE 3
The time source of records of Melittidae and Megachilidae from Watsonian Yorkshire.
No. records
Previous to 1900
12
1900s
6
1910s
19
1920s
43
1930s
15
1940s
20
1950s
19
1960s
15
1970s
115
1980s
112
1990s
42
t rom the nineteenth century. A heyday of collecting by R. Butterfield. W. J. Forham and J.
,Vood existed in the early part of the twentieth century, followed by only a single collector
i )f note, W. D. Hincks, in the middle of the twentieth century. The late twentieth century
las shown a renewed interest with seven important collectors (Table 4).
Table 5 shows the sources of records with 14.1% from published and unpublished
iterature, 28.7% from museum collections, and 57.2% from private collections or sighted
i ecords. The collections at Manchester, Keighley, Rotherham and Sheffield museums have
154
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
TABLE 4
The names and years of activity of the collectors of Melittidae and Megachildae in
Watsonian Yorkshire with ten or more records
No. records
Years of activity
Archer, M. E.
160
1957-1994
Bum, J. T.
31
1970-1983
Hincks, W. D.
24
1942-1952
Fordham, W. J.*
23
1915-1938
Butterfield, R.*
18
1907-1927
Ely, W. A.
14
1974-1989
Shaw, R.
14
1990-1993
Smith, D. H.
13
1948-1969
Hint, J. H.
10
1965-1981
Riley, T. H.
10
1973-1984
Smith, F.
10
1852-1877
Wood, J.
10
1927-1935
* Some of the records of these collectors are undated
TABLE 5
The sources of records of Melittidae and Megachilidae from Watsonian Yorkshire
No. records
Doncaster Museum
11
Keighley Museum
25
Leeds Museum
5
Manchester Museum
28
Rotherham Museum
21
Scarborough Museum
11
Sheffield Museum
17
York Museum
4
Private collections
238
Sighted records
5
Literature records
60
been particularly important sources of records. I acknowledge my thanks to the curators of
the eight museums and the 39 persons with private collections who have been the sources
of records.
Species Accounts
The information for each species is given in the following order: Biological name; Map
number if given, or if no map is given the 10km squares are given (B = records before
1950, A = records 1950 onwards); Status (Archer, 1993); Seasonal appearance of adults
(Table 6); Relative abundance of each sex (Table 7); Habitat, which is not given for the
cleptoparasites; Nesting site characteristics, which are not given for the cleptoparasites;
Flowers visited; Cleptoparasites or host(s) of cleptoparasites; National status (Archer,
1995), and national seasonal appearance of adults.
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
155
TABLE 6
The seasonal appearance of adults of Melittidae and Megachilidae in Watsonian Yorkshire
April May June July
August
Sept.
Melitta leporina
4 2
Chelostoma florisomne
5 21
4
Osmia caerulescens
10 12
5
0. leaiana
1 10
6
0. rufa
6 40 30
2
Megachile centuncularis
8
20
4
M. circumcincta
27
8
3
M. ligniseca
1
2
5
2
M willughhiella
14
37
14
1
Coelioxys elongata
15
12
9
C. inermis
1
4
t C. quadridentata
6
1
(C. rufescens
1 C
2
TABLE 7
The number of records of the sexes of Melittidae and Megachilidae
from Watsonian Yorkshire
Female
Male
Unknown
Melitta leporina
1
2
3
t Chelostoma florisomne
12
15
4
i Osmia caerulescens
15
12
2
i 9. leaiana
8
4
8
( 0. rufa
29
40
20
Megachile centuncularis
17
17
6
M. circumcincta
17
15
10
M ligniseca
7
2
2
M. versicolor
10
14
2
M. willughhiella
41
23
7
tZoelioxys elongata
21
9
12
C. inermis
3
1
2
iO. quadridentata
3
1
4
(7. rufescens
0
2
2
' ielitta leporina (Panzer, 1799)
k tare; SE50A, SE60A, SK69A, TA04A; July until August; Sandy soils; Subterranean
i tester; Legumes, particularly clover and melilot; Nomada flavopicta (Kirby, 1802);
k Jationally restricted, June until August.
: 'helostoma florisomne (Linnaeus, 1758) (Map 3)
i Jccasional; Mid-May until late July but mainly during June; sexes more-or-less equally
ound; Particularly associated with wooded areas on limestone or chalk; Aerial nester in
ead wood and hollow stems of straws; Visits buttercups; Sapyga sp. and Trichrysis
yanea (Linnaeus, 1758); Nationally universal, April until August.
156
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
Chelostoma florisomne (Linnaeus, 1758).
Map 4
Osmia caerulescens (Linnaeus, 1 758).
157
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
Osmia caerulescens (Linnaeus, 1758) (Map 4)
Occasional; Mid-May until late July but mainly during May and June; sexes more-or-less
iqually found; Often found in gardens; Aerial nester in dead wood and holes in walls;
Visits variety of flowers including legumes and labiates; Sapyga sp.; Nationally universal,
April until August.
Osmia leaiana (Kirby, 1802) (Map 5)
Frequent; Late May until late July but mainly during June and July; Females more
requently found but sample size small; Variety of wooded habitats; Aerial nester in dead
A/ood, holes in walls and earthen banks; Visits variety of flowers including thistles and
agwort; Sapyga sp.; Nationally widespread. May until September.
i Osmia rufa (Linnaeus, 1758) (Map 6)
tFommon; Late April until early July but mainly during May and June; Males more
l requently found; Often found in gardens; Aerial nester in crevices, e.g. dead wood and
‘ loles in walls; Visits variety of flowers including brambles and clover; Nationally
miversal, March until July.
Meachile centuncularis (Linnaeus, 1758) (Map 7)
(Frequent; Early June until mid-August but mainly during July; Sexes equally found; Often
(Found in gardens; Aerial nester in crevices in dead wood and old walls but also in the
ground; Visits variety of flowers including thistles, legumes and brambles; Coelioxys
nermis and C. elongata\ Nationally universal, June until August.
Megachile circumcincta (Kirby, 1802) (Map 8)
(Frequent; Early June until mid-August but mainly during June; Sexes more-or-less equally
Map 5
Osmia leaiana (Kirby, 1802).
158
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
Map 6
Osmia rufa (Linnaeus, 1758).
Map 7
Megachile centuncularis (Linnaeus, 1758).
159
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
Map 8
Megachile circumcincta (Kirby, 1802).
t bund; Particularly associated with sandy soils; Subterranean nester with burrows
branching downwards; Visits variety of flowers including legumes; Coelioxys elongata, C.
ufescens and C. quadridentata ; Nationally universal. May until August.
Meachile ligniseca (Kirby, 1802)
Ware; SE50A, SE63A, SE71A, SE74B, TA08B; June until mid-September but mainly
luring August; Females more frequently found but sample size small; Wooded areas away
t rom human habitation; Aerial nester in dead wood and other crevices; Visits variety of
lowers including thistles; Coelioxys elongata ; Nationally widespread, June until
''September.
Vlegachile versicolor (Smith, 1844) (Map 9)
Occasional; Early June until early September but mainly during August; Sexes more-or-
ess equally found; Wooded areas away from human habitations; Aerial nester in dead
wood; Visits variety of flowers including thistles and legumes; Coelioxys inermis\
'Nationally widespread. May until September.
Megachile willughhiella (Kirby, 1802) (Map 10)
(Frequent; Early June until early September but mainly during July; Females more
frequently found; Often found in gardens; Aerial nester in dead wood, holes in walls but
ilso crevices in the ground; Visits variety of flowers including legumes and campanulas;
Coelioxys elongata, C. rufescens and C. quadridentata'. Nationally universal, June until
September.
Coelioxys elonata Lepeletier, 1841 (Map 1 1)
Occasional; Late June until mid-August; Females more frequently found; Visits variety of
160
The Melitlid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
z
a:
z
Megachile versicolor (Smith, 1844).
Map 10
Megachile willughhiella (Kirby, 1802).
The Melittid and Megachilid Bees ofWatsonian Yorkshire
161
Map 1 1
Coelioxys elongata Lepeletier, 1841.
owers including legumes, field scabious and fleabane; On Megachile centuncularis , M.
rcumcincta, M. ligniseca and M. willughbieila', Nationally universal, June until August.
i oelioxys inermis (Kirby, 1802)
are; SE60A, SE65A, SE70A, SE71A, SE74B, TA08B; Late June until mid-July; Visits
iriety of flowers including legumes and field scabious; On M. circumcincta and M.
rsicolor, Nationally widespread. June until September.
i oelioxys quadridentata (Linnaeus, 1758)
are; SE31B, SE60A. SE74B, TA41A; Mid-June until late July; Visits flowers of legumes,
aths and knapweed; On Anthophora sp.. Megachile circumcincta and M. willughbieila ;
ationally rare (RDB3), June until August.
i oelioxys rufescens Lepeletier & Serville, 1825
ire; SE31B, SE60A, SE74B, TA02B; May until July; Visits flowers of legumes,
abious, bramble & thistles; On Anthophora sp. and Megachile circumcincta: Nationally
despread. May until August.
INFERENCES
cher, M. E. (1993) Recorder’s Fourth Report on the Aculeate Hymenoptera in
Watsonian Yorkshire and thb development of a quality scoring system. Naturalist 118:
13-15.
cher, M. E. (1995) The aculeate wasps and bees (Hymenoptera; Aculeata) of Blaxton
Common in Watsonian Yorkshire with the introduction of a new national quality scoring
system. Naturalist 120: 21-29.
i itterfield, R. and Fordham. W. J. (1930) Aculeate Hymenoptera of Yorkshire. Naturalist
555: 241-246.
1 62 Book Reviews
Butterfield, R. and Fordham, W. J. (1932) Aculeate Hymenoptera of Yorkshire. Naturalist
57:309-311,325-329.
Fordham, W. J. (1933) Further notes on Yorkshire Hymenoptera Aculeata. Naturalist 58:
119-1 20.
O’Toole, C. (1989) Encouraging bees in the garden, in Bees, Wasps and Ants Recording
Scheme. Starter Pack: 4-6.
Perkins, R. C. L. (1925) The British species of Megachile , with descriptions of some new
varieties from Ireland, and a species new to Britain in F. Smith’s collection.
Entomologist’ s mon. Mag. 61: 95-101.
Roebuck, W. D. (1878) Yorkshire Hymenoptera. Part 2. Trans. Yorks. Nat. Un. 1878: 49-
60.
Roebuck, W. D. (1907) Hymenoptera, in Victoria County History of Yorkshire 1: 210-219.
Saunders, E. (1896) The Hymenoptera Aculeata of the British Islands. L. Reeve, London.
Smith, F. (1852) Captures of Hymenoptera in Yorkshire. Zoologist 10: 3625-3626.
Smith, F. (1855) Catalogue of British Hymenoptera in the Collection of the British
Museum. Part 1 . Apidae-Bees. London.
Smith, F. (1891 ) Catalogue of the British Bees in the Collection of the British Museum.
London.
Williams, I. H. (1972) Trap-nesting solitary bees for students of biology. Bee World 53:
123-135.
Willmer, P. (1985) Bees, Ants and Wasps. A key to general of British Aculeates. Field
Studies Council.
BOOK REVIEWS
Provisional Atlas of the Lacewings and Allied Insects (Neuroptera, Megaloptera,
Raphidioptera and Mecoptera) of Britain and Ireland by Colin W. Plant. Pp. 203, with
distribution maps. 1994. Biological Records Centre, Abbots Ripton, Huntingdon. £ 6.50.
This useful book is an essential provisional atlas on lacewings and allied insects of Britain
and Ireland. The lacewing recording scheme is explained and example recording cards are
illustrated. Key identification works are listed, together with notes on record validation and
the author’s address for identification of specimens. A synonymic checklist is included
which will prove invaluable in updating many collections and record databases. Individual
species distribution maps are accompanied by useful notes on distribution, status, habitat,
collecting and seasonal occurrence. The book concludes with an assessment of species
status in relation to the Red Data Book with proposed changes of status for some species.
Annexes cover an extensive bibliography of reference works, a list of museum collections
examined, and literature researched.
SF
Birds of Brazil by Helmut Sick, translated by William Belton. Pp. 703, plus 46 plates.
Princeton University Press, 1993. £70.00.
This book, originally published in Portuguese as Ornithologia Brasileira in 1985 by the
University of Brasilia Press, provides detailed information on one of the world’s richest
avifaunas. It also presents the historic evolution of ornithology in South America’s largest
country, with information on the various facts that have influenced it. Special chapters on
‘Biogeography and speciation’ and ‘An account of Brazilian fossil birds’ have been
prepared by Jurgen Haffer and Herculano Alvarenga respectively, while Sick, who died in
Rio de Janeiro in 1991 at the age of 86, provides an interesting account of bird
vocalisation, one of his areas of interest. In Birds of Brazil the reader will find
Contributors
163
omprehensive descriptions of the 1,653 species found in widely different habitats across
I te country, as well as information on the problems of bird conservation, relating these
ith the nation’s geography. The well prepared plates give an accurate view of many of
lese species, which are some of the world’s most fascinating birds. Strongly
commended to those interested in birds and their behaviour.
WLF
CONTRIBUTORS
bbott, P. P. 76
Ulinson, J. M. 125-141
ndrews, M. 84
ngus, R. B. 79, 81-82, 84
rcher, M. E. 21-29, 149-162
rmstrong, P. H. 65-75
therden, M. A. 86-87, 92, 124
lackbum, J .M. 79,80-81
lockeel, T. L. 78, 85-86
fnicken, E. 43, 123
« )ok, P. J. 36-39
o)tton, D. E. 142
•ackles, F. E. 39-40, 119-120
r oss, T. 75
rcossley, R. 111-114
aivis, A. J. 109-111
fjlany, M. J. 13-14,76,92
eenton, M. L. 77, 83, 84, 86
ides, R. A. 88-90
-ster, S. 162
xurcassie, V. J. L. 109-111
^yer, G. 30, 77
-ant, D. R. 30, 41-42, 77-78, 80, 82, 85
ayson, A. 143-148
- xnbler, D. J. 51-64
wson, R. 15-20
nton, V. A. 141
rrk, B. R. 33-34
alFilho, W. 162-163
Lindley, D. J. 35-36
Lloyd-Evans, L. 78-79, 86
Magee, L. 3-13, 39, 42-43, 79-80, 82-83,
84-85, 121-122
Mather, J. R. 44, 102
Medd, T. F. 40-41,43, 120, 122-123
Mettam, A. 102
Middleton, R. 33-34
Millward, D. 86
Muir, R. 115-118
Nattress, B. 31-32
Norris, A. 84
Oxford, G. 90-92
Payne, J. 77, 79, 83
Payne, K. G. 83
Reed, S. 93-102
Richardson, D. T. 82, 84-85
Seaward, M. R. D. 3-13, 20, 50. 142
Skidmore, P. 143-148
Slater, F. M. 103-108
Smith, M. H. 84-85
Stephenson, C. R. 81
Sykes, M. 78
Tannett, P. G. 148
Tennant, D. J. 45-50
Thompson, M. J. A. 86
Wilkinson, D. M. 103-108
Yeates, C. S. V. 77-87
INDEX
ari
me records of feather mites in Yorkshire, 31-32
• ok Review
14, 20, 30, 44, 50, 75-76, 92, 102, 124, 141-142, 156, 162-163
164
Index
Botany
Road verge halophytes in S.E. Yorkshire, 36-39; Botanical report for 1993: flowering
plants and ferns, 39-43; Cystopteris fragilis var. alpina in Britain, 45-50; Botanical
report for 1994: flowering plants and ferns, 119-123
Diptera
Drosophila testacea , first record for Yorkshire and Northern Britain, 109-1 1 1; Notes on the
Empidoidea of some Lower Swaledale woods, 111-114; Assassin-flies or Robber-flies of
Yorkshire, with notes on records from other areas of Northern England, 143-148
Ecology
Relationship between plant and invertebrate richness in upland ponds in mid Wales, 1 03-
108; Hedgerow ecology and the landscape historian, 115-118; Status of species rich
neutral grassland in Western North Yorkshire, 125-141
Ephemeroptera
Yorkshire mayflies (Presidential address), 3-13
History of Natural History
Three parson-naturalists from Durham, 65-75
Hymenoptera
Aculeate wasps and bees of Blaxton Common in Watsonian Yorkshire with the
introduction of a new national quality scoring system, 21-29; Melittid and megachilid
bees of Watsonian Yorkshire, 149-162
Landscape History
‘The Haw’: an eighteenth century greenfield site near Skipton, 51-64; Hedgerow ecology
and the landscape historian, 115-118
Limnology
Relationship between plant and invertebrate richness in upland ponds in mid Wales, 103-
108
Mammals
Otters as scavengers: an experiment, 15-20
Mollusca
A sub-fossil record of Pomatis elegans, a mollusc previously unrecorded in the East Riding
of Yorkshire, 33-34; Vertigo geyeri, a snail new to Yorkshire, 35-36
Obituaries
Derek Barnett Cutts (1926-1994), 88-90; Clifford Joseph Smith (1915-1995), 90-92; S.
Maurice Jackson (1914-1995), 148
Ornithology
Factors limiting the distribution and population size of twite in the Pennines, 93-102
Sub-fossils
A sub-fossil record of Pomatis elegans , a mollusc previously unrecorded in the East Riding
of Yorkshire, 33-34
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
Presidential address: Yorkshire mayflies, 3-13; Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union excursions in
1993, 77-87
‘The Naturalist’ is available in microform
UNIVERSITY MICROFILMS INTERNATIONAL
300 North Zeeb Road
Dept PR
Ann Arbor, Mi 48106
USA
White Swan House
Godstone
Surrey RH9 8LW
England
Binding
Why not have your copies of The Naturalist bound into volumes?
One year’s issues per volume, or alternatively two years in one
volume at less cost than binding as two separate volumes. We are
also experienced and expert in the re-binding and repairing of all
books.
Spink & Thackray
Broomfield Bindery
Back Broomfield Crescent
LEEDS LS6 3BP Telephone: 0113 2780353
The Irish Naturalists’ Journal
A quarterly journal of Irish natural history
Edited by Dr Robin Govier
Annual subscription £12.50. IR £14.00
Further information from the Editor, INJ
Medical & Biological Centre. Lisburn Road,
Belfast BT9 7BL
'rinted in Great Britain by Titus Wilson & Son. Kendal
ISSN 0028-0771
Latest publication of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
THE FRESHWATER CRUSTACEA OF YORKSHIRE
a faunistic & ecological survey
by
GEOFFREY FRYER
The crustacean fauna of Yorkshire reflects the great physiographic diversity of the
region. Adopting an ecological approach, this book considers the Yorkshire fauna in
relation to climate, topography, geology, soils and water chemistry, always keeping in
mind that it is dealing with living organisms whose habits, requirements and
physiological limitations determine exactly where they live.
Matters covered include the ecological background; faunal assemblages and their
regional attributes; an analysis of the factors that determine distribution patterns, many
of which are mapped; wide geographical aspects; and conservation. Large areas, such
as the Pennines, Howgill Fells, North Eastern uplands and the lowland plains are
surveyed. So too are localised regions including Whemside, the Malham area, lowland
heaths, and the largest lakes, as well as habitats such as upland tarns, seepages, cold
springs, small lowland ponds, inland saline waters. Notes are given on every species
recorded, including parasitic forms.
Price £16.00 (plus £2.00 per copy p.&p.) Special offer to member of the Yorkshire
Naturalists’ Union £13.50 (plus £2.00 p.&p.)
Please make cheques payable to Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
Available from: Professor M. R. D. Seaward, Department of Environmental
Science, University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1DP.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE
A Fungus Flora of Yorkshire. 1985. 296 pp. Hardback. £10.00 incl. p&p.
Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire. 1 989. 380 pp. Paperback. £ 1 7.50
incl. p&p. Unbound. £12.15 incl. p&p.
Mammals of Yorkshire. 1985. 256 pp. £7.50 incl. p&p.
Protection of Birds Committee Centenary Year, 1891-1991. 73 pp. £6.00
incl. p&p.
Moths and Butterflies of Spurn , 1991 . 124 pp. £6 incl. p&p.
Cheques should be made payable to Y.N.U.
From. Mrs J. Payne, 15 Broad Lane, Cawood, Selby, North Yorkshire, Y08 0SQ.
Telephone: 0757 268242
January-March 1996
Number 1016
Naturalist
\ QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
, THE NATURAL
) HISTORY museum
2S APR 1996
PURCHASED
GENEFiALLIBRARV
The Biology and Ecology of the Thistle Broomrape, Orobanche
reticulata Wallr.
— Michael Hughes and Alistair Headley
Avian Habituation to Recreational Disturbance on the North
Yorkshire Coast
— G. W. Scott, A. R. Niggehrugge and B. Sweeney
Botany of “The Haw” Near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
— David J. Hamhler
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union
ditor M. R. D. Seaward, MSc, PhD. DSc. FLS. The University, Bradford BD7 1DP
Notice to Contributors to ‘The Naturalist’
Manuscripts (two copies if possible), typed double-spaced on one side of the paper only
with margins at top and left-hand at least 2.5cm wide, should be submitted. Latin names of
genera and species, but nothing else, should be underlined. S.I. Units should be used
wherever possible. Authors must ensure that their references are accurately cited, and that
the titles of the journals are correctly abbreviated. Volumes of The Naturalist for the years
1886 to 1975 have been retrospectively numbered 11 to 100 to accord with numbering
before and after this period (see YNU Bulletin no. 3, pp. 21-22 1985); please cite these
volume numbers in all references. Table and text-figures should be prepared on separate
sheets of paper. Drawings and graphs, drawn about twice the linear size they are to appear,
should be in jet-black Indian ink, and legends should not be written on the figures.
Publishable manuscripts not conforming to the above requirements will be returned
for alteration.
Photographic Plates
Readers of The Naturalist will have noticed that the number of photographic illustrations
has increased in recent years. Good clear photographs, suitably captioned, to accompany
articles or as independent features are always welcome.
To encourage this development, a long-standing member of the YNU, who wishes to
remain anonymous, has most generously offered to make a donation, the income from
which would finance the publication of a plate or equivalent illustration in future issues
whenever possible. The editor, on behalf of the YNU, wishes to record this deep
appreciation of this imaginative gesture.
© Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union — 1996
Single Copies may be made of single articles in this journal provided that due acknow-
ledgement is made and the copies are for non-profit making educational or private use.
Copying of more than one article or multiple copying of a single article is forbidden unless
special permission has been obtained from the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union. Permission is
granted for the use of brief quotations in published work provided that acknowledgement
of the source is clearly stated, but the use of substantial sections of text and any illustrative
matter requires the express permission of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
All matters other than subscriptions should be addressed to:
Mr John A. Newbould. Tapton House 30 Moorlands. Wickersley
Rotherham S66 OAT
Items which should be sent to the above include: All membership applications, changes
of address, resignations and problems concerning non-receipt of any of the YNU’s
publications. Please quote the membership number printed underneath your address on all
correspondence.
Subscriptions (unless covered by Banker’s Order) should continue to be sent to:
Mr Derek Allen, c/o Doncaster Museum, Chequer Road
Doncaster DN1 2AE
The Naturalist is issued free to individual members of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
and to Affiliated Societies.
Institutions and Subscribers £20.00 Registered Charity No. 224018
A QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
the natural
HISTORY MUSEUM
2 9 APR 1996
PURCHASED
Editor M. R. I). Seaward, msc, .'..~L£eneral library
The University, Bradford BD7 1 DP
Volume 121
1996
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
3
I he biology and ecology of the thistle broomrape,
OROBANCHE RETICULATA WALLR.
MICHAEL HUGHES AND ALISTAIR HEADLEY
Department of Environmental Science, University of Bradford, Bradford, BD7 l DP
, TRODUCTION
‘obanche reticulata Wallr., commonly called the thistle broomrape, belongs to the
'■ ohanchaceae L. As with all other broomrapes it is holo-parasitic or heterotrophic and
us relies on its usual hosts, the thistles (Cirsium and Cardans), for all organic food. The
stribution ol O. reticulata is perhaps the most curious of all the British species of
obanche, being confined to Yorkshire where it occurs mainly over magnesian limestone
I umsey & Jury, 1991; Foley, 1993). In Europe it is present from Spain in the west to
-‘stern Russia in the east, and can be found as far north as Estonia and Sweden (Bonnier
Layens, 1968; Tulin el at., 1972; Kreutz, 1993). Given the abundance of its preferred
st plant. Cirsium arvense (L.) Scop., why is the parasite so rare in the British Isles? In
Jer to help answer this question an autecological investigation was carried out in the
i miner of 1995 with the assistance of English Nature.
As with many other species of Orobanche, O. reticulata has been dogged by mis-
tentifications (Foley, 1993; Abbot 1994), and earlier collections of O. reticulata in
ensleydale were mistakenly identified as O. minor Smith or O. major L. (Slater, 1882;
es, 1888; Pugsley, 1940). O. reticulata was lirst discovered as a British species in
harfedale by Craven in 1907 (Druce, 1909). The plants of O. reticulata from Brecon
i ributed to O. reticulata are now regarded as that of O. loricata Reichenb. (Graham,
657). Most British O. reticulata has been identified as var. pall idift ora ( Wimmer & Grab.)
ck; some authors have given it specific rank. e.g. Kreutz (1995), but it is considered by
imsey and Jury (199 1 ) to be conspecific.
STRIBUTION AND HABITATS
reticulata has had at least 15 separate populations within the last 4 years in a total of six
x 1 0km grid squares. The populations are found in a wide variety of habitats, including
pasture, edges of arable fields, abandoned quarries, woods and roadside verges, but a
:ge proportion are on the banks or within the flood-plain of the rivers Wharfe and Ure.
I the sites in the British Isles are at a relatively low altitude (10 to 125m a.s.l.) compared
-some of the continental sites where it is found in the sub-alpine belt as well as on the
lins (Kreutz. 1995) and has been seen at an altitude of at least 500m in the German Tyrol
aeupler & Schonfelder. 1988). The British occurrences are on the whole on relatively flat
es. but where it does occur on sloping ground (maximum angle 25°) nearly ail have a
-sterly aspect.
OLOGY AND SOILS
total of 19 soil samples were taken in June and July 1995 from 13 of the sites where O.
iculata has been seen in the last 4 years. A full textural analysis and some chemical
. tlyses were carried out on these soils following the methods of Allen et al. (1974).
hough many O. reticulata sites are on the Magnesian limestone in Yorkshire it does also
urur on chalk and glacial alluvium. Most of the soils are either river alluviums, rendzinas
calcareous brown earths: the soils consequently have a high pH (Table 1). At the sites
ere the soil pH was below 7.4 the plant had been ploughed up or was not seen when the
i is were collected. The restriction of the plant to soils with a particular pH is curious
i ce parasites do not depend directly on the soil for their nutrition. However, the
.ceptibility of the host plant to infection by the broomrape may be affected by soil
iracteristics.
The proportion of sand in all the samples was very high and they were all classified as
ura list 121 (1996)
4
The Biology and Ecology of the Thistle Broomrape
TABLE 1
The pH, total nitrogen (% dry wt), plant-available phosphate and exchangeable potassium
and calcium (ppm) of 19 soil samples taken from 13 0. reticulata populations in
Yorkshire.
Soil Characteristic
range
mean + S.E.
pH
4.9 -8.0
7.4±0.2
total nitrogen (% dry wt.)
0.04 - 0.79
0.30 ± 0.04
plant-available phosphate (ppm)
3.5-28.1
1 1.9 ± 1.6
exchangeable potassium (ppm)
0.15-1.82
0.52 ±0.10
exchangeable calcium (ppm)
30 - 300
128 ± 12
either a pure sand, loamy sand or sandy loam using the British Standards system of soil
classification (Fig. 1). At first examination this feature might appear to be important for the
washing in of the tiny seeds into the soil and subsequent establishment onto its host roots,
but the seeds are the same size as medium sand grains.
The soils appear to be reasonably fertile as total nitrogen and plant-available phosphate
concentrations are relatively high for non-agricultural soils (Table 1 ). The concentrations
of exchangeable calcium are low (Table 1) considering the pH and parent material, but this
might be due to a low cation exchange capacity which is normally associated with sandy
soils. This would also explain the exceedingly low plant-available potassium con-
centrations and this element may well be limiting plant production in these sites (Table 1).
Vegetation
The vegetation types seen at the sites fall into two main categories. The commonest
vegetation type associated with O. reticulata is Arrhenatherum elatioris grassland
mean % dry weight
FIGURE 1
The particle size distribution of 19 soils collected from 15 Orobanche reticulata Wallr.
sites from Yorkshire. Diameters of the particle size classes are as follows:
coarse sand = 0.6-2. 0mm, medium sand = 0.2-0.6mm, fine sand = 0.06-0. 2mm,
silt = 2-60pm and clay <2pm.
5
The Biology and Ecology of the Thistle Broomrape
National Vegetation Classification (NVC) mesotrophic grassland I (MG1 ). This is one of
i.ie commonest grasslands in Britain, typical of road and motorway verges with a rank,
datively species-poor community dominated by Arrhenatheruni elatius, Dactylis
'omerata and Holcus lanatus (Rodwell, 1992); also common in this community are large
nbellifers (especially Heracleum sphondylium), Cirsium arvense and Urtica dioica with
entaurea nigra it the soil is base rich. At one roadside site the greater species diversity
'obably represents the Centaurea nigra sub-community (NVC MGle), distinguished by
>ecies such as Hypericum hirsutum. Plantago lanceolata, Achillea millefolium. Primula
i mis and Centaurea nigra. The Urtica dioica sub-community was found at the River Lire
tes though O. reticulata was never found in direct association with U. dioica.
The second vegetation type that O. reticulata is associated with can be seen at the
oodland sites. These were classified as Fra.xinus excelsior-Acer campestre-Mercurialis
\?rennis woodland (NVC W8). However, management at both sites has resulted in a
llcrcnt community and where O. reticulata is found it is more akin to a Ruhus fruticosus-
olcus lanatus underscrub community (NVC W24). One plot gave a good match with the
irsium arvense-C. vulgare sub-community (NVC W24a) indicated by the presence of
iechoma hederacea L., Epitohium hirsutum L., Cirsium spp. and Samhucus nigra L.
(iodweli, 1991). These sites are undergoing succession, having been clear-felled or
>ppiccd and are therefore difficult to classify.
In Europe the plant is found in a wide range of habitats including alpine grassland,
i deral habitats, stony and wet habitats on calcareous and nutrient-rich, loamy soil (Kreutz.
995).
ilOLOGY
. reticulata has been reported as parasitising a wide range of thistles in the British Isles,
.eluding Cirsium arvense. C. vulgare. C. eriophorum, C. palustre and Cardans
anthoides (Rumsey & Jury, 1991; Foley, 1993). In Switzerland it has been reported to
mrasitise C. defloratus, C. personata. Cirsium oleraceus and Scabiosa columbaria as well
■ C. arvense (Selling & Keller, 1909), but these probably refer to what is regarded bv
me as a different species (Kreutz, 1995). Kreutz (1995) does, however report O.
ittllidiflora as having C. arvense, C. eriophorum. C. vulgare, C. oleraceum. Cardans
■anthoides and C. crispus as hosts, whilst O. reticulata sensu stricta has a wider host
nge as follows: Cirsium eristhales, Carlina acaulis, Scabiosa lucida. Cardans defloratus
i d Knautia dipsacifolia (Kreutz, 1995). These reports need to be treated with great
i ution as errors in identification of Orobanche are frequent and the actual host plant is not
ways evident as it may either be virtually dead or some distance from the parasite.
During the summer of 1995, 414 O. reticulata spikes were carefully examined and
rtually all were parasitising C. arvense plants with the exception of three on Cardans
anthoides and one on Cirsium eriophorum. In another survey in 1992 only two out of
• 1 spikes were not parasitising C. arvense and they were on C. palustre (Foley, 1992).
te apparent preference for C. arvense may reflect its abundance relative to other species
thistle, but the virtual absence of records from the equally common C. vulgare suggests
rrierwise.
The populations of O. reticulata at the sites investigated show marked fluctuations in
mbers between years (Fig. 2). Given that the soil type, presence of thistles and
getation type are relatively constant between years at the sites there are two possible
pianations for these large inter-annual fluctuations in numbers of O. reticulata, namely
sturbance and climatic fluctuations.
A feature common to nearly every site is disturbance. In the river localities flooding can
cur (most years and usually during the winter months) which can result in large-scale
1 il movement, whilst the other sites show evidence of rabbit activity (burrows and
rapes) or mole activity (molehills). The two woodland sites supported strong populations
veral years after large-scale disturbance by clear-felling or coppicing. It may be true that
vere flooding could lead to the extinction of one site only to spread seeds further
6
The Biology and Ecology of the Thistle Broomrape
FIGURE 2
The trends in size of Orobanche reticulata Wallr. populations at a pasture (cross),
roadside verge (square), wood (diamond), and river bank (triangle) in Yorkshire
between 1984 and 1995.
downstream, but the populations on the flood-plains tend to remain in the same place,
although experiencing large fluctuations in numbers; for example, a population by the
River Ure was very large in 1987, with more than 700 spikes. There was heavy rainfall
during October 1987 resulting in severe Hooding and the population was reduced to a
single plant in 1989 (Fig. 2). The same population built its numbers to a peak of 78 in 1992
when a severe flood in September 1992 again reduced the numbers (Fig. I). Autumn
flooding is detrimental to O. reticulata by washing away spikes and seeds downstream as
well as creating anaerobic conditions in the soil, but spring flooding appears to have little
effect, probably due to the fact the tubers are already well established.
On the other hand, disturbance from rabbits is more likely to benefit the spread of 0.
reticulata by creating bare patches for Cirsium to colonise and burying O. reticulata seeds
to the depth required for successful germination and establishment onto its host’s root. This
stage in the life-cycle of Orobanche spp. is probably the most critical for determining the
population size as seed production by a single spike can be very large (Salisbury, 1942;
Kreutz, 1995). In a study of the serious crop-pest O. crenata, Granados and Torres (1993)
found that 60% of the seeds produced were viable, but only 0.003% of the viable seeds
became attached to a host plant and only 9% of these developed into mature flowering
plants. An average O. reticulata plant has approximately 50 flowers and with each mature
capsule containing between 2,000 and 4,000 seeds, a typical spike will release an estimated
100,000 to 200,000 seeds. The seeds are easily dispersed by wind or water as they are
small (0.17 x 0.27mm) and very light ( 1,000 seeds weigh c. 5mg).
Before germination can occur some broomrape seeds require a conditioning period (e.g.
several weeks at 20°C for O. crenata ForskSI) and germination is inhibited by light (Van
Hezewijk el al ., 1993; Bar Nun & Mayer, 1993). Even then seeds will only germinate when
stimulated by chemicals released from the host root and the seedlings will die if connection
to the host root is not made within a few days. The exact nature of the germination
stimulant is still uncertain; however, various workers have suggested ethylene, gibberellic
acid and Rhizobium nodules as being significant (Jones, 1989; Bar Nun & Mayer, 1993;
Parker & Riches, 1993).
Some authors have suggested that fluctuations in population numbers arc due to
meteorological factors, such as minimum temperatures in winter. In order to test this
The Biology and Ecology of the Thistle Broomrape
7
Autumn Rainfall in the Previous Year (mm)
FIGURE 3
Scatter plot of size of the pasture population (logarithmic scale) and total autumn rainfall
(sum of September, October and November) at the Durham meterological station in the
previous year. Line represents the significant (p = 4.2%) regression between the two
variables (y = 0.0104*logio population - 0.254). Numbers next to the points indicate the
year in which the census of the Orobanche reticulata Wallr. population was carried out.
pothesis the population numbers at the pasture site were correlated with various climatic
i riables and a strong correlation was found between population size and the total rainfall
the previous autumn (Fig. 3). The populations at the two woodland sites also showed
r.-ge increases after the wet autumn of 1993 (Fig. 2). This ties in well with the tact that
weral authors have found that seeds of species of Orobanche require prolonged moisture
i d warm temperatures to germinate in experimental conditions, otherwise the seeds enter
i iormancy phase (Van Hezewijk et al.. 1993: Bar Nun & Mayer. 1993). Thus a cold, dry'
i tumn may result in dormancy and few broomrapes the following year. It is unlikely that
irmmer rainfall or temperatures affect the performance of broomrape since it is
> rmination which appears to be the critical stage in its development.
The life-cycle of O. reticulata has variously been described as annual, biennial and
rennial. Observations from the literature and the results from the present population
. dy (Fig. 3) indicate that it behaves as an annual. Only one herbarium specimen to date
)ws evidence of spikes being produced in more than one season (Rumsey, pers. comm.).
i. conditions are favourable it is likely that seeds dispersed in late summer germinate in the
umn and attach themselves to a host root. The underground tuber develops and sends up
lowering spike the following summer. If. however, the tuber has not accumulated
>ueh carbohydrate reserves it may persist another year and then flower, and in this case
ii laves as a biennial. Seeds may not. of course, germinate in their first year and there is
deuce from studies of other broomrape species that the seeds remain viable for at least
years if the humidity remains low (Parker & Riches. 1993).
Although seed germination and attachment to its host is probably the most critical part of
life-cycle of any broomrape. there are other factors which can limit population size,
e tubers of Orobanche spp. are a rich source of carbohydrate and are likely to be
icked by slugs and insect larvae. The slug Milas budapestensis may eat Orobanche
'ers as it is known to consume bulbs and is a common pest of potatoes (Young, pers.
nm.). Slugs have also been observed to eat the stems of the young spikes as they emerge
m the ground and one population had 10 out of 35 O reticulata spikes damaged in this
8
The Biology and Ecology of the Thistle Broomrape
way. The spikes consequently died before flowering. Slug activity increases during a wet
summer which is therefore more likely to be detrimental to populations of Orobanche.
Sheep have also been observed to eat the young spikes. The spikes are also easily broken
through trampling and as they appear to be predominantly monocarpic this activity is also
detrimental to seed production.
Pollination is not thought to be limiting as it is carried out by a wide range of species of
bee (Jones, 1989) as well as wasps and flour beetles. The developing seeds may however,
be attacked by parasitic flies (Linke et al„ 1990) and various species of fungi (Linke et al,
1992).
The density and height of thistle plants in a lm2 circular quadrat that was centred on a O.
reticulata plant were determined and nearby unparasitised stands were also recorded in the
same manner in a total of 26 quadrats at four different locations. Not surprisingly, the
height of thistles in the lm2 around the parasite was much lower than for unparasitised
stands. The parasitised thistles were even smaller than their neighbours within 50cm of the
parasite and they were on average 26.5cm tall and showed varying degrees of chlorosis,
retarded flowering, wilting and even death. The thistles that were apparently parasitised
would however make only a small contribution to the total number of thistles in parasitised
stands and this might therefore indicate that other thistles were also parasitised, but the
flowering spikes of O. reticulata had not appeared or that the thistles were relatively
young.
The density of parasitised stands of C. arvense was lower (significant at the 5% level),
but there is a great deal of overlap in the density of parasitised and unparasitised stands of
thistles (Table 2). The much smaller variation in height and density of unparasitised stands
of thistles indicates that these are more likely to be older, well established stands of thistles
growing from rhizomes. The parasitised stands show much greater variation in density and
height and might therefore include a larger proportion of seedling plants. No relationship
was found between the height of the host plant and the height of the parasite. This is not
surprising as the size of the Orobanche tuber and hence size of the spike will depend on the
'quality' as well as size of the thistle before and shortly after attachment by the parasite and
not when it flowers.
The absence of O. reticulata from the densest stands of its host plant is paradoxical and
requires explanation. This may be related to disturbance, the seedlings of O. reticulata
becoming established on seedlings of thistle which are likely to be at a lower density than
established mature shoots of thistle arising from rhizomes. It is also possible that the
chemical signals released by the roots of young and mature plants of thistle are different
and it is only the young thistles that become parasitised as a consequence. This enigma still
needs further investigation as does the role of slugs as a significant factor affecting the
population size of O. reticulata.
TABLE 2
The density (nr2) and mean height (cm) of all Cirsium arvense plants in lm2 plots with or
without the parasite Orobanche reticulata.
Cirsium
arvense
Orobanche
reticulata
n
range
mean ±
S.E.
t-test
height (cm)
present
1 17
4 to 145
60±3
16.15
absent
173
9 to 165
1 16±2
p< 0.001
density (nr2)
present
13
4 to 20
9±1 .4
2.26
absent
13
6 to 1 9
1 3.2± 1 .2
p < 0.05
9
The Biology and Ecology of the Thistle Broom rope
\CKNOWLEDGEMENTS
his work was carried out with financial assistance from English Nature (College/English
future Links Scheme Grant No. SG34/95). Laboratory work was carried out at the
department ot Environmental Science, University of Bradford and we wish to thank our
olleagues Dr Jean Dixon and Professor Mark Seaward for their assistance and Helen
mith and Denise Ramsay at the York and Wakefield offices of English Nature for kindly
Mowing access to their tiles. We are grateful to Janet Deane for showing us the Ripon
arks site. We met with no obstruction at any of the sites and would like to thank the site
managers and landowners for their co-operation, especially the MOD. Colin Slator. Ian
idler and Mr Dale. Finally our thanks to Dr Young at the University of Newcastle who
ave us advice on trapping and identifying slugs.
INFERENCES
i bbot, P. P. (1994, unpubl.) Orobanche reticulata in West Yorkshire. 1994. English
Nature, York.
i lien, S. E.. Grimshaw, H. M., Parkinson. J.A. and Quarmby, C. (1974). Chemical
Analysis of Ecological Materials. Blackwell Scientific Publications, Oxford.
' ar Nun, N. & Mayer, A. M. (1993). Preconditioning and germination of Oroham he
seeds: respiration and protein synthesis. Phytochemistry 34: 39-45.
bonnier. G. and Layens, G. (1968). Flore complete portative tie la France, de la Suisse el
de la Belgique. Libraire Generale de PEnseignement. Paris.
) ruce, G. C. (1909). Short notes. ./. Bot. 47: I ()().
dey, M. J. Y. (1992, unpub.). Survey for Orohamhe reticulata (thistle broomrape) in
North Yorkshire. English Nature, York.
iley. M. J. Y. (1993). Orohamhe reticulata Wallr. populations in Yorkshire (north-east
England). Watsonia 19: 247-257.
i raham. R. A. (1957). Plant notes. Proc. Bot. Sac. Br. Isles 2: 243.
rranados, F. L. and Torres, L. G. (1993). Seed bank and other demographic parameters of
broomrape {Oroham he crenata Forsk) populations on faba bean ( Vicia faha L.). Weed
Research 33: 319-327.
Laeupler, H. and Schonfelder, P. (eds.) (1988). Atlas der Farn-und Bliitenpflanzen der
Bundesrepuhlik Deutschland. Ulmer. Stuttgart.
nes, M. (1989). Taxonomic and Ecological Studies on the genus Orobanche L in the
British Isles. Ph.D. thesis. University of Liverpool,
r ,-eutz, C. A. J. ( 1995). Orobanche. The European Broomrape Species. Vol. I . Central and
Northern Europe. Stichting Natuurpublicaties. Limburg,
i -es. F. A. (1888). Flora of West Yorkshire. Lovell Reeve, London.
i nke, K. H.. Vorlaender, C. and Saxena. M. C. (1990). Occurrence and impact of
Phvtomyza orohanchia (Diptera: Agromvzidae) on Orobanche crenata (Orohanchaceae)
in Syria. Entomophaga 35: 633-639.
i nke. K. H.. Scheibel. C.. Saxena. M. C. and Sauerbom. J. (1992). Fungi occurring on
I Orobanche species and their preliminary evaluation for Orobanche control. Tropica!
Pest Management 38: 1 27- 1 30.
a rker. C. and Riches, C. R. (1993). Parasitic Weeds of the World. Biology and Control.
CAB International, Wallingford.
. gsley. H. W. ( 1940). Notes on Orobanche L. ./. Bor. 78: 105-1 16.
i (dwell, J. S. (1991). British Plant Communities. Vol. I: Woodlands and Scrub.
Cambridge University Press. Cambridge.
(dwell. J. S. (1992). British Plant Communities. Vol. 3: Grasslands and Montane
t Communities . Cambridge University Press. Cambridge,
msey. F. J. and Jury. S. L. (1991). An account of Orobanche L. in the British Isles.
Watsonia 18: 257-295.
lisbury. E. J. (1942). The Reproductive Capacity of Plants. Bell. London,
hing. H. and Keller. R. (1909). Flore de la Suisse. Rouge. Lausanne.
10
Book Reviews
Slater, H. H. (1882). The flora of Ripon and neighbourhood. Bot. Trans. Yorks. Nat. Un.
1:55.
Tutin, T. G., Heywood, V. H., Burges, N. A., Valentine, D. H., Walter, S. M. and Webb,
D.A. (1972). Flora Europaea, Vol. 3, Diapensiaceae to Myoporaceae. Cambridge
University Press, Cambridge.
Van Hezewijk, M. J., Van Beem, A. P., Verkleij, J. A. C. and Pieterse, A. H. (1993).
Germination of Orobanche crenata seeds, as influenced by conditioning temperature and
period./. Bot. 71: 786-792.
BOOK REVIEWS
Ferns of Hawai’i by Kathy Valier. Pp. 88. including 4 figures and 27 colour and 71 black
and white photographs. University of Hawai'i Press, Honolulu. Hawai'i. 1995. $14.95
Any botanist who is visiting Hawai’i for the first time will find this book helpful in
identifying 62 out of the 200 species of ferns and clubmosses found there. The book has a
very strong ethnobotanical slant and includes an introductory section on the basics of the
life-cycle of ferns and the terminology used to describe their structure and morphology.
The first figure on the evolutionary relationship of ferns to other plants is very simple, but
confusing and has been drawn incorrectly. The most annoying aspect of the book to non-
Hawaiians is that the legends to the colour plates use mainly Hawaiian names, but they do
refer to the page where the plant is described in the text with its Latin name.
ADH
British Plant Communities. Volume 4, Aquatic communities, swamps and tail-herb
fens edited by J. S. Rodwell. Pp. 283, 16 figures, plus distribution maps. Cambridge
University Press, 1995. £60.00 hardback.
Yet another long-awaited volume in the series on the British plant communities based on
the National Vegetation Classification. This particular volume includes 24 “supposed”
aquatic plant communities and 28 tail-herb and swamp communities described in the usual
format (see review in Naturalist 118 (1): 20 for further details of the format). 1 use the
word “supposed”, because in many cases the communities are in fact societies or
associations with only a single constant species which is also the dominant and often only
species of plant present. For example one sub-community (Typha latifolia sub-community)
of the Typha latifoliae swamp has only 19 other associated species, all of which have a
constancy of I (i.e. in less than 20% of all 56 quadrats used to characterise this sub-
community). This is a feature commonly found in aquatic and fen communities and raises
the question as to whether the idea of a community is a concept that does not apply in
nature.
Despite these reservations with some aspects of the approach and theory, this volume
will add significantly to our knowledge and understanding of many aspects of ecology. All
the books in this series have become firmly established as a framework for a wide variety
of teaching, research and management activities in ecology, conservation and land-use
planning. This volume will be of particular interest to some Yorkshire botanists in that an
example is given of the zonation of swamp communities around ponds in West Yorkshire.
This book is definitely for professional ecologists needing it as a reference book and
consequently the high price will not deter many such people from buying it as it will be
essential to their work.
ADH
AVIAN HABITUATION TO RECREATIONAL DISTURBANCE
ON THE NORTH YORKSHIRE COAST
G. W. SCOTT, A. R. NIGGEBRUGGE and B. SWEENEY
Centre for European Research into Coastal Issues, University College Scarborough.
North Yorkshire YOU 3AZ
. BSTRACT
) ata on recreational pressure (average number of visitors in an hour at low tide) and bird
> sturbability (distance of the observer at which birds became vigilant or flew away) were
i >1 lected from three sites on the North Yorkshire coast. Oystercatchers (Haematopus
I tralegus), Redshanks ( Tringa totanus) and to a certain extent Turnstones (Arenaria
terpres) responded differently to human disturbance at the three sites. Bird populations at
Icy Brigg allowed observers to approach more closely before showing signs of
I'Sturbance than those at Cornelian Bay and Ravenscar. The survey sites are similar in
i omorphological/geographical structure but differ in overall recreational pressure. Birds
l the site with the highest recreational pressure (Filey Brigg) showed a statistically
.gnificant ditlerence in disturbability distances. It is suggested that through habituation to
j'.sitor pressure birds are able to minimise the effects of disturbance.
TRODUCTION
torebirds arc disturbed by human activities (Burger, 1981; Plistcr. 1992). However the
f verity of the disturbance varies, ranging from vigilance and non-feeding to flight,
■pending on the species of bird and the type of human activity (e.g. Burger. 1981;
tyford. 1993; CGO, 1986). Research has shown that people can come within a certain
dius around the birds before severe disturbance occurs (e.g. Burger & Gochfeld, 1991;
avidson & Rothwell, 1993); for example. Burger and Gochfeld (1991) investigated the
lerance of migratory and resident species of birds in Northern India and found that
'sident birds were more tolerant of people than were migratory species. Studies have
dicated that the Oystercatcher, the Redshank (Symonds et al. 1984) and the Turnstone
Metcalfe & Furness, 1985; Symonds et al. 1984), show site fidelity during the winter
» onths. Bird disturbability is an especially important issue in the winter time when
duced feeding opportunities add to the difficulties the shore birds already face in meeting
,eir energy requirements due to prey scarcity (e.g. Goss-Custard. 1969; Baker. 1981).
inter disturbance not only leads to loss of feeding opportunity but also to extra energy
i;.pense if the bird is forced to fly (Davidson & Rothwell. 1993). One might therefore
pect sedentary species to exhibit behavioural adaptations in order to address such
oblems. A suitable strategy might be habituation to the source of disturbance.
The aim of the current study was to investigate the possibility that Oystercatchers.
redshanks and Turnstones exhibit levels of habituation to recreational pressure and thus to
bsess the potential conflict existing between recreationists and the needs of the birds. This
as achieved through comparison of bird disturbability at three sites differing in
creational pressure.
I ETHODS
t iree survey sites were chosen on the basis of their similar bird communities and relatively
nilar geomorphological/geographical structure; Filey Brigg (Site 1, Fig. 1; Grid ref.
\ 1308 15), Cornelian Bay (Site 2. Fig. 1; Grid ref. TA 060863) and Ravenscar (Site 3.
g. I; Grid ref. NZ979026). All three sites can be classed as rock-dominated coastlines
d all three possess boulder-strewn wave cut rock platforms. The coastal morphology of
ce sites is dominated by the dip and strike of the underlying geology and the preferential
osion of the sedimentary rock beds.
The three sites were deemed to differ substantially in recreational pressure. All sites
uuralist 121 (1996)
12
Avian Habituation to Recreational Disturbance on the North Yorkshire Coast
Map showing the location of the Filey Brigg, Cornelian Bay and Ravenscar survey sites.
Site I = Filey Brigg, Site 2 = Cornelian Bay, Site 3 = Ravenscar.
were visited live times in the period between 1 8 February and 5 April 1995, four times on a
weekday and once on a Saturday. Each visit occurred approximately one hour before low
tide when the shore birds were expected to be feeding (Burger, 1991) and when people
were also expected to be present. Each survey lasted for an hour during which
observational data on bird disturbability was collected as well as data on recreational
pressure. Weather conditions were constant over the 15 study days. All statistical analyses
were performed on/with the MINITAB for Windows statistical software package
(MINITAB 1994).
Recreational pressure
Recreational pressure on the three field sites was investigated by counting the number of
visitors to the sites during the one hour survey period, before or at low tide, when the
number of people lends to be highest. Visitor pressure also tends to be higher at weekends
and the survey days were chosen to fall on four weekdays and one Saturday in order to get
an overall impression of this impact on the sites. The recreational activity is expressed by
the average number of visitors over the live study days (Table I ) (Niggebrugge, 1991 ). At
Ravenscar and Cornelian Bay these counts were made by the observer(s) at the same time
as the bird disturbability data was gathered. This was not possible at Filey Brigg where the
number of visitors is higher; here one observer counted the visitors while another collected
disturbability data.
13
Avian Habituation to Recreational Disturbance on the North Yorkshire Coast
The main activities ot the visitors to the three sites were (dog) walking, bird watching,
ngling, winkle and lossil collecting, which can all cause birds to be disturbed.
’ Urd disturbability
he data on bird disturbability were gathered by one or two observers approaching the
ird(s) at a constant (slow) speed and noting the distance from the observers at which the
irds became vigilant and/or (lew off. Where a flock of birds was observed the distance at
which the first bird became disturbed was taken as the event. In cases of mixed-species
1 ocks the species were recorded and the first bird of each species was used to obtain the
1 ata. Notes were taken on the number of birds of each species present.
At each site the same route was taken on the five visits, covering both open flats as well
i'S boulder-strewn shores. Following a roughly circular route allowed data to be collected
' n most of the birds present and also allowed the birds to “escape” once observed, thus
ii nsuring that the same set of birds were not disturbed repeatedly.
At fourteen of the fifteen surveys AN was the main and/or sole observer, ensuring that
l.ata were comparable between and within sites. Although an attempt was made to measure
l ie distances between the birds and observer(s) this proved impracticable, and it was
herefore decided to estimate them. These estimates were corroborated between the
observers and found to be consistent with actual measured trials.
RESULTS
( ecreational pressure
he data on visitor numbers indicate that there is an overall difference in recreational
r.-essure between the three sites. Table 1 shows that Filey Brigg has the highest average
imber of visitors per hour (Mean±S.E. = 44±I2.2) followed by Cornelian Bay ( 1()±2.85).
avenscar has a relatively low average number of visitors (7±3. 1 8 ). A one-way analysis of
variance (ANOVA F: !2 = 7.33; p - 0.008) (with Tukey's pairwise comparison)
remonstrates a statistically significant difference between Filey Brigg and Cornelian Bay
id between Filey Brigg and Ravenscar. but not between Cornelian Bay and Ravenscar (p
0.05).
TABLE 1
Wumber of people pursuing recreational activates at the three sites on different days of the
week (daily totals and sample means±S.E.).
Site Number of Visitors per Survey Total Mean
No. Mon. Tues. Wed. Thurs. Sat. Visitors ±S.E.
•ley Brigg 1
32
23
17
74
72
218
43.6± 1 2.2
omelian Bay 2
0
16
9
1 1
15
51
10.2±2.85
ivenscar 3
3
8
2
3
19
35
7.0±3.18
rd disturbability
ita concerning the disturbability of Oystercatchers. Redshanks and Turnstones were
’ llected at the three sites. Kruskal-Wallis tests (Watt. 1992) were carried out to compare
c; mean disturbance distances for these species at the three sites (Table 2). From the table
is clear that, in the case of both Oystercatchers and Redshanks, statistically significant
tfferences in levels of disturbability exist at the three sites. In the case of both these
' ecies. birds can be approached most closely in the site rank order Filey Brigg>Comelian
iy>Ravenscar. The picture is less clear in the case of Turnstones, probably because of the
mil number of observations available from Ravenscar. However, the available data do
ggest that Turnstones can be approached more closely at Filey Brigg than at Cornelian
iy. (The indicated distances represent the distance between the observer and the bird,
nsequently the distances at which the birds flew away are smaller than those at which the
d became vigilant.)
14 Avian Habituation to Recreational Disturbance on the North Yorkshire Coast
TABLE 2
The distances at which Oystercatchers, Redshanks and Turnstones were disturbed at the
three sites.
Type of
disturbability
Species
Site no.
N
Mean±SE
Kruskal
H
- Wallis test
P
Vigilant
Oystercatcher
1
52
22.38±1 .26
53.71
0.001
2
40
37.1312.70
3
34
41.76+2.10
Redshank
1
20
18.7511.63
20.20
0.001
2
17
35.2914.51
3
4
38.7514.27
Turnstone
1
13
8.7711.26
23.05
0.001
2
41
27.7313.01
3
1
15.00
Fly away
Oystercatcher
1
50
14.12010.892
60.34
0.001
2
39
25.6411.59
3
34
33.0911.96
Redshank
1
20
1 1 .60010.887
27.84
0.001
2
17
24.7112.16
3
4
35.0014.56
Turnstone
1
14
4.2111.25
20.79
0.001
2
40
10.1011.02
3
1
8.00
Discussion
From the data presented in this study it is clear that different rocky shore sites are subjected
to differing levels of recreational disturbance. As has been suggested, a strategy which
allows minimisation of the disturbance caused by recreation might be crucial to the winter
survival of the rocky shore waders considered (Oystercatchers, Redshanks and Turnstones)
(e.g. Goss-Custard, 1969; Baker, 1981; Davidson & Rothwell, 1993), especially since these
species are largely sedentary (Metcalfe & Furness, 1985; Symonds et al. 1984). It is also
clear that these three species of rocky shore waders differ in their levels of disturbability at
the three sites. However, their rank order of disturbability appears to vary consistently
between sites, such that, for example, birds of all species were less susceptible to
disturbance at Filey Brigg than at Cornelian Bay. As has been stated, the physical structure
(and presumably biological structure) of the three sites are similar. The main difference
between sites appears to be recreational pressure. We therefore infer a link between levels
of visitor pressure and levels of disturbability and suggest that habituation to recreational
disturbance has occurred.
The findings of this study and those of previous authors (e.g. Burger and Gochfeld. 1991;
Cayford, 1993; Davidson and Rothwell. 1993) strongly suggest that habituation might be
an effective means by which birds optimise feeding opportunities in a disturbed
environment, demonstrating that human recreation and the needs of bird communities
might not be in conflict. It should, however, be borne in mind that non-sedentary species
may not have the opportunity to become habituated.
Acknowledgements
The authors would like to acknowledge the assistance of Mary Barry. Andy Chryssati.
Jean-Paul Ducrotoy, Sue Hull, Lisa Johnson, Hannah Lunt, Anna Mary Saville and Mark
Smythe.
Book Reviews
15
References
laker, J. M. (19X1). Winter feeding rates ot Redshank Tringa totanus and Turnstone
Arenaria interpres on a rocky shore. Ibis 123: 85-X7.
Jurger, J. (19X1). The effect of human activity on birds at a coastal bay. Biological
Conservation 21: 231 -24 1 .
lurger, J. (19X6). The effect of human activity on shorebirds in two coastal bays in
Northeastern United States. Environmental Conservation 13: 123-130.
lurger, J. and Gochteld, M. (1991). Human distance and birds: tolerance and response
distances ot resident and migrant species in India. Environmental Conservation 18: 158-
165.
'ayford, J. ( 1993). Wader disturbance: a theoretical overview. Wader Study Group Bulletin
68: 3-5.
'GO (Coordinatiegroep Oosterschelde) ( 19X6). Activiteiten op de intergetijdegebieden van
de Oosterschelde; een analyse van de effecten op het milieu. Themagroep Effecten.
January 19X6.
kividson. N. C. and Rothwell, P. 1. (1993). Human disturbance to waterfowl on estuaries:
conservation and coastal management implications of current knowledge. Wader Study
Group Bulletin 68.
.Joss-Custard, J. D. (1969). The winter feeding ecology of the Redshank Tringa totanus.
Ibis 111: 338-356.
letcalfe. N. B. (19X4). The effects of habitat on the vigilance of shorebirds: is visibility
important? Animal Behaviour 32: 981-985.
Metcalfe, N. B. (19X9). Flocking preferences in relation to vigilance benefits and
aggression costs in mixed-species shorebird flocks. Oikos 56: 1: 91-98.
Metcalfe, N. B. and Furness. R. W. ( 19X5). Survival, winter population stability and site
fidelity in the Turnstone Arenaria interpres. Bird Study 32: 207-214.
11NITAB (1994). Reference manual. Release 10 for Windows. July 1994. Minitab Inc.
State College. USA.
. iggerbrugge, A. R. (1991). Recreatiedruk op de Oosterschelde. Unpublished thesis.
University of Utrecht.
lister, C., Harrington, B. A. and Lavine. M. (1992). The impact of human disturbance on
shorebirds at a migration staging area. Biological Conservation 60: I 15-126.
ymonds, F. L., Langslow. D. R and Pienkowski M. W. (1984). Movements of wintering
shorebirds within the Firth of Forth: species differences in usage of an intertidal
complex. Biological Conservation: 1 87-2 1 5.
■ 'att, T. A. (1993). Introductory Statistics for Biology Students. Chapman & Hall. London.
BOOK REV IEWS
uritus. A Natural History of the Brown Long-eared Bat by Robert W. Howard. Pp.
)0. I b/w photograph. I map. 7 figures and 13 tables. William Sessions, York. 1995.
0.50.
file author, already acclaimed for his book Badgers without Bias, is a retired veterinary'
rgeon and a keen lifelong naturalist with a special interest in Britain's mammal fauna,
is 15-year study of a colony of brown long-eared bats (Plecotus auritus), which
i rtuitously reside in the attic of his home in Chewton Keynsham near Bristol, has led to
e compilation of the first comprehensive monograph of any species of British bat. The
.irk is not only an account of the author's “in-house" Plecotus colony, though this would
worthwhile in its own right. Each chapter is developed into a comprehensive review and
scussion of current research, knowledge and opinion. The sixteen chapters cover a range
topics, including nightly and seasonal activity patterns; reproduction: prey; flight: sound,
trasound and communication: and why long-eared bats have such big ears. The seven
16
Book Reviews
appendices, which deal with anatomical vital statistics, dentition, echo-location, and
aspects of legal protection, form a useful quick reference. The very comprehensive
bibliography, including historical and current literature, is particularly valuable.
This inexpensive yet information-packed treatise is compulsory reading for all bat
enthusiasts and students of mammalogy.
CAH
Harm De Blij’s Geography Book by Harm de Blij. Pp. 336, with 16 b/w maps and 6
diagrams. Wiley. 1995. £17.95.
In 1989 an American TV station put a “world awareness slot” into one of their leading
news programmes. They employed an academic geographer. Harm de Blij, to ensure that
the content would help stem the growth of geographical illiteracy in the American
population. Guided by the response to this programme, the themes which generated most
interest have been expanded to create this book.
The volume is a highly idiosyncratic pot-pourri of themes, ranging from global warming,
through frontier conflicts to AIDS! Whilst the style is distinctly popular, the content is
clear, well informed, commendably up to date and often thought-provoking. The weakest
sections are those covering continental drift, earthquakes and weather but fortunately these
make up only a minor portion of the collection. The sections on global demography, the
growth of economic activity on the "Pacific rim”, on the decline of nation-state power and
of the problems arising from the disintegration of the USSR are particularly interesting.
Moreover, the book’s overall perspective, in which European interests are allocated only
just over twenty pages, may usefully disturb many British readers’ existing world view.
Though the sections rarely explore themes in depth, the large number of thought-provoking
“potted accounts” of problems which are present in many parts of the world will provide
the reader with a clear picture of how the world is changing and as such the book is to be
recommended.
DEC
Tales of the Earth: Paroxysms and Perturbations of the Blue Planet by C. Officer and
J. Page. Pp. xiii + 26 with 46 graphs/line drawings and 26 b/w pictures. Oxford University
Press, 1993. £15.95.
This work provides an interesting overview and perspective of the natural and man-induced
changes which have influenced the earth and its life forms, particularly over the last 20.000
years.
The first four chapters examine the effects of earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, meteorite
impacts and floods upon human societies in both recent and historic times. A further two
chapters examine the impact of climatic change upon organisms in the period before the
Industrial Revolution and sets out the hypotheses which have been advanced to account for
the demise of the dinosaurs at the Cretaceous/Tertiary boundary and of the mammoths and
mastodons in the post-glacial period.
The last three chapters of the book examine human impacts upon the world's physical
and biotic environments and question whether our society is allocating research funds in
ways which are appropriate to provide help in coping with the massive problems facing
humankind in the coming century. This question is put into the context of the
contemporary problems of smogs, global warming, acid rain, environmental disturbance
and the extinction of species.
Though few concepts are dealt with in detail, the work provides adequate references to
readily accessible sources. A strong merit of the work is that it makes a large number of
important, recent concepts from the earth and biological sciences available to the general
public in an easily understood format with little scientific or technical jargon.
DEC
17
BOTANY OF “THE HAW” NEAR SKIPTON:
PAST, PRESENT ANI) FUTURE
DAVID J. HAMBLER
Department of Environmental Science, University of Bradford. Bradford BD7 I DP
Introduction
‘The Haw", a much-quarried hill east of Skipton, North Yorkshire is represented on recent
1 3S maps mainly by a large blank area reflecting a flux in topograpy which has accelerated
n recent years (Hambler, 1995). This tlux has mainly involved quarrying, landfill and
cembankment; all have affected the vegetation and flora but it will be shown that other
. mthropogenic changes have also been important.
The Haw lies largely within the 2km NG Tetrad NE0052, extending 0.5km to the east
Fig. 1 ) The names by which land parcels on The Haw were known in the 18th century are
i lsed here in quotation marks, together with numbers relating to a Plan of the Manor of
Mkiplon produced by Thomas Crow in 1757. Part of the Plan was copied and presented in
an earlier paper (Hambler, 1995); outlines of fields and their numbers only are shown here
Fig. 2). “Hawbank Rock" and "Lookabout” (Fig. I ) are names which may have originated
l ater than Crow’s time, in relation to quarry precincts at the western end of the hill.
The soil of The Haw, where undisturbed, is mostly circum-neutral calcareous brown-
. arth, overlying Carboniferous Limestone and shales; a longitudinal east/west core to the
elongated hill comprises strata which are commercially valueless. Quarrying has taken
dace on either side of the core, itself grossly breached in I960 to leave a cleft which is still
\>eing expanded (Hambler, 1995).
Acidic becks, draining moorlands to the north and to the south, skirt The Haw which has
itself no evident drainage channels; some pasture soil at its eastern end has been found to
Me mildly hcidic.
All of the vegetation of The Haw has long been entirely anthropogenic - resulting from
i nimal husbandry (including deer keeping); quarrying and reclamation; and railway
onstruction. Nevertheless wild, sometimes alien, higher plant species continue to find
! iches. Reasons for the absence, gain or loss of certain species are adduced here, and a few
pinions are ventured on the potential of the topographical relict for species conservation.
Iroad vegetation types and their origins are described first; then interesting individual
pecies are considered.
Interest may be perceived in terms of rarity, disjunct distribution, absence from habitats
i resumed suitable, or simply attractiveness. It was a criterion used in compilation of a list
' f plants found “about Skipton" by Baker 1907, and implicitly by Rotheray (1900) who
; uoted parts of The Haw as the provenances of certain species. Unfortunately Lister
i .otheray’s “huge herbarium . . . and records" were burned (Frankland. 1987), so any
v . -levant information has been lost. Interest is important in the promotion of modem
anservation, and it is suggested that whilst quarrying has been responsible for creating
abitats for a number of interesting species on The Haw. loss of species has often been
trough other causes - drainage, pasture improvement and reclamation.
Woodland
Hazel (Corylus avellana ) was likely to have been spared during forest clearances which
, jgan in the Neolithic and continued "into Roman times" (R. Housley pers. comm.). There
Thus a likelihood that this species has existed continuously on The Haw for thousands of
jars. Mention of nuts, and of woodland at “Scribeden" and “at Hawe" (Hambler. 1995) in
d documents suggest the location of this useful native. Concomitant mention of pine
ood suggests an alien introduction (see Carlisle & Brown. 1968) in medieval times.
A large patch of mixed woodland was conspicuous on the crest of the hill in the middle
the 18th century; this was in “The Haw Park L296”. A smaller mixed patch was present
nuralist 121 ( 1996)
18
Botany of "The Haw" near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
to the east in a held with several uses - “The North Hills Q321”. These patches were
shown on small scale county maps dating from early in the 19th century (e.g. Henry
Teesdale published 1828). The first “six-inch” OS map (Fig. I) surveyed in 1850 showed
that the smaller patch had been destroyed, and the tree symbols suggest that any Scots Fine
( Pinus sylvestris) trees on the hill had gone. In “The Haw Park L296" only scattered Ash
(Fraxinus excelsior ) trees, colonising Hawthorns (Crataegus monogyna ) and a few
marginal Hazels may have escaped wholesale local exploitation of trees to feed lime kilns
between 1750 and 1850.
Hazel coppice with overtopping Ash trees and prevemal herbs such as Primula vulgaris
(Primrose) may once have been extensive on The Haw, with Hazel a conserved relict of the
prehistoric Ash-Hazel wildwood. Ash and Primrose co-exist today (occasionally with
Hazel) in various small areas; one was once part of "The Haw Park L296” - on the north-
facing consolidated scree slope of “Lookabout” (Fig. 3); another was once the southern
edge of “The North Hills Q321” - becoming, later, the roadside boundary of a quarry
(Skibeden Quarry on recent OS maps). Hazel, “the forerunner and associate of Ash on the
limestone” (Smith & Rankin, 1903), is now “. . . the most seriously threatened British tree
except elms . . .” (Rackham, 1986); its decline on The Haw, with no sign of regeneration, is
not an isolated occurrence!
The only mature woodland on The Haw now is on 19th century spoil from the (then)
Haw Bank Quarry (Fig. 5), which alongside the present access road to Skipton Rock
Quarry is comprised mainly of Scots Pines and spindly, closely spaced Larch ( Larix
decidua). Beech (Fagus sylvatica) appears to have been introduced later; it dominates
much of the woodland visible above Haw Laithe on Figure 5. These species represent
continuity in a “tradition” of introducing alien trees to The Haw. The trees, planted in the
second half of the 19th century, screened Haw Bank Quarry, with its works buildings, from
Embsay village. The conifers were sufficiently mature to be symbolised on the “twenty-
five-inch” OS map of 1891, and to be colour-coded as “Scots Pine and Larch” by Smith
and Rankin (1903) on their 1:126,720 scale vegetation map. A photograph in the R.G.
Rowley Archive (Skipton Public Library) illustrates the earliest phase of this reclamation.
The “twenty-five-inch” OS map of 1909 shows that the area of tree-planting had been
extended by 1907 eastwards to its present limits around the right-of-way from Embsay over
The Haw, and symbols suggest a mixed coniferous/deciduous plantation.
The tree canopies allow little undergrowth apart from Dryopteris filix-mas (Male Fern),
but along woodland margins, and along pathways, such as the right-of-way uphill from
Embsay, and a path north of the access road to Skipton Rock Quarry, there are shade-
tolerant shrubs, including Rubus fruticosus agg (Bramble), Rosa canina (Dog Rose),
Sambucus niger (Elderberry), and common shade-tolerant herbs, including Arum
maculatum (Cuckoo-pint, Lords-and-Ladies), Care x sylvatica (Wood Sedge), Sanicula
europaea (Sanicle), Urtica dioica ( Stinging Nettle ), and Phyllitis scolopendrium (Hart’s-
tongue Fern). Also present is Rosa mollis (Soft Downy-rose), an early-flowering native that
is not abundant in Yorkshire; it received mention by Baker (1907) as a species of interest
“about Skipton”.
Woodland to Scrubby Pasture
Large trees present in “The Haw Park” relict were indicated on the “six-inch" OS map of
1854. The symbols presumably represent Ash (Fraxinus excelsior) individuals, but they are
so few as to suggest that no woodland had survived the previous one hundred years. On the
“twenty-five-inch” map of 1 889 tree symbols arc more numerous. This suggests that Ash
trees which colonised the hill contemporaneously with destruction of the old deer park
woodland to feed lime kilns between 1750 and 1850 had matured.
Swarms of minute dots on the 1854 OS map (Fig. 1 ) suggest that the cartographers had
attempted to represent Hawthorns (i.e. developing scrub). No tree symbols or dots are
present around “Lookabout”, suggesting that the present light woodland, on the
consolidated scree (Fig. 3), comprising large Ash trees, with abundant Hawthorns and a
19
Botany of "The Haw" near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
lew Holly trees (Ilex aquifolium), is of recent natural origin. Crow’s notebook description
ol rhe Haw Park as woody pasture in 1757 suggests that his cartographic symbolism
might, even then, have been idealised. "Haw Park" on the 1854 "six-inch” map does not
cover the westernmost part ot the park as recognised by Crow, and extends far beyond his
easternmost wall shown (just east of the relevant "P” on Fig. I ).
The trunk girths of Hawthorns on the southern slope of "The Haw Park L2%" in 1993
varied between 0.47m and 1 .24m. The form of these trees — with distinct trunks (cf. Fig. 3)
- suggests a period, probably early in the 19th century, of natural colonisation with little
grazing, lollowed by a long period with no regeneration. The Hawe Park [sic) had been
described as a bushy pasture by Whitaker (1878). Symbols suggesting shrubs on the
‘twenty-five-inch" OS map surveyed 1889 surmount "tussocks" intermingled with short
stippled lines; the symbolism is likely to have represented "feg" - described below.
SStumps, now present, show where some of the old Hawthorns have been felled.
Relicts ol the old woodland margins along the A5 roadside (the southern border of "The
Haw Park ') include Sloe (Primus spinosa): Holly, Ivy (Hedera helix) mounting the ancient
Iry-stone walls, and Brachypodium sylvaticuni (False Brome) which is “often relict from
woodland" (Clapham et a!., 1987). The roadside row of tree-symbols along the southern
lank of The Haw on Figure I probably represent mainly Sycamore (Acer pseudoplatanus)
- and illustrate a further example of the introduction of an alien tree to The Haw.
Pastures and “Improvement”
Por at least 200 years the most extensive vegetation on The Haw has been pasture, some
underused and woody, some parts flushed by ephemeral springs, and some boggy (Hambler
(995). Of the land parcels on and around The Haw described in Thomas Crow's Field
Book only “The North Hills Q321" (Fig. 2) was recorded by Crow as partly arable (and
oartly woody). Today there are common species of alkaline to neutral (sensu Tansley 1949)
grasslands in every fragment of the 18th century enclosures north of the A59 road; those
elicts which remain as pastures have been improved by manuring over many years.
Jastures south of the A59 road have been largely modified by more intensive farming
echniques, including cultivation of productive grasses, and are botanically uninteresting
. xcept in the immediate vicinity of Skibeden Beck.
The old. unplanted but still grazed swards north of the A59 road include Agrostis
apillaris (Common Bent), and Cynosurus cristatus (Crested Dog's-tail), a valuable grass
n second class pastures (Tansley, 1949). Also present, but suppressed by grazing, are two
ompetitive grasses: Arrhenatherum elatius (False Oat-grass), and Deschampsia cespitosa
Tufted Hair-grass).
Rough grassland dominated by these two species results when pastures on the brown
arth soil are underused: the name "Fegg Field" for enclosure "P314" (Fig. 2) suggests
• uch grassland (“fegg" is an English dialect term). It is represented today by an ungrazed
ragment of calcareous pasture (soil pH 8.2) which escaped the dumping of spoil in the
970s - the north western comer of "the North Hills Q32I". Here, the presence in 1990 of
le fern Ophioglossum vulgatum (Adder’s-tongue) indicates the ancient origins of this
: rassland relict.
That all of the remains of the circum-neutral to acid pasture sward at the eastern end of
I he Haw is ancient (sensu Rackham. 1986) was shown by the presence of Adder’s-tongue
i 1990. The fern’s habitat evidently included, in the past, the entire northern slope of The
law eastwards from the boundary of "The Haw Park" to the vicinity of Holy Well where
le soil has a mildlv acid reaction - pH 6.4 - (land parcels Q32I. R326 and R327 of Fig.
' )•
Quarrying is currently encroaching into "R327". and will reach its eventual eastern limit
I a north/south tree screen, planted round 1980. across the middle of the field. Although
lis eastern part of the hill was included in an area of "Cultivation, w ith w heat", mapped by
S mith & Rankin (1903) it seems unlikely that wheat has been cultivated on The Haw
: uring the present century.
20
Botany of “ The Haw” near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
The Haw
FIGURE I
Illustration derived from the first six-inch OS map (Sheet CLXXXV) showing The Haw -
surveyed in 1850. Dots representing shrubs are enlarged and tree symbols enhanced. Inset
shows modem roads; the railway completed in 1888; an outline of the quarried areas w ith
Skipton rock quarry to the north of line 53, and the Skibeden complex of merged quarries
to the south. I km squares superimposed.
Botany of The Haw' near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
21
22 Botany of ‘'The Haw” near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
FIGURE 2
Numbered fields on The Haw in 1757 (after Thomas Crow's
Plan of the Manor of Skipton . . . )• Names of becks, as given by OS, added.
FIGURE 3
The ridge and crag labelled ‘Lookabout’ (or "Look -about') on OS maps, seen from the
north-east. Leafless large trees are Ash; smaller trees are Hawthorn. An east/west row of
Beech trees lines the southern lip of 19th century quarry workings on the extreme right
(April 1995).
Botany of “ The Haw" near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
23
The Haw Park relict was mapped as “Natural Pasture: Grasses, no heath plants” by
mith and Rankin (1903). What remains is grazed to a sward by sheep and cattle; it is
datively species-rich on the stony ridge around Lookabout crag (Fig. 3). Here stress-
ilerators such as Festuca rubra (Red Fescue), Briza media (Quaking Grass) and Trisetum
iv e see ns (Yellow Oat Grass) are advantaged.
At the southern foot of the crag a narrow fringe of the grassland has escaped
nprovement and is rich in drought-tolerant calcicolous species including Thymus
' olytrichus (Wild Thyme), Helianthemum nummularium (Common Rock-Rose) and
- eranium molle (Dove’s-foot Crane’s-bill), whilst among rocks on the northern side (Fig.
) shade-tolerant species such as Geranium robertianum (Herb Robert) and Dactylis
1 omerata (Cock's-foot) are more abundant. The northern slope (Fig. 3) below, and east of,
ie crag is a consolidated scree. The grassland here, and in very small ancient hillside
uarries south of Lookabout, is dominated by Ash trees and Hawthorns; beneath the
)rmer. Primroses and Cuckoo-pints are abundant. A Hushed area nearby is fed by a spring
i the north-west corner of grid square SE0152 (Hambler. 1995). Here Agrostis stolonifera
Creeping Bent), Beilis perennis (Daisy) and Prunella vulgaris (Self-heal) are more
0 >nspicuous.
One small hydrophile species. Primula farinosa (Bird's-eye Primrose) which was found
n Hawbank during the 19th century (Table 1) might have existed as an arctic-alpine relict
it this vicinity before improvement and intensification of grazing.
Sown reclamation-grassland has originated on The Haw only during the past few
cecades: south facing spoil slopes and embankments along the A59 road and at Far
skibeden have been sown with grasses (and later, in part, densely planted with young
vees). An area on the northern slope east of grid line E017. comprising spoil and scraped
i oil, is gradually being rehabilitated as nutrient-stressed calcareous grassland, with trees
1 ad shrubs, which may become species-rich (Dixon & Hambler, 1993).
Iuquatic Habitats and Wetland
flaw Beck and Skibeden Beck are swift, narrow streams which, with their tributaries, drain
respectively) acidic gritstone hills to the north and to the south of The Haw. The water of
flaw Beck had a pH of 8.0 in November 1993, suggesting a moderation of acidity by
jrface drainage and silt from the quarried area.
Riparian communities are present everywhere a beck flows through grazing-land. These
ommunities are characterised by “land-based” Agrostis stolonifera (Creeping Bent)
[ Treading into the water, and by Glyceria ftuitans (Floating Sweetgrass) which is attractive
:> cattle. Even where Skibeden Beck flows in its own narrow channel, e.g. in parts of
'Skibeden Field P3 1 3”. this grass and other plants emergent from the channel are grazed,
here is now little pasture on The Haw alongside Haw Beck. Only for a few hundred
i letres west of NG line E01 does the beck flow untrammelled through grazed fields.
The becks provide habitats for emergent-aquatic plants. Iris pseudacorus (Yellow Iris)
i nd Sparganium emersum (Unbranched Bur-reed) root in the channels. Rorippa
i asturtium-aquatica (Water-cress) spreads between open water and any small mires
odden by cattle. Veronica beccabunga (Brooklime) similarly occurs in mires and around
I ie water-level in unculverted stretches of the becks. Although Hvdrocotyle vulgaris
i Pennywort) was found in 1984. low down on the side of the Haw Beck channel near the
onfluence with Kempley Beck, its sometime associate of acid substrates Isolepis setacea
Table 1) was not found.
There is a small abandoned quarry pond near the Kempley Beck/Haw Beck confluence
i the north-east comer of "The North Hills Q321". which carries emergent vegetation.
Toted in a substratum of pH 7.4. Here Juncus inflexus (Hard Rush) and ./. effusus (Soft
tush) are co-dominant, over a moss carpet largely comprising Calliergon cuspidatum,
’ ratonevron ftlicinum and Brachythecium rutabulum. The species composition is similar to
lat of small trackside marshy pools (pH 8.2) high on the hill (Hambler, 1995). This
ommunity, and respective stands of Carex acutiformis (Lesser Pond-sedge) and
24
Botany of “ The Haw ” near Skipton: Past , Present and Future
TABLE 1
Vascular Plants and their provenances recorded by Rotheray (1900)
- scientific names adjusted in accordance with Stace (1991 )
A ira caryophyllea u
Silver Hair-grass
Skipton Rock
Anchusa officinalis *
Alkanet
Hawbank Rock
Anthemis arvensis u
Com Chamomile
Waste ground nr. Hawbank
Anthyllis vulneraria *o
Kidney Vetch
Hawbank Rock 1889, now gone
Aphanes arvensis *
Parsley-piert
Hawbank
Campanula latifolia *
Giant Bellflower
Skideben lime-quarry in hedge
Cardamine hirsuta *
Hairy Bitter-cress
Tramway side to Hawbank
Cynoglossum officinale o
Hound's-tongue
Hawbank
Dactylorhiza incarnata uo
Early Marsh Orchid
Rubbish heaps, Hawbank Rock
Fragarict moschata u
Hautbois Strawberry
Tramway side to Hawbank Rock
Gentianella amarella r
Autumn Gentian
Hawbank Rock & adjoining
pasture
G. campestris uo
Field Gentian
Hillside, Hawbank Quarry
Helictotrichon pratense r
Meadow Oat-grass
Hawbank
Hesperis matronalis *
Dame’s Violet
Hawbank (r nearby)
Isolepis setacea uo
Bristle Club-rush
Hawbank Rock
Koeleria macrantha r
Crested Hair-grass
Hawbank
Lepedium ruderale u
Narrow-leaved Pepperwort
Waste ground nr. Hawbank Rock
Lysimachia nemorum *u
Yellow Pimpernel
Hawbank Rock
Mentha pulegium o
Pennyroyal
Rubbish heap Hawbank Quarry.
Adventive
Orchis mascula uo
Early Purple Orchid
Rubbish heaps Hawbank Rock
Origanum vulgare *r
Marjoram
Skibeden Limekilns
Parnassia palustris uo
Grass-of-Pamassus
Hawbank Rock, 1888, now gone
Phnpinella saxifraga r
Burnet Saxifrage
Hawbank Rock
Primula farinosa uo
Bird’s-eye Primrose
Hawbank
Ruhus affmis §
Bramble
Skipton Rock
R. caesius *r
Dewberry
Skibeden Limekilns
R. vest it us §
Bramble
Hawbank Rock
Scahiosa columbaria *r
Small Scabious
Hawbank Rock
Sherardia arvensis *r
Field Madder
Hawbank
Silaum silaus r
Pepper Saxifrage
Hawbank Rock
Silene vulgaris o
Bladder Campion
Skibeden Limekilns
Stachys officinalis r
Betony
Hawbank, dry banks and in
pastures
Tragopogon prate nsis *r
Goat’s-Beard
Tramway side to Hawbank
Trifolium campestre u
Hop Trefoil
Tramway side to Hawbank
Valeriana dioica *o
Marsh Valerian
Boggy field Hawbank
Vicia sativa ssp. nigra r
Common Vetch
Rubbish heaps Hawbank
Key (symbols refer to anywhere on The Haw): * - refound in 1940s by .1. N. Frankland; r -
recorded recently by M. Ingham, Mrs C. A. Johnson and/or the author; o - recently and
specifically sought but not found; u - apparently unrecorded during present century, § -
taxonomic uncertainty. Note: ‘Skipton Rock' probably refers to post- 1856 quarry workings
east of the earlier Haw Bank Quarry.
25
Botany of “The Haw ” near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
ijuisetum palustre (Marsh Horsetail), are mutually exclusive over parts of the pond
• /hich dried out completely in the exceptional summer of 1995).
Nearby, between a loop of the beck and the railway, along 200m of the beck west of line
i )2 on Figure 1 inset (strictly, separated from The Haw as defined here) is an ungrazed
i ier marsh with abundant Carex acutiformis (Lesser Pond-sedge), Filipendula ulmaria
k Meadowsweet), Phalaris arundinacea (Canary Grass), Valeriana officinalis (Common
alerian) and other common plants of tall-herb-fen. The last three species also occur less
>undantly with grasses and sedges, including Carex hirta (Hairy Sedge), in the ancient
i rassland footing the spoil on the opposite (Haw) side of the beck — a clear demonstration
the ancient gradation between the vegetation ot the hillside, damp through its surface
• rainage, and that of the flood-plain of the beck.
Cirsium palustre (Marsh Thistle) occurs frequently in both communities, and colonised
i mediately and abundantly the lowest part ot the northern hillside after the humic soil
rrizon and vegetation had been completely scraped off during a landscaping operation in
)84. This scraped area of brown earth soil is becoming revegetated by hypnoid mosses
i id sown grasses.
An illustration (Hambler, 1995) postulates a wetland/damp pasture border along the
i Hire course of Haw Beck. Records of individual plant species discussed below suggest
uat part of this wetland at the northern foot of “The Haw Field and Hawbank P318 (east
F NG intersection SE0053) was species-rich and easily accessible before the railway was
, jnstructed. A patch of “laminated clay" is shown on an annotated map in The Arthur
; laistrick Archive (Skipton Public Library), along the northern foot of The Haw (and
, (thin The Haw Park L296); it was associated with a tiny tributary beck (Fig. 1 ) and was
(, ossibly the provenance of 19th century records of some wetland species no longer found.
t ocky Places with Shallow Humic Soils
he near-vertical bedding of the Skipton anticline has largely precluded formation of
;dges on quarry faces: thus the exposed rock (Fig. 4, Fig. 5a) remains bare. Only two
ascular plant species confined to rock-face habitats could be found recently on The Haw:
ne is a fern, Asplenium ruta-muraria (Wall Rue), found on the Lookabout limestone crag,
hie other is an alien shrub, Cotoneaster horizontalis (Wall Cotoneaster), seen on an old
i mestone quarry face north of the site of the tunnel marked on Figure 1 .
Shallow soils develop over horizontal rock surfaces created by quarrying: such soils are
olonised by common species of limestone grassland including Festuca rubra (Red
escue). Thymus praecox (Wild Thyme), Linum catharticum (Fairy Flax), Briza media
(.Quaking Grass), Helianthemum nummularium (Common Rock-rose) and Euphrasia
onfusa (Eyebright). All of these were present recently in the tiny, long-abandoned
astemmost quarry on The Haw (Fig. 1). Numerous stress-tolerant pioneer species have
ieen found recently on the more extensive floor of the old Haw Bank workings (through
which the present access road to Skipton Rock Quarry passes) including Gentianella
. 'marella (Autumn Gentian), Ophrys apifera (Bee Orchid), Polygala vulgaris (Common
.Milkwort), Sherardia arvensis (Field Madder), and Sedum acre (Biting Stonecrop), several
>f these species are discussed individually below. This type of quarry-floor habitat was
ncreased nearby through a recent resumption of quarrying on the southern slope about
00m north-east of Lookabout. Providing that motor-cycle scrambling or illicit “camping
lo not come to exert influence, the old quarry floors will long continue to provide
■onditions suitable for interesting stress-tolerant colonists. One such colonist, possibly still
I iresent but not recorded since 1900. is the annual grass Aira caryophyllea (Table 1).
Plant Records: Notable Absences. Gains and Losses
n the Flora of Skipton and District. Rotheray (1900) chose to specify provenances for
ome species especially those regarded as uncommon. All those from the area designated
rere as “The Haw" are listed in Table 1. Of the 36 species. Rotheray reported that two
pecies had gone, and others have disappeared subsequently. Species discussed
26
Botany of "The Haw" near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
FIGURE 4
Near-vertical bedding on the southern face of the old Skibeden Quarry, on the easternmost
hump of The Haw relict (April, 1993).
individually below include a majority from Table 1, and others of interest, either through
their absence from appropriate habitats, their colonisation of quarry precincts, or their
presence as relict indicators of past gardens.
It has been shown above that all of the types of habitat alluded to by Rotheray (1900) are
still available on The Haw. Absences of calcicolous species abundant in the Dales and
known losses require explanations. The possibility of reintroduction of some species of
conservation interest will be considered.
A Notable Absentee from Crags, Quarry Faces and Grassland
One of the characteristic species of limestone crags, old quarry faces and hilly grassland in
Craven is Sesleria albicans (Blue Moor Grass). It distribution pattern suggests absences
from large areas which are climatically and edaphically suitable (Dixon, 1982). The Haw
and other small limestone outcrops of the Skipton anticline represent “islands” which this
species, with its limited potential for dispersal (Dixon, 1982), may never have reached.
Crags could have provided refugia for this slow-growing stress-tolerant grass during post-
glacial afforestation, but Lookabout is insignificant and possibly unnatural. From such
refugia S. albicans would have spread over relatively short distances as a long-lived
founder member of grassland communities.
Grassland Species
Anthyllis vulneraria (Kidney Vetch) is a calcicole tolerant of a range of moisture regimes,
and was recorded in Yorkshire “In low moist meadows as well as on dry barren limestone
soil, but more abundant on the latter” by Baines (1840). It was lost from Hawbank Rock
between 1889 and 1900 (see Table 1). was found there in the 1940s by the late Mr J. N.
Frankland (pers. comm.), but could not be found recently. It is tempting to suggest that
control of rabbit populations during the war might be relevant to its temporary presence.
27
Botany of I he Haw near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
FIGURE 5(a)
FIGURE 5(b)
l e Haw photographed from the same spot (a) in about 1933 (source unknown) showing
. grassy summit and the valueless 'dark argillaceous limestone and shale' ... ‘in great
Iding planes*' on the southern face of the post-1856 Skipton Rock Quarry: tree-clothed
i 41 hides a similar face in the oldest workings (Haw Bank Quarry), and (b) in 1995. The
t ft made in 1960 is evident.* Description based on annotations to a map in The Arthur
Raistrick Archive, J. B. Priestley Library, University of Bradford.
An ongoing unpublished experiment in collaboration with Dr J. \1. Dixon has shown that
nmercially available A. vulneraria can survive to produce flowers when sown on a
rth-facing spoil slope, but only if shielded from rabbits. Further, when groups of young
ints were set out into 1m x 0.25m gaps made in the ancient tussocky pasture relict of
he North Hills” Q321. they were attacked by rabbits, overgrown by other species (even
Kien protected from rabbits), and lost completely within two years - despite the reported
ocess of A. vulneraria elsewhere in “dense vegetation" (Verkaar & Schenkeveld. 1984).
ipropriatc conditions for this species appear to have existed only spasmodically on The
w.
Srachxpodiutn pinnatum (Tor Grass) was described by Lees (1888) thus: "a species of
sture and thickets, rare but locally abundant: follows the Permian tract very closely".
28
Botany of “The Haw ” near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
However, one of his records was from “near Hambleton” (which implies the quarried
Carboniferous limestone outcrop a few km east of Hawbank Rock). It was found in 1945
by Mr J. N. Frankland (pers. comm.), in quantity “Nearly at the top of Hawbank on the
grassy slope above the Skipton-Bolton Abbey Road”. The same botanist mentioned that
“this grass does not grow anywhere [else] on the mountain limestone”. The main area of
distribution of this calcicolous “worthless grass of neglected open grassland” (Hubbard,
1984) is towards the south of England - suggesting a preference for a low annual rainfall
and high summer temperatures; climatic changes now in progress (Elmes & Free, 1994)
may render The Haw more hospitable to this undesirable (see Hubbard, 1984), stress-
tolerant competitive (Grime, 1979) grass in the future. The population on The Haw may
well have been destroyed through improvement of pasture, but two of the species with
which it is associated on the Magnesian Limestone ( Origanum vulgare and Inula conyza)
are still present together elsewhere on The Haw (see below).
Gentianella amarella (Autumn Gentian) occurs in Yorkshire “on chalk and limestone
hills, as well as on low peaty moors” (Baines, 1840). It was recorded on “Hawbank Rock
and adjoining pastures” (Rotheray, 1900), and is now abundant, not as a grassland species
but as a stress-tolerant ruderal (Grime, 1979) pioneer (see p. 25) of skeletal humic soil, on
the floor of the early 19th century workings of Haw Bank Rock Quarry. Pasture
improvement has evidently been involved in its local restriction to a pioneer role.
Gentianella campestris (Field Gentian) was recorded from a “hillside, Hawbank Quarry”
by Rotheray (1990). It prefers “acid or neutral” soil of “pastures and dunes” (Clapham et
al. 1987). This record is doubtful (J. N. Frankland pers. comm.)', there have been no others.
Inula conyza (Ploughman’s Spikenard) occurred in 1994 in the same roadside habitat
(see below) as Origanum vulgare, a species with which it is associated in “a tall Bromopsis
erecta - Brachypodium pinnatum dominated sward” on the Magnesian Limestone (Lavin &
Wilmore, 1994). It was not recorded from anywhere in the Skipton area by Rotheray, and
is here at the northern limit of its range - a limit which may be extended (see above). It
exists as a biennial or perennial, but reproduces through seeding, and persists by means of a
seed bank. Its germination is inhibited by a leafy canopy (M. J. Fenner, quoted by Grime,
1979); the southerly aspect and the verge-maintenance regime have evidently provided a
suitable microclimate and a suitable level of disturbance to allow some regeneration from
seed.
Origanum vulgare (Sweet Marjoram) although “common” on “dry sandy or calcareous
banks" in Yorkshire (Lees, 1888) was considered worthy of remark by Rotheray, who
described a white flowered form from the “Skibeden limekilns” (Fig. 1). No plants could
be found recently anywhere on The Haw, except for a very small population of typically
pigmented plants in grassy roadside vegetation (with Inula conyza) 500m to the east of the
old limekiln site, and just outside the field wall (around National Grid intersection
SE020530). It is a rhizomatous perennial which regenerates from a large persistent seed
bank (Grime, 1979). The roadside community of tall herbs in which O. vulgare and /.
conyza are associated is so unusual locally as to merit conservation - through occasional
disturbance!
Species of flushed areas
Dactylorhiza incarnata [= Orchis latifolia] (Early Marsh Orchid), was described as very
common in Yorkshire, in marshes and moist meadows by Baines (1840). It was found on
“Rubbish heaps, Hawbank Rock” during the 19th century, but was not found by J. N.
Frankland in the 1940s. The site of those wet spoil heaps is unclear, although two springs
on the northern slope of “ . . . Haw Bank P318" near National Grid intersection SE0153
(Hambler, 1995) must have fed water into heaps later to be planted with conifers.
Isolepis setacea (Bristle Club-rush), recorded from “Hawbank Rock” by Rotheray
(1900), could not be found recently. It has “a scattered and somewhat local distribution
throughout West Yorkshire” (Lavin & Wilmore, 1994) where it is typically associated with
Hydrocotyle vulgaris, another acidophile species, which was found ephemerally in recent
Botc/ny of ' The Haw ” near Skipton: Past, Present and Future 29
ears on a patch of bare silt by Haw Beck in “The North Hills Q321”. An alternative
a llat tyPe amon8 taller herbage in marshy meadows” (Clapham et al 1987) was
resumably once ava'lab^ around Haw Beck, but has been largely destroyed locally, since
16 IX , ’ trough railway construction, culverting and through development of steep spoil
saps along the northern foot of The Haw.
Mentha pulegium (Pennyroyal), “an RDB2 competitive species of . . . wet places
particularly on sandy soil" (Elmes and Free, 1994) has drastically declined countrywide
irough land drainage. It was recorded by Rotheray (1900) as an adventive on “Rubbish
saps Hawbank Quarry”. This suggests the site where Dactylorhiza inearnata was found
tee above ).It has always been extremely rare in northern England, being associated with
gh (>14.4 C) July mean temperatures. The Haw evidently provided an appropriate
icrodimate (on the south-facing slopes of spoil heaps?) during the last part of the 19th
:n‘ury’ 7*nd may do so again. It has at least one contemporary station, on disturbed land
ithm 20km ol The Haw (Mrs P. Abbott pers. comm.).
Parnassta palustris (Grass of Parnassus) was recorded by Rotheray as present on
aw bank Rock in 1888 but “now gone”. The provenance suggests a flushed area, in part of
ve 18th century pasture “The Haw Field and Haw Bank P318” (Hambler, 1995), rather
■uan either a swampy beckside area or the (lushed rubbish heaps (see above) on the hillside
has not been rediscovered in the present century. Like Primula farinosa (see below) it is
" corded in Yorkshire from both wet and dry habitats, e.g. by Baines (1840) "In spongy
*ggy places . . . On dry magnesian limestone hills”, and sometimes the two species occur
2gether. It is likely that they did so on The Haw, and that they were lost through the same
use - pasture improvement. The loss of P. palustris from many 10km squares in Britain
erring & Walters, 1982) must be attributable largely to land drainage. This might have
■en a factor here, although there is still a spring (NE 10529) in improved grassland on the
•rthern slopes of Hawbank (Hambler, 1995).
Primula farinosa ( Bird’s-eye Primrose) was described by Lees (1888) as “confined to
north west half ol the [West] Riding but within that section common”. It was found “in
1 2 mountains and meadows in the West Riding of Yorkshire; Ray cat., p. 252 (1670).
Windsor, Haw Bank [sic] Skipton Rock."; the last record is linked to the period 1855-
58 in Lees’ (1888) Bibliography. It was also recorded by Rotheray (1900) from
iwbank; this seems to be a contemporary record, although Rotheray may be referring to
C- same source as Lees. It has not been tound on The Haw, to the author’s knowledge,
i ring the present century.
The absence ol the word Rock in its provenance leaves open the possibility that
rd's-eye Primrose was found in wetland near Haw Beck. It is not confined to uplands as
L': reference to “a very low and squalid meadow near Knaresborough” by Lees (1888)
;ggests.
Although Primula farinosa is the most widespread member of its genus in the world
(fright Smith et al., 1977), it has a disjunct distribution between and within the
i rboniferous and Magnesian Limestone outcrops of Britain. It is a characteristic species
the Seslerio-caricetum pulicariae (p. 26). and stands of this grassland association “occur
ncipally on steep south and west facing slopes, where the influence of glacial drift is
nimal" (Dixon, 1982). No springs have been recorded on these aspects of Hawbank. but
nay not always be dependant on such a water supply. It can thrive among limestone
■ ks, in calcareous soils w ith drifting water regimes and under trees; Miall and" Carrington
' >62) recorded it from "Rocks east of Malham Tam . . . Mackershaw Wood near Ripon.
a dry limestone bank and in marshy fields near Galplay . . .”.
I Despite its apparent abundance in Yorkshire before the 20th century. Baker (1907)
ntioned it in several of his lists of rare plants, and as one of the fifteen "most interesting
nts about Skipton . . . ”. Samuel Hailstone in Whitaker's (1878) historical work
Mstrated how colourful and spectacular it could be: "covering whole meadows with a fine
ky colour about Conistone and other parts of Craven". Hailstone waxed enthusiastic:
te British flora cannot boast more beautiful productions than this elegant Primula which
30
Botany of “ The Haw ” near Skipton: Past. Present and Future
adorns the hills and wet pastures . . Although the species is described as "locally
abundant” in the British Isles by Clapham el at. (1987), its meadowland habitat has
declined. It would be worthy of reinstatement on The Haw should circumstance permit,
and an experiment is in progress to this end.
Valeriana dioica (Marsh Valerian) was recorded from a “Boggy held Hawbank”. The
most likely site of this once boggy area was where Hawbank met Haw Beck, that is on
"The Haw Field and Haw Bank P318” where the railway now curves southward beneath
the road (Fig. I inset). It was found somewhere on The Haw by Mr J. N. Frankland (pers.
comm.) in the 1940s, but it has not been found recently.
Species of Nutrient-poor Disturbed Land
Species favoured by disturbance of nutrient-poor habitats where “stress conditions are
experienced during the period of growth” have been classified as stress-tolerant ruderals
(Grime, 1979). Established as pioneers on disturbed ground, often biennials, facultative
perennials, or small geophytes, some (such as the Cowslips p. 33) may be sufficiently
competitive to persist even when the vegetation canopy has become closed.
The construction of a tramway into the The Hawbank Quarry was finished in 1794
(Smith & Binns, 1986). In the middle of the following century the tramway passed through
a cut and cover tunnel in the earliest part of the workings (Fig. 1 ) and in 1896 the track was
diverted round it (Dickinson, 1995); later the tramway was destroyed and replaced by a
tarmacadam road. All this disturbance, and later construction of the present access road
(Fig. 1 inset) beside the tramway relict have provided opportunities, over a period of two
centuries, for “interesting” stress tolerant ruderal plants to be become established.
Tragopogon pratensis (Goat’s-beard), which is facultatively annual or perennial, is one
such species recorded by Rotheray, and is still present along the old track. Others, which
have been found at various times, included the three biennial members of the family
Boraginacae considered below.
Anchusa officinalis (Alkanet), a perennial, recorded from Hawbank Rock by Rotheray
(1900), is both a pioneer of waste heaps and a garden escape. It is discussed further on page
32.
Cynoglossum officinale (Hound’s-tongue) is a calcicolous biennial or short lived
perennial species of roadsides and waste ground, and of “grassy places and borders of
woods on rather dry soils” (Clapham et al., 1987), but is “completely absent from areas
above 150m in Great Britain” (de Jong et al., 1990); this upper limit approximates the level
of the tramway mentioned above. It was first recorded in Yorkshire in the 18th century and
Lees’ (1888) list of local records indicates losses with a few reappearances some years
later; observations by de Jong et al. (1990), however, throw doubt on the likelihood of this
species producing a seed bank of buried dormant seeds.
Around the end of the last century C. officinale was “very rare within our area” (Lees,
1888). The species is evidently limited in its British distribution by requiring cold winters
and warm summers. An inland site east of the Pennines would need to have an atypical
microclimate. Despite the large area of disturbed ground produced soon after 1850 as “all
the waste and muck was tipped in the old workings at the entrance to the quarry”
(Dickinson, 1995), and continuing land disturbance there local botanists have not [re-]
recorded this species from Hawbank during the present century. This suggests that climatic
fluctuations around its tolerance limits, and probably the development of the Larch
plantation in the Hawbank workings (see above) were responsible for its local extinction.
Echium vulgare (Viper's Bugloss), another biennial of dry soils was not recorded in the
Skipton district by Rotheray (1900). It was probably not present on The Haw before the
middle of this century, although Miall and Carrington (1862) recorded it from Bolton
Abbey, about 4km to the east. It is now present along the old tramway and on the post-
1960 spoil heaps of Skipton Rock Quarry. Its gradual eastward spread along the haul road
from the heaps nearest the quarry works to more recent heaps has been noticed; flowering
specimens were observed near the works (SE 14534) in 1983, but at least ten years elapsed
31
Botany of “The Haw ” near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
lore flowering specimens were seen 7()()m to the east. Its British distribution is scattered
i i grassy places on light dry soils . . . mainly in the south and east” (Clapham et al.
■-87).
Dipsacus fullonum (Wild Teasel), a biennial, is present sparingly in open vegetation on
ound first disturbed around 1856 when "a shallow cutting was made in the northern side
the forward lace” |ol the quarry workings at “ Haw Bank”]; this is near the remains of
e i bridge which once carried the right-of-way (Fig. 5a) over the cutting.
Reseda luteola (Dryer’s Rocket), another biennial of open habitats, is present in Skipton
ock Quarry descending into the deepest modern workings, and is known to have been
eesent for some years in the Hawbank workings.
Polemoneum caeruleum (Jacob’s Ladder), a rhizomatous perennial herb, was present in
r-91 as a single plant, in a “typical [natural] position on the edge of a steep . . . slope down
trees", on the route of the old tunnel north of the present Skipton Rock Quarry access
id (Mrs C. A. Johnson pers. comm.). It has been sought subsequently, but not found. In
i 'w of the proximity of the find to the remains of Rock Cottage, i.e. >2()()m distant (p. 33)
.'S possible that it is a previously unnoticed long-established garden escape or "throw-out",
hatever its origin, it may have been deliberately removed.
(Ophrys apifera (Bee Orchid) is a stress-tolerant, ruderal-perennial calcicole dependant
non the quarry environment but requiring an absence of disturbance for some years to
l ow its root-tubers to form. It had been present for many years in open vegetation on the
,1 quarry floor by the access road to Skipton Rock Quarry, and has persisted on a small
^grazed, grassy roadside embankment nearby.
chidaceae Species of Meadows
i 'mnadenia conopsea (Fragrant Orchid) is a species growing “commonly on calcareous or
veumstantial soil in ± species-rich grassland . . .” (Clapham et al.. 1987). It was not
.•orded specifically from The Haw by Rotheray (1900), and is described as "a rare and
. al species” on the Magnesian Limestone in West Yorkshire, where it occurs “in
lerally quite small populations” (Lavin & Wilmore, 1994). Two flowering spikes were
jund in 1994 on grassy quarry screes in the old Hawbank workings.
LListera ovata (Common Twayblade) was recorded “In groves, woods, meadows and
vUures, frequent" by Baines (1840); and from woods and a railway bank near Skipton.
hhough not specifically from The Haw, by Rotheray (1900). It is present in a small
rotation, on old grassy hummocks of quarry waste, on the southern flank of “The Haw
rlrk L296" (Fig. 6) around NG intersection SE020530, and in the tussocky grassland relict
Tier (p. 19) of “The North Hills Q321".
• Orchis mascula (Early Purple Orchid) was once a common plant of moist meadows and
itures in Yorkshire (Baines 1840). It was described by Rotheray (1900) thus: "common,
pears annually with pure white flowers on Hawbank Rock”. It has not been found
ently on The Haw. The loss, soon after Rotheray 's book was published, of lime-flushed
hssland below a spring-line at around the 525ft (=160m) contour on the northern slope of
ne Haw Field and Haw Bank P3 1 8” through overwhelming spoil heaps (Hambler. 1995),
i y be significant, as may the “improvement" of relict Haw Bank pastures. Three of its
ical associates recorded by Lavin and Wilmore (1994) on the Magnesian Limestone of
Mst Yorkshire, Car ex sylvatica (Wood Sedge), Primula veris (Cowslip) and Sanicula
opaea (Sanicle), are still present, marginal to the plantation woodland of the heaps.
tdgerow Species
mpanula latifolia (Giant Bellflower) is not present on The Haw now. It occurred by
kibeden lime quarry in [a] hedge” (Rotheray. 1900). It is a species of woods and
laebanks which is “widely distributed but local in Great Britain" (Clapham et al.. 1987)
1 is one of Baker's (1907) fifteen "most interesting plants about Skipton", as was another
cies. Rubus caesius (Dewberry), once found by the Skibeden Limekilns. Both were
orded by J. N. Frankland (pers. comm.) in the 1940s. The Giant Bellflower and Silene
32
Botany of “ The Haw" near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
FIGURE 6
Part of ‘The North Hills Q321 ' (the lorry is travelling westwards on the A59). The Ash tree
is in a tiny grassland relict, with Primula vulgaris , of a period before 1850. The small
Sycamore/Ash copse is on rubbish from a small pre-1850 quarry - Primula veris is a
characteristic spoil colonist among the trees. The foreground slope represents a landscaped
part of Skibeden Quarry.
vulgaris, another perennial of quarries and hedgerows recorded in 1900, were lost from this
vicinity, probably through embankment followed by reclamation afforestation along the
A59 road. Dewberry is still present on The Haw among Blackberry bushes north of the
point where the right-of-way (Fig. 5a) crosses the Skipton Rock Quarry access road.
Clinopodium vulgare (Wild Basil), a calcicolous herb with a discontinuous distribution in
"hedgerows, wood borders and scrubby grassland” (Stace, 1991) is present in such a
habitat near the remains of the old tramway tunnel (Mrs C. A. Johnson pers. comm.).
Garden Escapes and Garden Relict Species
Several species presumed to have originated in gardens were found on The Haw around the
end of the last century and were considered sufficiently interesting to be recorded by
Rotheray at the beginning of the century (Table I ).
Hesperis matronal is (Dame’s Violet) is a common, more-or-less naturalised escape in
waste places (Stace 1991); it persisted on The Haw at least until the 1940s (J. N. Frankland.
pers. comm.), and was present (in 1994) in roadside vegetation only a few hundred metres
from Hawbank - but on the opposite side of Skibeden Beck.
Fragaria moschata (Hautbois Strawberry), once recorded from the “tramway side to
| sic | Hawbank Rock" (Rotheray 1900), has not been noted subsequently either on or near
The Haw.
Anchusa officinalis (Alkanet), mentioned in relation to other Boraginaceae above, was
recorded by Rotheray (1900) not only from Hawbank Rock but from waste ground around
the railway; it is described by Stace (1991) as a "rather impermanent escape on rough and
waste ground and tips" in the British Isles; the garden of “Rock Cottage" (Hambler, 1995)
Botany of “ The Haw " near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
33
ms a likely source for any Hawbank Rock population, but the species has, apparently,
persisted.
y >ome garden relic species have been found in the immediate vicinity of the Rock
ttage remains. These are Hypericum calcynium (Rose ot Sharon), and Centaurea
n ntana (Perennial Cornflower), which have survived from a garden abandoned over 40
tars ago.
(Cotoneaster horizontalis (Wall Cotoneaster) has been identilied (at a distance!) about
« ()m north east of the cottage, but nearer to some temporary quarry buildings (shown on
• six inch OS map of 1X34). A single specimen grows high up on the only south-facing
i aestonc quarry face on The Haw.
-Relict borders around an office site at Far Skibeden abandoned in 1991 still contain
i rden shrubs (including Comas alha and Berheris thunbergii ), trees including
ipressoevparis leylandii, and herbaceous plants including Narcissus (Daffodil) cultivars,
i d Lysimachia punctata (Dotted Loosestrife).
Hiherately Introduced Garden Plants or "Garden I hrowouts
ac Haw has been particularly prone to receipt of perennial herbaceous garden material,
her through dumping or perhaps by deliberate ' unofficial attempts to improve the
npearance of the quarried area. One example, noticed in 1995, was the appearance ot
m issus agg. (Daffodil) cultivars on the steep north-facing slope of the spoil heap which
-.vers the north-eastern corner of “The Haw Park L2966 . The annual appearance, noticed
rroughout the past decade, of Meconopsis cambrica (Welsh Poppy) on the same slope
ay also be the result of deliberate introduction.
teecies of recently rehabilitated areas
reclamation during the past ten years has been evident on new embankments and other
rrips of land bordering the A59 Skipton/Harrogate road east of Skibeden: this has been in
ire form of seeding with grasses, and dense planting of trees and shrubs protected Irom
bbits by enclosures. Native grasses and woody species are present, and will restore to
t ie Haw some of its earlier wooded character.
On the northern side of “The Haw Park L296" very steep ca. 30° spoil (east of NG line
(01) is partly wooded with small Sycamore and Hazel trees as a result ot planting during
ice second half of the present century. Further east, footing “The North Hills Q321 less
eep slopes of spoil, only partly covering the original land surface (p. 19). were seeded in
984 with a mixture of native grassland plants including Agrostis stolonifera (Creeping
cent) and a variety of the stress-tolerant competitor Festuca rubra (Red Fescue) which was
apected to become dominant in the long term. Native trees and shrubs were also planted.
The attentions of rabbits have been monitored, and although part ot their influence has
ceen beneficial in increasing biological activity and diversity on and under the spoil surface
Dixon & Hambler. 1993). a less beneficial influence has been to damage woody
introductions and to remove all potential inflorescences from herbs - including not only
nthvllis vuleraria (Kidney Vetch) (see p. 26) but rabbit - resistant species such as Lotus
vniculatus Bird's-foot Trefoil. Trifolium repens (White Clover) and Achtlleamdlefoltum
Yarrow) sown with the arass and even from immigrant species usually avoided, notab >
rimula veris (Cowslip) (Hambler et al„ 1995). An exclosure experiment is in progress to
-ssess the magnitude of the rabbits' deleterious influence on individual species and on the
fetation as a whole. . .. , , .
Prior to reclamation, the two most abundant pioneer colonists ot spoil embankments
ave been the drought resistant evergreen Sedan, acre ( Biting Stonecrop) on south-facing
opes (along the A59 road), and Fragaria vesca (Wild Strawberry) on the north-facing
opes.
wj ' specie^ populations described by Rotheray (1900) - Origanum vulgare (trom
34
Botany of “ The Haw" near Skipton: Past, Present and Future
Skibeden Limekilns) and Orchis mascula (from Hawbank Rock) - were white-flowered or
had a white-flowered component. A solitary magenta-flowered umbellate Primula
specimen (with a short footstalk) was recently found among typical Primroses in the light
Ash/Hawthom copse near Lookabout by Mr E. A. Higson. It is likely to be a Primula
vulgaris variant, as “it is not uncommon to find these ‘bunch Primroses’ in the wild” (Mrs
Barbara Shaw pers. comm ). No Primula cultivars have been found in the vicinity.
Undesirable plants
Inevitably opinions will differ as to what species it is “desirable” to plant or to retain.
Some of the author’s own opinions regarding alien trees are self-evident! Further, it may be
difficult or impossible to retain some attractive, native serai species (orchids, etc.) without
ad hoc. long-term maintenance. One spontaneous and most unwelcome addition to the flora
of The Haw discovered in 1995 in the old Haw Bank workings is the almost ineradicable,
aggressive colonist Fallopio japonica (Japanese Knotweed).
Conclusions
The Haw, despite and because of its long history of human exploitation, has provided a
wide variety of transient habitats for native (sometimes rare) herbaceous plants, and (by
implication) for many animal species. Construction of a railway towards the end of the
19th century and recent culverting destroyed most of the available wetland along its
northern foot; improvement of such hill pasture as has escaped quarrying, since the
beginning of the century has reduced its potential species-richness. It is these human
influences, together with the meeting of a perceived need for the screens to hide the "deep
and awful chasm” described by Bailey (1852) which have reduced the potential of the
north-facing Haw Bank slope with its 19th century spoil heaps as a refuge for native trees
and “interesting” herbs. Unfortunately, until very recently, all trees planted on The Haw
have been aliens, including Sycamore, “a tree which no responsible person should plant
without considering the long term consequences” (Rackham 1986).
Quarrying has destroyed much ancient grassland and scrub on The Haw, including lime-
flushed areas on the rocky Hawbank, but continues to create ephemeral habitats for
interesting early-seral species. Unfortunately, 19th century reclamation was unsympathetic
to a stress-tolerant calcicolous flora - flushed “rubbish”, rich in orchids and hydrophile
herbs was afforested. In an area hemmed-in by neutral grassland and gritstone hills
encouragement of a species-rich, predominantly calcicolous flora comprising both
herbaceous and woody species might be considered fitting whenever rehabilitation of land
is needed. In view of a comment by Rackham (1986) concerning endangered tree species,
Hazel might be the most appropriate component, with Ash as a companion, in any
reclamation woodland. However, when waste disposal sites such as that now in operation
in the Skibeden quarries are eventually capped and planted, careful attention must be paid
to the potential rooting-depth of any introductions, or of self-sown trees far into the future.
Quarrying has provided still water habitats, in the form of small pools (p. 23), not
previously available on The Haw. The “dub”, formed during periods when that part of the
working Skipton Rock Quarry now east of NG line E015 is not pumped out, could provide
alkaline, clear-water aquatic habitats in the future. Such bodies of water are rare; they
accumulate assemblages of uncommon plants, and are therefore potentially valuable after
quarrying ceases, for conservation, and as amenity resources e.g. for angling (cf. the dub at
Smellows Quarry - NG SD943527).
Floristic links between the Carboniferous and Magnesian Limestones have been
suggested through the occurrence of several rare species on The Haw. When quarrying and
landfill have ceased, the remains of the hill could thus have considerable potential as a site
of both scientific and conservation interest. This account shows that The Haw, partly as a
result of quarrying, has provided niches for a number of species at the extremes of their
climatic ranges. The prediction that within 50-100 years the UK might be generally 2°C
warmer (Elmes & Free, 1994) makes such a site of particular ecological interest. Recorded
Botany of l he Haw" near Skipton: Past. Present and Future 35
Productions or re-introductions of less-common and endangered plants native to Craven
would, in the opinion of the author, be a legitimate aim.
' UMMARY
he Haw near Skipton has been subjected to gross changes in its topography, and to
lodified land-use during the past two centuries. Related changes in both vegetation and
■ ora have becn inferred from literature and from recent observation, and reasons for the
resence or absence ol interesting plant species have been suggested. Quarrying has
rovided habitats lor some of these species - railway work, pasture improvement, and
indscape “reclamation” have tended to reduce the availability of such habitats.
t .CKNOWLEDGMENTS
'Icon Ltd. kindly provided a grant towards my travelling expenses and allowed access to
■kipton Rock Quarry. Discussion and correspondence with persons having knowledge of
ne Haw have been important: I am especially grateful to the late Mr J. N. Frankland. to
Ir M. J. Ingham, and to Mrs Monika Butler and Mr John Butler, and to others mentioned
i the text. Stewart Davidson produced the maps. I regret mistranscription of Mr J. N.
rank land s initials in my previous (1995) paper, and a similar error in a reference to an
rrticle by D. J. Williams ( 1981) in that paper.
‘EFERENCES
a i ley , B. ( 18.52). Ilkley and the Pearls of C raven or Sketches of the Prettiest Spots in that
Interesting District. Harrison, Bingley.
aines, H. ( 1 840). The Flora of Yorkshire. Longman, Halifax.
aker, J. G. (1907). Botany, in The Victoria History of the Counties of England: A History
of Yorkshire. Volume 1. Ed. W. Page, pp. 111-172, University of London Institute of
I Historical Research, [Reprinted in 1974 by Dawson. London. |
lapham, A. R., I utin L G. and Moore, D. M. (1987). Flora of the British Isles. 3rd
.edition. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
arlisle, A. and Brown, A. H. F. (1968). Biological Flora of the British Isles. Pinus
sylvestris L. Journal of Ecology 56: 269-307.
ickinson. J. M. (1995). Emhsay Steam Railway - On Either Side: A Lineside Guide.
Yorkshire Dales Museum Trust, Skipton.
txon. J. M. (1982). Biological Flora of the British Isles. Seslesia albicans Kit, ex
'Schultes, Journal of Ecology 70: 667-684.
xon. J. M. and Hambler. D. J. (1993). Wildlife and reclamation ecology: rabbit middens
on seeded limestone quarry-spoil. Environmental Conservation 20: 65-73.
I mes, G. W. and Free. A., eds. (1994). Climate change and rare species in Britain.
Institute of Terrestrial Ecology Research Publication No. 8. HMSO. London,
ankland, J. N. (1987). One hundred years of botany in Craven. Craven Naturalists &
Scientific Association Centenary Publication 1887-1987. pp. 6-8. Cyclostyled.
: ime, J. P. (1979). Plant Strategies and Vegetation Processes. Wiley. Chicester.
. imbler, D. J. ( 1995). “The Haw": an eighteenth century greenfield site near Skipton. The
Naturalist 120: 51-64.
imbler. D. J., Dixon. J. M. and Cotton D. E. (1990). The relative potentials of six grass
cultivators for rehabilitation and stabilisation of a limestone quarry spoil-bank.
Environmental Conservation 17:149-156.
ibbard. C. E„ ( 1984). Grasses. 3rd ed.. Penguin Books. Harmondsworth.
Jong, T. J.. Klinkhamer, P. G. L. and Boothman. L. A. (1990). Biological Flora of the
British Isles. Cynoglossum officinale L. Journal of Ecology 78: 1123-1 144.
< vin, J. C. and Wilmore, G. T. D.. eds (1994). The West Yorkshire Plant Atlas. Bradford
Metropolitan Council, Bradford.
es. F. A. (1888). The Flora of West Yorkshire. Lovel & Reeve. London. [Fascimile. ed.
M. R. D. Seaward, ( 1978). EP Publishing. Wakefield.]
36
Book Reviews
Miall, L. C. and Carrington. D. (1862). The Flora of the West Riding. W. Pamplin, London.
Perring, F. H. and Walters. S. M. (1982). Atlas of the British Flora. 3rd ed. Nelson,
London.
Rackham. O. (1986). The History of the Countryside. Dent, London.
Rotheray, L. (1900). Flora of Skipton & District. Craven Naturalists’ & Scientific
Association. Skipton.
Smith, F. W. and Binns, D. (1986). Railways in the Yorkshire Dales I. The Skipton and
llkley Line , Skipton-llkley, The Yorkshire Dales Railway Today, Hawhank Quarry
Tramway . Wyvem Publications, Skipton.
Smith. F. W. & Rankin, W. M. (1903). Geographical Distribution of Vegetation in
Yorkshire. Part II: Harrogate and Skipton District. The Geographical Journal pp. 149-
1 78, map p. 236.
Stace, C. (1991). New Flora of the British Isles. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
Tansley, A. G. (1949). The British Islands and their Vegetation. Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge.
Verkaar, H. J. & Schenkeveld, A. J. (1984). On the ecology of short-lived forbs in chalk
grasslands: life-history characteristics. New Phytologist 98: 59-72.
Whitaker, T. D. (1878). The History and Antiquities of the Deanery of Craven, in the
County of York, Joseph Dodgson. Leeds, [Republished 1973.]
Wright Smith. W„ Forrest. G, & Fletcher, H. R. (1977). The genus Primula: Section
Farinosae. Plant Monograph Reprints. 2: 579-647, Gantler, Vaduz, Liechtenstein.
BOOK REVIEWS
Alien Plants of the British Isles by E. J. Clement and M. C. Foster. Pp. xviii + 590.
Botanical Society of the British Isles, London. 1994. £15.00. Available from: BSB1
Publications, Green Acre, Wood Lane, Oundle, Peterborough PE8 5TP.
This work provides a mine of information of inestimable value to those studying the British
flora, in that it covers not only all those alien plants included in C. A. Stace's New Flora of
the British Isles (1991, Cambridge University Press), but also all other alien species
gleaned from 1,287 published sources and 86 correspondents.
The word “alien" is used in a broad sense to include all those plants, thought to have
arrived via human activities, often referred to as “adventives’, “casuals’, “ephemerals”,
“exotics” and “introductions”, which have or have not become established in the British
Isles. A catalogue of c. 4200 taxa (excluding grasses), 885 species of which have become
established, forms the main body of the text: each plant entry contains succinct yet detailed
information on means of introduction, frequency, status and distribution, origin and
published sources, and many entries provide locations of voucher specimens. The
systematic catalogue (399 pp.) is complemented by a comprehensive and well designed
alphabetic index (145 pp.) of Latin and English names, including synonyms, compiled by
R. G. Ellis.
All-in-all, an invaluable compendium of data, establishing a baseline on which to
evaluate accurately the ever-changing nature of our flora, whereby indigenous species are
increasingly usurped by the insidious invasion of alien plants.
MRDS
Book Reviews
37
Id Guide to tho Palms of the Americas by Andrew Henderson, Gloria Galeano and
i rtrigo Bernal. Pp. ix + 353, also 64 pages of full colour plates. Princeton University
ss. 1995. £50.00.
I s excellently produced guide is a model ot its kind, not only in providing keys and
criptions for field taxonomists but also in containing a wealth of information on the
logy, distribution and economic uses of this important group of tropical and subtropical
nts.
! "he area covered by this work includes USA states bordering the Caribbean, the
ibbean islands, Mexico, Central America, and Brazil and neighbouring countries of
nth America. This region contains many sensitive ecosystems, particularly tropical rain
v;sts, which are highly vulnerable to increasing human disturbance and exploitation. On
other hand, the conspicuous exotic features of palms have ensured them worldwide
i oularity : their introduction into gardens, parks and palm houses reflects a desire to create
I east some element of tropical landscape there.
i,}uite clearly, a detailed knowledge of this fascinating group of plants is timely.
' rkshire naturalists will derive pleasure from the knowledge that one of our famous
■ decessors, Richard Spruce (1X17-1893), who spent fifteen years of his life as botanist
1 explorer of the Amazon and Andes, was responsible for one of the first major
, onomic works on Amazonian palms, published in the Journal of the Linnean Society,
tatty 1 1: 65-183 ( 1869).
MRDS
dlustrial Ecology and Global Change edited by R. Socolow, C. Andrews, h. Berkhout
.1 V. Thomas. Pp. xxix + 500, with numerous line drawings and tables. CUP. 1994.
55.00 hardback.
nicies Diversity in Space and Time by Michael L. Rosenzweig. Pp. xxi + 436. with
merous line drawings. CUP. 1995. £50.00 hardback.
.unaging Habitats for Conservation edited by William .1. Sutherland and David A.
1111. Pp. xi + 399, with numerous line drawings & b/w plates, also 8 pages of full colour
ites. CUP. 1995. £17.95 paperback.
ith these three books, Cambridge University Press maintain their excellent record as
ihblishers of key ecological works.
Industrial Ecology and Global Change is a major outcome of the Global Change
v.;titute meeting held in Colorado in July 1992. Numerous authors contribute chapters
! der five headings: (1) vulnerability and adaptation. (2) the grand cycles: disruption and
pair. (3) toxics and the environment, (4) industrial ecology in firms, and (5) industrial
alogy in policy-making. The individual contributions are effectively held together by
ilful editorial work which includes the provision of an overview, introductory matter to
. ch of the above headings, an end piece and a useful index (a feature all too often lacking
edited conference proceedings). This is an important work on a subject that cannot be
lored: the repercussions of such environmental changes have local and regional
plications as well as a global impact, as yet not fully addressed by biologists.
Species Diversity in Space and Time provides a valuable text on ecological dynamics and
important aid to those studying biodiversity - a topic currently receiving considerable
, -dia attention; but without a knowledge of taxonomy, a subject now little studied in
jher education throughout Europe, how can diversity be measured? The well written (and
adable) text, complemented throughout by illustrative (mainly graphical) work, provides
solid foundation from which to determine and interpret the capacity of particular habitats
d of areas of different sizes to accommodate certain numbers of species and to evaluate
38
Book Reviews
change in them over time. As the author appropriately quotes on his pre-title page “As
evolutionary ecologists race to understand biodiversity before it is too late, this book will
help set the agenda for diversity research into the next century”.
Managing Habitats for Conservation provides a valuable guide to the management of
British habitats, with individual chapters by different authors devoted to (1) coastal
habitats, (2) rivers, canals and dykes, (3) waterbodies, (4) reedbeds, fens and acid bogs, (5)
grasslands, (6) farmland, (7) lowland heathland. (8) upland moors and heaths, (9)
woodland and scrub, and (10) urban areas. Additional chapters are provided on the
principles of ecological management, site management planning, and access. Naturally, it
would be difficult to encompass all practical aspects of habitat management within such a
volume, but it is clear from the pragmatic approach to conservation that such methodology
as is advocated is based on both scientific principles and on the practical experience of the
contributors. The text is well complemented by line drawings and plates to illustrate these
skills.
MRDS
The Craft of Natural Dyeing: Clowing Colours from the Plant World by Jenny Dean.
Pp. 64, with full colour illustrations. Search Press/Bums & Oates, Tunbridge Wells. 1994.
£6.95 paperback.
This is a very attractive introduction to vegetable dyeing, full of coloured illustrations that
take the reader step by step through the basic methods and show the results obtained. The
use of grammes rather than ounces without a conversion table will not appeal to the dyer of
more mature years having only a weighing machine. Each dye plant is described. Lichens
are given such brief mention that a novice would be unlikely to employ them successfully.
Perhaps this is no bad thing in terms of conservation. I particularly liked the chapter
describing how to grow dye plants in your own back garden. It is a pity that the author does
not include a list of other books, such as Craft of the Dyer by Karen Casselman (Dover
Publications, New York 1993), to which a novice dyer might graduate. At around £7 for 60
pages of text, Jenny Dean’s book is not cheap but the high quality coloured illustrations
and very readable text will appeal to readers.
DHSR
Darwin’s Laboratory: Evolutionary Theory and Natural History in the Pacific edited
by R. MacLeod and P. F. Rehbock. Pp x + 540, with 16 figures. University of Hawai'i
Press, Honolulu. 1994 . $45.00.
The title of this book is perhaps a little deceptive. If the Pacific basin was indeed Charles
Darwin’s “laboratory” - and the concept is a good one - this account is largely of
happenings in the laboratory after he had left. In their introduction the editors say (p. 6):
"Regrettably, the literature of Darwin and Darwinism in the Pacific is in a very early state.”
This may be the case, but the time that Darwin spent on some of the Pacific islands, in New
Zealand and Australia has in fact been quite thoroughly documented, although this work is
not very fully reviewed here. There is little or nothing, for example, on Darwin's
attendance at an Aboriginal corroboree, his descriptions of the customs of Maoris in New
Zealand, or his climb into the interior mountains of Tahiti. Exceptions are a careful
entwining of the work of Darwin and that of his long-time American correspondent, James
Dwight Dana, in a well-written Chapter 1 by D. R. Stoddart, entitled “This coral episode”
and some mention of the Tahitian people in Janet Browne’s "Missionaries and the Human
Mind” (Chapter 9). The former is a particularly appropriate essay, as it was the “coral reef
theory”, the notion that fringing reefs, barrier reefs and atolls formed a continuous series,
that represented Darwin’s first flirtation with the idea of gradual change throughout time.
The book is, however, an outstanding contribution to the study of Darwin’s legacy in the
Pacific area, the way in which successive generations of scientists attempted to apply some
Book Reviews
39
Darwin’s ideas, as set out in On the Origin of Species, The Descent of Man. The
t 1 cession of the Emotions In Man and Animals, and elsewhere, in interpreting the plants
: animals, and particularly, the peoples, of the Pacific. Of particular interest are Chapter
Darwin's Biogeography and the Oceanic Islands of the Central Pacific. 1859-1909” by
-\lison Kay, and Chapter 3, Jane Camerini’s “Evolution, Biogeography and Maps: an
y History of Wallace’s Line”.
v slightly different approach is shown in Janet Garber's "Darwin's Correspondents in
Pacific: through the Looking Glass to the Antipodes”, in Chapter 6. This carefully
lyses Darwin’s network of correspondents - in Australia, New Zealand, Hawai’i. South
erica, the East Indies - describing how they fed information and specimens to him, and
they in turn were inlluenced by his ideas.
he work concludes with a collection of four chapters (13-16) on "Social Darwinisms”,
ial Darwinism may be delined in terms of attempts that have been made to apply
i win’s ideas, particularly that of struggle between races, into socio-economic and
ideal practice: it was an important doctrine in the late 19th and early 20th century. The
ral form is used to emphasise that the manner of the transfer has been different in
Icerent locations and at different times. Most examples are taken from Australia (Chapter
15), and New Zealand (14) but instances from Hawai'i and Japan are included in the
il chapter. (There is, alas, no concluding section binding the various themes together.)
’he book is excellently produced, having a very full "scholarly apparatus " of notes and
liographic references for each chapter, a detailed index, and a short biographical
t.ement concerning each of the 19 contributors.
PHA
ter hooks received
ke Correspondence of Charles Darwin. Volume 9. 1861. Edited by Frederick
irrkhardt, Duncan M. Porter, Joy Harvey and Marsha Richmond Pp. xxxvi + 609.
t h 9 b/w plates. Cambridge University Press. 1994. £40.00.
r est volume in this authoritative work - a model of its kind - which covers a particularly
'.y and productive year in Darwin's life: see Naturalist 118: 16 (1993) and earlier for
iews of previous volumes.
i arles Darwin’s Letters. A Selection 1825-1859. Edited by Frederick Burkhardt. Pp.
wj + 249. with 1 b/w plate & illustrated endpapers. Cambridge University Press. 1996.
1.95 hardback.
• those unable to afford the above-mentioned monumental work, one of its editors has
.vided a selection of important and fascinating letters which give us an insight, through
ly experience, scientific observations, personal concerns and friendships, into one of the
jor figures in the history of science.
e Oxford Book of Creature edited by Fleur Adcock and Jacqueline Simms. Pp. xii +
7. Oxford University Press. 1995. £17.99 hardback.
fascinating and sometimes amusing selection of prose and poetry' from the pens of
ateur and professional naturalists, philosophers, explorers, diarists and novelists, as well
poets, from many countries.
40
Book Reviews
Plants and their Names. A Concise Dictionary by Roger Hvam and Richard
Pankhurst. Pp. x + 545. Oxford University Press. 1995. £14.99 hardback.
A compact but highly informative botanical aid, providing not only a valuable reference
source to c. 16,000 scientific and vernacular plant names, but also information on folk-lore,
economic use, geographical distribution, etc. to please the browser.
Index to Clive Stace’s New Flora of tho British Isles by R. Gwynn Ellis. Pp. ii + 1 10.
1993. National Museum of Wales, Cathays Park. Cardiff CF1 3NP. £5.00 paperback (plus
70p postage & packing).
A detailed index to at least species level, with extensive synonymy, sadly lacking from
Stace’s otherwise remarkable Flora - see Naturalist 117: 1 12 ( 1992).
A Natural History of the Hawaiian Islands. Selected Readings II. Edited by E. Alison
Kay. Pp. xii + 520. University of Hawaii Press. 1995. $24.95 paperback.
A second selection of previously published key papers on island natural history, many of
course paying particular attention to endemism. The reasonable price of this volume is due
to the facsimile presentation of the original papers, but additional textual apparatus and
commentary would have been useful.
The Natural History of Puget Sound Country by Arthur R. Kruckeberg. Pp. xxiv +
469, with numerous diagrams, maps & b/w plates. University of Washington Press. 1995.
$34.95 paperback.
A lavishly illustrated and scholarly work describing the impact of both natural influences
and human impact, past and present, on a diverse landscape centred upon major water
bodies. Biologists and conservationists will find much to delight and stimulate them in this
work.
Borneo Log. The Struggle for Sarawak's Forests by William W. Bevis. Pp. x + 245,
with b/w illustrations. University of Washington Press. 1995. $19.95 hardback.
Although essentially a book on the environmental politics of a faraway country, this
thought-provoking narrative on the unnecesary destruction of rainforest and its impact on
the lives of the native population deserves worldwide readership.
‘The Naturalist’ is available in microform
UNIVERSITY MICROFILMS INTERNATIONAL
; 00 North Zeeb Road
>ept PR
Avnn Arbor, Mi 48106
USA
White Swan House
Godstone
Surrey RH9 8LW
England
Binding
Why not have your copies of The Naturalist bound into volumes?
One year’s issues per volume, or alternatively two years in one
volume at less cost than binding as two separate volumes. We are
also experienced and expert in the re-binding and repairing of all
books.
Spink & Thackray
Broomfield Bindery
Back Broomfield Crescent
LEEDS LS6 3BP Telephone: 0113 2780353
The Irish Naturalists’ Journal
A quarterly journal of Irish natural history
Edited by Dr Robin Govier
Annual subscription £12.50. IR £14.00
Further information from the Editor. INJ
Medical & Biological Centre, Lisburn Road,
Belfast BT9 7BL
’nnted in Great Britain by Titus Wilson & Son, Kendal
ISSN 0028-0771
Latest publication of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
THE FRESHWATER CRUSTACEA OF YORKSHIRE
a faunistic & ecological survey
by
GEOFFREY FRYER
The crustacean fauna of Yorkshire reflects the great physiographic diversity of the
region. Adopting an ecological approach, this book considers the Yorkshire fauna in
relation to climate, topography, geology, soils and water chemistry, always keeping in
mind that it is dealing with living organisms whose habits, requirements and
physiological limitations determine exactly where they live.
Matters covered include the ecological background; faunal assemblages and their
regional attributes; an analysis of the factors that determine distribution patterns, many
of which are mapped; wide geographical aspects; and conservation. Large areas, such
as the Pennines, Howgill Fells, North Eastern uplands and the lowland plains are
surveyed. So too are localised regions including Whemside, the Malham area, lowland
heaths, and the largest lakes, as well as habitats such as upland tarns, seepages, cold
springs, small lowland ponds, inland saline waters. Notes are given on every species
recorded, including parasitic forms.
Price £16.00 (plus £2.00 per copy p.&p.) Special offer to member of the Yorkshire
Naturalists’ Union £13.50 (plus £2.00 p.&p.)
Please make cheques payable to Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
Available from: Professor M. R. D. Seaward, Department of Environmental
Science, University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1DP.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE
A Fungus Flora of Yorkshire. 1985. 296 pp. Hardback. £10.00 incl. p&p
Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire. 1 989. 380 pp. Paperback. £ 1 7.50
incl. p&p. Unbound. £12.15 incl. p&p.
Mammals of Yorkshire. 1985. 256 pp. £7.50 incl. p&p.
Protection of Birds Committee Centenary Year, 1891-1991. 73 pp. £6.00
incl. p&p.
Moths and Butterflies of Spurn ,1991. 124 pp. £6 incl. p&p
Cheques should be made payable to Y.N.U.
From: Mrs J. Payne, 15 Broad Lane, Cawood, Selby, North Yorkshire, Y08 0SQ.
Telephone: 0757 268242
pril-June 1996
Number 1017
Volume 121
QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
The Haunts of the Hairy Canary
— Peter Skidmore
The Aculeate Wasps and Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of
Shipley Glen in Watsonian Yorkshire with a ‘Then’ and ‘Now’
Comparison
— Michael E. Archer
Hedgerow Dating: a Critique
— Richard Muir
Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of a Yorkshire Salt-Marsh
— Roy Crossley
Tree-Mallow ( Lavatera arborea L.) in S. E. Yorkshire
— Peter J. Cook
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
ditor M. R. D. Seaward, MSc. PhD. DSc, FLS, The University, Bradford BD7 1DP
Notice to Contributors to ‘The Naturalist’
Manuscripts (two copies if possible), typed double-spaced on one side of the paper only
with margins at top and left-hand at least 2.5cm wide, should be submitted. Latin names of
genera and species, but nothing else, should be underlined. S.I. Units should be used
wherever possible. Authors must ensure that their references are accurately cited, and that
the titles of the journals are correctly abbreviated. Volumes of The Naturalist for the years
1886 to 1975 have been retrospectively numbered 11 to 100 to accord with numbering
before and after this period (see YNU Bulletin no. 3, pp. 21-22 1985); please cite these
volume numbers in all references. Table and text-figures should be prepared on separate
sheets of paper. Drawings and graphs, drawn about twice the linear size they are to appear,
should be in jet-black Indian ink, and legends should not be written on the figures.
Publishable manuscripts not conforming to the above requirements will be returned
for alteration.
Photographic Plates
Readers of The Naturalist will have noticed that the number of photographic illustrations
has increased in recent years. Good clear photographs, suitably captioned, to accompany
articles or as independent features are always welcome.
To encourage this development, a long-standing member of the YNU, who wishes to
remain anonymous, has most generously offered to make a donation, the income from
which would finance the publication of a plate or equivalent illustration in future issues
whenever possible. The editor, on behalf of the YNU, wishes to record this deep
appreciation of this imaginative gesture.
© Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union — 1996
Single Copies may be made of single articles in this journal provided that due acknow-
ledgement is made and the copies are for non-profit making educational or private use.
Copying of more than one article or multiple copying of a single article is forbidden unless
special permission has been obtained from the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union. Permission is
granted for the use of brief quotations in published work provided that acknowledgement
of the source is clearly stated, but the use of substantial sections of text and any illustrative
matter requires the express permission of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
All matters other than subscriptions should be addressed to:
Mr John A. Newbould, Tapton House 30 Moorlands, Wickersley
Rotherham S66 OAT
Items which should be sent to the above include: All membership applications, changes
of address, resignations and problems concerning non-receipt of any of the YNU’s
publications. Please quote the membership number printed underneath your address on all
correspondence.
Subscriptions (unless covered by Banker’s Order) should continue to be sent to:
Mr Derek Allen, c/o Doncaster Museum, Chequer Road
Doncaster DN 1 2AE
The Naturalist is issued free to individual members of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
and to Affiliated Societies.
Institutions and Subscribers £20.00
Registered Charity No. 224018
THE HAUNTS OF THE HAIRY CANARY
HISTORY MUSEUw
-7 MIN 1996
PURCHASED
PETER SKIDMORE I GENERAL LIBRARY
Presidential Address to The Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union, York, December 2 1995
he "Hairy Canary”, Phaonia jaroschewskii, is one of our rarest British Muscid flies, for
> 'hich the British headquarters are Thome and Hatfield Moors. Peatlands have been the
abject of intensive, nationwide field surveys during the past decade and this fly is
■istricted to lowland raised mires (Skidmore 1985). Of some one hundred thousand
1 luscids collected by pitfall, water and Malaise trapping exercises throughout the United
kingdom over this period, and identified by myself and Dr A. C. Pont, former Muscid
oecialist at the Natural History Museum in London, some two hundred specimens
' elonged to this species. All but one male were from Thome and Hatfield Moors.
I first became aware of Thorne and Hatfield Moors when I joined the Manchester
ntomological Society in 1950 (Skidmore 1992), and when in 1954 I joined the
Manchester biological supplies firm of Flatters & Garnett Ltd., I learnt of a close friend of
Wilfred Garnett, one William Bunting of Thome. Sharing Wilfred’s interest in aquatic life,
re was showing that, in terms of the water beetle fauna, Thome Moor was second to none
In the United Kingdom (Bunting, I954a,b, 1955a,b).
In June 1965 1 moved to Doncaster and came to have first-hand knowledge of Thome
rnd Hatfield Moors, and William Bunting.
Without doubt, were it not for William Bunting, these moors would have been
ompletely destroyed during the past 40 years, so any discussion of these localities should
^knowledge this remarkable man. In her masterly account of Thorne Moor and of his
i ivolvement in its protection, Caufield (1991) succinctly describes and dedicates the book
.to William Bunting, Naturalist, Pamphleteer. Rebel, bad-tempered old sod. and
inspiration”. A brusque Barnsley man, he possessed a range of amazing qualities which
','ere gained, or more likely honed to perfection, through service with the International
) rigade during the Spanish Civil War and later with the Partisans in former Jugoslavia.
V.fter the war, these talents were turned to the cause of Wildlife Conservation and the
■ rotection of Human Rights. He was the bane of money-grabbing developers, proud
iccademics and faceless bureaucrats, and was recognised in the highest echelons of the legal
frofession as the authority on Common Law in Britain. Whether in the courtroom, the
cientific or public meeting, or the Public Inquiry, his approach relied on resolute tenacity
i f purpose, a razor-sharp intellect, brilliant tactics and a refusal to consider compromise, or
[ i fight real battles according to Queensbury rules. As Caufield (1991) pointed out. his
’ ften outrageously abrasive manner was a deliberate test of one’s commitment to the cause.
ikewise his barrage of astonishing facts and deliberate misinformation tested the metal of
Us entourage, and, when used in the courtroom, would leave his learned adversaries totally
vewildered. In such hazardous situations, barristers, once wrong-footed, would fall like
i inepins under Bunting’s lethal onslaught. Once down, their incompetence would be
lighlighted for all to see. and their reputation pulverised. Inevitably. Bunting made far
I lore enemies than friends, but those privileged to gain the latter status knew him to be a
erson of total sincerity and integrity, boundless generosity and great warmth. He also
.'assessed the unexpected quality of bringing out the best in his co-workers. After a long
md distressing illness, he finally passed away in early 1995. Whilst no-one could step into
■is shoes, his spirit certainly lives on in those he inspired, and through whom they share a
amnion bond.
It was in April 1969 that, through Bunting, I became involved in the battle for Thome
loor (Skidmore, 1970). Thus began a sustained and often unnerving campaign, in which
■ad often flew over Thome Moor as peat-diggers attempted to hound visitors from the
loor. Co-operation with Bunting inevitably involved a degree of isolation from
lainstream naturalists who were outraged or intimidated by his manner, and incredulous of
aturalist 121 ( 1996)
42
The Haunts of the Hairy Canary - Presidential Address
his scientific assertions. I recall the total disbelief with which his claims regarding the
occurrence on Thome Moors of such creatures as the Harvest Mouse and the ground-beetle
Dromius longiceps were met, until they were discovered by others (Howes, 1973a,b;
Heaver & Eversham, 1991).
With Bunting’s departure from the arena about 1983, as a result of his increasing
infirmity, developments took a surprising turn. Predictably, peat-extraction rates massively
increased as Fisons introduced peat-milling to both moors, but their actions precipitated
increased opposition. That they officially intended total destruction of the moors was
clearly inferred in Caufield (1991), who quotes the company’s Thome Moor operation
manager, Donal Egan, as saying “Fisons were about the last to adopt surface-milling. If we
had been earlier, we might not have a problem about Thome Moors, because it wouldn’t be
worth fighting for.” The visual impact of these moors reduced by peat-milling to vast
brown unvegetated deserts stirred even the faintest hearts, and a Buntingesque spirit re-
asserted itself. The newly formed, and initially somewhat timid Thome and Hatfield Moors
Conservation Forum was galvanised into action, along with other bodies like the Royal
Society for the Protection of Birds and the Yorkshire Wildlife Trust. Friends of the Earth
joined in and a full-blooded, media-wide campaign entitled “For Peat’s Sake” was on the
road. Shaken by the furore, and under increasing economic pressure from the parent
company (Caufield, 1991), Fisons Horticultural pic. drew up, and in early 1992 published,
but did not sign, an agreement with English Nature. This stated that all worked-out areas on
both moors would eventually be given to English Nature for restoration to peat-bog, whilst
all currently vegetated areas would be given immediately to that body. Once published, and
outside the public gaze, there followed a period during which the company sought to
modify less palatable parts of the agreement before it was finally signed by Levington
Horticultural pic. in 1994. The final terms are not apparently for public release, either by
English Nature or the company, and hence perhaps differ greatly from those published in
1992. If similar however to the terms publicised in 1992, they give some cause for guarded
optimism.
A most valuable spin-off of the years of campaigning has been the vast assemblage of
data on all aspects of the moors. The main outlet for the dissemination of this information,
namely Thome and Hatfield Moors Papers (see References), is the journal of the Thome
and Hatfield Moors Conservation Forum. The body has also been instrumental in
organising field survey work, like the 1991 Invertebrate Survey (Heaver & Eversham,
1991), which was undertaken in co-operation with Fisons Horticultural pic., English
Nature, The Royal Society for the Protection of Birds and the Yorkshire Wildlife Trust.
Most recent invertebrate surveys throughout the United Kingdom have involved the use of
pitfall and water traps. These techniques are vastly preferable to the traditional sweeping
methods, since they more nearly reflect the real world and, being replicable, allow for valid
comparison of results from different habitats or localities. By such means vast data sources
are available to help in our understanding of the ecological requirements of numerous
species.
With some guarantee of future protection, it is gratifying to report that today, after 30
years of devastation by peat-extraction, these moors are still surprisingly rich. They have
retained a wealth of rare elements, including endemic insects known from nowhere else in
Britain, and new species are still being discovered. During a short survey into the habitat of
the “Hairy Canary” this summer 1 found another fly on Thome Moor which is only
otherwise known in the Palaearctic region from Swedish Lapland.
The geology and development of the moors, and their human history, are discussed by
Limbert (1987). Peat was of course a traditional fuel since earliest times, and Thome Moor
was a major source of turves for the monks of Selby Abbey during medieval times. More
recently, other uses were found for peat, notably as litter for animals (Limbert, 1987), and
for the horticultural industry. Recognising the value of Sphagnum peat in the cultivation of
ericaceous shrubs, William Casson of Thome established a nursery on the moor edge for
the commercial raising of these plants in the early 19th century (Limbert 1991). Indeed, the
The Haunts of the Hairy Canary - Presidential Address 43
hododendrons on the western side of Thome Moor and the now much reduced Kalmia
’ tgustifolium colony were escapees from Casson’s garden.
The 19th century closed with a mushrooming of commercial peat-extraction on Thome
1 ioors, the appalling devastation from which was clearly recorded by visiting naturalists
dmbert 1989a, 1989b, Skidmore 1970). Nevertheless, as long as the traditional manual
-at-digging techniques (Limbert 1987) were used, damage to the moors was less serious
its long-term ecological impact, since biota were able to circulate around the moors as
it areas became available for re-colonisation. However, with the introduction of peat-
illing by Fisons Horticultural pic. during the 1980s, this changed and total habitat
^struction commenced.
The Peat Campaign “For Peat’s Sake”, which finally forced Fisons in 1992 to table a
sponsible agreement in their negotiations with English Nature, was a three-pronged
tack based on archaeological, ecological and public access concerns. The archaeological
pect arose from the recognition that a major environmental archive was being destroyed.
iATLANDS AS AN ENVIRONMENTAL ARCHIVE
t irough palaeoentomology our knowledge of a region can long predate human archival
^cords, but this requires that undisturbed, organically rich sediments, covering a long
nne-span, are available for study (Buckland. 1976; Elias, 1994). The fallacious claim that
vatland habitats can be recreated cuts no ice in this argument, since it is the stratified peat
k;elf, laid down over centuries, which tells the story. In this context, sites like Thome and
latfield Moors are seen as priceless environmental archives, and their commercial
vstruction is seen as an outrageous sacrilege (Buckland, 1991; Buckland et ai, 1994). The
aatfield Chase horizons beneath the peat tell us that in early postglacial times the ground-
- etle Diachila arctica occurred commonly on the tundra here, indicating a high subarctic
imate (Buckland, 1982). Much later virgin oak and pine forests covered this area, as
dicated by such beetles as Rhyssodes sulcatus , a classic “Urwalt relict", which is now
most extinct in Europe. Many other beetles (Buckland, 1979) and some ant species
'ollingwood & Hughes, 1991) which no longer occur in Britain also inhabited this forest
kd attest to a rich insect fauna unknown in Europe today. But humans were already
.taking inroads with track-construction and “primitive” slash and bum agriculture
S uckland, 1979). Forest-clearance in the higher Don catchment caused increased surface
n-off and erosion, and led to flooding across Hatfield Chase (Buckland, in press). With
iter tables rising and streams traversing the forest floor, indicated by subfossil larval
ad-capsules of the crane-fly Pedicia rivosa (Skidmore, 1995). peat-bog started to form.
(Gradually Sphagnum growth swamped the forests and open bog developed with
, tensive carpets of Cranberries and inundated Eriophorum swards, populated by swarms
the reed-beetle Plateumaris discolor (Buckland, 1979). The fact that this beetle no
iger occurs on these moors indicates that a massive decline in wet Eriophorum bog at
me time brought about the local extinction of this usually ubiquitous peat-bog species.
;atlands as an Ecological Sanctuary
though Thome and Hatfield Moors have ceased to exhibit the structural features of
• issic raised lowland mires, such as the peat dome with peripheral carrland merging into
kaline fen, remnants of these habitats remain, and recent survey work has served to
ijntify their respective insect faunas. A brief discussion of some of these habitat types
Hows.
Old peat-canals. The richest areas of Thome Moor in temis of the peat-bog flora are the
1 Dutch canals which form the core of the National Nature Reserve. Cut around the turn
the century when some adjacent areas of bog were still in their pristine state, these
nals formed a reservoir for colonisation of declining species as peat-extraction spread.
; ;arby stood Scheuchzeria Well where Appleby saw the Rannoch Rush which gave the
41 its name (Skidmore. 1972). Lees (1888) claimed that the plant had disappeared by the
80s, but two independent sources known to the writer suggest that it was seen during the
44
The Haunts of the Hairy Canary - Presidential Address
1940s in the Old Canals area by Dr S. Rowlands of Doncaster. Here are found such plants
as Osmunda, Drosera rotundifolia, Andromeda, Vaccinium oxycoccus, Schoenoplectus
tahernaemontani, Cladium, Potentilla palustris, Utricularia vulgaris etc. On areas of
Sphagnum and bare wet peat such scarce ground beetles as Carahus nitens and Agonum
sexpunctatum and A. ericeti have appeared, whilst on the drier banks Common Lizards and
Adders are frequently seen. Formerly Myrica gale occurred sparingly here too, but this was
much commoner on Hatfield Moor before peat-milling operations there destroyed over 80
per cent of the entire moor surface.
2. Cotton-grass bogs. To the untrained eye, the moors include vast areas of almost
uniform appearance, such as the large areas covered in botanically poor Eriophorum bog.
The Eriophorum itself is the host plant for the Large Heath butterfly Coenonympha tullia,
here at its south-eastern limit in Britain (Skidmore, 1983a; Sutton & Beaumont, 1989;
Rimington, 1992) and the Haworths Minor moth Celaena haworthii , named after the
famous Hull lepidopterist Adrian Haworth. The wetter parts provide nesting and feeding
areas for Snipe and Teal (Roworth, 1992), and large populations of the dragonfly Libellula
quadrimaculata. The pools teem with aquatic insects, including the nationally rare Acilius
canaliculatus, and areas of wet, exposed peat on pool edges, or between the Eriophorum
tussocks swarm with flies and beetles, including the ground beetle Bembidion humerale
and the pill-beetle Curimposis nigrita, both of which occur nowhere else in Britain
(Skidmore, 1983b; Heaver & Eversham, 1991).
3. Molinia beds. Molina coerulea is a common dominant in many parts of the moors and
beds of this grass provide the main habitat of the scarce Bog Bush-cricket Metrioptera
brachyptera (Limbert 1986) and the uncommon fly Opomyza lineatopunctata. Recent work
however suggests that a very much rarer insect, the ephydrid fly Eutaenionotum guttipennis
var. olivaceum may be associated with this grass. Described from a single specimen taken
near Berlin over 90 years ago, and apparently lost during the last war, this fly is currently
known only from specimens collected recently on Hatfield and Thome Moors. The type
form guttipennis is a rare Holarctic subarctic species (Skidmore, in press).
4. Bracken areas. In the generally drier areas of the moors, huge areas are covered by
Pteris and these, like the Eriophorum beds, are commonly viewed as ecological wastes
unworthy of conservation. However, in a permanently damp patch of bare peat surrounded
mainly by Bracken on Hatfield Moor, the 1990-91 survey revealed the presence of more
than 350 species of insects, including the three local Red Data book specialities Bembidion
humerale, Curimposis nigrita and the “Hairy Canary fly” Phaonia jaroschewskii. In
contrast, only six vascular plant species were present (i.e. Pteris, Calluna, Eriophorum,
Erica, Betula and Molinia). These results, from an area of perhaps 25 square yards,
highlight the fallacy of assessing the ecological value of sites, or the viability of habitat
restoration schemes (Key, 1991), on purely botanical grounds. Regarding the existence of
permanently damp patches on the peat surface of Hatfield Moor, it was shown by members
of the Doncaster Naturalists’ Society during 1991-92 that such areas occurred where the
summits of water domes in the peat approached or reached the surface. Atop another such
dome, colonies of the uncommon crane-fly Limnophila pulchella and the empid fly Empis
verralli were found. Although classic peat-bog species, neither has yet been taken on
Thorne Moor. The areas of unbroken Bracken cover are also valuable in providing the
breeding sites of the nationally important colonies of Nightjar (Limbert et al.. 1986), and of
the rapidly declining Adder (Howes, 1973, 1988).
5. Peripheral woodland. In an undisturbed raised mire, there is usually a marginal area of
woodland, dominated by Betula on the inner perimeter, and Salix/Alnus carr, often merging
into alkaline fen, on the outer. Human interference has disturbed this zonation on Thorne
and Hatfield Moors, but elements of the characteristic communities remain. Presumably the
Nightingale was originally a member of the peripheral woodland community here, but
today the favoured habitat appears to be in the dense growths of Rhododendron on the
western edge of Thorne Moors.
Today, birch dominates large areas of the moors and some clearance is currently
The Haunts of the Hairy Canary - Presidential Address 45
j inderway. Whilst a degree of control is clearly necessary, birch woodland is a vital and
natural part of the moorland ecosystem and its total eradication would be highly
indesirable, as it supports a rich fauna. Areas of moor with scattered birches provide the
nain habitat for Whinchat, which here form important breeding populations (Limbert et
r 1986; Roworth 1992). Older trees colonised by Piptoporus betulinus, Fomes
omentarius and other fungi are the home for beetles like Strangalia quadrifasciata,
!nriplax russica, and Synchita humerale, such flies as Tanyptera atrata, T. nigricornts,
i lustalomyia vittipes and Xylotomima nemorum, and an extremely rare moth, Bankesia
[ louglasii (Sutton & Beaumont, 1989). In the recent survey of Hatfield Moor, by far the
i nost abundant fly under birch scrub on dry peat was the minute sciarid midge Cratyna
i vasmanni. This was also discovered during 1988 and 1990 in Norfolk, Suffolk and County
Durham, and was recognised as a new British species by Laurence (1994). Originally
described from specimens reared from nests of the ant Lasius niger in Holland (Schmitz,
918), it was interesting to find that this ant also occurs abundantly in peat in the Hatfield
\ vloor site. The fly has not been found on Thome Moor.
A detailed appraisal of the recent records of the “Hairy Canary” strongly suggest that it
: s a denizen of the peripheral woods, and especially the Salix/Alnus carrs. The mass ol data
; rom pitfall and water trap work on Thome and Hatfield Moor shows that the presence of
Sphagnum is not essential for this fly as had been previously believed (Skidmore, 1985,
1991). In some sectors of Thome Moor where peak populations of the fly occurred, and in
i nany places on both moors where smaller numbers were taken. Sphagnum is certainly
absent. Larger populations were found in carr woodland on warp than in birch woodland on
;oeat, although the species is unquestionably restricted throughout its range to lowland
raised mires, and is not a fenland insect. No specimens were collected from open peat moor
lacking tree cover. Results also show that the flight period may last for less than two weeks
in late June, but a staggered emergence from early June to early August occurs some years.
5. Fens and Saline marsh. Now almost eradicated from Hatfield Moor, the best fens today
are around Bells Pond on Thome Moor’s western edge. This area is strongly saline and
'Supports the richest salt-marsh insect fauna in Yorkshire. The salinity is certainl\
maintained by the brine emanating from the flooded seams of Thome Colliery, but a littoral
flora and fauna predated the sinking of the colliery shafts, or even the warping of the land
during last century (Skidmore et al.% 1987). By the brackish lagoons of Bells Pond grow
plants like Salicornia and Aster tripolium, whilst the insect fauna includes a remarkable
array of salt-marsh flies including Limonia complicata. Stratiomys singularior, Dolichopus
diadema, Hydrophorus balticus, Campsicnemus magius, Melieria omissa, Playcephala
planifrons, Zaphne divisa, Limnospila albifrons, Lispe pygmaea and Spilogona baltica
(Skidmore et al„ 1987; Heaver & Eversham. 1991). The extensive Phragmites beds
support many nationally rare insects including the ground-beetle Dromius longiceps. The
1990 survey revealed an interesting incidence here of apparent hybridisation, according to
male genitalic characters, between'the Large Ear moth Amphipoea lucens and the Saltern
Ear A^fucosa ssp. paludis. This presumably arises from the close juxtaposition of peat-bog
and salt-marsh, the respective habitats of these two very closely related moths, whose
occurrence in Yorkshire is little known (Sutton & Beaumont, 1989).
Hatfield Moor . , . ,
Unfortunately, Hatfield Moor never Received the degree of attention from naturalists which
had been accorded to Thome Moor, despite its evident and long-recognised richness
(Limbert 1985 1986a). The 1991-92 survey carried out there by Doncaster Museum staff
was intended to partially rectify this and the results are being prepared for publication
(Skidmore & Eversham in prep.). Ball (1992) showed that Thome Moor was the richest
lowland peatland site in the United Kingdom in terms of its invertebrate fauna. The
Hatfield Moor Survey results show a comparable richness. Four habitats occur at Hatfield
Moor which today are unrepresented on Thome Moor, namely dry grassland, dry heath, old
oak woodland and stands of Scots pine.
46
The Haunts of the Hairy Canary - Presidential Address
Dry grassland and heath. It had long been recognised that Hatfield Moor differed in
many respects from Thome Moor, not least in the generally drier conditions. The recent
survey emphasised this when it was found that the most abundant ground-beetle was
Pterostichus versicolor , a much scarcer species on Thome Moor. The central Lindholme
moraine with its sandpits was known as a sanctuary for such drier grassland moths as the
Wood Tiger, Archers Dart, Antler, Small Elephant Hawk, Five-spot Burnet and Cinnahar
moths etc. Surprising additions in the recent survey were the Six-belted Clearwing moth
Bembecia scopigera and scarce beetles like the weevil Gronops lunatus , the ground-beetle
Amara fulva and the shield bug Legnotus picipes. Here too the Pill Woodlouse
Armadillidium vulgar e occurs with its fly parasite Phyto melanocephala. Like B. scopigera
these testify to a calcareous content in the drift deposits on the moraine.
Old oak woodland. As stated above, before peat-bogs developed on Hatfield Chase, a
virgin forest of oak and pine existed here. Remarkably, rare elements of the lignicolous
fauna of the oaks remain on Hatfield Moor. A typical old-woodland ground-beetle which is
abundant here but unrecorded at Thome is Pterostichus oblongopunctatus, whilst another
carabid, Laemostenus terricola, still occurs on Lindholme moraine in its ancestral habitat
of badger setts in old woodland. Lignicolous rarities surviving on the old Lindholme oaks
include the beetles Phloiotrya vaudoueri and Anitys rubens, both of which occur at Thome
only as subfossils (Buckland, 1979). The nationally rare Scarce Vapourer moth Orgyia
recens was also found in association with old oaks in two areas on Hatfield Moor during
the 1991 Survey.
Scots Pines. The Hatfield Moors Scots Pines, which are evidently descendants of those still
standing in De la Pryme’s time (Skidmore, 1970), support a rich phytophagous insect fauna
including the mirid bug Pilophorus cinnamopterus , but the lignicolous fauna presumably
died out through a discontinuity in the presence of dead pine timber. Recent work on the
“Bronze Age forest” exposed by surface-milling on Thorne Moor (Caufield, 1991) showed
that the pine timber fauna at the time was extremely rich and indicative of drier, hotter
summers (Buckland, in press).
Visitors to the Moors
Surveys on Thome and Hatfield Moors have shown that whilst some faunal elements may
remain over vast periods of time, there is a constant influx of visitors. Some, like the
Merlin and Hobby, pass through regularly (Limbert et al. 1986), whilst others, including
the Desert Locust fly Stomorhina lunata only occur during very unusual climatic
conditions (Heaver & Eversham, 1991). Faunal and floral changes also occur as some
organisms become extinct whilst others arrive to take up residence. Thus, Fallow deer
which formerly occurred here (Limbert, 1990) have now been replaced by Roe deer
(Limbert, 1991); but the only visitors capable of ensuring the continued survival of the
moors are the human visitors. For over a hundred years the public had been denied access
by the commercial peat-extractors. This was a source of constant conflict, since access had
been a matter of Common Right to local people since Saxon times. Bunting fought
tenaciously, against deeply entrenched commercial interests, to show that these rights had
not been legally extinguished, either during the period of the Enclosures, or subsequently.
Unable to complete his work, his documents were deposited in the Archives at York and
Nottingham Universities in the hope that others could take up the fight. The public access
issue was of pivotal importance in the Wildlife Conservation battle for these moors, and it
is vital that these rights be upheld in the future. People should be encouraged to come, and,
moved by the sheer wonder of creation to be seen here, to ensure their retention for
posterity. As King George VI said, “The Countryside and Wildlife of today are not ours to
do with as we please, we must account for them to those who come after”.
Acknowledgments
Limited space precludes a complete list of all of those people who made my years in
Yorkshire so enjoyable. It was Dr E. F. Gilmour who appointed me to Doncaster where it
all began. It was through my work there that I met my wife Heather, whose patient
47
l he Haunts of the Hairy Canary - Presidential Address
ndurance and support have meant everything to me. The move to Doncaster also brought
te into the naturalist fraternity in Yorkshire, through my museum colleagues and
membership of the Doncaster Naturalists’ Society and Yorkshire Naturalists' Union. In the
ntomological section of the latter body it was a great honour and joy to be associated with
te finest entomological association outside London. To all of you whom I have met, and
'ith whom I have conversed in these arenas. I would like to express my warmest thanks
nd appreciation. I would also like to express my thanks to all with whom 1 have worked
n Wildlife conservation in Yorkshire, and especially to those rare individuals, including
ord Feversham of Duncombe Park and the Lyon family of Lindholme, who were such
xemplary and caring custodians of the wonderful Wildlife refugia in lands belonging to
I tern. I wish to thank the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union for honouring me with the
’ residency for 1995, and the Doncaster Naturalists’ Society and Sorby Naturalists’ Society
* >r bestowing upon me Life Membership. For the illustrative material for this address,
I tanks are offered to the Thorne and Hatfield Moors Conservation Forum for the loan of
heir excellent slide-pack, and to Mark Lomas (Doncaster Museum), Peter Roworth
1 English Nature) and John Bebbington (Field Studies Council) for slides of additional
oecies. Finally, deep gratitude is acknowledged to the late William Bunting for his
i iendship and inspiration, and to Paul Buckland who opened up for me the fascinating new
imension of Palaeoentomology.
1 EFERENCES
he major journal for articles on Thorne and Hatfield Moors is entitled Thome and Hatfield
'loors Papers, and is produced by the Thorne and Hatfield Moors Conservation Forum.
Flany of the articles are of major relevance in the study of peatland ecology and
onsequently this bibliography includes a list of all articles which have appeared so far in
\te series. Copies are available from Mr M. Limbert, Museum and Art Gallery, Chequer
! oad, Doncaster.
home & Hatfield Moors Papers
ol. I [Thorne Moors Papers.] (ed. M. Limbert) Publ. Doncaster 1987.
Limbert, M. Introduction; 1-5.
Gaunt, G. D. The Geology and Landscape Development of the Region around Thome
Moors; 6-30, 5 maps.
Limbert. M. Some Notes on the Landscape of Thome Moors; 31-43, 1 map.
Limbert, M. A Provisional Bibliography of the Thome Moors Flora; 44-51.
Wall. C. and Limbert. M. An Annotated Checklist of Thome Moors Bryophytes; 52-63.
Taylor, R. Mycological Records from Thome Moors; 64-76.
Eversham. B. C. An Annotated List of Thome Moors Lichens: 77-85.
Limbert. M. Charophytes from Thome Moors: 86-87.
ol. II (ed. C. Bain & B. C. Eversham) Publ. Doncaster 1991.
Bain C. and Eversham. B. C. Editorial: 1-2.
Eversham, B. C. Thome and Hatfield Moors: Implications of Land Use Change for
Nature Conservation: 3-18, 10 figs.
Key. R. S. Peat-cutting and the Invertebrate Fauna of Lowland Peatland: Thome and
Hatfield Moors in a National Context: 19-24.
Eversham, B. C. and Skidmore, P. Changes in the Invertebrate Fauna of Thome and
Hatfield Moors; 25-38. 6 tables.
Limbert. M. The Importance of Thome and Hatfield Moors for Vertebrate Fauna: 39-45.
i ol. Ill (ed. C. Bain & B. C. Eversham) Publ. Doncaster 1992.
Bain, C. and Eversham. B. C. Preface and Editorial: 1-3.
Eversham, B. C. and Swindlehurst. G. A. Habitat Classification and Recording
Framework for Thome and Hatfield Moors; 4-18. 9 figs.
Bain. C. Ornithological Survey of Thorne and Hatfield Moors 1990: 19-33. 2 figs. 3
tables.
48
The Haunts of the Hairy Canary - Presidential Address
Ball, S. G. (1992). The importance of the Invertebrate fauna of Thome and Hatfield
Moors. An exercise in Site Evaluation; 34-65, 10 tables.
Skidmore, P. (1992). Balaam’s Donkey and the Hairy Canary; 66-69, 1 table.
Meade, R. Moors Conservation and Water Management; 71-76, 1 fig.
Limbert, M. Records of Black Grouse on the Yorkshire-Lincolnshire Border; 77-86.
In preparation for forthcoming issues:
Buckland, P. C. (ed.) Palaeoentomological Research on Thome and Hatfield Moors.
Skidmore, P. and Eversham, B. C. The Insects of Hatfield Moors.
Other Sources
Buckland, P. C. (1976). The use of insect remains in the interpretation of archaeological
environments. In D. A. Davidson & M. L. Shackley (eds.) Geoarchaeology: Earth
Sciences and the Past: 360-396, Duckworth, London.
Buckland, P. C. (1979). Thorne Moors: a palaeoecological study of a Bronze Age site (a
contribution to the history of the British insect fauna). University of Bimiingham,
Department of Geography Occasional Publication 8: 1-173.
Buckland, P. C. (1982). The cover sands of North Lincolnshire and the Vale of York. In
B. H. Adlam, C. R. Fenn & L. Morris (eds.) Papers in Earth Studies: 143-178.
Geobooks, Norwich.
Buckland, P. C. (1993). Peatland archaeology; a conservation resource on the edge of
extinction. Biodiversity and Conservation 2: 513-527.
Buckland, P. C. Eversham. B. C. and Dinnin, M. H. (1994). Conserving the Holocene
record: a challenge for geomorphology, archaeology and biological conservation. In D.
O’Halloran, C. Green, M. Harley, M. Stanley and J. Knill (eds.) Geological and
Landscape Conservation: 201-204. Geological Society, London.
Bunting, W. (1954a). Water beetles taken May 1953-May 1954. Entomologist’ s mon. Mag.
90: 142.
Bunting, W. (1954b). Acilius canaliculatus Nic. (Col., Dytiscidae) in the Thome district,
Yorkshire. Entomologist’ s mon. Mag. 90: 238.
Bunting, W. (1955a). Water beetles at Thome, Yorkshire, Entomologist’ s mon. Mag. 91:
85.
Bunting, W. (1955b). Hydroporus longulus Mulsant ( celatus Clark) (Col. Hyd.) Naturalist
80: 8.
Caufield, C. (1991). Thorne Moors. The Sumach Press, St. Albans, Herts.
Collingwood, C. A. and Hughes. J. (1987). Ant species in Yorkshire. Naturalist 112: 95-
101.
Elias, S. A. (1993). Quaternary Insects and their Environments. Smithsonian Institution
Press, Washington and London.
Heaver, D. and Eversham, B. C. (1991). Thome and Hatfield Moors Invertebrate Survey.
Final Report. Thome and Hatfield Moors Conservation Forum.
Henderson, A. (1995). The President of the Yorkshire Naturalists Union 1994-1995. Peter
Skidmore. Bull. Y.N.U. 23: 30-31.
Howes, C. A. (1973a). Historical Records of Mammals in South-East Yorkshire and the
Doncaster District. Naturalist 98: 41-50.
Howes, C. A. (1973b). the Harvest Mouse in Yorkshire. Naturalist 98: 81-83.
Howes, C. A. (1973c). The history and distribution of Reptiles and Amphibia in South-east
Yorkshire and the Doncaster District. Naturalist 98: 121-132.
Howes, C. A. (1988). ‘As the Yorkshire Adder ’ad it? Bull. Y.N.U. 10: 4-5.
Laurence, B. R. (1994). Sciaridae (Dipt.) from East Anglian Wetlands, with descriptions of
new species. Entomologist’ s mon. Mag. 130: 105-1 19.
Lees, F. A. (1888). The Flora of West Yorkshire. Lovell Reeves, London.
Limbert, M. (1985). Naturalists on Hatfield Moor. Naturalist 110: 103-1 10.
Limbert, M. (1986a). The Bog Bush Cricket Metrioptera brachyptera, in Yorkshire. Bull
Y.N.U. 6: 8.
Entomological Reports for 1992-1995, Coleoptera: Staphylinidae ( Aleocharinae ) 49
nbert, M. (1986b). Naturalists on Hatfield Moor: further notes. Naturalist 111: 59-60.
nbert, M. (1989a). First recorders of the Goole Scientific Society, with particular
reference to Thomas Bunker. Naturalist 11: 93-91.
nbert. M. (1989b). The Yorkshire Naturalists Union on Thome Moors in 1895. Bull.
)Y.N.U. 11:9-11.
nbert, M. (1990). A note on the sub-fossil remains of Fallow Deer from Thome Moors
Peat. Bull. Y.N.U. 10: 8-9.
mbert, M. (1991). William Casson of Thome. Naturalist 116: 1-15.
mbert, M„ Mitchell, R. D. and Rhodes, R. M. (1986). Thome Moor Birds and Man.
[Doncaster & District Ornithological Society, Doncaster.
mington, E. (1992). Butterflies of the Doncaster District. Sorby Record Special Series 9:
1.1-80.
, rworth, P. C. (1992). A common bird census on Thome Moors National Nature Reserve.
' Naturalist 117: 5-18.
. hmitz, H. (1918). Neue Beitrage zur Kentniss der Sciariden mit reduzierten
'Maxillarpalpen. Tijdsch. Ent. 61: 88-1 1 1.
Uidmore, P. (1970), Fifty years later - Another look at Thome Waste. Naturalist 95: 81-
' 87
Uidmore, P. (1972). Samuel Appleby, Doncaster Botanist. Naturalist 97: 55-57.
Uidmore, P. (1983a). Our Heritage (Part 1) The Manchester Ringlet (Coenonympha tullta
■ ssp. davus). The Doncaster Naturalist 1(2): 10-11.
Uidmore, P. (1983b). Our Heritage (Part 2) The Thome Moor Ground beetle Bembtdton
i humerale. The Doncaster Naturalist 1(3): 57 -58. .
.ddmore, P. (1991). Phaonia jaroschewskii Schnabl. (Diptera; Muscidae), the Hairy
t Canary”. Naturalist 1 16: 69-7 1 .
ddmore, P. (1995). A Dipterological Perspective on the Holocene History of the North
Atlantic Area. Unpublished PhD Thesis, University of Sheffield.
, ddmore, P. (in press) Eutaenionotum guttipennis Stenh. var. ?olivaceum Oldenberg
(Diptera, Ephydridae) in Britain. Dipterist s Digest.
Uidmore, Limbert, M. and Eversham. B. C. (1987). The Insects of Thome Moors.
Sorby Record. (Suppl.) 23:89-153. , v , ,.
utton, S. L. and Beaumont. H. E. (eds.) (1989). Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire.
Distribution and Conservation. Yorkshire Naturalists Union. Doncaster.
ENTOMOLOGICAL REPORTS FOR 1992-1995,
COLEOPTERA: STAPHYLINIDAE (ALEOCHARINAE)
M. L. DENTON
his is the first report to document the Aleocharinae of Yorkshire since that which
nneared in The Naturalist, 117: 71-75. Although the collecting and identification of
pecimens continues, albeit by a small but dedicated few. it is becoming increasingly
ifficult to locate species which generate publishable records (generally to be taken as
pecies new for the county or respective vice-county). This is not an indication that the
deocharinae of Yorkshire have been so well studied that the final word has been published
or indeed that the county has been neglected. It is simply a reflection of the dedication ot
nthusiasts who have tended to favour certain localities and. although this may add to our
nowledge of the site, it does mean that other areas in the county remain neglected In this
espect furvey work carried out for English Nature along the Lower Derwent Valley has
eveale'd the true singificance of the area. Additionally, work on a number of Yorkshire
Vildlife Trust reserves has also indicated the importance of these sites. I feel sure that
nany more Yorkshire Aleocharinae remain to be documented, and the true distribution of
nany of the commoner species will remain obscure for many years to come.
1 Naturalist 121 (1996)
50 Entomological Reports for 1992-1995, Coleoptera: Staphylinidae (Aleocharinae)
As Yorkshire’s Aleocharinae enthusiasts become more proficient at identification the
need for the backing of a knowledgeable specialist becomes less necessary. It will be
noted, however, that for the more problematical groups and confirmation of several
specimens, Mr C. Johnson of the Manchester University Museum has once again been
instrumental in affording his expertise, and in this respect he must be thanked
wholeheartedly.
Past Aleocharinae reports have placed no emphasis on the species’ national status and, to
rectify this, all species quoted in the Joint Nature Conservation Committee publication A
Review of the Scarce and Threatened Coleoptera of Great Britain, Part 2, have been
categorized as follows:
1) NOTABLE i.e. estimated to occur within the range of 16 to 100 squares of the
National Grid.
2) INDETERMINATE i.e. considered to be Endangered, Vulnerable or Rare, but lacking
sufficient information to determine which of these categories is appropriate.
3) INSUFFICIENTLY KNOWN i.e. taxa with very few known localities, but which
belong to a poorly recorded or taxonomically difficult group.
For reasons described in the first Aleocharinae report ( Naturalist 111: 91-96), the sex of
the specimen(s) on which identification was based has been indicated; it can be assumed
that all specimens were male, unless otherwise stated.
1 would like to take this opportunity to thank the small number of dedicated collectors
and identifiers for their continued support in documenting the Aleocharinae of Yorkshire.
The following initials appear in the list that follows: RBA = R. B. Angus; EWA = E. W.
Aubrook; LA = L. Aukland; RGB = R. G. Booth; MLD = M. L. Denton; WAE = W. A.
Ely; RJH = R. J. Hunt; CJ = C. Johnson; PK = P. Kendall; RSK = R. S. Key; RJM = R. J.
Marsh; DM = D. Maude; JM = J. Muona; JAO = J. A. Owen; KGP = K. G. Payne; ADAS
= Aricultural Development & Advisory Service; PS = P. Skidmore and EJS = E. J. Smith.
Myllaena intermedia Erichson. (63) Conisbrough (SK59), female, 5/5/92, in reed bed
debris; RJM. The only previous records are from Burniston (TA09) in 1930 & 1931,
Skipwith Common (SE63) in 1971, Sprotbrough Reservoir (SE50) in 1971 & 1972,
Studley (SE26) in 1989 and Wheldrake ings (SE74) in 1989.
Gyrophaena angustata (Stephens). (*65) Cover Banks (SE18), 6/6/92, in Polyporus
squamosus; MLD. A widespread but very local species that is recorded from England
and North Wales and is afforded Notable status.
G. bihaniata Thomson. (64) Ringhay Wood (SE43), 20/7/93, in Polyporus squamosus ;
RJH det. MLD. The only previous records are from Skipwith (SE63) in 1915, Tome
Bridge (SE60) in 1969, Thome Moor (SE71) in 1985, Rudston (TA16) in 1989 and
Owston Wood (SE51) in 1990.
G.joyioides Wusthoff. (64) Ringhay Wood (SE43), 20/7/93, in Polyporus squamosus ; RJH
det. MLD. The only previous record was from Hetchell Wood (SE34) in 1989. Mainly
restricted to southern England, the above mentioned records being the furthest north. A
species afforded Notable status.
G. nana (Paykull). (*65 ) Cover Banks (SE18), 6/6/92, in Polyporus squamosus ; RJM. The
only previous records are from Skipwith Common (SE63) in 1916, Allerthorpe Common
(SE74) in 1923, Bolton Percy (SE54) in 1943 and Tome Bridge (SE60) in 1969.
Bolitochara mulsanti Sharp. (*65) Cover Banks (SE18), 6/6/92, in Polyporus squamosus;
RJM. A widespread but locally distributed species that is mainly confined to northern
England and Scotland and is afforded Notable status.
Tachyusa leucopus (Marsham). (64) East Keswick Fits (SE34), not sexed, 29/5/86,
amongst shingle; RSK (teste MLD). This record pre-dates that published in The
Naturalist , 117: 72 to become the first for VC64.
it Gnypeta velata (Erichson). (61) Wheldrake Ings (SE74), 29/7/92 and 22/8/92, in
vegetable refuse along the Old Course of the River Derwent; MLD det. CJ. Restricted to
the southern half of England and mid-Wales, these records being the furthest north. A
species afforded Notable status.
Entomological Reports for 1992-1995, Coleoptera: Staphylinidae ( Aleocharinae ) 5 1
Callicerus rigidicornis (Erichson). (63) Loxley Common (SK39), not sexed, 19/5/93 and
29/6/93; EJS det. MLD. Burgy Banks (SE60), 26/8/93, pit fall trap, English Nature det.
MLD. Broadhead Clough (SD92), 14/5/94; MLD. The only previous records are from
Bramley (SK49) in 1986, Gillfield Wood (SE09) in 1989, Newton Ings (SE42) in 1989
and Owston Wood (SE51) in 1990.
Dacrila fallax (Kraatz). (61 ) Broomfleet (SE92), female, 24/2/93, in tide line refuse; RJM.
The only previous records are from Spurn (TA41) in 1948, Fisherman’s Channel (TA21)
in 1991 and Havertteld Quarry (TA32) in 1991. A very local species that is widely
scattered over southern England, the above mentioned records being the furthest north.
The species is afforded Notable status.
Amischa soror (Kraatz). (*64) Askham Bog (SE54), female, 2/9/94; RGB.
Dochmonota clancula (Erichson). (64) Askham Bog (SE54), not sexed, 2/9/94; RGB. The
only previous records are from Askham Bog (SE54) in 1969 & 1972, Guisbrough
(SK59) in 1986, North Duffield Carrs (SE63) in 1987 and North Duffield Ings (SE73) in
1990. A widespread but locally distributed species that is confined to England. The
species is afforded Notable status.
Atheta terminalis (Gravenhorst). (64) Wheldrake Ings (SE74), 1 1/3/95, in flood refuse;
MLD. The only previous records are from Bubwith in 1919 and 1933. A very local
southern species with scattered records north to Yorkshire. It has recently only been
recorded from two vice-counties (South Hampshire and Worcestershire). The species’
national status is given as Insufficiently Known.
A. vilis (Erichson). (*64) Askham Bog (SE54), not sexed, 2/9/94; RGB. The only previous
record was from Sprotbrough (SE50) in 1987.
A. monticola (Thomson). (63) Dean Head Wood (SE10), 1 1/7/92, in decaying fungi; MLD.
The only previous records are from Cornelian Bay (TA09) in 1928, Blackmoorfoot
(SE01) in 1983, Netherton (SE1 1) in 1983, Austwick Moss (SD97) in 1983 and Lepton
Great Wood (SE1 1) in 1985.
A. liturata (Stephens). (*65) Cover Banks (SE18), both sexes, 6/6/92, in Polyporus
squamosus ; MLD.
A. fungicola (Thomson). (62) Clifton Ings (SE55), female, 10/8/52, in decaying fungi;
MLD (teste CJ). The only previous records are from Mulgrave Wood (NZ81) in 1934.
Goathland (NZ80) in 1935, Blackmoorfoot (SE01) in 1989 & 1990 and Studley Park
(SE26) in 1990.
A. amplicollis (Mulsant & Rey). Elland gravel pit (SE12). both sexes, 19/2/83: MLD.
Blackburn Valley (SE02), female, 23/4/83; MLD. Dean Wood (SE1 1), female, 1 1/12/83;
MLD. Netherton (SE 11), female. 11/2/84; MLD. Hall Dike (SE11). female. 15/2/84;
MLD. Warwick (SE11), female, 27/4/84; MLD. Hades (SE10), female. 3/2/85; MLD.
These records pre-date those published in The Naturalist , 113: 149 and 115: 100 to
become the first for VC63.
A. gilvicollis Scheerpeltz. (62) Wydale Hall (SE98), 9/4/94; LA det. MLD. The only
previous records are from Thome Moor (SE71) in 1969 and Runswick Bay (NZ81) in
1990.
# A. orphana (Erichson). (61) Wheldrake Ings (SE74), 2/2/85: RGB det. JM. A species
afforded Notable status that is confined to the southern half of England, this record being
the furthest north.
A. dadopora Thomson. (*62) Gundale (SE88), female, 19/6/94; MLD.
# A. incognita (Sharp). (63) Rivelin (SK28), female, 26/1/93: EJS (teste MLD). (62) Ellers
Springs (SE88). female, 3/9/95: LA (teste MLD).
A. nidicola (Johansen). (*63) Blackbrook Wood (SK28). female. 5/1/92: EJS (teste CJ).
The only previous records are from Dalby Forest (SE88) in 1966 and Askham Bog
(SE54) in 1967.
A. ravilla (Erichson). (*65) Cover Banks (SE18), 6/6/92. in Polyporus squamosus : MLD.
A. nigripes (Thomson). (*64) Bolton Abbey (SE05). 23/5/92. under bark; MLD.
Ilyobates subopacus Palm. (61) Wheldrake Ings (SE74). sex ?. 15/5/79: CJ. North Duffield
52 Entomological Reports for 1992-1995, Coleoptera: Staphylinidae (Aleocharinae)
Ings (SE73), 13/5/86, in a Glyceria bed; PK det. MLD and 11/8/93, female, in flood
refuse; MLD. The only previous records are from North Duftteld Ings (SE73) in 1985
and Shirley Pool (SE51) in 1986. A widespread but locally distributed species that is
afforded Notable status. The first mentioned record pre-dates those published in The
Naturalist 113: 150 to become the first for Yorkshire.
Calodera protensa Mannerheim. (64) Cawood (SE53), 5/92, pit fall trap in wet meadow;
KGP det. MLD. The only previous record is from the same locality in 1990. Formerly
recorded from North Essex and Oxfordshire, the above mentioned records are the first
since the 1920s. The species is afforded Indeterminate status.
Chiloporata rubicunda (Erichson). (*65) Raydale Beck, Semerwater (SD98), not sexed,
3/9/85; RSK det. MLD. The only previous records are from Scarborough (TA08) on an
unrecorded date and Duncombe Park (SE68) in 1983. A widespread but locally
distributed species that is afforded Notable status.
Ischnoglossa prolixa (Gravenhorst). The realisation that two species were masquerading
under this name {Entomologist’ s Record , 106: 241-244) has made all records on the
YNU database suspect. Examination of extant specimens has revealed the following
authentic records: (61) Thornton Ellers (SE74), 28/3/89; MLD. (63) Old Spring Wood
(SE1 1), 20/4/84; DM det. MLD. Elland Park Wood (SE12), 22/9/85; MLD. Dean Wood
(SE1 1), 11/1/86; MLD. Orange Wood (SE11), 21/9/87; MLD. Mag Brook (SE11),
23/10/88; DM det. MLD. Langsett (SE20), female, 8/4/90; EJS det. MLD. Willowgarth
(SE52), both sexes, 14/4/90; MLD. High Burton (SE1 1), 29/4/90; MLD.
Crataraea suturalis (Mannerheim). (64) Bolton Abbey (SE05), 23/5/92, under bark; MLD.
The only previous records are from Beckhole (NZ80) on an unrecorded date, Elland
gravel pit (SE12) in 1946, Swinden Plantation (SE10) in 1988 and Studley Royal (SE26)
in 1989.
Oxypoda alternans (Gravenhorst). ( *65) Cover Banks (SE18), both sexes, 6/6/92, in
Polyporus squamosus; MLD.
O. brachyptera (Stephens). (61) Bubwith Ings (SE73), female, 8/9/93, in old straw; MLD
(teste CJ). Aughton Ings (SE63), late summer 94, in a pit fall trap set along a drain;
ADAS det. MLD. North Duffield Carrs (SE63), late summer 94, in a pit fall trap set
along a drain; ADAS det. MLD. The only previous records are from Aughton Ings
(SE63) in 1987 & 1988, Bubwith Ings (SE73) in 1988 and Semerwater (SD98) in 1988.
Aleochara albovillosa Bemhauer. (*62) Hole of Horcum (SE89), 12/10/94; LA det. MLD.
A. bipustulata (Linnaeus). The realisation that more than one species was masquerading
under this name (Entomologist’ s Record , 102: 227-232) has made all records on the
YNU database suspect. Examination of extant specimens has revealed the following
authentic records: (61) Fisherman’s Channel, Sunk Island (TA21), 17/8/85; MLD det.
JAO. (63) Cold Edge Dams (SE02), 28/8/83; MLD det. JAO. Salterhebble Lock (SE02),
30/5/84; MLD det. JAO. West Wood, Famley Tyas (SE1 1), 20/6/84; DM det. JAO. Pot
Riddings Wood (SE50), 13/6/87; MLD det. JAO. (64) Fairburn (SE42), 24/8/86; MLD
det. JAO.
# A. discipennis Mulsant & Rey. (63) Roche Abbey (SK58), 18/5/86, WAE det. CJ. A very
local species that is confined to England and is afforded Notable status.
# A. diversa Sahlberg. (63) Willowgarth (SE52), 10/5/92, in dead Coot Fulica atra, RJH
det. MLD (teste CJ) and 23/4/93, in dead Hedgehog Erinaceus europaeus : RJH det.
MLD. A very local species that is afforded Notable status. As past records of this species
may have referred to A. albovillosa Bernhauer these are the first authentic Yorkshire
records.
A. fumata Gravenhorst. (63) Hatfield Moor (SE70), female, 30/7/91, pit fall trap in
scrub/heath on peat; PS det. MLD. The only previous record was from Newmillerdam
(SE31) in 1966. A very local species with a widely scattered distribution, although until
recently it has only been recorded from three vice-counties (West Sussex, Surrey and
Leicestershire & Rutland). The species’ national status is given as Insufficiently Known.
53
THE ACULEATE WASPS AND BEES (HYMENOPTERA:
ACULEATA) OF SHIPLEY GLEN IN WATSONIAN YORKSHIRE
WITH A “THEN” AND “NOW” COMPARISON
MICHAEL E. ARCHER
''Shipley Glen has been found to be a very good locality for aculeate wasps and bees, having
89 recorded species, three species of national importance, and 13 species of regional
importance. It is an area of about 66 hectares, situated to the north west of Shipley, West
Yorkshire (VC64, SE13). The locality, a partly wooded valley on millstone grit with open
habitats of acid grassland, heather moorland, has a large disused quarry at the northern end.
Shipley Glen was surveyed extensively from the end of the 19th century until about the
middle of the 20th century. The main collector was J. Wood whose specimens, which were
largely undetermined, were found at Keighley and Manchester Museums (Wood sample). I
am grateful to the curators of these museums, M. Hartley and C. Johnson, for permitting
access to Wood’s specimens. John (“Jack”) Wood was well known to Keighley collectors
for a long period of time both as a collector and recorder of many forms of insect life
(Ogden 1968). He corresponded with W. D. Hincks of Manchester University Museum.
Between 1919 and 1949 I have been able to establish that Wood made 83 visits to
'Shipley Glen, distributed throughout the year as follows: March (2 visits), April (3). May
(19), June (22), July ( 19), August (7), September (11).
Between 1979 and 1994, I made 16 visits centred on the northern part of the disused
quarry. The visits were distributed throughout the year as follows: April (1 visit). May (3),
June (3), July (5), August (3), September ( 1 ). Two of the visits during July were unsuitable
for surveying aculeate wasps and bees because of poor weather conditions. During these
approximately three hour visits all species of aculeate wasps and bees were recorded
(Archer sample) and usually collected with a hand net for identification.
A comparison will be made between the Archer and Wood samples although the
activities of these two recorders were not exactly the same. Archer being a specialist
recorder of aculeate wasps and bees, while Wood was a generalist collecting many groups
of free-living insects.
A few records were also found from R. Butterfield (collecting from 1907 until 1925); F.
Rhodes (collecting from 1915 until 1920); one record each from J. W. Carter (before 1900)
and J. A. Beck (before 1950); and three records (two from 1890, one from 1918) from
unknown collectors. From more recent times the records of J. T. Bum were made available
from a visit on 12 June 1988.
In the following account, biological names are according to Kloet and Hincks (1978).
Species Present
A full list of species with their collectors is given in the Appendix. The taxonomic
distribution is given in Table 1, at the family level. The dominant solitary wasp family is
the Sphecidae and the dominant solitary bee family the Andrenidae, closely followed by
the Halictidae and Anthophoridae.
Archer-Wood Comparison
Archer and Wood recorded the same number of species of solitary wasps (Table 1),
although only seven species (26%) were common to both samples. Archer recorded more
solitary bee species than Wood and 26 species (68%) were common to both samples.
Ten species (5 solitary wasps, 5 solitary bees) were recorded by neither Archer nor
Wood.
Thirty-three solitary species were recorded by both Archer and Wood, 19 species only
by Archer and 13 species only by Wood. These data can be compared by calculating
similarity indices. Using the simple Jaccard index (Ludwig & Reynolds. 1988), which
Naturalist 121 (1996)
54
Aculeate Wasps & Bees ( Hymenoptera : Aculeata) of Shipley Glen
depends upon the presence or absence of species, gives an index of 50.8%. The Morisita-
Hom index, which uses quantitative information on the relative abundance of species, is
relatively independent of sample size but gives more importance to the more abundantly
occurring species (Magurran, 1988). Abundance was determined from the number of days
on which a species was observed. The Morisita-Hom index is 73.1% which is higher than
the Jaccard index. This indicates that the Archer and Wood samples are more similar to one
another in terms of the more abundant species. Of the 32 species found by only either
Archer or Wood, only five species (16%) were more abundant species recorded on more
than three days each. Twenty-seven species (84%) were less abundant, and recorded on
one, two, or three days each.
TABLE 1
The number of species of aculeate wasps and bees recorded from Shipley Glen in the
Archer and Wood samples and from all records.
All
Archer
Wood
Solitary wasp
Chrysididae
2
1
1
Mutillidae
1
0
1
Sapygidae
1
0
0
Pompilidae
5
2
2
Eumenidae
3
0
1
Sphecidae
20
14
12
Total solitary wasps
32
17
17
Solitary bees
Colletidae
1
1
0
Andrenidae
17
12
13
Halictidae
13
10
8
Megachilidae
1
1
0
Anthophoridae
11
1 1
8
Total solitary bees
43
35
29
Total solitary wasps and bees
75
52
46
Social wasps and bees
Vespidae
4
4
-
Apidae
10
10
-
Total social wasps and bees
14
14
—
Total aculeate wasps and bees
89
66
-
The five more abundant species were Andrena barbilabris recorded only by Wood and
Colletes succinctus, Andrena nigroaenea, Nomada goodeniana and N. rufipes recorded
only by Archer. The cleptoparasite of C. succinctus, Epeolus cruciger, was found by Wood
which suggests that C. succinctus was present but not found by him. Wood also found the
probable host of N. rufipes, Andrena fuscipes, which suggests N. rufipes could have been
present.
N. goodeniana with its cleptoparasite A. nigroaenea , and A. barbilabris are common
solitary bees in Watsonian Yorkshire so unlikely to be missed if present at Shipley Glen.
To account for the presence or absence of these species it is suggested that these species
migrate to Shipley Glen from time to time, reproduce successfully for a period, and then
become extinct.
The 27 less abundant species would probably have been present during the observation
periods of Archer and Wood but were not found because the probability of finding each
species was so small. Even within the Archer and Wood samples many species were only
found on one, two or three days: 27 species (52%) of the Archer sample and 27 species
Aculeate Wasps & Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata ) of Shipley Glen 55
59%) of the Wood sample. The species not found by Archer or Wood were either found
>n one (eight species) or two days (two species), again indicating the small chances of
inding many species.
Seasonal Progression of the Solitary Species
•rom both the Archer and Wood samples the solitary wasp species were recorded only
luring the summer months (Table 2). July was the most productive month for the number
>f species and new species. The species most evident were the subterranean
jesters Crossocerus ovalis, C. pusillus and C. quadrimaculatus which are all small fly
junters.
TABLE 2
The number of species and new species of solitary wasps and bees recorded per month at
Shipley Glen from the Archer and Wood samples.
Mar.
Apr.
May
Jun.
Jul.
Aug.
Sep.
Wo. species
solitary wasps -
Archer
0
0
0
3
14
4
1
—
Wood
0
0
0
5
10
2
4
Solitary bees -
Archer
0
8
25
21
16
13
6
-
Wood
1
4
22
17
10
6
4
Wo. new species
Solitary wasps -
Archer
0
0
0
3
12
2
0
—
Wood
0
0
0
5
9
1
2
Solitary bees -
Archer
0
8
18
4
5
0
0
-
Wood
1
3
18
3
1
2
0
From both the Archer and Wood samples the solitary bee species were recorded during
i he spring and summer (Table 2). May, June and July were the most productive months for
i he number of species, with May the most productive month for new species.
The solitary bee species can be divided into three groups. Group one consists of the
spring bees which emerge during March or April with the adult stage completed either
i luring May or June, e.g. Andrena haemorrhoa, A.ftdva, A. lapponica, A. nigroaenia and
1. scotica , or by July, e.g. A. barhilabris and A. cineraria. A. lapponica is associated with
' he flowers of Vaccinium as a food source. Group two are the summer bees emerging
i luring July with the adult stage completed during August or September, e.g. A. fuscipes
ind Colletes succinctus. A. fuscipes and C. succinctus are associated with the flowers of
t Calluna. Group three are bees present during both the spring and summer probably either
i indergoing two bisexual generations, e.g. A. saundersella , or with a spring fertilized
I emale emergence and a summer bisexual emergence, e.g. Halictus rubicundus,
l iasioglossum rufitarse, L. fratellum and L. calceatum. Group three bees emerge during
April and May and persist until September.
The cleptoparasites of the above bees are given in Table 3. The cleptoparasite of L.
i ujitarse is unknown but in the context of Shipley Glen Sphecodes fasciatus could be the
ibleptoparasite.
Quality Assessment of the Solitary Species
Momada lathburiana is a nationally rare or "Red Data Book" species (RDB3) (Falk. 1991)
md is probably near the northern edge of its range. Two species. Priocnemis schioedtei and
(Crossocerus walkeri, are nationally scarce species (Falk. 1991) but are widely distributed
n Great Britain. Regionally (Archer, 1993) N. lathburiana is a frequent species,
°riocnemis schioedtei a common species, and Crossocerus walkeri a rare species. C.
styrius also is a rare species in a regional context.
56 Aculeate Wasps <4 Bees (Hymenoplera: Aculeata ) of Shipley Glen
TABLE 3
Hosts and probable cleptoparasites of some solitary wasp and bee species
from Shipley Glen.
Host Cleptoparasite
Colletes succinctus
Andrena cineraria
Andrena fulva, A.fucata, A. lapponica
Andrena fuse ip es
Andrena haemorrhoa
Andrena nigroaenia
Andrena saundersella
Andrena scotica
Andrena wilkella
Andrena barbilabris
Halictus rubicundus
Lasioglossum calceatum
Lasioglossum fratellum
Lasioglossum rufitarse
Epeolus cruciger
Nomada lathburiana
Nomada panzer i
Nomada rufipes
Nomada ruficornis
Nomada goodeniana
Nomada flavoguttata
Nomada marshamella
Nomada striata
Sphecodes pellucidus
Sphecodes monilicornis
Sphecodes monilicornis
Sphecodes hyalinatus
Sphecodes fasciatus
Eleven species have a local distribution in a regional context (Archer, 1994) being more-
or-less restricted to sandy habitats. These local species are indicated in the Appendix.
By giving each of the 75 species of solitary wasp and bee a regional status (Archer,
1993) a regional quality score of 183 and a species regional quality score of 2.4 (183/75)
can be calculated (Table 4).
TABLE 4
The regional status scheme of the 75 species of solitary wasps and bees recorded at Shipley
Glen.
Status
Status value
(A)
No. species
(B)
Status score
(A*B)
Common
1
47
47
Frequent
2
16
32
Occasional
4
8
32
Rare
8
1
8
Nationally scarce
16
2
32
Nationally rare
32
1
32
TABLE 5
The Archer national status scheme of the 75 species of solitary wasps and bees recorded at
Shipley Glen.
Status
Status value
(A)
No. species
(B)
Status score
(A*B)
Universal
1
45
45
Widespread
2
27
54
Restricted
4
0
0
Scarce B
8
2
16
Scarce A
16
0
0
Rare
32
1
32
57
Aculeate Wasps & Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Shipley Glen
Using a national status for each species (Archer, 1995), an Archer national quality score
of 147 and an Archer national species quality score of 2.0 (147/75) can be calculated
(Table 5).
Within the region of Watsonian Yorkshire the regional species quality score lies between
that of Skipwith and Blaxton Commons. The Archer national species quality score is
similar to that of Skipwith Common (Archer, 1995). Since Shipley Glen is about 44% the
area of Blaxton Common and 21% the area of Skipwith Common its importance as a
reserve for aculeate wasps and bees is demonstrated. The realisation of this importance is
mainly due to the long period, in excess of 100 years, Shipley Glen has been surveyed for
its aculeate wasps and bees.
' Cleptoparasitic Load
The cleptoparasitic load (CL) is the percentage of aculeate species that are cleptoparasites
(or parasitoids) on other host aculeates. A more-or-less complete list of species in a locality
should be made before the CL is calculated to avoid bias of either host or cleptoparasitic
species. The CL for the species of solitary bees is higher than the CL for the species of
solitary wasps (Table 6). These CLs are similar to values from other sandy habitats
(Archer, 1992).
TABLE 6
The relative frequency of the cleptoparasitic species among the solitary wasps and bees
from Shipley Glen.
No.
No.
Cleptoparasitic
hosts
cleptoparasites
load
(H)
(C)
CL = 100*C/(H+C)
Solitary wasps
27
5
15.6
Solitary bees
28
15
34.9
Aerial Nester Frequency
The aerial nester frequency (AF) is the percentage of host aculeate species that have aerial
nest sites. Again a more-or-less complete list of species in a locality should be made before
the AF is calculated to avoid possible bias of either aerial or subterranean nesters. The AF
for the species of solitary wasps is higher than the AF for the species of solitary bees
(Table 7).
TABLE 7
The nesting habits of the host solitary wasps and bees from Shipley Glen.
No.
No.
Aerial
aerial
subterranean
nester
nesters
nesters
frequency
(A)
(S)
AF = 100*A/(A+S)
"Solitary wasps
15
12
44.4
Solitary bees
2
26
7.1
The wasp AF is similar to values from other sandy habitats but the bee AF is lower
Archer, 1992). The relative scarcity of dead wood in sheltered sunny situations could be
he reason for the lack of aerial nesting solitary bees. Many of the aerial nesting solitary
vasps could be nesting in stem cavities such as brambles so would be less affected by the
ack of upstanding dead wood. It would be a useful management experiment to introduce
ipstanding dead wood into sheltered sunny situations to try and increase the species
58
Aculeate Wasps & Bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata ) of Shipley Glen
diversity of solitary bees. The wood would need to be drilled with holes of different
diameters and depths.
References
Archer, M. E. (1992). Aculeate wasps and bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Skipwith
Common and a comparison of Skipwith Common with Allerthorpe and Strensall
Commons. Naturalist 117: 19-25.
Archer, M. E. (1993). Recorder’s Fourth Report on the Aculeate Hymenoptera in
Watsonian Yorkshire and the development of a quality scoring system. Naturalist 118:
13-15.
Archer, M. E. (1994). Recorder's Fifth Report on the Aculeate Hymenoptera in Watsonian
Yorkshire. Naturalist 119: 73-77.
Archer, M. E. (1995). Aculeate wasps and bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Blaxton
Common in Watsonian Yorkshire with the introduction of a new national quality scoring
system. Naturalist 120: 21-29.
Falk, S. (1991). A Review of the Scarce and Threatened Bees, Wasps and Ants of Great
Britain. Nature Conservancy Council, Peterborough.
Kloet, G. S. and Hincks, W. D. (1978). A check list of British Insects. Part 4:
Hymenoptera, revised by M. G. Fitton et al. Handbooks Ident. Br. Insects 11(4): 126-
140.
Ludwig, J. A. and Reynolds, J. F. (1988). Statistical Ecology. A Primer on Methods and
Computing. J. Wiley, New York.
Magurran, A. E. (1988). Ecological Diversity and its Measurement. Croom Helm, London.
Ogden, J. (1968). Keighley Naturalists. One Hundred Years, 1868-1968. Borough of
Keighley Leisure and Cultural Committee. Art Gallery and Museum, Cliffe Castle.
Appendix
Aculeate wasp and bee species recorded from Shipley Glen. * Yorkshire local species.
Collectors: A = Archer, Be = Beck, B = Butterfield, Bu = Bum, C = Carter, R = Rhodes,
W = Wood, U = Unknown.
Chrysididae: Chrysis impressa (A,W), C. ruddii * (U).
Mutillidae: Myrmosa atra (B,W).
Sapygidae: Sapyga quinquepunctata (C).
Pompilidae: Dipogon variegatus (B), Priocnemis schioedtei (B,W), Arachnospila anceps
(A), A. spissa (A), Evagetes crassicornis (W).
Eumenidae: Ancistrocerus nigricornis (B), A. parietinus (W), A. scoticus (B).
Vespidae: Dolichovespula norwegica, D. sylvestris, Vespula rufa, Paravespula vulgaris.
Sphecidae: Trypoxylon attenuatum (A), Crossocerus elongatulus (A,W), C. ovalis
(A,Bu,W), C. pusillus (A,W), C. tarsatus (A), C. annulipes (W), C. megacephalus (A),
C. styrius (W), C. walkeri (A), C. quadrimaculatus (A,W), C. dimidatus (A,W),
Ectemnius cavifrons (A), E. lapidarius (W), Lindenius albilabris (A), Rhopalum clavipes
(W), R. coarctatum (W), Pemphredon lugubris (A,W), Passaloecus gracilis (A),
Mellinus arvensis* (A), Argogorytes mystaceus (W).
Colletidae: Colletes succinctus* (A).
Andrenidae: Andrena clarkella* (A), A. fucata (A,W), A. fulva (A,B,R,W), A. lapponica
(A,R,W), A. scotica (A,W), A. bicolor (W), A. cineraria* (A,C,R,W), A. nigroaenea (A),
A.fuscipes (A,W), A. haemorrhoa (A,B,Bu,R.W), A. tarsata* (B), A. barbilabris* (W),
A. chrysosceles (A,W), A. minutula (U), A. saundersella (A,B,Bu,W), A. subopaca (W),
A. wilkella (A,Bu,R,W).
Halictidae: Halictus rubicundus (A,R,W), Lasioglossum albipes (A,B), L. calceatum
(A,R,W), L. fratellum (A,B,R,W), L. rufitarse (A.B.W), L. cupromicans (A.R.W), L.
leucopum (B), L. morio (U), Sphecodes fasciatus (A,W), S. gibbus (A,B), S. hyalinatus
(A.B.W), S. monilicornis (A,W), S. pellucidus* (B).
Megachilidae: Osmia rufa (A).
59
Hedgerow Dating: A Critique
Knthophoridae: Nomada fabriciana (A,B,R,W), N . flavoguttata (A,B.R,W), N. goodeniana
(A), N. lathburiana* (A,B,W), N. marshamella (A,B,R,W), N. panzeri (A,R,W), N.
rufucornis ( A,B,Be,R,W), N. rufipes* (A), N. striata (A,R,W), Epeolus cruciger* (A,W),
Anthophora furcata (A).
'ipidae: Bombus lucorum, B. terrestris, B lapidarius, B. jonellus, B. pratorum, B.
hortorum, B. pascuorum, Psithyrus bohemicus, P. campestris, Apis mellifera.
HEDGEROW DATING: A CRITIQUE
RICHARD MUIR
University College of Ripon and York St John, York Y03 7EX
There may have been no more popular topics for fieldwork in the environmental area in
ecent times than hedgerow dating. Botanists, ecologists, geographers and local historians
lave counted species in a multitude of hedgerows, and the results of many such surveys
lave frequently been published. One reason for the popular appeal of hedgerow dating is
( hat it apparently produced important conclusions without any special expertise being
i demanded of the practitioner, other than the ability to recognise different shrub types.
If the notion of hedgerow dating first occurred to the great landscape historian, Hoskins
i 1967), it was refined and developed by Hooper (1970) of the Nature Conservancy Council
and his associates, Pollard and Moore (1974). It was claimed that the age of a thirty-yard
* ong section of hedge could be calculated by applying the following formula:
Age of hedge equals (99 x the number of shrub species) - 1 6
In practice, however, a simplified formula is commonly applied:
Age of hedge equals number of shrub species per 30 yards x 100
This produces “results” of a blissful simplicity, so that a three-species hedge would be
400 years old, a seven-species hedge, 700 years old, and so on.
It seems quite amazing that ecologists were so ready to embrace the theory, for the
ibsence of any credible ecological mechanism to explain why new species should enter a
' ixed length of hedgerow at the strict rate of one per century was quite glaring. The
I ledgerow dating concept virtually invites us to imagine that in each thirty-yard section of
' ledgerow there dwells some sort of elfin gatekeeper, who will open the ecological doors to
admit one new species each time a century has elapsed. No such gatekeeper exists: the
v :oncept of hedgerow dating is flawed, and it is vulnerable to attack on ecological, technical
■ )r logistical, and historical grounds.
1 Ecological obections
i jiven that the discipline of ecology places such high emphasis on the variations between
mvironments and on the delicacy of the adjustment between plant species and their setting,
t is surprising that hedgerow dating has enjoyed the uncritical support of so many workers
n the environmental field since it seems to be essentially anti-ecological. For the hedgerow
ormula to work, each hedged field in the country should have the same number and types
)f potential colonists, and each colonist should enjoy an equality of opportunity to establish
tself irrespective of where in the country it occurs. This is plainly not the case. If we
. ;ompare, say, the chalk of Cambridgeshire with the grits and shales of Nidderdale we find
hat purging buckthorn (Rhamnus catharticus ), wayfaring tree ( Viburnum lantana ).
Midland hawthorn ( Crataegus oxyacanthoides ), spindle ( Euonymus europaeus) and
iogwood ( Cornus sanguinea) are common on the southern calcareous soils but absent or
v'ery rare on the acidic northern soils. In short, the southern hedges have more potential
;olonists and so. other things being equal, they will be richer in different species than the
lorthem hedges.
Naturalist 121 (1996)
60
Hedgerow Dating: A Critique
Such differences do not just occur between different ends of the country, but can be
observed to operate within localities as one geological zone yields to another. For example,
Hewlett (1980) has described how a Surrey hedge composed of hawthorn ( Crataegus
monogyna), oak ( Quercus robor), sweet chestnut ( Castanea sativa) and sycamore ( Acer
pseudoplatanus) changed into one made up of hawthorn, holly {Hex aquifolium), privet
(Ligustrum vulgare ) and whitebeam {Sorbus aria) as it left the underlying clay with flints
and ran on to chalk. Although Hooper in Pollard et al. {1974) suggested that local
corrections to the formula might be worked out for each area, even if the dating concept
were of value, the formula would then have to be recalibrated for availability of colonists,
altitude, latitude, longitude, exposure, geology, aspect, predominant wind speed and
direction and all those other variables which make each setting unique. Since the formula
would then only describe the particular, there would be no general theory left.
There is another ecological objection - and one of particular severity. The hedgerow
dating concept assumes that a hedgerow will gain new species at a predictable rate. In fact,
hedgerows will often lose rather than gain species as they get older. This is a result of the
well-known botanical process of invasion. Walk along any old, hedged track in Yorkshire,
and it is likely that you will come across long sections of hedgerow composed entirely of
elm {Ulmus procera)', if you take your walk in the Dales, then similarly long stretches of
holly will be encountered, while if the track crosses a damp and shady hollow then perhaps
a stretch of bird cherry ( Prunus padus) will appear. When particularly well adjusted to their
settings, certain shrub species flourish to the point of becoming competitive and displacing
their neighbours. Just as elm was invading some lowland woods before the outbreak of
Dutch elm disease, so elm can be extremely competitive and invasive in a hedgerow, where
it spreads by suckering. Other plants which demonstrate invasive capabilities are holly,
which seems able, albeit slowly, to displace hawthorn by a process of self-layering, bird
cherry and blackthorn {Prunus spinosa). As the invader gradually works its way along a
section of hedgerow, then through time that section becomes species-poor, in total
contravention of the hedgerow dating concept.
Technical difficulties
These are varied, and concern different aspects of the concept in operation. It seems to
have been Williamson (1984) who first pointed out that the authors of published work on
hedgerow dating vere wildly inconsistent in their choices of which plants qualified to be
counted. Some count all Rosa sub-species: but if one does that then should not all the
multitudinous Rubus sub-species be counted too? Hooper (1970) advised excluding from
the species count what he termed “trailing plants”, but other researchers include old man’s
beard {Clematis vitalba), honeysuckle {Lonicera periclymenum) and other trailing plants.
Some count all Prunus species and sub-species separately, while others lump them
together. Willmot (1980) split Prunus into all its sub-species yet clumped all Rosa sub-
species together and then chose to count Salix fragilis separately while grouping all the
other willows together, whereas Addington (1978) listed five willows separately.
Had hedgerow dating had any value, then one would wish to make comparative studies.
However, this is impossible because the different researchers have devised their own rules
for deciding which hedge species should be counted and which should be ignored. One
realises the discrepancies which may result by considering a hypothetical hedgerow section
which contains field rose {Rosa arvensis), dog rose {Rosa canina), bramble {Rubus
fruticosus), dewberry {Rubus caesius), gean {Prunus avium), bullace {Prunus insititia), old
man’s beard, and honeysuckle. One investigator could dismiss the bramble, dewberry, old
man’s beard and honesuckle as trailing plants and group the Prunus and Rosa sub-species
together, arriving at a species count of two and the conclusion that the hedgerow was but
two centuries old. Another could consider all the plants mentioned as being eligible for the
count, and thus award the hedgerow an age of 800 years.
Williamson (1987) recognised that many Norfolk hedges which were still forming
extensive networks when Tithe Award maps were drawn in 1839 predated the construction
61
Hedgerow Dating: A Critique
I Roman roads in the area. Even if such hedges were only a century old when the Romans
vaded, they should, according to the dating theory, have contained a good twenty species
c ;r thirty yard length. They could not, for there is only space in a thirty yard section of
l :dgerow for about a dozen mature shrubs. So even if hedgerow dating worked, it would
i ; useless for dating hedgerows older than about the ninth century ad.
Another technical difficulty concerns the shortage of historically datable old hedges
gainst which the results of hedgerow dating can be checked. Those relatively modem
c ;dges, around 200,000 miles in total length, which originated in Parliamentary Enclosure
. in be dated virtually to the year when they were planted, for it was normally stipulated in
e parochial enclosure award that the newly privatised land holdings should be enclosed
. ithin one year. However, for earlier hedgerows there is very little information available
: x>ut dates of planting. Boundary hedges figure frequently in Anglo-Saxon land charters,
id Rackham (1986) describes how hedges constitute between 1.8 and 3.4 per cent ot
i atures named in the descriptions of estate boundaries in different types of countryside.
1 owever, many Saxon estates and parishes descended from Roman estates, and a portion
ii ( these Roman holdings must in turn have descended from prehistoric land units; the
Kidges which bounded them could therefore have been ancient by the time that they were
recorded by Saxon clerks.
All too frequently, hedgerow “daters” have assumed that because a hedge is mentioned
n i documents of a particular period it must also have been planted in that century; an
assumption which far more often than not would be wrong. Medieval documents make
|i.uite frequent references to hedges, but since maps did not become available until the last
cages of the medieval period and no system of locational co-ordinates existed, it is
i ormally impossible to locate the hedges mentioned with sufficient precision and certainty,
i 'ery occasionally, medieval documents record the planting ot a hedgerow in a possibly
identifiable location. Thus, the bursar of Fountains Abbey reveals that in 1457/8 the sum of
l is. 8d. was spent on making 300 rods (about 1463m) of . . sepes circa boscum Bradley
' er eundem" of hedgerow around Bradley Wood, near Huddersfield. Even here there is
i ncertainty about precisely where the 15th century hedgerow actually ran. for the wood
uad shrunk before quarrying and open cast mining in this century further reduced its
verimeter.
Iistorical Objections
The historical objections to the concept of hedgerow dating strike at its very core. The
oncept assumes that hedges are planted as monocultures and gradually gain species at a
' redictable rate. Yet if it can be shown that hedges were commonly planted with a mixed
omposition then the entire notion must crumble. In fact there is ample historical evidence
nat medieval hedges began their lives as mixtures of useful species. Pollard et a!., (1974)
recognised the likelihood that “very early planted" hedges would have been planted of
nixed stock from nearby woods, but the real very early planted hedges belonged to the
Weolithic and Bronze Age periods. Mixed hedges were being planted until the proliferation
.f nurseries, which was "fuelled by garden mania and the needs of Parliamentary Enclosure,
ook place during the 18th century. (An early mention of commercial nurseries comes in
ohn Evelyn (1664), where Evelyn tells of a gentleman who had improved his revenue by
owing hawthorn for sale “. . . by the hundred far and near". Elsewhere in his popular
reatise, Evelyn advocated mixed hedges of hawthorn with oak. ash and elm planted at
intervals.)
Johnson (1978) drew attention to the planting of mixed hedgerow and quoted Thomas
Yusser (1573), who advocated the planting of mixed hedges composed of hawthorn and
wamble:
Where speedy quickset for fence ye will draw
To sow in the seed of the bramble and haw
Elsewhere in his guide to good husbandry. Tusser mentions the purchasing of quicksets
it market, a tantalising hint that hedging material had begun to be grown commercially by
his time.
62
Hedgerow Dating: A Critique
63
Hedgerow Dating: A Critique
Perhaps the most unequivocal statement of medieval hedging practices was provided by
John Fitzherbert (1534) at the very close of the Middle Ages . . gette thy quicksettes in
the woode countreye and let theym be of whyte thorn ( hawthorn] and crabtree for they be
beste, holye and hasell be good. And if thou dwelle in the playne countrey, then maste thou
get both ashe, oke and elm, for those wyll encrease moche woode in shorte space.”
Mixed hedgerows have been planted throughout the historical period, and probably for
much longer still. In the 1st century bc. Columella advised mixing the seeds of thorns,
briars, holly and eglantine with meal, applying the seed and meal mixture to an old wet
rope and burying the rope in a trench. More than sixteen centuries later, in 1609, John
Norden advocated the same hedge-planting technique and recommended a mixed planting
of hawthorn, oak and ash (Fraxinus excelsior). The planting of mixed hedges even
continued into the latter part of the Parliamentary Enclosure era in the west country. The
landscape historian, Aston (1985), writes: “. . . enclosure in more recent times has been
closely related to the activities of nurserymen supplying shrubs at the time of enclosure . . .
In Somerset there were few nurserymen even in the nineteenth century, and so enclosure in
Nerochc Forest [which took place in 1830] seems to have involved digging up shrubs in
the woods - hedges begin with eight to ten species!”
Management also exerts an intluence on the species count. Put simply, in a badly-
managed hedge, where laying is neglected and brutal trimming methods are employed,
^shrubs will gradually die and the species count will drop. Thus, hedgerow dating provides
us with the anomalous situation of something that dies while supposedly becoming
‘younger”! Another management-related factor concerns elder (Sambucus nigra), which
was removed from well-managed hedgerows because it is short-lived, with gaps appearing
in the hedge when it dies. So the deduced age of a hedge could be affected according to
whether or not the landowner had been diligent in grubbing-out elder.
Although hedgerow dating cannot provide us with accurate information about the age of
■ledges, other techniques can be borrowed from landscape history and applied to the
[problem. Firstly, it is possible to make a distinction between the older hedges, which curve
. ind wind their ways across the fieldscape, and the younger hedges, whose arrow-straight
ccourses and rectilinear networks were designed by the surveyors employed on
(’Parliamentary Enclosure during the 18th and 19th centuries. In the east of England,
FIGURE 1 (opposite)
Fledgerow Networks of Different Age
Upper left: Prehistoric fields, probably dating from the Iron Age, in Norfolk, as recognised
by Williamson. The complete system of fields covered an area of at least 35km-; the fields
shared a common axis and were divided into rectangular blocks by lanes aligned, like the
fields, slightly to the west of north.
Upper right: Surviving fragments of a Roman network of hedged fields in Essex.
(Centre left: Typical ancient countryside on the edge of Dartmoor, with hollowed, winding
anes, dispersed settlement, numerous small woods (stippled) and small, irregular, densely
ledged fields. The hedges probably predate the Middle Ages and are quite possibly
prehistoric.
(Centre right: Medieval assarts, Chamwood Forest, Leicestershire. The little hedged assarts
r -epresent the removal of woodland as colonisation advanced towards the area of rugged
jpland where the north point is positioned.
3ottom left: Piecemeal enclosure of medieval open field strips, Cumbria. These elongated
' ields, with their curving sides which trace reversed S or C forms, are characteristic of the
(gradual partitioning of open field land between members of the village community. The
i :urving edges of each field were formerly the edges of plough strips which were grouped
nto parcels as “privatisation" eroded the open fields.
3ottom right: Parliamentary Enclosure. Yorkshire. The angular geometry has been
: ransferred from the surveyor’s map to the fieldscape.
64
Hedgerow Dating: A Critique
particularly, the young hedges were generally planted using a hawthorn monoculture, but
colonists like elder, Rosa agg., ash, bramble and sycamore have gained many a foothold
(and these early colonists are generally more numerous than the hedgerow dating formula
predicts). The older hedgerows may, as a result of invasion, contain many single-species
stretches, but on the whole, they tend to be quite rich in species, though at any one time
their composition must reflect a snapshot of the interplay between the originally planted
mixture and the processes of inter-specific competition within the hedge.
Old maps displaying field names derived from medieval words for woodland, like “frith”
or “hag”, tell of woodland which existed before the land was cleared for farming. Field
names like “royd” (which is particularly common in Yorkshire), “riddings”, “sart”,
“stubbs”, “stocks” and “stocking” denote woodland that was cleared or “assarted” in the
creation of new fields. Most frequently, this took place in the two centuries before the
arrival of the Black Death in 1348, when over-population and land hunger existed
throughout the peasant communities. Hedged fields with one side, or two opposed sides,
which trace the outlines of a reversed “S” or reversed “C” result from the piecemeal
enclosure of medieval field strips, the strips curving in this way, because the ploughman
would begin to swing the long plough team before the headland was reached (see Fig. 1).
Such hedges are most likely to date from the later medieval centuries. The skills of the
local historian take far longer to acquire than an ability to recognise and count hedgerow
shrubs but historical methods will, with care, reveal many fascinating chapters in the long
story of rural ecology.
References
Addington, S. (1978). The hedges of Tasburgh. Norfolk Archaeology 37: 70-83.
Aston, M. (1985). Interpreting the Landscape. Batsford, London.
Hewlett, G. (1980). Stages in the settlement of a downland parish: a study of the hedges of
Chelsham. Surrey Archaeological Collection 82: 93.
Hooper, M. D (1970). Dating hedges. Area 4: 63-65.
Hoskins, W. G. (1967). Fieldwork in Local History. Faber and Faber, London.
Evelyn, J. (1664). Sylva, or A Discourse on Forest Trees. London.
Fitzherbert, J. (1534). Boke Of Hushandrie, As Well For The Champion Or Open Countrie,
As Also For the Woodland, Or Severall. London.
Norden, J. (1609). The Surveiors Dialogue. London.
Johnson, W. (1978). Hedges - a review of some early literature. The Local Historian 1978:
195-204.
Pollard, E., Hooper, M. D. and Moore, N. W. (1974). Hedges. Collins, London.
Rackham, O. (1986). The History of the Countryside. Dent, London.
Tusser,T. (1573). Five Hundred Pointes of Good Hushandrie , London.
Williamson, T. M. (1984). Roman and Medieval Settlement in North West Essex
Unpublished doctoral thesis, University of Cambridge.
Williamson, T. M. (1987). Early co-axial field systems in the East Anglian boulder clay.
Proceedings of the Prehistoric Society 53 : 419-432.
Willmot, A. (1980). The woody species of hedges with special reference to age in Church
Broughton parish, Derbyshire. Journal of Ecology 68: 269-285.
65
Y.N.U. BRYOLOGICAL SECTION:
ANNUAL REPORT 1994-1995
T. L. BLOCKEEL
9 Ashfurlong Close, Dore, Sheffield S17 3NN
■Sectional meetings during 1994-1995 have been held as follows:
Spring 1994 - Rivelin valley, Sheffield (VC63), 7 May
Autumn 1994 - Sutton Wood (VC61), 1 October
Spring 1995 - Levisham Moor (VC62), 13 May
Autumn 1995 - Whitfield Gill, Askrigg (VC65) 7 October
hese are reported in the Bulletin of the Yorkshire Naturalists Union.
RECORDS
he list below includes all new vice-county records and other records of note. Recorders’
duals: JMB = J. M. Blackburn, TLB = T. L. Blocked; PCB = P. C. Bowes; DG = Donald
Jrant. An asterisk indicates a new vice-county record or an amendment to the Census
Mtalogue.
larchantia polymorpha ssp. polymorpha : (63*) 43/19. In stony flush on moorland bank,
;Jpper Derwent valley, TLB, July 1994. This is confirmation in VC63 of the plant formerly
nown as M. polymorpha var. aquatica, which is now recognised as a good taxon.
ossombronia wondraczekii: (64) 44/27. On exposed mud, Lumley Moor Reservoir, DG.
^994.
ungermannia subelliptica: (62*) 44/89. On moist shaded rocks, Dundale Griff, Levisham
Moor, TLB, May 1995.
* ardia geoscyphus: (62) 44/89. On wet silty soil of track, Esp Rigg, Cropton Forest. PCB
:994.
Ilarsupella emarginata : (63) 43/29. On grit boulder in wooded dough, Raynor Clough,
lore Hall Reservoir. TLB, Feb. 1994.
1 orella platyphylla: (63) 43/57. On shaded south-facing Magnesian limestone. Southard’s
lantation, Thorpe Salvin, TLB. Dec. 1995. Though common on the mountain limestone,
. platyphylla is very rare in southern Yorkshire.
i itrichum flexicaule sens, str.: (62*) 44/88. On limestone rocks in disused quarry'. Dalby
jrest, JMB, Jan. 1994.
i icranum montanum: (62*) 44/88. On tree bole in damp Alder woodland. 55m alt.. Ellers
'ood, nr. Thornton Dale, Pickering, TLB & JMB. May 1994.
irtula marginata : (63) 43/57. On shaded south-facing Magnesian limestone. Southard's
antation, Thorpe Salvin. TLB. Dec 1995.
. iptobarbula berica : (63) 43/58. On Magnesian limestone slabs at ground level, ruins of
)che Abbey, TLB. Oct. 1995.
xystegus tenuirostris : (63) 43/29. On wet grit rock by stream in wooded dough, Raynor
ough. More Hall Reservoir, TLB. Feb. 1994.
turalist 121 (1996)
66 Y.N.U. Bryological Section: Annual Report 1994-1995
Leptodontium flexifolium: (62) 44/89. On wet silty soil, Esp Rigg, Cropton Forest, PCB
1994.
Pohlia drummondii : (62) 44/89. On wet silty ground, Esp Rigg, Cropton Forest, PCB
1994.
Hookeria lucens: (63) 43/29. In wooded clough, Raynor Clough, More Hall Reservoir,
TLB, Feb. 1994.
Neckera crispa: (63) 43/57. On shaded south-facing Magnesian limestone, Southard’s
Plantation, Thorpe Salvin, TLB, Dec. 1995.
Anomodon viticulosus : (63) 43/57. On shaded south-facing Magnesian limestone.
Southard’s Plantation, Thorpe Salvin, TLB, Dec. 1995.
Heterocladium heteropterum : (63) 43/29. On grit boulders by stream in wooded clough,
Raynor Clough, More Hall Reservoir, TLB, Feb. 1994.
Isothecium myosuroides : (63) 43/2.9 On grit boulder in wooded clough, Raynor Clough,
More Hall Reservoir, TLB, Feb. 1994.
Isothecium striatulum: (63*) 43/57. On shaded south-facing Magnesian limestone,
Southard’s Plantation, Thorpe Salvin, TLB, Dec. 1995. This is another noteworthy addition
to the flora of the Magnesian limestone tract in southern Yorkshire. Appropriately for a
species of Mediterranean-Atlantic distribution, the locality is almost at the southernmost
point of the county. /. striatulum is known from only two other stations in Yorkshire, at
Gordale Scar and in Swilla Glen, Ingleton.
EXCURSION REPORTS
The recent reports of YNU General Meetings in the Bulletin of the Yorkshire Naturalists’
Union 22 and The Naturalist 1013 contained some bryological omissions. The missing
accounts are therefore reproduced here for convenience.
Runswick Bay (VC62), 9th June 1990
The bryologists’ route ran at the foot of the cliffs round Runswick Bay, and subsequently
along the cliff top to Kettleness. It proved impossible to penetrate into the scrubby gullies
from the foot of the cliffs, and only a few species were seen here, including Barbula
tophacea on the clay. At Kettleness some time was spent on the acid shales, where the flora
included Campylopus introflexus, Barbilophozia atlantica and Cephaloziella divaricata.
The cliffs above had some slightly basic seepages with Cratoneuron commutatum, Bryunt
pseudotriquetrum, Pohlia carnea, and some more Barbula tophacea. Gyroweisia tenuis
was also present. Particularly interesting was the presence of some ruderal mosses in
natural habitats on the ledges, notably Bryum gemmiferum, Leptobryum pyriforme , and
abundant Funaria hygrometrica. The return route took us around the head of the bay, and
we were able to gain access into the top of one of the stream gullies. There were a number
of woodland species here, including Fissidens pusillus, Dicranum tauricum, Mnium
stellat e, Cirriphyllum piliferum, Ctenidium molluscum, Metzgeria furcata and Plagiochila
hritannica.
Malham Tarn (VC64), 5-6th June 1993. The published report (Naturalist 120: 85-86)
contains only half of that submitted, and should be supplemented with the following:
67
Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of a Yorkshire Salt-Marsh
jReat Close Mire
ireat Close Mire is well known for its distinctive hummock and runnel topography and
alcareous mire flora. In and about the runnels, Scorpidium scorpioides, Drepanocladus
ossoni ( =D. revolvens var. intermedius) and Cratoneuron commutation var. falcatum were
'idespread. The sides of the hummocks provide a specialised habitat for a number of rare
ryophytes, notably Amblyodon dealbatus which was seen sparingly in three places.
reissia quadrat a, Leiocolea bantriensis and Gymnostomum aeruginosum also occur in
tis habitat. Not many good hummocks were seen, however, and in places there were signs
f damage caused by cattle trampling. About the main pool at the southern edge of the mire
iere were some good patches of Cinclidium stygium , a rare mire species first added to the
ritish flora from this area in 1836. There were several patches of Breutelia chrysocoma,
id a single tuft of Scapania aequiloba was seen here. This last is apparently a rare species
i Yorkshire and it has been mis-recorded in the past for Scapania aspera. Other mire
wecies included Fissidens adianthoides, Philonotis calcarea, Campylium stellatum and
Jagiomnium elatum. Splachnum sphaericum was seen on dung near the edge of the mire.
Hid Pleuridium subulatum was on soil in the adjacent pasture.
A separate flush to the south of Great Close Mire, near Mastiles Lane, had a small
lantity of Orthothecium rufescens.
a Mire
liany of the calcareous mire species from Great Close Mire are also present at Ha Mire,
uut some of the rarer species appear to be absent. It was interesting to see both
drepanocladus revolvens s. str. (D. revolvens var. revolvens) and D. cossoni at this site.
1 lese two forms have been variously treated in the past but are now thought to be good
secies. The differences were readily appreciated in the field, where only D. revolvens was
> und with capsules. This is an autecious species and it fruits more freely than D. cossoni,
hich is dioecious.
Parts of Ha Mire are more acidic and approach the conditions of raised bog. Polytrichum
me str e, Mylia anomala and Odontoschisma sphagni were seen on the peat.
NOTES ON THE EMPIDOIDEA (DIPTERA)
OF A YORKSHIRE SALT-MARSH
ROY CROSSLEY
1 The Cloisters, Wilbetfoss, York Y04 5RF
i lt-marshes along the bank of the River Humber east of Hull are mainly small and are
: :en poor in plant species (Crackles, 1990). To quote Dr Crackles (op. cit.) "By far and
i 'ay the best salt-marsh occurs to the south of Welwick. It is the most extensive, exhibits a
■11 marked zonation and is species-rich. Common Sea-lavender ( Limonium vulgare)
minates a large area and is an impressive sight in August, this being the only North
imberside salt-marsh in which this species occurs in quantity".
Welwick salt-marsh (TA336189) forms part of the Humber Flats and Marshes Site of
v ecial Scientific Interest: it is roughly triangular in shape and is bounded on the north by
jlwick Bank and on the south-west by Patrington Channel.
During 1993 and 1994 I paid six visits to the salt-marsh on dates ranging from 30th May
6th September for the purpose of studying flies, especially those of the superfamily
ipidoidea (see Crossley, 1993 for details of this group).
Twenty-two species were recorded, of which most are widespread and common,
; curing in a range of habitats. However, the list contains a small suite of species which
restricted to salt-marshes and these are dealt with in detail below.
uralist 121 (1996)
68
Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of a Yorkshire Salt-Marsh
Rhamphomyia (s.g. Megacyttarus ) maculipennis Zett. The first record of this species in
Yorkshire was in 1928 at Spurn (C. A. Cheetham). A single female was found on the
saltings at Stone Creek (TA23.18.), undated but probably 1980, by P. Skidmore. At
Welwick the species was present in small numbers on 30.5.94, both on the salt-marsh
proper and also in the vicinity of hawthorn ( Crataegus monogyna ) at the sides of the lane
leading to the saltings.
Rhamphomyia (s.g. Pararhamphomyia) simplex Zett. Found “in great abundance” on the
saltings at Stone Creek, 7.6.80 (PS), it was similarly abundant at Welwick on 30.5.94,
where, over the entire marsh, almost every sweep of the net produced many specimens of
both sexes. Some were still present on 23.6.94 but none thereafter. The only other recorded
Yorkshire locality is Blacktoft Sands R.S.P.B. reserve (SE82), 9.5.89 (RC).
Hilara lundbecki Frey. Reported from Spurn ( Naturalist 1953, p. 161), this remained the
only Yorkshire record until a single female was found at Welwick, 12.7.93.
Dolichopus sabinus Hal. Previously recorded at North Ferriby (SE92), west of Hull, 7.44,
and at Spurn, 19.6.47, specimens were found at Welwick, 12.7.93 and 22.7.94.
Dolichopus (s.g. Macrodolichopus) diadema Hal. Recorded at Thome Moors in the
vicinity of a brackish drain in 1990; all other Yorkshire records are from sites along the
Humber bank: Brough, 26.6.71 (RC), North Ferriby, 15.7.44 (probably CAC), Spurn,
19.6.47. ( Naturalist 1953 p. 161). At Welwick specimens were found in 1993 and 1994 on
dates between 23.6.-6.9.
Hydrophorus oceanus (Macq.). The first Yorkshire record for this most typical of salt-
marsh flies was at Kilnsea (Spurn), 28.8.82 (RC). At Welwick the species was widespread
and numerous, from the inner marsh to the farthest extremity bordering the Humber mud,
on dates ranging from 30.5. -6.9.
Machaerium maritimae Hal. Spurn, where this species has been reported on several
occasions from 1953, was the only recorded county locality until specimens were found at
Welwick 12.7.93 and 22.7.94. On the latter date the species occurred on the outer marsh.
Campiscnemus armatus (Zett.). Spurn, North Ferriby, Blacktoft Sands and Moorends near
Thome Moors (probably in the vicinity of a brackish drain) are the previously reported
Yorkshire sites for this species. At Welwick it was found on 12.7.93 and 17.8.93.
Other species recorded at Welwick which are often but not invariably associated with
brackish conditions are: Rhaphium consobrinum Zett. and Argyra vestita (Wied.).
Empidoid species recorded at Welwick but not noted above are: Platypalpus agilis (Mg.),
P. kirtlingensis Grootaert, P. pallidiventris (Mg.), Hybos culiciformis (Fab.), Empis (s.g.
Xanthempis) trigramma Mg., E. (s.g. Kritempis) livida L., E. (s.g. Empis s.s.) nuntia Mg.,
Dolichopus nubilus Mg., Dolochopus ungulatus (L.), Syntormon pallipes (Fab.),
Campsicnemus loripes (Hal.), C. picticornis (Zett.).
The taxonomic position of Syntormon pallipes is not clear; specimens were often abundant
on many dates ranging from 30.5. -6.9. Of a sample of males taken on 17.8.93, 21 proved to
belong to the var. pseudospicatus Strobl and 13 were pallipes (Fab.). The specimens have
been retained, along with samples from this and other sites, for further study.
Acknowledgements
1 am obliged to Denice Leach, Conservation Officer, North Humberside, English Nature,
for helpful background information and advice regarding access arrangements.
Tree-Mallow (Lavatera arborea L.) in S.E. Yorkshire
69
REFERENCES
tackles F. E. (1990). Flora of the East Riding of Yorkshire. Hull University
Press/Humberside County Council, Hull.
rossley, R. (1993). Notes on the Empidoidea (Diptera) of the Lower Derwent Valley.
Naturalist 118: 55-60.
TREE-MALLOW (LAVATERA ARBOREA L.) IN S.E. YORKSHIRE
PETER J. COOK
15 Park Avenue, Withernsea, East Yorkshire HU 19 2JX
S3STRACT
i pulations of Tree-mallow (Lavatera arborea L.) have become established at three
i fferent locations on the north bank of the Humber estuary, S.E. Yorkshire, VC61.
i laphic, climatic and horticultural aspects of its occurrence are discussed.
i TRODUCTION
Tree-mallow (Lavatera arborea L.) is native to the British Isles, with a natural
'Stribution confined to rocks, cliff bottoms and waste ground near the sea on the south and
Mst coast from Dorset to Ayrshire, the Channel Islands, and scattered in Ireland. It is
yarded as rare, being found in between 15 and 100 different 10 x 10km grid-squares in
l ; British Isles (Stace, 1992). On the east coast of England the plant is considered to have
ven introduced, with an uncertain distribution due to confusion with the Garden Tree-
• Allow (L. olbia “rosea”), (Malloch, 1994). The identity of the plants constituting these
pulations has been confirmed as L. arborea (Dr N. K. B. Robson, pers. comm.).
This note describes L. arborea established in three new 10 x 10km grid-squares without
. ar indication as to its origin.
corded Sites And Habitats
, e first population was found in 1991 near Cherry Cobb Sands (TA22). About a dozen
ints were grouped together on bare, disturbed soil in the comer of a field and on the top
the bank of a drainage ditch. Plants were subsequently noted at this site in 1993, 1994
I 1995 and on each occasion the population consisted of both flowering and first year
i nts. The population appears to have remained static due to the very small plot of land
. lilable.
\lthough the site is situated some 200 metres inland, it is close to a drainage ditch
ntaining Sea Aster (Aster tripolium). The drainage ditches of this “Sunk Island" area are
i netimes inundated by a backwash of saline water for up to 2km from the Humber. The
sence of Sea Aster and Sea Club rush (Bolboschoenus maritimus) in the drainage ditch
t work provides floral evidence of this.
I ^ater in 1991, and again in 1995, several more stands of L. arborea were found along the
dward side of the ridge of the Humber flood defence bank near Stone Creek (TA21) and
nr Cherry Cobb Sands. These were found in gaps in a dense, coarse flora consisting
i inly of Heracleum sphondylum. Comum maculatum, Arctium minus, Dactylis glomerata
I Arrhenatherum elatius. However, this zone is within 10 metres of the littoral zone and
i hin 3 metres of the “supra-littoral zone”, situated high on the riverside ridge of the bank.
r ; bank is made up of limestone rocks faced on the landward side with soil drawn up
m the base. The resulting channel seasonally contains brackish water. The bare rock face
ries occasional supra-littoral species e.g. Sea Wormwood (Seriphidium maritimum), Sea
i it (Beta vulgaris ssp. maritima), Spear-leaved Orache (Atriplex prostrata ) and Grass-
i v'ed Orache (Atriplex littoralis).
■ iralist 121 (1996)
70
Tree-Mallow (Lavatera arborea L.) in S.E. Yorkshire
Later in 1995, a further population was found on a ditch bank between Pauli Holme and
Cherry Cobb Sands (TA12) but an assessment of population size and habitat was rendered
difficult by inaccessibility and recent ditch bank mowing. This site is about 1km from the
Humber on the bank of a ditch likely to be seasonally inundated with salt water.
Edaphic And Climatic Considerations
Lavatera arborea has two main habitats where it grows on cliffs. One is in bird colonies
where it occurs in dense stands with Beta vulgaris ssp. maritima, Atriplex prostrata and
Tripleurospermum maritimum ( Atriplici-Betetum association; Gehu & Gehu, 1969).
Another is in association with refuse from human habitation where this is deposited close
to the sea. A high nutritional requirement therefore seems to be a factor in the success of
the species in these habitats; salinity is also an important factor, but this may indicate a
greater tolerance to a saline environment than its potential competitors rather than to salt
being essential for optimal growth.
It has also been suggested (Malloch & Okusanya, 1979) that L. arborea may be
restricted to sea cliff habitats because the maritime climate, characterised by a smaller
temperature range and by having fewer frosts than inland areas, favours its survival. L.
arborea seedlings are killed within three hours at -5°C and it is suggested that apart from
direct destruction of seedlings and young plants by freezing, cold sensitivity in flowering
plants results in a shortened growing season, causing failure of seed maturation (Okusanya,
1979). These climatic factors could be the main reasons why this southern maritime species
has not become more widely established in northern Britain.
Horticultural Considerations
Lavatera aborea is a biennial plant sometimes cultivated as a garden plant. It is described
as “not fully hardy in cold areas, but commonly found naturalised in coastal districts” and
“winter protection with cloches is needed. . in cold districts (Hay, 1978). This species
appears to be an unsuitable plant for garden cultivation in S.E. Yorkshire. The most
popular garden Lavatera is the Garden Tree-mallow, known as L. olbia “rosea” or more
recently L. thuringiaca “rosea”. It is a perennial shrub and is hardier than L. arborea.
Garden Tree-mallow, despite its local popularity, has not yet been recorded as a “garden
escape” in this area.
Discussion
The habitat of each of these populations appears to fit the description “in bare places by the
sea”. However, none of the locations is associated with a bird colony or with composting
human refuse. In two locations it is feasible that ditch dredgings rich in artificial fertilizer
are a source of nutrients but the defence bank populations appear to be thriving with no
known agency of nutritional enrichment. The coarse herb flora of this location does,
however, indicate a soil with a high nutrient content.
As a biennial species, these populations appear to be successfully regenerating by
producing seed and since at least one population has been in place since 1990, it can be
concluded that the plant has become established. It is remarkable that none of these
populations of such a conspicuous and attractive plant has been recorded before 1991. This
suggests that they may have appeared for the first time in 1990.
It is difficult to rationalise why a biennial plant that is not grown locally and has
relatively demanding habitat requirements should “escape” to, and establish in, locations so
isolated from public access.
Conclusions
Tree-mallow (L. arborea ), a species considered to be native only on the south and west
coast of Britain, has clearly been introduced and has become established in S.E. Yorkshire.
It appears to be surviving as a result of a succession of winters with temperature conditions
conducive both to survival of individual plants and to seed maturation. The source of this
introduction is difficult to deduce but it is considered unlikely to have escaped from local
cultivation.
Book Reviews
71
CKNOWLEDGMENTS
With thanks to Dr N. K. B. Robson, The Natural History Museum, London, for
termining L. arborea and to Dr A. J. C. Malloch, University of Lancaster, for providing
urces of information.
INFERENCES
ihu, J.-M., Gehu, J. (1969). Les associations vegetales des dunes mobiles et des bordures
de plages de la cote atlantique fran^aise. Vegetatio 18:122-166.
ty, R. (ed.) (1976). Encyclopaedia of Garden Plants and Flowers. 2nd edn. Reader's
Digest, New York.
alloch, A. J. C. (1994). Lavatera arborea L. In Scarce Plants in Britain, (D. A. Pearman,
C. D. Preston, and A. Stewart, eds) JNCC, Peterborough.
alloch, A. J. C. and Okusanya, O. T. (1979). An experimental investigation into the
.ecology of some maritime cliff species. 1. Field observations. Journal of Ecology 67:
.283-292.
> usanya, O. T. (1979). An experimental investigation into the ecology of some maritime
cliff species. IV. Cold sensitivity and competition studies. Journal of Ecology 67: 591-
■500.
;uce, C. A. (1992). New Flora of the British Isles. 2nd edn. CUP, Cambridge.
BOOK REVIEW
i dgers by Ernest Neal and Chris Cheeseman. Pp. xiv + 271, with 51 line drawings and
ares, 47 monochrome photographs and 23 colour plates. T. & A. D. Poyser. London.
"76. £20.00.
dgers are among the best known and more attractive members of the British mammal
i na. This is in no small measure thanks to Ernest Neal’s pioneering work and later
dies. His New Naturalist monograph appeared almost fifty years ago; since then his
t;arch on field biology, reproduction and conservation have continued to enhance our
iwledge of this fascinating species. A new dimension was added to badger study from
'3 when the Ministry of Agriculture, Fisheries and Food identified the bovine TB
terium in these animals. Since then Chris Cheeseman has been employed by the
nistry as a field researcher. No publisher could have found two authors with a greater
iwledge of, and appropriate complementary interest in, badgers. What is more they are
e ; to communicate their experience with a lively, readable enthusiasm.
! "his species has attracted much research over the past decade, partly generated through
problems of badger-cattle TB interchange. The authors’ coverage of new literature is
only comprehensive and up-to-date, but is well placed in the context of what was
vdously known. The book’s thirteen chapters include accounts of domiciles,
ironmental requirements, activity, feeding, social life and relations with man.
rything is here. Whether one wants to know about such diverse topics as habitat
erence in Cumbria, bird predation or implantation,
i is particularly pleasing to have a chapter on badgers and bovine TB. The current
ation of this remarkably emotive subject is explained impartially. The nature of the
ase, the history of the action taken and its relative success, possible mechanisms of
:erial exchange, geographical incidence of infections and prospective treatments are all
sred. What emerges is the absence of a quick or ready solution. The production of a
able vaccine is estimated to be two decades away and even then it is doubtful whether
i tself it would be effective. Compromises on badger management will have to be
ated for the foreseeable future.
chapter on practical field study tells us how much of the information appearing in
72
Jackdaw
earlier chapters was obtained and offers impetus and encouragement to the non-
professional to engage in badger study. Perhaps surprisingly, techniques are often quite
simple, with much to be learnt about behaviour and territoriality using nothing more
complex than binoculars, image intensifiers and plastic bait markers.
The book has a diverse range of first-class illustrations. Delightful sketches by John
Davies precede each chapter, further drawings are provided by Michael Clark and
numerous colour and monochrome photographs are found throughout the book. I have only
one criticism and this in no way detracts from the book’s factual content. I do find the
authors referring to themselves by their first names diminishes the quality of the text. It is
inconsistent with how other authors are referred to and at times makes for cumbersome
reading. For example (p.31) “. . . Ernest and Professor H. R. Hewer (Hewer and Neal,
1954) found . . .” would flow much better as . . Hewer and Neal (1954) found . . .”.
The authors are to be congratulated on providing, within so relatively small volume, this
comprehensive, up-to-date and authoritative treatise on the natural history of the badger. It
is a first class work.
MJD
JACKDAW
Photo: Richard Vaughan
Flourishing colonies of breeding jackdaws (Corvus monedula) have established themselves
in the ruined building of the East Mines at High and Low Baring in Rosedale, where this
pair was photographed. In neighbouring Farndale jackdaws nest in hollow trees, while in
Fryup there are colonies in cliffs. The majority of Yorkshire’s jackdaws probably breed in
buildings in towns and villages. Although jackdaws are commonly seen in flocks, scrutiny
usually reveals that, within the flocks, the birds arc in pairs.
‘The Naturalist’ is available in microform
UNIVERSITY MICROFILMS INTERNATIONAL
300 North Zeeb Road
)ept PR
\nn Arbor, Mi 48106
USA
White Swan House
Godstone
Surrey RH9 8LW
England
Binding
Why not have your copies of The Naturalist bound into volumes?
One year’s issues per volume, or alternatively two years in one
volume at less cost than binding as two separate volumes. We are
also experienced and expert in the re-binding and repairing of all
books.
Spink & Thackray
Broomfield Bindery
Back Broomfield Crescent
LEEDS LS6 3BP Telephone: 0113 2780353
The Irish Naturalists’ Journal
A quarterly journal of Irish natural history
Edited by Dr Robin Govier
Annual subscription £12.50. IR £14.00
Further information from the Editor, INJ
Medical & Biological Centre, Lisburn Road.
Belfast BT9 7BL
inted in Great Britain by Titus Wilson & Son, Kendal
ISSN 0028-0771
Latest publication of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
THE FRESHWATER CRUSTACEA OF YORKSHIRE
a faunistic & ecological survey
by
GEOFFREY FRYER
The crustacean fauna of Yorkshire reflects the great physiographic diversity of the
region. Adopting an ecological approach, this book considers the Yorkshire fauna in
relation to climate, topography, geology, soils and water chemistry, always keeping in
mind that it is dealing with living organisms whose habits, requirements and
physiological limitations determine exactly where they live.
Matters covered include the ecological background; faunal assemblages and their
regional attributes; an analysis of the factors that determine distribution patterns, many
of which are mapped; wide geographical aspects; and conservation. Large areas, such
as the Pennines, Howgill Fells, North Eastern uplands and the lowland plains are
surveyed. So too are localised regions including Whemside, the Malham area, lowland
heaths, and the largest lakes, as well as habitats such as upland tarns, seepages, cold
springs, small lowland ponds, inland saline waters. Notes are given on every species
recorded, including parasitic forms.
Price £16.00 (plus £2.00 per copy p.&p.) Special offer to member of the Yorkshire
Naturalists’ Union £13.50 (plus £2.00 p.&p.)
Please make cheques payable to Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
Available from: Professor M. R. D. Seaward, Department of Environmental
Science, University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1I)P.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE
A Fungus Flora of Yorkshire. 1985. 296 pp. Hardback. £10.00 incl. p&p.
Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire. 1989. 380 pp. Paperback. £17.50
incl. p&p. Unbound. £12.15 incl. p&p.
Mammals of Yorkshire. 1985. 256 pp. £7.50 incl. p&p.
Protection of Birds Committee Centenary Year, 1 89 1 - 1 99 / . 73 pp. £6.00
incl. p&p.
Moths and Butterflies of Spurn , 1991 . 124 pp. £6 incl p&p.
Cheques should be made payable to Y.N.U.
From: Mrs J. Payne, 15 Broad Lane, Cawood, Selby, North Yorkshire, Y08 0SQ.
Telephone: 0757 268242
I
A QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
An Assessment of the Diet of the Feral American Mink Mustela
vison from Scats Collected in Areas Where Water Voles
Arvicola terrestris Occur — C. Strachan and D. J. Jefferies
Labrador Tea Ledum groenlandicum in the Peak District
— D.W. Yalden
Studies of Daubenton’s Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Kexby
Bridge, North Yorkshire — G. S. Oxford, J. Drewett, A. Lane,
J. Moodie, P. Moodie and R. H. Oxford
Bats and their Roosts in Cleveland and North East Yorkshire IV:
Sexual Dimorphism in Size of the Pipistrelle Bat
— A. A. Wardhaugh
The Extinct “Wild” Cattle of Burton Constable Hall, East
Yorkshire — M. J. Boyd
Effect of Crown Density on Choice of Nesting Tree by Magpies
Pica pica — David M. Wilkinson
Botanical Report for 1995 - Flowering Plants and Ferns
— D. R. Grant
THE NATURAL
HISTORY MUSEUr
11 OCT 1996
PURCHASED
GENERAL LIBRARY
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists' Union
ditor M. R. D. Seaward, MSc. PhD, DSc. FLS, The University, Bradford BD7 1DP
Notice to Contributors to ‘The Naturalist’
Manuscripts (two copies if possible), typed double-spaced on one side of the paper only
with margins at top and left-hand at least 2.5cm wide, should be submitted. Latin names of
genera and species, but nothing else, should be underlined. S.I. Units should be used
wherever possible. Authors must ensure that their references are accurately cited, and that
the titles of the journals are correctly abbreviated. Volumes of The Naturalist for the years
1886 to 1975 have been retrospectively numbered 11 to 100 to accord with numbering
before and after this period (see YNU Bulletin no. 3, pp. 21-22 1985); please cite these
volume numbers in all references. Table and text-figures should be prepared on separate
sheets of paper. Drawings and graphs, drawn about twice the linear size they are to appear,
should be in jet-black Indian ink, and legends should not be written on the figures.
Publishable manuscripts not conforming to the above requirements will be returned
for alteration.
Photographic Plates
Readers of The Naturalist will have noticed that the number of photographic illustrations
has increased in recent years. Good clear photographs, suitably captioned, to accompany
articles or as independent features are always welcome.
To encourage this development, a long-standing member of the YNU, who wishes to
remain anonymous, has most generously offered to make a donation, the income from
which would finance the publication of a plate or equivalent illustration in future issues
whenever possible. The editor, on behalf of the YNU, wishes to record this deep
appreciation of this imaginative gesture.
© Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union — 1996
Single Copies may be made of single articles in this journal provided that due acknow-
ledgement is made and the copies are for non-profit making educational or private use.
Copying of more than one article or multiple copying of a single article is forbidden unless
special permission has been obtained from the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union. Permission is
granted for the use of brief quotations in published work provided that acknowledgement
of the source is clearly stated, but the use of substantial sections of text and any illustrative
matter requires the express permission of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
All matters other than subscriptions should be addressed to:
Mr John A. Newbould, Tapton House 30 Moorlands, Wickersley
Rotherham S66 OAT
Items which should be sent to the above include: All membership applications, changes
of address, resignations and problems concerning non-receipt of any of the YNU’s
publications. Please quote the membership number printed underneath your address on all
correspondence.
Subscriptions (unless covered by Banker’s Order) should continue to be sent to:
Mr Derek Allen, c/o Doncaster Museum, Chequer Road
Doncaster DN 1 2AE
The Naturalist is issued free to individual members of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
and to Affiliated Societies.
Institutions and Subscribers £20.00
Registered Charity No. 224018
73
AN ASSESSMENT OF THE DIET OF THE FERAL AMERICAN
MINK MUSTELA VISON FROM SCATS COLLECTED IN AREAS
WHERE WATER VOLES ARVICOLA TERRESTRIS OCCUR
C. STRACHAN * AND D.J. JEFFERIES
The Vincent Wildlife Trust, 10 Lovat Lane, London EC3R 8DT
' i PRODUCTION
tie diet of the American mink Mustela vison Schreber is one of great variety both in its
rtive North America and in Europe where a feral population now exists (Dunstone, 1993).
evious studies investigating the diet of mink in Britain have shown that it includes many
| >ecies of mammals, birds, fish, amphibians, crustaceans and insects (ibid.). The water vole
r vicola terrestris (L.) was included as a prey species for the mink in only two of these
l udies, its proportion of the whole diet being reported as only 2% (Day & Linn, 1972) and
3% (Chanin & Linn, 1980). Other studies, however, failed to find water vole remains in
i ly of the guts and scats collected (Wise, 1978; Wise et al., 1981; Birks, 1986; Dunstone
. Birks, 1987). On the other hand, anecdotal and circumstantial evidence exists which
i rongly suggests that the mink is a major causal factor in the decline of the water vole in
Irritain (Jefferies et al., 1989; Strachan & Jefferies, 1993). Thus there is a significant
esgative association in site occupation by the two species throughout Britain as well as
gion by region. Also, on a site by site basis where both species occurred, as the signs of
i ink increased progressively those of water voles decreased in the same way. Finally,
ere was a marked increase in the rate of loss of occupied water vole sites within the last
1 ) years, in which time the feral mink population has shown considerable expansion.
If the mink are affecting the water vole populations through predation, then the dietary
\ /idence for the water vole being a significant prey of the mink is obviously lacking,
r.rachan and Jefferies (1993) suggest that the reason for this discrepancy is that all
evious studies of the diet of the mink in Britain were carried out in western areas where
i .1 ate r voles were either scarce or absent. This claim is supported by the results of their
i ritish survey mapping the distribution of both species.
In order to clarify this point, and to determine whether water voles formed a significant
r ey item of the mink, the scats of the latter species were collected only from locations
here populations of the former were known to occur.
The results of further research on water vole and mink interactions with regard to their
stribution and abundance are to be discussed by Strachan et al., (in prep.).
I Iethod
i udy area
The study was based in the Midlands of England (Derbyshire, Leicestershire,
ottinghamshire and Staffordshire). This area was still found to possess a high density of
tes occupied by water voles in the national survey (Strachan & Jefferies, 1993). The
vcations visited throughout the study were river and canal-side sites of similar habitat
jality. All were within the River Trent catchment area (Rivers Blithe. Derwent. Dove,
lanifold, Mease, Soar, Sow, Trent, Wreake, Wye and the Trent and Mersey canal).
etermination of the presence of water voles and mink and the collection of mink scats
he presence of both species was established by searching the river banks for fresh field
gns. 125 different stretches of river and canal bank (each l-3km in length) were visited
jring 1993 and 1994.
Water voles mark their territories with latrines and piles of their droppings are scented
ith an olfactory marker (Stoddart, 1968; Leuze, 1976). These are the most conclusive
idicators of their presence. In addition, the bank was searched for the presence of water
* Address for Communication: 31 North End. Wirksworth, Derbyshire DE4 4FG.
aturalisi 121 (1996)
74 An Assessment of the Diet of the Feral American Mink Musela vison from Scats
vole burrows and for tracks on mudbanks at the water’s edge. If any of these field signs
were found, water voles were recorded as being present (Woodroffe et al., 1990a).
The presence of mink was determined by the finding of their distinctive five-toed tracks.
Mink scats were found by searching the bank, ledges under bridges, angler’s fishing stands,
the bases of trees and the crowns of pollarded willows. The dens of mink were also found
during these searches. Sometimes these were in burrows but more frequently they were in
hollow trees. Subsequent visits to the dens enabled many fresh scats to be collected. It was
sometimes difficult to distinguish individual scats at these dens due to their being stuck
together or broken. However, these remains were still collected for analysis.
On collection, each scat was individually bagged and a note taken of when and where it
was found. The scats were air dried at room temperature and then stored dry until treated
prior to examination.
Treatment of scats and calculation of results
Prior to analysis the scats were immersed in a warm, 1 % solution of detergent (Dunstone &
Birks, 1987) and then left overnight. This caused the scats to swell and dissolved any
binding mucus. Also, composite scat lumps fell apart which enabled separation of
individual scats. Soil and sand particles stuck to the outside of the scat came away during
washing, thus leaving them clean.
The scats were then dried in a ventilated cupboard at 24°C for 48 hrs. After being
weighed individually to the nearest 0.05g, the scats were teased apart under a binocular
microscope using lOx magnification.
Remains of mammalian prey were identified to species from hair and teeth
characteristics (Yalden & Morris, 1990; Teerinck, 1991). Avian prey was identified to the
Order, using the features of downy barbules present on feather remains (Day, 1966). Fish
remains were identified to family using keys (Maitland, 1972; Conroy, et al., 1993).
Non-food material was removed after first accounting for its bulk for estimation
purposes. This included undigested vegetable matter, which it was thought could have been
consumed inadvertently with the prey, and balls of matted mink fur, which were assumed
to have been swallowed whilst grooming.
The relative proportions of prey types represented were calculated using techniques
similar to those used in other mink dietary studies (Day & Linn, 1972; Wise, 1978; Chanin
& Linn, 1980; Wise et al., 1981; Birks, 1986; Dunstone & Birks, 1987). Two techniques
were used: (i) percentage bulk and (ii) percentage occurrence of prey types. The terms used
in this analysis are defined as follows:
(i) Estimated bulk : For each scat the relative proportion (volume) of the remains for each
prey type present was estimated to the nearest 10% of the entire scat. Each proportion was
then multiplied by the dry weight of the scat to give an estimated dry weight in grams for
each item for each scat (Wise, 1978).
% bulk: The estimated bulk values for each prey type were summed for the whole
sample of scats and expressed as a percentage of the total dry weight of that sample.
(ii) Occurrence: The number of scats containing remains of each prey type (N.B. scats
often contained more than one prey type).
% occurrence: The occurrence of each prey type expressed as a percentage of all
occurrences of all prey.
The results using both techniques are listed in Table 1 and compared below. The
advantages and disadvantages of the two techniques are then discussed.
In order to show broad seasonal changes in mink diet the results based on the bulk
estimates for scats collected in each two month period have been amalgamated for the
years 1993 and 1994 and presented in Figure 1. In this figure some of the prey types have
been combined for purposes of clarity. Thus, changes in eight important prey groups or
species are presented. These are:
(a) Water vole, (b) Common rat Rattus norvegicus , (c) Rabbit Oryctolagus cuniculus , (d)
Small mammal (hedgehog Erinaceus europaeus, common shrew Sorex araneus , mole
75
An Assessment of the Diet of the Feral American Mink Musela vison from Scats
TABLE 1
The relative amounts of prey remains found in mink scats collected from water-side
locations where water voles also occurred (see text for definitions)
Prey type
Estimated
bulk (g)
% bulk
occ.
% occ.
Mammal species
Water vole
Arvicola terrestris
285.19
19.88
324
16.95
Common rat
Rattus norvegicus
117.93
8.22
210
10.99
Rabbit
Oryctolagus cuniculus
60.68
4.23
85
4.45
Hedgehog
Erinaceus europaeus
8.8
0.61
1 1
0.58
Common shrew
Sorex araneus
10.78
0.75
25
1.31
Mole
Talpa europaea
19.29
1.34
41
2.14
Field vole
Microtus ag rest is
8.79
0.61
23
1.2
Bank vole
Clethrionomys glariolus
8.84
0.61
12
0.63
Wood mouse
Apodemus sylvaticus
10.55
0.73
16
0.84
sub total
530.85
747
%
36.99
39.09
Bird orders
Gruiformes
(coot and moorhen)
397.35
27.69
471
24.65
Anseri formes
(duck species)
244.97
17.07
275
14.39
Passeriformes
(passerines)
6.95
0.48
6
0.31
Columbiformes
(pigeon)
3.43
0.24
5
0.26
Unidentified bird
10.42
0.73
17
0.89
Egg remains
14.77
1.03
40
2.09
sub total
677.89
814
%
47.25
42.59
Fish families
i Cyprinidae
139.72
9.74
150
7.85
Percidae
32.39
2.26
53
2.77
Uottidae
20.11
1.4
29
1.52
S Salmonidae
12.65
0.88
18
0.94
\nguillidae
0.9
0.06
11
0.58
jasterostidae
2.03
0.14
10
0.52
! isocidae
1.15
0.08
1
0.05
Jnidentified fish
12.88
0.89
51
2.67
sub total
221.83
323
%
15.46
16.9
Ither prey
Amphibia
3.45
0.24
8
0.42
Toleoptera
0.37
0.02
9
0.47
lemiptera
0.05
-
3
0.16
)donata
0.18
0.01
2
0.1
)iptera
trace
-
4
0.21
lymenoptera
0.12
0.01
1
0.05
sub total
4.17
27
%
0.29
1.41
dl prev
1434.74
1911
do
99.99
99.99
76
An Assessment of the Diet of the Feral American Mink Musela vison from Scats
n- 176 145 291 535 107 91
Jan/Feb Mar/Apr May/Jun Jul/Aug Sep/Oct Nov/Dec
□
water vole
coot/moorhen
common rat
duck spp.
I 1 rabbit
ma other prey
small mammal
fish
FIGURE 1
Bi-monthly variation in prey remains found in mink scats collected from locations where
water voles also occurred. This analysis is based on percentage bulk of remains in the scats
from eight prey types (see text for definitions). Numbers heading each column refer to the
number of scats anaysed in each bi-monthly period (n= 1345).
Talpa europaea, field vole Microtus agrestis, bank vole Clethrionomys glariolus , wood
mouse Apodemus sylvaticus ), (e) Coot Fulica atra and moorhen Gallinula chloropus , (0
All duck species (Anseriformes), (g) All fish species, (h) All other prey not included
above.
Results
Number of mink scats located at sites where water vole signs were found
Mink scats were found and collected at 61 of the 125 different locations visited. 26 of
these 61 locations also had water vole signs present. In addition, water vole remains were
found in 55 scats collected at 6 locations where no water vole signs were found adjacent to
the scat collection points. The analyses of these batches of scats have been included in the
results, as it was assumed, in these cases, that water voles were present within the foraging
range of the mink involved. 1345 usable scats were obtained during the collection period
and these were subsequently analysed. The bulk estimate (g and %) and occurrences (no.
and %) for each prey type are shown in Table 1 .
Constituents of mink diet
Altogether the remains of nine species of mammal were identified in the scats. These
constituted more than one third of all remains. However, avian prey were found to
constitute the largest part of all remains found. The most frequent bird species were coot
and moorhen, which together formed the most important prey type overall. Seven families
of fish were represented. The bones and spawn of unidentified amphibian species were
occasionally encountered, as were fragments of insects.
An Assessment of the Diet of the Feral American Mink Musela vison from Scats
The most abundant mammal remains were from the water vole which formed the second
nost important prey type overall after the Gruiformes. As the latter group was made up of
wo species, coot and moorhen, the water vole is probably the most important prey species
iverall ,n this area of English Midlands. The foraging behaviour of the mink may lead to
e water vole being the most likely mammal prey encountered, on the bank and in the
vater (Dunstone, 1993). Indeed, the methods of capture avoidance employed by the water
'ole tor millennia against native predators (Strachan & Jefferies, 1993) may be useless
• gainst the alien mink. The mink is an adept swimmer and the female mink may be small
nough to enter the water vole’s burrow. Also, as noted by Woodroffe et at. (1990b) adult
' yater voles appear to be close to the optimum prey size for adult mink.
The common rat, a prey of similar size to the water vole, was the second most important
i lammal species. As noted below, this species may have been taken largely in the form of
■ oung animals which would be less formidable opponents.
Rabbit remains represented a little over 4% bulk, which is relatively low compared to the
' .^sults ot some other studies (39.4% bulk, Dunstone & Birks. 1987; 41% bulk Ireland
I 988; 15.4% bulk, Wise et al. 1981) but is similar to the 3.5% bulk found in a study in the
-ish midlands by Ward et al. (1986). Studies involving radio-tagged mink have shown that
J tey may lie-up with rabbit kills in burrows away from the water’s edge and Birks (1981)
as suggested that dietary studies based on scats collected only from water-side sites may
jerefore tend to underestimate the importance of rabbit. On the other hand, the availability
T alternative prey, smaller or more easily caught than rabbit, such as the water vole in the
resent study area, may also have reduced the consumption of rabbit. All of the above
udy localities with high rabbit intake are in coastal or western areas where water voles are
-w. It seems likely from these results that the water vole replaced rabbit in the diet where
v,e former were frequently encountered. Water voles are probably more easily caught. In
■ e Irish midlands study (Ward et al., 1986) where rabbits were few in the mink diet and
ater voles are absent altogether in Ireland, the Crayfish Austropotamobius pallipes was
>und to be by far the most important prey type.
The remains of hedgehog were found in scats collected on the same day from two dens
-•ss than 1 km apart. It is possible that these scats were produced by a single mink feeding
[ l a scavenged hedgehog road casualty. The taking of more common shrews than small
v dents is remarkable as these are considered distasteful by most predators (Churchfield
L >91; King, 1991).
'-Coot and moorhen are particularly vulnerable because their usual habits, i.e. favouring
oe river margins, put them within the mink's normal foraging area (Dunstone, 1993).
» jck species too were an important prey, reflecting the vulnerability of aquatic birds in
f neral to predation by mink. The mink is mainly a nocturnal predator (Birks & Linn,
v82) and sitting or roosting bankside birds are most easily taken at night.
The remains of Cyprinid fish species were the most commonly found of all fish remains
1 file Perch Perea fluviatilis were the second most important fish. Although this is
pbably a reflection of relative availability, these species often inhabit shallow waters.
' ar the river margins and amongst emergent and aquatic vegetation. This would make
i -m more vulnerable than mid-channel dwellers such as salmonids. The very low
l presentation of eels Anguilla anguilla in the diet is surprising considering they form the
i er’s Lutra lutra favoured fish prey. However. Wise et al. (1981) also found that although
s were present in the Rivers Dart and Webbum in Devon they were rarely taken,
lereas in Slapton Ley, a eutrophic lake, they formed the second most important fish prey.
Hie invertebrate component of the diet, though small, appears to have been sought out
1 eaten intentionally, i.e. rather than taken in the form of gut contents of other prey. The
>ris from the scats was not sieved for examination for earthworm chaetae, though their
sence is a strong possibility (Chanin & Linn, 1980).
Ji-monthly subtotals showed significant variation in dietary composition throughout the
tr (see Fig 1). Relative availability of different prey types is perhaps the main reason for
> variation. However, changes in vulnerability to predation of particular species may
78 An Assessment of the Diet of the Feral American Mink Musela vison from Scats
also have an effect. The river-fringe habits of spawning fish make them more vulnerable to
predation by mink and this would account for the large proportion of fish (30.16%) in the
March/April sample. Fish were the most important component in the November/ December
sample (55.21%). This trend was also observed by Wise et al. (1981) and Gerell (1967)
who suggested that it was perhaps the result of reduced activity of the fish caused by cooler
water temperatures making them easier to catch.
The remains of duck in the scats varied greatly between months and was significantly
higher in the summer. The majority of ducks would be breeding and the females sitting on
eggs at this time and completing the summer moult. There would also be an overall
increase in their numbers throughout the summer as young birds hatched and fledged
(Sharrock, 1976) and this was observed during the current study. Coot and moorhen were
an important prey throughout the year and this suggests that they were always available
and always vulnerable. Common rat was a fairly frequent prey throughout most of the year
(7.5-15.4% ) but featured very little in the May/June sample (0.47%) . A possible reason
for this could be that the mink, being an opportunist (Dunstone, 1993), switched to more
readily available or more vulnerable prey. The remains of duck species featured very
highly at this time (19.27%) as did water vole remains, the latter constituting 32. 2%. The
water vole was least represented in the September/October sample (7.1%). In normal
circumstances, i.e. without an alien predator, the water vole population would peak in
number at this time due to recruitment from successive litters (Singleton, 1984). The low
percentage found reflects a decline in the water vole population at the locations where mink
also occurred (Strachan et al. in prep). At other times the water vole component ranged
from 13.57% (Nov/Dec) to 32.2% (May/June). The latter figure is very high for a single
species occurring in relatively small numbers.
Comparison of the results from the two techniques of dietary analysis
Dunstone and Birks (1987) carried out a dietary study of coastal living mink in Scotland
and also used both bulk estimates and percentage occurrence techniques of faecal
examination. This work and the present study provide the means for an interesting
comparison of the results from these two techniques.
One of the advantages of the bulk estimate method noted in the present work is that it
allows the full use of the information to be gained from the many broken scats. Scats
containing fish bones, particularly those of cyprinids, were found to be much more prone to
breaking than those containing feathers or mammalian hair and bone remains. Thus, when
counted for species occurrence, all the pieces of broken scat had to be recorded as one
occurrence per collection. When examined by the bulk technique, on the other hand, the
full information from the scat material could be used to denote comparatively high
presence of cyprinids. Consequently, percentage bulk of cyprinids in the diet provides a
higher figure than does percentage occurrence (see Table 1). This is not so for the other less
frequently found families of freshwater fish (with the exception of Esocidae, which
occurred only once), where percentage occurrence provided the higher figure and for which
fewer broken scats were found. A higher figure for the percentage occurrence of fish, when
compared with the percentage bulk estimation figure, was also obtained by Dunstone and
Birks (1987) regarding all the sea fish in the coastal mink diet.
Following from the above, an additional advantage in using the estimated bulk technique
can be perceived. Full use of all the broken scats avoids a potential bias towards whole
scats and hence those containing feathers or mammalian remains rather than those
containing fish bones.
Another factor, also noted by Wise (1978), is that calculations based on frequency of
occurrence tend to overestimate the presence of small prey and underestimate the presence
of large prey in the diet. This can be seen with several prey types in the present study; for
instance, consumption of large avian prey, such as coot, moorhen and duck results in a
smaller figure for percentage of the diet using the occurrence method than with the bulk
method. One of the causes of this bias towards the bulk method is that the dry weight of the
79
An Assessment of the Diet of the Feral American Mink Musela vison from Scats
oughage content of avian prey, in these cases bone and feathers, may be relatively high
ompared to that of other prey types. A similar result was obtained by Dunstone and Birks
1987) regarding avian prey. On the other hand, very small prey, such as invertebrates,
rovided a much greater percentage of the diet when based on occurrence as the dry
/eights of their remains were very small indeed.
The presence of medium-sized mammalian prey appears to be under-estimated using the
occurrence method, as may be expected. This is so with the water vole in this study and
'ith the common rat in the study by Dunstone and Birks (1987). However, the presence of
ommon rats in the diet in the present study was found to be highest using the percentage
occurrence method. This may indicate that the rats being consumed in these Midlands areas
'ere young and consequently very small. Small mammal prey (e.g. wood mouse) all
irmed a greater proportion of the diet when using the frequency of occurrence technique,
his could be expected from the size and has been found in previously studied predator
iets (Lockie, 1959; Wise, 1978; Dunstone & Birks, 1987). However, the results for rabbit
. mains were contrary to those obtained by Lockie (1959) and Dunstone and Birks (1987).
hese formed a higher percentage of the diet in this study, when estimated from frequency
i f occurrence than when estimated from bulk. Part of this difference may be due to rabbit
i mains being present with another prey type in 36 out of the 85 scats containing them,
his could have affected the weight of the scat relative to the bulk of the rabbit remains,
i Overall, analysis by the bulk estimation technique would seem slightly preferable but the
I ose similarity of the results obtained using the two techniques provides mutual validation.
Note that the results obtained from the two techniques discussed here represent prey
;ms taken and their frequency and not the weight of each prey in the diet of the mink,
e :veral workers have attempted to calculate correction factors based on feeding trials with
iptive animals. However, there is such a wide variation in the values obtained regarding
i/e amount of undigestible remains that authors continue to use the uncorrected figures
)unstone 1993).
1 tSCUSSION
Selective collection and analysis of mink scats from areas where water voles occurred
ins shown that the water vole is indeed an important component in the diet of the mink,
he small proportion of water voles in the mink diets calculated by Day and Linn (1972)
d Chanin and Linn (1980) could have resulted therefore from limited water vole
ailability in the areas of their studies. The tendency for the mink to utilise many different
i ecies of prey as shown by this and other British studies (Wise, 1978; Wise et al., 1981;
rks, 1986; Dunstone & Birks, 1987), enables the mink to survive irrespective of changes
the availability of particular prey species. The inclusion of water vole remains in scats
llected where no water vole signs were found in the current study suggests that either the
. iter voles were leaving no signs in these areas or. more likely, that the mink had foraged
r food in adjacent areas where the water vole was present, perhaps foraging specifically
■ the water vole. The mink could therefore be the water vole's most important predator.
Water voles were found to feature most highly in the mink diet in the first half of the
ar (17.5% bulk, Jan/Feb; 16.9% bulk Mar/Apr; 32.2% bulk. May/Jun). Water voles bom
one year will seldom breed that year but make up the breeding population of the colony
the following April (Stoddart. 1968; Boyce. 1991). Thus, by preying on these important
er-wintered individuals (from January to April), the mink provides a serious threat to
i iter vole colonies by not only removing some of the young individuals, but removing the
v surviving breeding stock. This could have serious consequences for the long-term
-vival of the predated populations.
Evidence collected by Jefferies et al.. (1989) and Strachan and Jefferies (1993)
plicating the mink in losses of water vole colonies all over Britain is therefore
( ostantiated by the findings of the present study. These findings show that the losses noted
not due to emigration of the colonies on the approach of mink, but to their elimination
predation to extinction. These local losses of water vole colonies lead to fragmentation
80 An Assessment of the Diet of the Feral American Mink Musela vison from Scats
of the distribution of the British water vole population. Colony isolation increases the
vulnerability of the species to further predation and to other factors contributing to the
overall population decline, such as habitat change and pollution (Strachan & Jefferies,
1993).
Acknowledgments
We are grateful to R. Strachan for advice and help in the field at the beginning of this
project with identification and confirmation of field signs. Dr J. D. S. Birks provided ideas
and made helpful comments on an earlier draft of this paper.
References
Birks, J. D. S. (1981). Home Range and Territorial Behaviour of the Feral Mink Mustela
vison in Devon. PhD. thesis, University of Exeter.
Birks, J. D. S. (1986). Mink. Anthony Nelson, Oswestry.
Boyce, C. C. K. (1991). Water vole Arvicola terrestris. in The Handbook of British
Mammals, 3rd ed. (eds G. B. Corbet & S. Harris), 212-218. Blackwell, Oxford.
Chanin, P. R. F. and Linn, I. J. (1980). The diet of the feral mink Mustela vison in
southwest Britain. Journal of Zoology, London 192: 205-223.
Churchfield, S. (1991). Common shrew Sore x araneus in The Handbook of British
Mammals, 3rd ed. (eds G. B. Corbet & S. Harris), 51-58. Blackwell, Oxford.
Conroy, J. W. H., Watt, J., Webb, J. B. and Jones, A. (1993). A Guide to the Identification
of Prey Remains in Otter Spraint. The Mammal Society, London.
Day, M. G. (1966). Identification of hair and feather remains in the gut and faeces of stoats
and weasels. Journal of Zoology, London 148: 201-217.
Day, M. G. and Linn, I. J. (1972). Notes on the food of feral mink Mustela vison in
England and Wales. Journal of Zoology, London 17: 463-473.
Dunstone, N. (1993). The Mink. T. & A. D. Poyser, London.
Dunstone, N and Birks, J. D. S. (1987). The feeding ecology of mink Mustela vison in a
coastal habitat. Journal of Zoology, London 212: 69-83.
Gerell, R. (1967). Food in relation to Habitat in mink Mustela vison (Schreber). in Sweden.
Oikos 18: 233-246.
Ireland, M. C. (1988). The Behaviour and Ecology of the American Mink Mustela vison in
a Coastal Habitat. PhD. thesis, University of Durham.
Jefferies, D. J., Morris, P. A. and Mulleneux, J. E. (1989). An enquiry into the changing
status of the water vole. Mammal Review 19: 111-131.
King, C. M. (1991). Stoat Mustela erminea in The Handbook of British Mammals, 3rd ed.
(eds G. B. Corbet & S. Harris), 377-387. Blackwell, Oxford.
Leuze, C. C. K. (1976). Social Behaviour and Dispersion in the Water Vole Arvicola
terrestris. PhD. thesis. University of Aberdeen.
Lockie, J. D. (1959). The estimation of the food of foxes. Journal of Wildlife Management
21: 224-227.
Maitland, P. S. (1972). A Key to the Freshwater Fishes of the British Isles. Freshwater
Biological Association, Ambleside.
Sharrock, J. T. R. (ed.). (1976). The Atlas of Breeding Birds in Britain and Ireland. British
Trust for Ornithology, Tring.
Singleton, J. D. (1984). An Ecological Study of Arvicola terrestris in West Lancashire.
MPhil. thesis, Liverpool Polytechnic.
Stoddart, D. M. (1968). An Ecological Study of Arvicola terrestris with Particular
Reference to Population Dispersion. PhD. thesis, University of Aberdeen.
Strachan, R. and Jefferies, D. J. (1993). The Water Vole Arvicola terrestris in Britain 1989-
1990: Its Distribution and Changing Status. The Vincent Wildlife Trust, London.
Teerinck, B. J. (1991). Hair of West European Mammals. Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge.
Ward, D. P., Smal, C. M. and Fairley, J. S. (1986). The food of mink Mustela vison in the
81
Labrador Tea Ledum groenlandicum in the Peak District
Irish Midlands. Proceedings. Royal Irish Academy 86: 169-182.
Wise, M. H. (1978). The Feeding Ecology of Mink and Otters in Devon. PhD. thesis.
University of Exeter.
Wise, M. H., Linn, I. J. and Kennedy, C. R. (1981). A comparison of the feeding biology of
mink Mustela vison and otter Lutra lutra. Journal of Zoology. London 195: 181-213.
Woodrotfe, G. L., Lawton, J. H. and Davidson, W. L. (1990a). Patterns in the production
of latrines by water voles Arvicola terrestris and their use as indices of abundance in
population surveys. Journal of Zoology, London 220: 439-445.
Woodroffe, G. L., Lawton, J. H. and Davidson, W. L. (1990b). The impact of feral mink
Mustela vison on water voles Arx’icola terrestris in the North Yorkshire Moors National
Park. Biological Conservation 51: 49-62.
Yalden, D. W. and Morris, P. A. (1990). The Analysis of Owl Pellets. The Mammal
Society, London.
LABRADOR TEA LEDUM GROENLANDICUM
IN THE PEAK DISTRICT
D. W. YALDEN
School of Biological Sciences. 3.239 Stopford Building. University of Manchester MI3 9PL
Introduction
The Labrador Tea, Ledum groenlandicum Oeder, is an intriguing plant, “a rare escape
whose establishment on high and remote moorland in the north of the county is of
considerable interest” (Clapham, 1969: 237). It is the only moorland plant in the Peak
District to be listed in the British Red Data Book: Vascular Plants (Perring & Farrell,
1977, 1983), because it is known from fewer than 20 ten-kilometre squares in Britain,
though as a reputed introduction it is not regarded as a high conservation priority. As a
result of making numerous enquiries and extensive walking over 20 years, there are now
seven sites known to me in the Dark Peak, all of them in remarkably remote places. This
note is intended to put this distribution on record, and to discuss the likely sources of these
plants.
Identity
The European Ledum is L. pa lust re. known from northern Europe eastwards across the
Palaearctic region to Japan and possibly to Alaska. Perhaps understandably. British plants
have been so named, and this species has been correctly recorded from Lecropt Moss,
'Stirling (Ribbons, 1976). Other records, including certainly all those from the Peak
District, seem to be L. groenlandicum. which has broader, shorter leaves (about 3 times as
long as broad) and 8 stamens: L. palustre has leaves c. 8 times as long as their breadth, and
10 stamens (Ribbons, 1976). The difference in chromosome number reported by Ribbons
(1976) is not so reliable however; he reported that L. groenlandicum is diploid with 2n =
26. while L. palustre is tetraploid with 2n = 52. Dr Hugh McAllister has studied this
question, and has specimens from around the world in cultivation at the Ness Botanic
Gardens of Liverpool University, in the Wirral. He reports (1973, and pers comm. 1978,
1995) that there are two forms of L. groenlandicum in North America, a more southerly
form with, indeed, 2n = 26 but a more northerly form which has 2n = 52. He reports
morphological differences between the two as well, the more northern form having smaller
leaves and a depressed apex to the ovoid capsules whereas the southern form has larger
leaves and spindle-shaped capsules which taper into the style. His interest in these features
was prompted by his discovery that the Flander's Moss, Stirling/Perth Ledum had 2n = 52
Chromosomes have been counted from some of the Peak District plants (unpublished data);
Naturalist 121 (1996)
82
Labrador Tea Ledum groenlandicum in the Peak District
morphologically they all match the 2n = 52 form, and those which have been examined
(including the Long Ridge Moss, Barrow Stones and Chew Reservoir plants, see Table 1)
have 2n = 52. Thus the Peak District Ledum seem to be the northern form of L.
groenlandicum.
There is a taxonomic footnote to this story: Ledum is now considered to be a subsection
of the larger genus Rhododendron, and should therefore formally be Rhododendron
groenlandicum (Harmaja, 1990, 1991). For clarity in this account, Ledum will be
maintained as the generic name.
TABLE 1
The Sites for Ledum groenlandicum in the Peak District.
Altitudes and nearest neighbour/track/path distances are taken from the OS 1:25000 map.
Tracks are those negotiable with a land-rover, paths are footpaths.
Site
Grid
Ref.
Alt
(m)
Peat
Depth
(m)
Size
E-W
(m)
Size
N-S
(m)
Nearest
Neighbour
(m)
Nearest
Track
(m)
Nearest
Path
(m)
Chew Resvr.
SE038027
503
2
3
2
380
800
450
Long Ridge
Moss
SE042026
501
2
4
4
380
925
300
Torside
Grain
SK081971
512
2.5
3
2
2775
1600
450
Near Black
Clough
SKI 07980
523
2
3
3
2750
1525
80
Barrow
Stones
SKI 3 1967
592
3
6
4
1675
1500
775
Dean Head
Stones
SKI 40981
490
?
3
2.5
1675
1625
150
Outer Edge
SKI 80970
529
3
5
4
4150
1500
300
Distribution
All the Peak District sites were revisited in August 1995, to ensure standard descriptions of
the plants and their sites. Grid references were carefully checked against nearer and further
landmarks using the newer (1987 edition) of the Ordnance Survey 1:25,000 Outdoor
Leisure Map of the Dark Peak area; this shows doughs and contours with much greater
accuracy than the earlier (1972) edition (Table 1). The decision to publish the precise grid
references has been taken, after some discussion, on the grounds that (1) the plant is not
actually likely to attract collectors (2) even with 6-figure grid references it requires some
determination to find them (3) interested naturalists will be better able to judge whether
they have discovered a new site if the existing sites are published.
To categorise the community in which each plant is found, twelve quadrats, each 0.1m2,
were placed at 1, 3, and 5m to the north, east, south and west of the edge of each plant. The
percentage cover of each plant in each quadrat was estimated by eye, and the mean value
for the twelve quadrats is entered in Table 2. Distances from landmarks and the sizes of the
clumps were estimated by pacing (my paces being about lm); the irregular shapes of plants
and the rough terrain rendered any attempt at greater accuracy spurious.
Three of the sites are published. Ribbons (1976) quotes Allen (1934) as finding “a good
plant of Ledum covering some two square yards” on the Greenfield Moors in South-west
83
Labrador Tea Ledum groenlandicum in the Peak District
Yorkshire, VC63. I believe this is the plant on Long Ridge Moss (SE043026) though it is
now in Greater Manchester. When first seen by me, on 12/1/80, this was an old plant which
had grown apart into three separate plants, the dead stems being left in a bare area in the
middle.
In 1995, it is still essentially unchanged: overall it covers 4m x 4m, the smaller sections
being r . lm x lm and 1.5m x 1.5m within that while the larger part is 2m x 4m. A dead
stem in the middle had about 35 annual rings in it, and was a side stem of a much larger
‘trunk” which I recall seeing in 1989. It bore no fruits in 1995, but did so in January 1991.
The best known plant is the one near Barrow Stones, mentioned by Clapham (1969).
>Ribbons ( 1976) says that “a thick patch of Ledum some 2m square was discovered there in
1949, probably by Dr W. A. Richardson”. Local knowledge suggests that in fact the Duke
it Devonshire’s gamekeeper E. H. Peat, a well known naturalist, actually found it (Mrs M.
: Heardman, in litt. 23/2/92). This plant now covers about 6m x 4m, and seems to have
hanged little in 20 years (Ribbons quotes one source describing it as 8- 10m in diameter,
f out that must surely be a mistake lor 8-10 feet). However, a well-walked path has
.developed along the watershed here, and by 1988 was damaging the uphill side of the
dump, separating off a patch about 30cm across. Concerned about this threat to the plant, I
ransplanted two small stems into nearby wet peat haggs, and one of them took so that a
' ubsidiary clump, 50cm in diameter, located 12m west, was noted in 1991. In 1995, it is
m x lm, and has fruited, as has the main clump. In the meantime, the path has been
Martially diverted, and the uphill side of the main clump is recovering. Another daughter
>lant has been reported, some distance south (Mrs M. Heardman in litt.), which may be
mother attempt at a safeguard, but I have failed to relocate it.
A third plant “near the Shepherd’s Meeting Stones" has been briefly mentioned by Band
1975) and Anderson and Shimwell (1981). In fact it is nearer the Dean Head Stones. This
vi a low growing, semi-prostrate plant that looks rather unlike the other examples, but it is
i t the edge of a cotton-grass plain where the ground slopes up into a heather-covered ridge,
i nd it may be a drier site than the others. Mrs M. Heardman, to whom I am grateful for
roper directions to this plant, remarked that it appeared to be dying out in 1967. but it was
real thy when she revisited it in 1990, as it is now. She says it was found, by chance, by
wo walkers in the 1950s. This plant has not fruited in 1995, and may never have been
t icorded flowering or fruiting; however, the flowering period, in June, coincides with other
eld work, and this negative information should be taken cautiously.
Only 380m away to the WNW from the plant on Long Ridge Moss is an isolated Ledum
hich makes a tall conspicuous dome on an otherwise featureless expanse of cotton-grass.
Ascribed in my notes as an oval clump 2.3m x 2m on 12/1/80, it is now 2m x 3m. More
iterestingly, alone of the Peak District plants, it appears now to be reproducing naturally,
n 12/1/91, I noted a single subsidiary plant c. lm away to the east. In 1995. there are at
iast 15 satellite plants, of various sizes from single sprigs to a bush 80cm x 30cm. They
: e mostly to the west and north, though one is 6m away to the ENE. The large plant has
uited well in 1995, and so have three of the satellites: the fruits are noticeably absent from
e more exposed SE side of the main plant, but abundant on the west and north.
Similar plants, conspicuous domes visible from more than 200m away, are present at
ear Black Clough and Outer Edge. Both are in wet Calluna moor, near its upper limit
here it grades into Eriophorum vaginatum bog. A Peak Park ranger told me of the former
1988, while I found the latter by chance in 1982. Both have fruited, but sparsely, in
-995.
At the final site, unlike the others, the Ledum is almost hidden in a peat gulley running
to Torside Grain, and cannot be seen from any distance. Perhaps as a result of its more
eltered site, this plant has flowered and fruited profusely in 1995. This site too was
scribed to me by a Peak Park ranger in 1988. These sites are listed in Table 1.
Judging from the depths of peat exposed in nearby doughs, all these sites are on peat 2-
n deep, though the Torside Grain plant, because it is in a gulley, is itself only growing
er about lm depth of peat, and the Dean Head Stones plant may also be on shallower
84
Labrador Tea Ledum groenlandicum in the Peak District
peat (see above). All are particularly remote sites, the nearest of any to a landrover-track
being 800m away (Table 1), while the nearest to a tarmac road is 1775m from it. More
significant is their altitude, with the lowest at 490m and the highest at 592m; all require a
fair climb from any access point. The current leisure map suggests that footpaths now pass
quite close to most of the sites, but this is a development of the last 30 years; ridge paths
have developed along most of the watersheds, and the Pennine Way (which passes 450m
away from one plant) was only opened in 1967. In the past (and all the main plants are
surely more than 30 years old) they must have been even more remote. It would be hard to
pick a more remote site anywhere on these moors than Barrow Stones.
The nearest reported sites for Ledum outside the Peak District are at Soyland Moor and
Saltersley Moss (Ribbons, 1976), on Danes Moss (Newton, 1971) and in West Yorkshire
(Lavin & Wilmore, 1994). Soyland Moor, in Yorkshire about 18km NW of the Chew
Reservoir sites, is also a remote high altitude site, but the plant discovered there in 1917
seems not to have been seen since 1925. On one brief visit I failed to locate it, but the
habitat has degenerated from the days when this was a good grouse moor. Saltersley Moss
is a lowland site near Wilmslow in Cheshire, about 30km from the nearest Peak District
plants, but the site was lost and the Ledum destroyed in 1966 to peat extraction (Newton,
1971). Danes Moss is near Macclesfield, Cheshire, and is a reserve of the Cheshire Wildlife
Trust; it is also a lowland site about 30km from the Peak District plants. The plant in West
Yorkshire is in heather moorland, about 35km north of the Chew Reservoir plant (H.
McAllister, pers. comm. 1995). The other seven sites listed by Ribbons, in central
Scotland, around the Solway Firth, in West Lancashire and in Westmoreland, are all
lowland mosses.
TABLE 2
Vegetation associated with Ledum groenlandicum in the Peak District.
Each value is the % cover averaged over 12 quadrats; p = present.
Site
Eriophorum
vaginatum
Eriophorum
angustifolium
Deschampsia
flexuosa
Empetrum
nigrum
Calluna
vulgaris
Vaccinium Rubus
mytrillus chamaemorus
bare
Chew Resvr. 60
12
-
2
-
2
-
24
Long Ridge
Moss
10
11
9
32
-
-
P
38
Torside
Grain
-
4
3
-
10
23
-
60
Near Black
Clough
7
6
-
4
58
2
-
23
Barrow
Stones
9
P
1
33
-
15
-
41
Dean Head
Stones
25
3
-
34
20
-
19
-
Outer Edge
1
4
-
23
55
2
8
8
Community Associations
The plants most regularly associated with Ledum in the Peak District are Eriophorum
vaginatum, E. angustifolium , and Empetrum nigrum (Table 2). Calluna vulgaris,
Vaccinium myrtillus, Rubus chamaemorus and Deschampsia flexuosa are present at some
sites but absent at others. These are all typical members of the deep peat blanket-bog
85
Labrador Tea Ledum groenlandicum in the Peak District
communities in the Peak District, and the poverty of the flora is equally characteristic
(Anderson & Shimwell, 1981). Bare peat, either as peat pools, and a sign of the wetness of
the habitat, or as the sides of erosion gulleys, is also frequent. The plant is mildly aromatic,
and is presumably distasteful to browsing mammals. There are no signs of browsing
damage at any time of the year, though Mountain Hares Lepus timidus regularly shelter in
the lee of the plants, to judge from the droppings frequently present.
Discussion
The most interesting question about this plant is its origin. It is usually dismissed with the
apellation “introduced”, sometimes more precisely “it was, of course, planted there” with
which Druce (1927) dismissed the Soyland Moor plant (as quoted by Ribbons, 1976).
There seems little doubt that the plant has beer, introduced to some sites, probably
accidentally from specialist nurseries or botanic gardens. Clapham (1969) mentions one
other site in Derbyshire, the site of an old nursery at Whitesprings on Beeley Moor. Derby
County Museum records suggest that there were two sites here, and I saw the plant at one
of them in flower in 1980. The following year, however, it had been destroyed by the
excavation of a flight pond for wild ducks. However, this site also had well established
Gaultheria shallon and Pernettya mucronata\ these are both berry-bearing members of the
Ericaceae, which mak'. useful game cover and are often planted deliberately. All three may
have escaped, or been deliberately planted, but it is hard to see any value in planting
Ledum\ it has dry capsules which offer little food to any game bird, and does not provide
particularly good cover either. Of the other Ledum sites mentioned by Ribbons (1976), that
at Normandy, Surrey, is also thought to have been deliberately planted. It is very difficult
to believe that any of the sites on the Peak District moors could have been planted
deliberately. Even a determined gamekeeper would surely have found suitable sites to try
nearer to his cottage than these, and any history of using this species as game cover would
surely have produced some examples nearer to tracks and houses.
Rhododendron ponticum, which certainly has been used as game cover, is frequent still
in the neighbourhood of estate houses, and sometimes is spreading onto the moors, but is
rarely more than a kilometre from its source (Rotherham, 1986).
If it is very unlikely for Ledum to have been planted deliberately in or near its Peak
District sites, it is still possible that it reached them accidentally from gardens or nurseries.
Although it has been in cultivation in Europe since 1763 (Ribbons, 1976), it is not a
common garden plant, and is likely to be found only in specialist collections. Its seeds are
very small, probably wind-dispersed, and could perhaps be blown onto the moors. There is
a single plant of Rhododendron ponticum on the moor between the two Ledum near Chew
Reservoir (contradicting my comments above), but possible sources are about 2km away to
the west around Ashway House and the Dovestone Reservoir complex. McAllister (pers .
comm.) speculates further that seed might be blown all the way from Greenland, but this is
not the predominant wind direction; moreover, if seed could be blown all the way from
'North America, then it could logically come more readily from some nursery or botanic
garden in Lancashire or Cheshire.
The possibility that birds have carried seeds, either in their guts or on their feet, has also
been discussed. The sites for Ledum in central Scotland, around the Solway Firth and in
West Lancashire (Ribbons, 1976) are wet lowland areas. As such, they might make suitable
sites for migrating geese; among species which are known to breed in northern Greenland
and winter in Britain are Greenland White-fronted Geese Anser albifrons. Pink-footed
Geese A. brachyrhynchus, Brent Geese Branta bernicla, and Barnacle Geese B. leucopsis.
rhese sometimes migrate non-stop from their breeding grounds to their wintering grounds
in Britain, so are plausible carriers of seed, in their guts or on their feet. However they
asually stage through Iceland (Cramp, 1977), and Ledum is not known from Iceland. Geese
would not visit high moorlands. McAllister (1973) suggested the Meadow Pipit Anthus
iratensis as a carrier, but though this is a common moorland bird, and does migrate
hrough Britain to and from Iceland and SE Greenland, it does not occur in northern or
86
Labrador Tea Ledum groenlandicum in the Peak District
western Greenland where Ledum grows (Cramp, 1988). Moreover, on autumn migration,
birds from Greenland stage through Iceland. A more likely candidate is the Greenland race
of the Wheatear Oenanthe oenanthe leucorrhoa. This small passerine does breed widely
throughout northern Greenland and Canada (Cramp, 1988); more remarkably, there is good
evidence, for instance from occurrences on ships well out to sea, that it usually undertakes
its autumn migration directly from its breeding grounds in Greenland to western Europe
(Snow, 1953). It is quite often seen on the moors in autumn; indeed there was a party of
three at the Barrow Stones in August 1995, feeding up on berries of Empetrum. While this
does not constitute proof that they transport Ledum seed from North America, it is at least a
biologically plausible route. Some modest research into the relative sizes and mobilities of
Rhododendron and Ledum seeds would be informative, and it would be interesting to know
from bird-ringers whether small seeds can be recovered from the legs or guts of newly-
arrived migrant birds.
Acknowledments
I thank Dr Hugh McAllister for much encouragment with this project; he supplied a
typescript of his unpublished paper on Ledum , as well as a copy of Ribbons’ paper. Mrs
N. W. Heardman, B. Pendlebury, Mrs P. Anderson and various anonymous Peak Park
rangers have helped me to locate Ledum in remote places, and Mrs S. J. Patrick exchanged
notes on the records in the Derby Museum. Mrs P. Anderson and Dr J. H. Tallis made
helpful comments on a first draft of this paper.
References
Allen, F. (1934). Ledum palustre in Yorkshire. Northwest Naturalist 9: 381-382.
Anderson, P. and Shim well, D. (1981). Wildflowers and Other Plants of the Peak District,
Hartington, Moorland Publishing.
Band, S. (1975.) Labrador Tea. Peak Park News, Spring 1975 : 10.
Clapham, A. R. (ed) (1969). Flora of Derbyshire, Museum and Art Gallery, Derby.
Cramp, S. (ed) (1988). The Birds of the Western Palaearctic, vol. 5. Oxford University
Press, Oxford.
Cramp, S. and Simmons, K. E. L. (eds). (1977) The Birds of the Western Palaearctic, vol.
1 . Oxford University Press, Oxford.
Druce, G. C. (1927). Notes on publications, 1926. Reports of the Botanical Society
Exchange Club of the British Isles 8: 66, 73, 123.
Harmaja, H. (1990). New names and nomenclatural combinations in Rhododendron
(Ericaceae). Annales Botanici Fennici 27: 203-204.
Harmaja, H. (1991). Taxonomic notes on Rhododendron subsection Ledum {Ledum,
Ericaceae), with a key to its species. Annales Botanici Fennici 28: 171-173.
Lavin, J. C. and Wilmore, G. T. D. (eds) (1994). The West Yorkshire Plant Atlas. City of
Bradford Metropolitan Council, Bradford.
McAllister, H. (1973). Ledum in Britain - native or introduced? Unpublished typescript.
Newton, A. (1971). Flora of Cheshire, Cheshire Community Council, Chester.
Perring, F. H. and Farrell, L. (1977). British Red Data Books: I . Vascular Plants. Society
for the Promotion of Nature Reserves, Nettleham, Lincoln.
Perring, F. H. and Farrell, L. (1983). British Red Data Books: 1. Vascular Plants. (2nd
ed.). Society for the Promotion of Nature Reserves, Nettleham, Lincoln.
Ribbons, B. W. (1976). Ledum in Britain, Glasgow Naturalist 19: 219-233.
Rotherham, I. D. (1986). The introduction, spread and current distribution of
Rhododendron ponticum in the Peak District and Sheffield area. Naturalist 111: 61-67.
Snow, D. W. (1953). The migration of Greenland Wheatears Ibis 95; 376-378.
87
STUDIES OF DAUBENTON’S BAT MYOTIS DAUBENTONI (KUHL)
AT KEXBY BRIDGE, NORTH YORKSHIRE: SEASONAL AND
ANNUAL FLUCTUATIONS IN NUMBERS, AND FACTORS
AFFECTING EMERGENCE TIMES
G. S. OXFORD', J. DREWETT2, A. LANE3, J. MOODIE3, P. MOODIE3 and
R. H. OXFORD2-3
1 York Mammal Research Group, Department of Biology, University of York,
P.O. Box 373, York YOl 5YW
2North Yorkshire Bat Group, do 64 Pinfold Garth, Sherhurn-in-Elmet, Leeds LS25 6LE
1 East Yorkshire Bat Group, do 7 Orchard Road, Skidhy, Cottingham, Hull HU 16 5TL
Introduction
There is at present a growing concern about the dwindling numbers of all species of British
and European bats (e.g. Stebbings, 1988; Stebbings & Griffith, 1988). The decline has been
monitored since 1978 by the National Annual Bat Colony Survey (NABCS) organised by
Dr R. E. Stebbings (The Robert Stebbings Consultancy Ltd., 74 Alexandra Road,
Peterborough, Cambridgeshire PEI 3DG). The standard procedure now adopted is to ask
observers to count the numbers of bats emerging from specific colonies at least twice
during June, before the young of the year are assumed to be on the wing. The precision
with which these counts assess the population size in any year might be expected to depend
on a number of factors, for example, weather conditions on the survey days and/or the
relative advancement or retardation of the reproductive cycle, which will, in turn, reflect
directly or indirectly climatic conditions prior to the counts. The precise number and
locations of colonies contributing to the NABCS vary from year to year, adding yet more
statistical “noise” to the data.
Since 1983 counts have been made of Daubenton’s bat (Myotis dauhentoni (Kuhl))
emerging from a nursery roost occupying a stone river bridge at Kexby, on the border
between North Yorkshire and North Humberside (SE70551 1). The work reported here was
initiated (a) to monitor the changes in bat numbers at this roost over a whole summer
season, the first detailed study of its kind on this species in Yorkshire, and (b), as a result of
the data gathered, to ascertain the value of three counts during June as a measure of the
population present. In addition, we examine counts from this single colony made over a 12-
year period in order to detect long-term trends in population size.
Methods
The Daubenton’s colony at Kexby Bridge was monitored by four teams on 29 occasions
during 1995. Counts at approximately weekly intervals commenced on 26 March and
ended on 8 October. The old road bridge across the River Derwent at Kexby is constructed
of large limestone blocks. When the present study started, the known roost occupied space
behind one of these blocks, which had become displaced outwards, on the south-eastern
(downstream) side of the bridge approximately 4m above the water surface. On each
monitoring occasion times of emergence of first and last bats (BST, 24 hour clock), and
their number, were noted. A bat was assumed to be the last if no further individual emerged
over a ten minute period. Temperature (°C), cloud cover (%), wind speed (nil, slight,
moderate, strong) and wind direction (8 compass points) were also recorded according to
set protocols. Days with heavy rain were avoided. For statistical analysis, days are
numbered from 26 March (counted as day 0). During this study two additional roosts were
discovered, one in a crack beneath the western arch and the other in the “roof' of the
eastern buttress on the north-western (upstream) side of the bridge. Sunset times were
taken from the Yorkshire Evening Press daily newspaper and interpolated for Sundays
where necessary.
Naturalist 121 (1996)
88
Studies of Daubenton’ s Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Kexby Bridge
On two occasions during the study period, small samples of bats were netted, from the
south-eastern roost on 3 1 May and from the under-arch roost on 4 August.
Results
In 1995, the first bats were recorded at the south-eastern roost on 12 May and the last
seen in the vicinity of the bridge on c. 8 October. Full information on bat numbers,
emergence times and environmental variables are given in Table 1.
TABLE 1
Observations on Daubenton’s bats at Kexby Bridge, 1995 - Raw data.
Obser
Day
Month
No.
bats
Temp
Wind.
d
Wind.
s
Cloud
%.
Sunset
First
Last
1
26
3
0
9
5
3
100
19.28
_
_
1
1
4
0
1 1
6
2
25
19.39
—
—
2
9
4
0
11.5
7
1.5
100
19.54
—
—
3
15
4
0
11
6
2
50
20.05
—
—
1
21
4
0
6
1
1
25
20.16
—
—
4
29
4
0
10
3
1
100
20.31
—
—
2
2
5
0
13
4
1
60
20.37
—
—
3
12
5
14
3
1
2
30
20.55
21.35
22.05
1
19
5
67
7
5
1.5
35
21.06
21.38
22.13
4
26
5
81
17
5
1.5
70
21.17
21.44
22.11
2
31
5
92
11
7
1
20
21.24
21.47
23.13
3
10
6
101
16
6
1
—
21.34
21.55
22.15
1
16
6
79
13
6
1
100
21.38
22.05
22.50
4
24
6
61
14
1
2
100
21.41
22.06
22.40
2
1
7
58
15
7
1
100
21.39
21.50
22.35
3
7
7
67
19
6
1
70
21.36
21.45
22.20
1
15
7
101
16
5
1
5
21.29
22.00
22.45
4
19
7
21
24
5
1
15
21.24
21.46
22.06
2
24
7
0
16
-
-
10
21.17
21.43
—
3
4
8
61
18.5
1
1
80
20.58
21.32
21.57
1,2,3
12
8
60
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
19
8
26
19
—
0
0
20.28
20.46
—
4
27
8
-
11
7
1
10
20.08
20.43
—
3
30
8
6
20
1
1
100
20.00
20.30
—
1
9
9
4
15
-
0
30
19.37
20.00
—
4
16
9
-
14
1
1
80
19.19
—
—
1
24
9
2
8
7
2.5
90
19.00
19.33
—
2
30
9
1
11
3
1
100
18.45
19.02
—
4
8
10
-
19
5
2
0
18.27
19.00
-
Legend to Table 1 :
obser Observer - 1 = Oxfords; 2 = Lane, 3 = Moodies; 4 = Drewett
wind.d Wind direction where 0 = N, 1 = NE, 2 = E etc.
wind.s Wind speed where 0 = no wind, 1 = slight breeze, 2 = moderate,
3 = strong
Time of first bat out (hrs. mins)
Time of last bat out (hrs. mins)
Data not available
first
last
Studies of Daubenton’ s Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Ke.xby Bridge 89
Emergence times
There is a very clear relationship between the time the first bat emerged on each occasion
and sunset (Fig. 1). Until 19 July bats were counted out of the south-eastern roost, but after
this time they moved to other roosts within the bridge (see below) and “first emergence”
was recorded as when the first bat was detected flying over the river. This change in
criterion seems to have made no difference to recorded emergence time in relation to
sunset (Fig. 1). On average, bats emerged 26 minutes after sunset with a range of 9-40
minutes (95% confidence interval of the mean, 24 to 28 minutes).
The regression of time of first emergence on time of sunset (Fig. 2) was highly
significant (P« 0.00 1 ) with over 98% of the variance in emergence time explained by the
relationship (r2 = 0.984). Nevertheless, it is of interest to ask whether some of the
remaining, unexplained variation is attributable to any of the environmental factors
measured. Differences between first emergence and sunset times (emergence delay) were
regressed against temperature, wind direction, wind speed and cloud cover. A negative
relationship between emergence delay and temperature was suggested (Fig. 3), but this was
not formally statistically significant. The trend is for the delay to be longer on colder
nights. This negative trend is heavily reliant on data from three or four nights of low
temperatures which, not surprisingly, occurred at the beginning and end of the bat flying
season. Clearly there may have been other reasons for a longer emergence delay at these
times. A significant positive relationship (P'CO.OS) was found between emergence delay
and wind speed, with bats emerging relatively earlier in less blustery conditions (Fig. 4).
No associations were found between emergence delay and cloud cover or wind direction.
Rate of emergence
On three occasions, 19 May, 16 June and 15 July, numbers of bats emerging from the
south-facing roost were counted over five minute intervals. The rates of emergence are
shown in Fig. 5. On each date, rate of emergence was slow at first, rising to a peak after 10-
15 minutes and then gradually declining. The distribution in May was symmetrical with all
bats emerging within a 30 minutes period. In June and July the decline in emergence rate
after the initial peak was much more protracted, taking 60 minutes in total. The data from
May were collected only seven days after the first bats were recorded emerging from the
bridge, and presumably represent adult females in an early stage of pregnancy. In June the
emerging bats would have included heavily pregnant females and in July both adults and
juveniles. A change in the reproductive status of the colony may therefore explain the long
“tail” in the emergence profiles on the last two dates.
Number of bats
Fig. 6 shows the total number of bats counted on each occasion. Although Daubenton's
bats were seen feeding over the river on 2 May they were apparently arriving from
upstream. The first recorded emergence from the south-eastern roost was on 12 May.
Numbers built to a peak of 101 on 10 June, declined to c.60 at the end of June and rose
again to 101 on 15 July. Four days later numbers of bats emerging from this roost had
declined to 21 and five days later still the roost was totally abandoned (Fig. 6). Bats were
still foraging over the river in some numbers so another roost site within the bridge was
sought, and found to be under the western arch. An accurate emergence count was only
possible from a strategically moored boat; this was achieved on 4 and 12 August when 61
and 60 bats, respectively, were recorded. On 19 August a third roost in the eastern buttress
was discovered and twenty-six bats counted out. Subsequently bats were detected feeding
over the river but, as a result of the unavailability of a boat, were not attributable to a
specific roost site. It is highly likely that the foraging bats originating from the bridge as
their time of first detection matched the emergence delay established previously. Numbers
of feeding bats were estimated on some occasions as a crude measure of roost size. A
single Daubenton’s bat was recorded on 8 October, the last date of the survey. After this
time, it was assumed that bats had dispersed to other roosts and were unlikely to overwinter
in the bridge. The river in spate occasionally floods to the level of the known roost sites.
emergence time (hrs) time ( hrs)
90
Studies of Daubenton' s Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Kexby Bridge
days
FIGURE 1
Time of sunset (dots) and time of first bat emergence (+) plotted against days
(26 March = day 0).
sunset time (hrs)
FIGURE 2
Time of emergence of first bat plotted against time of sunset.
emergence delay (hrs) emergence delay (hrs)
Studies of Daubenton s Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Kexby Bridge
91
0.1 r
0.6 •
0.5 -
0.4 -
0.3 -
0.2 ■
0.1 •
••
0 1 1 1 1 1
0 5 10 15 20 25
temperature
FIGURE 3
Emergence delay (as time after sunset) plotted against temperature (°C).
wind speed
FIGURE 4
Emergence delay (as time after sunset) plotted against wind speed.
number number number
92
Studies of Daubenton’ s Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Kexby Bridge
interval
interval
FIGURE 5
Emergence profiles on three dates recorded at 5 minute intervals.
A - 19 May; B- 16 June; C- 15 July.
Studies of Duubenton's Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Kexby Bridge
93
day
FIGURE 6
Number of bats counted on each survey day (26 March = day 0).
All counts before 24 July (day 120) were from the south-west roost.
A - counts from the under-arch roost; B - count from the north buttress roost.
Data from 27 August (day 154) onwards are rough estimates of numbers of feeding bats.
Breeding
Considerable fluctuations in numbers of bats counted out of the south-west roost
occurred during the first half of the season, up to 15 July. The gradual climb to the first
maximum on 10 June was probably caused by bats assembling at the breeding roost over a
period of time. The subsequent decline to a low of c.60 might be a result of bats staying in
to give birth/suckle and/or of some bats moving to alternative roost sites in the bridge or
elsewhere. Numbers then rose to a second peak of 101 on 15 July, the agreement in peak
numbers is almost certainly a coincidence. All had left the south-west roost before 24 July
indicating that, by then, all juveniles were flying. Extrapolating back from the second peak,
and assuming young fly at about three weeks of age (Schober & Grimmberger, 1989), puts
birth at around the last week in June. This is consistent with Schober & Grimmberger's
(1989) statement that birth is from the second half of June and into July. During 1995, bats
were netted on two occasions. On 31 May all four bats caught outside the south-eastern
roost were adult females, while of three caught from the under-arch roost on 4 August, two
were juvenile females, the third a juvenile male. Many of the bats seen emerging from the
north-west-facing buttress on 19 August were obviously juveniles. Bats had been netted
from the south-eastern roost on two previous occasions; five adult females on 14 June.
1992 and two adult females on 12 May, 1993 (Table 2). Thus the sample of adult females
netted on 31 May is consistent with previous observations of roost composition before
juveniles fly.
Temporal trends in bat numbers
The south-eastern roost of Daubenton's bats at Kexby Bridge was discovered in 1983
and since then counts have been made by different observers, at different times during the
season, on a number of occasions (Table 2). Numbers are difficult to compare over years
aut, despite yearly fluctuations, the overall impression is that the adult female population
size (i.e. bats counted during June) shows no long-term trends. Highest counts are 52
94 Studies of Daubentori s Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Kexby Bridge
(1985; 1 count in June), 106 (1986; 2 counts), 132 (1990; 2 counts), 93 (1991; 2 counts),
73 (1992; 2 counts), 93 (1993, 3 counts), 89 (1994, 3 counts) and 90 (1995, 3 counts)
(Tables 1 and 2). However, in years where more than one census was made during June,
counts decreased over time in four years, increased in two and remained essentially static
in one (1986). These temporal changes in apparent bat numbers suggest that counts during
a fixed period, as an index of population size, should be treated with great caution.
Emergence delays can also be calculated for the Kexby roost for years prior to 1995
(Table 2). There are no significant differences between years (one way ANOVAR, n.s.) and
combining data yields a mean emergence delay of 23.5 minutes (range 12-42 minutes; 95%
confidence interval of mean, 18-29 minutes), very close to the figure for 1995.
TABEL 2
Counts of Daubenton’s bats at Kexby Bridge, 1983-1994.
Year
Date
Count
Recorder1
Notes
1983
?
90
S.W.2
1984
?
>40
S.W. & R.S.(?)3
1985
26 May
49
L.H.
1 returned during count
3 June
52
L.H.
2 August
111
L.H.
Emergence interval: 21. 23-22. 14hr
1986
19 May
56
L.H.
1 returned during count
13 June
106
L.H.
Emergence interval: 20.00-20.33hr
20 June
100
L.H.
Very cold night
1 July
111
L.H.
Emergence interval: 2 1.55-22. 31 hr
6 July
117
L.H.
1990
2 June
132
EYBG
Temp. 1 1°C
22 June
81
G. & R.O.
1991
9 June
74
EYBG
Emergence interval: 21.53-22.44hr;
Temp. 11°C
22 June
93
G. & R.O.
Emergence interval: 22.02-22. 38hr
1992
14 June
24
EYBG
Temp. 18°C, 5 x female adults
netted
20 June
73
G. & R.O.
Emergence interval: 21.56-22.40hr
(when bats started to return)
1993
12 May
10
EYBG
Temp. 9°C, 2 x female adults netted
5 June
93
G. & R.O.
Emergence interval: 21. 53-22. 30hr
13 June
87
G. & R.O.
Emergence interval: 2 1.59-22.41 hr
26 June
75
G. & R.O.
Emergence interval: 22.04-22. 30hr
(1 bat returned between 22.10 and
22.15hr)
1994
1 1 June
89
G. & R.O.
Emergence interval: 22.13-22.45hr
17 June
67
G. & R.O.
Emergence interval: 21. 50-22. 35hr
27 June
65
G. & R.O.
Emergence interval: 22. 02-22. 35hr
1 EYBG, East Yorkshire Bat Group; L.H., L. Helliwell; G. & R.O., G. S. & R. H. Oxford;
R.S., R. E. Stebbings; S.W., S. Walsh.
2 Cited in Thompson (1985).
3 Lesley Helliwell, pers. comm.
Discussion
Daubenton’s bat is a relatively widespread species in Yorkshire (e.g. Whiteley &
Johnson, 1984; Clarkson & Whiteley, 1985; Thompson, 1985; Roberts, 1988). The present
Studies of Daubenton s Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Kexby Bridge 95
hrppHinoPreSentS lce. first detaHed investigation of this species in the county over an entire
Racev BTntam’ S‘m'lar W°rk haS ^ carried out ^ Swift
NoXmptonshfre NeWt0nm°re’ Invemess-shire, and by Richardson (summarised 1985) in
In 1995, bats at Kexby emerged on average 26 minutes after sunset, a figure highly
rrs Wlth datafi fr°T th!,same colony in Previous years. This mean emergence dday
"5> 18 significantly (P<0.05) smaller than the figure of 45 minutes (range 1 1-77
6P«nnnn °bse™atl,?ls) qa°tedby Rlchardson (1985), and highly significantly smaller
(^«U.U01) than the figure for Newtonmore of 105 minutes (range 89-147 minutes 15
o seiwatmns) In the Sheffield area, most records refer to bats emerging 15-20 minutes
relationship hJ WhUe,ey’ ,985)* ^ is gently no simple latitudinal
rela t onship between sunset time and emergence delay in this species. However the
Scottish study is complicated by the fact that the Daubenton’s bats were sharing a roost
with brown long-eared bats (Plecotus auritus (L.)), which left on average 40 minutes after
sunset. Swift and Racey (1983) suggest that interspecific interactions may have resulted in
this temporal partitioning as both species were using the same access hole These
comparisons suggest that emergence delay varies very little for a specific roost not only
within a season but also between years. It appears, therefore, to be a constant, colony-
specific characteristic which varies between different roosts of the same species. The
reason) s) for emergence delay differences between single-species colonies are not clear.
he only environmental factor measured that had a significant effect on the variability in
emergence time was wind speed. If the relationship is real, presumably the first bats
preparing to emerge at dusk “sense" blustery conditions at the roost entrance and delay
their departure accordingly. Whether this knowledge is obtained directly or indirectly (e g
via local temperature effects) is unknown. Swift (1980), in her study of activity patterns in
Pipistrelle bats ( Pipistrellus pipistrellus (Schreber)) in north-east Scotland, also found a
very close relationship between emergence time and sunset but was unable to account for
day-to-day variation in emergence delay by changes in cloud cover, wind speed ambient
temperature, rain, light mist or moonlight.
The numbers of bats counted varied through the summer, although the discovery of two
previously unknown roost site in the bridge means that reliable estimates were difficult
later in the season. A number of observations suggest that there is considerable mobility
between roosts within the bridge and/or elsewhere. It is assumed that the initial increase to
101 individuals on 10 June represents the gathering of breeding females. Certainly all 11
bats netted over the years during this period in the season have been females. Numbers
then dropped to a low of c.60 in late June/early July. If this drop was a result of heavily
pregnant or nursing bats remaining within the roost, and if. as a conservative estimate, only
half the females successfully gave birth to a single young, then, by the time juveniles were
on the wing, counts of c. 150 would have been expected. The second peak on 15 July only
reached 101. This suggests that the drop from the first peak was a result of adult females
leaving the roost and moving elsewhere. If these too were breeding females, clearly only a
portion of the reproductive output of the whole population was monitored.
The south-western roost was abandoned at a time when the weather was very sunny and
temperatures high (24°C at c. 2 1.00 hrs. on 19 August). This roost site receives the full glare
of the sun tor the majority of the day. Bats presumably moved to seek cooler conditions, and
it is probably not coincidental that the two new roosts were either under the bridge or on the
north-facing side. For this reason, it seems unlikely that bats moving from the south-
western roost during late June/early July would have utilised these alternative sites within
the bridge if they were about to produce young. A second apparent drop in population size
was found when the 101 individuals abandoned the south-western roost. Only 60 individuals
were subsequently counted from the under-arch site although some may have moved to the
(then unrecognised) buttress roost. Of the small number of bats netted from the under-arch
roost all were juveniles and it is possible that, by this time, a proportion of the adult females
had left the bridge (see Swift (1980) for a similar pattern in Pipistrelles). Future,
simultaneous counts from all roosts will address at least some of these considerations.
96
Studies of Daubenton s Bat Myotis daubentoni (Kuhl) at Kexby Bridge
Overall, there are no strong indications that the counted population size of the Kexby
roost has changed substantially over a 12 year period. The apparent stability of this colony,
against the general background of dwindling bat numbers (Stebbings & Griffith, 1983),
may reflect the continuing high water quality of the River Derwent, over which the bats
forage. An alternative possibility is that the stability in bat population size is an illusion.
The size of the favoured south-western roost may impose a physical limit on the number of
bats it can accommodate, forcing some individuals to breed elsewhere. If the bridge offers
the preferred nursery site then, as long as numbers of bats are greater than the roost limit,
counts from this roost will be stable, although the overall population size may be declining.
This is another factor that might limit the usefulness of “snap-shot” counts.
Acknowledgements
We would like to thank Lesley Helliwell for providing data on colony counts 1984-1986,
and Colin Howes, Phil Richardson and Michael Thompson for helpful comments on an
earlier report of this work and for suggesting additional references. We are also extremely
grateful to Paul Freer (NRA, York) for allowing us to borrow a boat on two occasions.
References
Clarkson, K. and Whiteley, D. (1985). The distribution of the Daubenton’s bat in Sheffield.
Sorby Record 23: 17-20.
Richardson, P. (1985). Bats. Whittet Books, London.
Roberts, D. (1988) Bats under bridges in North Yorkshire. Bat News 16: 6-7.
Schober, W. and Grimmberger, E. (1987). A Guide to the Bats of Britain and Europe.
Hamlyn, London.
Stebbings, R. E. (1988.) Conservation of European Bats. Christopher Helm, London.
Stebbings, R. E. and Griffith, F. (1988). Distribution and Status of Bats in Europe. Institute
of Terrestrial Ecology.
Swift, S. M. (1980). Activity patterns in Pipistrelle bats ( Pipistrellus pipistrellus) in north-
east Scotland. J. Zool., Lond. 190: 285-295.
Swift, S. M. and Racey, P. A. (1983). Resource partitioning in two species of vespertilionid
bats (Chiroptera) occupying the same roost. J. Zool., Lond. 200: 249-259.
Thompson, M. J. A. (1985). Daubenton’s bat. In: M. J. Delany (ed.) Yorkshire Mammals.
pp. 50-53. University of Bradford.
Whiteley, D. and Johnson, S. (1984). Daubenton’s bat in the Sheffield area - 1984. Sorby
Record 22: 24-27.
97
1 HLIR ROOSTS IN CLEVELAND AND NORTH EAST
YORKSHIRE IV: SEXUAL DIMORPHISM IN SIZE OF THE
PIPISTRELLE BAT
A. A. WARDHAUGH
' Captain Cook s Crescent, Marton, Middlesbrough, Cleveland TS7 8NN
Abstract
r-“gthS f°r 55Hdlilt P'Pistruelle bats (P'Pistrellus pipistrellus Schreber) from north-
east Eng and are provided, males being 3.82% smaller than females. How this relates to
are considered " * P'piStrelle m Britain is discussed and the reasons for this dimorphism
Introduction
The existence of sexual dimorphism in the size of vespertilionid bats is well known
females being slightly larger than males, probably due to the need for the former to fly with
and nourish proportionately very large foetuses (Myers, 1978). Data on species occurring
in Britain are provided by Corbet and Harris (1991), with Stebbings (1991) making the
general comment that males are on average 6% smaller than females.
Body mass among vespertilionid bats is often very variable, largely due to marked
seasonal patterns of activity with respect to reproduction and hibernation. Furthermore,
mass of the pipistrelle (Pipistrellus pipistrellus Schreber) can vary by a factor of 0.3 in 24
hours (Stebbings, 1973). Consequently, linear measurements, notably that of the forearm
(i.e. radius length) are of much greater value in the investigation of size variation.
Nevertheless, for the pipistrelle. Britain’s most common bat species, most published data
on forearm length refer to females, the reason being that adult males roost either singly or
in very small groups, making them difficult to locate for study. In contrast, females form
large, quite conspicuous nursery colonies during spring and summer, often of 100 or more
animals.
The earliest published data on sexual dimorphism in forearm length of the pipistrelle
appears to be that of Barrett-Hamilton (1911), relating to twelve males and eleven females.
Stebbings (1968) and Walton (1975) provided data on juvenile but probably fully grown
pipistrelles of both sexes from single colonies in Dorset and near Aberystwyth respectively.
Mean forearm lengths for ten groups of female pipistrelles from various parts of the British
Isles, and just one group of 97 males from Northamptonshire, are provided by Avery
(1991). In addition, Stebbings (1973) carried out a large-scale investigation into the
possible existence of size dines in forearm length of female pipistrelles in Britain.
The purpose of this article is to present and discuss data on sexual dimorphism in
forearm length of the pipistrelle from a defined area of north-east England.
Methods
The study area (see Wardhaugh 1993, fig. 1) includes the former county of Cleveland and
part of North Yorkshire (i.e. parts of Watsonian vice-counties 62 and 66). Forearm
measurements for 55 pipistrelle bats were collected from 1985 to 1995 inclusive. Twenty-
eight males were measured, all being either isolated individuals which had strayed into
buildings, or else exhausted, injured or freshly dead animals. Of the 27 females involved,
nine were similar in origin to the males, whilst 18 were caught at dusk as they emerged
from roosts and were measured as an incidental part of other work (Wardhaugh, 1992,
1994). The latter group of animals originated from a total of nine roosts, distributed
throughout the study area.
All forearm measurements, of the right radius, were made using Draper vernier calipers,
employing the measuring technique described by Stebbings (1967). Measurements were
98
Bats and their Roosts in Cleveland and North East Yorkshire
made to the nearest 0.1 mm. Limited trials involving repeat measurements of a sample of
animals indicated that accuracy was to within ±0.1 mm. All animals were fully grown
adults, as evidenced by completed ossification of the epiphyses of the metacarpals and
phalanges (Stebbings, 1986).
As required by the 1981 Wildlife and Countryside Act, this work was carried out by the
author under licence issued by English Nature.
Results
Due to the lack of widely accessible data on forearm length of adult male pipistrelles, the
measurements taken are provided in full in Table 1. The difference in mean forearm length
between sexes is highly significant (d = 5.99; p<0.001), mean lengths of males being
3.82% less than that of females. Since females came from two sources, i.e. those found
stranded, exhausted, injured or freshly dead (9 animals) or taken from maternity roosts (18
animals), these were compared statistically. Mean forearm lengths for these two groups
were 32.59 ± 0.30mm and 33.16 ± 0.19 mm respectively, the difference not being
significant (t = 1.59; p between 0.2 and 0.1). Means from the present study are compared
with those from other investigations carried out elsewhere in Britain (Table 2). Coefficients
of variation (i.e. S.D. x 100/mean) were calculated for the present work and for two other
studies by Stebbings (1968) and Walton (1975) where sufficient data were provided for
comparative purposes (Table 3).
TABLE 1
Forearm length of the pipistrelle (Pipistrellus pipistrellus) in north-east England
(n = 55)
Forearm Length
(mm)
Number of animals
males females
Forearm length
(mm)
Number of animals
males females
30.0
1
32.3
1
30.1
-
—
32.4
—
2
30.2
—
—
32.5
1
—
30.3
-
—
32.6
1
2
30.4
-
—
32.7
1
1
30.5
-
—
32.8
—
—
30.6
1
—
32.9
• —
—
30.7
-
—
33.0
—
2
30.8
-
—
33.1
—
1
30.9
2
—
33.2
—
—
31.0
1
—
33.3
1
1
31.1
—
—
33.4
—
—
31.2
—
—
33.5
—
2
31.3
1
—
33.6
—
1
31.4
2
—
33.7
—
1
31.5
3
2
33.8
—
1
31.6
2
1
33.9
—
3
31.7
I
-
34.0
—
2
31.8
1
—
34.1
—
—
31.9
3
1
34.2
—
—
32.0
4
2
34.3
—
—
32.1
1
-
34.4
—
1
32.2
1
-
Mean
31.71
32.97
± S.E.
±0.127
±0.168
99
Bats and their Roosts in Cleveland and North East Yorkshire
TABLE 2
Forearm length ot the pipistrelle (Pipistrellus pipistrellus) from various parts of Britain
Author &
Location
Mean forearm length (mm) Comments
males females
(n) (n)
Stebbings
(1968)
Dorset
adults
(-)
juveniles 30.89
(204)
31.51
(40)
31.79
(185)
Animals all from one roost 30.7.67 to
10.8.67. Mean difference between
juvenile males and females highly
significant. p<0.001
Stebbings
(1973)
Co. Durham
adults
(-)
32.7
(121)
Animals evidently from a nursery
roost.
Walton
(1975)
Aberystwyth
adults
(-)
juveniles 29.92
(25)
(-)
30.87
(30)
All animals from one nursery roost.
17.8.69. Mean difference between
juvenile males and females highly
significant. px0.(X) 1
Avery
(1991)
Northamptonshire
adults 31.2
(97)
32.0
(179)
No information on the origin of the
animals (e.g. nursery roost) is
provided.
nine other areas
in Britain
adults
(-)
3 1 .0-32.9
(18-412)
Present study
north-east
Yorkshire &
Co. Durham
adults 31.71
(28)
32.97
(27)
In the above, juveniles are defined as animals deemed to be fully grown, being between
about 60 days and one year in age.
Discussion
When considering the data in Table 2, it should be borne in mind that measurements for the
present work were gathered over a period of ten years, animals of both sexes originating
from a variety of localities. This should serve to avoid any bias due to size variation
between years and between populations from different colonies. Such variation may have
influenced the results in studies where all animals were obtained from one roost site at one
time. Thus, for example, in an investigation of a nursery colony in Dorset (Table 2),
Stebbings (1968) speculated that the larger size of fully grown juvenile females compared
with that of adults may have been due to favourable weather during the summer of the year
concerned which permitted the mothers of the former to feed well during lactation and
thereby produce larger than average young. This in turn suggests that the juvenile males
from this colony may also have been relatively large for Dorset pipistrelles (Table 2). In
spite of this, their mean forearm length was 0.82mm less than that for adult males in the
present study. Furthermore, both females and males from Cleveland and North Yorkshire
were, on average, larger than animals from any other region (Table 2). among the closest in
size being a group of adult females from County Durham (Stebbings, 1973). This is in
accordance with a possible cline noted by Stebbings (1973) of increasing size from south to
100
Bats and their Roosts in Cleveland and North East Yorkshire
north in Britain. Interestingly, Avery (1991) commented that “size varies regionally but
with no obvious trends’’. The largest group of females listed in the latter publication was
from Lincolnshire, with a mean forearm length of 32.9mm (n = 75), very similar to the
mean of 32.97mm for the present study (Table 2).
TABLE 3
Coefficients of variation of forearm length for populations of the pipistrelle
(Pipistrellus pipistrellus)
Author &
location
Coefficient of variation
%
Stebbings (1968)
juvenile males
1.61
Dorset
juvenile females
1.62
adult females
0.82
Walton (1975)
juvenile males
3.41
Aberystwyth
juvenile females
3.12
Present study
adult males
2.13
North-east Yorkshire & Co. Durham
adult females
2.64
The coefficients of variation noted in the present work of 2.13% for males and 2.64% for
females are low, as is typical for bats when compared with those for the limbs of other
mammals (Long, 1968). This probably results from constraints imposed by flight on
proportional variation in bats. Moreover, they are suggestive of stabilising selection,
whereby extremes in size tend to be removed from the population. In this respect, such data
as are available are somewhat equivocal (Table 3). These figures are suggestive of regional
differences and therefore comparison between them would be inappropriate. However,
coefficients of variation calculated for the data collected by Stebbings (1968) may indicate
stabilising selection, adult females having a markedly lower value than juveniles (0.82%
compared with 1.62%).
Regarding size dimorphism, the mean difference noted in the present work of 1 ,26mm,
with males 3.82% smaller than females, is greater than that in the only other set of data,
involving adult males, from Northamptonshire (Avery, 1991), where the size difference
was 0.8mm (2.5%). In the two studies involving juveniles by Stebbings (1968) and Walton
(1975), the corresponding figures were 1.08 mm (2.83%) for the Dorset colony and
0.95mm (3.08%) for that in Aberystwyth. The reason for this slight but consistent size
dimorphism in vespertilionid bats was investigated by Myers (1978) who rejected both
sexual selection and resource partitioning with respect to diet as possible explanations.
Regarding the latter, this is supported by the findings of Swift et al. (1985) who found no
difference in diet between sexes in the pipistrelle. Myers (1978) provided evidence in
support of the hypothesis that larger size in females is a consequence of the need to fly and
provide nourishment for foetuses of unusually large size, commonly up to 30% of adult
body mass at birth. Furthermore, it was both reasoned and then demonstrated among 28
species, chiefly from the Americas, that sexual dimorphism in forearm length is greatest in
those bats which bear the most foetal and neonatal mass. Thus the modal number of young
bom per pregnancy per species was found to be positively correlated with the degree of
sexual dimorphism in wing size. For the pipistrelle in England, the modal number of young
is considered to be one and the degree of dimorphism noted in Northamptonshire was
0.8mm Avery (1991), the latter falling within the range of 0.04 mm to 1.02mm reported by
Myers (1978) for species normally bearing single young. Interestingly, the degree of
dimorphism noted in the present work (1.26mm) lies above this range and within that for
Bats and their Roosts in Cleveland and North East Yorkshire 101
species usually bearing twins in Myers’ study (0.86 to 1.53mm). The pattern among British
bats may not be the the same as that in America, but regional variation in forearm length
dimorphism which is correlated with variation in modal litter size has been demonstrated
previously in Eptesicusfuscus, a North American species (Myers, 1978). Unfortunately, no
data exist on litter size in pipistrelles in north-east Yorkshire.
In addition, Myers (1978) demonstrated that for several species of vespertilionid bat,
males have proportiontely smaller wings than females, even after size dimorphism is taken
into account. It is possible that this makes flight during adverse conditions more hazardous
for males: this may explain why, in the present study, it was noted that there was a highly
significant preponderance of males among isolated pipistrelles found exhausted, injured or
freshly dead (Wardhaugh, 1993).
Unfortunately, most of the present work was carried out prior to the discovery that the
pipistrelle consists of two distinct, sympatric forms (Jones & van Parijs, 1993), the
principal difference between these being the frequency bands of their echolocation calls,
the frequencies containing the most energy averaging 46 kHz and 55 kHz for the two
phonic types. Measurement of 48 females from seven roosts revealed a slight but
statistically just significant difference in mean forearm length (32.37 ± 0.59mm for the
“low frequency” type and 31.91 ± 0.82mm for the “high frequency” type; t = 2.26,
p<0.05). However, there was considerable overlap in forearm length, and a discriminant
function analysis indicated that there was no significant difference between the two phonic
types in overall flight morphology (Jones & van Parijs, 1993). Nevertheless, molecular
data, differences in social calls, differences in skull morphology and assortive association
in mating sites all suggest that these two forms of the pipistrelle are cryptic species
(G. Jones, University of Bristol, pers. comm.). Unfortunately the phonic type of the males
involved in the present study is not known and clearly it is now evident that there remains
much scope for further work in this field.
Acknowledgements
I am grateful to members of Cleveland Bat Group, both past and present, for their help in
locating animals for this study.
References
Avery, M. I. (1991). Pipistrelle, Pipistrellus pipistrellus. In: The Handbook of British
Mammals (G. B. Corbet & S. Harris eds.): 124-128, Blackwell, London.
Barrett-Hamilton, G. E. H. (1911). A History of British Mammals. Gurney & Jackson,
London.
(Corbet. G. B. & Hams, S. eds.) (1991). The Handbook of British Mammals. Blackwell,
London.
Jones, G. and van Parijs, S. M. (1993). Biomodal echolocation in pipistrelle bats: are
cryptic species present? Proc. R. Soc. Lond. B 251: 1 19-125.
Long, C. A. (1968). An analysis of pattern of variation in some representative Mammalia.
1. A review of estimates of variability in selected measurements. Trans. Kansas Acad.
Sci. 71: 201-277.
Myers, P. (1978). Sexual dimorphism in size of vespertilionid bats. Amer. Nat. 112: 701-
711.
Stebbings, R. E. (1967). Identification and distribution of bats of the genus Plecotus in
England. J. Zool., Lond. 157: 187-211.
Stebbings, R. E. (1968). Measurements, composition and behaviour of a large colony of the
bat Pipistrellus pipistrellus. J. Zool., Lond. 156: 15-33.
Stebbings, R. E. (1973). Size dines in the bat Pipistrellus pipistrellus related to climatic
factors. Period. Biol. 75: 189-194.
Stebbings, R. E. (1986). Which Bat is it? Mammal Society & Vincent Wildlife Trust,
London.
Stebbings, R. E. (1991). Bats: Order Chiroptera. In: The Handbook of British Mammals
102
Book Review
(Corbet, G. B. & Harris, S. eds.): 81-86. Blackwell, London.
Swift, S. M„ Racey, P. A. and Avery, M. I. (1985). Feeding ecology of Pipistrellus
pipistrellus (Chiroptera: Vespertilionidae) during pregnancy and lactation. 1 1 Diet. J.
Anim. Ecol 54: 217-225.
Walton, K. C. (1975). Observations on a colony of Pipistrellus pipistrellus Schreber. J.
ZooL.Lond. 176: 278-281.
Wardhaugh, A. A. (1992). Bats and their roosts in Cleveland and North East Yorkshire.
Naturalist 117: 99-108.
Wardhaugh, A. A. (1993). Bats and their roosts in Cleveland and North East Yorkshire II:
occasional records of the pipistrelle and the brown long-eared bat. Naturalist 118: 33-37.
Wardhaugh, A. A. (1994). Bats and their roosts in Cleveland. Cleveland Nat. Fid Club Rec.
ofProc. 5: 20-30.
BOOK REVIEW
The Current Status of the Brown Hare (Lepus europaeus) in Britain by M. R.
Hutchings and S. Harris. Pp. 78. Joint Nature Conservation Committee, Peterborough.
1996. £12.50.
Since this is an important review of its subject, it is therefore all the more disappointing
that it may be doubly inaccessible to most of its potential readership.
Professor Harris was asked to organise a national survey of the status of hares in Britain,
and 751 one-kilometre squares were walked by volunteer surveyors. The sample of squares
was a stratified one, selected by land-class to represent on proportion all the major habitat
groups in Britain, and surveyors walked a 3-kilometre transect within the periphery of each
square three times during the winter months. In total, 1325 Brown Hares were seen (but the
few Mountain Hares were too clumped for their distribution to be analysed, and they are
not mentioned in this report). Because of the way the sample was stratified and the distance
from the transect to each hare seen was recorded, this information can be used to estimate
the density in each habitat and the numbers overall; there were believed to be 817,520 ±
137,251 in mid-January 1993/1994.
So why is this report likely to be doubly unavailable? Most of the report is taken up with
a detailed analysis of the methods involved in obtaining these estimates and in verifying
their use. This is important but makes for hard reading; it is the analysis of technical
statisticians rather than biologists. Conversely, those results which would interest a
biologist are presented very curtly. One would have liked a map of the likely density and
distribution of hares, but the only maps are of the 7 land-classes. A map of the survey
squares would also have been of interest. So, for many biologists, this report is likely to be
inaccessible because of the intensity of the technical writing. It is also likely to be
inaccessible for its price: at £12.50 for 78 pages, it is hard to claim that it is good value.
The recent report on the status of all the British mammals, from the same publisher, cost
£16.50 for 168 pages.
It would be a pity if it is ignored for the report contains a useful summary of the
historical and ecological factors affecting hare numbers, as well as much useful
information, for those that want it, on the strengths and problems of analysing transect data.
At least encourage your library or society to get a copy.
DWY
103
THE EXTINCT “WILD” CATTLE OF BURTON CONSTABLE
HALL, EAST YORKSHIRE
M. J. BOYD
Burton Constable Foundation, Burton Constable Hall, East Yorkshire HUH 4LN
Introduction
The herds of “wild” white cattle inhabiting, or known once to have inhabited, the enclosed
parks associated with various country houses in Britain have excited much interest amongst
both naturalists and historians, for over two hundred years. Debate as to whether these
cattle were genuine wild bovids, descended directly from the aurochs (Bos primigenius
Bojanus) without an intervening stage of domestication, or merely the descendants of feral
domestic cattle, of medieval or even earlier date, was particularly vigorous during the 19th
century (e.g. Halting, 1880). They are now, however, generally thought to have been
derived from locally-selected husbanded cattle (Corbet & Harris, 1991), although the dates
of origin of even the best-known herds are often obscure (Whitehead, 1953; Bilton, 1957).
Although only five herds of these “wild” white cattle - those from Cadzow (Strathclyde),
Chartley (Staffordshire), Chillingham (Northumberland), Dynevor (Dyfed) and Vaynol
(Gwynedd) - have representatives surviving to the present day, the previous existence of
several further herds is well documented (Whitehead, 1953). One of the least well-known
of these extinct herds is that which, for an unknown period prior to the mid- 18th century,
occupied the park at Burton Constable Hall in East Yorkshire. While the present paper does
include a brief review of previously published references to the Burton Constable herd of
“wild” white cattle, its main purpose is the publication of an informative but hitherto
unpublished manuscript account of this herd, written in 1783 or 1784 by Marmaduke
Tunstall (1743-1790) of Wycliffe Hall in County Durham. In view of the very sparse
nature of the published information hitherto available with respect to the Burton Constable
“wild” cattle, Tunstall’s description of the herd and its management is, although brief, of
some importance.
Historical Review
The earliest published reference to the existence of a herd of “wild" white cattle at Burton
Constable Hall appeared in the first edition of Thomas Bewick's General History of
Quadrupeds (Bewick, 1790) and was repeated in subsequent editions of that work. To his
lengthy account of the appearance and behaviour of the famous Chillingham herd of “wild"
white cattle, Bewick appended a short paragraph on the Burton Constable herd. This
paragraph is, for reasons which will become apparent below, worth quoting in its entirety:
“Those at Burton-Constable, in the county of York, were all destroyed by a
distemper a few years since. They varied slightly from those at Chillingham.
having black ears and muzzles, and the tips of their tails of the same colour: they
were also much larger, many of them weighing sixty stones; probably owing to the
richness of the pasturage in Holdemess, but generally attributed to the difference
of kind between those with black and with red ears, the former of which they
studiously endeavoured to preserve”.
In the second volume of his History and Antiquities of .. . Holderness. the historian
George Poulson presented what appear, at first sight, to be detailed accounts of both the
appearance and the behaviour of the Burton Constable "wild" cattle (Poulson 1841, p. 241
). Close inspection of his published text, however, reveals that most of the information
given by Poulson, including all that relating to the behaviour of the animals, represents no
more than a paraphrase of Bewick's (1790) account of the morphology and habits of the
Chillingham “wild” cattle. Poulson, who quoted Smith (1827) as his authority for regarding
all British “wild" white cattle as genuine wild representatives of the aurochs, seems to have
considered that the implied conspecific status of the Chillingham cattle and those once
Naturalist 121 (1996)
104 The Extinct ‘Wild’ Cattle of Burton Constable Hall, East Yorkshire
present at Burton Constable was sufficient to justify attributing the recorded habits of the
former herd to the (extinct and poorly known) latter. The only factual data given by
Poulson (1841) with respect to the Burton Constable “wild” cattle - that they “differed
from the others in having the ears and tips of the tail black” and that the herd was
“destroyed in the middle of the last century, by a distemper” - are no more than might
easily have been gleaned from Bewick’s (1790) paragraph relating to the animals in
question.
The Rev. John Storer, whose book on The Wild White Cattle of Great Britain appeared
in 1877, was also unable to add anything of significance to the data presented by Bewick
(1790) on the Burton Constable herd, although he did make the interesting if hardly
warranted suggestion that the herd in question had been composed of polled, rather than
homed, individuals. Storer (1877) also speculated that the ancestors of the “wild” cattle
once comprising the Burton Constable herd might originally have been brought from the
very estate at Wycliffe which had been the home of Marmaduke Tunstall.
Although Halting ’s (1880) work on extinct British mammals included a lengthy account
of the various recorded herds of “wild” white cattle, his description of the Burton
Constable herd consisted, as he acknowledged, of little more than a direct quotation of
Bewick’s (1790) account. With respect to the original source of the Burton Constable
“wild” cattle, Harting was more cautious than Storer (1877) had been and, whilst making
due reference to the latter’s suggestion, pointed out that “the origin of this herd has only
been surmised”.
The previous existence of a herd of “wild” white cattle at Burton Constable was noted by
Clarke and Roebuck (1881, p. 12) in their useful summary of the Yorkshire vertebrate
fauna as then known. However, these authors gave no information about the herd beyond
describing it as having existed “in a state of semi-domestication” and as having “perished
of distemper” shortly before the close of the previous century.
The only really substantial work upon British “wild” white cattle to have been published
during the present century is Whitehead’s (1953) The Ancient White Cattle of Britain and
this, as might be expected, does include a brief account of the Burton Constable herd.
Whitehead suggests a date of about 1780 for the extinction of the “wild” cattle at Burton
Constable and, after describing Bewick’s (1790) account of this herd as “about the only
first-hand description” available, repeats it verbatim. Whitehead (1953, pp. 110; 150) also
notes Storer’s (1877) suggestion that the ancestors of the Burton Constable “wild” cattle
came originally from Wycliffe Hall, in County Durham, but does not comment upon this
theory. With respect to Storer’s second suggestion regarding the Burton Constable herd -
that it was composed of polled cattle - Whitehead (1953, p. 154) seems rather more
critical, and lists the herd in question as one “believed to be homed”. Interestingly, this last
supposition receives support from a painting of Burton Constable Hall (Anglo-Dutch
School, c. 1690) currently hanging in the Entrance Hall of that building. Recent inspection
of this painting by the author has revealed the presence of a group of thirteen white cattle
represented in the park to the south-west of the Hall itself. The cattle are depicted at too
small a scale to yield any information with respect to the colouration of their ears, muzzles
and tails, but it is noteworthy that some, at least, bear clearly-defined horns (Figs 1 and 2).
As will be apparent from the above review of published references to the Burton
Constable “wild” white cattle, the brief description given by Bewick (1790) is not only the
earliest published account of these animals but - inasmuch as later authors merely quote or
otherwise repeat his account - is also effectively the only published description of the herd
hitherto available. While this fact serves further to emphasise the importance of
Marmaduke Tunstall’s manuscript account, which is reproduced below, it also raises the
question of how, precisely, Bewick obtained the data he published regarding the Burton
Constable cattle. Fortunately, Tunstall’s description of the herd also sheds light upon this
question, at least insofar as it makes it possible to determine whether or not Bewick’s
(1790) account was, as Whitehead (1953) suggests, a “first-hand description”.
105
The Extinct Wild Cattle of Burton Constable Hall, East Yorkshire
Marmaduke Tunstall’s Account
Marmaduke Tunstall’s manuscript description of the Burton Constable “wild’’ white cattle
forms part of a letter written by him to the Reverend William Dade, Rector of Barmston,
when the latter was collecting information for an intended “History” of Holderness. Dade
did not complete this task, but the manuscript notes he assembled for the purpose - which
include the letter from Tunstall noted above - now constitute part of the Burton Constable
Archive deposited at the Humberside County Record Office in Beverley (HCRO File
DDCC 1 12/157). Tunstall’ s letter to Dade bears no date, but the form of the handstamped
transit-mark for Wetherby on its outer surface, in which the last two letters of the town’s
name are situated centrally beneath the first six, is sufficient to establish that the letter was
committed to the mail in either 1783 or 1784 (J. M. Boyd, pers. comm.). The greater part of
Tunstall’s letter concerns other aspects of the history and natural history of Holderness, but
the section dealing with the Burton Constable “wild” cattle reads as follows:
Perhaps the Wild Cattle late in Burton Park, which I can remember when a Child,
tho’ only a naturalised species, might deserve mention, as they had probably been
there for some ages, they were totally white, except their muzzles & ears, which
were black, they were not under the jurisdiction of Man & were shot when fit for
slaughter; the Bull was usually so savage as made it necessary to putt out his eyes;
believe this was the only place except Chillingham in Northumberld, now Ld
Tankerville’s, where they were found in South-Britain; my father indeed gave
some to the D: of Norfolk at Worksop, as also to Mr Aislaby at Studley, but am
told the breed at both places is now extinct or at least not preserved genuine; they
were esteemed highly for their capital flavor; those at Burton were totally
destroyed by the distemper, I think about the year 1746 or 47; they were supposed
to be descended from the Bisontes jubati of the Caledonian forest mentioned by
Hector Boethius & afterwards by Sr Robt. Sibbald, but as well as those at the D; of
Hamilton’s & the few that still are in some parts of N: Britain, had long lost their
shaggy manes”.
With respect to the above passage, it should be noted that the Hector Boece (or Boethius)
referred to by Tunstall published, in 1527, a “history" of Scotland entitled Scotorum
Historiae, a prima Gentis Origine. In this work, he made reference to wild white bulls
“with crisp and curling manes like fierce lions” inhabiting the remnants of the great
Caledonian Forest. These animals, according to Boece, were so wild that they would not
even feed upon vegetation that bore the scent of human beings. Sir Robert Sibbald. writing
over a century later, in his Scotia Illustrata of 1684, seems to have doubted the accuracy of
Boece’s description of the cattle concerned, but the question of their status with respect to
the “wild” white cattle comprising the enclosed herds known from Great Britain was
nonetheless to become a recurrent subject of debate during the 19th century (e.g Harting
1880, pp. 222-223).
Discussion
n addition to possessing considerable intrinsic interest, the information contained in
runstall's account of the “wild" white cattle of Burton Constable allows the correction of
hree erroneous suppositions which have, over the years, made appearances in the
published descriptions of this poorly-known herd:
l.The date of extinction of the Burton Constable herd was not, as almost all authors who
have discussed these cattle have either stated or implied, late in the 18th century. As is
now apparent, the herd had died out by about 1747. The various published statements to
the effect that the Burton Constable “wild" cattle became extinct “shortly before the
close” of the 18th century (Clarke & Roebuck, 1881) or “about 1780" (Whitehead, 1953)
seem to represent no more than estimates, based solely upon the fact that Bewick,
writing in 1790, described the herd as having died out “a few years since”.
!. Since the Burton Constable “wild” cattle are now known to have become extinct by
about 1747, the account of the herd given by Bewick, who was not bom until 1753, can
- IB
107
The Extinct Wild’ Cattle of Burton Constable Hall, East Yorkshire
no longer be regarded as the “first-hand description” that Whitehead (1953) suggests it
o!Sn‘S rCal‘y' UtSeemS Vei> >h* Bewick s ,1790, account of Si
question - the account from which all subsequent authors appear to have drawn their
of yMaSMX?-7'm°™atiOT SUpplied by Tunsta11' who’ the half-brother
of Will, am Constable (1721-1791) of Burton Constable Hall, was not only a very
competent gentleman-naturalist (Fox, 1827; Goddard, 1929) but is known to have had an
especial interest in the various British herds of “wild” white cattle. It was he who. in
mon°ne^oBeW1Ck *° Produce his famous woodcut of the “Chillingham Bull”
Goddard 1929, p 18), and it is clear from a letter that Tunstall wrote to Bewick in 1789
( ox, 1827 p. 24) that the former had, for some years, actively been collecting
information for an intended publication on British “wild” cattle, which he also passed on
to Bewick for the latter s own use.
t0 be n° evidence whatever to support the suggestion made by Storer
(1877) that the ancestors of the Burton Constable “wild” cattle may have been brought
from the Wycliffe Hall estate in County Durham. This was the home of Marmaduke
I unstall who, in addition to being an enthusiastic naturalist, took a keen interest in the
history of his family and its lands. If any real evidence had existed to indicate a Wycliffe
origin for the Burton Constable herd, it seems almost inconceivable that Tunstall would
have been unaware of it - or that he would have failed to communicate it to William
Dade. The present author is, in addition, unaware of any evidence that a herd of “wild"
cattle ever existed at Wycliffe.
f^ltb/f,SpeuCt l° tbe date ~ as °PPosed to place - of origin of the Burton Constable herd
of wild white cattle, the only relevant data known to the present author are contained
in two 18th century manuscripts now in the Bodleian Library in Oxford. These manu-
scripts (MS English Letters C.229, pp. 17-22) comprise a letter written to Marmaduke
Tunstall by William Constable on 14th December 1787, and a second document - also in
Constable’s hand - which seems to have been intended as a more orderly summary of
the data presented in the letter. These two documents, taken together, appear to represent
Constable s response to his half-brother’s request for further information regarding the
Burton Constable "wild" cattle. In both documents, he notes the existence of a
“tradition" that the cattle in question first arrived at Burton Constable “on the Accession
of James 1st”. Otherwise, apart from indicating that the herd was composed of no more
than thirty individuals at the time of its extinction. Constable's manuscript accounts of
the "wild" cattle of Burton Constable contain little of substance that had not earlier been
summarised by Tunstall in the short account he prepared for Dade. Constable’s notes do,
however, provide useful confirmation of the accuracy of Tunstall’s account of the
appearance, temperament and management of the animals concerned.
It would seem appropriate to conclude with a brief note on the habitat once occupied
by the Burton Constable herd of “wild” white cattle. The park at Burton Constable,
which consisted of about 380 acres in 1578, apparently reduced to 290 acres by 1867
also housed varying, but often substantial, numbers of Red Deer and Fallow Deer until
FIGURE 1 (opposite)
Upper-left quarter of painting of Burton Constable Hall (c.1690) showing, in the top left-
hand corner, a group of thirteen ‘wild’ white cattle present in the park to the south-west
of the Hall itself. The entire painting measures 214 cm in length and is 160 cm in height.
(Leeds Museums and Galleries: Burton Constable).
FIGURE 2 (opposite)
Detail from the area of painting comprising Figure 1, showing the thirteen ‘wild’ white
cattle depicted in the park at Burton Constable, c. 1690. Most, if not all, of the cattle
are represented as bearing well-defined horns. The largest animal present in the
group measures 2 cm in length on the original painting.
(Leeds Museums and Galleries: Burton Constable).
108
The Extinct ‘Wild’ Cattle of Burton Constable Hall, East Yorkshire
around 1880 (Neave, 1991, p.26). The present appearance of the park is, to a large
extent, the result of landscaping work carried out between 1769 and 1783 by
“Capability” Brown. This land was, apparently, rather different in appearance prior to
the commencement of Brown’s “improvements” and was described by William
Constable as being then a “wilderness . . . with swamps, gorse and whin higher than a
man on horseback” (Hall, 1991, p.68). In such terrain, the stalking and shooting, with
muzzle-loading guns, of large cattle so wild that it was considered necessary to blind the
herd’s sole or dominant bull must, on occasion, have been an “interesting” experience.
Acknowledgements
Thanks are due to Dr David Connell, Curator of Burton Constable, for his kindness in
drawing my attention to the correspondence between Marmaduke Tunstall and William
Dade, and for allowing me to publish the extract which forms the principal subject of this
paper. I am also indebted to my father, for his assistance in dating Tunstall’s letter to Dade,
and to the respective staffs of the Bodleian Library in Oxford and the Humberside County
Record Office at Beverley.
References
Bewick, T. (1790). A General History of Quadrupeds. Bielby & Bewick, Newcastle upon
Tyne.
Bilton, L. (1957). The Chillingham Herd of Wild Cattle. Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc.
Northumberland, Durham & Newcastle upon Tyne (New Series) 12: 137-160.
Boece, H. (1527). Scotorum Historiae, a prima Gentis Origine. Iodocus Badius, Paris.
Clarke, W. E. and Roebuck, W. D. (1881). A Handbook of the Vertebrate Fauna of
Yorkshire. Lovell Reeve, London.
Corbet, G. B. and Harris, S. (1991). The Handbook of British Mammals. Blackwell
Scientific Publications, Oxford.
Fox, G. T. (1827). Synopsis of the Newcastle Museum, late the Allen, formerly the Tunstall,
or Wycliffe Museum. T. & J. Hodgson, Newcastle upon Tyne.
Goddard, T. R. (1929). History of the Natural History Society of Northumberland, Durham
and Newcastle upon Tyne, 1829-1929. Andrew Reid, Newcastle upon Tyne.
Hall, E. (1991). Constable the Improver - the Creation of a Landscape Garden. In: Burton
Constable Hall (Hall, I. & Hall, E.): 68-70. Hull City Museums & Hutton Press,
Beverley.
Halting, J. E. (1880). British Animals Extinct within Historic Times, with some Account of
British Wild White Cattle. Trubner, London.
Neave, S. (1991). Medieval Parks of East Yorkshire. University of Hull & Hutton Press,
Beverley.
Poulson, G. (1841). The History and Antiquities of the Seignory of Holderness (Volume II).
Brown, Hull.
Sibbald, R. (1684). Scotia Illustrata; sive Prodromus Historiae Naturalis. Edinburgh.
Smith, C. H. (1827). In: The Animal Kingdom, Arranged in Conformity with its
Organization, by the Baron Cuvier . . . With Additional Descriptions of All the Species
Hitherto Named, and of Many not before Noticed, by Edward Griffith and Others.
Volume TV, The Class Mammalia. Whittaker, London.
Storer, J. (1877). The Wild White Cattle of Great Britain. Cassell, Petter & Gilpin. London.
Whitehead, G. K. (1953). The Ancient White Cattle of Britain and their Descendants. Faber
& Faber, London.
109
EFFECT OF CROWN DENSITY ON CHOICE OF NESTING TREE
BY MAGPIES PICA PICA
DAVID M. WILKINSON
Biological and Earth Sciences, Liverpool John Moores University,
Byrom Street, Liverpool L3 3AF
Introduction
The Black-billed Magpie Pica pica usually nests in trees (Cramp and Perrins, 1994;
Goodwin, 1986) using a wide range of species. In a study near Sheffield at least 21 species
were used, with birds apparently showing a preference for either low thorny bushes or very
tall trees (Birkhead, 1991). Coombs (1978) also lists a wide range of tree species used for
nesting; he considered that the sites chosen varied with tree availability.
Nesting tree preferences by magpies have been studed by Tatner (1982a) in the
Manchester area; they are particularly common in urban Manchester where numbers appear
to have increased dramatically during the second half of this century, with densities of
around six occupied nests per square kilometre at the time of Tatner’s work in the late
1970s (Holland et al. 1984; Tatner, 1982b). Tatner (1982a) compared magpie distribution
with various habitat characteristics, finding correlations with numbers and variety of
available trees. He calculated a preference index for different tree species chosen by
magpies for nest sites, and suggested that preferred species tended to have more closely
knit canopies. This could not be tested statistically since no numerical data on canopy
density were available. The aim of this paper is to describe such a test, using data on crown
density from a general study of urban trees also carried out in Manchester (Wilkinson,
1991 & 1992; Wilkinson et al. 1991) and relate this to Tatner’s tree preference index.
Ideally crown density measurements of the actual nest trees would be collected and
compared with density values for the surrounding trees. Such data would be hard to collect
since the measurement of crown density requires the tree to be photographed against a
clear sky unobstructed by buildings or other trees. In the absence of such data the present
study uses measurements of a general set of trees from the same city, collected for other
purposes (Wilkinson, 1992).
Methods
Tree choice by magpies
Tatner (1982a) recorded tree species containing magpie nests during breeding density
surveys and stated that “To obtain an indication of nest site selection, the species of the ten
trees nearest to the nest tree were also noted, except, when there were too few trees for this
to be practical”. A choice index was calculated as:
Choice index = observed frequency of trees used
expected frequency if trees chosen at random
Tree Crown Density
The crown density was measured as the percentage of light attenuated by the tree crown.
This was measured phographically during 1990. A dot matrix was used to analyse a
monochrome photograph of a tree crown by estimating the proportion of tree parts to sky
within the area of the tree crown (Wager & Heisler, 1986; Wilkinson, 1991; Yates &
McKennan, 1988). The photographs were taken with a 35-70mm zoom lens, to maximise
the size of the tree’s image, and at a camera elevation of approximately 25°. Three
replicate sets of measurements were made for each photograph (Wilkinson, 1992). Sample
sizes for each tree species ranged from 3 to 28 individuals. Photographs were taken for
both summer and winter. As the main purpose of this study was to provide data to be used
in modelling studies of light attenuation by urban trees, not all species which appear in
Naturalist 121 (1996)
1 10 Effect of crown density on choice of nesting tree by Magpies Pica pica
Tatner’s data set were measured. However only two species commonly used for nesting by
magpies in Tatner’s study do not appear in the crown density data set, namely Manchester
Poplar Poplus nigra and Jersey Elm Ulmus whealeyi. All the trees measured in the crown
density data set were either parkland or street trees. Comparison between this photographic
method and photometric (“light meter”) methods shows consistency between the two
approaches (Wilkinson, 1991; Yates & McKennan, 1988).
TABLE 1
Tree species selected as magpie nest sites in Manchester and crown density values for
summer and winter. Light attenuation: mean (± s.d.; n).
Choice Index
from Tatner
(1982a)
Winter light attenuation
(%)
(Wilkinson, 1992)
Summer light attenuation
(%)
(Wilkinson, 1992)
Lombardy Poplar
Populus nigra
‘Italica’
1.65
50.5 (0.1; 20)
87.2 (1.6; 20)
Alder
Alnus glutinosa
1.40
50.5 (4.0; 5)
76.3 (5.5; 5)
Hawthorn
Crataegus monogyna
1.03
55.9 (2; 6)
77.9 (1.6; 6)
Horse Chestnut
Aesculus
hippocastaneum
1.00
47.6 (2.6; 3)
81.3 (0.3; 3)
Beech
Fagus sylvatica
0.55
53.1 (1.4; 6)
80.9 (2.5; 6)
Lime
Tilla x europea
0.37
46.3 (1; 16)
88.7 (1.1; 16)
Ash
Fraxinus excelsior
0.31
46.5 (2.6; 3)
77.9 (0; 1)
Oak
Quercus robur
0.25
50.3 (0.9; 28)
82.5 (0.8; 28)
Sycamore
Acer pseudoplatanus
0.25
46.3 (0.9; 28)
82.0 (1.1; 28)
Birch
Be tula pendula
0.17
46.0 (0.7; 23)
75.8 (1.4; 23)
Results and Discussion
There is a statistically significant correlation between choice index and winter attenuation
(rs = 0.61, p<0.05) but not between choice index and summer attenuation (rs = 0.09. N.S.)
(see Table 1).
These data support Tatner’s (1982a) impression that the magpies were choosing trees
with denser canopies, and were doing so at the time of nest building (usually March or
early April), not on a prediction of density of the crown in leaf. Winter attentuation is not a
good predictor of summer attenuation (rs = 0.08, N.S.). At the time of starting nest
building. Hawthorn is the only species which is likely to have started to come into leaf
t of crown density on choice of nesting tree by Magpies Pica pica 1 1 1
(\Wilkinson, 1992). It is of note that the highest choice index (Cl = 2.35) in Tatner’s study
was for Holly, the only evergreen species in his study; unfortunately this species was not
included in the photographic study of light attenuation, although as an evergreen it will be
denser that any of the winter crowns in Table 1 .
The shape of the tree canopy (e.g. Poplar vs. Sycamore) causes a potential problem in
hat wide tree crowns reduce the passage of light more than narrow crowns with the same
density of branches per unit volume of crown. The methods used in this study only record
he amount of light attenuated by the whole crown, but this probably corresponds quite
riosely to the bird’s visual impression of crown density.
Why should magpies select trees with denser crowns? Tatner (1982a) suggested that a
iense canopy “offers a thicket-like protection around the nest. Carrion Crows Conus
orone regularly visit magpie nests in Manchester and are known for their attempts to
iredate/usurp magpie nests . Casual observation by myself of magpies building nests in
iawthom (dense crown) and Sycamore (less dense) suggests that the birds may find it
:asier to get the first twigs, which form the base of the nest, to lodge in a dense crown than
o a sparsely branched one; conceivably both explanations could be correct. Other species
with similar nesting behaviour, e.g. Carrion Crow and Buzzard Buteo buteo, may also
■ elect trees on crown density. The preference of Buzzards for conifers rather than
deciduous hardwood trees (Cramp & Simmons, 1979) suggests this could be the case.
Nummary
U statistically significant positive correlation was found between the tree species
reference previously demonstrated for nesting magpies and tree crown density in winter,
tt is suggested that thicker crowns offer some protection to the nest from predation and/or
■ rovide easier conditions for nest construction.
^acknowledgements
thank Simon Dowell and a referee for comments on the manuscript.
( .EFERENCES
I irkhead, T. R. (1991). The Magpies. T. & A. D. Poyser, London,
oombs, F. (1978). The Crows, a Study of the Con-ids of Europe. Batsford, London.
'ramp, S. and Perrins C. M. (eds) (1994). The Birds of the Western Palearctic. Vol. VIII.
Oxford University Press, Oxford.
ramp, S. and Simmons K. E. L. (eds) (1979). The Birds of the Western Palearctic. Vol. II.
Oxford University Press, Oxford.
oodwin, D. (1986). Crows of the World. 2nd ed. British Museum (Natural History),
London.
| olland, P., Spence, I., and Sutton, T. (1984). Breeding Birds in Greater Manchester.
Manchester Ornithological Society, Manchester.
atner, P. (1982a). Factors influencing the distribution of Magpies Pica pica in an urban
environment. Bird Study 29: 227-234.
atner, P. (1982b). The density of breeding Magpies in an urban environment. Naturalist
107: 47-58.
'agner, J. A. and Heisler, G. M. (1986). Rating winter crown density of deciduous trees: a
photographic procedure. Landscape Journal 5: 9-18.
'ilkinson, D. M. (1991). Can photographic methods be used for measuring light
attenuation characteristics of trees in leaf? Landscape and Urban Planning 20: 347-349.
'ilkinson, D. M. (1992). Modelling light attenuation by urban trees. PhD thesis,
Mancheser Polytechnic.
ilkinson, D. M., Yates D. and McKennan. G. T. (1991). Light attenuation characteristics
of seven common British trees. Arboricultural Journal 15: 37-44.
ates, D. and McKennan, G. T. (1988). Solar architecture and light attenuation by trees:
conflict or compromise? Landscape Research 13: 19-23.
112
Botanical Report for 1995 - Flowering Plants and Ferns
BOTANICAL REPORT FOR 1995
FLOWERING PLANTS AND FERNS
Compiled by D. R. GRANT
The Recorders thank all those who have sent records: their names are given in full the first
time they appear in the VC report, initials being used thereafter. Nomenclature is according
to Kent, D. H. (1992) List of Vascular Plants of the British Isles.
EAST YORKSHIRE (VC61) (F. E. Crackles)
* denotes a 1st vice-county record.
Asplenium ruta-muraria L. Churchyard wall, Welwick 54/32, confirming an 1898 record;
P. J. Cook.
Ranunculus arvensis L. Disturbed ground, North Duffield Carrs 44/63, 1994; T. E. Dixon.
Parietaria judaica L. Halsham church 54/22; P.J.C.
Atriplex glabriuscula Edmonston Spurn 54/41; F. E. Crackles & P.J.C.
A. littoralis L. In quantity, York Outer Ring Road 44/64, 1993; M. Hammond.
Montia fontana L. subsp .fontana Ditch bottom, Elstronwick 54/23; W. R. Dolling.
Stellaria pallida (Dumort.) Pire Base of dunes at Welwick Bushes and Winsetts Bank
54/31; P.J.C., conf. P. M. Benoit; also Spurn 54/41; P.J.C. confirming an earlier report
by J. Dews.
Polygonum arenastrum Boreau Thixendale 44/86; P.J.C.
Hypericum perforatum x H. maculatum subsp. obtusiusculum = //. x desetangsii Lamotte
Tophill Low 54/04; A. Marshall, conf. F.E.C.
*Lavatera arborea L. Near the Humber bank near Pauli Holme 54/12 and in two localities
between Cherry Cob Sands and Stone Creek 54/22 and 54/21, 1991; P.J.C., conf.
N. K. B. Robson.
Descurainia sophia (L.) Webb ex Prantl On imported soil, South Cave 44/93; R. Eades.
Cochlearia danica L. In great abundance on York Outer Ring Road 44/64, 1993; M.H.
On grassy bank at east bound side of A1079; J.D.; also along side of the A1079 in 44/84,
93 & 94; P.J.C. Road verge, Burstwick 54/22; W.R.D. and Hedon Road, Marfleet 54/12;
P.J.C.
Rubus echinatoides (Rogers) Dallman Roadside, west of Broomfleet 44/82; D. R. Grant.
Trifolium fragiferum L. In mown grass, near Haworth Hall, Hull 54/05; E. Chicken.
Scandix pecten-veneris L. Under wheat crop, near Swine 54/13; F. Kenington and in
profusion in entrance to wheat field, Burton Pidsea 54/23. R. Middleton and under crop;
P.J.C., the first records for Holdemess since 1955 and the first for V.C.61 since 1970.
Veronica scutellata L. King’s Mill Reserve, Driffield 54/05; E.C.
*Orobanche hederae Duby In quantity as garden weed, Cottingham 54/03, apparently
introduced with planted Ivy; M. Jordan, det. F.E.C.
*Valerianella locusta (L.) Laterr. susbsp. dunensis (D. Allen) Sell Welwick Bushes
54/31; P.J.C., det. D. Allen. Previously only recorded for the west coast and Isle of Man.
Centaurea cyanus L. Disturbed ground. North Duffield Carrs 44/63, 1994; T.E.D. On
allotments, North Cave 44/93; R.E.
*Taraxacun arenastrum A. J. Richards Haverfield Quarries Reserve 54/32 and Welwick
Bushes 54/31; P.J.C., det. A. Richards.
T. oxoniense Dahlst. Disused railway track, Ottringham 54/22; P.J.C., det. A. J. Richards.
Aster tripolium L. Borrow pit, Pulfin Bog 54/04, 1994; R.M., the northernmost record by
the R. Hull, not previously recorded north of Dunswell 54/03. Roadside verge. South
Cave 44/93; R.E.
Conyza cadansis (L.) Cronq. Westgate, Driffield 54/05; E.C.
FJodea nuttallii (Planchon) H. St. John Pond, near Burstwick 54/22; J.D.
Naturalist 121 (1996)
Botanical Report for 1 995 - Flowering Plants and Ferns 1 1 3
Schoenoplectus lacustris (L.) Palla by pond, Tophill Low 54/04; A.M., det. F.E C
estuca rubra L. subsp. I it oralis (C. Meyer) Auq. Saltmarsh, Welwick 54/31 and several
other locations along the Humber bank in 54/21 and 54/31; P.J.C., det. C. A. Stace.
Glycerta dechnata Breb. Muddy pond, Fimber 44/86; P.J.C.
Phalaris canariensis L. Scoroborough 54/04 and Wansford 54/05' E C
Allium oleraceum L. Huge colony, spread over 1km of river bank’. Lower Derwent Valley
National Nature Reserve 44/64; T.E.D. cy
A. scorodoprasum L. Flourishing colony, Lower Derwent Valley N.N.R. 44/64; T.E.D.
NORTH-EAST YORKSHIRE (VC62) (T. F. Medd)
Equisetum sylvaticum L. Yearsley Moor 44/57; D. R. Grant.
Ophioglossum vulgatum L. Garden weed, Scarborough 54/08; M. Robinson.
Hymenophyllum tunbrigense (L.) Smith Moss-covered rock, Eskdale 45770' K Trewren
Polypodium interjectum x vulgare = P. x mantoniae Rothm. & U. Schneider Large
colony in Carr Wood, Goathland 45/80; K.T. g
P. interjectum Shivas Several colonies in East Amecliff Wood 45/70' Sleights 45/80'
Whitestone Cliff 44/58: Rosedale 44/79; K.T.
Phegopteris connectilis (Michaux) Watt Upper Famdale (8 colonies) 45/60; K.T.
H^wnby XiS^kT10^ L' F1°Urishing colony’ uPPer Famdale 45/60; One plant
Dyropteris aemula (Alton) Kuntze East Amcliff Wood (4 colonies) 45/70; Falling Foss
area 45/80; Cock Mill Wood, Ruswarp 45/90; K.T. g
dllatata = D. deweveri (J. Jensen) Wachter Eston Hills (50 plants in
94) 45/51; East Amcliff Wood 45/70; Goathland (new VC record in 1991) 45/80'
Levisham 44/88; Hackness 44/98; K.T.
*D. di la tat a x expansa = D. ambroseae Fraser-Jenkins & Jermy Eskdale 45/70' K T det
Dr Mary Gibby.
vumaria par\>iflora Lam. Hackness 44/99; M. Yates & K. Jones.
Humulus lupulus L. Thornton Bridge 44/47; D.R.G. and T.F.M.
arpinus betulina L. Riccal Dale. Helmsley 44/68; D.R.G.
Wyosoton aquaticum (L.) Moench Banks of R. Ouse, York 44/55; T.F.M.
i -Iypericum montanum L. Hackness 44/99; M.Y. & V.J.
f Uubusfissus Lindley Harwood Dale 44/99; D.R.G. det. A. Newton.
J 1 scissus Watson Falling Foss area 45/80; YNU Excn. det. D.R.G.
1 ?. nemoralis P. J. Mueller Yearsley Moor 44/57; Grimston Moor 44/67; Thomton-le-Dale
44/88; D.R.G. Newton Dale 44/89; YNU Bot. Sec. Excn. det. D.R.G
' '■ newbouldii Bab. Yearsley Moor 44/57; D.R.G.
f ’■ echinatus Lindley Castle Howard 44/67; D.R.G.
pollidus Weihe Falling Foss area 45/80; YNU Excn. det. D.R.G.; Riccal Dale 44/68;
D.R.G.
pedemontanus Pinkw. Terrington 44/67; D.R.G.
'. eboracensis Watson Great Ayton 45/51; Head of R. Foss 44/57; D.R.G.
. tuberculatus Bab. Great Ayton 45/51; D.R.G.
. warrenii Sudre Great Ayton 45/51; Byland Abbey 44/57; D.R.G.
osa caesia Smith Head of R. Foss, Yearsley 44/57; D.R.G.
tyriophyllum spicatum L. Yearsley Moor 44/57; D.R.G.
eranium pyrenaicum Burman f. Head of R. Foss, Yearsley 44/57; D.R.G.
nthriscus caucalis M. Bieb. Between Redcar and Marske 45/62; J. Dews.
uscuta epithymum (L.) L. Gundale. Pickering 44/88; K. & J. Payne.
nopordum acanthium L. Edge of wood. Wigginton. near the York bypass 44/55- York &
D.F.N.S.
repis paludosa (L.) Moench Head of R. Foss. Yearsley 44/57; D.R.G.
otamogeton alpinus Balbis Newton Dale 44/89, confirmation that it is still in Pickering
114
Botanical Report for 1995 - Flowering Plants and Ferns
Beck; YNU Bot. Sec. Excn.
Juncus subnodulosus Schrank Yearsley Moor 44/57; D.R.G. Newton Dale 44/89; YNU
Bot. Sec. Excn.
Calamagrostis epigejos (L.) Roth Yearsley Moor 44/57; Newgate Bank 44/58; Grimston
Moor 55/67 (here a confirmation of a pre-1930 dot in the Atlas); D.R.G.
Paris quadrifolia L. Wigginton 44/56; M. Thallon per J. Lambert.
SOUTH-WEST YORKSHIRE (VC63) (D. R. Grant)
Equisetum telmateia Ehrh. Skiers Spring Wood, Elsecar SK(43)3699; T. Schofield.
Ophioglossum vulgatum L. Near Crane Moor SE(44)2901; E. Thompson. Wrenthorpe,
Wakefield SE(44)3121; R. Sunter.
Clematis vitalba L. Altofts, Wakefield SE(44)3825; introduced with Mag. Limestone
ballast; J. Greaves.
Azolla filiculoides Lam. Near Skelmanthorpe SE(44)2210; J. Lucas.
Ranunculus lingua L. Shirley Pool, Askem SE(44)56 1 2; Y.N.U. Excn. confirmation of an
old record.
Ranunculus circinatus Sibth. Old Colliery site Walton, Wakefield SE(44)35 1 7; D. R.
Grant.
Ceratocapnos claviculata (L.) Liden Fox Covert Wood, Cantley SE(44)6102; E.T.
Hypericum maculatum Crantz. Chevet Terrace, Wakefield SE(44)3518; I. Lawrence.
Bryonia dioica Jacq. High Ackworth SE(44)4518; D.R.G. Edenthorpe SE(44)6206; E.T.
Malva moschata L. Ardsley Reservoir near Wakefield SE(44)2824; D.R.G.
Populus tremula L. Wombwell Woods, Wombwell SE(44)3802; T.S.
Rubus pilicatus Weihe & Nees North Dean Woods, Halifax SE(44)0822; D.R.G.
Rubus scissus W. R. C. Watson Grenoside Woods, Grenoside SK(43)3294; D.R.G.;
Luddenden Dean, Halifax SE(44)0228; T.S.
Rubus robiae (W. C. R. Watson) Newton Springmill, Ossett SE(44)2820; D.R.G. detd. by
A. Newton.
Rubus sciocharis (Sudre) W. C. R. Watson Calverley Woods, Calverley SE(44)2037;
D.R.G. detd. by A. Newton.
Rubus nemoralis P. J. Mueller Addingfleet, Horbury SE(44)2917; D.R.G.
Rubus ulmifolius Schott. River bank Fishlake SE(44)6513; YNU Bot. Sec. Excn.
Rubus vestitus Weihe Melton Woods, High Melton SE(44)5103; T.S.
Rubus newbouldii Bab. Birky Brow Wood, Howden, Clouth SE(44)2426; T.S.
Rubus echinatoides (Rogers) Dallman Gawthorpe Ossett SE(44) 2822; D.R.G.
Rubus echinatus Lindley Arksey Ings SE(44)6006; D.R.G.
Rubus rufescens Lef. & P. J. Mueller Bagger Wood, Hood Green SE(44)3002; D.R.G.;
Brown Royd Wood, Stainborough SE(44)3202; T.S.; Margery Wood, High Hoyland
SE(44)2709; D.R.G.; Burghwallis Wood, Burghwallis SE(44)541 1; YNU Excn.
Rubus tuberculatus Bab. Tingley SE(44)2725; D.R.G.
Rubus warrenii Sudre Birkby Brow Wood, Howden, Clough SE(44)2426; T.S.
Rosa multiflora Thumb. Upper Park Wood, Honley SE(44)1412; L. Lloyd-Evans.
Ornithopus perpusillus L. Old sand pit Dunsville SE(44)6408; E.T.
Ononis repens L. Near Scout Dike Reservoir, Penistone SE(44)2205; L. L.-E.
Sison amomum L. Near Fosterhouses SE(44)6415; YNU Bot. Sect. Excn.
Ligustrum vulgare L. Near Elsecar dam, Elsecar SK(43)3899; T.S.
Butomus umbellatus L. Old gravel pit Wakefield SE(44)3218; D. Proctor.
Eleocaris acicularis (L.) Roemer & Schutes Old gravel pit Elland SE(44)1222; J. Lucas;
Anglers Country Park, near Wakefield SE(44)37 1 5; E.T.
Cladium mariscus (L.) Pohl. Shirley Pool, Askem SE(44)56 1 2; YNU Excn.
Carex sylvatica Hudson Tom Royd Wood, Silkstone SE(44)2903; T.S.
Carex binervis Smith Whitley Height, Crow Edge SE(44)1904; E.T.
Carex caryophyllea Latour Near Crane Moor SE(44)2901; D.R.G.
Calamagrostis epigejos (L.) Roth. Wintersett Reservoir SE(44)3715; D.R.G.
Botanical Report for 1 995 - Flowering Plants and Ferns 1 ) 5
Chara vulgaris L. var. vulgaris L. & L. Canal, Calverley SE(44)2037; T.S.
MID-WEST YORKSHIRE (VC64) (D. R. Grant)
Humulus lupulus L. Shipley Glen, Near Shipley SE(44)1 148; T. Schofield.
5ah.\ pentandra L. Braythom Lane, Braythorn SE(44)2449- T S
Rosa mollis Smith Near Timble SE(44)1753; E. Thompson!
Ruhus sctssus W. C. R. Watson Near Blubberhouses SE(44)1556- T S
oYcrlm ' Z C * WatS°n EaSt Wood’ Weston- Near Otley SE(44)1847;
. R. Grant. detd. by A. Newton confirmation of an old record
aR.Gl,dXAPNewto“el'er R°adSide ^ °f Stai"fonh SD(34>8168^
llubus mfestus Weihe Braythom Lane, Braythom SE(44)2449; D.R.G.
\ubus ulmifoltus Schott Barlow Common, Near Selby SE( 44)6328- T S
tubus procerus Mueller Riverbank, Ilkley SE(44)1 148; D.R.G. ’
?MNewtonM^0my °rCarber Lane’ Austwick SD(34)7567; D.R.G. detd. by A.
?°E\cnget°n bercht°ldii Fieber Pond on Newby Moor, Near Clapham SD(34)7169; YNU
■ 'Jttella ftexilis (L.) Agardh Ingleborough Hall Lake SD(34)7469; YNU Excn.
WORTH-WEST YORKSHIRE (VC65) (T. F. Medd)
' ®nunculus lingua L. Foxglove Covert, Catterick Camp 44/19: YNU Excn.
Hypericum humifusum L. Foxglove Covert 44/19; YNU Excn
‘ihes alpinum L. Banks of R. Tees, Eryholme 45/30 T.F.M.
'ubus lindebergii P. J. Mueller Foxglove Covert 44/19 YNU Excn
C IZtnO: YNU^xcn. YNU ^ EX™ **■ D R 0
. newbouldii Bab. Arrathome 44/29; D.R.G.
. echlnatoides (Rogers) Dallman Askrigg 34/99 YNU Bry. Sec. Excn. det. D.R.G
Catterick Camp 44/19; YNU Excn. Arrathome 44/29; D.R.G.
. eboracensis Watson Masham 44/28; D.R.G.
. tuberculatus Bab. Aysgarth Falls 44/08; YNU Bot. Sec. Excn det D R G
. warrenii Sudre Masham 44/28: D.R.G.
’ osa caesia Smith Foxglove Covert 44/19; YNU Excn. det DRG
• Smith Askrigg 34/99; YNU Bry. Sec. Excn. det. D.R.G. Foxglove Covert 44/19-
YNU Excn. det. D.R.G.
dhrum salicaria L. Foxglove Covert 44/19; YNU Excn.
’ e“m othamanticum Jacq. Castley, nr Sedbergh 34/69 (confirmation of an old record for
this area); Dr G. Fryer.
irex laevigata Smith Foxglove Covert, Catterick Camp 44/19; YNU Excn.
ASUALS AND ADVENTIVES (E. Chicken)
I ns report is based on 79 records received in 1995 involving 12 individuals for 67 taxa. A
lection of these is given below. A newly reported site producing a good selection of
^ts was at Esholt near Yorkshire Water’s operational land, and the customary Iona list
>m farms in the Wakefield area was forthcoming. As this is my last report as recorder
ty I thank all who have sent records over the years, especially Mr John Martin, and urge
pport to Mr Geoffrey Wilmore who succeeds me. The contributor is assumed to be the
terminer unless otherwise stated.
mnabis sativa L. (64) Waste ground at Esholt 44/1739 and edge of canalised R Aire
Lowther North. Allerton Bywater 44/4027; G. T. D. Wilmore.
enopodium polyspermum L. (61) Newly seeded verge, Beverley bypass 54/024 L
f. Dews.
1 1 6 Botanical Report for 1 995 - Flowering Plants and Ferns
Amaranthus retroflexus L. (61) Newly seeded verge, Beverley bypass 54/0241; J.D. conf.
E. Chicken.
Amaranthus hybridus L. (61) Newly seeded verge, Beverley bypass 54/0241; J.D. det.
T. B. Ryves.
Rumex dentatus L. (63) Woodhouse Lane Farm near Wakefield 44/2924; J. Martin det.
B. K. Byrne, 1994.
Citrullus lanatus (Thunb.) Matsum & Nakai (64) Waste ground at Esholt 44/1739;
G.T.D.W. also seen by A. L. Barnett and B. A. Tregale.
Cucumis melo L. (64) Waste ground at Esholt 44/1739; G.T.D.W., A.L.B. and B.A.T.
Deutzia scabra Thunb. (63) Hedgerow at Esholt 44/1839; G.T.D.W. conf. B.A.T.
Prunus cerasifera Ehrh. (61) Hedgerow at Roos 54/2929; P. J. Cook. Hedgerow at
Aldbrough 54/23; A. Johnson per P.J.C.
Lathyrus odoratus L. (63) Waste ground adjacent Castlefields Industrial Estate, Bingley
44/0941; G.T.D.W.
Trifolium cernuum Brot. (64) Waste ground at Esholt 44/1839; G.T.D.W. conf. Mrs P. P.
Abbott.
Euphorbia cyparissias L. (61) Roadside verge at Staxton 54/0279; E.C.
Physalis ixocarpa Brot. ex Homem. (63) Woodhouse Lane Farm near Wakefield 44/2924;
J.M., 1994.
Physalis peruviana L. (64) Waste ground at Esholt 44/1739; G.T.D.W. conf. P.P.A.
Solanum nigrum L. subsp. schultesii (Opiz) Wessely (63) Woodhouse Lane Farm near
Wakefield 44/2924; B.K.B., B.A.T. and G.T.D.W. per J.M., 1994
Solanum physalifolium Rusby (63) Woodhouse Lane Farm near Wakefield 44/2924;
B.K.B., B.A.T. and G.T.D.W. perJ.M., 1994.
Cuscuta campestris Yunker (64) Growing on Artemisia vulgaris, on waste ground at
Esholt 44/1739; G.T.D.W. conf. P.P.A.
Origanum majorana L. (63) Disused railway sidings, Manningham, Bradford 44/1633;
G.T.D.W. conf. P.P.A.
Campanula persicifolia L. (64) Bank of stream, Bumsall 44/0361; P.P.A.
Crepis tectorum L. (61) Newly seeded verge, Beverley bypass 54/0241; J.D. conf. E.C.
Carthamus tinctorius L. (61) Garden bird-seed alien, Driffield 54/0258; Mrs S. Dowson
det. E.C. (64) Waste ground at Esholt 44/1739; G.T.D.W.
Lactuca sativa L. (61) Newly seeded verge, Beverley bypass 54/0241; J.D. conf. E.C.
Artemisia verlotiorum Lamotte (61) Pathside near Humber Bridge 54/0325; R. M. Burton
conf. E.C.
Senecio ovatus (P. Gaertner, Meyer & Scherb.) Willd. (64) Roadside near Stocks Reservoir
34/7355; P.P.A.
Phoenix dactylifera L. (64) Waste ground at Esholt 44/1739; G.T.D.W. also P.P.A. and
A. L.B.
Cynosurus echinatus L. (63) Disused railway sidings, Manningham, Bradford 44/1633;
B. A.T. conf. G.T.D.W.
Setaria viridis (L.) Beauv. (62) Bootham, York 44/65; T. Medd conf. E.C.
Setaria pumila (Poiret) Roemer & Schultes (61) Newly seeded verge, Beverley bypass
54/0241; J.D.
Tulipa gesneriana L. A single plant, roadside at Gisbum 34/8349; P.P.A.
Scilla bifolia L. Roos churchyard 54/2929; P.J.C.
Galanthus plicatus M. Bieb. (62) Meadow at W. Ayton 44/9883; E.C. det. Dr J. R.
Akeroyd.
Crocus tommasinianus Herbert (62) Meadow at W. Ayton 44/9883; E.C.
Correction to the 1989 Report
Physalis pubescens L. The determination was challenged and the specimen was
eventually submitted to Kew Herbarium and determined as Physalis philadelphica Lam.
syn. P. ixocarpa Homem. by Dr K. Vollesen.
117
Rook Reviews
BOOK REVIEWS
f^V'7, 0l',heHS.Car"^d JhreaIen'd Ethmiine, Slathmopodine and Gelechiid
pilgh“‘96r£T"40y S°nS PP ,3° J°'m Na,Ure C°"SerVa,,0n
Tils is a further review in the series produced by staff at JNCC and the second to deal with
T To? ePl?fra (toC ?yrahd m°ths Were treated by the same author in publication no
’ i?93 f1? troatS a11 five natlve moths in the sub-family Ethmiinae, the sole British
lember of the Stathmopodinae and 75 species in the Gelechiidae. The aim of these
^v'ews is to summarize distributional and biological information on the scarcer species
ich, in the present review, are each allocated to one of nine status categories. Two of
wese categories, ‘insufficiently known” (10 spec.es) and “Indeterminate" (14 species)
nderline the considerable shortcomings in our current state of knowledge of these moths
'pidopterists0 ^ ^ Gelechiidae do not Present|y have a wide appeal among amateur
Following some 14 pages of introduction, the information for each of the selected
poecies is presented in a series of “data sheets”, each with a standardised format. Under
ich species name are listed the more important synonyms, references to publications
nich will aid identification, distribution by vice-counties separated into old (to 1969) and
Cif.ntu(l,970 onwards) records, habitat and ecology, status, threats, conservation and
imblished sources. This method of presentation works well and together with the clear
peface facilitates the location and extraction of data.
The publication is largely free of typographical errors, the omission of the author’s name
uemer before the dates (1988, 1993) in the identification section of Caryocolum alsinella
i page 73 being the only one noticed by the reviewer.
This review is probably of limited value to lepidopterists without some knowledge of the
oups treated and its use in the evaluation of sites for conservation and in their
anagement is weakened by the imprecise state of knowledge of the habitat requirements
r many of the treated moths. Nevertheless it is a worthwhile publication for the more
perienced microlepidopterist.
HEB
le Horseflies of Yorkshire by Andrew Gravson. Pp. 48. with 37 figs & 16 maps
WDGY Publications, Kirkbymoorside. 1995. £3.00. including postage from (and
eque/PO made out to) Mr A. Grayson. Victoria Cottage, 39 Piercy End. Kirkbymoorside
>rk Y06 6DQ.
is is a splendid and concise account of the Yorkshire species of flies belonging to the
nily Tabanidae. In common parlance, the term Horsefly is meaningless, being applied to
dost any flying insect of unusual or formidable appearance. Entomologically however,
term is restricted to the Tabanidae, a family of flies which have inevitably received a
■ i press owing to the bloodsucking habits of the female adults. Eleven members of the
(lily have been positively recorded from Yorkshire, but being characteristic insects of
drained wetlands and forests, most of these are of very restricted distribution, and even
four commonest species (i.e. Haematopota crassicornis, H. pluvialis, Chrysops
•cutiens and C. relictus) are by no means ubiquitous. Indeed it can be said with some
lfidence that most Yorkshire people have probably never encountered a true Horsefly in
county.
)y means of his key to species and his highly stylized, though astonishingly life-like
strations, Andrew Grayson’s book will enable naturalists to identify any Tabanid which
y find in Yorkshire. After discussing Tabanid habits and biology in general, he deals
h each Yorkshire species in turn, and gives lists of all county records which he has been
- to verify, and which have been plotted on the county distribution maps included in the
i »k.
118
Book Reviews
From a conservation standpoint, Tabanids are invaluable. Being essentially denizens of
pristine, undisturbed habitats, these flies are early casualties of land drainage and “land
improvement schemes”, with the result that the Tabanid fauna throughout most of England
is highly impoverished. It follows that the presence of a number of Tabanid species, other
than the four commonest species mentioned above, in a locality is indicative of high quality
in terms of natural habitats. For the recorder, the bloodsucking habit of the adults is highly
advantageous because, unlike most insects, they search for the collector who ventures into
their breeding areas!
The reviewer has pleasure in commending this excellent publication, and hopes that it
will prompt a growth of interest in these beautiful and fascinating insects.
Solitary Wasps by P. F. Yeo and S. A. Corbet. Pp. 68, plus 4 colour and 4 b/w plates.
Naturalists’ Handbooks No. 3 (2nd. ed., revised). Richmond Publishing Co. 1995. £13.00
hardback, £7.95 paperback.
This edition has been updated to include new ecological knowledge of Ammophila and
Cerceris, and the keys have been updated to include new species. The keys deal with the
sphecid, sapygid, tiphiid, mutillid and eumenid wasps. The keys go to species level except
for Spilomena where the investigator is directed to another book. The figures next to the
relevant couplets make the keys particularly easy to use. The checklist and distribution of
species has been updated. The book shows clearly how to carry out field observations,
including the marking of individuals and studying nest structure, and provides a page of
questions or problems that can be investigated. A list of relevant references and societies
are given, including the Bees, Wasps and Ants Recording Society. This book is a “must”
for all interested in solitary wasps.
MEA
Dragonflies by Peter L. Miller. Pp. 118, plus 4 colour plates. Naturalists’ Handbooks No.
7 (2nd ed., revised). Richmond Publishing Co. 1996. £16.00 hardback, £8.95 paperback..
Changes in the second edition include a substantially rewritten text and minor changes to
the keys, and the addition of the newly discovered Irish species Coenagrion lunulatum, and
new colour illustrations from R. R. Askew’s The Dragonflies of Europe. The keys are to
the last instar larvae and their caste skins (exuvia), and adults. The figures next to the
relevant couplets make identification easier. The colour plates are of 24 adult species. The
text deals with the ecology, behaviour and even some physiology, of the eggs, larvae and
adults. There are chapters on flight, vision, reproductive biology and egg-laying. Much
other useful information is given, including a book list on all aspects of dragonflies,
conservation, field studies, culture and a flight table. Finally there is a long list of
references, useful addresses and an annotated checklist. This is a very comprehensive
account of the British dragonflies set in a European context and a “must” for every
dragonfly watcher.
MEA
Atlas of the Dragonflies of Britain and Ireland by R. Merritt, N. W. Moore and B. C.
Eversham. Pp. 149, with 24 colour plates & 14 b/w figures. Institute of Terrestrial Ecology
and Joint Nature Conservation Committee. 1995. £15.95.
This is an impressive book from the moment you pick it up with its coloured front cover:
besides providing a distribution map for each of the resident species, information for each
species is given under the headings of description, habitat, breeding biology, flight period,
status and distribution, and European and world distribution. The Atlas is the result of 25
years work and is one of the most comprehensive on any invertebrate group. Five and half
119
Book Reviews
pages of acknowledgements with hundreds of names indicates the great interest that is
being currently shown in the dragonflies. Text is also given for Channel Island species not
ound in Britain and Ireland, immigants and accidentals, and possible additions to the
British and Irish list. The colour plates show important dragonfly sites and field studies of
adult and larval dragonflies in stationary posture. Additional tables and chapters deal with
'he geography! spread of records, flight periods of adults, larval recording and evidence
at breeding, abundance monitoring, the history of dragonfly recording and conservation
and current and possible future conservation activities. The British dragonflies are also
ronsidered as part of, and put in the context of, European species. Finally there is a very
ull section of references. This book is a must for all students of dragonflies.
MEA
I nsects and I histles by Margaret Redfern. Pp. 70, plus 4 colour and 4 b/w plates.
Naturalists Handbook No. 4 (2nd. ed., revised). Richmond Publishing Co. 1995. £13.00
lardback, £7.95 paperback.
! "his book deals with the insects living on or in the creeping thistle, Cirsium anense, and
hhe spear thistle, C. vulgare. The new edition has improved the keys, brought the
omenclature up-to-date and incorporated new findings. Insects resident in the thistle
eads, stem borers and leaf miners besides those living on the outside of the plants are
onsidered in turn. The life-cycles, parasites and predators of each species are considered
Quantitative information is subjected to key-factor analysis in developing population
ynamics. Information on biological control gives an applied context to the information.
Tien follow the keys to the insects that have previously been considered. The figures next
) the relevant couplets make the keys easier to use. Finally some information is given on
ollecting, rearing and preparing a reference collection of insects, and a useful set of
t iferences. An absolutely fascinating book.
MEA
Message from an Owl by Max R. Terman. Pp. xi+217, incl. numerous b/w plates
1 rinceton University Press. 1996. £17.95 hardback.
lax R. Terman is Professor of Biology at Tabor College in Kansas and his book is a
cord of how an abandoned great homed owlet was trained in the skills it needed to
irvive in the wild by a human, and how a human was given the opportunity to gain more
formation and an insight into the life of this species. Having to be a surrogate parent to a
>ung untrained hungry creature cannot be easy even for someone who. Iike^the author, has
t e backing of scientific knowledge. Professor Terman was more interested in returning
' itripey” the great homed owl to the wild than in keeping it for scientific study. Indeed, his
ain concern throughout was the fear that it would be an “imprint”. How he managed to
hieve its return and continue to study the bird is told in an informative and entertaining
ay which will prove interesting to both professionals and amateurs. Not only does the
ader learn a lot about an owl’s life but also, possibly unintentionally, a lot about Max
rrman. It was also cheering to find towards the end of the book that even experts can be
istaken.
AIH
1 rds of Algonquin Legend compiled and written by Robert E. Nichols. Pp. xvi+149,
i ;I. numerous line drawings by Linda Hoffman Kimball. University of Michigan Press,
in Arbor. 1995. $29.95 hardback.
■is collection of very short stories has been gathered from the Indians of North America
10 created legends about the birds and animals which affected their lives which were
120
Book Reviews
delivered in the age old tradition by storytellers around the fire during the winter months.
Anthropologists and early settlers started collecting these tales during the 19th and early
20th centuries and this book is a selection from their compilations. For anyone interested in
the natural and cultural history of North America, or as a means of introducing a young
listener to folklore. Birds Of Algonquin Legend will provide pleasant reading. The bird
illustrations at the beginning of each chapter are delightful.
AIH
Flora of the East Riding
of Yorkshire
Dr Eva Crackles, Ph.D., MSc, FLS, M.B.E.
edited by Roger Arnett
217 pages, 300 x 21 0mm with 8 pages of colour plates
New price £15.00 (reduced from £30.00) hardback |
plus £2.50 postage & packing
Available from bookshops or direct from:
The University of Hull Press
Cottingham Road Hull HU6 7RX
Tel. 01482-465322
BOOKS
OUT OF PRINT, NEW, ANTIQUARIAN FOR SALE AND BOUGHT
We specialize in Entomology, Invertebrates,
Mycology and Cryptogams,
Yorkshire Dales and Lake District
ALSO BINDERS FOR Y.N.U. PUBLICATIONS £5 EACH
Free catalogues on above - Please state interest
PENDLESIDE BOOKS, FENCE, Nr BURNLEY BB12 9QA
TELEPHONE 01282 615617
The Naturalist’ is available in microform
UNIVERSITY MICROFILMS INTERNATIONAL
300 North Zeeb Road
Dept PR
^nn Arbor, Mi 48106
JSA
White Swan House
Godstone
Surrey RH9 8LW
England
Binding
Why not have your copies of The Naturalist bound into volumes?
One year s issues per volume, or alternatively two years in one
volume at less cost than binding as two separate volumes. We are
also experienced and expert in the re-binding and repairing of all
DOOKS.
Spink & Thackray
Broomfield Bindery
Back Broomfield Crescent
LEEDS LS6 3BP
Telephone: 0113 2780353
A Flora of Cumbria
by Geoffrey Halliday
This new Flora of the post- 1974 county of Cumbria comprises the vice-
counties of Cumberland, Westmorland and Furness and the old Sedbergh
Rural District of North-west Yorkshire. It is the first Flora of Cumberland
and Furness for a century and the first for Westmorland since 1938. It deals
with 1380 species of vascular plants of which 1000 are provided with tetrad
distribution maps, the fruit of 22 years of extensive fieldwork. The
introductory chapters include contributions from Dr W. A. Pennington and
Dr D. A. Ratcliffe. The systematic accounts include keys to Euphrasia,
Rubus and Hieracium. There are r.550 pages and numerous colour
illustrations.
Publication is expected in late October. Copies at a pre-publication price
of £27 (soft back) and -£36 (hard back), plus T4.90 p.&p., can be ordered
from Dr G. Halliday, Biology' Dept., The University, Lancaster, LAI 4YQ.
Cheques should be made payable to University of Lancaster.
/ited in Great Britain by Titus Wilson. Kendal
ISSN 0028-0771
Latest publication of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
THE FRESHWATER CRUSTACEA OF YORKSHIRE
a faunistic & ecological survey
by
GEOFFREY FRYER
The crustacean fauna of Yorkshire reflects the great physiographic diversity of the
region. Adopting an ecological approach, this book considers the Yorkshire fauna in
relation to climate, topography, geology, soils and water chemistry, always keeping in
mind that it is dealing with living organisms whose habits, requirements and
physiological limitations determine exactly where they live.
Matters covered include the ecological background; faunal assemblages and their
regional attributes; an analysis of the factors that determine distribution patterns, many
of which are mapped; wide geographical aspects; and conservation. Large areas, such
as the Pennines, Howgill Fells, North Eastern uplands and the lowland plains are
surveyed. So too are localised regions including Whemside, the Malham area, lowland
heaths, and the largest lakes, as well as habitats such as upland tarns, seepages, cold
springs, small lowland ponds, inland saline waters. Notes are given on every species
recorded, including parasitic forms.
Price £16.00 (plus £2.00 per copy p.&p.) Special offer to member of the Yorkshire
Naturalists’ Union £13.50 (plus £2.00 p.&p.)
Please make cheques payable to Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
Available from: Professor M. R. I). Seaward, Department of Environmental
Science, University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1DP.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE
A Fungus Flora of Yorkshire. 1985. 296 pp. Hardback. £10.00 incl. p&p.
Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire. 1989. 380 pp. Paperback. £17.50
incl. p&p. Unbound. £12.15 incl. p&p.
Mammals of Yorkshire. 1985. 256 pp. £7.50 incl. p&p.
Protection of Birds Committee Centenary Year, J 89 J - 1 99 / . 73 pp. £6.00
incl. p&p.
Moths and Butterflies of Spurn ,1991. 124 pp. £6 incl. p&p.
Cheques should be made payable to Y.N.U.
From: Mrs J. Payne, 1 5 Broad Lane, Cawood, Selby, North Yorkshire, Y08 0SQ.
Telephone: 0757 268242
October-December 1996
Number 1019
Volume 121
Natural i st
A QUARTERLY JOURNAL OF NATURAL HISTORY FOR THE NORTH OF ENGLAND
THE NATURAL
HISTORY MUSEUM
13 JAN 1997
PURCHASED
GENERAL LIBRARY
Pemphredonine Wasps (Hymenoptera: Sphecidae,
Pemphredoninae) of Watsonian Yorkshire
— Michael E. Archer
An Invertebrate Survey of Hatfield Drains — Roger K. A. Morris
Joseph William Dunning (1833-1897): Informal Annotations in a
Copy of Rennie (1832) by a Forgotten Yorkshire Naturalist
together with Biographical Notes
W. E. Rimington and H. E. Beaumont
Using Diptera in Assessing Site Quality, with particular reference
to Empidoidea - A Regional Perspective — Roy Crossley
Published by the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
tor M. R. D. Seaward. MSc. PhD. DSc, FLS. The University, Bradford BD7 1DP
Notice to Contributors to ‘The Naturalist’
Manuscripts (two copies if possible), typed double-spaced on one side of the paper only
with margins at top and left-hand at least 2.5cm wide, should be submitted. Latin names of
genera and species, but nothing else, should be underlined. S.I. Units should be used
wherever possible. Authors must ensure that their references are accurately cited, and that
the titles of the journals are correctly abbreviated. Volumes of The Naturalist for the years
1886 to 1975 have been retrospectively numbered 11 to 100 to accord with numbering
before and after this period (see YNU Bulletin no. 3, pp. 21-22 1985); please cite these
volume numbers in all references. Table and text-figures should be prepared on separate
sheets of paper. Drawings and graphs, drawn about twice the linear size they are to appear,
should be in jet-black Indian ink, and legends should not be written on the figures.
Publishable manuscripts not conforming to the above requirements will be returned
for alteration.
Photographic Plates
Readers of The Naturalist will have noticed that the number of photographic illustrations
has increased in recent years. Good clear photographs, suitably captioned, to accompany
articles or as independent features are always welcome.
To encourage this development, a long-standing member of the YNU, who wishes to
remain anonymous, has most generously offered to make a donation, the income from
which would finance the publication of a plate or equivalent illustration in future issues
whenever possible. The editor, on behalf of the YNU, wishes to record this deep
appreciation of this imaginative gesture.
© Yorkshire Naturalists' Union — 1996
Single Copies may be made of single articles in this journal provided that due acknow-
ledgement is made and the copies are for non-profit making educational or private use.
Copying of more than one article or multiple copying of a single article is forbidden unless
special permission has been obtained from the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union. Permission is
granted for the use of brief quotations in published work provided that acknowledgement
of the source is clearly stated, but the use of substantial sections of text and any illustrative
matter requires the express permission of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
All matters other than subscriptions should be addressed to:
Mr John A. Newbould, Tapton House 30 Moorlands, Wickersley
Rotherham S66 OAT
Items which should be sent to the above include: All membership applications, changes
of address, resignations and problems concerning non-receipt of any of the YNU’s
publications. Please quote the membership number printed underneath your address on all
correspondence.
Subscriptions (unless covered by Banker's Order) should continue to be sent to:
Mr Derek Allen, c/o Doncaster Museum, Chequer Road
Doncaster DN 1 2AE
The Naturalist is issued free to individual members of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
and to Affiliated Societies.
Institutions and Subscribers £20.00
Registered Charity No. 224018
121
PEMPHREDONINE WASPS
(HYMENOPTERA: SPHECIDAE, PEMPHREDONINAE)
OF WATSONIAN YORKSHIRE
MICHAEL E. ARCHER
17 Elrnfielcl Terrace, Mutton Road, York Y03 OEH
The pernphredonine wasps are medium small to very small sphecids, which although often
abundant, are easily overlooked by collectors because of their size. Some species of
Passaloecus and Pemphredon are often found in gardens. Pemphredon lugubris can be
observed collecting black bean aphids from broad bean plants. Most species are black,
although species of Psen (Mimesa) have red on part of their gaster.
Currently there are 23 species of pernphredonine wasps present in Watsonian Yorkshire
in seven genera (Table 1). The species of Psen will be considered under the subgenera
Mimesa and Mimumesu (Table I ). Mimesa and Mimumesa are given generic status in
Lomboldt (1975), Bohart and Menke (1976), and Dollfuss (1991). Up-to-date keys to the
pernphredonine wasps can be found in Richards (1980), Dolltuss (1991) and Yeo and
Corbet (1995).
TABLE 1
Records and distributional units of the Pemphredon inae from
Watsonian Yorkshire to April 1996.
Species
No.
records
No.
localities
No.
Ikm
No.
10km
No.
VCs
Mimesa hi color
1
1
1
1
1
Mimesa equestris
84
24
24
17
4
Mimesa lutaria
10
6
6
6
2
Mimumesa dahlbomi
32
25
24
20
5
Psenulus concolor
18
18
17
11
4
Psenulus pallipes
31
23
22
19
4
Spilomena beata
3
1
1
1
1
Spilomena differens
2
1
1
1
1
Spilomena troglodytes
13
10
9
8
3
Stigmus solsk)i
8
6
6
4
3
Pemphredon enslini
1
i
1
1
1
Pemphredon inornatus
51
37
37
30
4
Pemphredon lethifer
33
26
26
20
4
Pemphredon lugubris
137
84
78
44
4
Pemphredon morio
4
4
4
4
4
Diodontus luperus
8
8
8
7
1
Diodontus minutus
20
8
8
7
3
Diodontus tristis
71
17
14
10
4
Passaloecus corniger
21
13
13
1 1
3
Passaloecus gracilis
14
13
13
1 1
4
Passaloecus insignis
15
12
12
1 1
4
Passaloecus monilicornis
11
9
8
8
4
Passaloecus singularis
30
25
25
19
4
TOTAL
618
177
165
74
5
Life Cycles and Habits . . , . .
The pernphredonine wasps are summer insects, with the adults active mainly during June,
Naturalist 122 (1996)
122
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
July and August but also exceptionally before and after these summer months (Table 2).
Each species probably passes through one generation a year, i.e. showing univoltinism.
TABLE 2
Seasonal appearance of adults of Pemphredoninae from Watsonian Yorkshire.
April
May
June
July
August
Sept.
Oct. Unknown
Mimesa bicolor
1
Mimesa equestris
7
38
33
3
3
Mimesa lutaria
1
4
3
2
Mimumesa dahlbomi
1
13
13
3
2
Psenulus concolor
1
1 1
6
Psenulus pallipes 1
7
14
8
1
Spilomena beata
1
2
Spilomena differens
1
1
Spilomena troglodytes
1
4
6
1
1
Stigmus solskyi
1
3
4
Pemphredon enslini
1
Pemphredon inornatus
2
22
15
8
4
Pemphredon lethifer
1
9
8
6
1
8
Pemphredon lugubris
8
39
45
25
3
1 16
Pemphredon morio
1
3
Diodontus luperus
1
6
1
Diodontus minutus
1
7
9
2
I
Diodontus tristis
1
12
26
25
6
1
Passaloecus comiger
6
7
5
3
Passaloecus gracilis
6
6
1
1
Passaloecus insignis
4
6
4
1
Passaloecus monilicornis
1
7
2
1
Passaloecus singularis
12
12
5
1
Species of Mimesa and Diodontus are subterranean nesters, excavating their burrows in
sandy or other easily-worked soils. The burrows of Mimesa are at first vertical before
turning to become horizontal and leading to several cells. The much branched burrows of
Diodontus each end in a cell. Each cell of Mimesa is stored with 12-20 leaf-hoppers
(Cicadellidae) while each cell of Diodontus has about 30 aphids (Aphididae). An egg is
laid in each cell after it has received at least some provisioning. After that the cell is sealed.
Mimesa are attacked by the chrysid wasp, Elampus panzeri (Fabricius), and both Mimesa
and Diodontus could be host to the mutillid wasp, Myrmosa atra Panzer.
Species of Mimumesa, Psenulus, Pemphredon, Passaloecus, Stigmus and Spilomena are
aerial nesters in hollow plant stems, e.g. elder, raspberry, bramble, rose; in abandoned
beetle borings in dead wood; and in ready-made cavities, e.g. deserted galls. Pemphredon
also excavates burrows in decayed wood. Each burrow leads to several cells arranged
either linearly or with some branching. Mimumesa provisions its cells with leaf-hoppers
(Cicadellidae) and plant-hoppers (Delphacidae). The provisions of Psenulus pallipes,
Pemphredon, Passaloecus and Stigmus are aphids (Aphididae); Psenulus concolor are
psyllids (Psyllidae); and Spilomena are thrips (Thysanoptera). Each burrow usually leads to
3-12 cells although each female of Pemphredon lethifer may make up to four burrows. The
number of prey per cell varies from 14-24 for Psenulus concolor and 27-73 for Spilomena
singularis.
The chrysid wasps Omalus use Pemphredon and Passaloecus as their hosts. Trichrysis
cyanea (Linn.) also uses Pemphredon as its host. Females of Passaloecus corriger steal
prey from the cells of P. insignis and P. gracilis.
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire 1 23
Further biological information on the pemphredonine wasps can be found in Spooner
( 1 948), Y arrow ( 1 969), Danks (1971), and Corbet and Backhouse (1975).
Historical Account
Work on the pemphredonine wasps started with Smith (1852. 1858) who discovered six
species: Mimesa equestris (as M. bicolor), M. lutaria (as M. equestris), Pemphredon
inomatus (as Cemonus unicolor ), P. lugubris, Diodontus minutus and Passaloecus gracilis
i (as P. insignis). Perkins in Fordham (1933) indicated that Smith could not distinguish
between M. equestris and M. lutaria, but the descriptions given by Smith (1858) indicate
that he could distinguish the two species. Smith (1858) does not give specific Yorkshire
localities and it is assumed that the specimens were taken at Woolley, near Wakefield. 1
refer to Smith’s records from this locality as Woolley (F. Smith).
Roebuck (1877, 1880) listed the six species of Smith, and Roebuck (1907) added two
further species: Psenulus pallipes and Passaloecus singularis (as P. gracillis).
Butterfield and Fordham (1931) listed 14 species including the following four new
species: Mimumesa dahlbomi, Pemphredon lethifer, Diodontus tristis and Passaloecus
insignis (as P. monilicornis). Two further species listed by Butterfield and Fordham (1931)
have been rejected: Mimesa bicolor and Diodontus luperus. Specimens of M. bicolor
^collected by Fordham at Allerthorpe Common, found at Manchester and Scarborough
NMuseums, were found to be M. equestris. Perkins examined specimens of D. luperus and
found them to D. tristis (as recorded on the Fordham cards).
Yarrow ( 1969) on Spilomena and Yarrow ( 1970) on Passaloecus established the number
of species in the British fauna and corrected the nomenclature, particularly of Passaloecus.
which was previously confused.
This paper introduces a further eleven species which are listed with the reference in
which they were first mentioned: Mimesa bicolor (Bum, 1975), Psenulus concolor (Archer.
1986) , Spilomena beam (Archer, 1990), S. differens (not previously considered). S.
troglodytes (Yarrow, 1969), Stigmas solskyi (Hincks, 1944). Pemphredon enslini (Archer.
1987) , P. morio (Archer. 1987 as P. clypealis), Diodontus luperus (Whiteley. 1988),
Passaloecus comiger (Archer, 1987) and P. monilicornis (Yarrow. 1970).
The Record Data Base
The 23 species are represented by 61 8 records from 1 77 localities in 165 1km squares or 74
10km squares (Table 1). A record is based upon a specimen where the data varies in one of
the following: name, sex, locality and day-date of capture or observation. The author has
seen the specimens of 384 (62%) of the records.
Watsonian Yorkshire may be considered to include, at least in part. 195 10km squares.
Map 1 shows the number of records, and Map 2 the number of species, found in each 10
km square. Records are known from 38% of the 10km squares.
The coverage of the vice-counties is uneven with most records from VC63 (244)
followed by VC61 (166). VC62 (136). VC64 (69) and VC65 (3). The following natural
areas have been reasonably well sampled: North Yorkshire coastal fringe. Vale of
Pickering, Vale of York. Magnesium Limestone hills. Humberhead Level. Sandstone hills
(Coal Measures) and the Millstone Grit Pennines. A start has made to sample the North
York Moors and Howardian Hills but more work is needed. In contrast, the Tees lowlands.
Vale of Mowbray, Limestone Pennines, Yorkshire Wolds and Holdemess (except for
sSpurn Point) have been little sampled.
Using the number of records per species as a measure of abundance and the number of
lQkm squares in which each species occurs as a measure of range tor each species, a plot of
abundance versus range can be made (Fig. 1). Except for two species (Diodontus trisits and
Mimesa equestris) there is a straight line relationship. The correlation coefficient ot 0.98
for the straight line species is a statistically highly significant relationship (p<0.001)
indicating that as the range of a species increases so does its abundance. The regression
equation for the straight line species can be expressed as: Abundance = 1 .66 Range - 3.23.
124
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
MAP 1
Number of records for each 10km square of Pemphredoninae from Watsonian Yorkshire.
MAP 2
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
125
FIGURE 1
Abundance v. range ol species of Pemphredoninae from Watsonian Yorkshire.
Archer ( 1994) defined the term local as a species having relatively more records from
datively fewer localities. The range and abundance data of D. tristis and M. equestris
indicate that these species can be considered local species and indeed tend to be restricted
sandy habitats. Archer (1994) also considered that D. minutus was a local species, a
inclusion that cannot now be justified by the new data.
TABLE 3
-ocalities from Watsonian Yorkshire with either ten or more records of six or more species
of Pemphredoninae.
No. Species
No. records
axton Common
12
18
1 llerthorpe Common
9
98
ow Wood
9
14
>uth Cliffe Common
7
17
jgset Wood
7
12
i mcombe Park
6
24
nd Hutton
6
1 1
tome Moor
6
9
irton Leonard Lime Quarries
6
8
an vers Colliery
6
7
oolley (F. Smith)
6
6
)well Wood
6
6
ensall Common
5
13
:swick Fitts
5
13
^ssington Bridge
5
12
>rnelian Bay
4
13
dncarr Plantation
3
11
aarmcliffe Wood
3
10
126
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
TABLE 4
Time source of records of Pemphredoninae from Watsonian Yorkshire.
No. records
Pre-1990
9
1900s
7
1910s
16
1920s
76
1930s
35
1940s
18
1950s
7
1960s
27
1970s
86
1989s
212
1990s
121
TABLE 5
Names and years of activity of collectors of Pemphredoninae from Watsonian Yorkshire
with ten or more records.
No. records
Years of activity
Archer, M. E.
209
1967-1995
Fordham, W. J.
78
1915-1935
Burn J. T.
61
1970-1991
ColdwelkJ. D.
44
1985-1995
Ely, W. A.
20
1980-1991
Shaw, R.
16
1989-1992
Wood, J.
16
1927-1961
Hincks, W. D.
13
1942-1953
Flint. J. H.
12
1965-1977
Grayson, A.
11
1987-1990
Britten, H.
11
1935-1937
Whiteley, D.
10
1984-1990
TABLE 6
Sources of records of Pemphredoninae from Watsonian Yorkshire
No. records
Doncaster Museum
17
Keighley Museum
7
Leeds Museum
7
Manchester Museum
32
Oxford Museum
1
Rotherham Museum
28
Scarborough Museum
21
Sheffield Museum
23
York Museum
1
Private collections
376
Sighted records
6
Literature records
99
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
127
TABLE 7
Number of records of the sexes of Pemphredoninae from Watsonian Yorkshire to April
1 996.
Female
Mi mesa bicolor
0
Mimesa equestris
43
Mimesa lutaria
5
M imumesa dahlbomi
12
Psenulus concolor
9
Psenulus pallipes
12
Spilomena beata
2
■Spilomena differens
1
' Spilomena troglodytes
7
Stigmas solskvi
1
Pemphredon enslini
0
Pemphredon inomatus
16
Pemphredon lethifer
6
Pemphredon lugubris
83
Pemphredon morio
3
Diodontus luperus
1
Diodontus minutus
10
Diodontus tristis
30
p assaloecus corniger
6
°assaloecus gracilis
5
10 assaloecus insignis
5
. ,J assaloecus monilicornis
3
1 ? assaloecus singular is
11
Male Unknown
1
19
0
11
6
4
1
1
1
0
0
21
12
21
0
3
4
35
6
5
2
6
9
0
22
5
9
3
15
0
0
5
7
1
14
15
33
1
4
6
6
9
4
8
2
10
hy is it that IX tnstis and M. equestris have an increased chance of being recorded
when a suitable habttat .s vtsited? It is not because these two species are active as adults
onger than other species of pemphredonines (Table 2) and so have an increased chance of
eing observed. Females ot M. equestris tend to dig their burrows near each other and the
' arrows of D. tnstis are probably largely restricted to banks. These colonial habits would
lake the two species more visible and more likely to be recorded
The top 18 localities with either ten or more records, or six or more species, are given in
ab e .V ^ [ these localities are characterised by having open aerial nesting sites but mav
e sandy habitats, e.g. Blaxton and Allerthorpe Commons, or clay habitats, e.g. Duncombe
ark and Burton Leonard Lime Quarries. The large number of records from Allerthorpe
ommon indicates the great attention it has recorded since 1921. '
Table 4 shows the number of records known from the 19th century and each decade of
ie 20th century. The year date of four records is unknown. Table 5 shows the twelve
bllectors of records with ten or more records. Little work was carried out during the 19th
id the first decade of the 20th century. During the next three decades (1910s to 1 930s) an
creased interest was shown, particularly by the work of H. Britten on the North Yorkshire
.mstal fringe, W. J. Fordham mainly at Allerthorpe Common but also elsewhere, and J.
ood at several localities including Aberford and around Keighley. The 1940s and 1950s
ere a low point of interest, only kept alive by W. D. Hincks working at several localities,
eluding Askham Bog and Spurn Point. From the 1960s there has been a great renewal of
terest, greatly aided by better identification books. A characteristic of this latter period is
L'e great increase in the number of records, being mainly the work of three aculeate
irkers, M. E. Archer. J. T. Bum and J. D. Coldwell
Table 6 shows the sources of records, with 16.0% from published and unpublished
128
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
literature, 22.2% from museum collections and 61.8% from private collections or sighted
records. The collections at Doncaster, Manchester, Rotherham, Scarborough and Sheffield
have been particularly important sources of records, and the help given by the curators of
the nine museums and the 49 people who have been the collectors is acknowledged.
Species Accounts
The information for each species is given in the following order: Biological name; Status
(Archer, 1993); Map number if a map given, or if no map is given the 10km squares are
indicated (B = records before 1950, A= records 1950 onwards); Seasonal appearance of
adults (Table 2); Relative abundance of each sex (Table 7); National status (Archer, 1995),
and national seasonal appearance of adults. As the national status of many of the species is
poorly known, those given are often tentative. Localities are given for rare species.
Mimesa bicolor ( Jurine, 1807)
Rare; SK69A (Crow Wood); August; male only found; nationally rare (RDB2), May until
August.
Mimesa equestris (Fabricius, 1804)
Frequent; Map 3; June until September; females more frequently found; nationally
universal, June until September.
Mimesa lutaria (Fabricius, 1787)
Rare; SE23B (Farnley), SE3IB (Woolley, F. Smith), SE60A (Blaxton Common), SE83A
(South Cliffe Common), SE94B (Thorpe), SK69A (Crow Wood); June until August;
females more frequently found but sample size is small; nationally widespread, June until
August.
Mimumesa dahlbomi (Wesmael, 1852)
Frequent; Map 4; May until August; sexes more-or-less equally found; nationally
universal. May until September.
MAP 3
Mimesa equestris (Fabricius, 1 804) (O before 1950. • 1 950 onwards).
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
129
MAP 4
Mimumesa dahlbomi (Wesmael, 1852) (O before 1950, • 1950 onwards).
Psenulus concolor (Dahlbom. 1 843)
Occasional; SE30A, SE35A. SE36A. SE40A, SE50A, SE51A. SE64A, SE65A. SE74A,
SK38A, SK39A; May until July; females more frequently found: nationally widespread,
'May until August.
Psenulus pallipes (Panzer, 1798)
Frequent; Map 5: June until September (one record during April), females more frequently
found: nationally widespread. May until September.
Spilomena beata Bluthgen. 1953
Rare; SE30A (Hugset Wood); June until July; females and male found: nationally
widespread, June until August.
Spilomena differens Bluthgen. 1953
Rare: SE20A (Clough Wood): July until August: female and male found: nationally
widespread. June until September.
Spilomena troglodytes (Van der Linden. 1829)
Occasional: SE23B. SE40A. SE50A. SE7I A. SK48A. SK49A. SK57A. TA41A: June until
September; females more frequently found: nationally universal. June until September.
Stigmus solskyi Morawitz, 1864
Occasional: SE40A. SE54B. SE60A. SE92A: June until August; nationally widespread.
June until August.
Pemphredon enslini (Wagner. 1932)
Rare; NZIOB (Richmond Park), undated specimen at Oxford University Museum:
nationally rare (RDB3). July.
Pemphredon inornatus Say, 1 824
Common: Map 6: May until August: males more frequently found; nationally universal.
May until September.
Pemphredon let Infer (Shuckard. 1837)
130
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
MAP 5
Psenulus pallipes (Panzer, 1798) (O before 1950, • 1950 onwards).
1 1 1
1 1 1
It
NY
NZ
\
rv
X
/
^ S
s /
p
N
P
\
T
r ^
L. J
■
/
s
s 9
r i
L ^
r ^
k J
(
TA
r
^A
vV
AA
w
r i
k. ^
i
A
r
A,
•
1
7A
s ^
•
v
7
>
^A
i
S S
9
•
A
V
SD
7
AA
W
/ \
&
0
0
•
7A
vj
r i
k J
§
(
•
•
r ^
k. a
y
SE
5
\
r ^
0
s;
A
A
r 'i
L J
SK
i
r
6789012345678901234
MAP 6
Pemphredon inomatus Say, 1824(0 before 1950. • 1950 onwards).
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
131
9
8
7
6
s
4
3
2
1
0
9
8
MAP 7
Pemphredon lethifer (Shuckard, 1 837) (O before 1950, • 1950 onwards).
requent; Map 7; May until September; males more frequently found; nationally universal
‘Hay until September.
'e tuple don lugubris (Fabricius, 1793)
ommon; Map 8; May until October; females more frequently found; nationally universal
lay until October.
emphredon mono Van de Linden, 1829
! are; SE40A (Manvers Colliery), SE61A (Ashfield). SE68A (Duncombe Park). SE86A
Aurdale); June until July; females more frequently found but sample size small; nationally
- :arce (Nb), June until August.
iodontus luperus Shuckard, 1 837
are; SE40A (Cortonwood Colliery), SE60A (Blaxton Common). SE69A (Crow Wood)
kK38A (Crookesmoor & Richmond Road. Sheffield), SK48A (Shirtcliff Wood. Sheffield).
^K49A (Old Denaby), SK69A (Rossington Bridge); June until August; males more
cquently found but sample size small: nationally widespread. June untifseptember.
1 iodontus minutus (Fabricius, 1793)
occasional; SE3 IB, SE55A, SE60A. SE62B. SE74A. SE83A, SK69A; June until
:ptember; females more frequently found: nationally universal. June until September.
' odontus tristis (Van der Linden. 1829)
equent; Map 9; May until September: sexes more-or-less equally found; nationally
despread. May until September.
issaloecus corniger Shuckard. 1 837
I equent; Map 10; June until September; sexes more-or4ess equally found: nationally
despread. May until September.
i issaloecus gracilis (Curtis, 1834)
■ .casional; SE13A, SE3IB. SE34A. SE40A, SE43A. SE50A. SE60A. SE63B. SE7IA.
: :74B, SE78A; June until August; sexes more-or-less equally found; nationally
132
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
133
3
2
N1
-1 —
(
V-
— I —
NZ
*
1 —
N
/
0 —
1
”Tf
9 —
8
t
•
7
6
-4
•
•
TA
5^
J
•
4
•
n
S /
\
3 —
2
SD
(
V
1 —
•
r
r
rS
0 —
•
•
r
SE
9
8 — j-
-1
4
*
SK
67890»2345678901234
MAP 10
Passaloecus comiger Shuckard, 1 837, (O before 1950.# 1950 onwards).
3
1 —
i
ft
2
(
NZ
Y
1
N
/
s
,
0
AT'
T
9
ir
1
8
7
6
•
TA
5
•
4 —
'f
•
n
V
3 — j
r s
/ \
S <>
2
SD
(
/ \
_
SE
S
SK,
i i i i i
6789012345678901234
MAP 1 1
Passaloecus singulars Dahlbom. 1844. (O before 1950.# 1950 onwards).
134
Pemphredonine wasps of Yorkshire
widespread, June until August.
Passaloecus insignis (Van der Linden, 1829)
Occasional; SE30A, SE34B, SE36A, SE40A, SE62A, SE65A, SE74B, SK28A, SK39A,
SK58A, SK69A; June until September; females more frequently found; nationally
widespread, June until September.
Passaloecus monilicornis Dahlbom, 1842
Occasional; NZ80B, NZ81B, SE19A, SE21A, SE66A, SE76A, SE78A; June until August;
males more frequently found; nationally widespread, May until September.
Passaloecus singularis Dahlbom, 1 844
Frequent; Map 11; June until August; sexes more-or-less equally found; nationally
universal, April until September.
References
Archer, M. E. (1986). Recorder's report on the Aculeate Hymenoptera in Yorkshire.
Naturalist 111: 31-33.
Archer, M. E. (1987). Recorder’s second report on the Aculeate Hymenoptera in
Yorkshire. Naturalist 112: 109-1 12.
Archer, M. E. (1990). Recorder’s third report on the Aculeate Hymenoptera in Watsonian
Yorkshire. Naturalist 115: 105-107.
Archer, M. E. (1993). Recorder’s fourth report on the aculeate Hymenoptera in Watsonian
Yorkshire and the development of a quality scoring system. Naturalist 118: 13-15.
Archer, M. E. (1994). Recorder’s fifth report on the aculeate Hymenoptera in Watsonian
Yorkshire. Naturalist 119: 73-77 .
Archer, M. E. (1995). Aculeate wasps and bees (Hymenoptera: Aculeata) of Blaxton
Common in Watsonian Yorkshire with the introduction of a new national quality scoring
system. Naturalist 120: 21-29.
Bohart, R. M. and Menke, A. S. (1975). The Sphecid wasps of the world. University of
California Press, Berkeley.
Burn, J. T. (1975). Aculeate Hymenoptera in the Doncaster district. Naturalist 100: 143-
145.
Butterfield, R. and Fordham, W. J. (1931). Aculeate Hymenoptera of Yorkshire, Part 4.
Naturalist 56: 233-236.
Corbet, S. A. and Backhouse, M. (1975). Aphid-hunting wasps: a field study of
Passaloecus. Trans. R. ent. Soc. Lond. 127: 1 1-30.
Danks, H. V. (1971) Biology of some stem-nesting aculeate Hymenoptera. Trans. R. ent.
Soc. Lond. 122: 323-399.
Dollfuss, H. (1991). Bestimmungsschlussel der Grabwespen Nord- und Zentraleuropas
(Hymenoptera, Sphecidae). Stapfia 24: 1-247.
Fordham, W. J. (1933). Further notes on Yorkshire Hymenoptera Aculeata. Naturalist 58:
1 19-120.
Hincks, W. D. (1944). Eighty-second Annual Report. Naturalist 69: 39.
Lomholdt, O. (1975). The Sphecidae (Hymenoptera) of Fennoscandia and Denmark.
Fauna ent. scand. 4: 1-224.
Richards, O. W. (1980). Handbooks for the Identification of British Insects 6(3b):
Scolioidea, Vespoidea and Sphecoidea. Royal Entomological Society, London.
Roebuck W. D. (1877). Yorkshire Hymenoptera. Part I. Trans. Yorks. Nat. Un. 1877: 23-
48.
Roebuck, W. D. (1880). Yorkshire Hymenoptera. Part 5. Trans. Yorks. Nat. Un. 1880: 109-
1 1 1.
Roebuck, W. D. (1907). Hymenoptera, in Victoria County History of Yorkshire 1: 210-219.
Smith, F. (1852). Captures of Hymenoptera in Yorkshire. Zoologist 10: 3625-3626.
Smith, F. (1858). Catalogue of British Fossorial Hymenoptera. Formicidae, and Vespidae,
in the Collection of the British Museum. London.
Spooner, G. M. (1948). The British species of Psenine wasps (Hymenoptera: Sphecidae).
Book Reviews
135
Trans. R. ent. Soc. Loud. 99: 129-172.
Whiteley, D. (1988). Uncommon solitary wasps in urban Sheffield. Sorby Record 25: 54-
Yarrow, I. H. H. (1969). Some additional and little known British species of the solitary
wasp genus Spilomena Shuckard (Hym. Sphecoidea). Entomologist’s Gazette 20: 97-
1 04.
Yarrow, I. H. H. (1970). Some nomenclature problems in the genus Passaloecus Shuckard
and two species not before recognised as British (Hym. Sphecidae). Entomologist's
Gazette 21: 167-189.
Yeo, P. I. and Corbet, S. A. (1995). Solitary Wasps. Naturalists’ Handbooks 3. Richmond
Publishing, Slough.
BOOK REVIEWS
The Lepidoptera: Form, Function and Diversity by Malcolm Scoble. Pp. 404. with 321
line drawings and black and white photographs and 34 colour photographs arranged as four
plates. The Natural History Museum and Oxford University Press, 1995. £25.00 paperback.
This lively account of the functional morphology and classification of the world's
butterflies and moths is the first comprehensive treatment for some 40 years. It is divided
into three sections. Pail I is a thorough review of form and function, concentrating on
external morphology rather than internal anatomy. Chapters on the head, thorax and
abdomen ot the adult stage cover in detail the structure of that part of the body and its
associated organs and appendages. The style is notable for its clarity and the clever
blending of morphological description with the broader context of functional significance
in the biology and lile style of Lepidoptera. Taking wings, for example, variation in shape
and size leads into the question of why wing reduction in the females of some species
should have evolved. Wing structure, methods of folding, and patterns of venation and
their use in classification are described. The different resting postures of wings and the
variety of wing coupling and locking devices are followed by a section on scales. Flight
(the primary function of wings) and migration are covered in detail, as are the colours and
patterns on wings: the ways in which colour is produced and its significance in crypsis,
aposematicism. mimicry, false heads, eyespots, communication and thermoregulation
(secondary functions). A further chapter deals with the immature stages and Part I
concludes with communication through sound and scent and the associated organs.
Part III addresses classification down to the level of family or subfamily. For each, the
main features on which the classification is based are outlined, together with a brief
overview of the biology and possible phylogenetic relationships of the group. What
emerges strongly is the difficulty in recognising monophyletic groups and the great degree
of uncertainty regarding lepidopteran systematics.
Squeezed between the other two. Part II is a single brief chapter on the environmental
and ecological importance of Lepidoptera. The main theme is their importance as primary
consumers, having about the same number of phytophagous species as the Coleoptera. In
turn, they are an important source of food or hosts for many other animals. It is not
surprising, therefore, that they should be considered as good candidates for indicators of
environmental change or habitat quality.
With a reference list of over 700 entries, and the relatively recent literature well
represented, this is an important book for all with an interest in Lepidoptera. It is
outstandingly readable, good to dip into, and packed with information. I wonder, for
example, how many readers of this review' are aware that Hawaiian members of the same
genus as our familiar little pug moths have larvae that are carnivorous, striking out at and
seizing with their thoracic legs other insects and spiders.
TJC
136
Book Reveiws
John Muir: Apostle of Nature by Thurman Wilkins. Pp. xxvii + 302, including 23
illustrations. University of Oklahoma Press, Norman and London. 1995. £19.95 hardback.
John Muir (1838-1914) has many claims to be the founding father of “the preservation
wing of the conservation movement”. Much of his life was dedicated to a crusade for the
protection of Wilderness values. He founded the Sierra Club, was active in the campaign to
establish national parks and forest reservations in the USA, and has become something of a
cult figure. He had a complex character, being arctic explorer, wealthy farmer, essayist,
tramp and eccentric as well as conservation pioneer and something of a geologist.
Although America claims him, he was in fact Scots by parentage, birth and early life, and
was extremely proud of his heritage, never losing his accent, and only becoming an
American citizen at the age of sixty-five. He was a life-long devotee of Bums and Scott.
Although he retained his Scottishness. Muir loved America. In his essay The American
Forests , in 1897 he wrote:
The forests of America . . . must have been a great delight to God; for they were the best
he ever planted. The whole continent was a garden, and from the beginning it seemed to
be favoured above all the other wild parks and gardens of the globe.
It was passages like this that “evoked the myth of America as Paradise Regained”, as the
biographer puts it, and conveyed to the American people the fear that their heritage was in
danger, ultimately galvanising some of them into action.
This well written, concise biography is largely based on previously published sources -
of which there are a great number - rather than on archival material, but is none the worse
for that. The arrangement of the book, following a Prologue that describes the social and
philosophical background of the USA in the period in which John Muir lived, is
chronological. Twenty-three chapters take the reader through an eventful life, from
childhood and schooldays in Dunbar on the east coast of Scotland to the final weeks in
California. The author is sympathetic, yet does not gloss over certain flaws in his subject’s
character, which in part are attributed to the extreme religiosity and bigotry of his austere,
fundamentalist father, and the frequent beatings (inflicted, sometimes, almost daily) in
Muir’s childhood. We glimpse, all too briefly, this childhood, including an adventure on
the steep roof of his Dunbar house which he later linked to his love of mountaineering. We
join Muir in his youth in the wilds of Wisconsin, and share his enthusiasm for
extraordinary inventions, including an early rising machine which tipped him out of bed in
the morning, and “loafer’s chair” which exploded when someone sat in it! We follow his
“skedaddling” to Canada to avoid the draft at the time of the Civil War, and his “Thousand-
mile walk” from Indianapolis to the Gulf of Mexico in early manhood. But the backdrop to
much of Muir’s life was the American West: the Sierra, the redwood forests, Yosemite
Valley and Alaska, which he explored when they were still very wild and later campaigned
with heart and soul to protect. The later chapters of the book detail these strivings. Chapter
24, however, is entitled “The lore of a literary naturalist” and evaluates John Muir's writing
- the biographer is a former professor of English. This is followed by a philosophical
Epilogue and an excellent set of Bibliographical Notes: there are few references to sources
in the body of the text.
The book is balanced, although the British reader might wish for more details of the
early Scots phase and of his later visits to Britain, and an eventful voyage round the world
late in Muir’s life is sparsely covered. While the production is generally excellent, some of
the photographs have not reproduced well and occasionally the author is on unsure ground
on scientific matters and over non-US place-names. The spelling of the Irish name as
“Avonmore” and as “Avenmore” within six lines on page 71 is unfortunate. These are
trifles however, and as a succinct summary of a life the appreciation of which is
fundamental to comprehending the modern conservation movement, this book could not
easily be bettered.
PA
137
AN INVERTEBRATE SURVEY OE HATFIELD DRAINS
ROGER K. A. MORRIS
English Nature, Bullring House, Northgate, Wakefield WFI 3BJ
Introduction
The Hatfield Drain complex lies on the borders of North Lincolnshire and South Yorkshire
and comprises a series ot major water courses, managed by the Environment Agency
formerly the National Rivers Authority) and the Hatfield Chase Internal Drainage Board
into which small privately owned farm ditches drain. They are known to support a range of
uncommon plants and parts are considered to be of significant nature conservation interest
(Bignall, 1991), although repeated surveys of the vegetation suggest that the interest is
(BignalU 994)SaSt termS °f numbers of nationally and regionally scarce species
The invertebrate interest ol these ditches is less well known, with some information on
aquatic invertebrates (Malard, 1989), but little else; a brief survey of the wetland
invertebrate interest was therefore carried out in conjunction with further vegetation
surveys in 1995 in order to evaluate the possible invertebrate interest of the drains and to
provide additional information to assist consideration of some of them as possible Sites of
Special Scientific Interest.
Visits were made to 19 locations on four main drains, Hatfield Waste, North Engine.
North Idle and South Engine Drains, together with part of the River Torne on 19 and 21
June 1995. Emergent vegetation was sampled by sweeping and although some bankside
vegetation was also swept, the main intention was to investigate the invertebrate fauna
most closely associated with the drainage ditches and their associated wetlands plants. The
main groups sampled were the Coleoptera, Diptera and Hymenoptera, although notes of
other Orders were made and specimens of Neuroptera were retained for the relevant
recording scheme.
Apart from selected families of beetles which were identified by Dr Roger Key, and the
Neuroptera which were identified by Colin Plant, identifications were the author's. Some
families of flies were largely ignored, especially the bulk of the Nematocera and
Calypterates which were outside the normal range of species with which the author is
familiar.
Site Descriptions
Hatfield Waste Drain and North Engine Drain
This section comprises two parallel drains to the east of the A161 divided by well grazed
grass and to the west by a minor road. The eastern on is essentially well-lit and bright,
with shallow banks and a diverse emergent flora, whilst the western section is in deep
cuttings and in places is heavily shaded with a more limited range of emergents,
ultimatedly turning to monocultures of Phragmites australis. Overall, North Engine
Drain was the more interesting and much of Hatfield Waste Drain west of the A 161 was
not sampled because it proved unproductive and difficult to sample.
Hatfield Waste Drain
HI. SE78631025
A south-facing bank with Glyceria maxima, Sparganium erection, Carex elata and C.
vesicaria.
H2. SE78401040
South-facing heavily grazed sedges.
H3. SE7785 1065
South-facing monoculture of Glyceria maxima.
Naturalist 122 (1996)
138
An invertebrate survey of Hatfield Drains
North Engine Drain
NE1. SE78631030
North-facing, with a rich emergent flora including Sparganium erectum , Lythrum
salicaria, Iris pseudacorus, Caltha palustris, and Carex elata.
NE2. SE78401045
North-facing, with good marginal vegetation including Caltha palustris, Alisma
plantago-aquatica, Filipendula ulmaria, Lythrum salicaria, Eleocharis palustris, Carex
elata and Pulicaria dysenterica.
NE3. SE77901070
North-facing, with a good mixture of marginals such a Glyceria maxima, Sparganium
erectum, Eleocharis palustris, Caltha palustris and Oenanthe fistulosa.
NE4. SE77501065
North-facing, in a dark tree-lined section. Vegetation rank with abundant Eilipendula
ulmaria and Carex acutiformis.
NE5. SE7725 1070
Similar to sample station H7, although the opposite bank was less shaded and had a more
interesting emergent and bankside flora.
NE6. SE76801050
North-facing, with Phragmites australis fringe and wetland species such as Filipendula
ulmaria and Thalytricum flavum further up the bank.
NE7. SE76401030
North-facing, with a fringe of Phragmites australis. Some Thalytricum flavum in the
damp area behind the reeds.
North Idle Drain
Much of North Idle Drain is set in a steeply sided deep cutting which makes sampling
especially difficult and dangerous. The vegetation varies, but at the northern end there
are extensive Phragmites australis and Sparganium erectum beds, with more open water
further south. Parts are also shaded with scrub.
Nil. SE74400860
Rank Sparganium erectum chokes the water-course. Some Caltha palustris and
Filipendula ulmaria and where the water is open Potamogeton natans is abundant.
NI2. SE74350820
A mixture of Glyceria maxima and Sparganium erectum interfacing with a bed of
Phragmites australis.
NI3. SE74250790
A mixture of Phragmites australis with Potamogeton natans in open water.
NI4. SE74250780
A mixture of Sparganium erectum. Potamogeton natans, Ranunculus aquatilis agg. with
a fringe of Filipendula ulmaria.
NI5. SE74200740
A mixture of Spraganium erectum, Typha latifolia, Filipendula ulmaria, Caltha
palustris and Phragmites australis.
An invertebrate survey of Hatfield Drains
139
River Tome
A slow-moving lowland river with mainly rank marginal vegetation and associated
washlands and nearby borrow-pits.
RT1. SE73700395
Very litle marginal vegetation but some Glyceria maxima and Sparganium erectum.
RT2. SE7 30004 10
Rank marginal vegetation chiefly comprising Gyceria maxima.
RT3. SE72500420
Similar to station RT2.
South Engine Drain
(SED) SE74000380
A wide and heavily engineered drain with a thin band of marginal vegetation compris-
ing Phragmites australis, Iris pseudacorus, Filipendula ulmaria and Ramunculus
sceleratus.
Records and Discussion
A total of 113 species were recorded and are listed in Appendix 1. This compares with the
188 species recorded by Malard (1989) who concentrated on the aquatic Coleoptera,
Hemiptera and Mollusca over a far longer survey period, covering more locations over a
wider area and using more recorders. Both surveys recorded comparatively few species at
each sampling station, but it is difficult to draw any firm conclusions from this as the range
of species differed so much.
As can be seen in Appendix 1, few families are well represented and few species of
particular note were found. The breakdown of numbers of species from each sampling
location and numbers of wetland indicators is given in Table I. From this it would appear
that there is no consistency in terms of numbers of wetland species recorded from
individual sample stations in the different drains, although Hatfield Waste Drain does prove
to be consistently less interesting than North Engine Drain.
Among the more interesting records is the assemblage of four reed beetles ( Donacia and
Plateumaris ) including the nationally scarce Donacia clavipes and D. simplex, both of
which are listed by Hyman and Parsons (1992) as Nationally Scarce B. i.e. recorded from
fewer than 100 10 kilometre squares in the UK; these species seem to be very' well
established in the Hatfield Drains complex. D. clavipes may be a recent coloniser as it was
not noted from the Crowle area in the past (Dr Roger Key pers. comm.), although the
author has recorded it elsew'here in Yorkshire and North Lincolnshire, and Stainforth
(1944) considered the species likely to occur widely in lowland Yorkshire. D. simplex on
the other hand is known from a 1907 record from Thome (Stainforth !oc. cit.). Among the
flies, the hoverflies Pipizella virens and Cheilosia velutina are currently listed by Falk
(1991) as Nationally Scarce, but the former is more widespread than previously thought
(Ball & Morris in’ prep.) and may no longer fall into this category. The predatory fly
Hilara discoidalis, also listed by Falk (1991) as Nationally Scarce, belongs to a genus
which is characterised by males swarming over water. H. discoidalis occurs at a number of
localities in Yorkshire, but is very local (R. Crossley pers. comm.): it is one of a large and
difficult genus to identify, and may therefore be under-recorded.
One other noteworthy record is the presence ot larvae ot the mullein shark moth
Cucculia verbaski feeding on water rtgwort Scrophularia auriculata. This is a local species
which in my experience is more frequently met with on limestone or chalk, feeding on
mullein flower heads. A further point of interest is the presence of meadow rue. Thalyticum
flavum. which would be worth searching for larvae of the marsh carpet moth Perizoma
sagittata.
140 An invertebrate survey of Hatfield Drains
TABLE 1
Sample station
Total number
Number of
Number of wetland
of species
wetland species
species in drains
Hatfield 1
7
2
Hatfield 3
9
2
5
Hatfield 5
4
1
North Engine 1
13
3
North Engine 2
15
5
North Engine 3
16
8
North Engine 4
10
4
17
North Engine 5
11
6
North Engine 6
16
3
North Engine 7
16
3
North Idle 1
15
5
North Idle 2
12
3
North Idle 3
7
1
12
North Idle 4
14
5
North Idle 5
8
2
River Torne 1
15
2
River Torne 2
10
2
7
River Tome 3
8
3
South Engine Drain
13
5
5
ignoring common or ubiquitous species, a wetland assemblage of 33 species can be
discerned and wetland species are highlighted. Few families are well represented and there
is a paucity of typical wetland indicators such as the Sciomyzidae and Dolichopodidae;
moreover the total list masks the overall paucity of species at each sample location,
averaging 1 1.5 with a maximum of sixteen and a minimum four species. 1995 was a poor
year for invertebrate recording and this may be reflected in the species recorded from the
Hatfield Drains complex. The drains did have a good amount of water in them however,
and it is possible that other factors are involved such as the as yet undermined factors
behind the apparent decline in the vegetation.
It is perhaps surprising that the fauna of these drains is so poorly recorded given their
proximity to the important peatland reserves of Thome and Hatfield Moors (The
Humberhead Peatlands National Nature Reseve). Whilst this survey demonstrates that
despite poor conditions, an interesting assemblage of wetland species is present in the
Hatfield drains, there are considerable opportunities to broaden our knowledge of the
fauna, especially the water beetles which were not examined during this survey. Hopefully
this note will either stimulate more detailed surveys or publication of hitherto unpublished
records. English Nature would also welcome records from these drains in order that their
nature conservation interest can be evaluated further.
Acknowledgements
I would like to thank Dr Roger Key for identifying the bulk of the beetle material from this
survey, and Colin Plant for identifying the lacewings. I would also like to thank Roy
Crossley for his comments on the Yorkshire distribution of Hilara discoidalis.
References
Ball, S. G. and Morris, R. K. A. (in prep.). A Provisional Atlas of the Hoverfiies of the
British Isles. Institute of Terrestrial Ecology, Monks Wood.
An invertebrate survey of Hatfield Drains 141
Bignall, M. R. (1991). The Natural Conservation Management of Ditches on Hatfield
Chase. Unpublished.
Bignall M. R. (1994.) Hatfield Chase Botanical Survey. Unpublished report for the
National Rivers Authority (Severn Trent Region).
Falk, S. J. (1991). A Review of the Scarce and Threatened Flies of Great Britain (part I)
Nature Conservancy Council, Peterborough.
Hyman. P. S. and Parsons, M. S. (1992). A Review of the Scarce and Threatened
oleoptera oj Great Britain (part I ). UK Joint Nature Conservation Committee
Peterborough.
Mar lard, F. (1989). A Survey of the Aquatic Invertebrates of Hatfield Chase. Unpublished.
Stain torth I. (1944). Reed beetles of the genus Donacia and its allies in Yorkshire (Col
Chrysomelidae). Naturalist 69 81-139.
Appendix 1
Species list for Hatfield Drains Invertebrate Survey 19-21 June 1995
Species considered indicative oi the wetland assemblage for the purposes of this studv
listed as WET.
COLEOPTERA
Cantharidae
C. decipiens
NE6
Cantharis lateralis
SED
C. livida
RT1
Cantharis rustica
NE6, NE7
Rhagonycha limbata
NE6. NE7
Carabidae
Amara plebeja
NE1
Demetrias atricapilus
Nil
Chrysomelidae
Chalcoides fulvicontis
NI3
Crepidodera transversa
H2, NE1
D. clavipes
HI, NE4. NE5. NE7 Scarce B
WET
Donacia simplex
H 1 . NE3, Nil, N 1 3, SED Scarce B
WET
D. thalassina
NE1.NE3. NE5
WET
Galerucella calmariensis
NE2, NE3
Phaedon armoracea
NI2
Plateumaris sericea
NE3
WET
Coccinellidae
Adalia bipunctata
NE3. RT3
Coccinella septempunctata
NE2, NE7
C. undecimpunctata
NE7
Propylea quattuordecipunctata
Nil
Curculionidae
Phyllobius pomaceus
NI2
Elateridae
Agriotes pallidas
NE1
Athous haemorrhoidalis
NE1. NE7,
A. hirtus
NI5
Selatosomus incanus
NE4, NE6. NE7
142
An invertebrate survey of Hatfield Drains
DIPTERA
Asilidae
Dioctria baumhaueri
NE7, RT2
D. rufipes
NE6, NE7, Nil, NI4, RT1
Conopidae
Sicus ferrugineus
RT1
Dolichopodidae
Anepsomyia flaviventris
NI2, NI4
WET
Argyra argentella
NI4
WET
A. vestitata
NE2
WET
Dolichopus claviger
NE6, NE7
WET
D. festivum
NE4, NE5
WET
D. pennatus
RT3
WET
D. uliginosus
HI, H2, H3, NE2, NE3, Nil,
Hercostomus celer
NI5, RT1, RT2, RT3
NE2, NE6, Nil, NI4
WET
H. cupreus
RT1
WET
H. aerosus
Nil, NI2, RT2
WET
Xanthochlorus ornatus
Nil, NI2, NI5
WET
Empididae
Empis caudatula
NE2
Empis livida
RT2
Hemerodromia raptoria
NI4
WET
Hilara discoidalis
Nil Scarce
H. fuscipes
NI2
H. quadrivittata
NI2
Hydromyia stagnalis
RT1
WET
Platypalpus palidiventris
N3, NE7, Nil, NI4, RT2
P. pallidicornis
NE3, RT1
Geomyzidae
Geomyza tripunctata
NE1, NE2
Lauxaniidae
Calliopum aeneum
H2, NE6, N12, NI3
Minettia spp (?)
NE6, NI5
Lonchopteridae
Lonchoptera lutea
NE3, NI2, NI5, RT2, SED
L. tristis
NE1
Opomyzidae
Opomyza germinationis
HI, H2, NE1, NE2, NE4, N12. RT2
O. petrei
HI, H2, NE1. NE2, N13
Otitidae
Meliera omissa
NE7
Pipunculidae
Dorylomorpha xanthopus
H2, NE5
An invertebrate survey of Hatfield Drains
Rhagionidae
Chrysopilus cristatus
HI, NE2, NE3, NE4. NE6. Nil
Rhagio tringarius
NE2
Scathophagidae
Cleigastra apicalis
NE3
WFT
Cordilura impudica
NI4
» ▼ ml* 1
WET
No re lli osoma spin iman urn
Scathophaga furcata
S. stercoraria
T richopalpus /rate nut
NE5
NE2, NE5, N 1
NE1, NE3, NI4, SED
RT1
Sciomyzidae
Lirnnia unguicornis
RT1
WFT
L. paludicola
NE5
M L I
WET
Pherbina coryleti
NE2, NE3, RT2
WET
Tetanocera arrogans
H2, NEI. NE2, NE4
WET
T. elata
NE5, NE6
WET
T. robusta
SED
WET
Sepsidae
Themira annulipes
H2
' Stratioinidae
Beris vallata
Chloromyia formosa
HI
NEI. NE6, NE7
'Syrphidae
Anasinyia contractu
RT3, SED
WET
Cheilosia albitarsis
(C. velutina
RTI. RT3
RTF
Scarce
Episyrphus balteatus
Eristalinus sepulchralis
Eristalis tenax
Melanostoma scalare
Neoascia meticulsa
SED
RTI. RT2. RT3
SED
NE4. NE5
NE4. NE5
WET
W. tenur
H2, NEI. NE2. NE3
WET
N. podagrica
Pipizella virens
H3
NE4
Scarce
Platycheirus albimanus
P. fulviventris
SED
Nil
WET
P. manicatus
' Syritta pipiens
' Syrphus ribesii
Trap i da scita
RTI
SED
RTF. RT3
NE7
WET
Tabanidae
Eh ry sops re 1 ictus
NI5. SED
I'herevidae
Thereva nobilitata
NE7. NI4
IEMIPTERA
3ercopidae
7 ercopis vulneratus
NE6. NE7. NI3
144
An invertebrate survey of Hatfield Drains
HYMENOPTERA
Andrenidae
Andrena chrysosceles
RT1
Cephlidae
Calameuta filifortnis
NE3
Cephus cultratus
NE6
Sphecidae
Passeloecus insignis
NI3
Tenthredinidae
Macrophya duodecimpunctata
NE4
Rhogogaster chambersi
NI2
Selandria serva
NE3
S. sixii
NE3
WET
Tenthredo scrophulariae
RT2
WET
T. mesomelas
Nil
LEPIDOPTERA
Arctiidae
Tyria jacobaeae
NE6
Geometridae
Camptogramma bilineata
Nil, NI3, NI4
Xanthoroe montanata
Nil, NI4
Hesperidae
Ochlodes venata
NE6
Noctuidae
Cucullia verbasci
NE5, NI4, NI5
Pieridae
Anthocharis cardamines
NI2
NEUROPTERA
Chrysopidae
Chrysopa perla
NI4
Panorpidae
Panorpa germanica
NI4
ODONATA
Agriidae
Calopteryx splendens
RT3
WET
Coenagriidae
Pyrosomma nymphula
HE, HI5, SED
WET
Libellulidae
Libellula quadrimaculata
SED
WET
145
JOSEPH WILLIAM DUNNING ( 1833-1897):
INFORMAL ANNOTATIONS IN A COPY OF RENNIE (1832)
BY A FORGOTTEN YORKSHIRE NATURALIST TOGETHER
WITH BIOGRAPHICAL NOTES
W. E. RIMINGTON1 and H. E. BEAUMONT2
■<S Riverside Drive, Sprotbrough, Doncaster DN 5 71. F
237 Melton Green, West Melton, Rotherham S63 6AA
In 1990 while researching Butterflies of the Doncaster District (Rimington, 1992), a series
ol manuscript entries was discovered largely relating to Storthes Hall (Huddersfield),
Adwick-le-Street (Doncaster) and Brandon (Suffolk). The entries, which are copious and
reler almost exclusively to the years 1845 to 1847, are contained in an interleaved copy of
A Conspectus of the Butterflies and Moths found in Britain (Rennie. 1832). On the title-
page is the signature of Joseph William Dunning, presumably the owner of the book prior
to its donation to the Royal Entomological Society of London in whose library it now
resides (catalogue reference L40.L5 REN).
At the time of writing Butterflies of the Doncaster District it was mistakenly believed
that Dunning was a teacher at Adwick Hall school, Doncaster, during the period in which
the entries were made but subsequent research revealed that he was in fact a pupil there in
1845, prior to his move with the school to Storthes Hall in 1846.
Both establishments were run by Peter lnchbald jnr. and catered for 12 to 14-year-old
boys (Harrison, 1957). Peter lnchbald (1816-1896) was an accomplished ornithologist,
botanist and entomologist whose life was described briefly in the Doncaster Review
(Anon., 1 898). He contributed frequent notes and records to the natural history' journals of
the day and was a major contributor to Porritt (1883-1886). Without doubt this early
association with lnchbald proved to be a most beneficial influence on the young Dunning,
not only as a scholar but also as a naturalist.
Without the assistance of a competent graphologist the link between Dunning's
signature, of which two separate and corroborating examples are available, and the
annotations is difficult to establish conclusively but there is little doubt even to the
inexperienced eye that the likeness is remarkable. The constant references to Brandon and
the frequent classical analyses of species names provide further evidence of authenticity for
it is known that Dunning spent his youthful summer holidays at Brandon and was to
become an accomplished classical scholar. A number of the annotations were entered
initially in pencil and later overwritten in ink. This together w ith the classical scholarship,
the evident maturity of the hand, the differing shades of ink used and the irregularity of the
entries points to these having been made over an undetermined period, but most probably
not later than 1850 from notes taken between 1845 and 1848.
It is not uncommon for the lifetime achievements of worthy individuals to be forgotten
or overlooked by future generations. The facts revealed by our researches indicate this to
be the case with Dunning, whose life and contribution to natural history, in particular to the
Royal Entomological Society of London, we describe briefly in this biographical note.
Information relating to Dunning's life is taken mainly from obituary notices (Goss. 1897,
1898; McLachlan. 1897; Trimen. 1897) and to his association w ith the Society from Neave
(1933).
Joseph William Dunning was born in Leeds in 1833. the son of a solicitor. Between the
ages of twelve and fourteen he attended Adwick Hall and Storthes Hall schools and it was
during this period that he appears to have been more actively engaged in field entomology
than at any other time in his life. He will be remembered particularly for two youthful
records: Centra latifascia Curtis (= Furcida furcula Clerk), the sallow kitten, at
Headingley about the year 1 848 (Goss. 1 897) and Agrophila sulphuralis Hubn. (= Emmelia
trabealis Scop.), the spotted sulphur, which he rediscovered at Brandon during his school
Naturalist 122(1996)
146
Joseph William Dunning (1833-1897)
holidays in 1845. Stainton records the incident thus: ‘'Mr. Dunning awoke and found
himself famous . . . Since he ceased to visit Brandon sulphuralis has been no more taken”.
On leaving Inchbald’s establishment he was educated privately, including a period in
Paris, before entering Trinity College, Cambridge at the age of eighteen taking a classical
scholarship in 1855 before becoming a law student. He gained his B.A. in 1856, his M.A.
in 1859 and was elected a Fellow of his College. In 1861 he was called to the Bar. While at
university Dunning initiated the formation of the Cambridge Entomological Society and
established links with the Entomological Society of Oxford University, the two societies
then cooperating, seemingly at Dunning’s instigation, in the publication of An Accentuated
List of the British Lepidotera (Dunning, 1858). Dunning apparently bore most if not all of
the publishing costs and acted as editor and chief compiler (Goss, 1898). This interesting
and learned work is mainly a discourse on the derivation of generic and species names,
accompanied by fascinating biographical notes on the authors of the names.
An excellent classicist, Dunning was also multilingual in European languages, with a
remarkable facility for translation at first sight of unfamiliar tongues.
He was professionally distinguished, achieving high esteem as a safe and careful counsel
in court and for his re-writing of the standard work Jarman on Wills (McLachlan, 1897). A
stroke in 1891 caused his retirement and he died in 1897 at 4 Talbot Square, Hyde Park.
London.
Dunning became a Fellow of the Linnean Society in 1 860 and of the Zoological Society
in 1864 but it was to the Entomological Society of London which he joined in 1849 that he
gave his prior allegiance. Throughout his long association with the Society he was a
constant source of strength and inspiration, guiding it through the troubled years of the
1860s with an administrative skill, financial judgement and munificence without which it
could well have collapsed. It is also little appreciated today that the granting of the
Society’s Royal Charter was the direct result of his initiative and benevolence.
Dunning’s first office in the Society, which he held from 1862 to 1870, was that of
Secretary, a post which he occupied with the utmost distinction throughout the troubled
years of the decade. Most of his early difficulties appear to have centred around E. W.
Janson, who, as an elected Fellow and an executive of the Society, was at the same time in
the dubious position of being a paid official. At various times Janson held office as Curator,
Secretary, Council member and Librarian, his position and activities apparently causing
much friction and involving such eminent figures as H. T. Stainton, H. G. Knaggs and R.
McLachlan. Dunning was drawn inevitably into controversy and was soon obliged to issue
a most condemnatory report on the “state of the library” to Council. This report amounted
to a complete exposure of Janson whose time as Librarian “was spent in mere chat, in chaff
and badinage ... the whole matter being a disgrace to a learned society” (Neave, 1933).
One result of this succession of troubles was the disbandment of the Publication and
Library and Cabinet Committees, this in turn causing a much greater secretarial workload.
Dunning responded by assuming responsibility for producing the long overdue library
catalogue and assuring its continuity by preparing the index for the second series of
Transactions , organising and financing publication of the first series and by undertaking
the task of Publications Editor. This he did “fearlessly and impartially, regardless of the
indignation of careless authors” (McLachlan, 1897). Turning his attention next to financial
matters, he produced in 1865 the first real attempt at budgetary control of the Society’s
affairs, his example being generally followed for years to come. A fresh outbreak of
wrangling coupled with financial problems provided Dunning’s next difficult, when Dr J.
E. Gray, one of the trustees of the reserve fund, refused for personal reasons, almost
certainly involving Janson, to release funds authorised by Council, thus creating a serious
constitutional problem. Dunning once again retrieved the situation by personally financing
the operation and doubtless bringing his managerial skills to bear on the underlying issues.
After relinquishing the position of Secretary, Dunning continued to advise and assist the
Society. He played a significant role in the acquisition of new premises at Chandos Street
in 1875, financing the entire operation, the Society thus gaining a degree of permanence
147
Joseph William Dunning (1833-1897)
and stability previously unknown.
Dunning served on the Council in 1862 and 1876. was Vice-president in 1871. 1874,
1875, 1877, 1879, 1880, 1885 and 1890 and finally accepted the offer of the Presidency in
1883-1884. His term of office immediately followed that of another great benefactor of the
Society, H. T. Stainton, who had, significantly, also previously refused the presidency.
Interestingly, Stainton, doubtless as a mark of his respect for Dunning, named the moth
Liihocolletis Dunningiella [sic] (= Phyllonorycter nicelli) after him (Porritt. 1883-1886).
As President in 1883, Dunning initiated a move to grant a Royal Charter to the Society.
The proposal accepted, he not only performed all of the preparatory and legal work but also
defrayed the entire cost. The Charter, Dunning’s greatest achievement for the Society, was
granted in 1885, unfortunately in the year following his term of office. His donations to the
Society were in excess of £750.
Although his active association with his native county diminished over the years, the
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union had cause to be grateful to him, for he remained a loyal
member and generous contributor for many years. He also appears in the list of
contributors to Porritt ( 1 883- 1 886).
As his professional responsibilities developed Dunning’s active participation in
entomology lessened although he continued to publish the occasional paper, most notably
the excellent works “On the genus Acentropus ” (Dunning, 1872, 1878) and "On the
‘Coffee Borer’ of southern India ( Xylotrechus quadripes Chevrolat)" (Dunning. 1868).
His interesting and generous obituary notice of the life of his friend Frederick Bond
appears in The Entomologist (Dunning, 1889). The esteem in which Joseph William
Dunning was held by his contemporaries is evident from the published obituary notices.
The annotations contained in Dunning's copy of Rennie provide an insight into the
lepidoptera he encountered, giving an indication of the status of some of the species almost
150 years ago, before any major impact of industrialisation or indeed of intensive
agricultural practices.
The annotations relating to Yorkshire localities are listed below, exactly as written by
Dunning. Most of the species he recorded are readily attributable to modern species names:
nevertheless we have included the names used by Dunning in case we have arrived at any
wrong conclusion. Where we have felt the need to make any comment, this is given in
square brackets after Dunning’s annotation.
Dunning's Manuscript Annotations in Rennie (1932)
Pieris brassicae (Linn.) Large White
Pontia brassicae — Taken at Adwick in May 1 846 and at Storthes in August 1 846.
P. rapae (Linn.) Small White
Pontia rapae - Taken at Adwick in May 1846 and at Storthes in August 1846.
P. napi (Linn.) Green-veined White
Pontia napi — Taken at Adwick in May 1846.
Anthocaris cardamines (Linn.) Orange-tip
Mancipium cardamines — Taken at Adwick in May and beginning of June 1846.
Boloria euphrosyne (Linn.) Pearl -bordered Fritillary
Melitaea euphrosyne — One specimen at Adwick in June 1845. [Then considerably more
widespread in the county than presently.)
Argynnis paphia (Linn.) Silver-washed Fritillary
Argynnis paphia - At Storthes Hall in Aug: /All. The most common Argynnid. [This
statement, though not referring to Storthes. now seems remarkable but it is not at
variance with Newman writing c. 1870 or even Porritt in 1883. There are no recent
Yorkshire records.]
Aglais urticae (Linn.) Small Tortoise-shell
Vanessa urticae - At Storthes on ragwort flowers in Sept. 1846.
Inachis io (Linn.) The Peacock
Vanessa io - Storthes, in Sept: 1846.
148
Joseph William Dunning (1833-1897)
Nymphalis antiopa (Linn.)
Vanessa antiopa - Common throughout England in 1846. [A statement reflected by
several Yorkshire records in that year.]
Vanessa atalanta (Linn.) Red Admiral
Ammiralis atalanta - At Storthes in Sept: and Oct. 1846 on ragwort, dahlia and asters.
Attracted to ash trees in great abundance.
Cynthia cardui (Linn.) Painted Lady
Cynthia cardui - One specimen at Storthes, latter end of August 1846.
Pararge aegeria (Linn.) Speckled Wood
Hipparchia aegeria - At Adwick in April 1846.
Lasiommata megera (Linn.) The Wall
Hipparchia megaera - At Adwick in April 1 846.
Melanargia galathea (Linn.) Marbled White
Hipparchia galathea - At Adwick in July 1846. [This record reflects the mid- 19th
century distribution of M. galathea about the Doncaster limestone.]
Maniola jurtina (Linn.) Meadow Brown
Hipparchia janira At Adwick in May 1846. This, next to the Cabbage is the most
common butterfly. [Towards the end of the century M. jurtina was to decline in the
west of the county until its revival around 1920.]
Satyrium pruni (Linn.) Black Hairstreak
Thecla pruni - Taken some years ago in great plenty in Yorkshire. Feeds on blackthorn.
[An interesting reference to Yorkshire. The fraudulent history of the distribution of
the true Black Hairstreak, to which this annotation clearly refers, was by then well
known to lepidopterists. |
Quercusia quercus (Linn.) Purple Hairstreak
Thecla quercus - In every oak wood. The commonest of the genus Quercus. [Porritt in
1883 gives several easterly localities in Yorkshire but Dunning indicates a wider
distribution]
Callophrys ruhi (Linn.) Green Hairstreak
Thecla rubi - Yorkshire Wolds (Wailes).
Lycaena phlaeas (Linn.) Small Copper
Lycaena phlaeas - At Storthes in August, September and beginning of October 1846.
Celastrina argiolus (Linn.) Holly Blue
Polyommatus argiolus - One specimen at Owston near Adwick in May 1 846. Common
at Storthes Hall 47/ Larvae may sometimes be taken on whin.
Cupido minimus (Fuess.) Small Blue
Polyommatus alsus - Met with in various parts of Yorkshire. Feeds on Trifolium. [Now
extinct in the county.]
Polyommatus icarus (Rott.) Common Blue
Polyommatus alexis - At Adwick in May 1846, Storthes in August 1846. Commonest of
the order.
Plebejus argus (Linn.) Silver-studded Blue
Polyommatus argus - Found as far north as York. Feeds on Trifolium. [Always a
restricted distribution in Yorkshire, now extinct.]
Erynnis tages (Linn.) Dingy Skipper
Thymele tages - At Adwick in June 1846 and Storthes 1847. [Fairly well distributed in
Dunning’s time, but local nowadays.]
Laothoe populi (Linn.) Poplar Hawk-moth
Smerinthus populi - One specimen on a poplar tree at Adwick in June 1 845.
Hippotion celerio (Linn.) Silver-striped Hawk-moth
Deilephila celerio - Taken at Huddersfield in 1 846, one spec.
Hepialus lupulinus (Linn.) Common Swift
Hepialus lupulinus - Taken at Adwick end of May & beginning of June 1 846.
H. humuli (Linn.) Ghost Moth
149
Joseph William Dunning (1833-1897)
Hepialus humuli - At Adwick in June 1846.
Hepialus sylvina (Linn.) Orange Swift
Hepialus sylvinus - Male com. at Storthes Hall Aug. /47. Only three fern, specs, taken.
Pheosia tremula (Cl.) Swallow Prominent
Leiocampa dictaea - One specimen at Leeds in August 1846.
Nudaria mundana (Linn.) Muslin Footman
Nudaria munda - Com. at Storthes /47.
Tyria jacohaeae (Linn.) The Cinnabar
Callimorpha jacohaeae - One specimen at Adwick in May 1846.
Noctua comes (Hubn.) Lesser Yellow Underwing
Triphaena orbona - At Storthes in August 1846.
N. pronuba (Linn.) Large Yellow Underwing
Triphaena pronuba - At Adwick in June 1846. Very common in hay fields.
Triphaena innuba - At Adwick in June 1846.
N. fimbriata (Schreb.) Broad-bordered Yellow Underwing
Triphaena fimbria - At sugar in Aug. /47 at Storthes.
Xestia sexstrigata (Haw.) Six-striped Rustic
Lytaea umbrosa - At Storthes Aug. /47.
Cerastis teucographa (D. & S.) White-marked
Lytaea leucographa - Taken at York. [Unlikely to be a personal record and probably
refers to the well-known Bishop Wood locality. |
Agrotis ipsilon (Hufn.) Dark Sword-grass
Agrotis suffusa - At Storthes in Sept. & Oct. 1846.
A. exclamationis (Linn.) Heart & Dart
Agrotis exclamationis - At Adwick. beginning of June 1846.
Graphiphora augur (Fabr.) Double Dart
Graphiphora augur - At Adwick in June 1845.
Diarsia brunnea (D. & S.) Purple Clay
Graphiphora brunnea — At Adwick in Aug. /45.
Eugnorisma depuncta (Linn.) Plain Clay
Graphiphora depuncta - Met with at Doncaster by H. Reid.
Xestia baja (D. & S.) Dotted Clay
Graphiphora baja — At Storthes /47.
Diarsia mendica (Fabr.) Ingrailed Clay
Graphiphora festiva - One specimen at Adwick in June 1846.
D. rubi (View.) Small Square-spot
Graphiphora punicea - At Storthes in Aug. /47.
Agrochola litura (Linn.) Brown-spot Pinion
Orthosia litura - At Storthes in abundance at sugar in Sept. & Oct. 1846.
A. Iota (Cl.) Red-line Quaker
Orthosia lota - One specimen at sugar at Storthes in October 1846.
A. macilenta (Hubn.) Yellow-line Quaker
Orthosia macilenta - At Adwick in Sept. 1845. At Storthes in Oct. 1846. at sugar.
Xestia xanthographa (D. & S.) Square-spot Rustic
Segetia xanthographa - Very com. at Storthes /47.
Caradrina clavipalpis (Scop.) Pale Mottled Willow
Caradrina cubicularis — At Storthes in August 1846.
Cerastis rubicosa (D. & S.) Red Chestnut
Glaea rubicosa - At willows in April /47.
Eupsilia transversa (Hufn.) The Satellite
Glaea satellita - At Adwick in Sept. 1845. At Storthes at sugar in Sept: Oct. & Nov.
1846.
Conistra vaccinii (Linn.) The Chestnut
Glaea vaccinii - At Storthes in Sept: Oct. & Nov. 1846 at sugar.
150
Joseph William Dunning (1833-1897)
C. ligula (Esp.) Dark Chestnut
Glaea subnigra - At Storthes, at sugar in Sept. 1846. [This is a very early date for a
moth which is usually out from mid-October. [
Amphipyra tragopogonis (Cl.) The Mouse
Pyrophila tragopogonis - At Storthes in Aug. 1846. Very com. at Storthes in Aug. 1847.
Xylena exsoleta (Linn.) Sword-grass
Calocampa exoleta - At Storthes in Oct. & early part of Nov. 1846. [A moth that has
declined in Yorkshire during the present century and is now very scarce.]
X. vetusta (Hubn.) Red Sword-grass
Calocampa vetusta - One spec, at sugar at Storthes Nov. 3/46.
Apamea lithoxylaea (D. & S.) Light Arches
Xylophasia lithoxylea - At Adwick, end of June 1846.
A. crenata (Hufn.) Clouded-bordered Brindle
Xylophasia rurea - At Adwick in June 1845.
A. scolopacina (Esp.) Slender Brindle
Xylophasia scolopacina - About a dozen specs., beat from Horse Chestnut at Storthes in
' Aug. /47.
Hyppa rectilinea (Esp.) The Saxon
Xylophasia rectilinea - nr. Sheffield. | Unlikely to be a personal record; this moth has not
been recorded in Yorkshire during the present century.]
Blepharita adusta (Esp.) Dark Brocade
Hadena adusta - Sugar at Storthes (Good Insect).
Hada nana (Hufn.) The Shears
Hadena plebeia - On walls at Storthes /47.
Tliolera decimalis (Poda) Feathered Gothic
Heliophobus popularis - At Storthes, one specimen on grass in Sept. 1846.
Lacanobia suasa (D. & S.) Dog’s Tooth
Mamestra suasa - (one specimen in a Willow Garth at Adwick in June 1846.) ENTRY
CROSSED OUT. Also by Reid nr. Doncaster. (This is a predominantly estuarine
moth but there have been occasional inland records in Yorkshire.]
Mamestra brassicae (Linn.) Cabbage Moth
Mamestra brassicae - At Adwick in June, at Storthes in August 1846.
Apamea sordens (Hufn.) Rustic Shoulder-knot
Hama basilinea - At Adwick in June 1846.
Amphipoea oculea (Linn.) Ear Moth
Apamea nictitans - At Storthes on ragwort flowers in August 1846. Very abundant in
July & Aug. /47. [The four species of Ear moths were regarded as one in Dunning's
time; in the light of present knowledge A. lucens (Frey.), Large Ear is the one most
likely to occur at Huddersfield, although A. oculea (Linn.) cannot be ruled out.]
Oligia strigilis (Linn.) Marbled Minor
Miana strigilis - At Adwick, at sugar, end of June 1846. May also include O. latruncula
(D. & S.) Tawny Marbled Minor and O. versicolor (Borkh.) Rufous Minor which had
not been distinguished at that time.]
Lycophotia porphyrea (D. & S.) True-lover’s Knot
Scotophila porphyea - One spec. nr. Storthes Hall.
Allophyes oxyacanthae (Linn.) Green-brindled Crescent
Miselia oxyacanthae - At Storthes, at sugar, in Sept. & Oct. 1 846.
Dichonia aprilina (Linn.) Merveille du Jour
Miselia aprilina - At Storthes, at sugar, in Oct. 1846.
Dasypolia templi (Thunb.) Brindled Ochre
Miselia templi - Taken a few years back at Huddersfield (Gas Lamps). | Scarce in VC63
now but often common during the last century according to Porritt. ]
Folia bombycina (Hufn.) Pale Shining Brown
Polia advena - At Adwick in June 1846. [Only two records are listed by Porritt; more
151
Joseph William Dunning ( 1833-1897)
widely distributed in Britain during the last century.]
Eurois occulta (Linn.) Great Brocade
Polia occulta - One spec, at sugar at Storthes Sept. 7th /46.
Antitype chi (Linn.) Grey Chi
Polia chi - At Storthes in Aug. 1846. Very com. in Aug. /47.
Acronicta psi (Linn.) Grey Dagger
Acronycta psi - At sugar at Storthes in July & Aug. /47.
Habrosyne pyritoides (Hufn.) Buff Arches
Thyatira derasa - At Adwick, at sugar, end of June 1846.
Thyatira batis (Linn.) Peach Blossom
T. batis - At Storthes in July /47.
Scoliopteryx libatrix (Linn.) The Herald
Calyptra libatrix - One at sugar at Storthes in Oct.
Achlya flavicornis (Linn.) Yellow Horned
Ceropacha flavicornis — Two specs, at sugar at Storthes March 19 & 22 141 .
t Cosmia trapezina (Linn.) The Dun-bar
Cosmia trapezina — At Storthes in Aug. 1846. Beat lrom Ash trees. Very com. in 141.
Agrochola circellaris (Hutn.) The Brick
Xanthia ferruginea - At Storthes, at sugar, in Sept. & Oct. 1846.
Hydraecia micacea (Esp.) Rosy Rustic
Gortyna micacea — At Storthes at sugar in Aug. & Sept.
Nonagria typhae (Thunb.) Bulrush Wainscot
Nonagria typhae - One spec. nr. Storthes Aug. 28/47.
Phlogophora meticulosa (Linn.) Angle Shades
Phlogophora meticulosa - At Storthes at sugar in Sept. & Oct. 1 846.
Periphanes delphinii (Linn.) Pease Blossom
Chariclea delphinii - Has been taken in Yorkshire. [We can find no confirmation ol this
comment; British records last century were all from south-east England, with none
since.]
Abrostola triplasia (Linn.) The Spectacle
Abrostola urticae — Taken at Adwick. Storthes.
Autographa jota (Linn.) Plain Golden 'i
Plusia percontationis - At Adwick in June 1846.
A. gamma (Linn.) Silver Y
Plusia gamma — At Adwick in June. At Storthes in Sept 1 846.
Plusia festucae (Linn.) Gold Spot
P. festucae - taken many years ago on Scabious flowers on cross road to Braithwaite (W
& R. ?Rich).
Photedes minima (Haw.) Small Dotted Butt
Acosmetia arcuosa - At Storthes. Fern, more uncommon than male.
Mormo maura (Linn.) Old Lady
Mormo maura - Common at Storthes in Aug. 141.
Euclidia glvphica (Linn.) Burnet Companion . , ,. ri ,
Euclidia glyphica - In hay fields at Adwick in June 1846. Flies in broad sunshine. [Local
now in southern VC63.]
Callistege mi (Cl.) Mother Shipton
Euclidia mi - In hay fields at Adwick in June 1846. Flies in broad sunshine.
Bupalus piniaria (Linn.) Bordered White , _ .
Bupalus piniarius - A, Adwick in June 1846. Beat from a scotch hr - three spec, mens.
Males com. at Storthes 141.
Agriopis leucophaearia (D. & S.) Spring Usher
Anisopteryx leucophearia - Adwick March 46. Two specimens,
young oaks about noon at Storthes.
Alsophila aescularia (D. & S.) March Moth
In March 141 among
152
Joseph William Dunning (1833-1897)
Anisopteryx aescularia - At Storthes among young oaks in March /47.
Agriopis marginalia (Fabr.) Dotted Border
Hibernia capreolaria - On hawthorn hedges in March /47 at Storthes.
A. aurantaria (Hubn.) Scarce Umber
Hibernia prosapiaria - At Storthes in November 1846. Bred female from chrysalis.
Erannis defoliaria (Cl.) Mottled Umber
Hibernia defoliaria - At Storthes in November 1846. From holly bush.
Apocheima pilosaria (D. & S.) Pale Brindled Beauty
Phigalia Pilosaria - At Storthes in Febr. 1847.
Biston betularia (Linn.) Peppered Moth
Biston betularius - At Adwick in June 1845 - One specimen found dead.
Selenia dentaria (Fabr.) Early Thom
Geometra illunaria - At Adwick in June 1846. Beat from hedges at Storthes May.
Opisthograptis luteolata (Linn.) Brimstone Moth
Rumia crataegata - At Adwick in May & June 1846. Beat from hedges - one of our
commonest moths.
Ourapteryx sambucaria (Linn.) Swallow-tailed Moth
Ourapteryx sambucaria - At Adwick, end of June 1846.
Campaea margaritata (Linn.) Light Emerald
Campaea margaritata - At Adwick in June 1 846. Beat from bushes.
Aids repandata (Linn.) Mottled Beauty
Aids repandaria - At Adwick, in June 1846. Beat from bushes.
Peribatodes rhomboidaria (D. & S.) Willow Beauty
Aids rhomboidaria - Very common & widely distributed.
Aethalura punctulata (D. & S.) Grey Birch
Boarmia punctularia - Common in woods in May.
Semiothisa wauaria (Linn.) The V-moth
Halia wauaria - At Tadcaster in July 1 846. In garden.
Plagodis pulveraria (Linn.) Barred Umber
Nutneria pulveraria - At Adwick in June 1846. One specimen beat from a beech tree. At
Storthes com. [Very local in VC63 now.]
Cabera pusaria (Linn.) Common White Wave
Cabera Pusaria - Very abundant in woods.
C. exanthemata (Scop.) Common Wave
Cabera exanthemata - Very common.
Cyclophora porata (Linn.) False Mocha
Ephyta porata - Very com. in woods. [As there are only two Yorkshire records this
comment presumably refers to southern English localities.]
Plagodis dolabraria (Linn.) Scorched Wing
Eurymene dolabraria - Widely dispersed.
Scotopteryx luridata (Hufn.) July Belle
Phasiane plumbaria - At Adwick, on sunny banks, in June 1846. Widely dispersed.
S. chenopodiata (Linn.) Shaded Broad-bar
Larentia chenopodiata - Very plentiful at Ridge, Adwick & at Storthes.
Colostygia multistrigaria (Haw.) Mottled Grey
Larentia multistrigaria - At palm in April & beginning of May /47.
Perizoma didymata (Linn.) Twin-spot Carpet
Cidaria didymata - Local. Very com. at Storthes.
Xanthorhoe ferrugata (Cl.) Dark-barred Twin-spot Carpet
Cidaria unidentaria - Very common.
X. spadicearia (D. & S.) Red Twin-spot Carpet
Cidaria ferrugaria - Hedges & lanes very abundant. Storthes in May.
Chloroclysta site rata (Hufn.) Red-green Carpet
Cidaria miaria - Woods & lanes. Fir wood at Storthes.
153
Joseph William Dunning ( 1833-1897)
Xanthorhoe montanata (D. & S.) Silver-ground Carpet
Cidaria implicaria - Adwick & Storthes.
\X. fluctuata (Linn.) Garden Carpet
Cidaria fluctuata - Plentiful in gardens. On willows latter end of April & beg. of May
/47. On walls from May to Oct.
Epirrhoe alternata (Mull.) Common Carpet
Harpalyce subtristata — At Adwick in May & June 1846. Beat from hedges. Very
commmon. Storthes May.
tEcliptopera silaceata (D. & S.) Small Phoenix
Harpalyce silaceata - Widely dispersed.
Electroplates corylata (Thunb.) Broken-barred Carpet
Harpalyce corylata — Fir wood Storthes.
Chloroclysta truncata (Hufn.) Common Marbled Carpel
Polyphasia marmorata — At Storthes in Aug. 1846. Beat from oak trees.
Lampropteryx suffumata (D. & S.) Water Carpet
Lampropteryx suffumata — At willows in April /47 at Storthes.
Anticlea badiata (D. & S.) Shoulder Stripe
Lampropteryx badiata - At Storthes at palm in April 141 .
A. derivata (D. & S.) The Streamer
Anticlea derivata - Common in gardens & woods (Adwick). At palm beg. of May 141
Storthes.
Eulithis mellinata (Fabr.) The Spinach
Electro spinichiata — In gardens & very common.
E. tersata (Linn.) The Chevron
Electro tersata - Storthes in fir wd.
Abraxas sylvata (Scop.) Clouded Magpie
Abraxas ulmata - At Hampole Wood nr. Adwick. Found abundantly in Yorks, whence
sometimes called the Yorkshire Magpie. Very com. nr. Doncaster.
Plemyria rubiginata (D. & S.) Blue-bordered Carpet
Xerene rubiginata - Widely dispersed. Storthes.
Hxdriomena impluviata (D. & S.) May Highflyer
Euthalia impluviata - Storthes.
H.furcata (Thunb.) July Highflyer
Phibalapteryx elutata - Com. at Storthes Aug.
Triphosa dubitata (Linn.) The Tissue . , „ , IA . .
Triphosa dubitata - Widely dispersed. Walls of houses. Adwick. Storthes. [A very local
moth now.]
Camptogramma bilineata (Linn.) Yellow Shell .
Camptogramma bilineata - At Adwick in June. Beat from hedges & at Storthes in Aug.
1846. Beat from ash trees.
Thera cognata (Thunb.) Chestnut-coloured Carpet
Thera simulata - Fir plantations. Storthes. [Porritt had never seen this moth.
Huddersfield is the only locality mentioned in his List.]
T. obeliscata (Hubn ) Grey Pine Carpet
Thera variata - Very com. in fir plantations in beg. of June at Storthes.
Epirrita dilutata (D. & S.) November Moth
Oporabia dilutata - At Storthes. on ivy flowers, in Oct. 1 846.
Operophtera brumata (Linn.) Winter Moth
Cheimatobia vulgaris - At Storthes in Novr. 1 846. At sugar.
Chloroclystis rectangUlata (Linn.) Green Pug
Eupithecia rectangulata - Very com. in gardens.
Eupithecia absinthiata (Cl.) Wormwood Pug
Eupithecia absinthiata - Common in gardens at end of June.
Odezia atrata (Linn.) Chimney Sweeper
154
Joseph William Dunning (1833-1897)
Minoa chaerophyllata - Storthes com.
Entephria caesiata (D. & S.) Grey Mountain Carpet
Aplocera caesiata - On old walls. In July nr, Storthes.
Perizoma ajfinitatum (Steph.) The Rivulet
Emmelesia affinitata - Widely dispersed.
ldaea aversata (Linn.) Riband Wave
Acidalia aversata - Very common in woods.
Scopula floslactata (Haw.) Cream Wave
Acidalia floslactata - At Adwick in June 1846. [Local and seldom common now.]
Lomaspilis marginata (Linn.) Clouded Border
Poecilophasia marginata - Very common in woods throughout summer.
Semiothisa liturata (Cl.) Tawny-barred Angle
Macaria liturata- Fir wood at Storthes.
Cilix glaucata (Scop.) Chinese Character
Cilix compressa - Very com.
Hypena proboscidalis (Linn.) The Snout
Hypena proboscidalis - At Adwick In June 1846
Herminia nemoralis (Fabr.) Small Fan-foot
Polypogon nemoralis - Com. at Storthes, end of May & June.
Aglossa pinguinalis (Linn.) Large Tabby
Aglossa pinguinalis - Very com. [A scarce moth now but common in stables last
century.]
Evergestis forficalis (Linn.) Garden Pebble
Botys forficalis - At Hampole Wood in May 1846.
Margaritia sticticalis (Linn.)
Margaritia tetragonalis - 3 specs, at Storthes. [This is presumably the same record as
Huddersfield, August 1847 (P. Inchbald) (Porritt, 1883-1886). There was to be no
further VC63 record until August 1995.]
Pseudoips fagana (Fabr.) Green Silver-lines
Chloephora fagana - Common in woods.
Pterophorus pentadactyla (Linn.) White Plume Moth
Pterophorus pentadactylus - At Adwick, in June 1846.
Platyptilia gonodactyla (D. & S.)
Pterophorus trigonodactylus - Taken in Yorks.
Alucita hexadactyla (Linn.) Twenty-plume Moth
Alucita hexadactyla - Common in houses from March to Oct.
References
Anon. ( 1 898). Doncaster Worthies. Doncaster Review 5: 59.
[Dunning, J. W.] (1858). An Accentuated List of the British Lepidoptera with Hints on the
Derivation of their Names. London.
Dunning, J. W. (1868). On the “Coffee Borer” of southern India: Xylotrechus quadripes
Chevrolat. Trans. Ent. Soc. bond. 5: 105-132.
Dunning, J. W. (1872). On the genus Acentropus. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 7: 121-156.
Dunning, J. W. (1878). On the genus Acentropus. Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 24: 271-280.
Dunning, J. W. (1889). Frederick Bond: In memoriam. Entomologist 22: 264-269.
Goss, H. (1897). Obituary notice. Entomologist 30: 331-332.
Goss, H. (1898). Obituary notice. Naturalist 24: 11-12.
Harrison, J. A. (1957). Private Schools in Doncaster in the Nineteenth Century, Part I The
Elegant County Town 1799-1848. Sheffield.
McLachlan, R. (1897.) Obituary notice. Ent. Mon. Mag. 33: 281-283.
Neave, S. A. (1933.) The History of the Entomological Society of London 1883-1933.
London.
Newman, E. (1870). The Illustrated Natural History of British Butterflies and Moths.
Using Diptera in Assessing Site Quality’
155
London.
Porritt, G. T. (1883-1886). List of Yorkshire Lepidoptera. Trans. Yorks. Nat. Un. Ser. D. 2:
1-190.
Rennie, J. ( 1832). A Conspectus of the Butterflies and Moths found in Britain. London.
Rimington, W. E. (1992). Butterflies of the Doncaster District. Sorby Record Special
Series No. 9, Sheffield.
Stainton, H. T. (1857). A Manual of British Butterflies and Moths. Vol. 1. London.
Sutton S. L. and Beaumont H. E. (1989). Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire. Yorkshire
Naturalists’ Union, Doncaster.
Trimen, R. (1897). Obituary notice. Proc. Ent. Soc. Lond. 5: lxx-lxxi.
USING DIPTERA IN ASSESSING SITE QUALITY,
WITH PARTICULAR REFERENCE TO EMPIDOIDEA -
A REGIONAL PERSPECTIVE
ROY CROSSLEY
I The Cloisters, Wilberfoss, York Y04 5RF
The setting aside and management of areas for the purpose of nature conservation is now
regarded as a legitimate use of land, and in these rapidly changing circumstances it is
essential that planners and land managers should have at their service the best available
information on the conservation value of sites in order to assist them in making decisions.
Historically, sites have been assessed chiefly, but not always, on their botanical quality,
and this will no doubt continue to be the case. However, in recent years, largely as a
consequence of pioneering field surveys undertaken by entomologists, insects are now
increasingly being taken into account in the assessment and management processes.
Recording the distribution of plants and animals on the basis of the Watsonian vice-
counties has a long history, and is still being used, for example, in the “Distribution"
statements for scarce and threatened flies in Falk (1991). With regard to the fi\e \ ice-
counties which make up the historic county of Yorkshire, we are fortunate to be able to
draw upon the records of Diptera. and in particular the Empidoidea. amassed by collectors
over a period of more than eighty years.
Many assessments of site quality begin with the gathering of data which demonstrate the
diversity of the fauna and flora. The object of a Species Quality Index is to introduce into
the data, where possible, some allowance, or weighting, for the scarcity or commonness of
the individual species making up the list.
The Species Quality Index as applied to the Empidoidea is a system based upon an
arithmetical “rarity score" being given to every species, and the principle should be capable
of application to many well-studied families of Diptera. The "rarity score" is determined by
national or regional rarity as currently understood: for example, all Red Data Book species
(in practice those believed to occur in fewer than 15 of the 10km squares of the National
Grid) are awarded a score of 32. whilst common and widespread species are given a score
of 1 The score for all species recorded from a particular site are combined and the total is
then divided by the number of species at the site to produce the Species Quality Index. This
and other indices are described in Procter (1994). Because of the considerable quantity of
Yorkshire records, it is also possible to introduce scores relating solely to the county (Table
1).
Naturalist 122 (1996)
156
Using Diptera in Assessing Site Quality
TABLE 1
Species Quality Index: Scores and Regional Weighting
Diptera: Empidoidea.
Scores per species
Red Data Book (all grades)
RDB
32
Nationally Notable
Regionally scarce (YNU records): species present in:
Nb
16
1
10km square
8
2-5
1 0km squares
4
6-10
1 0km squares
2
1 1 +
1 0km squares
1
(Note: "National” scores override “Regional” scores in the case of RDB and Nb species).
For each site the total species score (the “rarity score”) is divided by the total number of
species (the "diversity”) to give a “Species Quality Index” for the site.
One advantage of a scoring technique is that it enables sites to be ranked in order of
species quality for the group under consideration. Table 2 demonstrates the results of this
technique when applied to a number of woods across Yorkshire. In most cases visits were
spread throughout the field season (usually from May to September), and all collecting was
done by sweep-netting. The results clearly indicate that a large species diversity at a site
does not necessarily indicate a high quality.
In Great Britain this scoring technique was originally pioneered by coleopterists in
studies of water-beetles (Foster et al., 1990). These are continuing, and species quality
indexing is now also being used for Aculeate Hymenoptera (Archer, 1993).
TABLE 2
Species Quality Index - Selected Yorkshire Woods
Diptera - Empidoidea.
Site
No. of
visits
No. of
species
Total
“score”
S.Q.I.
Birk Crag Wood, Harrogate
5
96
131
1.36
Middleton Wood, Ilkley
5
50
69
1.38
Birkham Wood, Knaresborough
8
104
215
2.07
High Spring Wood, Richmond
5
103
288
2.80
Duncombe Park, Helmsley
13
147
555
3.78
Hag Wood, Richmond
5
61
244
4.00
Averages for 16 Yorkshire woods
(including the above sites)
94.7
237
2.50
A “scoring” system is inevitably based upon a changing scenario; the scores for
individual species will change as knowledge of distribution advances; for example, in a
regional context a species once known from only one 10km square should, under this
system, move down a grade when further specimens are found in additional squares.
Numerical scores ought, ideally, to be constantly changed in the light of fresh discoveries,
some of which may reflect a true extension of range. This, however, is clearly impractical
in a manual system, and for the time being I work on the basis of regional scores which 1
last revised in 1992.
The scoring system as outlined here can only be applied with any degree of confidence in
Book Reviews 157
.egions where the fauna is well-recorded and the relative scarcity or abundance of different
, pecies is well known.
This system can be used in support of other data. It is generally accepted that no single
;roup of organisms can be used in isolation to assess the value or quality of a site: a range
>f organisms must be taken into account in making value judgements. However, where
hey can be applied. Species Quality Indices introduce a limited element of objectivity in
espect of the fauna of sites which has hitherto been lacking.
The Superfamily Empidoidea comprises approximately 650 species representing about
0% of the British Diptera fauna. Species exhibit a wide range of life-histories and habitat
ireferences and some are regarded as useful indicator species of ancient woodland. The
tatus of many species is well-known and the Superfamily contains a fairly average
>roportion of rare and uncommon species which has recently been reviewed nationally
Falk and Crossley, in press). This is therefore an ideal group with which to work in site
assessments, and other families of Diptera ought to be equally useful, especially the
1 ipulidae and Syrphidae.
It is recognised that not all Diptera are suitable for evaluating every type of habitat,
i impidoidea, for example, are probably of little value in assessing the quality of dry
grassland. There are also obvious limitations to the scheme as outlined here, not the least
\>eing that it does not take into account collector effort or collector bias. Neither is
j illowance made for species-richness which by itself may be a significant factor in assessing
- ite quality in some cases; nor is the age. vegetation structure or size of the habitats taken
nto account.
However, notwithstanding these shortcomings, this paper is presented at this time in the
1 lope that it will encourage and challenge others to take up the idea and develop it for the
benefit of present urgent conservation needs, and also in the longer term interests of Dipter-
>logy.
References
Archer, M. E. (1993). Recorder’s fourth report on the Aculeate Hymenoptera in Watsonian
Yorkshire and the development of a Quality Scoring Sytem. Naturalist 118: 13-15.
h-alk, S. (1991). A Review of the Scarce and Threatened Flies of Great Britain (Part I ).
Research and Survey in Nature Conservation No. 39. Nature Conservancy Council,
Peterborough.
t :alk, S. J. and Crossley, R (in press). A Review of the Scarce and Threatened Flies of
Great Britain Part 2: Empidoidea. Research and Survey in Nature Conservation No. 39.
Joint Nature Conservation Committee. Peterborough.
I -oster, G. N., Foster, A. P.. Eyre. M. D. and Bilton. D. T. (1990). Classification of water
beetle assemblages in arable fenland and ranking of sites in relation to conservation
value. Freshwater Biology 22: 343-354.
I Yocter, D. (1994). What is the Invertebrate Index? Invertebrate Site Register News 2: 4.
Joint Nature Conservation Committee. Peterborough.
BOOK REVIEWS
Naturalists’ Summers by Ann Tate. Pp. 192. Cassell, London. 1994. (For a signed copy
)f the book, send a cheque for £6.00 to Ann Tate. 15 Shipston Hill, Oadby. Leicester LE2
iPS).
\nn Tate, a widely recognised writer on Countryside matters, and member of many
laturalist organisations, wrote this informative and fascinating book in celebration of the
iftieth anniversary of the Field Studies Council in 1996. Created to educate the public in
ill aspects of rural life, the FSC still attracts many students of all ages and abilities to
158
Book Reviews
courses at its centres scattered throughout Britain. Ann first attended one such course, on
Pond Life, at Flatford Mill in 1952, and has remained hooked on such functions ever since.
Field Studies Council courses are run by specialists in their field and cover many
disciplines concerned with the interpretation of the countryside. This book provides
detailed accounts of 24 such courses which the author attended, at centres from Devon to
the Isle of Skye, and including Yorkshire. As noted in David Bellamy’s introduction, the
result is a book packed with the accumulated wisdom from leaders in various aspects of
Mammalogy, Ornithology, Herpetology, Entomology, Conchology, Bryology and Botany.
Inevitably, students on many such courses can find themselves on the frontiers of
knowledge in the respective fields, and the author has captured something of the
exhilaration of these occasions in her entertaining style. This book is also highly
instructive. The reviewer can vouch for the author’s grasp of complicated concepts and
technical words, as her treatment of a course which he led on the Insects of the Cow-dung
Community has been widely hailed as something of a classic. Indeed, several individuals
were prompted to pursue research in this field after reading her account.
Apart from the main text and introduction, there is a list of organisations concerned with
Countryside and Wildlife, and a bibliography for the subjects discussed. The book is
attractively and profusely illustrated with photographs by the author and pen drawings by
Geoffrey Herickx.
Naturalists’ Summers deserves a place in the library of all who love the countryside.
After reading this book, with its remarkable insight into all manner of curiosities, a country
walk will never be quite the same again.
PS
Charles Darwin: the Man and his Influence by Peter J. Bowler. Pp. xii + 250, including
15 black and white plates. 2nd edition. Cambridge University Press. 1996. £35.00
hardback; £12.95 paperback.
The reissue of this book by Cambridge University Press (first published by Blackwells,
Oxford, in 1990) is an indication of the importance of the work. The author (who is Reader
in the History and Philosophy of Science at the University of Belfast) is at pains to stress
that the book “is not a biography in the conventional sense”. Indeed in his preface he looks
forward to the publication of a “really detailed biography” that makes full use of the
findings of modern scholarship: since he wrote this, at least three such full-length
biographies have appeared. Peter Bowler has, as he himself puts it, "taken a different tack”.
He has written a book that takes account of the detailed work on Charles Darwin now
available, but which “is written at a level that will allow ordinary readers and students to
gain some appreciation of the problems that confront specialist historians”. He aimed,
amongst other things, to demythologise Darwin, dispelling certain errors that have been
perpetuated - for example that it was the Beagle voyage in general, and the visit to the
Galapagos Islands in particular, that were responsible for the conversion of Darwin to an
evolutionary outlook. He also takes the standpoint that a scientific enterprise is a social
phenomenon, and makes a special effort to examine both the social influences on Charles
Robert Darwin (1809-1882), and his influence on society - to put the man into his context.
Despite these emphases, the arrangement of the work is chronological. After a chapter
entitled “The problem of interpretation” in which certain misconceptions that have
appeared in writings about the great Victorian naturalist are identified, there is a chapter on
“Evolution before the Origin of Species”. “The young Darwin" then places the subject in
the context of his family, his time as a medical student in radical Edinburgh (which Peter
Bowler thinks has been much underemphasised in its influence) and later in that of more
conservative Cambridge. The voyage of the Beagle itself is next discussed, before what are
here regarded as “The crucial years”, the period in London from 1837-1842, when he
associated with Britain’s scientific elite. The next two chapters overview the long years of
development of the “species theory" after the move to Down House in Kent, and “Going
Contributors
159
lublic” following the communication from Alfred Russell Wallace (1823-1913) in 1858
hat vouchsafed that he was on a similar path to Darwin, although Bowler emphasises that
Wallace approached it from a different angle. Throughout, stress is placed on the milieu in
■vhich Darwin lived and worked, as well as on the scientific theories themselves. The
emergence of “Darwinism” in the years following the publication of the Origin of Species
'S then considered, along with an excellent discussion of "The opponents of Darwinism
Chapter 10 on “Human origins” similarly places strong emphasis on the receipt of
i Jarwin’s ideas in the intellectual community. The final chapter on “Darwin and the
nodern world” briefly reviews the development of evolutionary ideas in the century since
l Darwin’s death.
Despite the conventional structure of this book, when first published over halt a decade
. igo it cut new ground, not only by placing Darwin so firmly in his social milieu, but
because it illustrated the complexity of his character, and the contradictions and the
'.nachronisms in his life and work. In its relatively brief compass we come to appreciate,
. dmost to like, this man who was part conservative, part radical, sometimes maintaining
^strongly a theistic position, sometimes drifting away from it. The book is easy to read, the
'Style having a pace that carries the reader along splendidly. Adequate notes on sources are
L^iven, yet these do not overwhelm the text. There is a full bibliography and good index. A
'series of clear plates provides portraits of many of the associates of Darwin - those
nfluencing and influenced by the greatest of all naturalists. Darwin scholarship - what
IPeter Bowler calls the “Darwin industry” - has moved on to some extent since this book
t first appeared, but the work still represents an excellent summary.
CONTRIBUTORS
'Archer, M. E. 53-59,118-119,121-135 Medd. T. F. 113-114.115
Armstrong. P. H. 38-39, 136, 158-159 Moodie. J. 87-96
Moodie, P. 87-96
Beaumont, H. E. 1 17, 145-155
Blocked, T. L. 65-67
Boyd. M. J. 103-108
iChicken. E. 115-116
(.Cook. P. J. 69-71
(.Cotton. D. E. 16
(.Crackles, F. E. 112-113
Crawford. T. J. 135
(Crossley, R. 67-69,155-157
Morris, R. K. A. 137-144
Muir. R. 59-64
Niggebrugge. A. R. 11-15
Oxford, G. S. 87-96
Oxford. R. H. 87-96
Richardson. D. H. S. 38
Rimington, W. E. 145-155
Delany. M. J. 71-72
Denton, M. L. 49-52
Drewett. J. 87-96
Grant, D. R. 112-116
Scott. G. W. 11-15
Seaward. M. R. D. 36-38
Skidmore. P. 41-49.157-158
Strachan. C. 73-81
Sweeney. B. 11-15
Hambler. D. J. 17-36
Headley, A. 3-10
Hollingworth. A. I. 119-120
Howes, C. A. 15-16
Hughes, M. 3-10
Vaughan, R. 72
Wardhaugh, A. A. 97-102
Wilkinson. D. M. 109-111
Yalden. D. W. 81-86, 102
Jefferies, D. J. 73-81
Lane, A. 87-96
160
Index
INDEX
Biography
Joseph William Dunning (1833-1897), 145-155.
Book Reviews
10, 15-16, 36-40,71-72, 102, 135-136, 157-159.
Botany
Biology and ecology of the Thistle Broomrape, Orobanche reticulata, 3-10; Botany of
“The Haw” near Skipton: past, present and future, 17-36; Hedgerow dating: a critique, 59-
64; Tree-mallow ( Lavatera arborea) in SE Yorkshire, 69-71; Labrador tea Ledum
groenlandicum in the Peak District, 81-86; Botanical report for 1995: flowering plants and
ferns, 112-116.
Bryology
YNU Bryological Section: annual report 1994-1995, 65-67.
Coleoptera
Entomological reports for 1992-1995, Coleoptera, 49-52.
Diptera
Notes on the Empidoidea of a Yorkshire salt-marsh, 67-69; Using Diptera in assessing site
quality, with particular reference to Empidoidea, 155-157.
Ecology
The haunts of the hairy canary, 4 1 -49.
Hymenotera
Aculeate wasps and bees of Shipley Glen, 53-59; Pemphredonine wasps of Watsonian
Yorkshire, 121-135.
Invertebrates
An invertebrate survey of Hatfield drains, 137-144.
Mammal
Diet of the feral American mink Mustela vison from scats collected in areas where water
voles Arvicola terrestris occur, 73-81; Daubenton’s bat Myotis daubentoni at Kexby
Bridge, N. Yorkshire: seasonal and annual fluctuations in numbers, and factors affecting
emergence times, 87-96; Bats and their roosts in Cleveland and NE Yorkshire IV: sexual
dimorphism in size of the pipistrelle bat, 97-102; Extinct “wild" cattle of Burton Constable
Hall, E. Yorkshire, 103-108.
Ornithology
Avian habituation to recreational disturbance on the North Yorkshire coast, 11-15;
Jackdaw, 72; Effect of crown density on choice of nesting tree in magpies Pica pica, 109-
1 11.
Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
Presidential address: The haunts of the hairy canary, 41-49.
‘The Naturalist’ is available in microform
UNIVERSITY MICROFILMS INTERNATIONAL
300 North Zeeb Road
Dept PR
Ann Arbor, Mi 48106
USA
White Swan House
Godstone
Surrey RH9 8LW
England
Binding
Why not have your copies of The Naturalist bound into volumes?
One year’s issues per volume, or alternatively two years in one
volume at less cost than binding as two separate volumes. We are
also experienced and expert in the re-binding and repairing of all
books.
Spink & Thackray
Broomfield Bindery
Back Broomfield Crescent
LEEDS LS6 3BP Telephone: 0113 2780353
The Irish Naturalists’ Journal
A quarterly journal of Irish natural history
Edited by Dr Robin Govier
Annual subscription £12.50. IR £14.00
Further information from the Editor. INJ
Medical & Biological Centre. Lisburn Road,
Belfast BT9 7BL
Printed in Great Britain by Titus Wilson & Son, Kendal
ISSN 0028-0771
Latest publication of the Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union
THE FRESHWATER CRUSTACEA OF YORKSHIRE
a faunistic & ecological survey
by
GEOFFREY FRYER
The crustacean fauna of Yorkshire reflects the great physiographic diversity of the
region. Adopting an ecological approach, this book considers the Yorkshire fauna in
relation to climate, topography, geology, soils and water chemistry, always keeping in
mind that it is dealing with living organisms whose habits, requirements and
physiological limitations determine exactly where they live.
Matters covered include the ecological background; faunal assemblages and their
regional attributes; an analysis of the factors that determine distribution patterns, many
of which are mapped; wide geographical aspects; and conservation. Large areas, such
as the Pennines, Howgill Fells, North Eastern uplands and the lowland plains are
surveyed. So too are localised regions including Whemside, the Malham area, lowland
heaths, and the largest lakes, as well as habitats such as upland tarns, seepages, cold
springs, small lowland ponds, inland saline waters. Notes are given on every species
recorded, including parasitic forms.
Price £16.00 (plus £2.00 per copy p.&p.) Special offer to member of the Yorkshire
Naturalists’ Union £13.50 (plus £2.00 p.&p.)
Please make cheques payable to Yorkshire Naturalists’ Union.
Available from: Professor M. R. D. Seaward, Department of Environmental
Science, University of Bradford, Bradford BD7 1DP.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE
A Fungus Flora of Yorkshire. 1985. 296 pp. Hardback. £10.00 incl. p&p.
Butterflies and Moths of Yorkshire. 1 989. 380 pp. Paperback. £ 1 7.50
incl. p&p. Unbound. £12.15 incl. p&p.
Mammals of Yorkshire. 1985. 256 pp. £7.50 incl. p&p.
Protection of Birds Committee Centenary Year, 1891-1991. 73 pp. £6.00
incl. p&p.
Moths and Butterflies of Spurn ,1991. 124 pp. £6 incl. p&p.
Cheques should be made payable to Y.N.U.
From: Mrs J. Payne, 1 5 Broad Lane, Cawood, Selby, North Yorkshire, Y08 0SQ.
Telephone: 0757 268242
iplil
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11